Bizhub PRO 1050-P-e-eP - SM

SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
1050/1050P/
1050e/1050eP
2006.11
Ver. 3.0
THEORY OF OPERATION TOTAL CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2
SAFETY INFORMATION ...............................................................................................S-11
IMPORTANT NOTICE ..............................................................................................S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE .....................................................S-12
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-16
Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1
Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P/1050e/1050eP

OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ........................................................................................ 9
* For particulars, see the contents of the main body.
DF-603
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
* For particulars, see the contents of DF-603.
PF-701/PP-701
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
* For particulars, see the contents of PF-701/PP-701.
FD-501
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ...................................................................................... 15
* For particulars, see the contents of FD-501.
LS-501/502
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
* For particulars, see the contents of LS-501/502.
i
FS-503
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION........................................................................................ 7
* For particulars, see the contents of FS-503.
SD-501
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION...................................................................................... 13
* For particulars, see the contents of SD-501.
PB-501
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ................................................................................... 9
* For particulars, see the contents of PB-501.
RC-501
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
* For particulars, see the contents of RC-501.
IC Unit
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
* For particulars, see the contents of IC Unit.
ii
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-
vice work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to
the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while ser-
vicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions " DANGER", " WARNING", and " CAUTION" is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.

General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when using the copier.

General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble
:Direction when using the copier.

General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-
quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electri-
cal aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors.
For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such
modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the
reasoning behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
• Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT
• Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-2
2. POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In
that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or
power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.
Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection AC230V
to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current,
and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough current capacity,
and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
AC208V 240V
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:

- having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropri-
ate for the product's rated voltage and current, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connecting to inade-
quate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result
in fire or electric shock.
• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to terminals of the plug
according to the following order:
• Black or Brown: L (line)
• White or Light Blue: N (neutral)
• Green/Yellow: PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product, and results
S-3
3. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Konica Minolta brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety stan-
dards are met, in order to protect the customer and CE from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electri-
cal equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE
must perform regular safety checks.
1. Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
?V
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.

Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as
the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power kw
supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or
electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact quali-
fied electrician for the installation.
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater
than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer elec-
tric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
S-4
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product,
make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture prop-
erly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord or cord set (with plug and connector on each end) specified by
KMBT.
Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
S-5
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can
flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may
result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
2. Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Place
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that
may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not using product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of time (holidays,
dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful
to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
S-6
Fixing
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to
a injury.
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following
the prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break
and a risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs
from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still
powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.
Work Performed with the product Powered
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation
check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
S-7
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into
the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a

laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the
write unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
S-8
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether
the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Handling of Consumable
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken
not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact
with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-9
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent rem-
nants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
S-10
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.
This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined
within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user
operation.
S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
For metric area:
This product employs a Class

3B Laser Diode that emits an
invisible laser beam. The cover
should not be opened when
the power is turned on.
This area generates high votage. Be

careful not to touch here when the
power is turned on to avoid getting an
electric shock.
1050sa001e
S-12
For inch area:


electric shock.
1050sa050e
S-13

invisible laser beam. The
cover should not be opened
when the power is turned on.
1050sa002e
S-14
CAUTION
The paste tank
unit is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
1050sa005e
CAUTION:
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from. Do not remove caution labels. And also, when the caution label is peeled off or soiled and
cannot be seen clearly, replace it with a new caution label.
S-15
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF

AN ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately
take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further dam-
age.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded
through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in
"Serious Accident Report/Follow-up Procedures."
S-16
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:
<Theory of Operation section>

OUTLINE: System configuration, product specifications, unit configuration, and
paper path
COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Configuration of each unit, explanation of the operating system,
and explanation of the control system
This section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a rough outline of the
object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system,
and the timing of operation of each part.
<Field service section>

OUTLINE: System configuration, and product specifications
MAINTENANCE: Service schedule *, maintenance steps,
list of service tools and directions for use *,
firmware version up method *,
and removal/reinstallation methods of major parts
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Utility mode *, service mode *, security *, mechanical adjustment and
POD corresponding adjustment
TROUBLESHOOTING *: List of jam codes, their causes, operation when a jam occurs and its
release method, and list of error codes, their causes, operation when a
warning is issued and estimated abnormal parts.
APPENDIX *: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing chart, overall
layout drawing
This section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer's premise), a rough out-
line of the service schedule and its details, maintenance steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error
codes and supplementary information.
The details of items with an asterisk "*" are described only in the service manual of the main
body.
C-1
Notation of the service manual
1. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) IC board: Standard printer
(2) KonicaMinolta bizhub PRO 1050/1050P/1050e/1050eP:Main body
(3) PS-502 PostScript3 Option: PS3 Option
(4) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above:
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP
2. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered
trademark of each company.
3. Electrical parts and signals

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description

IN
PS
Sensor PS Door PS1 Sensor detection signal
SIG
102 PS
24V Power to drive the solenoid
Solenoid SD DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the clutch
Clutch CL DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1
Motor M
DRV2
Drive signals of two kinds
D1
D2
C-2
_U
_V
_W
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1
D2
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV A
DRV B Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
DRV B Motor, phases A and B control signals
A
Motor M /A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
Fan FM
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
Ground
PG, P.GND Power ground
C-3
DCD Data carrier detection
SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
Serial commu-
DSR, DSET Data set ready
nication
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
4. Paper feed direction

When the direction in which paper is fed is in parallel with the longer side of paper, the paper feed direction
like this is referred to as the longitudinal feed.
And the paper feed direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal feed is referred to as the transverse
feed.
When specifying the longitudinal feed, "S (abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)" is added to the paper size.
For the transverse feed, no specific notation is employed.
However, when only the longitudinal feed is specified for one and the same paper size with no specification
made for the transverse feed, "S" is not added even when being fed longitudinally.
<Example>
Paper size Feed direction Notation

Transverse feed A4
A4
Longitudinal feed A4S
A3 Longitudinal feed A3
C-4
1050/1050P/
1050e/1050eP
Main body
2006.11
Ver. 3.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the correspond-
ing page.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
Revision due to the addition of a new optional unit (PB)

2006/11 3.0
Revision due to the minor changes for enhancing its reliability
2005/04 2.0 Revision due to the addition of a new option (SD, RC)
2004/10 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 CONTENTS
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P

CONTENTS
1050e/1050eP
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P/1050e/1050eP
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.5 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.6 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
5. OVERALL COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.1 Timing chart when the power is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.2 Control block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
6.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
6.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
6.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6.3.1 Scanner/exposure lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6.3.2 Original size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.3.3 AE/AES control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.3.4 Image processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7. WRITE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.2.2 Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.2.3 Write control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.2.4 Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
8.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
8.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
8.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
8.3.1 Drum claw drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
8.3.2 Cooling around the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
9. CHARGING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
9.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
9.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
9.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9.3.1 Charging control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9.3.2 Wire cleaning control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
9.3.3 Erase lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

10. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
10.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
/1050e/1050eP
10.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
10.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10.3.1 Transfer guide control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10.3.2 Transfer/separation control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10.3.3 Transfer exposure lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10.3.4 Transfer assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
10.3.5 Wire cleaning control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10.4 PCS correspondence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
10.4.1 Transfer assist sheet by paper sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
11. DEVELOPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
11.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
11.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
11.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
11.3.1 Flow of developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
11.3.2 Developing bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
11.3.3 Developing suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
12. TONER SUPPLY SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
12.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
12.3.1 Toner conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
12.3.2 Toner supply control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
12.3.3 Toner remaining detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
13. CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
13.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
13.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
13.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
13.3.1 Cleaning operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
13.3.2 Toner collection mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
13.3.3 Toner conveyance operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
14. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
14.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
14.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
14.2.1 Tray lift drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
14.2.2 Paper feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
14.2.3 Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
14.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
14.3.1 Up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
14.3.2 Size detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
14.3.3 Pick-up mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
14.3.4 Separation mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
14.3.5 Air assist mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
14.3.6 Paper empty detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
14.3.7 Remaining paper detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
14.3.8 Tray lock control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
ii

14.3.9 Dehumidification heater control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
14.4 PCS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
14.4.1 Corresponding to additional prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1050e/1050eP
15. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
15.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
15.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
15.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
15.3.1 Pre-registration control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
15.3.2 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
15.3.3 Exit conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
15.3.4 Paper dust removing mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
16. REGISTRATION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
16.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
16.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
16.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
16.3.1 Multi feed detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
16.3.2 Loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
16.3.3 Paper mis-centering adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
16.3.4 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
17. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
17.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
17.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
17.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
18. ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
18.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
18.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
18.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
19. FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
19.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
19.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
19.2.1 Web drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
19.2.2 Fusing drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
19.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
19.3.1 Fusing roller drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
19.3.2 Web drive control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
19.3.3 Separation claw shaking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
19.3.4 Fusing temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
19.3.5 Thick paper conveyance control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
19.3.6 Protection against an error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
20. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
20.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
20.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
20.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
21. INTERFACE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
21.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
22.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
iii
22.2 Operation flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

22.2.1 Image stabilization control flow when the power switch (SW2) is ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
22.2.2 Image stabilization control flow while in the print and during idling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
/1050e/1050eP
23. IMAGE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

23.1 Image processing in the scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
23.1.1 Shading correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
23.1.2 AE control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
23.1.3 Area discrimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
23.1.4 Brightness/density conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
23.1.5 Filter/magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
23.1.6 Scanner gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
23.1.7 Halftone processing (error diffusion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
23.1.8 Tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
23.1.9 Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
23.1.10 Storage of image data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
23.2 Image processing in the write section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
24. OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
24.1 Other fan controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
24.1.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
24.1.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
24.2 HDD control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
24.2.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
24.2.2 Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
24.3 Counter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
24.3.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
24.3.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
24.4 Parts that operate when the power switch is turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
24.4.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch is turned ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
iv
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
OUTLINE

1050e/1050eP
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. System configuration
[4] [3]
[14]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[9]
[13]
[10]
[6]
[12]
[7]
[11]
1050to1001ea
2 1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
[1] Main body [9] Expanded memory: 256 MB (EM-701) for

[2] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-701) the image controller
[3] Double sided original auto feeder (DF-603) *1 [10] Side cover *2
/1050e/1050eP
[4] Flat stapling finisher (FS-503) [11] Hand cart (LC-501)

[5] Punch and multi folding finisher (FD-501) [12] Simplified perfect binding machine (PB-501)
[6] Large capacity stacker (LS-501) [13] Saddle stitching trimmer finisher (SD-501)
[7] Large capacity stacker (LS-502) [14] Overlay printing kit (PP-701)
[8] Toner recycle cut kit (RC-501)
*1 In the case of the 1050P, no scanner/DF function is provided.

*2 Attach the side cover when PF-701 is not connected. The side cover is available as the service parts.
B. Option coupling formation
NOTE
• The option can be connected. However, be sure to take note of the AC connection mode.
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option AC power to be connected to
1 Main body LS-502 —
2 Main body FD-501 FS-503 External (FD-501)
3 Main body SD-501 External (SD-501)
4 Main body FD-501 SD-501 External (FD-501/SD-501)
5 Main body FD-501 PB-501 External (FD-501/PB-501)
6 Main body FD-501 SD-501 FS-503 External (FD-501/SD-501)
7 Main body FD-501 SD-501 PB-501 External (FD-501/SD-501/PB-501)
8 Main body FS-503 —
9 Main body LS-501 LS-501 FS-503 External (1st tandem LS-501)
External (2nd tandem LS-501)
10 Main body LS-501 LS-502 External (LS-501)

11 Main body LS-501 FS-503 External (LS-501)
12 Main body LS-501 PB-501 External (LS-501/PB-501)
13 Main body PB-501 External (PB-501)
14 Main body SD-501 PB-501 External (SD-501/PB-501)
15 Main body SD-501 FS-503 External (SD-501)
16 Main body LS-501 SD-501 External (LS-501/SD-501)
17 Main body FD-501 LS-502 External (FD-501)
18 Main body FD-501 LS-501 FS-503 External (FD-501/LS-501)
NOTE
• Any coupling formation other than the above is unavailable.
• PF-701 can be either connected or disconnected.
2 2
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Type
1050e/1050eP
Type: Console type (floor-mounted type)
Copying method: Indirect electrostatic method
Original stand: Fixed
Original alignment: Left rear standard
Photosensitive material: OPC
Sensitizing method: Laser writing
Paper feed trays: Two trays (1,500 sheets x 2, 20lb, 80 gsm)
PF-701 (2,000 x 3, 80 gsm) *1
*1 The PF-701 is optional.
2.2 Functions
Original: Sheet, book, solid object
Maximum original size: A3, or 11 x 17
Copy size:
Tray /1, /2: Inch: 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11R, 51/2 x 81/2, A3, B4,
A4, B5, B5S, 8 x 13, 81/4 x 131/4, 81/4 x 13, 81/2 x 13, wide paper
(up to 324 mm x 460 mm), standard index paper
Metric:A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x
11, 8 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4 , 81/4 x 13, 81/2 x 13, wide paper (up to 324
mm x 460 mm), standard index paper
ADU: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 51/2
x 81/2, 81/2 x 11R, 8 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 81/4 x 13, 81/2 x 13, wide paper (up to
324 mm x 460 mm)
Magnification:
Fixed magnification: Inch: x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.545, x 1.294, x 1.214, x 0.785, x 0.772,
x 0.647, x 0.500
Metric:x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154, x 0.866, x 0.816,
x 0.707, x 0.500
Special magnification setting: 3 types
Zoom magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)
Vertical magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)
Horizontal magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)
Warm-up time Hard roller: Less than 6 min. (under 20°C, at rated voltage)
Soft roller: Less than 8 min. (under 20°C, at rated voltage)
First copy out time Hard roller: Less than 3.0 sec.
Soft roller: Less than 9.0 sec.
Continuous copy speed: 105 copies/min. (for A4/81/4 x 11)
Continuous copy count: Up to 9,999 sheets
Copy density selection: AE/AES, manual (9 steps), user density (2 steps)
Resolution:
Scan: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Write: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Memory: 256 MB (DRAM) + 10 GB (HDD1)
Interface section: RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C): Main body right side
2 3
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
Serial port (USB Type B), Parallel port: Mounted on the Image process-
ing board (IPB)
No. of originals to be stored: More than 10,000 sheets
/1050e/1050eP
Under the following conditions:

Original: FAX#4CHART/A4
Density: Manual 5
Mode: Text/photo
2.3 Type of paper

Plain paper *2: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2, high-quality paper
Special paper *3: OHP film, label paper, *4
coated paper, 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 recycled paper,
40 g/m2 to 60 g/m2, 16lb, high-quality paper (thin), *5
91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2, 25lb to 72lb, high-quality paper (thick) *6
*2 Standard specified paper:
Inch: Hammermill Tidal MP (75 g/m2),
Metric: Konica Minolta Profi (80 g/m2),
*3 Special paper/recommended paper:
Thick paper: Inch: HM-Cover65lb (176 g/m2), XeroxDigitalLasr65lb (176 g/m2),
DomterCdor65lb, COUGARCOVER65lb (176 g/m2)
Metric: RDEREY200 (200 g/m2), RDEREY160 (160 g/m2), NEUCOLOR-
COPY (200 g/m2), XeroxColotech (200 g/m2), Xerox3R91798
(160 g/m2)
Thin paper: Inch: Domter16lb (Doqupach16lb)
Metric: Clair Mail (60 g/m2)
Label paper: Inch: AVERY 5160
Metric: AVERY DSP24
Coated paper: Inch: KROMEKOTE PLUSLASER HIGH GROSS 183 g/m2 (Smart
Paper Company),
Futural Laser 105 g/m2 (Stora Enso Paper Company)
Metric: —
*4 Label paper is loaded and fed one sheet at a time.
*5 Carbonless paper is only for the A4S size in the simplex mode.
Carbonless paper and recycled high-quality paper are only for character image.
Carbonless paper output is only for the main tray output of the FS-503.
*6 245 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 paper is available only for the middle stage tray of the PF-701.
2.4 Maintenance
Maintenance: Once every 750,000 prints
Machine service life: 40,000,000 prints or 7 years (whichever earlier)
4 2

2.5 Machine data
Power source: Inch: AC208V to 240V ± 10%, 60Hz
1050e/1050eP
Metric: AC230V ± 10%, 50Hz
Power consumption: Inch: Less than 3600W (full option)
Metric: Less than 3450W (full option)
Weight: 1050/1050e: Approx. 330 kg (with DF provided) /
1050P/1050eP: Approx. 310 kg
Dimensions:
1050/1050e: W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm
1050P/1050eP: W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm
1050/1050e + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503: W 2902 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm
1050P/1050eP + PF-701 + LS-501 + LS-502: W 3292 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm
(with no operation board included in each case)
2.6 Operating environment

Temperature: 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
Humidity: 10% RH to 80% RH
NOTE
• The information herein May be subject to change for improvement without notice.
2 5
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION
[11] [12] [13] [14] [1]
/1050e/1050eP
[10]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[9]
[8]
[5]
[7] [6] 1050to1002c
[1] Operation panel [8] Toner supply section

[2] Write section [9] Paper exit section
[3] Developing section [10] Reverse/exit section
[4] Registration section [11] Fusing section
[5] ADU [12] Scanner section
[6] Vertical conveyance section [13] Cleaning section
[7] Paper feed section [14] Photo conductor section
6
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 4. PAPER PATH

4. PAPER PATH
[6] [7] [1]
1050e/1050eP
[5] [4] [3] [2] 1050to1003c
[1] Registration conveyance [5] Reversed paper exit

[2] Tray /2 paper feed [6] Straight paper exit
[3] Tray /1 paper feed [7] ADU reverse conveyance
[4] ADU Paper feed
7
4. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
/1050e/1050eP
Blank page
8
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 5. OVERALL COMPOSITION

1050e/1050eP
5. OVERALL COMPOSITION
5.1 Timing chart when the power is on
[1][2][3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Time (sec)
Item
Scanner motor (M27) F
Exposure lamp (L1)
Fusing heater lamps /1, /2 (L2, L3)
Fusing heater lamp /3 (L4)
Fusing motor (M1)
Charger cleaning limit sensor (PS27)
Charger cleaning motor F

(M23)
R
Charger cleaning home sensor (PS26)
Transfer/separation cleaning limit sensor (PS39)
Transfer/separation F
cleaning motor (M20)
R
Transfer/separation cleaning home sensor (PS38)
Drum motor (M2)
Developing motor (M3)
Polygon motor (M21)
Laser (LDB)
Paper lift motor /1 (M25)
Upper limit sensor (PS6)
Paper lift motor /2 (M26)
Upper limit sensor /2 (PS12)
1050to2322c
[1] Power switch (SW2) on [5] Start of consumable stabilization control

[2] Initial communication between the overall [6] Start of image stabilization control (for the
control board (OACB) and the printer con- drum potential correction control, the maxi-
trol board (PRCB) mum density adjustment control and the
[3] Shading correction starts gamma correction control)
[4] The thermistor /1 (TH1) and the thermistor / [7] Warming-up completed
3 (TH3) get to the specified temperature
NOTE
• Various types of operations vary depending on the software DIPSW setting and the environmental
settings in the service mode.
• The power is ON with the DF closed.
• The power is turned ON with the paper lift plate of the tray brought down.
9
5. OVERALL COMPOSITION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
5.2 Control block diagram

/1050e/1050eP
CCD HDD USB Parallel APS

I/F I/F OB DF
RS232C PCI LAN

I/F I/F I/F
IPB
OACB
Write
Section M FM CL SD PS
PRCB
SDB ACDB ADUDB1 ADUDB2 FD/FS/LS PF
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 1050to2005c
[1] Image bus [4] UART bus

[2] Parallel bus [5] Other bus
[3] Clock-synchronized serial bus [6] Individual signal line
10
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 6. SCANNER SECTION

6. SCANNER SECTION
6.1 Composition
1050e/1050eP
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[3] [2] [1] 1050to2006c
Symbol Item Specification/mechanism

[1] Platen mode exposure method Original stand fixed, exposure unit scan
[2] DF mode exposure method Exposure unit fixed, original scan
[3] Exposure unit cooling method (DF mode) Fan
[4] Exposure unit home position detection Photo sensor + stepping motor pulse control
method
[5] Read light reflection method V-mirror unit
[6] Exposure light source Xenon lamp 75,000 lx
[7] Original size detection method Photo sensor + CCD sensor
[8] Image read method Lens + CCD sensor
11
6. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
6.2 Drive
[3] [4] [5]

/1050e/1050eP
[2] [1] 1050to2007c
[1] Scanner wire /Fr [4] Scanner wire /Rr

[2] V-mirror unit [5] Exposure unit
[3] Scanner motor (M27)
12

6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Scanner/exposure lamp control
1050e/1050eP
A. Operations when the power is ON
When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON, the exposure unit conducts the home position search and the
shading correction.
(1) Home position search

The operation of the home position search varies depending on the ON/OFF condition of the scanner home sen-
sor (PS51) [2].
• Home position search when the scanner home sensor (PS51) is OFF.
[2] [1]
1050to2008c
[1] Position at which the platen APS is read [2] Scanner home sensor (PS51)
• Home position search when the scanner home sensor (PS51) is ON.
[2] [1]
1050to2009c
[1] Position at which the platen APS is read [2] Scanner home sensor (PS51)
13
(2) Shading correction

After completion of the home position search [3], the exposure unit conducts shading corrections. There are
three types of shading corrections: white correction 1 [4], white correction 2 [5] and black correction [6]. For the
/1050e/1050eP
shading correction at the time of the power ON, these corrections are carried out in a series of operations.
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10] 1050to2010c
[1] Position at which the APS is read [6] Black correction

[2] Scanner home sensor (PS51) [7] Home position search
[3] Home position search terminated [8] Standby position while in the DF mode
[4] White correction 1 [9] Exposure lamp (L1) ON
[5] White correction 2 [10] Movement of the exposure lamp
14

B. Operations when the start button is turned ON
(1) When the platen is in use
When the start button is turned ON, the exposure unit conducts the shading correction and then the exposure
1050e/1050eP
scan. When the AE/AES is selected, the AE/AES scan [7] is made before the exposure scan is made. For the
shading correction while in the exposure scan, the black correction is not conducted because of the exposure
lamp being left turned on.
• While in the AE/AES copy
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11] 1050to2011c
[1] Position at which the APS is read [7] AE/AES scan

[2] Scanner home sensor (PS51) [8] Position at which the original is read
[3] DF close [9] Home position search
[4] Start button ON [10] Exposure lamp (L1) ON
[6] White correction 2
15
• While in the manual copy
[2] [1]
/1050e/1050eP
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10] 1050to2012c
[1] Position at which the APS is read [6] White correction 2

[2] Scanner home sensor (PS51) [7] Position at which the original is read
[3] DF close [8] Home position search
16

(2) When the DF is in use
When the start button is turned ON [3], the exposure unit conducts the shading correction and then moves to
the position at which the DF is read. The same operations are made when the AE/AES is selected. And, for the
1050e/1050eP
shading correction in the DF mode, the black correction is not made because of the exposure lamp being left
turned on.
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9] 1050to2013c
[1] Position at which the APS is read [6] Position at which the original is read
[2] Scanner home sensor (PS51) [7] Home position search
[5] White correction 2
17
6.3.2 Original size detection control

A. Detection method
The DF mode and the platen mode is different in the detection method of the original size.
/1050e/1050eP
(1) DF mode
• See the DF-603.
(2) Platen mode

• In the direction of the main scan
Read by the CCD sensor.
• In the direction of the sub-scan
Detected by the combination of the ON/OFF of the APS sensor /1 (PS52) and the APS sensor /2 (PS53).
Original size CCD sensor PS52 PS53

(Length of detection: mm) ON/OFF ON/OFF
Smallest 102.0 OFF OFF
B6S 128.0 OFF OFF
B5S 182.0 ON OFF
B5 257.0 OFF OFF
B4 257.0 — ON
A5S 148.0 OFF OFF
A5 210.0 OFF OFF
A4S 210.0 ON OFF
A4 297.0 OFF OFF
A3 297.0 — ON
Wide paper 304.8 — ON
5.5 x 81/4S 139.7 OFF OFF
5.5 x 81/4 215.9 OFF OFF
81/4 x 14 215.9 — ON
81/4 x 11S 215.9 ON OFF
81/4 x 11 279.4 OFF OFF
11 x 17 279.4 — ON
16K 267.0 OFF OFF
8K 267.0 — ON
16KS 195.0 ON OFF
* For "—" in the table above, either of ON and OFF is acceptable as a result of the detection.
18

B. Detection timing
[1] [2]
1050e/1050eP
APS timing sensor (PS317)
RADF open/close sensor (PS301)
Exposure lamp (L1)

1050to2016c
[1] 1st original size detection (with DF closed) [2] 2nd original size detection
6.3.3 AE/AES control

When the AE/AES is selected, the density level of the original is detected automatically to adjust it to an appro-
priate density. The sampling range of the original density when the AE/AES is controlled is different for the platen
mode and the DF mode.
(1) AE/AES sampling range in the platen mode
[1] 1050to2014c
[1] 30 mm
19
(2) AE/AES sampling range in the DF mode

/1050e/1050eP
[2]
[1] 1050to2015c
[1] 4 mm [2] 1 mm
6.3.4 Image processing

There are following items for the image processing. For particulars, see "23. IMAGE PROCESSING".
• Shading correction
• AE/AES processing
• Area discrimination
• Brightness/density conversion
• Filter/magnification
• Density gamma (conversion)
• Halftone processing (error diffusion)
• Tilt adjustment
• Compression
• Storage of image data
20
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 7. WRITE SECTION

7. WRITE SECTION
7.1 Composition
1050e/1050eP
[5] [6] [1]
[4]
[3]
[2] 1050to2017c

[1] Laser beam scan assist Collimator lens + CY1 lens + fθ lens + CY2 lens
[2] Laser scan method Polygon mirror (6 faces) + motor
57874.02 rpm (line speed: 490 mm/s)
[3] Light source 1-chip 2-beam light emitting diode
Output: 15 mW per beam
[4] Positioning method Index sensor + Index mirror
[5] Laser refraction Write mirror
[6] Polygon motor cooling method Fan
21
7. WRITE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Outline
/1050e/1050eP
Analog image data read by the CCD sensor is AD converted by the CCD board (CCDB) before being sent out to
the image processing board (IPB) for data processing. The image data thus processed is converted into laser
beams by the laser drive board (LDB) and written onto the drum. The laser emits 2 beams with a single laser
diode and writes 2 lines in one scan. The position at which the write starts is detected by the index board
(INDEXB).
The 2 image memory control ASIC's equipped on the image processing board (IPB) conduct the compression/
decompression processing of the image data on the main image memory (256 MB) and the sub image memory
(64 MB). This is to improve the multi access and realize the thumb-nail display function. Through the control of
the HDD controller on the IPB, the space of 10 GB out of the large capacity hard disk /1 (HDD1) of 40 GB is
used as an image memory. This space of 10 GB serves as an extension of each of the on-board image memo-
ries to reduce the occurrence of memory overflow.
22
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 7. WRITE SECTION

7.2.2 Laser beam path
1050e/1050eP
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
1050to2018c
[1] Polygon mirror [5] Drum

[2] CY1 lens [6] CY2 lens
[3] Collimator [7] Write mirror
[4] Laser diode [8] fθ lens
7.2.3 Write control

To prevent the mis-centering of written images, an INDEX signal detected by the index board (INDEXB) is used
to decide a reference position for writing in the direction of the drum shaft (main scan direction) and control the
starting position of the laser writing on the drum according to the paper edge detected by the centering sensor
(PS54).
23
7. WRITE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
7.2.4 Image stabilization control

A. MPC (Maximum power control)
The image processing board (IPB) indicates to the laser drive board (LDB) a maximum output value emitted by
/1050e/1050eP
the laser to set the maximum output value. The LDB stores this set value and maintains the amount of the laser
beam stored through the APC (automatic power control) operations.
See "22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL"
(1) Execution timing

• When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. After this, the MPC value is controlled by the dot diameter
adjustment control.
B. APC (Auto power control)

The laser drive board (LDB) monitors the laser beam output for each scanned line. When the image processing
board (IPB) completes the MPC setting, the LDB controls the laser output to the MPC value for each scanned
line.
C. Dot diameter correction control

The patch image density on the drum is detected by the sensor on the toner control sensor board (TCSB), and
the laser drive board (LDB) controls the amount of the laser beam so that its output value becomes the specified
value. See "22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL"
(1) Execution timing while in the print

• When selecting "auto dot diameter adjustment" in the service mode.
(2) Execution timing other than while in the print

• After completion of the job for each 40,000 prints on the PM counter.
24
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION

8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION
8.1 Composition
1050e/1050eP
[6] [7]
[2] [1]
[3]
[5] [4] 1050to2019c

[1] Environment temperature detection Drum temperature sensor (thermistor contact type)
[2] Drum potential detection method Drum potential sensor (surface electrometer)
[3] Gradation detection Gamma sensor (diffused light detection type)
[4] Paper jam prevention method Drum claw
[5] Maximum density detection Maximum density sensor (reflective light detection type)
Drum jam detection Jam sensor (reflective light detection type)
[6] Drum OPC (φ99.7 mm)
[7] Drum periphery cooling method Fan + duct
25
8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
8.2 Drive
A. Drum drive
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[3]
[2] 1050to2020c
[1] Drum [3] Flywheel

[2] Drum motor (M2)
B. Drum claw drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050to2021c
[1] Drum claw [3] Drum motor (M2) drive input gear
[2] Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
26
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION

8.3 Operation
8.3.1 Drum claw drive
1050e/1050eP
A. Purpose
To prevent the occurrence of a drum wrap jam, 3 drum claws are employed to prevent the drum from being
wrapped with the copy paper. The contact and the release of contact of the drum claws onto the drum is made
by turning ON/OFF the drum claw solenoid (SD5).
B. Oscillation operation
To prevent the transfer paper from getting soiled in certain areas and the drum from being damaged, the drum
claws oscillate front to rear on the drum surface about 8 mm.
There is a projection on the rear side of the drum claw unit. A cam provided on the gear presses this projection
to push the drum claw unit to the front side. When the gear rotation releases the cam, the drum claw unit is
returned to its former position by the spring. Repeating this operation oscillates the drum claws.
8.3.2 Cooling around the drum

To improve the durability of the developer, the ducts [2] are provided along the drum [4] shaft to exhaust heat
around the drum.
[4] [3]
[1]
[2]
1050to2022c
[1] Developing suction assembly [3] Suction filter

[2] Duct /Lw [4] Drum
27
8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006

A. Drum potential correction
The drum potential is controlled to keep the image quality at a fixed level at all times, regardless of the operating
/1050e/1050eP
environment and the number of prints.

For the drum potential correction control, a latent patch is formed on the drum surface with the laser PWM set to
maximum. Next the potential difference between the latent patch and the developing bias are measured to
adjust the charging current, the grid voltage and developing bias potential so that this potential difference
becomes a prescribed voltage at all times. See "22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL"

• When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the power switch (SW2) ON.
• When the prescribed conditions (number of prints, and developing theta) are met.
B. Environmental decision control

The temperature of the environment in which the main body is installed is detected by the drum temperature
sensor (TH5), and the environmental humidity is detected by the humidity sensor mounted in the printer control
board (PRCB). Data thus detected are used as information to keep the image quality at a fixed level. See "22.
IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL"

• When the prescribed conditions are met with the SW2 ON.
C. Drum rotation control

When printing is interrupted under a high humidity environment, and under the environments of low humidity and
a normal humidity, the surface sensitivity is different between the drum surface that is in contact with the devel-
oping unit and the cleaning unit and the drum surface that is in touch with nothing. When printing is made in a
condition like this, uneven printing is made in the sub scan direction of the paper. To prevent this, the drum is
rotated at a fixed cycle for a prescribed period of time to obtain a uniform surface sensitivity. See "22. IMAGE
STABILIZATION CONTROL"

• Once every 3 minutes while in idling
• Once every hour while in the low power mode
• When the prescribed conditions are met with the SW2 ON
28
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 9. CHARGING SECTION

9. CHARGING SECTION
9.1 Composition
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[4] [3] [2] 1050to2023c

[1] Charging method Scorotoron (DC minus corona discharge)
Discharge wire: Tungsten φ0.06 mm (gold plated skin pass) x 2
[2] Drum neutralizing method Erase lamp (red LED)
[3] Grid control method Gold-plated stainless mesh plate
[4] Wire cleaning method Cleaning member + motor
9.2 Drive
[3]
[2] [1] 1050to2024c
[1] Charger cleaning member [3] Charger cleaning motor (M23)

[2] Charging wire
29
9. CHARGING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Charging control
/1050e/1050eP
A. Charging wire
The high voltage unit /1 (HV1) uses 24V DC to create a negative charge current to the charging wire to charge
the drum.
Charging output range: -350 µA to - 1050 µA x 2
B. Charging grid
To make the discharge of the charging wire uniform, a minus (-) high voltage is sent from the high voltage unit /1
(HV1) to the charging grid.
Charging grid voltage output range: -400V to -1000V
9.3.2 Wire cleaning control

A. Purpose
The wire is cleaned periodically to prevent the deterioration of the discharging characteristics caused by soil
adhered to the charging wire.
B. Timing
The charging wire is cleaned under the following conditions:
• With the power switch (SW2) ON, when the number of prints counted from the execution of the previous
cleaning is in excess of the specified number and when the fusing temperature is below 50°C.
• While in the print, executed after completion of each job of the prescribed print counts.
• After completion of the automatic replacement of the cleaning blade.
NOTE
• The number of prints at which the cleaning operation is conducted is set by the software DIPSW in
the service mode.
30
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 9. CHARGING SECTION

C. Cleaning operation
The home position of the cleaning member is provided on the rear side of the machine. It operates as shown
below.
1050e/1050eP
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
1050to2025c
[1] Charger cleaning limit sensor (PS27) [4] Cleaning (reverse)

[2] Charger cleaning home sensor (PS26) [5] Home search (forward)
[3] Cleaning (forward) [6] Home search (reverse)
9.3.3 Erase lamp control

A. Purpose
To neutralize the residual potential on the drum surface and to make the potential on the drum surface uniform,
the erase lamp (EL) is turned on before charging.
B. Timing for the erase lamp to be turned on
Drum motor CONT signal
Erase lamp (EL)
[1] 1050to2026c
[1] Drum motor ON
31
10. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
10. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION

10.1 Composition
/1050e/1050eP
[5] [6]
[3] [4]
[2] [1]
1050to2027c

[1] Separation method AC/DC corona discharge
Discharge wire: Oxide film tungsten φ0.06 mm x 2
[2] Separation wire cleaning method Cleaning member + motor
[3] Transfer assist method Transfer assist sheet + motor
[4] Transfer guide plate dirt prevention High voltage impression
method
[5] Transfer method DC positive (+) corona discharge
Discharge wire: Oxide film tungsten φ0.06 mm x 1
[6] Transfer wire cleaning method Cleaning member + motor
32
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 10. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION

10.2 Drive
A. Transfer/separation cleaning drive
1050e/1050eP
[3]
[2] [1]
1050to2028c
[1] Transfer/separation cleaning motor (M20) [3] Transfer cleaning member/separation clean-
[2] Transfer wire/separation wire ing member
B. Transfer assist sheet drive
[2]
[1] 1050to2029c
[1] Transfer assist motor (M19) [2] Transfer assist sheet assembly
33
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Transfer guide control
/1050e/1050eP
A. Purpose
To prevent the transfer guide plate from getting soiled, a minus (-) DC voltage is sent from the high voltage unit /
2 (HV2).
Voltage: -500V
B. Timing
The voltage sent to the transfer guide plate is made in sync with the ON/OFF of the drum motor (M2).
10.3.2 Transfer/separation control

A. Transfer
The high voltage unit /2 (HV2) uses 24V DC to generate a plus (+) DC current to the transfer wire to discharge
electricity.
Transfer DC output range: 60 µA to 800 µA
B. Separation
For separation, an AC current and a minus DC current are used. The high voltage unit /2 (HV2) sends these cur-
rents to the separation wire to discharge electricity.
Separation AC output range: 500 µA to 1400 µA
Separation DC output range: 0 µA to - 300 µA
10.3.3 Transfer exposure lamp control

A. Purpose
The transfer exposure lamp (TSL) is turned on to enhance the transferability and prevent the reverse charge to
the drum.
B. Timing
The transfer exposure lamp (TSL) turns ON a specified period of time after the paper leading edge sensor (PS41)
turns ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after the registration sensor (PS40) turns OFF.
C. Lighting control
The TSL switches the light intensity according to the process speed and the paper weight. However, when
paper weight more than 162 g/m2 is selected, the TSL does not turn on.
34

10.3.4 Transfer assist control
A. Purpose
To enhance the transferability on the entire rear side of paper, the transfer assist sheet presses up the entire rear
1050e/1050eP
side of paper to get it in contact securely with the drum while in the transfer on the rear side. However, the size
of paper to be operated must be larger than 297 mm (A3/A4) in the main scan direction (default for metric area),
and larger than 279 mm (11 inches) (default for inch area).
B. Timing
The paper pressing operation of the transfer assist sheet is controlled so that the pressing operation is only
made when paper is provided to prevent the transfer assist sheet from getting contact with the drum. The ON/
OFF timing of the pressing operation varies according to each of the line speeds.
(1) ON timing
The transfer assist sheet turns ON at a specified distance after the leading edge of paper passes through the
transfer guide. This ON timing is based on the point at which the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) turns ON.
(2) OFF timing

The transfer assist sheet turns OFF short of a specified distance before the trailing edge of paper passes
through the transfer guide. This OFF timing is based on the point at which the paper leading edge sensor (PS41)
(PS41) turns OFF.
(3) Others
• When paper is found mis-centered more than 5 mm by the centering sensor (PS54), no pressure operation is
made (to prevent the drum from being damaged).
• The pressing operation is made only when the copy is being made on the second side of the paper. However,
the weight of paper is in excess of 91 g/m2, the pressing operation is not made even while in the copy on the
second side of the paper.
• The paper width to which the transfer assist sheet is applicable is limited. When printing paper the width of
which is shorter than a set width, the pressing operation is not made because of the drum getting damaged.
• The pressing operation of the transfer assist sheet can be disabled by the software DIPSW. (DIPSW 6-2)
• For paper sizes other than default, see "6.5 PCS corresponding parts" in Field Service.
35
10.3.5 Wire cleaning control

A. Purpose
To prevent the deterioration of the discharge characteristics caused by toner adhering to the transfer wire and
/1050e/1050eP
the separation wire, the wire is cleaned periodically.
B. Timing
• The cleaning is made when the number of prints counted from the execution of the previous cleaning is in
excess of the specified number with the power switch (SW2) ON, and when the fusing temperature is below
50°C.
• While in the print, executed after completion of each job of the prescribed print counts.
NOTE
• The number of prints at which the cleaning operation is conducted is set by the software DIPSW in
the service mode.
C. Cleaning operation
The home position of the cleaning member is provided on the front of the machine. It operates as shown below.
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
1050to2324c
[1] Transfer/separation limit sensor (PS39) [4] Cleaning (returning)

[2] Transfer/separation home sensor (PS38) [5] Home search (going)
[3] Cleaning (going) [6] Home search (returning)
36

10.4 PCS correspondence
10.4.1 Transfer assist sheet by paper sizes
1050e/1050eP
A. Purpose
For the transfer assist sheet, the sizes of paper that can be used is limited. It does not function when a paper
size is not appropriate. However, it is possible to use paper other than the standard size by replacing the trans-
fer/separation charger unit in accordance with the user specifications.
B. Usage
Other than the standard size of the transfer assist sheet, the following sizes are available.
However, when changing to any other size than the standard, it is required to add a new relay wiring harness
and a size detection connector.
It is possible to use different transfer assist sheets. On that occasion, in addition to the relay wiring harness men-
tioned above, it is necessary to purchase a transfer assist sheet that is built in to the transfer/separation charger
unit.
Unit Type Wire color of the Remarks

size detection
connector
Transfer/separation Used exclusively for A3, A4 Brown Default size for metric area
charger unit Used exclusively for 11 in. Red Default size for inch area
Used exclusively for 8K, 16K Orange
Used exclusively for B4, B5 Yellow
Used exclusively for 8.5 in. Pink
Used exclusively for A4S, A5 Blue
Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 in. Purple
B5S Gray
Transfer assist sheet Used exclusively for A3, A4 — Default size for metric area
assembly Used exclusively for 11 in. Default size for inch area
Used exclusively for 8K, 16K
Used exclusively for B4, B5
Used exclusively for 8.5 in.
Used exclusively for A4S, A5
Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 in.
Used exclusively for B5S
NOTE
• When different sizes are used, the size detection connector is required for the transfer/separation
charger unit.
• The unit must be changed by the user himself, and it is necessary to give appropriate guidance
and explanation to the intended user.
37
11. DEVELOPING UNIT Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
11. DEVELOPING UNIT

11.1 Composition
/1050e/1050eP
[4] [3] [2] [1]

1050to2400ca

[1] Developer agitation/conveyance Agitator screw (2) + agitator plate (1)
method
[2] Developer agitation/conveyance Agitator plate (with 6 blades)
method
[3] Developing roller spiking restriction Developer regulation blade
method
[4] Developing method 2 components developing method (Developer: toner + carrier)
Developing roller (2 components reverse magnetic brush)
Developing bias impressed: - 300V to - 800V
38 2
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 11. DEVELOPING UNIT

11.2 Drive
[5]
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[6]
[4]
[3] [2]
1050to2401c
[1] Gear for the agitator screw [4] Gear for the developing roller
[2] Belt [5] Developing motor (M3)
[3] Gear for the agitator plate [6] Coupling for the developing drive
39
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Flow of developer
/1050e/1050eP
Developer in the developing unit is supplied to the developing roller [3] by the agitator plates [2] and its level is
kept at a fixed height by the developer regulation blade [5]. Developer that remains on the developing roller is
returned to the agitator screws [1]. There are 2 agitator screws equipped. The agitator plate furthest from the
developing roller is used to stabilize the charging characteristics of toner supplied to the developing unit.
[4] [5]
[3] [2] [1] [2]

1050to2402ca
[1] Agitator screw [4] Drum

[2] Agitator plate [5] Developer regulation blade
[3] Developing roller
40 2

11.3.2 Developing bias
A. Purpose
During developing, a developing bias voltage is sent to the developing sleeve so that toner is ready to adhere to
1050e/1050eP
the drum.
[2]
[1]
1050to2319c
[1] Developing bias pin [2] Developing bias shaft
B. Timing
To prevent unnecessary carriers from adhering to the drum, developing bias turns ON a specified period of time
before charging is ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after charging is OFF.
41
11.3.3 Developing suction

A. Purpose
The developing suction fan (FM5) [1] is provided to suction toner being scattered around the developing unit and
/1050e/1050eP
the drum and recover it to the suction filter [4] in the developing suction assembly [2].
B. Flow of air
[3]
[4]
[2] [1]
1050to2403c
[1] Developing suction fan (FM5) [3] Duct

[2] Developing suction assembly [4] Suction filter
C. Developing suction fan control

While in the warm up and the print, the developing suction fan (FM5) turns ON when the drum motor (M2) turns
ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after the M2 turns OFF.
42

A. Toner density control
The toner density control detects the patch density in images written and developed under fixed conditions and
1050e/1050eP
adjusts either the speed of rotation of the developing roller or the toner supply time depending on the findings
obtained by comparing it to the reference value. For particulars, see "22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL".

• Once every specified number of prints after the power switch (SW2) is turned ON.
B. Maximum density correction control

The maximum density correction control is a control in which the patch, in images written under a fixed condition
is developed while changing the speed of rotation of the developing roller. The resulting developed patch densi-
ties are compared to a reference density and when the developed patches are the same density as the refer-
ence patch, the developer roll speed is memorized. For particular, see "22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL".

• When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the SW2 ON.
C. Gamma correction control

The gamma correction control detects the patch density in images written and developed under a fixed condi-
tion, and adjusts the amount of laser beam PWM while writing depending on the findings obtained by compar-
ing the patches with the reference value. For particular, see "22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL".

• When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with SW2 ON.
43
12. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
12. TONER SUPPLY SECTION

12.1 Composition
/1050e/1050eP
[5] [6] [2]
[3] [1]
[4]
1050to2035c

[1] Toner replenishment method Toner bottle
Toner capacity: 1600 g
Bottle size: φ155 mm x 427 mm
[2] Toner intermediate supply method Intermediate hopper
Toner remaining sensor
[3] Toner conveyance method Twin air conveyance (toner pump motor + air pump motor)
[4] Toner/air separation method Separation by means of toner own weight + air bleed
[5] Toner/air mixing method Mixing in the cup section
Toner remaining sensor (used to detect an error)
[6] Toner supply method Large capacity hopper
Toner capacity: 1700 g
Toner remaining sensor x 2
44
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 12. TONER SUPPLY SECTION

12.2 Drive
A. Toner bottle/large capacity hopper drive
1050e/1050eP
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
1050to2325e
[1] Toner bottle motor (M16) [4] Toner hopper motor (M7)
[2] Gear for the large capacity hopper agitator shaft [5] Gear for the toner bottle rotation shaft
[3] Mixing section agitator shaft gear [6] Toner bottle
45
B. Intermediate hopper/air separation drive

/1050e/1050eP
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2]
1050to2326c
[1] Air separation motor (M10) [4] Gear for the rotary valve
[2] Gear for the intermediate hopper section [5] Gear for the air separation section agitator
agitator shaft shaft
[3] Intermediate hopper motor (M11)
46

12.3 Operation
12.3.1 Toner conveyance control
1050e/1050eP
A. Purpose
The toner supply section of the intermediate and low speed machines is equipped near the developing unit. For
the high speed machine that deals with a large number of prints, a toner supply section of a large capacity is
required and it is not possible to secure a sufficient space near the developing unit. So, it is inevitable to place
the toner supply section in a location away from the developing unit. As a result, because of the distance up to
the toner supply section having to be extended, an toner conveyance mechanism to deal with the long distance
is required.
As a toner conveyance device for the long distance, this machine employs the air conveyance method using the
toner pump and the air pump.
B. Toner conveyance path

1. Toner put in from the bottle [1] is conveyed to the large capacity hopper [2] by the agitator operation.
2. When the toner supply operation starts, toner is guided to the mixing section [3], where it is mixed with air
from the air pump [5].
3. Toner mixed with air is conveyed to the air separation section [6] by the pressure from the toner pump [4].
4. Toner conveyed to the air separation section drops off by its own weight to be separated from the air.
5. Toner separated from the air at the air separation section is conveyed to the intermediate hopper [7] by
means of the agitator operation.
6. When the toner supply operation starts, toner in the intermediate hopper is conveyed to the developing unit
[8] by means of the agitator operation.
7. Finally, air passing through the air separation section is sent to the mixing section by the air pump.
In this manner, a toner conveyance path is formed that circulates between the large capacity hopper and the
developing unit.
[5] [4]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[8]
1050to2038c
[1] Toner bottle [5] Air pump

[2] Large capacity hopper [6] Air separation section
[3] Mixing section [7] Intermediate hopper
[4] Toner pump [8] Developing unit
47
C. Pump control
(1) Configuration
In both the toner pump and the air pump, the diaphragm [2] is reciprocated by the toner pump motor (M28) or
/1050e/1050eP
the air pump motor (M29) to circulate air in the pump room [3]. In this manner, air in the pump room is pressur-
ized to be output.
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5] [4]
1050to2039c
[1] Motor [5] Input air

[2] Diaphragm [6] Pump encoder sensor
[3] Pump room [7] Encoder
[4] Output air
(2) Control
Each pump motor is equipped with the pump encoder sensor to monitor the speed of the motor.
• When the pump motor is turned ON, if the speed of the motor fails to get to 85% of the prescribed speed
within a specified period of time, this is deemed to be an error.
• While in operation, if a low speed rotation below a prescribed value is detected a specified number of times in
succession, this is deemed to be an error.
48

12.3.2 Toner supply control
A. Purpose
When it is determined that toner supply is required as a result of the toner density control, toner is supplied.
1050e/1050eP
The intermediate hopper receives recycled toner from the cleaning section and a new toner from the air separa-
tion section. The intermediate hopper mixes these and supplies them to the developing unit.
B. Timing
Toner is supplied when the trailing edge of paper in printing is detected. The toner supply time varies depending
on the result of the toner density control and the paper size. This is normally controlled between 0 to 0.55 sec.
12.3.3 Toner remaining detection

A. Toner remaining detection
The intermediate hopper section is equipped with the toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31) [1] and the large capac-
ity hopper [4] equipped with the toner remaining sensors /2 (PS32) [2], /3 (PS33) [3] and /4 (PS34) [5]. Depend-
ing on the ON/OFF condition of the PS31, the PS32 and the PS33, the toner level is displayed on the operation
panel.
(1) Sensor position
[6]
[5]
[2] [1]
[4] [3] 1050to2040c
[1] Toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31) [4] Large capacity hopper

[2] Toner remaining sensor /2 (PS32) [5] Toner remaining sensor /4 (PS34)
[3] Toner remaining sensor /3 (PS33) [6] Mixing section
49
(2) Toner remaining display
Display on the
/1050e/1050eP
operation
board
PS31 ON ON ON OFF
PS32 ON OFF OFF OFF
PS33 ON ON OFF OFF
1050to2041c
*1 However, the determination is finally made a specified period of time after the toner supply door is closed.
(3) Error detection

When SC23-14 or SC-23-17 of the error codes that are related to the toner supply occurs, the machine gets
into an error latch condition. Be sure to repair the defective part before setting the software DIPSW3-1 to 0. Set-
ting the DIPSW3-1 to 0 without repairing the defective part may cause toner to overflow in the inside and the
outside of the machine.
B. Detection timing
(1) Timing
The detection timing is as described below:
• When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON.
• When the front doors /Ft and /Rt, and the toner supply door are opened and closed.
• At all times when the printing.
(2) Toner bottle

When the toner bottle is rotated, toner moves to the exit of the bottle [1] along the spiral groove carved on the
surface of the bottle. When the bottle exit turns to the bottom, toner flows into the large capacity hopper [2].
[1]
A
C B
[3]
C B
[2]
A 1050to2042c
[1] Exit [3] Rotated to 90°

[2] Into the large capacity hopper
50
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 13. CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION

13. CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION
13.1 Composition
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[4] [3] [2] 1050to2043c

[1] Drum cleaning method Counter method + cleaning blade (2 pcs., replaced auto-
matically) + weight plate
[2] Toner collection method with a brush Toner guide brush
[3] Toner collection method Screw
[4] Toner recycle method Screw
51
13. CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
13.2 Drive
A. Cleaning/recycle drive
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
1050to2044c
[1] Gear for the toner guide brush [3] Gear for the toner recycle screw
[2] Drum motor (M2) [4] Gear for the toner conveyance screw
B. Cleaning blade drive
[4] [1]
[2]
[3] 1050to2045c
[1] Wire [3] Blade release arm

[2] Pulley for the cleaning blade [4] Blade motor (M22)
52

13.3 Operation
13.3.1 Cleaning operation
1050e/1050eP
A. Assist mechanism
Toner scraped off by the cleaning blade [2] is collected by the toner guide brush [4] and guided to the toner con-
veyance screw [5]. At this time, toner remaining on the toner guide shaft [7] is scraped off by the toner collection
scraper [6].
[1]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[5] [4] [3] 1050to2046c
[1] Cleaning blade /1 [5] Toner conveyance screw

[2] Cleaning blade /2 [6] Toner collection scraper
[3] Drum [7] Toner guide shaft
[4] Toner guide brush
53
13. CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
B. Automatic replacement of the blade

The cleaning section is equipped with 2 cleaning blades. The 2nd cleaning blade pushes up the blade release
arm [3] as the blade motor (M22) [1] rotates. At this time, the wire wound around the cleaning blade shaft is
/1050e/1050eP
taken up to rotate the cleaning blade shaft and change the cleaning blades /1 and /2. Automatically changing
these 2 cleaning blades lengthens the maintenance cycle.
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
1050to2047c
[1] Blade motor (M22) [3] Blade release arm

[2] Blade sensor /1 (PS24) [4] Blade sensor /2 (PS25)
C. Blade pressure release operation

To enhance the increased durability of the drum and the cleaning blade, the cleaning blade conducts the pres-
sure release operation to the drum by the blade motor (M22). The M22 operates in accord with the ON/OFF of
the drum motor (M2). The pressure release and the replacement position of the cleaning blade are controlled by
the blade sensor /1 (PS24) and the blade sensor /2 (PS25).
D. Blade set mode

As an operation conducted after replacing the cleaning blade for the maintenance purpose, there is the blade
set mode in the service mode. Executing the blade set mode prevents the curling-up of the cleaning blade by
cleaning the drum with the cleaning blade after letting toner adhere to the drum.
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid the use of this mode other than when replacing the cleaning blade. Otherwise, the
cleaning blade count of the fixed parts count is reset and the automatic changing of the blades is
not made at the correct timing.
54

13.3.2 Toner collection mechanism
A. Purpose
The toner collection mechanism is provided to reuse toner scraped off by the cleaning blade.
1050e/1050eP
B. Timing
The toner guide brush used to collect toner is driven by the drum motor (M2), and the toner collection operation
is made in accordance with the ON/OFF operation of the M2.
13.3.3 Toner conveyance operation

A. Toner conveyance mechanism
Collected toner collected is conveyed to the recycle section by the toner conveyance screw of the cleaning sec-
tion. The recycle section conveys this toner to the intermediate hopper by the toner recycle screw.
B. Timing
The toner conveyance screw and the toner recycle screw are driven by the drum motor (M2), and this operation
is conducted in accordance with the ON/OFF operation of the M2.

A. Black band creation control
In order to provide lubrication of the cleaning blade while in the low printing ratio, and to prevent the deterioration
of toner while in the increasing driving distance, the laser is turned on at prescribed intervals to create black
band patterns on the drum. For particular, see "22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL".

• 3 times every 5 prints
55
14. PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
14. PAPER FEED SECTION

14.1 Composition
/1050e/1050eP
[5] [6]
[4]
[3] [1]
[2] 1050to2300c

[1] Paper separation method /1 Air assist fan
[2] Paper size detection method Main scan direction detection: Volume resistance
Sub scan direction detection: Photo sensor
[3] Paper separation method /2 Torque limiter + separation roller + electromagnetic clutch
[4] Paper empty detection method Photo sensor
[5] Paper pick-up method Self-weighting roller + solenoid
[6] Paper lift method Wire driven horizontal up/down
56
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 14. PAPER FEED SECTION

14.2 Drive
14.2.1 Tray lift drive
1050e/1050eP
[6]
[6] [7]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[7] [3]
[4]
1050to2301c
[1] Lift release coupling gear [5] Paper lift plate

[2] Paper lift motor /1 (M25), /2 (M26) [6] Lift wires /Fr1, /Rr1
[3] Torque restriction gear (oil damper) [7] Lift wires /Fr2, /Rr2
[4] One-way gear
57
14.2.2 Paper feed drive
[1]
/1050e/1050eP
[2]
[10]
[9]
M4
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7] 1050to2302c
[1] Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6) [6] Torque limiter

[2] Coupling [7] Separation roller
[3] Separation clutch /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7) [8] Pick-up roller
[4] Tray rear section [9] Belt
[5] Tray central section [10] Paper feed roller
58

14.2.3 Pick-up drive
[2]
1050e/1050eP
[1]
1050to2303c
[1] Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD3), /2 (SD4) [2] Pick-up roller
59
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 Up/down control
/1050e/1050eP
A. Up operation
The paper lift motors /1 (M25) and /2 (M26), cause the lift wires to be taken up by the pulley to raise the paper lift
plate.
B. Down operation
When pulling out the tray, the coupling gear [3] that transmits the drive force from the motor shaft [2] of the
paper lift motors /1 (M25) and /2 (M26) to the pulley is disengaged by the release lever [1]. The paper lift plate
goes down slowly by its own weight through the torque restriction gear [4] that is activated only while in the
down operation.
[3] [4]
[2] [1] [1] 1050to2304c
[1] Release lever [3] Coupling gear

[2] Motor shaft of the paper lift motors /1 (M25), [4] Torque restriction gear
/2 (M26)
C. Operation timing
When the tray is set, the paper lift motors /1 (M25) and /2 (M26) turn ON to raise the paper lift plate. When the
upper limit sensors /1 (PS6) and /2 (PS12) turn ON, M25 and M26 stop.
When PS6/PS12 turn OFF from ON during the print operation, M25/M26 turn ON again. When the paper lift
plate is raised until the PS6/PS12 turn ON, M25/M26 turn OFF again.
60

14.3.2 Size detection control
There are 2 types of the paper size detection: detection in the main scan direction and detection in the sub scan
direction.
1050e/1050eP
For size detection in the sub scan direction, the detection is made by a pair of the paper size sensors. Tray /1 is
detected by /Fr1 (PS4) [4] and /Rr1 (PS5) [3], and tray /2 detected by /Fr2 (PS10) [4] and /Rr2 (PS11) [3].
When the paper rear guide [6] is moved, the detection cams /Up [1] and /Lw [2] of a different form are pressed
by the knob [5]. According to the position of the paper rear guide, the paper size sensors /Fr1 [4], Fr/2 [4] and
Rr/1 [3], /Rr2 [3] turn ON/OFF.
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
1050to2305c
[1] Detection cam /Up [4] Paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS4), /Fr2 (PS10)
[2] Detection cam /Lw [5] Knob
[3] Paper size sensors /Rr1 (PS5), /Rr2 (PS11) [6] Paper rear guide
61
Paper size Paper size sensor

/Fr1 (PS4), /Fr2 (PS10) /Rr1 (PS5), /Rr2 (PS11)
/1050e/1050eP
A5, B5, A4, 51/2 x 81/2, 81/2 x 11* OFF OFF

B5R, A4S, 81/2 x 11S* OFF ON
12 x 18, F4* ON ON
B4, A3, 81/2 x 14, 11 x 17 ON OFF
The size in the main scan direction is detected by the paper size VR/1 (VR2) and /2 (VR4) that are interlocked
with the paper guide, and the main body is informed of it a specified period of time after the tray is set. For the
resistance value, a default is set by "Tray Adjustment" in the service mode.
* For the paper sizes shown below, it is necessary to set the paper size on the operation panel.
Make a selection from among A5 and 51/2 x 81/2.
Make a selection from among A4S and 81/2 x 11S.
Make a selection as F4 from among 8 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 81/4 x 13 and 81/2 x 13.
62

14.3.3 Pick-up mechanism
Paper is picked up when the pick-up solenoids /1 (SD3) and /2 (SD4) turn OFF.
When the SD3/SD4 turn OFF, the pick-up roller goes down and pressurizes paper by its own weight. When the
1050e/1050eP
paper feed clutches /1 (CL4) and /2 (CL6) turn ON, the pick-up roller rotates to convey the paper to the paper
feed roller.
[3] [5]
Paper feed sensors /1 (PS7), /2 (PS13)
Paper feed motor (M4)
Paper feed clutches /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6)
Pick-up solenoids /1 (SD3), /2 (SD4)
[1] [2] [4] 1050to2306c
[1] Start button ON [4] Pick-up of the 2nd sheet of paper

[2] Pick-up of the 1st sheet of paper [5] Conveyance of the 2nd sheet of paper
[3] Conveyance of the 1st sheet of paper
63
14.3.4 Separation mechanism

For the transmission of the drive force to the separation roller [4], the drive force of the paper feed motor (M4) is
transmitted by the ON/OFF operation of the separation clutches /1 (CL5) and /2 (CL7) through the torque limiter
/1050e/1050eP
[3].
The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance.
However, when no paper is conveyed, and when only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force gener-
ating between the paper feed roller [1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation roller is
greater than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller rotates in the direction
of the paper conveyance to convey paper to the vertical conveyance section.
When 2 or more sheets of paper are conveyed, the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than
the frictional force of the torque limiter and the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the
lower most paper from being conveyed.
[7] [1]
[6]
[2]
[5] [3]
[4] 1050to2307c
[1] Paper feed roller [5] 2nd sheet of paper

[2] Separation clutches /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7) [6] 1st sheet of paper
[3] Torque limiter [7] Pick-up roller
[4] Separation roller
A. Separation clutch control

When paper is slippery (or, when the power for conveyance is insufficient), paper conveyed from the pick-up
roller may be unable to pass through the separation sections of the paper feed roller and the separation roller.
To alleviate a condition like this, turn OFF the separation clutches /1 (CL5) and /2 (CL7) until paper gets to the
separation section to cut off the drive force to the separation roller, and make it function as a driven roller to the
paper feed roller. After paper gets to the separation section, turn ON the CL5 and CL7 to conduct the normal
operation.
However, this control should be conducted as follows:
Type of paper:Coated paper B: Conducted unconditionally.
Type of paper:Those other than the coated paper B: Conducted automatically judging from the condition
of conveyance at the separation section.
64

14.3.5 Air assist mechanism
The trays /1 and /2 are provided with the paper feed assist fan that assists the paper separation by blowing air
[4] on paper [3] from the paper guides, 1 provided at front and rear. The tray /1 is provided with the paper feed
1050e/1050eP
assist fans /Fr1 (FM20) [2] and /Rr1 (FM21) [1] and tray /2 with paper feed assist fans /Fr2 (FM22) [2] and /Rr2
(FM23) [1].
Each paper feed assist fan is effective mainly for thick paper and highly adhesive paper (coated paper). However,
in the case of plain paper, it may not be fed smoothly.
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
1050to2309c
[1] Paper feed assist fans /Rr1 (FM21), /Rr2 (FM23) [3] Paper
[2] Paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Fr2 (FM22) [4] Blow-out of air
A. Operation timing
The operation of the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Rr1 (FM21), /Fr2 (FM22) and /Rr2 (FM23) can be
selected from among the following three modes: Always ON, Always OFF and Auto.
In the Auto mode, the paper assist fan is normally OFF. However, when the conveyance time from the start of
the paper feed to the paper feed sensors /1 (PS7) and /2 (PS13) is in excess of the specified time period, or
when a no-feed jam condition occurs, the paper feed assist fan of the corresponding tray turns ON from then
on. However, when a paper type other than the coated paper B is set and the separation roller functions as a
driven roller to the paper feed roller by the control of the separation clutch, the paper feed assist fan remains
OFF to prevent the multi feed of paper. The operations in the Auto mode can be reset by pulling out the tray
(except for pulling out of the tray while in a jam), or turning OFF the power switch.
65
14.3.6 Paper empty detection control

The paper empty detection in the tray is made by the paper empty sensors /1 (PS8) and /2 (PS14).
/1050e/1050eP
14.3.7 Remaining paper detection control

The remaining paper detection is made by the remaining paper VR/1 (VR1) and /2 (VR3) [1] that are interlocked
through the pulley [2] and the gear with the paper lift plate [3].
The level of the paper remaining is detected in five steps according to the resistance value and sent to the main
body after being AD converted.
At this time, the following are displayed on the operation panel:
1st step (displayed in red): 10% or less
1st step (displayed in white): 25% or less
2nd step (displayed in white): 25 to 50%
3rd step (displayed in white): 50 to 75%
4th step (displayed in white): 75 to 100%
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2] [1] [2] 1050to2310c
[1] Remaining paper VR/1 (VR1), /2 (VR3) [3] Paper lift plate
[2] Lift pulley /Rr [4] Lift wire
66

14.3.8 Tray lock control
Each tray is locked by the tray lock lever.
When the handle release sensors /1 (PS9) and /2 (PS15) of either of the tray /1 and /2 are OFF, the tray lock
1050e/1050eP
solenoids /1 (SD1) and /2 (SD2) of the corresponding tray turn on and the tray lock lever is pulled up to release
the lock, thus allowing you to pull out the tray.
And when PS9 is OFF SD1 is turned ON, PS15 turning OFF will not turn on SD2. This is to prohibit two trays
from being pulled out at the same time.
When a jam occurs that affects the tray and the exit conveyance section, the tray remains locked until the
jammed paper is removed. Doing this prevents the paper from being torn.
14.3.9 Dehumidification heater control

The tray /1 and the tray /2 are provided with the dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1) and /2 (HTR2), 1 each
respectively, below each tray. They are turned on when the dehumidification heater switch (SW3) of the main
body is turned ON.
67
14.4 PCS corresponding parts

14.4.1 Corresponding to additional prints
/1050e/1050eP
As parts corresponding to additional prints, the following are available.

• Cleaning brush
• Paper feed assist plate
A. Cleaning brush
(1) Purpose
When performing overlay printing (see chapter III "6.5 Overlay printing adjustment" in the Field Service) on
coated paper on which offset printing has been made, the conveyance force of the pick-up roller and the paper
feed roller is remarkably reduced by powder that is used to prevent the blocking (back transfer) while in the off-
set printing, thus causing a no feed jam. The cleaning brush is a part used to remove this powder to realize the
improved feedability of paper.
The cleaning brush can be attached to the main body paper feed trays*1 to clean the pick-up roller and the
paper feed roller.
Do not use the cleaning brush for the paper with many paper powders. The cleaning brush may be clogged by
the paper powder and the conveyance power may be reduced.
*1 The cleaning brush is also attachable to the old-type PF.
(2) Composition
The package of a set contains the following:
• [1] Brush main body:1 pc.
• [2] Positioning screw:2 pcs.
• [3] Screw:2 pcs. (M3 x 6)
Only one brush is packaged with this machine. When required additionally, brushes can be purchased as service parts.
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050to2311c
68 2

B. Paper feed assist plate
(1) Purpose
The paper feed assist plate increases the pressure on the pick-up roller and it is used to adjust the pick-up pres-
1050e/1050eP
sure on paper. Adjustments can be made according to the types of paper to allow the increased paper feedabil-
ity.
It is possible to improve a no feed condition that is apt to occur when a highly adhesive paper like coated paper
is fed.
A paper feed assist plate weighs about 10g. One pick-up roller can be attached with 4 plates normally (See "19.
PAPER SETTING" in the Field Service) and 8 plates while in the overlay printing (See "12.5 Overlay printing
adjustment" in the Field Service). Increasing or decreasing the number of plates allows the adjustment of the
pick-up roller according to the type of paper.
(2) Composition
The package of a set contains the following:
• [1] Paper feed assist plate:4 pcs.
• [2] Screw:2 pcs. (M3 x 8)
Only 4 paper feed assist plates are packaged together with the main body. When required additionally, can be
purchased as service parts.
[1]
[2]
1050to2312c
69
15. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
15. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

15.1 Composition
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
[6]
1050to2314c

[1] Paper dust removing method Paper dust guide brush forced drive
[2] Registration correction method Creation of a roller stopper loop
70
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 15. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

15.2 Drive
[17] [1]
1050e/1050eP
[16] [2]
[15] [3]
[4]
[5]
[14]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[13]
[10]
[12] [11]
1050to2315c
[1] Toner guide brush [10] Pre-registration clutch /2 (CL3)

[2] Scraper shaft [11] Pre-registration roller /2
[3] Conveyance roller /1 [12] Coupling (transmission of driving force to tray /2)
[4] Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1) [13] Belt
[5] Pre-registration roller /1 [14] Paper feed motor (M4)
[6] Vertical conveyance clutch (CL2) [15] Coupling (transmission of driving force to tray /1)
[7] Conveyance roller /2 [16] Vertical conveyance motor (M8)
[8] Belt [17] Conveyance exit roller
[9] Conveyance roller /3
71
15. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
15.3 Operation
15.3.1 Pre-registration control
/1050e/1050eP
When the paper feed starts, paper is sent out to the pre-registration roller by the pick-up roller and the paper
feed roller. When the paper strikes the pre-registration roller that is stopped, a loop is formed to adjust paper
skew. When the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL3) turn on, the driving force of the paper feed motor
(M4) is transmitted to the pre-registration rollers /1 and /2 to convey paper.
15.3.2 Conveyance control

Paper fed from the tray /1 is conveyed to the conveyance roller /1 which is also driven by the vertical convey-
ance motor (M8) by the pre-registration roller /1. Paper fed from the tray /2 is conveyed to the conveyance roll-
ers /3 and /2, which are in turn driven by the pre-registration roller /2 and the paper feed motor (M4) through the
vertical conveyance clutch (CL2), and then conveyed finally to the conveyance roller /1.
Since the line speeds of the pre-registration rollers /1 and /2 and the conveyance rollers /3 and /2 that are driven
by the M4 are fixed at a high speed, the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL3), and the CL2, while in the
transfer/conveyance in a low speed, are turned off to cut off the transmission of the driving force.
At this time, the conveyance roller /1 driven by the M8 rotates at a low speed. However, it starts to rotate in a
high speed when the loop sensor (PS16) detects the trailing edge of paper.
15.3.3 Exit conveyance control

For the exit conveyance, the vertical conveyance motor (M8) drives the conveyance exit roller and conveyance
roller /1.
15.3.4 Paper dust removing mechanism

At the exit of the vertical conveyance section, paper dust is removed by means of the paper dust guide brush.
When paper dust adhering to the conveyance exit roller is removed by the paper dust guide brush (raising
brush), it then adheres to the scraper shaft (metal roller) to be removed by the scraper (sheet) that touches the
scraper shaft.
72
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 16. REGISTRATION SECTION

16. REGISTRATION SECTION
16.1 Composition
1050e/1050eP
[1] [4]
[3] [2] [1] 1050to2049c

[1] Multi feed detection method Multi feed sensor
[2] Paper skew adjustment method Loop roller + motor
[3] Registration method Creation of a roller stopper loop
[4] Mis-centering detection method Contact image sensor (200 dpi equivalent)
73
16. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
16.2 Drive
A. Registration roller drive
/1050e/1050eP
[3] [2] [1]
1050to2050c
[1] Registration roller /Up [3] Registration motor (M17)

[2] Registration roller /Lw
B. Loop roller drive
[2] [1]
1050to2051c
[1] Loop motor (M18) [2] Loop roller
74
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 16. REGISTRATION SECTION

16.3 Operation
16.3.1 Multi feed detection control
1050e/1050eP
To detect the multi feed of paper while in the paper conveyance, the multi feed sensor is provided at the exit of
the loop roller. The multi feed sensor is an acoustic sensor made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver. In this
sensor, the sound wave sent from the multi feed detection board /1 (ADUDB1) is received by the multi feed
detection board /2 (ADUDB2). When a single sheet of paper passes through this interval, it is possible to receive
a sound wave, but when plural sheets of paper pass through, it is not possible to receive sound waves. In this
way, a detection is made to check to see if paper is multi fed.
However, the following paper may not be detected accurately and the multi feed detection function is turned
OFF.
• Coated paper A and B weighing 50 to 61 g/m2
• Paper weighing 210 to 300 g/m2
16.3.2 Loop control

When paper conveyed to the loop roller [1] strikes the registration rollers /Up [4] and /Lw [2], a loop [6] is formed
until the loop roller turns OFF. In this way, a paper skew is adjusted.
When paper is heavier than 162 g/m2, it has a stronger repulsive force and there may occur a transfer jitter due
to the increased partial line speed caused by the force by which the loop tends to go back to its original form.
Therefore, it is controlled so that the loop amount becomes smaller than that of the paper of 161 g/m2.
A. Registration path
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[2] [1] 1050to2052c
[1] Loop roller [5] Registration sensor (PS40)

[2] Registration roller /Lw [6] Loop
[3] Paper leading edge sensor (PS41) [7] ADU deceleration sensor (PS42)
[4] Registration roller /Up
75
16. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
B. Registration operation
[1] [2] [3]

/1050e/1050eP
Loop motor (M18)
Registration motor (M17)
ADU deceleration sensor (PS42)
Registration sensor (PS40)
1050to2053c
[1] Start button ON [3] Registration starts

[2] Loop creation
16.3.3 Paper mis-centering adjustment control

To detect the mis-centering of paper after registration, the centering sensor (PS54) is provided at the exit of the
registration roller. The PS54 is a contact image sensor of about 200 dpi and the mis-centering information
detected by the PS54 is processed at the image processing section and adjusted prior to writing so that the
image data corresponds to the position.
The mis-centering amount can be adjusted up to ± 5 mm. When the mis-centering amount is in excess of 5
mm, paper is output with no adjustment made.
16.3.4 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control

To detect the paper leading edge timing after registration, the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) is provided at
the exit of the registration roller. Based on the paper leading edge position detected by the PS41, adjustments
are made prior to writing so that the image data corresponds to the position.
76
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 17. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE

17. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE
17.1 Composition
1050e/1050eP
[2]
[1]
1050to2054c

[1] Paper conveyance method Belt conveyance
[2] Conveyance assist method Duct + fan suction
17.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
1050to2055c
[1] Belt [2] Conveyance motor (M5)
77
17. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
17.3 Operation
/1050e/1050eP
A. Conveyance suction
The duct [2] provided at the center of the conveyance section sucks paper passing through the conveyance
section to convey it. One suction opening [1] is normally provided at the center of the conveyance section. When
trouble occurs with the conveyance due to an insufficient paper suction force, it is possible to increase the suc-
tion force by adding suction openings, 1 each at front and rear, with the duct cover [3] removed.
This adjustment is made when transfer jitter occurs. For particulars of the adjustment procedure, see"12.4
Transfer jitter adjustment" in Field service.
On the contrary, when the suction force is too strong causing especially thin paper to rub against the fixing
access guide plate and resulting in ink smudging, the suction opening [1] can be blocked. For information on
how to do that, see "12.7 Settings for feeding carbonless paper" in Field service.
[2] [3]
[1]
1050to2056c
[1] Permanent suction opening [3] Duct cover

[2] Duct
78 2
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 17. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE

B. Duct path
The duct [1] in the conveyance section [3] is connected to a duct that serves also as the transfer/separation
charger unit at the back of the device. This duct uses the transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) [2] to suction
1050e/1050eP
toner scattering around the transfer/separation charger unit and the conveyance section and discharges the
exhaust outside of the main body.
[1]
[3]
[2]
1050to2320c
[1] Duct [3] Conveyance section

[2] Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4)
C. Fan control
The transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) turns ON while in the copy.
79
18. ADU Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
18. ADU
18.1 Composition
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
2 3
[1] [1] [1] 1050to2058

[1] ADU conveyance method Conveyance rollers + motor
18.2 Drive
[7] [8] [9] [10]
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 1050to2059
[1] ADU exit roller [6] ADU conveyance motor /1 (M15)

[2] ADU conveyance roller /4 [7] ADU reverse roller
[3] ADU conveyance roller /3 [8] ADU reverse motor (M12)
[4] ADU conveyance roller /2 [9] ADU conveyance motor /2 (M16)
[5] ADU conveyance roller /1 [10] Loop motor (M18)
80
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 18. ADU

18.3 Operation
1050e/1050eP
A. Non-stack ADU paper feed mechanism
Paper conveyed from the reverse/exit section is conveyed to the ADU by the reverse/exit roller [4] and the ADU
reverse roller [5]. When the ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) [2] detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF,
the ADU reverse roller rotates in the reverse direction to send paper back in the direction in which it was con-
veyed. At this time, the paper is conveyed to the ADU conveyance roller /1 [1] side, not to the reverse/exit roller
side, according to the form of the metal frame of the conveyance path. In this manner, each sheet of paper is
turned over and reversed and conveyed without being stacked in the ADU. While in this paper conveyance, the
ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45) [6] detects the trailing edge of paper to decide the reverse timing of the ADU
reverse roller.
[4] [5] [6] [7]
[2] [1]
[3]
1050to2060
[1] ADU conveyance roller /1 [5] ADU reverse roller

[2] ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) [6] ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45)
[3] ADU reversed paper [7] ADU paper supplied
[4] Reverse/exit roller
81
19. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
19. FUSING SECTION

19.1 Composition
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
[7] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
1050to2316c

[1] Fusing roller /Up cleaning method Cleaning web (non-woven cloth + silicon oil)
[2] Fusing method Pressurized heat roller method
[3] Fusing roller /Up heating method Halogen lamp x 2 (main/sub)
[4] Fusing roller /Lw heating method External heating by means of the halogen lamp (x 1) of the
fusing heating roller
[5] Fusing heating roller cleaning method Scraper
[6] Neutralizing method Non-contact neutralizing brush
[7] Separation method Fusing claws
82
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 19. FUSING SECTION

19.2 Drive
19.2.1 Web drive
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7] [4]
[5]
[6]
1050to2317c
[1] Web motor (M24) [5] Fusing roller /Up

[2] Web unwinding shaft [6] Paper conveyance direction
[3] Pressure roller [7] Web wind-up direction
[4] Cleaning web [8] Web wind-up shaft
19.2.2 Fusing drive
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4] [3]
1050to2318c
[1] Fusing motor (M1) [4] Fusing roller /Lw

[2] Flywheel [5] Fusing roller /Up
[3] Fusing heating roller
83
19.3 Operation
19.3.1 Fusing roller drive control
/1050e/1050eP
A. Speed changeover control

According to the relationship between the type of paper and the paper weight, the process speed is controlled
at a high speed (490 mm/s), medium speed (425 mm/s) and low speed (290 mm/s).
B. Preparative rotation control

(1) Control when the power is turned ON
When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the power switch (SW2) turned ON and the detection temper-
ature of the thermistor /1 (TH1) of the fusing roller /Up gets to a specified temperature, the fusing motor (M1)
starts a preparative rotation and stops after a specified period of time or when the TH1 detect a specified tem-
perature. The software DIPSW allows you to make a selection between the execution and the non-execution of
this preparative rotation and to change the preparative rotation time.
(2) Print control

When printing on coated paper (62 g/m2 to 91 g/m2) or fine paper (50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2), and the start button is
turned ON, the temperature of the thermistor /1 (TH1) is detected. When this temperature is in excess of a set
temperature, M1 is rotated to cool down the temperature of the fusing roller. When the detected temperature is
cooled down nearly to the set temperature, printing is started. A decision to conduct the preparative rotation
control or not can be made in the utility mode.
C. Speed stabilization
To stabilize the speed, the gear shaft between the M1 and the fusing roller /Up is equipped with a flywheel. The
inertia force of the flywheel stabilizes the speed of the fusing roller to minimize the transfer jitter on thick paper.
D. Periodic rotation
To prevent transfer jitter caused by the deformation of the fusing roller /Lw, a periodic rotation is made at a fixed
intervals while in standby.

• Once every 6 hours after the specified conditions are met
19.3.2 Web drive control

The rotation time of the web motor (M24) is controlled so that the web advance distance per print becomes uni-
form.
84

19.3.3 Separation claw oscillating mechanism
The mechanism is provided to avoid damaging the fusing roller /Up (soft roller) [2] with the separation claw. The
drive shaft [4] of the separation claw unit [3] is engaged with the holder [1] to which the drive force of the web
1050e/1050eP
motor (M24) [5] is transmitted via the gear [6]. This allows the separation claw unit to shake in synchronization
with the motor drive.
NOTE
• There are two types of fusing roller/Up; hard roller and soft roller.
• The soft-type fusing roller/Up must be used in the fusing unit equipped with the separation claw
oscillating mechanism.
• Discrimination between the hard and soft types can be made by the color;
Hard roller: black
Soft roller: red
[1]
[6]
[5] [2]
[4]
[3]
1050to2516c
[1] Holder [4] Drive shaft

[2] Fusing roller /Up (soft roller) [5] Web motor (M24)
[3] Separation claw unit [6] Gear
2 85
19.3.4 Fusing temperature control

The heating of the fusing roller /Up is made by the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) and the heating of the
fusing roller /Lw made by the fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) through the fusing heating roller.
/1050e/1050eP
The surface temperature of the fusing roller /Up is detected at fixed intervals by thermistor /1 (TH1) [1] provided
at the center, and controlled by turning ON/OFF the L2 and the L3 through the AC drive board (ACDB) so that it
becomes a prescribed temperature.
In the same manner, the surface temperature of the fusing heating roller is detected at fixed intervals by ther-
mistor /3 (TH3) [2] provided at the center and the temperature of the fusing heating roller is controlled by turning
ON/OFF L4.
[2] [1]
1050to2323c
[1] Thermistor /1 (TH1) [2] Thermistor /3 (TH3)
A. Warm-up
The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2), /2 (L3) and /3 (L4) turn ON while in the warm-up, and they turn OFF at a pre-
scribed temperature.
B. While in the print

For the fusing roller /Up, the temperature setting varies according to the type of paper and the paper weight.
When the temperature comes to a prescribed temperature, the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) are
turned ON/OFF for control.
For the fusing heating roller, the fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) is turned ON/OFF so that the surface temperature
remains at a fixed value.
C. While in standby
The fusing roller /Up is heated by fusing heater lamp /1 (L2) when the temperature is 1°C lower than a pre-
scribed temperature (this varies depending on the time elapsed after completion of the warm-up). L2 turns OFF
when the temperature is 2°C higher than a prescribed temperature.
The fusing heating roller is heated by the fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) when the temperature is 1°C lower than a set
temperature, and lamp /3 (L4) turns OFF when the temperature is 1°C higher than a set value.
The heater lamp /2 (L3) is for flicker, and does not turn ON.
86

D. Power save
The fusing roller /Up is heated by fusing heater lamp /1 (L2) when the temperature is 1°C lower than a pre-
scribed temperature (fixed) and turns OFF L2 when it is 2°C higher than a prescribed value for control.
1050e/1050eP
The fusing heating roller is heated by fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) when the temperature is 1°C lower than a pre-
scribed temperature (fixed) and turns OFF lamp /3 (L4) when it is 1°C higher than a prescribed temperature for
control.
The heater lamp /2 (L3) is for flicker and does not turn ON.
19.3.5 Thick paper conveyance control

To prevent transfer jitter or a paper jam that is apt to occur when a double sided thick paper is used, the
entrance guide plate can be moved by the thick paper assist solenoid (SD8).
When paper length is less than 280 mm and the weight is more than 92 g/m2, or paper length more than 280
mm and more than 210 g/m2 is selected, the entrance guide plate is brought down.
19.3.6 Protection against an error

When the thermistor / 1 (TH1) detects a prescribed temperature (210°C) 5 times at specified intervals, or the
thermistor /2 (TH2) detects a prescribed temperature (240°C), a message will display on the operation panel,
fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 ((L3) turns OFF and copy operations stops.
Thermostat /1 (TS1) also monitors an abnormal temperature rise. TS1 cuts off the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) at
a temperature of 180 ± 7 °C.
When the thermistor /3 (TH3) detects a prescribed temperature (220°C) 5 times at specified intervals, or the
thermistor /4 (TH4) detects a prescribed temperature (240°C), a message will display on the operation panel,
fusing heater lamps /3 (L4) turns OFF and copy operations stop.
Thermostat /2 (TS2) also monitors an abnormal temperature rise. TS2 cuts off the fusing heater lamps /3 (L4) at
a temperature of 181 ± 7 °C.
When TH1/TH2 does not come to a prescribed temperature (50°C) a specified period of time after the main
power switch (SW1) turns ON, L2/L3/L4 turn OFF and copy operations stop. When a fusing temperature abnor-
mality like this occurs, the system gets into an SC latch condition. So, after identifying the cause of the error and
repairing it, it is necessary to make the release and recovery operations with the software DIPSW 3-1.
RL1
PRCB ACDB
RL
TH4
driver RL1
section
TH3
Control
CBR section
TH2
TS1
L2
AC
driver L3
TH1
section
TS2
L4
1050to2404c
87
20. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
20. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION

20.1 Composition
/1050e/1050eP
[1] [2]
1050to2062c

[1] Paper exit path switchover method Reverse gate + solenoid
[2] Reversed paper exit method Roller switchback
20.2 Drive
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 1050to2063c
[1] Reverse exit motor (M13) [6] Main body paper exit roller
[2] ADU acceleration roller [7] Paper exit roller /2
[3] Paper exit roller /1 [8] Fusing exit roller
[4] ADU acceleration motor (M14) [9] Gear for the fusing roller /Up
[5] Paper exit motor /1 (M9) [10] Reverse/exit roller
88
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 20. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION

20.3 Operation
1050e/1050eP
A. Reverse gate
The reverse gate is turned ON/OFF by the reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) and switches the conveyance path for
paper exited from the fusing section over to either the straight paper exit or the reverse paper exit.
B. Conveyance path
(1) Straight paper exit
While in the straight paper exit, the reverse gate is closed when the reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) turns ON. So,
paper exited from the fusing exit roller [1] is conveyed to the main body paper exit roller [3] passing over the
reverse gate [2].
[4]
[3] [2] [1] 1050to2064
[1] Fusing exit roller [3] Main body paper exit roller
[2] Reverse gate
89
20. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
(2) Reverse paper exit

When in the reverse paper exit and the ADU paper feed, the reverse gate [6] is opened when the reverse/exit
solenoid (SD7) is OFF, and paper is conveyed to the ADU acceleration roller [8].
/1050e/1050eP
The paper that passed through the ADU acceleration roller is conveyed to the reverse/exit roller [10] according
to the shape of the metal frame. The reverse/exit roller, when the reverse sensor /1 (PS48) [9] detects the trailing
edge of paper turns OFF, and then rotates in reverse to get the paper back in the original direction. While in the
ADU paper feed, paper is conveyed to the ADU paper feed section passing through the reverse/exit roller.
Paper sent back by the reverse/exit roller is conveyed to the paper exit roller /1 [3], not to the ADU acceleration
roller along the form of the metal frame. In this way, paper is turned over to be conveyed to the paper exit roller
[5] through the paper exit roller /2 [4]. While paper is being conveyed to this paper exit roller, the reverse sensor /
2 (PS47) [11] detects the trailing edge of paper to determine a reverse timing for the reverse paper exit roller.
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[5] [4] [3] [1]
[2]
1050to2065
[1] Paper entering the reverse section [7] Fusing exit roller
[2] Paper exiting the reverse section [8] ADU acceleration roller
[3] Paper exit roller /1 [9] Reverse sensor /1 (PS48)
[4] Paper exit roller /2 [10] Reverse paper exit roller
[5] Main body paper exit roller [11] Reverse sensor /2 (PS47)
[6] Reverse gate
90
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 21. INTERFACE SECTION

21. INTERFACE SECTION
21.1 Composition
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[5]
[2]
[6] [3]
[4]
[8] [7] 1050to2327c
IC side

[1] Serial port (RS-232C) For Hyper Terminal communication, D-SUB9 pin connector
[2] Compact flash card For Firmware of the IC
[3] Parallel port (IEEE 1284 compliance) For parallel output of the printer
36 pins Centronics connector
[4] RJ45 Ethernet connector For printer, scanner
Engine side

[5] RJ45 Ethernet connector For Web Utilities, PS JobEditor, NetBackupTool and Mail
remote notification system
[6] Serial port (RS-232C) For CS RemoteCare
[7] Parallel port (IEEE 1284 compliance) For ISW of the copier/printer program
36 pins Centronics connector
[8] USB port (USB TypeB) For ISW of the copier/printer program, Ver. 1.1
91
22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

22.1 Outline
/1050e/1050eP
In order to realize the top quality print images at all times, this machine conducts various types of control for
image stabilization. The operation of the image stabilization control varies according to the power switch (SW2)
being turned ON or the print being in operation.
22.2 Operation flow

22.2.1 Image stabilization control flow when the power switch (SW2) is ON
The following shows the flow of the operation of the image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2)
turns ON.
Power ON G. Environmental decision control
A. Drum rotation
B. MPC/APC
C. Drum potential correction control (charging current, grid voltage, and developing bias adjustment)
D. Maximum density control (600 dpi)
F. Gamma correction control (600 dpi)
A. Drum rotation control

(1) Purpose
• To prevent drum charge dissipation such as an image running at a high humidity.
• When left unused at a low or normal humidity, to prevent an uneven density due to the difference in sensitivity
between the cleaning unit area and the developing unit area on the drum.
(2) Method
• When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the power switch (SW2) ON, rotate the drum for 2 minutes
30 seconds, 30 seconds after completion of the charger cleaning operation during warm up. Then conduct
the potential correction control, the maximum density control and the gamma correction control.
• When the fusing temperature is above 50°C with the SW2 ON, and machine has been left unused for a long
period of time, conduct the following operations based on the environmental decision values previously
obtained.
When at a high humidity, 1 minute after the SW2 turns ON, check the machine if it is in the fusing warm-up
condition. When it is not in the Ready condition, rotate the drum for 2 minutes. When the fusing warm-up
condition is completed within 1 minute after the SW2 turns ON, the machine is considered to be in the Ready
condition at that time and no rotation of the drum is made.
• When it is considered that the humidity is low or normal, rotate the drum only to 70°at a fixed cycle according
to the temperature and the period of time for which the machine has been left unused. The drum is rotated at
3 minutes intervals when it has been left idling, and at 1 hour intervals when it is in the low power mode.
92
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

B. MPC (Max. Power Control)/APC (Auto Power Control)
(1) Purpose
• To store the maximum power value emitted by the laser in the laser drive board (LDB) and maintain this light
1050e/1050eP
intensity in the APC operations.
* The LDB automatically monitors the laser drive current for each line and a control operation is made so that
the light intensity becomes the MPC value at all times.

• Executed when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. After this, the MPC value is controlled by the dot diam-
eter adjustment control.
C. Drum potential correction control (charging current, grid voltage, and developing bias adjust-
ment)
(1) Purpose
To maintain the drum surface potential at a fixed condition at all times, without being influenced by the environ-
mental conditions and the number of prints, the drum potential sensor (DPS) is provided for detection.
(2) Method
According to the measurement values of the potential after exposure, the developing bias potential and the
potential before exposure the charge current, and grid voltage are controlled to the optimum values by taking
into consideration the temperature and humidity, the drum counts and developer counts. The difference
between the developing bias potential and the potential before exposure can be changed by the DIPSW 7-2 and
3.

• When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the SW2 on.
• Each time the job of 10,000 prints is completed after the above timing.
• Each time the PM counter counts up to 40,000 prints, and after completion of the job when the developing
theta ratio gets to the reference value (the cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6).
D. Maximum density control

(1) Purpose
To maintain the maximum density of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the
environmental conditions and the number of prints.
(2) Method
• Create several toner patches on the drum surface by changing the speed of rotation of the developing roller.
Create these patches with the laser exposure time per dot (laser PWM) at the maximum value.
• Read this patch by the maximum density sensor and store the speed of rotation of the developing roller when
the sensor output gets to the specified value, and create the image at this number of rotations.

93
E. Simplified maximum density control

(1) Purpose
To maintain the maximum density of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the
/1050e/1050eP
environmental conditions and the number of prints.
(2) Method
Create a toner patch on the drum surface, read the patch density with the maximum density sensor and change
the speed of rotation of the developing roller according to the difference from the reference value.

When more than 30 minutes have elapsed since the preceding job (the execution of the print, the maximum
density adjustment control or the simplified maximum density adjustment control) has been made with the SW2
ON and the fusing temperature is above 50°C with more than 1 minute warming-up completed.
F. Gamma correction control

(1) Purpose
To maintain the gradation of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the environ-
mental conditions and the number of prints.
(2) Method
• Create several toner patches on the drum surface by changing the laser PWM. At this time, create a patch
with the speed of rotation of the developing roller at the number decided by the maximum density control.
• Read this patch with the gamma sensor and create a gamma curve by arithmetic processing.

• After completion of the job when the developing theta ratio gets to the reference value.
G. Environmental decision control

(1) Purpose
To detect the ambient temperature and humidity and feed back the findings to the various types of controls to
maintain the image at a fixed quality.
(2) Method
The temperature sensor and the humidity sensor are provided inside the machine.

With the power switch (SW2) ON, environmental decisions based on the measurement values are made only
when it is considered that the machine has been left unused for more than 8 hours after the SW2 was turned
OFF last time and the fusing temperature is below 50°C.
94
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 22. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

22.2.2 Image stabilization control flow while in the print and during idling
The following shows the flow of the image stabilization controls taken while in the print and during idling.
1050e/1050eP
Start button ON
Start of print
B. Black belt control
b a
End of print
Drum potential adjustment control Drum potential adjustment control
Maximum density adjustment control
Gamma correction control
Standby
a: After completion of the last job for every 40,000 prints

b: After completion of a job exceeding 10,000 prints after the power switch (SW2) turns on
(with the fusing temperature below 50ºC)
95

(1) Method
• Develop a toner patch on the drum once for every 5 prints after the SW1 turns ON, and read the patch den-
/1050e/1050eP
sity with the maximum density sensor.

• When the patch density is lower than the reference value, the operation varies depending on the developing
theta (developing roller line speed/drum line speed).
a.When the developing theta is lower than the reference value: Increase the number of rotations of the devel-
oping roller according to the patch density.
b.When the developing theta is at the reference value: Drive the intermediate hopper motor (M11) only for the
period of time calculated based on the patch density and the paper size, and replenish toner.
B. Black belt creation control

(1) Purpose
To prevent deterioration of toner and stabilize the load on the cleaning blade, coat the entire drum image area
with toner before cleaning the cleaning with blade.
(2) Method
• Fluctuate the black belt creation width between 0.25 mm (much toner in supply) and 20 mm (little toner in
supply).
• The minimum value of the black belt creation width can be changed by the DIPSW 6-3 and 6-4.

The belt is created at the frequency of 3 times per 5 prints.

(1) Purpose
To prevent the change in the diameter of a laser 1 dot due to the write system being soiled or the change in
developing performance, and to obtain a stable image quality for a long period of time.
(2) Method
• Create multiple dot pattern patches of a fixed density on the drum by changing the laser power value. At this
time, create the patches while changing the MPC value with the laser PWM maximum.
• Read this dot pattern patch with the gamma sensor and store as the MPC value the laser power value
obtained when the sensor output gets to the prescribed value. Until the next adjustment, use this selfing as
the MPC value.

After completion of a job of every 40,000 prints on the PM counter, and after completion of a job when the
developing theta comes to the reference value. (The cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6-6.)
96
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 23. IMAGE PROCESSING

23. IMAGE PROCESSING
23.1 Image processing in the scanner section
1050e/1050eP
A. Shading correction
B. AE control
C. Area discrimination
D. Brightness/density conversion
E. Filter/magnification
F. Density gamma (conversion)
G. Half tone processing (error diffusion)
H. Tilt adjustment
I. Compression
J. Storage of image data
97
23. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
23.1.1 Shading correction

This is the measure to obtain an even distribution from light of the CCD. The following corrections are made at
the prescribed timing.
/1050e/1050eP
a. White correction
The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the white reference plate is exposed to the exposure
lamp is stored as the maximum output of the pixel.
b. Black correction
The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the exposure lamp is turned off is stored as the mini-
mum output of the pixel.
Conduct calculation to find out what step in this range falls on the image data read from the original based on
the difference between the black and white data for each pixel stored in the steps a. and b. above, and output
the results of the calculation in the 10 bits accuracy.
Voltage at which the read is made

[1]
+3 White
0V
Black
Width in which the read is made
[2] After shading correction

255 White
0
Width in which the read is made Black
1050to2328c
[1] AD conversion input [2] Shading correction output
98

23.1.2 AE control
Through the AE control, a density suitable for the original density is automatically selected and the copy is made
properly.
1050e/1050eP
A. Sampling area
(1) While in the platen mode
[1] 1050to2014c
[1] 30 mm
(2) While in the DF print
[2]
[1] 1050to2015c
[1] 4 mm [2] 1 mm
B. Execution timing
• While in the platen print: At the pre-scan before the actual scan when the print or the read starts.
• While in the DF print: At the same time as when the original is read.
99
23.1.3 Area discrimination

To make a copy of the original under the correct condition (to make a correct filter processing), check the read
section to see if it is a character or a dot picture, and use the results at the image processing unit at the later
/1050e/1050eP
stage.
23.1.4 Brightness/density conversion

The signal obtained after the shading correction is a signal corresponding to the light reflected from the original,
and this is generally called a brightness signal. In this brightness/density conversion section, the brightness sig-
nal is converted in density as shown in the graph below.
255
Density
0 Brightness 1024 1050to2331c
100

23.1.5 Filter/magnification
A. Filter processing
An appropriate filter processing is made according to the type of an original and the magnification selected.
1050e/1050eP
(1) Character : Make the shading of an original conspicuous.
(2) Dot section : Suppress moire.
(3) Picture : Increase the reproducibility of gradation.
B. Magnification processing
For this machine, the sub scan direction magnification is made by the scan speed of the exposure unit (platen
mode) or by the conveyance speed of the DF (DF mode), and the main scan direction magnification is made by
processing images electrically.
(1) Main scan magnification processing while in enlargement

As shown in the drawing below, if the data of each pixel obtained when the original is read by the CCD are D1 to
D5, the positions of the data read when enlarged are E1 to E5. However, when the write is made only with the
data thus read, the following problems occur.
a. There occurs a clearance between data, and this results in a distored image.
b. The data position does not fall in exactly with the write position.
As shown with dotted lines in the drawing below, when there is no read data that corresponds exactly to the
write position, a density is decided for the write as shown below and appropriate processing is made.
[1] D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
[2] E1 E2 E3 E4 E5
[3] W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8
1050to2332c
[1] Position at which the original is read [3] Write position

[2] Data position while in enlargement
101
(2) Main scan magnification processing while in reduction

As shown in drawing below, if the data of each pixel obtained when the original is read by the CCD are D1 to D5,
the positions of the data read when reduced are R1 to R5. They are overlapping each other and do not corre-
/1050e/1050eP
spond to the write position. Therefore, a density is decided for the write as shown below and an appropriate
processing is made.
[1] D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
[2] R1 R2 R3 R4 R5
[3] W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
1050to2333c
[1] Position at which the original is read [3] Write position

[2] Data position while in enlargement
(3) Density adjustment

With the density shown in the axis of coordinate and the position shown in the axis of abscissas, when E2-E1 in
the drawing of "(1) Vertical magnification while in enlargement" is shown in 16 steps in the direction of the axis of
abscissas, the following drawing is obtained. When the position to the written data W2 is "l," the density S can
be obtained in the following expression.
S = E1 + {(E2 - E1) / 16} x l
255
E2
W2
S
Density
E1
0
0 Position 15 1050to2334c
102

23.1.6 Scanner gamma correction
To the data obtained after the filter/magnification processing, select a density curve corresponding to the density
button selected on the operation panel. An appropriate density curve is provided for each of the character/pic-
1050e/1050eP
ture/character and the picture/thin character modes.
23.1.7 Halftone processing (error diffusion)

To make effective use of the installed memory and obtain an excellent copy image, error diffusion processing is
employed, which is one of the pseudo-intermediate processing methods.
23.1.8 Tilt adjustment

DF original skew auto adjustment
Detect an uneven original skew amount for each DF original by the original skew sensors /Fr (PS312) and /Rr
(PS311) and adjust the skew amount detected by the sensors by rotating the image data while in the image pro-
cessing.
23.1.9 Compression
To store more image data, data is stored temporarily in the image memory after the images has been com-
pressed.
Two types of memories are provided. (Main memory: 256 MB, Sub memory: 64 MB)
A part of the hard disk is used as an extended memory of the above. In this manner, more than 10,000 pages
can be stored in the average word processor documents.
23.1.10 Storage of image data

The image/setting of the originals read by the scanner or the images sent from the IC can be stored as a file in
the hard disk in the main body.
103
23.2 Image processing in the write section

/1050e/1050eP
A. Rotation/elongation
B. SGU
C. 2dotPWM
D. PWM
E. Frequency conversion
A. Rotation/elongation
Rotate the image in the direction of 90 degrees and 180 degrees as necessary.
When outputting images from the memory, expand the compressed data to restore them to their original state.
B. SGU
The SGU is a function to generate various types of test patterns.
C. 2dotPWM
The laser writing is made normally in 1bitED (2-value error diffusion), but in the picture mode, 2bitED (4-value
error diffusion) is employed to increase the gradation. (A change can be made between 1bit and 2bit by the
DIPSW 11-5.)
Since 2bitED reproduces the gradation in 4 values, small diameter laser dots are employed.
However, since the drum surface potential in the small dot section is unstable, a dot is reproduced by the mean
value of 2 adjoining dots to realize a smooth image.
D. PWM
The period of time the laser is turned ON is changed by changing the pulse width.
E. Frequency conversion
Write in the memory once the data after the PWM conversion and read it in accord with the write clock signal of
the printer.
104
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 24. OTHERS

24. OTHERS
24.1 Other fan controls
1050e/1050eP
24.1.1 Composition
[21] [22]
[20] [23]
[25] [19] [24]
[18]
[1]
[17] [2]
[3]
[4]
[16]
[15] [5]
[6]
[7]
[14]
[8]
[13]
[12]
[11] [9]
[10] 1050to2069ca
[1] Cooling fan /3 (FM3) [14] Sensor cooling fan (FM16)

[2] Polygon cooling fan (FM18) [15] ADU cooling fan /3 (FM13)
[3] Suction fan /1 (FM6) [16] Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4)
[4] IC cooling fan (FM24) [17] Paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM9)
[5] Suction fan /2 (FM7) [18] Paper exit cooling fan /2 (FM10)
[6] Developing suction fan (FM5) [19] Paper exit cooling fan /3 (FM28)
[7] Power supply cooling fan /1 (FM25) [20] Scanner cooling fan (FM19)
[8] Power supply cooling fan /2 (FM26) [21] Pump cooling fan (FM11)
[9] Suction fan /3 (FM8) [22] Cooling fan /1 (FM1)
[10] Power supply cooling fan /3 (FM27) [23] Cooling fan /2 (FM2)
[11] ADU cooling fan /2 (FM15) [24] IPB cooling fan (FM12)
[12] ADU cooling fan /1 (FM14) [25] Suction fan /4 (FM29) (1050e/1050eP only)
[13] Registration cooling fan (FM14)
2 105
24. OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
24.1.2 Operation
A. Cooling fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2) and /3 (FM3)
(1) Purpose
/1050e/1050eP
To exhaust around the drum and the fusing unit.
(2) ON timing
• Turns ON (rotates at a low speed) after completion of the first warm-up with the power switch (SW2) turned
ON.
• Turns ON (rotates at a low speed) in concert with the drum motor (M2) being turned ON while in warming up.
• Rotates at a low speed while in idling, and rotates at a high speed when the drum temperature is in excess of
a prescribed temperature.
• Rotates at a high speed at all times while in the print and rotates at a low speed specified period of time after
completion of the print.
• Rotates at a low speed at all times while in the low power mode.
(3) OFF timing

After completion of the warm-up, does not turn OFF until the power switch (SW2) is turned OFF.
B. Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4)

(1) Purpose
To exhaust the transfer/separation charger unit and the conveyance section.
(2) ON timing
• Turns ON in concert with the drive of the drum while in warming up.
• Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print.
(3) OFF timing

Turns OFF at all times while in idling and in the low power mode.
C. Developing suction fan (FM5)

(1) Purpose
To collects toner scattered around the developing unit.
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

Turns OFF at all times while in idling and in the low power mode.
106

D. Suction fan /1 (FM6)
(1) Purpose
Cool down around the write section with suction.
1050e/1050eP
(2) ON timing
• Rotates at a low speed while in warming up after the power switch (SW2) turns ON.
• Rotates at a low speed while in idling.
• Rotates at high speed at all times while in the print and rotates at a low speed specified period of time after
completion of the print.
• Rotates at a low speed at all times while in the low power mode.
(3) OFF timing

Turns OFF in concert with SW2 being turned OFF.
E. Suction fans /2 (FM7) and /3 (FM8)

(1) Purpose
To cool down around the developing unit and the drum unit with suction.
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

Turns OFF while in idling and in the low power mode.
F. Paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM9)

(1) Purpose
To cool down around the paper exit section with suction.
(2) ON timing
Rotates at a high speed at all times while in the print.
(3) OFF timing

Turns OFF at all times while in warming up, idling and in the low power mode.
G. Paper exit cooling fans /2 (FM10) and /3 (FM28)

(1) Purpose
To cooling down paper that is being exited with suction.
(2) ON timing
Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print.
(3) OFF timing

107
H. Pump cooling fan (FM11)

(1) Purpose
To cool down around the toner pump and the air pump with suction.
/1050e/1050eP
(2) ON timing
Rotates at a high speed at all times while in the print.
(3) OFF timing

I. IPB cooling fan (FM12)

(1) Purpose
To exhaust heat in the image processing board.
(2) ON timing
Rotate at a fixed speed at all times after the power switch (SW2) turns ON.
(3) OFF timing

Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF.
J. ADU cooling fan /1 (FM14)

(1) Purpose
To cool down around the ADU drive board /2 (ADUDB2).
(2) ON timing
Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after SW2 turns ON.
(3) OFF timing

K. ADU cooling fan /2 (FM15)

(1) Purpose
To cool down the inside of the ADU.
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

L. ADU cooling fan /3 (FM15)

(1) Purpose
To cool down around the reverse/exit section.
(2) ON timing
Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after the power switch (SW2) turns ON.
(3) OFF timing

108

M. Sensor cooling fan (FM16)
(1) Purpose
To cool down around the ADU drive board /1 (ADUDB1).
1050e/1050eP
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

N. Registration cooling fan (FM17)

(1) Purpose
To cool down around the registration unit.
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

O. Polygon cooling fan (FM18)

(1) Purpose
To cool down around the polygon motor (M21) and the write section.
(2) ON timing
Turn ON at all times after the power switch (SW2) turns ON.
(3) OFF timing

• Does not turn OFF until the power switch (SW2) is turned OFF.
• Turns OFF in concert with the polygon motor while in the low power mode.
P. Scanner cooling fan (FM19)

(1) Purpose
To cool down around the exposure lamp (L1) and the scanner.
(2) ON timing
Turns ON a specified period of time after the exposure lamp (L1) turns ON.
(3) OFF timing

Turns OFF in concert with L1 turning OFF.
Q. IC cooling fan (FM24)

(1) Purpose
To cool down the inside of the IC board.
(2) ON timing
Turns ON (rotates at a fixed speed) in concert with the power switch (SW2) turning ON.
(3) OFF timing

109
R. Power supply cooling fans /1 (FM25) and /2 (FM26)

(1) Purpose
To cool down the DC power supply 1 (DCPS1).
/1050e/1050eP
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

S. Power supply cooling fans /3 (FM27)

(1) Purpose
To cool down the DC power supply 2 (DCPS2).
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

T. Suction fan /4 (FM29) (1050e/1050eP only)

(1) Purpose
To intake hot air around the drums.
(2) ON timing
During warm-up, the fan is activated in synchronization with the drum drive.
During printing, the fan keeps rotating at a constant speed.
(3) OFF timing

During idling or in the low-power mode, the fan is kept stopping.
110 2

24.2 HDD control
24.2.1 Composition
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
1050to2070c

[1] Hard disk /1 (HDD1) Hard disk for the main body
Capacity: 40 GB
Storage of formatted stamp, watermark and registered overlay
image data
Storage of image data
Temporary storage of image data (image memory)
[2] Hard disk /2 (HDD2) Hard disk for the IC controller
24.2.2 Backup
Using the NetBackupTool allows the data in the hard disk /1 (HDD1) to be backed up to the PC.
111
24.3 Counter control

24.3.1 Composition
/1050e/1050eP
OACB PRCB
OB3 ACDB
LCDB CNT1 CNT2 PS3
1050to2071c
24.3.2 Operation
Name Function/method
Total counter (CNT1) • Displays the cumulative number of copies in all copy modes.
• Mechanical counter driven by the electronic signal.
• Counts up for each paper exit signal.
Electronic counter • Displays the cumulative number of copies/prints on the operation panel.
• PM count/cycle, data collection *1, and copy count by parts that are
required to be replaced.
• Counts up for each paper exit signal.
Key counter (CNT2) (Optional) • Counter that disables the copy operation when the specified number of
copies is made.
• Mechanical counter driven by the electronic signal.
*1 The following data are collected.

Total count by paper sizes
Copy count by paper sizes
Print count by paper sizes
Large size count
ADF passage count
Pixel ratio block data
Pixel ratio job data
Time series jam data
Jam occurrence count
Count by copy modes
Time series SC data
SC occurrence count
Block jam occurrence count
Block SC occurrence count
112

A. Status indicator light
Installing a status indicator light allows the machine status to be monitored at a place away from the machine
according to the condition of the light.
1050e/1050eP
1050to2335c
Connector Pin No. Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
1 PAT1 Light turn-on L signal output when the print is Open corrector
signal available
2 PAT2 L signal output while the scanner
or the print in operation
3 PAT3 L signal output while in an abnor-
mal stop due to a jam, error
160
code, no paper or no toner
4 PAT4 L signal output while a toner sup-
ply warning is being displayed
5 24V 24V DC power At all times 24V, 500mA
source
6 P.GND Power ground — —
NOTE
• A signal is output from the PAT3 when an error code occurs. However, the light does not turn on
since the power source of the 24V status indicator light is cut off.
113
24.4 Parts that operate when the power switch is turned ON

24.4.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch is turned ON
/1050e/1050eP
A. Composition
PF-701
HTR1
HTR2
HTR3
T2
HTR1
HTR2
T1
SW3
RL2 RL3
CBR SW1
L
NF1 NF2 DCPS1 DCPS2
5VDC
SW2
RL1
Fusing
OACB OB3 OB1
Section
5VDC OB2
1050to2072c
are intended only for overseas.
B. Operation
When turning ON the main power switch (SW1), the AC power source is supplied to the DC power source /1
(DCPS1). In this manner, DCPS1 generates 5V DC and 12V DC and supplies them to the overall control board
(OACB) and image processing board (IPB). OACB supplies this DC power source to the operation board /1
(OB1) through the operation board /3 (OB3) and put the power switch (SW2) in the standby for input.
The AC line is provided with a circuit breaker (CBR) which cuts off the AC line by itself when an excessive current
flows due to a short circuit while in SW1 ON.
114
DF-603
2006.11
Ver. 2.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improve-
ment of their performance.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding
page.
NOTE
2006/11 2.0 Revision in relation to launching of 1050e/1050eP

CONTENTS
DF-603
DF-603
OUTLINE
2. UNIT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 Single sided copy mode (small size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Double sided copy mode (small size). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3 Single sided copy mode (large size). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.4 Double sided copy mode (large size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.5 Paper exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3.1 Size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3.3 Separation mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3.4 Original empty detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3.5 Registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.3.2 Mixed original mode control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.3.3 Z-fold original mode control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.3.4 Skew adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.3.5 Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.3.6 Cooling fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6. REVERSAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6.3.1 Reverse mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7. PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.3.1 Paper exit mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
i
DF-603
Blank page
ii
OUTLINE
DF-603
A. Type
Name Double sided original auto feeder

Type Front loading type two-tray paper feeder
B. Functions
Original size Inch 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S,
A3, B4, A4, B5, B5S, A5, A5S
Metric A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
8 x 13
Maximum original size: 297 x 431.8
Minimum original size: 128 x 139.7
Original stacking capacity 100 sheets, max. (80 g/m2)
Original read speed Single sided copy 05 sheets/min. (A4 size)
mode 103 sheets/min. (81/2 x 11 size)
Double sided 65 sheets/min. (A4/81/2 x 11 size)
copy mode
Original feed layout Set with the front side up, at center as standard
Original image read position Dedicated slit glass section
Resolution 600 dpi
C. Type of paper
Type of paper High-quality paper of 50 g/m2 to 130 g/m2

In the case of the single sided copy mode, however, high-quality paper of 131
g/m2 to 200 g/m2 is also available in the single feed mode.
Paper curl amount Amount of curling:Up to 10 mm with 5 originals overlapped one another
Original
Amount of curling
1
D. Originals other than those that paper feed and throughput can be guaranteed
With the following originals, no severe problems are found such as frequent jams and major damage to the orig-
inals, although it is not possible to obtain a numeric value indicating reliability that can be specified in product
DF-603
guarantee terms
Recycled paper, straw paper, heat sensitive paper, originals fed in the mixing of perforated original mode, high-
quality paper of 35 g/m2 to 50 g/m2, irregular-sized originals (such as CF originals), coated paper, originals with
a rough surface (such as letterhead), folded originals (Z-folded or folded in two)
E. Originals not allowed to be fed

The following originals are not allowed to be used
OHP film, blueprint master, label paper, offset master, bonded original, high-quality paper of 35 g/m2 to 201
g/m2
F. Combination of mixed originals

Combinations of the same and different size originals is available. The following table shows the available combi-
nation of mixed originals.
Metric:Europe
Reference original (original with a maximum width)

A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S
Other A3 U { — — — — — —
originals A4 { U — — — — — —
B4 ~ ~ U { — — — —
B5 ~ ~ { U — — — —
A4S ~ ~ ~ ~ U { — —
A5 ~ ~ ~ ~ { U — —
B5S X X ~ ~ ~ ~ U —
A5S X X X X X X X U
Inch

11 x 17 81/2 x 11 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S 81/2 x 51/2 81/2 x 51/2S
Other 11 x 17 U { — — — —
originals 81/2 x 11 { U — — — —
81/2 x 14 ~ ~ U { { —
81/2 x 11S ~ ~ { U { —
81/2 x 51/2 ~ ~ { { U —
81/2 x 51/2S X X X X X U
2
Taiwanese
DF-603
A3 A4 8K 16K A4S A5 16KS A5S
Other A3 U { — — — — — —
originals A4 { U — — — — — —
8K ~ ~ U { — — — —
16K ~ ~ { U — — — —
A4S ~ ~ ~ ~ U { — —
A5 ~ ~ ~ ~ { U — —
16KS X X ~ ~ ~ ~ U —
A5S X X X X X X ~ U
U: Single size {: Same size ~: Different size X: Mixing not allowed —: Cannot be set
G. Maintenance
Maintenance Same as the main body.

Machine service life Same as the main body.
H. Machine data
Power source 24/5.1V DC (supplied from the main body)

Maximum power consump- 210W or less
tion
Dimensions 650 (W) x 570 (D) x 170 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 22 kg
I. Operating environment
Temperature 10 to 30°C
Humidity 10 to 80%RH (with no condensation)
3
2. UNIT COMPOSITION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
DF-603
[7] [8] [1]

[2]
[3]
[4]
[6] [5] df603to1002c
[1] Original feed tray [5] Reverse section

[2] Original exit tray (for large size) [6] Original exit section (for large size)
[3] Original exit section (for small size) [7] Conveyance section
[4] Original exit tray (for small size) [8] Original feed section
4
3. PAPER PATH
3.1 Single sided copy mode (small size)
DF-603
[1]
[2]
[4] [3] df603to1003c
[1] Original feed tray [3] Exit gate

[2] Original exit tray (for small size) [4] Image read position (slit glass section)
3.2 Double sided copy mode (small size)

A. Front scan
[1]
[2]
[4] [3] df603to1004c

5
B. Rear scan
[1]
DF-603
[2]
3
2
[4] [3] df603to1005c

C. Paper exit
[1]
[2]
[3] df603to1006c

[2] Original exit tray (for small size)
6
3.3 Single sided copy mode (large size)
[1]
DF-603
[2]
[4] [3] df603to1007c
[1] Original feed tray [3] Exit roller

[2] Original exit tray (for large size) [4] Image read position (slit glass section)
3.4 Double sided copy mode (large size)

A. Front scan
[1]
[2]
[4] [3] df603to1008c

7
B. Rear scan
[1]
DF-603
[2]
3
2
[4] [3] df603to1009c

3.5 Paper exit
[1]
[2]
[4] [3] df603to1010c

[2] Original exit tray (for large size) [4] Exit roller
8
DF-603
4.1 Composition
[1] [2]
[5] [4] [3]

df603to2001c

[1] Original size detection in the main scan direction Guide plate + VR
[2] Original size detection in the sub scan direction Photo sensor
[3] Original feed tray up/down method Up/down plate + motor
[4] Multi feed detection Ultrasonic sensor
[5] Registration method Roller + motor
9
4.2 Drive
A. Tray up/down drive
DF-603
[1]
[2]
df603to2002c
[1] Up/down plate [2] Tray up/down motor (M303)
B. Paper feed drive
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
df603to2003c
[1] Registration roller [4] Pick-up roller

[2] Original feed motor (M302) [5] Paper feed roller
[3] SDF switching solenoid (SD301)
10
4.3 Operation
DF-603
A. Plain original mode
(1) Size detection in the main scan direction
The front and rear dimensions of the original are detected according to the position of the guide plate connected
to the original size VR (VR301).
(2) Size detection in the sub scan direction

The right and left dimensions of the original are detected according to the ON/OFF combination of the original
size sensor /Rt (PS302) and the original size sensor /Lt (PS303).
B. Mixed original mode

(1) Size detection in the main scan direction
The front and rear dimensions of the maximum mixed original are detected according to the position of the
VR301 guide plate.
(2) Size detection in the sub scan direction

The conveyance roller [3] rotates in the forward direction to convey the original to the paper exit tray (for large
size) [2]. The conveyance roller stops rotation a specified period of time after the original registration sensor /Rt
(PS318) [1] detects the trailing edge of the original. At this time, depending on the ON time period of the PS318,
the conveyance direction and the size of the original are detected.
[1]
[2]
[3] df603to2004c
11
A specified period of time after the original registration sensor /Rt (PS318) [1] turns off, the conveyance roller [3]
rotates in the reverse direction to get the leading edge of the original conveyed to the paper exit section back to
the scan standby position [5]. The trailing edge of the original returned is conveyed to the paper exit tray (for
DF-603
large size) [2] according to the form of the conveyance guide plate. The reverse rotation of the conveyance roller
stops a specified period of time after the original conveyance sensor (PS308) [4] detects the leading edge of the
original.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
df603to2005c
After that, the same read (scan) operation as that in the normal mode is made.
The original size detection operation for the second and succeeding originals varies according to a copy mode
employed: the single sided copy mode or the double sided copy mode.
• Single sided copy mode: After the scan operation of the preceding original starts.
• Double sided copy mode: After the scan operation of the back side of the preceding original starts.

The tray up/down motor (M303) sends up the up/down plate [2] to move the original to the pick-up roller posi-
tion [1].
When the tray upper limit sensor (PS315) [4] turns ON, the M303 turns OFF to be put in the standby condition
with the up/down plate left raised.
The original comes into contact with the pick-up roller [3] to conduct the pick-up (paper feed) operation.
[3] [4] [1]
[2] df603to2006c
12

A. Separation control
Of the originals that have been fed by the pick-up roller, only one sheet of original is conveyed to the registration
DF-603
roller side by the original feed roller and the separation roller. Even when plural sheets of originals are fed, the
separation roller makes a reverse rotation to convey a single sheet of original.
B. SDF (single document feeder) control

In the single document feeder mode, to improve the paper feedability of thick paper and other originals the
paper feed of which is not guaranteed, the SDF switching solenoid (SD301) cuts off the drive of the separation
roller to conduct the paper feed operation.
C. Multi feed detection control

The multi feed detection is made by using the multi feed sensor /1 (MFS1) and the multi feed sensor /2 (MFS2)
which employ a method to check originals if they are multi fed based on the amount of the transmission of ultra-
sonic waves. The accuracy in the multi feed detection has been improved by using the multi feed sensor of the
ultrasonic sensor, which supports the speed-up in the paper feed. The multi feed sensor is made up of a pair of
a sender and a receiver.
The following are originals the multi feed of which can be detected.
• Originals the main scan direction of which is in excess of 210 mm. Originals the main scan direction of
which is less than 210 mm cannot be recognized due to the position of the sensor.
• Originals the weighing of which is between 50 g/m2 and 128 g/m2. Originals the weighing of which is
beyond the range mentioned above may not be recognized even when multi fed.
4.3.4 Original empty detection control

The detection of the presence of original in the original tray section while in the scan stop is made by the original
empty sensor (PS305). And also, the original empty detection while in the scan is made by the original count
sensor (PS310) to stop the paper feed from the trays /1 to /5 after PS310 detects the trailing edge of the last
original.
13
4.3.5 Registration control

When the start button is turned ON [1], the tray up/down motor (M303) brings up the up/down plate until the
tray upper limit sensor (PS315) ON on [2]. A specified period of time after the PS315 turns ON, the original feed
DF-603
motor (M302) is driven in a reverse rotation to convey the original to the registration roller. When the original reg-
istration sensor /Rt (PS318) turns ON, the up/down plate comes down by a fixed distance and a loop is formed
until the original registration sensor /Lt (PS306) turns ON to adjust an original skew.
[1]
Tray upper limit sensor (PS315)
Tray lower limit sensor (PS316)

Tray up/down Up
motor (M303)
Down
Original count sensor (PS310)
Original empty sensor (PS305)
Original registration sensor /Rt (PS306)
Original registration sensor /Lt (PS318)

Original 800 mm/s
feed motor F
(M302) 465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] df603to2007c
[1] Start button ON [5] Feed of the 2nd sheet of paper

[2] Feed of the 1st sheet of paper [6] Loop formation of the 2nd sheet of paper
[3] Loop formation of the 1st sheet of paper [7] Pre-feed of the 2nd sheet of paper
[4] Pre-feed of the 1st sheet of paper
14
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 5. CONVEYANCE SECTION
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION
5.1 Composition
DF-603
[3]
[2] [1] df603to2008c

[1] Conveyance path switching method Flapper + solenoid
[2] Original skew detection method Photo sensor
[3] Original centering detection method LED sensor
15
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
5.2 Drive
A. Flapper up/down drive
DF-603
[2]
[1]
df603to2009c
[1] Flapper [2] Gate solenoid (SD303)
B. Conveyance drive
[1]
[2]
df603to2010c
[1] Conveyance roller [2] Original conveyance motor (M301)
16
5.3 Operation
DF-603
The originals that have been fed up to the registration roller [1] by the separation mechanism are pre-fed by the
registration roller [1] to be conveyed to the conveyance roller [2] at a high speed. A specified period of time after
the original conveyance sensor (PS308) [4] turns ON, the conveyance roller [2] is switched into the scan speed
to convey the original onto the slit glass (original scan position) [3].
[1]
[4] [3] [2]

df603to2011c
The originals are read when they passes through the slit glass [5].
17
5.3.2 Mixed original mode control

The mixed original sizes copy mode is applicable to both the same size originals and the different size originals.
Since the size detection in the direction of the original feed is made according to the ON time of the original reg-
DF-603
istration sensor /Rt (PS318), the size detection operation is made prior to the scan operation for each original.
5.3.3 Z-fold original mode control

In the Z-fold mode, the same detection operation as that in the mixed original sizes copy mode is made on the
1st sheet of original to determine the original size. For the 2nd and succeeding originals, the normal original con-
veyance is made.
5.3.4 Skew adjustment control

The original skew sensor /Rr (PS311) and the original skew sensor /Fr (PS312) are provided to make adjust-
ments when the original is conveyed with its leading edge skewed. PS311 and PS312 are provided on the front
side and the rear side of the conveyance path before scan to detect the amount of skew based on the time dif-
ference when the leading edge of the original turns ON these sensors. The amount of skew detected is adjusted
by means of image processing.
The relationship of the distance between the two sensors makes it effective only on original larger than A4R in
width and the correction of the tilt angle up to 1.5°C is made.
5.3.5 Centering adjustment

The leading edge of the original pre-fed is detected by the centering sensor /Rr (PS321) and the centering LED
sensor /Rr (PS322). According to the timing of this detection, the side edge of the original is detected by the
centering sensor /Fr (PS320) and the centering LED sensor /Fr (PS319) to determine the effective read area in
the main scan direction.
The width of the original size that can be detected is restricted only to A4 or 11 inch. However, PS320 is required
to be positioned to the width of the original you want to detect.
The maximum range that can be corrected is within ± 3 mm. When in excess of this range, only 3 mm is cor-
rected.
The centering adjustment control is invalid for original sizes other than A4 and 11 inch and in the mixed original
mode.
The sensor can detect any color in the original.
5.3.6 Cooling fan control

To prevent the original conveyance motor (M301) from getting too hot while in operation, the motor is cooled by
the cooling fan /Lt (FM301). The cooling fan turns ON when the original feed is started, and it turns OFF when
the original exit is completed.
To prevent the original exit motor /1 (M304), the original exit motor /2 (M305), the RADF control board (RADFCB)
and the tray up/down motor (M303) from getting too hot while in operation, these motors and board are cooled
by the cooling fan /Rt (FM302).
18
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 6. REVERSAL SECTION
6. REVERSAL SECTION
6.1 Composition
DF-603
[1]
df603to2016c

[1] Stabilization of scan speed Pressure roller release method
— Reverse method Paper exit gate + solenoid
6.2 Drive
A. Reverse drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
df603to2017c
[1] Reverse roller [3] Reverse conveyance roller

[2] Original exit motor /1 (M304)
19
6. REVERSAL SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
B. Pressure roller release drive
[1]
DF-603
df603to2018c
[1] Pressure roller release solenoid (SD302)
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Reverse mechanism
A. Small size original
When the gate solenoid (SD303) starts up, the flapper [3] closes and originals the front of which has been
scanned are conveyed [2] to the reverse section by the reverse roller [1]. A specified period of time after the orig-
inal reverse sensor (PS309) [7] turns OFF by detecting the trailing edge of the original, SD303 opens the paper
exit gate [6] and the reverse paper feed [5] is made while rotating in the reverse direction at a low speed and
then at a high speed to guide the original to the conveyance roller [4].
[5] [6] [7] [1]
[4] [3] [2] df603to2027c
[1] Reverse roller [5] Reverse paper feed

[2] Conveyance to the reversal section [6] Paper exit gate
[3] Flapper [7] Original reverse sensor (PS309)
[4] Conveyance roller
20
B. Large size original

When the gate solenoid (SD303) energizes, the flapper [5] is closed and the original the surface of which has
been scanned is conveyed to the reversal section by the reverse roller [8]. The original conveyed to the reversal
DF-603
section [4], because it cannot be contained in the reversal section, is conveyed to the paper exit reversal section
[2] by the reverse conveyance roller [9], the paper exit reverse roller [1]. At this time, the exit gate [10] is closed
by the exit gate solenoid (SD304).
The originals that have been conveyed to the reversal section and the paper exit reversal section are fed in
reverse [6] in the same manner as small size originals. At this time, since the originals do not yet pass through
the reverse roller [8], the reverse conveyance roller [9] even if they have reach the conveyance roller [7], after the
reverse roller makes the reverse rotation, the pressure roller release solenoid (SD302) activates to release the
pressure roller [3] for the reverse roller. The originals are released from the pressure roller and guided to the con-
veyance roller [7].
[8] [9] [10]

[7]
[1]
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] df603to2028c
[1] Paper exit reverse roller [6] Reverse feed

[2] Conveyance to the paper exit reversal section [7] Conveyance roller
[3] Pressure roller [8] Reverse roller
[4] Conveyance to the reversal section [9] Reverse conveyance roller
[5] Flapper [10] Exit gate
21
6. REVERSAL SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006

A. Small size original
A specified period of time after the start of the conveyance [1] of the 1st original, the front of the 1st original is
DF-603
read [2]. The 1st original conveyed to the reverse section stops temporarily after being accelerated by the origi-
nal exit motor /2 (M305) and the original exit motor /1 (M304). M305 and M304 start a reverse rotation [3] to let
the original hit against the conveyance roller for registration.
For the original that has been registered, a specified period of time after the original conveyance sensor (PS308)
turn ON [4], the back of the 1st original is read [5].
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Original conveyance sensor (PS308)

Original convey- 620 mm/s
ance motor F
(M301) 465 mm/s
V-VALID
Original exit 620 mm/s
motor /1 (M304) F
465 mm/s
465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
620 mm/s
Reverse jam sensor (PS304)
Pressure release roller solenoid (SD302)

motor /2 (M305) F
465 mm/s
465 mm/s
R
620 mm/s
Original reverse sensor (PS309)
Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)
Exit gate solenoid (SD304)
df603to2020c
[1] Front face of the 1st sheet of original [5] Reading of the rear face of the 1st sheet of
[2] Reading of the front face of the 1st sheet of original
original [6] Front face of the 2nd sheet of original
[3] Reversal of the 1st sheet of original [7] Reading of the front face of the 2nd sheet of
[4] Rear face of the 1st sheet of original original
22
B. Large size original

A specified period of time after the start of the conveyance [1] of the 1st original, the front of the 1st original is
read [2]. The 1st original conveyed to the reverse section stops temporarily after being accelerated by the origi-
DF-603
nal exit motor /2 (M305) and the original exit motor /1 (M304). M305 and M304 start a reverse rotation [3] to let
the original hit against the conveyance roller for registration.
For the back of the original that has been registered, a specified period of time after the original reverse sensor
(PS309) turns ON, the pressure release roller solenoid (SD302) is turned ON [4] to release the pressure roller,
and then release the conveyance force of the reverse section. A specified period of time after the original con-
veyance sensor (PS308) turns ON [5], the back of the 1st original is read [6].
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Original convey- 620 mm/s
ance motor F
(M301) 465 mm/s
V-VALID
motor /1 (M304) F
465 mm/s
465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
620 mm/s
Reverse jam sensor (PS304)
Pressure release roller solenoid (SD302)

motor /2 (M305) F
465 mm/s
465 mm/s
R
620 mm/s
df603to2021c
[1] Front face of the 1st sheet of original [5] Rear face of the 1st sheet of original
[2] Reading of the front face of the 1st sheet of [6] Reading of the rear face of the 1st sheet of
original original
[3] Reversal of the 1st sheet of original [7] Front face of the 2nd sheet of original
[4] Pressure roller release
23
7. PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
7. PAPER EXIT SECTION

7.1 Composition
DF-603
A. Paper exit section (large size)
[1]
df603to2022c

[1] Conveyance path switching method Paper exit gate + solenoid
B. Paper exit section (small size)
[1] df603to2023c

[1] Conveyance path switching method Paper exit gate + solenoid
24
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 7. PAPER EXIT SECTION
7.2 Drive
A. Exit gate drive
DF-603
[2]
[1] df603to2024c
[1] Exit gate [2] Exit gate solenoid (SD304)
B. Paper exit drive (for large size)
[1]
[2]
df603to2025c
[1] Paper exit roller /1 [2] Original exit motor /1 (M304)
25
C. Paper exit drive (for small size)
[3]
DF-603
[1]
[2] df603to2026c
[1] Original exit motor /2 (M305) [3] Paper exit roller /2

[2] Paper exit reverse roller
26
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Paper exit mechanism
DF-603
A. Paper exit operation of small size original
(1) Single sided original
The originals that have been scanned are conveyed to the reversal section [3] because of the gate solenoid
(SD303) being closed by the flapper [4]. The originals conveyed to the reversal section are conveyed to the exit
gate [7] by the reverse roller [5], the reverse conveyance roller [6]. After that, they are conveyed to the paper exit
roller /2 [1] through the exit gate [7] that has been opened by the exit gate solenoid (SD304). The paper exit roller
/2 [1] exits the originals to the original exit tray (for small size) [2] with their copied side down.
[5] [6] [1]
[4] [3] [7] [2] df603to2029c
[1] Paper exit roller /2 [4] Flapper

[2] Exits the originals to the original exit tray [5] Reverse roller
(for small size) [6] Reverse conveyance roller
[3] Conveyance to the reversal section [7] Exit gate
27
(2) Double sided original

The originals the rear face of which has been scanned are conveyed to the exit gate [5] in the same manner as
with the single sided originals. At this time, the gate [5] is closed by the exit gate solenoid (SD304), and the orig-
DF-603
inals are conveyed to the paper exit reversal section [2] through the paper exit reverse roller [3]. When the origi-
nal reverse/exit sensor (PS313) [4] of the paper exit reversal section detects the originals, the paper exit reverse
roller [3] stops. When SD304 opens the exit gate [5], the paper exit reverse roller [3] starts to make a high speed
reverse rotation to send back the conveyed originals. At this time, the exit gate [5] is open and the originals are
exited to the original exit tray (for small size) [1] with their front face down.
[5] [6] [1]
[3]
[4] [2] df603to2030c
[1] Exits the originals to the original exit tray [4] Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)
(for small size) [5] Exit gate
[2] Conveyance to the paper exit reversal section [6] Paper exit roller /2
[3] Paper exit reverse roller
28
B. Paper exit operation of large size original

(1) Single sided original
The originals that have been scanned are conveyed to the paper exit roller /1 [2] by the conveyance roller [4]
DF-603
because of the flapper [3] and the paper exit gate [5] being opened by the gate solenoid (SD303). And then, the
paper exit roller /1 [2] makes a low speed normal rotation to exit the originals to the original exit tray (for large
size) [1] with their copied face down.
[5] [1]
[4] [3] [2] df603to2031c
[1] Exits the originals to the original exit tray [3] Flapper
(for large size) [4] Conveyance roller
[2] Paper exit roller /1 [5] Paper exit gate
(2) Double sided original

The originals the rear face of which has been scanned are conveyed to the reversal section [2] because of the
flapper [4] being closed by the gate solenoid (SD303). When the original reverse sensor (PS309) [3] detects the
trailing edge of the originals conveyed, SD303 opens the flapper [4] and the paper exit gate. The originals are
exited to the original exit tray (for large size) [1] by the paper exit roller /1 [6] through the flapper that is open.
[5] [6] [1]
[4]
[3] [2]
df603to2032c
[1] Exits the originals to the original exit tray [4] Flapper
(for large size) [5] Paper exit gate
[2] Conveyance to the reversal section [6] Paper exit roller /1
[3] Original reverse sensor (PS309)
29
DF-603
Blank page
30
PF-701/PP-701
2006.11
Ver. 3.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
page.
NOTE
Addition of the PP-701, Design changes, Correction of

2006/11 3.0
errors in writing
2005/04 2.0 Correction of an error in writing
CONTENTS
PF-701/PP-701
PF-701/PP-701
OUTLINE
1.1 PF-701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 PP-701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2.1 Tray lift drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2.2 Paper feed drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2.3 Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3.1 Up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3.2 Size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3.4 Separation mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3.5 Paper dust removal mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3.8 Remaining paper detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.3.9 Tray lock control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.3.1 Pre-registration control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.1 Dehumidification heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.2 Main body temperature rise prevention assist mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7. PP-701 (OPTIONAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
8. PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8.1 Parts for overlay printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
i
PF-701/PP-701
Blank page
ii
OUTLINE
PF-701/PP-701
1.1 PF-701
A. Type
Type Front loading type 3-tray paper feeder
B. Functions
Number of trays 3 trays (All trays universal)

Maximum tray capacity 6,000 sheets (64 g/m2 standard paper) = 2,000 sheets x 3 trays
C. Type of paper
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
Applicable paper PPC paper, high quality paper, coated paper, label paper, trace paper
Paper weight Tray /3, /5 50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2
Tray /4 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
D. Maintenance

E. Machine data
Power source 24/5V DC, 24.5V AC (supplied both from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 100W or less
Weight 142 kg
F. Operating environment
Humidity 10 to 80% RH (with no condensation)
1 1
1.2 PP-701
PF-701/PP-701
A. Type
Type Overprinting enhancement kit for PF-701
B. Maintenance
C. Machine data
Power source 24VDC (supplied from PF)

Weight 2 kg
D. Operating environment
2 2
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 2. UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
PF-701/PP-701
[2] [1]
[3]
a08rt1c001ca
[1] Paper feed section [3] PP-701 (Option)

[2] Conveyance section
2 3
3. PAPER PATH
PF-701/PP-701
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a08rt1c002ca
[1] Paper path of the tray /3 [3] Paper path of the tray /5
[2] Paper path of the tray /4 [4] Paper path to the main body (trays /3, /4 and /5)
4 2
PF-701/PP-701
4.1 Composition
Paper empty sensor
Paper up/down assist mechanism
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller

Paper feed
assist fans Paper lift plate
Separation Paper size VR/1 (VR11), /2 (VR13), /3 (VR15)

roller (Main scan direction) Remaining paper VR/1
(VR10), /2 (VR12), /3 (VR14)
Paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS75), /Rr1 (PS76),
/Fr2 (PS81), /Rr2 (PS82), /Fr3 (PS87), /Rr3 (PS88) (Sub scan direction)
a08rt2c001ca
2 5
4.2 Drive
PF-701/PP-701
[2]
[1]
[6]
[1] [2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
pf701to2002c
[1] Lift wires /Fr2 and /Rr2 [4] Paper lift motors /1 (M42), /2 (M43) and /3 (M44)
[2] Lift wires /Fr1 and /Rr1 [5] Lift release coupling gear
[3] Paper lift plate [6] Torque limiting gear (oil damper)
6
PF-701/PP-701
[13]
[14]
[12]
[11]
[1]
[15]
[2]
[10] [3] [4] [5]

[17]
[6]
[16]
[18]
[9]
[7]
[8]
a08rt2c002ca
[1] Tray rear section [11] Separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and /3
[2] Tray center section (CL13)
[3] Paper feed roller [12] Coupling
[4] Paper dust removal brush [13] Paper feed clutches /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9) and /3
[5] Scraper shaft (CL12)
[6] Pick-up roller [14] Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray/3)
[7] Separation roller [15] Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray/4)
[8] Tray /4 only [16] Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray/5)
[9] Torque limiter [17] Paper feed motor (M40)
[10] Forced separation clutch (CL11) [18] PF rear section
2 7
4.2.3 Pick-up drive

PF-701/PP-701
[2] [1]
pf701to2004c
[1] Pick-up solenoids /1 (SD14), [2] Pick-up roller

/2 (SD15) and /3 (SD16)
8
4.3 Operation
PF-701/PP-701
A. Up operation
The paper lift motors /1 (M42), /2 (M43) and /3 (M44) wind up the lift wires through the pulleys to lift up the paper
lift plate.
B. Down operation
When pulling out the tray, the coupling gear [2] that transmits the drive force from the motor shaft [3] to the pul-
ley [1] is detached by the release lever [4]. The paper lift plate goes down slowly by its own weight through the
torque restriction gear [5] that is activated only while in the down operation.
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4] [4] [3] pf701to2005c
[1] Pulley [4] Release lever

[2] Coupling gear [5] Torque limiting gear
[3] Motor shaft
C. Operation timing
When the tray is set, the paper lift motors /1 (M42), /2 (M43) and /3 (M44) turn on to bring up the paper lift plate.
When the upper limit sensor /1 (PS71), /2 (PS77) and /3 (PS83) turn on, the motors M42, M43 and M44 stop.
When the sensors PS71, PS77 and PS83 turn off from on while in printing, the motors M42, M43 and M44 turn
on again to bring up the paper lift plate until the sensors PS71, PS77 and PS83 turn on, and the motors M42,
M43 and M44 turn off.
9

The paper size detection is made in the following two directions: a detection in the main scan direction and the
PF-701/PP-701
sub scan direction.

The size detection in the sub scan direction is made by the following each pair of the sensors: the paper size
sensors /Fr1 (PS75) [4] and /Rr1 (PS76) [5] for tray /3, /Fr2 (PS81) [4] and /Rr 2 (PS82) [5] for tray /4, and /Fr3
(PS87) [4] and /Rr3 (PS88) [5] for tray /5. When the paper rear guide [6] is moved, the detection cams /Up [1]
and /Lw [2] that are different in their form are pressed by the knob [5]. According to the position of the paper rear
guide, the paper size sensors /Fr1 [4], /Fr2 [4] and /Fr3 [4] and Rr1 [3], /Rr2 [3] and /Rr3 [3] turn on and off.
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2] [1] pf701to2006c
[1] Detection cam /Up [4] Paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS75), /Fr2 (PS81)
[2] Detection cam /Lw and /Fr3 (PS87)
[3] Paper size sensors /Rr1 (PS76), /Rr2 (PS82) [5] Knob
and /Rr3 (PS88) [6] Paper rear guide
10
Paper size Paper size sensor
PF-701/PP-701
/Fr1 (PS75), /Rr1 (PS76),
/Fr2 (PS81), /Rr2 (PS82),
/Fr3 (PS87) /Rr3 (PS88)
A5, B5, A4, 51/2 x 81/2, 81/2 x 11* OFF OFF
B5S, A4S, 81/2 x 11S* OFF ON
12 x 18, F4* ON ON
B4, A3, 81/2 x 14, 11 x 17 ON OFF
* For the paper sizes shown below, it is necessary to set the paper size on the operation panel.
Make a selection from among A5 and 51/2 x 81/2.
Make a selection from among A4S and 81/2 x 11S.
Make a selection as F4 from among 8 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 81/4 x 13 and 81/2 x 13.
The size in the main scan direction is detected by the paper size VR/1 (VR11), /2 (VR13) and /3 (VR15) that are
interlocked with the paper guide. The main body is informed of the detection a specified period of time after the
tray is set. For the resistance value, a default value is set through the "tray adjustment" in the service mode.

Paper is picked up when the pick-up solenoids /1 (SD14), /2 (SD15) and /3 (SD16) turn off. When the solenoids
SD14, SD15 and SD16 turn off, the pick-up roller goes down to press paper by its own weight. When the paper
feed clutches /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9) and /3 (CL12) turn on, the pick-up roller rotates to convey paper to the paper
feed roller.
[3] [5]
Paper feed sensor /1 (PS72), /2 (PS78), /3 (PS84)
Paper feed clutch /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9), /3 (CL12)

Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD14), /2 (SD15), /3 (SD16)
[1] [2] [4] pf701to2007c
[1] Start button ON [4] Pick-up of the 2nd sheet of paper

[2] Pick-up of the 1st sheet of paper [5] Conveyance of the 2nd sheet of paper
[3] Conveyance of the 1st sheet of paper
11

The transmission of the driving force to the separation roller [4] transmits the driving force of the paper feed
PF-701/PP-701
motor (M40) through the torque limiter [7] by turning on and off the separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and /
3 (CL 13) [8].
The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance. However, when no paper is
conveyed and only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller
[1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation roller is greater than the frictional force of the
torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller rotates in the direction of the paper conveyance to convey
paper to the vertical conveyance section.
the frictional force of the torque limiter and the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the
lower most paper from being conveyed.
Tray /4 is provided with the forced separation clutch (CL11) [5] that forcibly rotates the separation roller [4] in the
reverse direction not through the torque limiter [7].
[9]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[7] [3]
[6] [4]
[5]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[6] [7] a08rt2c003ca
[1] Pick-up roller [6] Tray /4 only

[2] 1st sheet of paper [7] Torque limiter
[3] 2nd sheet of paper [8] Separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and
[4] Separation roller /3 (CL13)
[5] Forced separation clutch (CL11) [9] Paper feed roller
12 2
A. Separation clutch control

When paper is slippery (or, when the power of conveyance is not sufficient), paper conveyed from the pick-up
PF-701/PP-701
roller may be unable to pass through the separation sections of the paper feed roller and the separation roller.
To alleviate a condition like this, the separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and /3 (CL13) are not turned ON until
paper gets to the separation section to remove the drive force to the separation roller, and allow it to function as
a driven roller to the paper feed roller. After paper gets to the separation section, turn ON the CL7, CL10 and
CL13 to conduct the normal separation operation.
However, this control should be conducted as shown below.
• Type of paper:Coated paper B:Conducted unconditionally.
• Type of paper:Those other than the coated paper B:Conducted automatically judging from the condition of
conveyance at the separation section.
B. Forced separation clutch control (tray /4 only)

The forced separation clutch (CL11) is equipped only to the tray /4. When paper is conveyed to the separation
roller, it rotates the separation roller momentarily in the reverse direction independent of the torque limiter for
greater separation of paper.
This control is automatically made only in the high temperature condition for coated paper A and B weighing
more than 72 g/m2.
However, the DIPSW26-4 can be used to select a high temperature as a condition for control.
4.3.5 Paper dust removal mechanism

This mechanism is provided to remove paper dust from the paper feed roller. Paper dust adhered to the paper
feed roller is removed by the paper dust removal brush (raising brush) and transferred to the scraper shaft (metal
roller). Then the scraper (sheet) scrapes off the paper dust from the shaft.
2 13

Trays /3 to /5 are provided with paper feed assist fans that blow air [4] onto paper [3] from a pair of paper guides
PF-701/PP-701
attached both in front and in the rear and assist the separation of paper. Tray /3 is provided with paper feed
assist fans /Fr1 (FM41) [2] and /Rr1 (FM42) [1], tray /4 with paper feed assist fans /Fr2 (FM43) [2] and /Rr2
(FM44) [1], and tray /5 with paper feed assist fans /Fr3 (FM45) [2] and /Rr3 (FM46) [1].
Each of the paper feed assist fans is effective especially for thick paper, and paper with a high degree of adhe-
sion (such as coated paper). However, fan assist using plain paper may result in improper paper feed.
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
pf701to2010c
[1] Paper feed assist fans /Rr1 (FM42), [3] Paper

/Rr2 (FM44), /Rr3 (FM46) [4] Blowout of air
[2] Paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM41),
/Fr2 (FM43), /Fr3 (FM45)
A. Operation timing
The operation of the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM41), /Rr1 (FM42), /Fr2 (FM43), /Rr2 (FM44), /Fr3 (FM45) and
/Rr3 (FM46) can be selected through the user setting on the operation panel from among the following three
modes: Always ON, always OFF and Auto.
While in the Auto mode, the paper feed assist fans is normally turned OFF. However, when the conveyance time
from the start of the paper feed to the paper feed sensors /1 (PS72), /2 (PS783) and /3 (PS84) is in excess of a
specified period of time, or when a no feed jam condition occurs, the paper feed assist fan of the corresponding
tray is turned ON at that point of time. However, when a paper type other than the coated paper B is set and the
separation roller functions as a driven roller to the paper feed roller by the control of the separation clutch, the
paper feed assist fan remains OFF to prevent the multi feed of paper. The operations in this Auto mode can be
reset by pulling out the tray (except for pulling out of the tray while in a jam), or turning OFF the power switch.
14

Paper empty detection in the tray is made by the paper empty sensors /1 (PS73), /2 (PS79) and /3 (PS85).
PF-701/PP-701
4.3.8 Remaining paper detection control
Remaining paper detection is made by the remaining paper VR/1 (VR10), /2 (VR12) and /3 (VR14) that are inter-
locked with the up/down operation of the paper lift plate through the pulley and the gear.
The remaining paper quantity is detected in the following 5 stages according to the resistance value, and the
main body is informed of the detection.
Stage 1 (displayed in red): Less than 10%
Stage 1 (displayed in white): Less than 25%
Stage 2 (displayed in white): 25% to 50%
[2]
[1]
pf701to2011c
[1] Remaining paper VR/1 (VR10), /2 (VR12), /3 [2] Lift pulley /Rr
(VR14)
4.3.9 Tray lock control

Each of the trays is locked by the tray lock lever.
When it is found that either of the handle release sensors /1 (PS74), /2 (PS80) and /3 (PS86) of the trays /3 to /5
turns off, the tray lock solenoids /1 (SD10), /2 (SD11) and /3 (SD12) of the corresponding tray turns on to bring
up the tray lock lever and release the lock, thus allowing the tray to be pulled out.
When it is found that any other sensor turns off while either of the sensors PS74, PS80 and PS86 turns off, none
of the solenoids SD10, SD11 and SD12 other than the one that has already turned on turns on to prevent two or
more trays from being pulled out at the same time.
When a jam occurs that affects the tray and the exit conveyance section, the tray remains locked until the
jammed paper is removed. Doing this prevents the paper from being torn off.
15
PF-701/PP-701
5.1 Composition
Pre-registration roller /3
Conveyance roller /1
Conveyance
roller /2
Pre-registration
roller /4
Conveyance
roller /3
Pre-registration roller /5 Torque limiter
Conveyance roller /4
a08rt2c004ca
16 2
5.2 Drive
PF-701/PP-701
[20] [1]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12] [2]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4] pf701to2013c
[1] Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray /3) [11] Pre-registration clutch /2 (CL3)
[2] Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray /4) [12] Exit conveyance roller
[3] Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray /5) [13] PF exit conveyance motor (M41)
[4] Paper feed motor (M40) [14] Pre-registration roller /4
[5] Pre-registration clutch /3 (CL4) [15] Conveyance roller /2
[6] Pre-registration roller /5 [16] Conveyance roller /1
[7] Conveyance roller /4 [17] Torque limiter
[8] Torque limiter [18] Intermediate clutch /Up (CL2)
[9] Intermediate clutch /Lw (CL5) [19] Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1)
[10] Conveyance roller /3 [20] Pre-registration roller /3
2 17
5.3 Operation
PF-701/PP-701
5.3.1 Pre-registration control

When paper feed starts, paper is sent out to the pre-registration roller by the pick-up roller and the paper feed
roller. When paper strikes the pre-registration roller that is stationary, a loop is formed to adjust the skew of
paper. When the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3) and /3 (CL4) turn on, the driving force of the paper
feed motor (M40) is transmitted to the pre-registration rollers 3/, /4 and /5 to convey paper in the direction of the
main body.

For the vertical conveyance, the driving force of the paper feed motor (M40) is transmitted by turning on and off
the intermediate clutches /Up (CL2) and /Lw (CL5), and the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3) and /3
(CL4).
The exit conveyance is made by the PF exit conveyance motor (M41).
Paper that is fed from tray /3 is conveyed to the conveyance rollers /1 and /2 driven through the pre-registration
roller /3, CL2 that is in turn driven by the CL1, and then conveyed to the exit conveyance roller. When the loop
sensor /1 (PS92) detects the trailing edge of paper, the CL2 turns off.
Paper that is fed from tray /4 is conveyed to the exit conveyance roller by the pre-registration roller that is in turn
driven by the CL3.
Paper that is fed from tray /5 is conveyed to the conveyance rollers /4 and /3 through the pre-registration roller /
5, CL5 that is in turn driven by the CL4, and then conveyed to the exit conveyance roller. When the loop sensor
/3 (PS98) detects the trailing edge of paper, the CL5 turns off.
The exit conveyance roller is driven by the PF exit conveyance motor (M41). It starts to rotate at a low speed
when the loop sensors /1 (PS92), 2/ (PS94) and /3 (PS98) detect paper, and turns off when the exit sensor
(PS99) detects the trailing edge of paper.
A torque limitter is provided on the gear of each conveyance roller /1 and /4 to prevent the rollers from rotating
when the clutches are released. This prevents paper that is temporarily stopping on the vertical paper feed path
from falling off the path and causing a paper jam.
18 2
6. OTHERS
PF-701/PP-701
6.1 Dehumidification heater
Trays /3 to /5 are provided with the dehumidification heaters /1 (HTR1), /2 (HTR2) and /3 (HTR3), 1 each respec-
tively, below each tray. They are turned on when the dehumidification heater switch (SW3) of the main body is
turned ON.
[1]
[2]
[3]
pf701to2014c
[1] Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1) [3] Dehumidification heater /3 (HTR3)

[2] Dehumidification heater /2 (HTR2)
6.2 Main body temperature rise prevention assist mechanism

To enhance cooling in the main body, air drawn by the cooling fan (FM20) is distributed inside the main body.
2 19
7. PP-701 (OPTIONAL) Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
7. PP-701 (OPTIONAL)
PF-701/PP-701
7.1 Composition
Pick-up roller
Rear paper feed assist

fan/1 (FM50)

fan/2 (FM51)
Paper feed
roller
Separation
roller
fan/3 (FM52)
a08rt2c006ca
20 2
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 7. PP-701 (OPTIONAL)
7.2 Drive
PF-701/PP-701
The rear paper feed assist fans /1 (FM50), /2 (FM51), /3 (FM52) [1] provided on the right side of the PF blow air
[2] to rear side of the stacked papers to accurately pick up a sheet. Operating timing of the fans are the same
that of the paper feed assist fans provided inside the tray.
Urethan rollers are used for feeding papers for overprinting since urethan is less affected by powders used for
overprinting.
The assist fans [3] and urethan rollers ensure paper feed accuracy when overprinting.
[3] [2]
[1]
a08rt2c007ca
[1] Rear paper feed assist fans /1 (FM50), [2] Air

/2 (FM51) , /3 (FM52) [3] Paper feed section
2 21
8. PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
8. PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS

PF-701/PP-701
8.1 Parts for overlay printing

The following are available as PCS corresponding parts for overlay printing.
• Paper feed assist plate
For particulars, Refer to 10.4 PCS correspondence in the Theory of Operation for the main body for details.
22
FD-501
2006.09
Ver. 2.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
page.
NOTE
2006/09 2.0 Revision in relation to launching of C6500

Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 CONTENTS
CONTENTS
FD-501
FD-501
OUTLINE
3. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.1 Conveyance drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.2 Gate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.3 Alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.3.1 Conveyance path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.3.2 Conveyance line speed control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.3.3 Alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5. PUNCH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.2.1 Rear registration drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.2.2 Punch drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.2.1 Conveyance drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.2.2 Folding drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.3.2 Conveyance path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.3.3 1st folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.3.4 2nd folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.3.5 3rd folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7. MAIN TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.3.1 Main tray up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
8. SUB TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
8.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
8.3.1 Sub tray full detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
8.3.2 Line speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
9. PI SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
FD-501
9.2.1 Tray lift drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

9.2.2 Paper feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
9.2.3 Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
9.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
9.3.1 Size detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
9.3.2 Up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
9.3.5 Multi feed detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ii
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
FD-501
A. Type
Type Multi folding device with punch and PI functions
B. Functions
(1) Functions
Normal paper exit function Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray/sub tray.
Punching function Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for
each sheet of paper and exited into the main tray/sub tray.
Folding function Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for
folding (either one of the following: Z-fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double
parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each sheet of paper, and exited into the
sub tray/main tray (The Z-fold exit to the main tray while in the FS connection is
limited only to B4, A3, 81/2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.)
PI insertion function PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body.
Manual mode PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray/
main tray. (The stapling function is available only when the staple unit is con-
nected to the downstream of the FD.)
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
(2) Maximum tray capacity
Main tray 2,500 sheets: A4, A4S, B5, B5S

(weighing 50 to 244 g/m2)
FD-501
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S

16K*3, 16KS*3
1,500 sheets: SRA3*2, A3, B4, SRA4*2, SRA4S*2
13 x 19*2,12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4
8K*3
wide paper*1 : A3, B4,A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
size entry: (Max. 324 x 460 mm)
500 sheets: A5, A5S*2, B6S*2
51/2 x 81/2*1, 51/2 x 81/2S*2
Tab paper*4 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S,11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,81/2 x 11S,
custom paper (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 182 x 140mm)
Custom paper : 1050 (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 182 x 140mm)
C6500 (Max. 330 x 483 mm, Min. 128 x 148mm)
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

*3 C6500: supported in all the destinations.
1050: only supported in Taiwan and China.
*4 C6500: only A4 and 81/2 x11. Operation of paper exit with tab area at the
trail edge side is not assured.
Sub tray *1 SRA3, A3, B4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S, A6S
(weighing 50 to 300 g/m2) 13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*2, 16K*2, 16KS*2
Tab paper*3 : A4, 81/2 x 11, custom paper

Custom paper : Max. 330 x 487 mm, Min. 100 x 148mm
*1 C6500 only
*3 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured.
(3) Processing capacity

105PPM
2 1
C. Type of paper
(1) Punching function
A3, B4, SRA4S*2, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S*2
FD-501
Paper size 2 holes:
12 x 18 , 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*3, 16K*3, 16KS*3,
Tab paper*4 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
custom paper (Max. 324 x 460 mm,
Min. 182 x 140mm)
3 holes/4 holes: A3, B4, A4, B5

12 x 18 , 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11
8K*3, 16K*3
Tab paper*4 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
custom paper (Max. 324 x 460 mm,
Min. 182 x 140mm)
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only
*4 A4, 81/2 x 11 only for C6500
Applicable paper Plain paper, tab paper
Paper weight 50 to 209 g/m2
(2) Folding functions
Paper size A3, B4, SRA4S*1, A4S

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K*2
Custom paper*1: (Max. 305 x 458 mm, Min. 210 x 279mm)
*1 C6500 only
Applicable paper Plain paper
Paper weight Folding, Letter 50 to 130 g/m2
fold-in, Letter
fold-out, Z-fold
Double parallel 50 to 91 g/m2
fold, Gate fold
1 3
(3) PI functions
Paper size SRA3*2, A3, B4, SRA4*2, SRA4S*2, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5
13 x 19*2, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
FD-501
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13

8K*3, 16K*3, 16KS*3
Tab paper*4 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
custom paper (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 182 x
140mm)
Custom paper*2 : Max. 330 x 483 mm, Min. 182 x 148mm
Wide paper*1 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18,11 x 17,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2,
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

*4 A4, 81/2 x 11 only for C6500
Applicable paper Plain paper, high-quality paper, trace paper, coated paper
Maximum tray capacity 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2 trays
D. Maintenance

E. Machine data
Power source 230 VAC, DCS 5V (5V DCS is supplied from the main body.)
(for metric area) AC100, 240V, DC5V (DC5V is supplied from the main body.)
Power source 200 VAC, DCS 5V (5V DCS is supplied from the main body.)
(for inch area)
Maximum power consump- 180 VA or less
tion
(The main tray is not included in the width)
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
4 1
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 2. UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
FD-501
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
fd501to1001c
[1] PI section [4] Folding conveyance section

[2] Conveyance section [5] Main tray section
[3] Punch section [6] Sub tray section
5
3. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
3. PAPER PATH
A. Straight mode
FD-501
[1]
[2]
fd501to1002c
[1] Paper through from the PI [2] Paper through from the main body paper exit
6
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 3. PAPER PATH
B. Sub tray mode
FD-501
[1]
[2]
fd501to1003c
[1] Paper through from the PI [2] Paper through from the main body paper exit
7
C. Punch mode (L and S sizes)

FD-501
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1004c
[1] Paper through from the PI [5] Paper exit to the main tray, paper through to
[2] Paper through from the main body paper exit the next option
[3] In the case of a L size [6] Paper exit to the sub tray
[4] In the case of a S size
8
D. Z-fold mode
FD-501
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1005c
[1] Paper through from the PI [5] Paper exit to the main tray, paper through
[2] Paper through from the main body paper exit to the next option
[3] 1st folding [6] Paper exit to the sub tray
[4] 2nd folding
9
E. Letter fold-out mode

FD-501
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1006c
[4] 2nd folding
10
F. Letter fold-in/double parallel fold mode
FD-501
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1007c
[4] 2nd folding
11
G. Gate fold mode

FD-501
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1008c
[1] Paper through from the PI [5] 3rd folding

[2] Paper through from the main body paper exit [6] Paper exit to the main tray, paper through
[3] 1st folding to the next option
[4] 2nd folding [7] Paper exit to the sub tray
12
H. Folding mode
FD-501
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1009c
[3] Folding [5] Paper exit to the sub tray
13
FD-501
Blank page
14
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
FD-501
4.1 Composition
Entrance gate
Sub tray gate
Alignment plate /Fr,

/Rr
S size gate
L size gate
fd501to2001c
1 15
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
4.2 Drive
4.2.1 Conveyance drive
FD-501
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501to2002c
[1] Main tray paper exit motor (M17) [3] Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
[2] Intermediate conveyance motor (M3) [4] Punch conveyance motor (M2)
16
4.2.2 Gate drive
FD-501
[18]
[1]
[17]
[16]
[2]
[3]
[15]
[4]
[14]
[5]
[13] [6]
[7]
[12]
[8]
[9]
[11] [10]
fd501to2003c
[1] Entrance gate [10] Vertical conveyance roller /4

[2] Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) [11] L size gate solenoid (SD4)
[3] Vertical conveyance roller /1 [12] L size gate
[4] Roller solenoid /1 (SD5) [13] S size gate solenoid (SD3)
[5] Roller solenoid /2 (SD6) [14] S size gate
[6] Vertical conveyance roller /2 [15] Sub tray gate solenoid (SD9)
[7] Vertical conveyance roller /3 [16] Sub tray gate
[8] Roller solenoid /3 (SD7) [17] Sub tray paper exit roller
[9] Roller solenoid /4 (SD8) [18] Paper exit solenoid (SD12)
17
4.2.3 Alignment drive

FD-501
[1]
[2]
[4] [3] fd501to2004c
[1] Alignment motor (M12) [3] Alignment plate /Rr

[2] Belt [4] Alignment plate /Fr
18
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Conveyance path switching
FD-501
The conveyance path of the paper that has been conveyed to the entrance guide plate varies according to the
presence of a punch or folding, the tray into which paper is exited, and the paper size. The switching of the con-
veyance path is made by the entrance gate, the sub tray gate, the S size gate, the L size gate and the folding
gate. (For the folding gate, see "6. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION.")
A. Entrance gate
Switching is made between the straight conveyance and the punch/folding conveyance by the entrance gate
solenoid (SD1). In the case of the straight conveyance, the SD1 remains OFF.
When conveying the 1st sheet of paper for punching/folding operation, SD1 is energized a specified period of
time after the start button is turned ON.
For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, SD1 is energized in accord with the conveyance direction of
the succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the FD entrance sensor (PS1).
[3]
[1]
[2]
fd501to2005c
[1] Entrance gate [3] Straight mode

[2] Punch mode or folding mode
19
B. Sub tray gate

Switching is made between the main tray paper exit and the sub tray paper exit by the sub tray gate solenoid
(SD9). In the case of the main tray paper exit, the SD9 remains OFF.
FD-501
When exiting the 1st sheet of paper into the sub tray, switch the SD9 a specified period of time after the start
button is turned ON.
For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, SD9 is energized in accord with the paper exit direction of the
succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13).
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501to2006c
[1] Sub tray gate [3] Sub tray paper exit

[2] Main tray paper exit
20
C. S size gate
Switching is made according to the paper size and the presence of folding. The drive of the gate is made by S
size gate solenoid (SD3). In the punch mode with no folding and in the case of the S size paper, SD3 remains
FD-501
OFF.
When conducting the folding operation or when feeding the 1st sheet of large size paper, switch SD3 a specified
period of time after the start button is turned ON.
For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, switch the SD9 in accord with the paper exit direction of the
succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the punch conveyance sensor (PS5).
S size paper: The length in the sub scan direction is 216 mm or less.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2007e
[1] S size gate [3] Punch conveyance sensor (PS5)

[2] In the case of the folding (regardless of the [4] In the case of the S size paper with a punch
presence of a punch) only
21
D. L size gate
When folding the paper, the conveyance path is switched back and forth for each paper conveyance to prevent
the succeeding paper from coming into contact with the trailing edge of the L size paper that is in folding pro-
FD-501
cess.
The drive of the gate is made by the L size gate solenoid (SD4).
L size paper: The length in the sub scan direction is 216 mm or more.
[1]
[2]
fd501to2008c
[1] L size gate (SD4-OFF position) [2] Punch registration sensor (PS6)
22
For the control of the L size gate, SD4 stands by at the OFF position (outer path) for the 1st sheet of paper to
pass through.
The 1st sheet of paper turns ON SD4 a specified period of time after the punch registration sensor (PS6) turns
FD-501
ON, and makes the switch to the inner path.
When the 2nd sheet of paper turns ON PS6, SD4 turns OFF after a specified period of time to make the switch
to the outer path.
The above operations are repeated for each sheet of paper.
L size gate solenoid (SD4)

Paper passes Outer path
through the L size
gate Inner path
Punch registration sensor (PS6)
fd501to2039c
4.3.2 Conveyance line speed control

The conveyance line speed of each conveyance section varies according to the type of paper and paper weight.
A. Line speed switching

The following list shows each of conveyance sections and the range of the conveyance line speed.
Conveyance section Conveyance line speed

Entrance conveyance section 290 to 1000 mm/s
Intermediate conveyance section 800 to 1000 mm/s
Punch conveyance section 490 to 1000 mm/s
Main tray paper exit section 205 to 1000 mm/s
Sub tray paper exit section 500 mm/s
23
4.3.3 Alignment control

On paper conveyed to the punching position, an alignment operation is made by the 2 alignment plates to
improve the accuracy of the punch hole positioning and the folding. And its home position is detected by the
FD-501
alignment plate home sensor (PS10). When the start button is turned ON, M12 rotates in the forward direction to
move the alignment plates /Fr and /Rr to the standby position of the paper size.
When the paper is conveyed to the punch position in a specified number of steps after it passes through the FD
entrance sensor (PS1), the roller solenoid /1 (SD5), the roller solenoid /2 (SD6), the roller solenoid /3 (SD7) and
the roller solenoid /4 (SD8) release the pressure of each roller and M12 conducts the alignment operation.
The roller solenoids that release each of the rollers from pressure are modified according to the size and the
direction of paper aligned.
A specified period of time after completion of punching the last paper, M12 rotates in the reverse direction to
bring the alignment plate back to the home position.
FD entrance sensor (PS1)
Punch conveyance motor (M2)
F
Alignment
motor (M12) R
Roller solenoid (SD5, 6, 7, 8)
[1] [2] [3] [4] fd501to2040c
[1] Start signal ON [3] Alignment operation

[2] Move to the standby position [4] Move to the home position
24
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 5. PUNCH SECTION
5. PUNCH SECTION
5.1 Composition
FD-501
Punch rear claw
Punch hole switching

Punch scraps box mechanism
fd501to2009c
1 25
5. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
5.2 Drive
5.2.1 Rear registration drive
FD-501
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501to2010c
[1] Punch registration motor (M13) [3] Punch rear claw

[2] Paper
26
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 5. PUNCH SECTION
5.2.2 Punch drive
FD-501
[8] [9] [10]
[7] [1]
[6] [3] [2]
[5] [4] fd501to2011c
[1] Rotation when punching 3 holes (as seen from the front) [6] Eccentric cam
[2] Rotation when punching 2 holes (as seen from the front) [7] Front direction
[3] Punch motor (M10) [8] 3-hole punch edge
[4] 2-hole punch edge [9] Eccentric cam
[5] One-way gear (2-hole punch) [10] One-way gear (3-hole punch)
5.3 Operation
A. Punch control
Punching is made by holding down the trailing edge of paper with the punch rear claw that is driven by the
punch registration motor (M13), while driving the eccentric cam by the punch motor (M10).
After alignment operations, the roller solenoids /1 to /4 are turned ON to let paper be placed in the unfixed con-
dition. The paper, however, is held by the curvature of the conveyance section. And then, the punch registration
motor (M13) rotates a specified number of steps and the punch rear claw holds the trailing edge of paper to
move it to the punching position. After a specified period of time, the punch motor (M10) drives for punching.
After completion of punching, M13 returns the punch rear claw to the home position. The position of the home
position is detected by the punch registration home sensor (PS11).
B. Punch hole switching control

The punch hole is switched according to the rotational direction of the punch motor (M10).
In the case of 2 holes, M10 rotates counterclockwise to drive the 2-hole punch edge. And in the case of 3 holes,
M10 rotates clockwise to drive the 3-hole punch edge.
The position of the 2-hole punch edge is detected by the 2-hole punch home sensor (PS8) and the position of
the 3-hole punch edge is detected by the 3-hole/4-hole punch home sensor (PS9).
27
5. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
C. Punch scraps box control

The setting of the punch scraps box is detected by the punch scraps box set sensor (PS12), and the full condi-
tion of the punch scraps box is detected by the punch scraps full sensor (PS26).
FD-501
28
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 6. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION
6. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION

6.1 Composition
FD-501
3rd folding
mechanism
2nd folding
mechanism
Folding gate
1st folding
mechanism
Registration roller
fd501to2012c
1 29
6. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
6.2 Drive
6.2.1 Conveyance drive
FD-501
[1]
[2]
M6
M5
[4]
[3]
M4
fd501to2013c
[1] Coupling [3] Folding gate

[2] The pulley operates as an idler due to the [4] Folding gate solenoid (SD15)
bearing
30
6.2.2 Folding drive
FD-501
[1]
M16
[2]
[3]
M15
[4]
[5]
M14
[6]
fd501to2014c
[1] 3rd folding roller /1 mounting board [4] 2nd folding guide
[2] 3rd folding guide [5] 1st folding roller /1 mounting board
[3] 2nd folding roller /1 mounting board [6] 1st folding guide
31
6.3 Operation
FD-501
The paper that has passes through the punch registration sensor (PS6) and arrives at the folding conveyance
section is pressed against the registration roller to make adjustments for skew. A specified period of time after
the PS6 turns ON, the 1st folding motor (M4) resumes the conveyance of paper. When no folding operation is
made, no registration control is made.
However, no folding is made on the paper that has entered the folding conveyance section from the folding
entrance sensor side. The paper is conveyed vertically as is and exited to the main tray or the sub tray.
[3]
[1]
[2]
fd501to2015c
[1] Punch registration sensor (PS6) [3] Folding entrance sensor (PS52)
[2] Registration roller
32

Switching is made between the 2nd folding conveyance path and the 3rd folding conveyance path by the fold-
ing gate solenoid (SD15).
FD-501
In the case of other than the Z-fold, a specified period of time after the 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51)
turns ON, SD15 turns ON to convey the paper to the 2nd folding after the 1st folding. In the case of the Z-fold,
SD15 remains OFF and the paper is conveyed to the 3rd folding after the 1st folding.
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501to2016c
[1] In the case of other than the Z-fold [3] In the case of the Z-fold
[2] Folding gate
33
Timing chart of the 1st folding roller /1 (Other folding rollers are also controlled in the same manner.)
FD-501
Roller solenoid /4 (SD8)
1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51)
1st folding motor (M4)
Conveyance
1st folding roller /1
Folding
1st folding release motor (M14)
2nd folding motor (M5)
[1] [2] fd501to2041c
[1] Change of the 1st folding roller /1 to the [2] Change of the 1st folding roller /1 to the
folding position conveyance position
34
6.3.3 1st folding control

A. Conveyance/folding switching control
The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 1st folding roller /1. This switching is
FD-501
made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 1st folding release motor (M14).
After the 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps.
While the paper is being conveyed, the 1st folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since
these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear [2].
After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps, M14 rotates until it gets to a specified number of
steps. This rotates the eccentric cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 1st
folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when M14 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the
1st roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 1st roller /1 and 1st roller /2 to contact each other closely to rotate 1st
roller /1. get the gears engaged.
The phases of the 1st folding roller gears /1 [1] and the 1st folding roller gears /2 [3] are not aligned in the depth
direction. Therefore, they do not engage with each other after the idle gear [2] has been separated.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3] [4]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501to2017c
[1] 1st folding roller gear /1 [4] 1st folding roller gear /2
[2] Idle gear [5] Eccentric cam
[3] Idle gear arm [6] Seen from the FD side
1 35
And in parallel with this, when the 1st folding release motor (M14) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls
the folding guide [2] to the right side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clear-
ance between the 1st folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be
FD-501
folded.
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2018c
[1] 1st folding roller /1 [3] 1st folding roller /2

[2] Folding guide
36
6.3.4 2nd folding control

The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 2nd folding roller /1. This switching is
FD-501
made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 2nd folding release motor (M15).
After the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of
steps. While the paper is being conveyed, the 2nd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direc-
tion since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear [2].
steps. This rotates the eccentric cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 2nd
2nd roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 2nd roller /1 [1] and 2nd roller /2 to contact each other closely to rotate
the 2nd roller /1.
The phases of the 2nd folding roller gears /1 [1] and the 2nd folding roller gears /2 [3] are not aligned in the
depth direction. Therefore, they do not engage with each other after the idle gear [2] has been separated.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[5] [6]
fd501to2019c
[1] 2nd folding roller gear /1 [4] 2nd folding roller gear /2
1 37
And in parallel with this, when the 2nd folding release motor (M15) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls
the folding guide [2] to the right side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clear-
ance between the 2nd folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be
FD-501
folded.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2020c
[1] 2nd folding roller /1 [3] 2nd folding roller /2

[2] Folding guide [4] Direction of paper exit
38
B. Gate fold assist control

In the case of the Gate fold, the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) turns ON a specified period of time after the
1st folding motor (M14) starts folding. When SD18 starts up, the 2nd roller is pressed firmly. This is a measure
FD-501
taken to avoid a multiple fold that is apt to occur at the folding section of paper when the 2nd folding is made.
fd501to2021c
39
6.3.5 3rd folding control

The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 3rd folding roller /1. This switching is
FD-501
made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 3rd folding release motor (M16).
After the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps.
While the paper is being conveyed, the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since
these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear [2].
steps. This rotates the eccentric cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 3rd
3rd roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 3rd roller /1 [1] and 3rd roller /2 to contact each other closely to
rotate the 3rd roller /1. The plases of the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and the 3rd folding roller gears /2 [3] are
not aligned in the depth direction. Therefore, they do not engage with each other the idle gear [2] has been sep-
arated.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
fd501to2022c
[1] 3rd folding roller gear /1 [4] 3rd folding roller gear /2
40 1
And in parallel with this, when the 3rd folding release motor (M16) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls
the folding guide [2] to the left side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clear-
ance between the 3rd folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be
FD-501
folded.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501to2023
[1] 3rd folding roller /1 [3] 3rd folding roller /2

[2] Folding guide [4] Direction of paper exit
41
7. MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
7. MAIN TRAY SECTION

7.1 Composition
FD-501
Main tray
Main tray paper exit

sensor (PS18)
Main tray upper

limit sensor (PS20)
Main tray paper full

sensor (PS7)
Main tray lower limit

sensor (PS22)
fd501to2035c
42 1
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 7. MAIN TRAY SECTION
7.2 Drive
FD-501
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2036c
[1] Main tray [3] Tray up/down motor (M11)

[2] Up/down wire
43
7. MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Main tray up/down control
FD-501
The up/down operation of the main tray is controlled by rotating the tray up/down motor (M11) in the normal or
reverse direction.
A. Main tray paper detection

A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS18) turns ON, M11 starts up to bring down
the main tray until the main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) turns OFF, and then bring it up again until PS20 turns
ON.
After the paper is exited, PS20 maintains the distance between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main
tray (the surface of the main tray when no paper exited) and the paper exit opening at a fixed distance to prevent
the paper exited from having an uneven edge.
B. Switching the operation of the main tray

The main tray is set so that it normally does not operate.
When letting the main tray operate, insert the short connector [2] into the CN90 [1].
Caution:
• Letting the main tray operate with the next option connected may cause damages to the machine.
Be absolutely sure not to connect the short connector.
[2]
[1]
fd501to2037c
44
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 8. SUB TRAY SECTION
8. SUB TRAY SECTION

8.1 Composition
FD-501
Sub tray paper full sensor (PS17)
fd501to2024c
1 45
8. SUB TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
8.2 Drive
FD-501
[1]
[3]
M3
[2]
fd501to2025c
[1] Paper exit solenoid (SD12) [3] Sub tray paper exit roller
[2] Sub tray paper exit roller
46
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 8. SUB TRAY SECTION
8.3 Operation
8.3.1 Sub tray full detection control
FD-501
When the paper that has been exited in the sub tray gets to a specified thickness, the sub tray paper full sensor
(PS17) [2] turns OFF, and the "sub tray paper full" information is sent to the main body. Upon receipt of this infor-
mation, the main body displays the message on the operation LCD.
When the folded paper on the sub tray is unfolded and the sub tray paper full sensor (PS46) [1] turns ON, the
"sub tray paper full" information is also sent to the main body.
[1]
[2]
fd501to2026c
[1] Sub tray folding paper full sensor (PS46) [2] Sub tray paper full sensor (PS17)
8.3.2 Line speed switching

Paper conveyed by the intermediate conveyance motor (M3) is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited
into the sub tray.
Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS10)

Intermediate [2]
conveyance
motor (M3) Deceleration
[1] fd501to2042c
[1] Deceleration of the intermediate conveyance [2] High speed rotation

motor (M3)
* The time period up to the deceleration can be changed by the system speed on the main body side.
47
9. PI SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
9. PI SECTION
9.1 Composition
FD-501
Paper pick-up mechanism
Manual operation
Paper separation
mechanism
Multi feed sensor

Paper set sensor
Paper size VR
(main scan direc-
tion)
Paper size sensor
(sub scan direc-
Lift plate tion)
fd501to2027c
48 1
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 9. PI SECTION
9.2 Drive
FD-501
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2028c
[1] Paper lift motor /Up (M8) [3] PI lift plate /Lw
[2] Paper lift motor /Lw (M9) [4] PI lift plate /Up
49
[10] [11]
FD-501
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to2029c
[1] Separation roller /Up [7] Pick-up roller /Lw

[2] PI registration clutch /Up (CL1) [8] PI conveyance motor (M7)
[3] PI registration clutch /Lw (CL2) [9] Rotational direction of separation roller /Up
[4] Separation roller /Lw [10] Pick-up roller /Up
[5] Rotational direction of separation roller /Lw [11] Paper feed roller /Up
[6] Paper feed roller /Lw
50
9.2.3 Pick-up drive
[5] [1]
FD-501
[2]
[3]
[4] fd501to2030c
[1] Spring [4] PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw

[2] Direction of spring force (SD14)
[3] Release arm [5] Pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw
51
9.3 Operation
FD-501
For the size detection of a paper, there are the following two directions for each of the tray /Up and the tray /Lw:
that is, the main scan direction and the sub scan direction.
The size detection in the sub scan, when the PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) [6] turn ON, is
made by the following 3 sensors: PI maximum size sensors /Up (PS47) and /Lw (PS48) [1], L size sensors /Up
(PS35) and /Lw (PS41) [2] and S size sensors /Up (PS36) and /Lw (PS42) [3].
When the PS44 and PS45 are OFF, the tray is judged "paper empty."
The size detection in the main scan is made by the paper size VR /Up (VR31) and /Lw (VR32) [4] that are inter-
locked with the paper regulation plate [5].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5] fd501to2031c
[1] PI maximum size sensors /Up (PS47) and / [4] Paper size VR /Up (VR31) and /Lw (VR32)
Lw (PS48) [5] Paper regulation plate
[2] L size sensors /Up (PS35) and /Lw (PS41) [6] PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw
[3] S size sensors /Up (PS36) and /Lw (PS42) (PS45)
52

For the up/down of the tray, when the paper lift motors /Up (M8) [1] and /Lw (M9) [7] rotate in the normal and
reverse directions, the lift arms /Up [11] and /Lw [9] start up to bring up and down the PI lift plates /Up [12] and
FD-501
/Lw [10]. The lower limit position is detected by the PI lift plate home sensors /Up (PS34) [2] and /Lw (PS40) [8].
The upper limit position is detected by the PI upper limit sensors /Up (PS32) [4] and /Lw (PS38) [6] at the posi-
tion to which the actuators /Up [3] and /Lw [5] are pushed up by the PI lift plate.
When the PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) are ON with the main body start button ON, M8 and
M9 turn ON to bring up the PI lift plate. When PS32 and PS38 turn ON, M8 and M9 stop.
While in the copy/print operation, when PS32 and PS38 turn OFF from ON, M8 and M9 turn ON again to bring
up the plate until PS32 and PS38 turn ON.
When PS44 and PS45 turn OFF with no paper left, M8 and M9 make a reverse rotation to move down the PI lift
plate until PS34 and PS40 turn ON.
[12] [1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[9] [8] [7] fd501to2032c
[1] Paper lift motor /Up (M8) [7] Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
[2] PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34) [8] PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40)
[3] Actuator /Up [9] Lift arm /Lw
[4] PI upper limit sensor /Up (PS32) [10] PI lift plate /Lw
[5] Actuator /Lw [11] Lift arm /Up
[6] PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38) [12] PI lift plate /Up
53

The picking-up of the paper [6] is made when the PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw (SD14) [5] turn ON.
The release arm that is pressed down by the spring [1] in the direction of [2] presses down the paper feed arm
FD-501
[4] to place the pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw [7] in the release condition. When SD13 and SD14 [5] turn ON, the
release arm is released upward and the pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw [7] go down by their own weight. The pick-
up roller that is rotated by the PI conveyance motor (M7) presses down the paper to pick it up.
[6] [7] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5] fd501to2033c
[1] Spring [5] PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw

[2] Direction of the spring force (SD14)
[3] Release arm [6] Paper
[4] Paper feed arm [7] Pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw
Paper feed arm retaining lever [1] is provided in the pick-up roller section to prevent multi feed.
By moving the paper feed arm retaining levers [1] on the front and back inward, the pick-up rollers on the front
and back are secured while the roller in the middle presses against paper.
Multi feed is prevented by reducing the pressure against paper when feeding papers.
[1]
[2] fd501to2044c
54 1

The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance [2]. However, when no paper
is conveyed or only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller
FD-501
[1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation roller is greater than the frictional force of the
torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller [4] rotates in the direction of the paper conveyance [2] to con-
vey paper to the vertical conveyance section.
the frictional force of the torque limiter [3] and the separation roller [4] rotates in the reverse direction to prevent
the lower most paper from being conveyed.
When the PI registration clutches /Up (CL1) and /Lw (CL2) turn ON according to the PI paper feed demand sig-
nal, the paper feed roller [1], the separation roller [4], and the pick-up roller [7] rotate to convey the paper one at
a time.
[7] [1]
[6]
[2]
[5] [4]
[3]
fd501to2034c
[1] Paper feed rollers /Up and /Lw [5] 2nd sheet of paper
[2] Conveyance direction of a sheet of paper [6] 1st sheet of paper
[3] Torque limiter [7] Pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw
[4] Separation rollers /Up and /Lw
55
9.3.5 Multi feed detection control

To detect a multi feed while in the PI paper feed, the PI conveyance path is provided with the multi feed sensor.
The multi feed sensor is a ultrasonic sensor made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver. This sensor receives
FD-501
ultrasonic waves sent from the multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) [1] by the multi feed detection board /2
(MFDB2) [2].
Based on the difference in the amount of ultrasonic waves received when a single sheet of paper [1] and the plu-
ral sheets of paper [4] pass through between the sender and the receiver, a check is made to see if paper has
been multi fed or not.
The multi feed detection function turns ON (operates) when the LED on the lower side is turned on by the multi
feed detection function selection button on the FD operation board (FDOB) and when no selection is made. And
it turns OFF (does not operate) when the LED on the upper side is turned on.
[3] [4]
[2] [1] [5] fd501to2038c
[1] Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) [4] More than one sheet of paper
[2] Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [5] Layer of air
[3] One sheet of paper

The detection of the presence of paper in the tray section while in the print stop is made by the PI empty sen-
sors /Up (PS33) and /Lw (PS39). And also, the paper empty detection while in the print is made by the PI set
sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) to stop the paper feed from the trays /1 to /5 when PS44 and PS45 detect
the trailing edge of the last paper.
56
LS-501/502
2006.09
Ver. 2.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
page.
NOTE

Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 CONTENTS
CONTENTS
LS-501/502
LS-501/502
OUTLINE
3. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.1 Door open/close mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.3.1 Path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.3.2 Conveyance line speed control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.2.1 Stacker tray/sub tray conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.2.2 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.2.3 Stacker tray up down drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.2.4 Shift unit/alignment plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.2.5 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6.2.6 Front stopper/paper press arm drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.3.2 Coupling conveyance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.3.3 Sub tray conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
LS-501/502
Blank page
ii
OUTLINE
LS-501/502
A. Type
Type Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker

Conveyance method Entrance convey- Roller conveyance method
ance
Stacker tray con- Grip conveyance method
veyance
Sub tray convey- Roller conveyance method
ance
Coupling convey- Roller conveyance (LS-501 only)
ance
Alignment method Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)
Method of stacking Horizontal stack- Mixing of original sizes not allowed (stacker tray only)
ing
Shifting method Conveyance Shift amount: 20 mm (stacker tray only)
direction shift
B. Functions
Mode Stacker tray non- Exited into the stacker tray with no processing made.
sort mode
Sub tray mode Exited into the sub tray with no processing made.
Stacker tray sort Exited into the stacker tray after being shifted (20mm).
mode
Coupling mode Exited into the post-processing unit with no processing
made.
Maximum number of Stacker tray 5,000 sheets (80 g/m2)
sheets loadable Sub tray 200 sheets (80 g/m2)
1 1
C. Type of paper
Paper size Stacker tray • When 5,000 sheets loaded

LS-501/502
SRA3*2, A3, B4, SRA4*2, SRA4S*2, A4, A4S

13 x 19*2, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*3, 16K*3
Wide paper*1 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18,
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2,
size entry : (Max. 324 x 460 mm)
• When 3,000 sheets loaded
Coated paper (Sub-scan direction is 380 mm or longer)
Custom paper*2 : (Max. 330 x 483 mm,
Min.210 x 148mm)
• When 2,000 sheets loaded
B5, A5
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

Sub tray SRA3*2, A3, B4, SRA4*2, SRA4S*2, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5,
A5S*2, B6S*2, A6S*2
13 x 19*2, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1, 51/2 x 81/2S*2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*3, 16K*3, 16KS*3
Tab paper*4 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S,
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
Custom paper*2 : (Max. 330 x 487 mm,
Min. 100 x 148 mm)
Wide paper*1 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2, size entry : (Max.324 x
460 mm)
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

*4 C6500: only A4 and 81/2 x11. Operation of paper exit
with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured.
Paper weight Stacker tray 50 sheets to 244 g/m2
Sub tray 50 sheets to 300 g/m2
2 1
D. Maintenance
LS-501/502
E. Machine data
Power source LS-501 AC100 to 240V (DC5V is supplied from the main body)
LS-502 24V DC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consump- 143W or less
tion
Dimensions 785 (W) x 723 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
Humidity 10 to 80%RH
Note
3
2. UNIT COMPOSITION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
LS-501/502
[8] [9] [10] [1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5] ls502to1001c
[1] Shift unit [6] Stacker tray conveyance section

[2] 1st gate [7] Coupling conveyance section
[3] Entrance conveyance section [8] Sub tray
[4] Stacker tray [9] Sub tray conveyance section
[5] Hand cart [10] 2nd gate
4
3. PAPER PATH
LS-501/502
[3]
[2]
[1]
ls502to1002c
[1] Stacker tray non-sort/sort mode [3] Sub tray mode

[2] Coupling mode
5
LS-501/502
Blank page
6
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 4. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION
LS-501/502
4. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.1 Composition
Coupling conveyance Entrance convey-

lock solenoid (SD11) ance lock solenoid
(LS-501 only) (SD5)
Front door lock

solenoid (SD4)
ls502to2001c
4.2 Drive
[4] [1]
[3] [2] ls502to2002c
[1] Entrance conveyance lock solenoid (SD5) [3] Coupling jam release lever
[2] Entrance jam release lever [4] Coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11)
1 7
4. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
4.3 Operation
LS-501/502
4.3.1 Door open/close mechanism

While the LS is in operation, the front door is locked by the front door lock solenoid (SD4), thus making it impos-
sible to open and close it. However, while in the coupling conveyance (coupling mode) or while exiting paper into
the sub tray (sub tray mode), the front door can be opened and closed.
Pressing the paper removing switch on the stacker tray operation board (TOB) brings down the stacker tray.
And when the stacker tray arm release sensor (PS15) is turn on, SD4 turns off immediately.
The lock is released due to SD4 being turned off and the front door can be opened and closed.
4.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism

The entrance guide plate and the coupling guide plate are provided with a jam release lever to release jams. The
operation of each of the jam release levers is made by the entrance conveyance lock solenoid (SD5) and the
coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11).
ON/OFF timing of SD5 and SD11
Operation timing
ON When the stacker tray goes up, and while in printing
(Lock)
OFF While in standing by, when the stacker tray goes down after completion of printing,
(Release) and when the front door is open (except in coupling mode and in sub tray mode)
8
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006 5. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION
5. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION
LS-501/502
5.1 Composition
Paper cooling fan

Paper cooling fan motor (FM4)
motor /2 (FM6) 2nd gate
Paper cooling fan

motor /1 (FM2)
1st gate
Paper cooling fan

motor /Rr (FM5)
Paper cooling fan

motor /Fr (FM1)
Paper cooling fan

motor /Mi (FM3)
ls502to2003c
1 9
5. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Sep.2006
5.2 Drive
LS-501/502
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[8] [7] [6] [5] ls502to2004c
[1] 2nd gate solenoid (SD10) [5] Entrance roller

[2] Coupling conveyance roller /2 [6] 1st gate
[3] Conveyance motor (M2) [7] Coupling conveyance roller /1
[4] 1st gate solenoid (SD1) [8] 2nd gate
10
5.3 Operation
LS-501/502
5.3.1 Path switching
The path along which paper conveyed to the entrance guide plate is conveyed varies according to the operation
mode. The switching of the conveyance path is made by the 1st gate and the 2nd gate.
A. 1st gate
The switching of the conveyance path is made between the stacker tray paper exit (stacker tray non-sort mode
and stacker tray sort mode) and the sub tray paper exit (sub tray mode) and the coupling conveyance (coupling
mode).
[1]
[3] [2] ls502to2005c
[1] Sub tray mode/coupling mode [3] Stacker tray non-sort mode/stacker tray
[2] 1st gate sort mode
11
B. 2nd gate
The conveyance path is switched between the sub tray paper exit (sub tray mode) and the coupling conveyance
LS-501/502
(coupling mode).
[2] [3]
[1] ls502to2006c
[1] Coupling mode [3] 2nd gate

[2] Sub tray mode
12
5.3.2 Conveyance line speed control

The conveyance process speed of the entrance roller and the coupling conveyance rollers 1/ and 2/ that are
LS-501/502
driven by the conveyance motor (M2) varies according to the conveyance process speed of the main body.
These operations are common to all the modes.
A. When the main body process speed is 1000 mm/s:
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Entrance sensor (PS4)
Conveyance motor 1000 mm/s

(M2)
490 mm/s
ls502to2007c
[1] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON [3] 2nd sheet of paper
[2] 1st sheet of paper [4] 3rd sheet of paper
B. When the main body process speed is 490 mm/s:
[1] [2] [3] [4]

(M2)
490 mm/s
ls502to2008c
[2] 1st sheet of paper [4] 3rd sheet of paper
13
5.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism

Paper conveyed to the LS is likely to curl up due to fusing heat.
LS-501/502
Heat storage accumulated in paper stacked during continuous printing may cause tacking (sheets of paper
sticking hard each other by toner) when toner that has been fused is re-fused and adheres. So, fresh air is blown
on the paper from under the entrance guide plate and above the path guide of the upper surface of the paper
stack section, thus cooling down the paper to correct curling and prevent tacking.
[4] [5]
[3] [2] [1] ls502to2028c
[1] Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) [4] Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
[2] Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) [5] Paper cooling fan motor /2 (FM6)
[3] Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1)
14
LS-501/502
6.1 Composition
Paper press sole-
noid /3 (SD8)
Decurler roller
Paper empty
sensor (PS6) Paper press arm
Grip belt
Paper empty
Front stopper detection actuator Job partition Paddler
solenoid (SD9) plate
Sub tray full
sensor (PS9)
Conveyance sen-
sor /3 (PS17)
Paper detection
sensor (PS19)
Guide plate
Hand cart
ls502to2009c
1 15
6.2 Drive
LS-501/502
6.2.1 Stacker tray/sub tray conveyance drive
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] ls502to2010c
[1] Sub tray paper exit motor (M3) [4] Paddler

[2] Conveyance motor (M2) [5] Sub tray conveyance roller
[3] Decurler roller [6] Sub tray paper exit roller
16
6.2.2 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive
LS-501/502
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]
[14]
[15]
[7]
[6]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] ls502to2011c
: LS-501 only
[1] Paper press arm /1 [9] Coupling conveyance roller /5 : LS-501 only
[2] Stacker tray paper empty detection actuator [10] Paper press solenoid /2 (SD7)
[3] Grip belt [11] Coupling conveyance roller /4 : LS-501 only
[4] Grip conveyance motor (M4) [12] Paper press arm /2
[5] Coupling conveyance motor (M6) : LS-501 only [13] Coupling conveyance roller /3
[6] Coupling paper exit roller : LS-501 only [14] Coupling conveyance motor (M6) : LS-502 only
[7] Coupling conveyance roller /7 : LS-501 only [15] Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6)
[8] Coupling conveyance roller /6 : LS-501 only
17
6.2.3 Stacker tray up down drive

LS-501/502
[4] [5]
[1]
[3]
[2] ls501t2c001a
[1] Wire [4] Stacker tray

[2] Belt [5] Stacker tray up down arm
[3] Stacker tray up down motor (M1)
18 1
6.2.4 Shift unit/alignment plate drive

LS drawing as seen from above. On the right side is the main body.
LS-501/502
[5] [6]
[1]
[4] [3] [2] ls502to2013c
[1] Guide rail [4] Shift unit

[2] Alignment plate [5] Shift unit motor (M5)
[3] Alignment motor (M7) [6] Guide rail
19
6.2.5 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive

LS-501/502
[1]
[4]
[3] [2] ls502to2014c
[1] Rear stopper [3] Rear stopper solenoid (SD3)

[2] Job partition plate [4] Job partition solenoid (SD2)
20
6.2.6 Front stopper/paper press arm drive
LS-501/502
[2] [1]
[2] [1]
[3]
[6] [4]
[5]
[4]
ls502to2015c
[1] Spring [4] Spring

[2] Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) [5] Front stopper
[3] Paper press arm /3 [6] Front stopper solenoid (SD9)
21
6.3 Operation
LS-501/502
6.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance

While in the stacker tray non-sort mode and the stacker tray sort mode, paper is conveyed into the stacker tray.
A. Decurler
Paper that has passed through the 1st gate is conveyed to the grip belt by the decurler roller. At this time, the
correction of curled paper is made by the decurler roller.
B. Grip conveyance
Paper conveyed by the decurler roller enters and is help by the grip provided on the grip belt. The paper held by
the grip is conveyed to the section above the stacker tray by the rotation of the grip belt.
Two grips are provided on the grip belt and each one of them conveys paper one after the other. The position
where the grip is waiting for paper from the decurler roller is controlled by the grip conveyance home sensor
(PS5).
[5] [6] [7]
[4] [3] [2] [1] ls502to2016c
[1] Paper [5] Grip

[2] Decurler roller [6] Grip belt
[3] Grip [7] Grip conveyance home sensor (PS5)
[4] Stacker tray
22
C. Front stopper control

Paper conveyed by the grip strikes against the front stopper equipped to the shift unit and is released from the
LS-501/502
grip. At this time, the shift unit has been moved to the position specified in advance for each paper size.
Two types of the front stoppers, more specifically, a movable type and a stationary type, are employed. In
stacker tray non-sort mode, only the movable type front stopper is employed. A distance of 20 mm is kept
between the position where the movable type front stopper stops and the position in which the stationary type
front stopper is, which is the shift distance.
For the front stopper solenoid (SD9) that drives the movable type front stopper, a latch-type solenoid is
employed that is not required to be energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires
a different control signal for each ON and OFF action.
[8] [9] [10]
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] ls502to2017c
[1] Entrance sensor (PS4) [6] Grip

[2] Paper [7] Stacker tray
[3] Movable type front stopper [8] Grip belt
[4] 20 mm [9] Shift unit
[5] Stationary type front stopper [10] Grip
23
(1) Stacker tray non-sort mode

LS-501/502
[1] [3] [5] [6] [7]
Shift unit motor (M5)
Front stopper Latch ON signal

solenoid (SD9)
Latch OFF signal
[8]
[2] [4] ls502to2018c
[2] The shift unit starts to move [6] 3rd sheet of paper
[3] 1st sheet of paper [7] Last sheet of paper
[4] Movable type front stopper ON [8] Movable type front stopper OFF
(2) Stacker tray sort mode
[1] [3] [5] [6] [8]
Front stopper Latch ON signal

solenoid (SD9)
Latch OFF signal
[10]
[2] [4] [7] [9] ls502to2019c
[1] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON [6] Shift of the 1st sheet of paper
[2] The shift unit starts to move [7] Movable type front stopper OFF
[3] 1st sheet of paper [8] Shift of the last sheet of paper
[4] Movable type front stopper ON [9] Movable type front stopper OFF secured
[5] Last sheet of paper [10] Movable type front stopper OFF secured
24
D. Job partition plate

In stacker tray sort mode, the trailing edge of the shift paper is restricted by the job partition plate and the paper
LS-501/502
is exited onto the stacker tray 20 mm shifted from the non-shift paper. At this time, the upper surface of the non-
shift paper does not come to the same level as the lower edge of the job partition plate and the 1st sheet of the
shift paper is in possibility of getting into the lower side of the job partition plate. To prevent this, the job partition
plate is attached to the upper surface of the non-shift paper that has been exited to restrict the entry of the
paper.
For the job partition solenoid (SD2) that drives the job partition plate, a latch-type solenoid is employed that is
not required to be energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control
signal for each ON and OFF action.
[5]
[4] [3] [2] [1] ls502to2023c
[1] Entrance sensor (PS4) [4] Stacker tray

[2] Job partition plate [5] Shift paper
[3] Non-shift paper
25

Ex.: Letter 4 sheets
LS-501/502
[1] [2] [4] [6] [8]
Job partition Latch ON signal

solenoid (SD2)
Latch OFF signal
[9]
[3] [5] [7] ls502to2021c
[1] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON [6] 3rd sheet of paper
[2] 1st sheet of paper [7] Job partition plate close
[3] Job partition plate close [8] Last sheet of paper
[4] 2nd sheet of paper [9] Job partition plate close
[5] Job partition plate close

[1] [2] [4] [5] [7]
Job partition Latch ON signal

solenoid (SD2)
Latch OFF signal
[3] [6] [8] ls502to2022c
[1] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON [5] 1st sheet of non-shift paper
[2] 1st sheet of shift paper [6] Job partition plate close
[3] Job partition plate open (shift amount: 20 mm) [7] 2nd sheet of non-shift paper
[4] 2nd sheet of shift paper [8] Job partition plate close
26
E. Rear stopper control

While in the stacker tray sort mode is in shifting, the rear stopper is left open and this plays as a guide for the
LS-501/502
trailing edge of paper.
To assist the separation of paper released from the grip, the paddle is rotated at a high speed.
For the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) that drives the rear stopper, a latch-type solenoid is employed that is not
required to be energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control
signal for each ON and OFF action.
[5] [1]
[4] [3] [2] ls502to2020c
[1] Paddler [4] Paper position while in the stacker tray sort mode
[2] Entrance sensor (PS4) [5] Paper position while in the stacker tray non-sort mode
[3] Rear stopper
27

LS-501/502
[1] [2] [5] [8] [11]
Rear stopper Latch ON signal

solenoid (SD3)
Latch OFF signal
[13]
[3] [4] [6] [7] [9] [10] [12] ls502to2029c
[1] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON [8] 3rd sheet of paper
[2] 1st sheet of paper [9] Rear stopper open
[3] Rear stopper open [10] Rear stopper close
[4] Rear stopper close [11] 4th sheet of paper
[5] 2nd sheet of paper [12] Rear stopper open
[6] Rear stopper open [13] Rear stopper close
[7] Rear stopper close

[1] [2] [4] [6] [9]
Rear stopper Latch ON signal

solenoid (SD3)
Latch OFF signal
[11]
[3] [5] [7] [8] [10] ls502to2024c
[1] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON [7] Rear stopper open
[2] Shift of the 1st sheet of paper [8] Rear stopper close
[3] Rear stopper open [9] Non-shift of the 2nd sheet of paper
[4] Shift of the 2nd sheet of paper [10] Rear stopper open
[5] Rear stopper close [11] Rear stopper close
[6] Non-shift of the 1st sheet of paper
28
F. Paper press arm

The paper that has been released from the grip is pressed one at a time onto the stacker tray by the paper pres-
LS-501/502
sure arms /1, /2 and /3 to be loaded on the stacker tray. However, the operation of the paper pressure arm /2 is
limited only to the paper size larger than B4.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6)

ls502to2025c
G. Alignment plate control

Paper loaded on the stacker tray is aligned by the alignment plate for each sheet of paper.
[1] [3] [5] [7] [9]
Alignment motor (M7)

Alignment plate home
sensor (PS12)
[10] [11]
[2] [4] [6] [8] ls502to2026c
[1] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON [6] Alignment of the 2nd sheet of paper
[2] Movement to a position specified for each [7] 3rd sheet of paper
paper size [8] Alignment of the 3rd sheet of paper
[4] Alignment of the 1st sheet of paper [10] Alignment of the last sheet of paper
[5] 2nd sheet of paper [11] Return to the home position
29
H. Stacker tray up down control

The detection of the upper surface of paper loaded on the stacker tray is made by the paper empty sensor (PS6)
LS-501/502
through the paper press arm /3. When PS6 is turned off by loading paper that has been exited, the stacker tray
up down motor (M1) turns on to lower the stacker tray down to the position at which PS6 turns on. The stacker
tray is thus held at a fixed height when paper is being exited.
The number of sheets of paper loaded on the stacker tray is detected by the 2000 sheets stacked sensor
(PS13) and the 5,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS14) provided on the up down path of the stacker tray and dis-
played on the operation panel. (3,000 sheets stacked detection is made by the main unit.)
When the hand cart once pulled out is put back to its original position, the stacker tray moves up to return to its
home position. If the paper detection sensor (PS19) detects that papers are loaded on the stacker tray, the tray
stops moving up in order to prevent the alignment plate from being damaged by the uplifted paper.
I. Hand cart detection mechanism

The set condition of the hand cart is detected by the hand cart set switch (RS1). And the set condition of the
stacker tray is detected by checking to see if the light from the stacker tray set LED (LED1) gets to the stacker
tray set sensor (PS1).
6.3.2 Coupling conveyance

In coupling mode, paper is conveyed to the device connected to the subsequent stage of the LS through the
coupling conveyance section.

When paper is conveyed from the main body, the conveyance motor (M2) at the entrance conveyance section is
rotated at the same speed as the conveyance speed of the main body. When paper is conveyed to the LS, the
speed of rotation of M2 is increased up to 1,000 mm/s to convey paper.
6.3.3 Sub tray conveyance

In sub tray mode, paper is exited into the sub tray.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
1000 mm/s
Sub tray paper exit
motor (M3) 490 mm/s
350 mm/s
ls502to2027c
B. Paper full control

When the number of the sheets of paper discharged on the sub-tray gets to 200, the sub tray full sensor (PS9)
turns on to give indication of "paper full" on the operation panel.
30 1
FS-503
2006.11
Ver. 3.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
page.
NOTE
2006/11 3.0 Specification changes in relation to revision of 1050e

CONTENTS
FS-503
FS-503
OUTLINE
3. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3.1 Conveyance path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5. SUB TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
6. STACKER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.2.1 Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.2.2 Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.2.3 Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.2.4 Alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.3.1 Stacker conveyance speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.3.2 Intermediate roller control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.3.3 Stack assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.3.4 Rear stopper control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.3.6 Stacker paper exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7. STAPLER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.2.1 Stapler movement/rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.2.2 Stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.3.1 Stapler movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.3.2 Staple control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
8. MAIN TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
8.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
8.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8.2.1 Tray up/down drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8.2.2 Main tray paper exit drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8.2.3 Paper exit opening drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
i
8.3.1 Paper exit opening control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

8.3.2 Main tray up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
FS-503
ii
OUTLINE
FS-503
A. Type
Type Staple-cut type multi staple device
B. Functions
(1) Functions
Straight mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Shift mode Exited into the main tray after being shifted.
Sub tray mode Exited into the sub tray with no processing made.
Staple mode Exited into the main tray after being flat-stapled.
Subset staple mode Bundles of flat-stapled sheets of paper and single sheets of paper being exited
at random into the main tray.
(2) Staple
Maximum number of 100 sheets of 50 to 81 g/m2 paper

sheets to be flat-stapled (50 sheets for paper the length of which is 400 mm or longer)
(Plain paper) 60 sheets of 82 to 91 g/m2 paper
(50 sheets for paper the length of which is 400 mm or longer)
50 sheets of 92 to 130 g/m2 paper
Stapling position 1 staple at the rear (45°), 1 staple at the front, and 2 staples at the center
1 1
(3) Maximum number of sheets loadable
Main tray Straight/Shift 3,000 sheets: A4, A4S, B5, B5S

FS-503
(Weighing 50 to 244 g/ 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S

m2 paper length 16K*3, 16KS*3
smaller than -279mm) 1,500 sheets: SRA3*2, A3, B4, SRA4*2, SRA4S*2
(Weighing 50 to 300 g/ 13 x 19*2 (straight only), 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14,
m2 paper length 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
-279mm or larger) 8K*3
wide paper*1: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2,
500 sheets : A5, A5S*2, B6S*2 (straight only),
51/2 x 81/2*1, 51/2 x 81/2S*2
Tab paper*4 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
custom size (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min.
182 x 140 mm)
Custom paper : 1050 (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 182 x 140
mm)
C6500 (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 148 x 148
mm)
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

*4 C6500: only A4 and 81/2 x11. Operation of paper exit with tab
area at the trail edge side is not assured.
Staple mode Staple sheet Set
2 to 9 150 (paper length 182 to 364mm)
75 (other than paper length 182 to 364mm)
10 to 20 50
21 to 30 30
31 to 40 25
41 to 50 20
51 to 60 15
61 to 100 10
2 2
Sub tray SRA3*2, A3, B4, SRA4*2, SRA4S*2 A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S*2, B6S*2, A6S*2
(Weighing 50 to 300 g/ 13 x 19*2, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1, 51/2 x 81/2S*2
m2) 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
FS-503
8K*3, 16K*3, 16KS*3
Tab paper*4 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
custom size (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 182 x 140 mm)
Custom paper : 1050 (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 182 x 140 mm),
C6500 (Max. 330 x 487 mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
Wide paper*1 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2,
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

*4 C6500: only A4 and 81/2 x11. Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail
edge side is not assured.
C. Type of paper
(1) Staple
Paper size SRA3*2, A3, B4, SRA4*2, SRA4S*2, A4, A4S, B5, A5
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*3, 16K*3
Tab paper*4 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, custom size (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min.
182 x 140 mm)
C6500 (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 210 x 148 mm)
Wide paper*1 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2,
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

Applicable paper Plain paper, high-quality paper, book paper
Paper weight Main tray 50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2
D. Maintenance
Maintenance Same as the main body

Machine service life Same as the main body
1 3
E. Machine data
Power source 24/5V DC (supplied from the main body)

FS-503
Maximum power consump- 110VA

tion
Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out: 915 (W) x 656 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
When the main tray is set in: 798 (W) x 656 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
When the main tray is removed: 544 (W) x 656 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
Note
4
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 2. UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
FS-503
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
fs503to1001c
[1] Paper conveyance section [4] Main tray section

[2] Stapler section [5] Sub tray section
[3] Stacker section
1 5
3. PAPER PATH
FS-503
[1]
[2]
[3]
fs503to1002c
[1] Sub tray paper path [3] Main tray paper path (only while in stapling)
[2] Main tray paper path (straight/sort/staple)
6 1
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 1. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION
FS-503
1. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.1 Composition
Tray gate
Bypass gate
fs503to2001c
1 7
1. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
1.2 Drive
[1]
FS-503
[2]
[3] fs503to2002c
[1] Conveyance motor (M1) [3] Bypass solenoid (SD5)

[2] Gate solenoid (SD2)
8
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 1. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.3 Operation
FS-503
A. Tray gate control
The tray gate switches the paper conveyance path between the main tray and the sub tray.
The tray gate is normally set to the conveyance path to the main tray. When paper is exited to the sub tray, how-
ever, the gate is switched to the path to the sub tray through the drive of the solenoid (SD2).
B. Bypass gate control

The bypass gate is provided on the paper path to the stacker section. Even while in the staple operation, the
bypass gate conveys the next page to reduce a loss of time for a high productivity.
The drive of the bypass gate [1] is made by the bypass solenoid (SD5) [2]. The operation of SD5 is limited only to
the small-sized paper (A4, B5 and 81/2 x 11) in the staple mode.
For the 1st page on and after the 2nd copy, paper is sent to the regular route [3]. SD5 operates only on the 2nd
page to send paper to the bypass route [4]. The 1st and 2nd pages are put upon one another to be conveyed to
the stacker simultaneously. On and after the 3rd page, SD5 is released and paper is sent on the regular route a
sheet of paper at a time.
[1] [4]
[1]
[3] [3]
[2] [2]
fs503to2003c
[1] Bypass gate [3] Regular route

[2] Bypass solenoid (SD5) [4] Bypass route
(1) In the case of the 1st copy

The bypass solenoid (SD5) does not operate when the paper of the 1st copy is passing through it.
9
1. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
(2) In the case of the 2nd and subsequent copies

A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the trailing edge of the 1st page of the
2nd copy, the bypass solenoid (SD5) turns ON to draw the 2nd page of the 2nd copy into the bypass route. A
FS-503
specified period of time after the PS4 detected the trailing edge of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy, the bypass
solenoid turns OFF.
SD5 does not turn on when the 3rd and subsequent pages are being conveyed.
[1] [2] [3]
FNS entrance sensor (PS4)
Conveyance motor (M1)
Bypass solenoid (SD5)
[4] fs503to2030c
[1] 1st copy [3] 3rd copy

[2] 2nd copy [4] Drawing of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy
into the bypass
10
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 2. SUB TRAY SECTION
2. SUB TRAY SECTION

2.1 Composition
FS-503
Sub tray Sub tray paper full sensor (PS30) Sub tray paper exit roller
fs503to2004c
2.2 Drive
[1] [2]
fs503to2005c
[1] Sub tray paper exit motor (M6) [2] Sub tray paper exit roller
1 11
2. SUB TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
2.3 Operation
A. Sub tray paper full detection control
FS-503
When paper that has been exited into the sub tray gets to the specified thickness, the sub tray paper full sensor
(PS30) turns ON to send the "sub tray paper full" information to the main body. Then, the main body displays the
massage on the operation panel.
[1] [2]
fs503to2006c
[1] Paper exited [2] Sub tray paper full sensor (PS30)
B. Conveyance speed switching control

Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor (M1) is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited into the sub
tray, thus preventing paper from having an uneven edge.
Sub tray paper Hi-speed

exit motor (M6)
Deceleration
[1] fs503to2031c
[1] Deceleration of the sub tray paper exit motor (M6)
12
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 3. STACKER SECTION
3. STACKER SECTION
3.1 Composition
FS-503
Alignment plate
Stack assist plate
Paddle
Stacker
entrance belt
Swing roller
Rear stopper
Flat-stapling
Paper exit stopper
arm
fs503to2007c
1 13
3. STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
3.2 Drive
3.2.1 Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive
FS-503
[1]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4] [3]
fs503to2008c
[1] Stacker entrance belt [4] Stacker entrance motor (M13)

[2] Swing roller [5] Paddle
[3] Stacker entrance roller [6] Paddle motor (M2)
14
3.2.2 Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive
FS-503
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
fs503to2009c
[1] Stack assist home sensor (PS32) [4] Rear stopper home sensor (PS35)
[2] Stack assist plate [5] Rear stopper motor (M26)
[3] Rear stopper [6] Stack assist motor (M24)
15
3.2.3 Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive

FS-503
[9]
[1]
[8]
[10]
[1]
[10] [2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7] [5]
[6]
fs503to2010c
[1] Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) [6] Paper exit arm motor (M23)
[2] Intermediate roller open close motor (M25) [7] Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)
[3] Eccentric cam [8] Intermediate roller /Lw
[4] Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) [9] Coupling
[5] Paper exit arm [10] Intermediate roller /Up
16
3.2.4 Alignment drive
FS-503
[6] [1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
fs503to2011c
[1] Alignment plate /Rr [4] Alignment motor /Fr (M22)

[2] Alignment motor /Rr (M5) [5] Alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31)
[3] Alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8) [6] Alignment plate /Fr
17
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Stacker conveyance speed control
FS-503
Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor (M1) is sent to the stacker when the stacker entrance motor (M13) is
decelerated a specified period of time after the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) turns ON and before it runs
through the stacker entrance roller.
3.3.2 Intermediate roller control

The roller drive of the intermediate roller /Lw is transmitted from the main tray paper exit motor (M7) by the belt
and the coupling, and the transmission of the conveyance power to paper is made by the pressure/release of
the intermediate roller /Up.
A. Non-staple mode control

While in the non-staple mode, when the start signal is turned ON, the intermediate roller /Up [1] is driven up to
the nip standby position by the cam [2] of the intermediate roller open close motor (M25).
The home position of the intermediate roller /Up open/close operation is detected by the intermediate roller
home sensor (PS33) [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
fs503to2039c
[1] Intermediate roller /Up [3] Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33)
[2] Cam of the intermediate roller open close
motor (M25)
18
While in the print operation, the pressure/release of the intermediate roller /Up [1] onto the intermediate roller /Lw
[2] is made by the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) [3].
When paper is being conveyed to the stacker, SD7 turns ON to release the nip, and paper that passes through
FS-503
the opening between the intermediate roller /Up [1] and the intermediate roller /Lw [2] is conveyed to the stacker.
When paper is being exited, SD7 turns OFF and the intermediate roller /Up [1] is pressed against the intermedi-
ate roller /Lw [2] by the pressure of the spring. The paper is nipped before being exited.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
fs503to2012c
[1] Intermediate roller /Up [3] Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
[2] Intermediate roller /Lw [4] Paper
[2]
Intermediate roller open close motor (M25)
Alignment motors /Fr (M22), /Rr (M5)
Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
[1] [3] [4] [5] [5] [5] [5]

fs503to2032c
[1] Start signal ON [4] Alignment operation

[2] Movement of the intermediate roller /Up to [5] Paper nip by the intermediate rollers /Up
the nip standby position and /Lw
[3] Nip release of the intermediate roller /Up
19
B. Staple mode control

While in the staple mode operation, through the initial operation made when the start signal is turned ON, the
intermediate roller /Up [1] is moved to the evacuation position by the eccentric cam [2] that is driven by the inter-
FS-503
mediate roller open close motor (M25).
[1]
[2]
[3]
fs503to2013c
[1] Intermediate roller /Up [3] Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33)
[2] Eccentric cam
20
3.3.3 Stack assist control

The stack assist plate is a paper pressure plate that is used to increase the speed to put paper in the stacker for
an increased productivity.
FS-503
The stack assist plate [1] is driven by the stack assist motor (M24). When being conveyed to the stacker section,
each sheet of paper is pressed at the position near the rear end of the paper [2] to be stacked at a speed faster
than a free fall.
The stack assist plate is driven by 65° from the home position in the staple mode and by 80° in the shift and
straight mode. The home position is detected by the stack assist home sensor (PS32) [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs503to2014c
[1] Stack assist plate [3] Stack assist home sensor (PS32)
[2] Paper
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
Stacker assist Forward

motor (M24)
Reverse
[1] [2] [3] fs503to2033c
[1] Start signal ON [3] Movement of the stack assist plate to the
[2] Paper pressure by the stack assist plate evacuation position
3.3.4 Rear stopper control

The rear stopper is a paper rear stopper when paper is exited in the non-staple (straight/sort) mode. This short-
ens the conveyance distance to the main tray for an improved productivity.
The rear stopper is driven and released by the rear stopper motor (M26) in the staple mode.
The set state in the non-staple mode (the position at which paper is stopped by the rear stopper) is the home
position of the rear stopper and this is detected by the rear stopper home sensor (PS35).
21

A. Horizontal alignment
The horizontal alignment is made by the 2 alignment plates, that is, alignment plate /Fr and alignment plate /Rr.
FS-503
These 2 alignment plates are driven independently by each of the alignment motor /Fr (M22) and the alignment
motor /Rr (M5).
The home position of the alignment plate /Fr is detected by the alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31) and that of
the alignment plate /Rr is detected by the alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8).
(1) Straight mode

In the straight mode, each sheet of paper sent to the stacker is aligned by the alignment plate /Fr and the align-
ment plate /Rr before being exited to the straight position.
22
(2) Shift mode

In the shift mode, each time a sheet of paper is sent to the stacker, the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment
plate /Rr [2] shift to the rear to convey the paper [3] to the shift position before exiting it.
FS-503
[3]
[2]
[1]
fs503to2015c
[1] Alignment plate /Fr [3] Paper

[2] Alignment plate /Rr
Alignment motor /Fr (M22)
Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

fs503to2034c
[1] Start signal ON [4] Alignment operation for each sheet of paper
[2] Home position search [5] Move the paper to the shift position in the rear
[3] Movement to the size position [6] Move the paper to the shift position in the front
23
(3) Staple mode

In the staple mode, the alignment operation is made by the alignment plates /Fr and /Rr for each sheet of paper
that has been sent to the stacker. After the last sheet of paper of the copy is conveyed to the stacker section,
FS-503
the alignment operation for the staple is made for stapling.
B. Vertical alignment
In the staple mode, for the vertical alignment of paper, the paper is pushed against the flat-stapling stopper by
the paddle that is driven by the paddle motor (M2).
The vertical alignment is assisted by the swing roller that is interlocked with the paddle by M2.
[2]
Paddle motor (M2)
Stapler motors /Fr (M31), /Rr (M30)
[1] [3] fs503to2035c
[1] Start sinal ON [3] Stapling

[2] Stapling of the 1st sheet of paper
3.3.6 Stacker paper exit

A. Non-staple control
In the non-staple mode, the paper exit is made by the nip of the intermediate rollers /Up and /Lw.
B. Staple control
In the staple mode, the paper exit is made by the paper exit arm that is driven by the paper exit arm motor
(M23). The home position of the paper exit arm is detected by the paper exit arm home sensor (PS9).
[2]
Stapler motors /Fr (M31), /Rr (M30)
Paper exit arm motor (M23)
Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)
[1] [3] [4] fs503to2036c
[1] Start signal ON [3] Movement to the paper exit arm standby
[2] Stapling position
[4] Paper exit operation of paper bundle
24
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 4. STAPLER SECTION
4. STAPLER SECTION
4.1 Composition
FS-503
Stapler /Fr Stapler /Rr
Staple scraps box

fs503to2016c
1 25
4. STAPLER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
4.2 Drive
4.2.1 Stapler movement/rotation
FS-503
[7] [8] [1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5] [4]
fs503to2017c
[1] Cam [5] Stapler /Fr

[2] Stapler rotation home sensor (PS14) [6] Stapler movement motor (M11)
[3] Stapler rotation motor (M4) [7] Stapler movement home sensor (PS11)
[4] Stapler /Rr [8] Belt
26
4.2.2 Stapler
FS-503
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
fs503to2018c
[1] Staple cut/bending arm [4] Stapling arm

[2] Stapler motors /Rr (M30), /Fr (M31) [5] Pressure plate
[3] Eccentric cam
27
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Stapler movement control
FS-503
For stapler movements, there are two types, that is, the horizontal movement of the stapler intervals and the
rotation of the stapler /Rr. Movement is made according to the staple mode.
The horizontal movement of the stapler is made by the stapler movement motor (M11). The stapler /Rr and the
stapler /Fr are fixed on the upper side and the lower side of a belt that forms a loop and moved respectively in
the opposite direction by the motor M11.
The home position of the horizontal movement is detected by the stapler movement home sensor (PS11).
The 45° rotational movement of the stapler /Rr for the one-corner stapling at rear is made by the stapler rotation
motor (M4).
The home position of the rotational movement is detected by the stapler rotation home sensor (PS14).
A. 1 staple
(1) 1 staple/at front
When the start signal is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) also turns ON to move the stapler to the
position according to the paper size.
(2) Size movement in 1 staple/one-corner stapling at rear

When the start signal is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) turns ON to move the stapler to the posi-
tion according to the paper size. After a specified period of time, the stapler rotation motor (M4) also turns ON to
rotate the stapler /Rr and move it diagonally.
When a staple empty condition of the stapler /Rr is detected at the one-corner stapling at rear, M4 is driven to
replace the cartridge and the stapler is returned to its vertical position.
B. 2 staples
When the start signal is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) also turns ON to move the stapler to the
position according to the paper size.
28
4.3.2 Staple control

The staple control is made by the stapler motors /Rr (M30) and /Fr (M31) to drive the eccentric cam.
The inside [2] of the eccentric cam [1] is provided with the cam groove [4] of the pressure arm [3] and the pin [6]
FS-503
of the staple cut/clinch arm [5]. The outside [7] of the eccentric cam is also provided with the cam groove [9] of
the stapling arm [8].
Each time the eccentric cam makes a 1/4 turn, each of the following operations is made: 1. paper pressure, 2.
stapling, 3. staple cut/clinch, and 4. return to the home position. A series of the operations complete in a full
turn.
The home position is detected by the stapler home sensors /Rr (PS40), /Fr (PS41).
[5] [1]
[9] [4]
[7] [2]
[6]
[8] [3] fs503to2019c
[1] Eccentric cam [6] Pin (for staple cut/clinch)

[2] Inside [7] Outside
[3] Pressure arm [8] Stapling arm
[4] Cam groove (for pressure arm) [9] Cam groove (for stapling arm)
[5] Staple cut/clinch arm
29
A. Paper pressure
When the eccentric cam rotates 90° from the home position, the cam groove [1] on the inside drives the pin [3]
provided on the pressure arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. The pressure arm [2] drives the pressure plate
FS-503
[4] and presses the clinch side hard against the staple side [5] to press the paper [6].
At the same time, the pin [8] provided in the groove [7] on the outside of the cam drives the stapling arm [9]. The
pin [10] at the tip of the stapling arm moves along the groove [12] of the pressure claw [11], and drives the pres-
sure claw [11] with the lever to press the paper.
The following figure left shows a cam on the outside and the figure right shows a cam on the inside.
[6] [6]
[4]
[5]
[3] [11]
[12]
[1]
[10]
[7]
[2]
[9]
[8]
fs503to2020c
[1] Cam groove [7] Cam groove (for stapling arm)

[2] Pressure arm [8] Pin
[3] Pin [9] Stapling arm
[4] Pressure plate [10] Pin
[5] Staple side [11] Pressure claw
[6] Paper [12] Groove
30
B. Stapling control
When the eccentric cam rotates from 90° to 180°, the cam groove [1] on the outside drives the pin [3] provided
on the stapling arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. The pin at the tip [4] of the stapling arm pushes up the sta-
FS-503
pling blade [5] to push out the staple [6], punch out the paper [7] and staple it.
At the same time, to make preparation for the next stapling, the staple is bent at 90° by the staple bending blade
[8].
[7]
[6]
[5]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[3]
fs503to2021c
[1] Cam groove [5] Stapling blade

[2] Stapling arm [6] Staple
[3] Pin [7] Paper
[4] Pin at the tip [8] Staple bending blade
31
C. Staple cut/clinch control

When the eccentric cam rotates from 180° to 270°, the pin [1] provided on the inside drives the staple cut/clinch
arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
FS-503
At the start of rotation, the lever operation of the staple cut/clinch arm [2] rotates the coupling metal fitting [3] to
pull the pin [4] in the arrow-marked direction and the staple [7] inserted into the round hole [6] of the staple cut
blade [5] is cut. Staple scraps that have been cut drop into the duct to be collected in the staple scraps box.
With the further rotation of the eccentric cam, the tip of the presser metal fitting [8] that is interlocked with the
staple cut/clinch arm [2] pushes down the clinch metal fitting [9] to clinch the staple [7] that has been cut. When
the eccentric cam rotates up to 270°, the clinch operation is completed. After completion of clinching, the
eccentric cam rotates to the home position to complete a series of operations.
[8]
[8]
[9] [3]
[9]
[7]
[5] [4]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
fs503to2022c
[1] Pin [6] Round hole

[2] Staple cut/clinch arm [7] Staple
[3] Coupling metal fitting [8] Presser metal fitting
[4] Pin [9] Clinch metal fitting
[5] Staple cut blade
32
D. Cartridge detection
The presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a cartridge is detected by the cartridge set sensors /Rr
(PS42), /Fr (PS43). When there is no cartridge or the cartridge is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed
FS-503
on the operation section.
E. Staple detection
When the staples run short, the staple empty sensors /Rr (PS44), /Fr (PS45) detect this condition and display an
error message on the operation section.
F. Staple tip detection

The tip of the staple is detected by the staple ready sensors /Rr (PS46), /Fr (PS47).
While in the stapling operation, the staple ready sensors determine that the staples have been clogged when the
PS46 and PS47 do not turn on within a specified period of time after the staple home sensors /Rr (PS 40), /Fr
(PS41) turn off, and rotate the stapler motors /Rr (M30), /Fr (M31) in the reverse direction up to the home posi-
tion.
G. Staple scraps box detection

The presence of a staple scraps box or the incorrect setting of a box is detected by the stapler scraps box set
sensor (PS34). When there is no staple scraps box or it is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed on the
operation section.
33
5. MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
5. MAIN TRAY SECTION

5.1 Composition
FS-503
Paper exit
opening unit
Main tray paper
exit roller
Paper pressure
arm
Main tray
Lift wire
fs503to2023c
34 1
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 5. MAIN TRAY SECTION
5.2 Drive
5.2.1 Tray up/down drive
FS-503
[6] [7]
[1]
[2] [3]
[5]
[4]
fs503to2024c
[1] Counter reset sensor (PS15) [5] Lift wire

[2] Tray lower limit sensor (PS3) [6] Main tray
[3] Tray up down motor (M3) [7] Lift pulley /Up
[4] Lift pulley /Lw
35
5.2.2 Main tray paper exit drive

FS-503
[5] [1]
[4]
[3] [2]
fs503to2025c
[1] Main tray paper exit motor (M7) [4] Main tray paper exit roller
[2] Coupling [5] Paper exit opening solenoid (SD9)
[3] Paper pressure arm
36
5.2.3 Paper exit opening drive
FS-503
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
fs503to2026c
[1] Cam [4] Main tray paper exit roller

[2] Paper exit opening motor (M8) [5] Paper exit opening unit
[3] Paper exit opening home sensor (PS12) [6] Drive bar
37
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Paper exit opening control
FS-503
When paper is too long and protruding, the paper exit opening is opened and closed for alignment.
There are 3 opening positions available according to the mode and the paper length.
For paper shorter than the following length, the paper exit opening is opened neither in the non-staple mode nor
the staple mode.
Mode Angle of the opening Paper length in the sub scan direction
Non-staple Approx. 27° More than 239 mm
Staple Approx. 44° More than 400 mm
Staple Approx. 55° More than 219 mm, less than 400 mm
For the open/close of the paper exit opening, the paper exit motor (M8) rotates and the deformed cam [1] lifts up
the entire paper exit opening unit [2] to open the paper exit opening. The open/close of the paper exit opening is
detected by the paper exit opening home sensor (PS12) [3].
[7]
[6]
[6] [7]
[4]
[5] [5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fs503to2027c
[1] Deformed cam [5] Position at 27°

[2] Paper exit opening unit [6] Position at 44°
[3] Paper exit opening home sensor (PS12) [7] Position at 55°
[4] Position at 0°
A. Non-staple control
When the paper length is less than 239 mm, paper exit unit is not opened.
When the paper length is 239 mm or longer, paper exit unit is opened by 27°.
Turn ON the start signal while in the M8 open the paper exit unit to about 27°. Close the paper exit unit after the
alignment.
38
B. Staple control
When the paper length is less than 219 mm, paper exit unit is not opened.
When the paper length is 219 mm or longer and less than 400 mm, paper exit unit is opened by 55°.
FS-503
When the paper length is 400 mm or longer, paper exit unit is opened by 44°.
Open angle is narrow for 400 mm or longer due to the differences of the number of stapled pages.
# of stapled pages:Less than 400 mm 100 pages
400 mm or longer 50 pages
C. Sub-set staple control

Sub set staple control avoids exited papers misalignment when sub set staple is used.
Paper holding arm is driven by paper exit solenoid (SD9).
When stapled sheets of paper are exited, paper holding arm presses previously exited sheets since they are
misaligned by staples.
When exiting sheets without staple, paper holding arm does not operate.
As control timing, SD9 is turned ON by staple operation.
In predetermined time after stapled sheets go through stacker empty sensor (PS20), SD9 is turned OFF.
The timing of turning OFF SD9 is when 2/3 of stapled sheets are exited.
[3]
[2]
[1]
fs503to2028c
[1] Paper [3] Paper exit opening solenoid (SD9)

[2] Paper presser arm
39
5.3.2 Main tray up/down control

The driving force of the tray up down motor (M3) rotates the lift pulley by the belt and the gear to wind up the lift
wire. The main tray goes up or down according to the direction in which the up/down wire is wound up. When
FS-503
the lift pulley /Lw rotates clockwise as seen from the front, the main tray goes up and when it rotates counter-
clockwise, the tray goes down.
A. Non-staple up/down control

According to the FS operation signal from the main body, the tray up down motor (M3) raises the tray until the
tray upper limit sensor (PS2) turns ON.
When paper passes through the main tray paper exit sensor (PS10), M3 lets down the tray. M3 raises up the tray
again a specified period of time after PS2 turns OFF and stops it when PS2 turns ON. The above steps are
repeated for each sheet of paper.
[2]
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS10)

Tray up down UP
motor (M3)
DOWN
[1] fs503to2037c
[1] Start signal ON [2] Paper exited
B. Staple control
When the stacker empty sensor (PS20) detects the trailing edge of paper, the main tray is brought down by the
tray up down motor (M3). And M3 reverses the rotation after a specified period of time to bright up the tray. It
stops when the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) turns ON.
[2]
Stacker empty sensor (PS20)
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7)

Tray up down UP
motor (M3)
DOWN
[1] fs503to2038c
[1] Start signal ON [2] Paper bundle exited
40
C. Main tray paper detection

The tray upper limit sensor (PS2) and the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) maintain the distance
between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main tray (or the main tray upper surface when no paper is
FS-503
exited) and the paper exit opening at a specified distance to prevent any uneven paper exit from occurring.
While in the continuous print mode, the FS uses a software to count the number of sheets of paper exited and
stops printing when the count reaches the maximum number of sheets loadable for each paper size.
However, when paper has been exited is removed while in printing, the tray goes up to turn ON the counter
reset sensor (PS15). This resets the software counter, thus allowing paper to be exited without limit.
The tray lower limit sensor (PS3) detects the lowest limit of the tray. In the intermittent print mode, the total num-
ber is not added up by the software counter and the PS3 is used to restrict the number of sheets of paper.
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fs503to2029c
[1] Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) [4] Tray lower limit sensor (PS3)
[2] Tray upper limit sensor (PS2) [5] Main tray
[3] Counter reset sensor (PS15)
41
FS-503
Blank page
42
SD-501
2006.11
Ver. 3.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
page.
NOTE
2006/11 3.0 Specification changes in relation to revision of 1050e

CONTENTS
SD-501
SD-501
OUTLINE
3. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2.2 Horizontal conveyance drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2.3 Gate drive/subtray pressure/release drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.3.1 Conveyance path switching operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.3.2 Conveyance line speed switch control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.3.3 Subtray exit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.3.4 Subtray paper full detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.1 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.2 Overlap drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.3.1 Paper overlap control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.3.3 Right angle conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6. FOLDING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.2.1 Folding entrance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.2.2 Folding conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.2.3 Folding blade drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.2.5 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.2.6 Guide shaft drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.3.1 Folding entrance conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.3.3 Folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.3.5 Guide shaft control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
i
7.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

7.2.2 Saddle stitching hold drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.2.3 Clincher up down drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SD-501
7.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

7.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.2.9 Bundle clip drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.3.4 Clincher up down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.3.5 Stapler control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.3.6 Bundle arm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.3.7 Bundle arm assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.3.8 Bundle clip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
8. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8.2.1 Bundle press stage lift drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8.2.2 Bundle press movement drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
8.2.3 Bundle registration drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
8.2.4 Bundle press drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.2.5 Bundle exit drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.3.1 Bundle press stage up down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.3.2 Bundle press movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
8.3.3 Bundle press control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
8.3.4 Bundle registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.3.5 Bundle exit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9. TRIMMER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.2.1 Trimmer press drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.2.2 Trimmer blade drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
9.2.3 Trimmer board drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
9.2.4 Paddle drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
9.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
9.3.1 Trimmer press control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
9.3.2 Trimmer blade control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9.3.3 Trimmer board control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
9.3.4 Trimmer paddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
ii
OUTLINE
SD-501
A. Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with fore-edge trimming and multi-folding function
B. Functions
(1) Functions
Subtray exit Exits paper to the subtray without any process.

Coupling exit Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process.
Saddle stitching Exits paper to the bundle exit tray after being center folding and saddle stitch-
ing.
Saddle stitching with trim- Exits to the bundle exit tray after being center folding, saddle stitching, and
ming trimming processes.
Multi center folding Exits to the bundle exit tray after being center folding on one or more sheets of
paper.
Multi letter folding Exits to the tri-folding tray after being letter folding process on one or more
sheets of paper.
(2) Maximum tray capacity
Subtray 200 sheets

Z-Folding 20 sheets
Folding 40 sheets
Bundle exit tray Center folding/ sheet set
trimming 2 to 10 More than 50
11 to 20 More than 30
Multi center folding 30 sets
Tri-folding exit tray Multi letter folding 20 sets
2 1
C. Type of paper
(1) Coupling/subtray mode
SD-501
Paper size SRA3*2, A3, B4, SRA4*2, SRA4S*2, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5,
A5S*2, B6S*2, A6S*2
13 x 19*2, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*1, 51/2 x 81/2S*2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*3, 16K*3, 16KS*3
Tab paper*4 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, custom size (Max. 324 x 460 mm,
Min. 182 x 140 mm)
C6500 (Max. 330 x 487 mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
Wide paper*1 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2,
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

2 1
(2) Saddle stitching mode
Paper size SRA3*2, A3, B4, SRA4S*2, A4S, B5S
SD-501
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*3, 16K*3
Custom paper : Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 182 x 257mm
Wide paper*1 : A3, B4, A4S, B5S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S,
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

Paper weight 50 to 244g/m2
Maximum saddle Plain paper and Paper weight Number of the sheets
stitching sheets coated paper: Plain paper Coated paper/
Color copy paper*1
2 *2 *2
50 to 81 g/m 50 30
2 *2 *2
82 to 91 g/m 30 15
2 *2 *2
92 to 130 g/m 20 10
2 *2 *2
131 to 161 g/m 15 5
2
162 to 209 g/m 10 —
210 to 244 g/m2 5 —
*1 C6500 only
*2 One sheet can be switched to a thick paper (200 g/m2)
Staple position Can be automatically changed (90 to 165 mm) in accordance with paper size.
[1]
[2]
15ant1c006na
[1] = [Paper size] /2 ± 2 mm

[2] = [Paper size] /4 ± 2 mm
1 3
Folding height
[1]
SD-501
15ant1c011na
Folding sheets [1] Folding height

A3 B4 A4S
12 x 18 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S
11 x 17 (301 mm to 400 mm) (261 mm to 300 mm)
(401 mm or
more)
2 to 5 35 mm or less 40 mm or less 45 mm or less
6 to 15 45 mm or less 50 mm or less Not defined
16 to 30 50 mm or less 55 mm or less
31 to 50 60 mm or less 65 mm or less
(The above information is applied when paper weight is 64 g/m2 and no thick cover
is not used.)
4
(3) Trimming mode
SD-501
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*3, 16KS*3
Custom paper :1050 (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 182 x 140 mm),
C6500 (Max. 324 x 460 mm, MIn. 182 x 247 mm)
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

Maximum trimming sheets 50 sheets (80 g/m2) or 49 sheets (80 g/m2) + 1 sheet (200 g/m2)
(The above is the number of the printed paper before folding. The number of
fore-edge (after folding) is double.)
1 5
(4) Multi center folding mode

SD-501
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S

81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*3, 16KS*3
Custom paper :1050 (Max. 324 x 460 mm, Min. 182 x 140 mm),
C6500 (Max. 324 x 460 mm, MIn. 182 x 247 mm)
*1 1050 only *2 C6500 only

Maximum folding sheets Paper weight Sheets
50 to 81 g/m2 5 sheets
Folding precision
(for 1 sheet)
[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [Paper size] /2 ± 1.5 mm
[1] 15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5 mm or less
6 1
(5) Multi letter folding mode
Paper size A4S, 81/2 x 11S
SD-501
Maximum folding Paper weight Sheets
sheets 50 to 81 g/m2 5 sheets
Folding precision Original size [1] [2] [3]
(for 1 sheet) A4S 97.5 ± 4 mm 102.0 ± 4 mm 1.5 mm or less
81/2 x 11S 91.6 ± 4 mm 96.1 ± 4 mm
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
D. Maintenance

E. Machine data
Power source AC100 to 240V, DC5V (DC5V is supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consump- 270 W
tion
Dimensions When the bundle exit tray is stored: 1,170 (W) x 775 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
When the bundle exit tray is pulled out: 1,170 (W) x 1,441 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
Note
7
2. UNIT COMPOSITION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
SD-501
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
15ant1c001na
[1] Folding section [5] Trimmer section

[2] Right angle conveyance section [6] Saddle stitching section
[3] Bundle process section [7] Horizontal conveyance section
[4] Left side view
8
3. PAPER PATH
A. Coupling exit/subtray exit mode
SD-501
[3] [2] [1]
15ant1c002na
[1] Horizontal conveyance [3] Coupling exit

[2] Subtray exit
9
B. Multi letter folding mode

SD-501
[1]
[4] [5] [7] [6] [8]
[3]
[2]
[10] [9]
15ant1c003na
[1] Stack to the right angle conveyance section [6] Paper exit
[2] Right angle conveyance [7] Stack movement of the paper exit
[3] Conveyance to the folding section [8] Front side view
[4] 1st folding [9] Top side view
[5] 2nd folding [10] Right side view
10
C. Multi center folding/saddle stitching mode

(1) From the paper exit from the main body to the center folding
SD-501
[1]
[4] [5] [6]
[3]
[2]
[8] [7]
15ant1c004na
[1] Stack to the right angle conveyance section [5] Release from the folding roller
[2] Right angle conveyance [6] Front side view
[3] Conveyance to the folding section [7] Top side view
[4] Center folding (1st folding) [8] Right side view
11
(2) From the center folding to the paper exit

SD-501
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5] [6] [8]

15ant1c005na
[1] Conveyance from the folding section to the [5] Paper exit
saddle stitching section [6] Stack movement of the paper exit
[2] Movement by the bundle arm [7] Front side view
[3] Movement by the clip [8] Left side view
[4] Conveyance to the trimmer section
(only for saddle stitching mode)
12
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
SD-501
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.1 Composition
Subtray paper full Horizontal convey- Horizontal Entrance

Sub tray sensor (PS12) ance gate conveyance conveyance
Entrance gate
15ant2c001nb
1 13
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
4.2 Drive
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive
SD-501
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] 15ant2c002nb
[1] Entrance roller [4] Front side view

[2] Entrance conveyance motor (M1) [5] Conveyance roller
[3] Overlap assist roller
4.2.2 Horizontal conveyance drive
[2] [3] [4] [5] [3]
[1] 15ant2c003na
[1] Front side view [4] Horizontal conveyance motor (M2)

[2] Exit roller [5] Subtray exit roller
14
4.2.3 Gate drive/subtray pressure/release drive
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
SD-501
15ant2c004na
[1] Subtray exit roller [4] Horizontal conveyance gate

[2] Roller release solenoid /4 (SD4) [5] Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)
[3] Horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3) [6] Entrance gate
15
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Conveyance path switching operation
SD-501
A. Entrance gate solenoid control

The entrance gate switches the path to the horizontal conveyance section and one to the right angle convey-
ance section. The switch is conducted by the entrance gate solenoid (SD1). The right angle conveyance path is
selected when SD1 turns OFF and the horizontal conveyance path is selected when it turns ON.
In the coupling exit mode and the subtray exit mode, SD1 turns ON and sets the entrance gate to the horizontal
conveyance section when the main body print signal turns ON. SD1 turns OFF after the paper exit.
B. Horizontal conveyance gate control

The horizontal conveyance gate switches the path to the subtray section and the coupling conveyance path to
the succeeding device. The switch is conducted by the horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3). The cou-
pling conveyance path is selected when SD3 turns OFF and the subtray path is selected when it turns ON.
4.3.2 Conveyance line speed switch control

The conveyance is conducted by the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the horizontal conveyance motor
(M2).
M1 and M2 turn ON when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M1 switches its rotational speed in accor-
dance with the main body line speed [3] when the main body exit sensor turns ON [2]. Then it switches its rota-
tional speed to high speed [4] to convey the paper when it receives the paper trailing edge signal (when the
paper trailing edge passes through the fusing).
[2]
Main body exit sensor
Entrance High speed

conveyance
motor (M1) Low speed
Horizontal conveyance motor (M2)
[1] [3] [4] 15ant2c005na
[1] Main body start signal [3] M1 switching to a low speed

[2] Main body exit sensor ON [4] Main body paper trailing edge signal
16
4.3.3 Subtray exit control

When exiting the paper to the subtray, the paper is prevented to be misaligned by releasing the nipping of the
subtray exit roller by the roller release solenoid /4 (SD4) to nip the paper only at the trailing edge and slowing
SD-501
down the paper by the subtray exit roller that is rotating in low speed for every paper. The horizontal conveyance
sensor /1 (PS2) [1] and the subtray exit sensor (PS11) [2] detect the paper exited to the subtray.
[4] [3] [2] [1]
15ant2c006na
[1] Horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) [3] Roller release solenoid (SD4)
[2] Subtray exit sensor (PS11) [4] Subtray exit roller
The roller release solenoid /4 (SD4) turns ON [2] to release the nipping of the subtray exit roller [3] after a speci-
fied period of time since the horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) detects the leading edge of paper [1]. SD4
turns OFF [5] and the subtray exit roller nips at the trailing edge of paper [6] after a specified period of time since
PS2 detects the trailing edge of paper [4]. This control is conducted for every paper exited to the subtray.
[4]
Horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2)
Subtray exit sensor (PS11)
Roller release solenoid /4 (SD4)
[1] [2] [3] [5] [6] 15ant2c007na
[1] Detection of the leading edge of paper [4] Detection of the trailing edge of paper
[2] SD4 ON [5] SD4 OFF
[3] Release of nip [6] Nipping at the trailing edge of paper
4.3.4 Subtray paper full detection control

The subtray paper full detection is conducted by the subtray paper full sensor (PS12) via the actuator.
PS12 turns ON under normal circumstances. The subtray paper full condition is detected and the subtray paper
full signal is transmitted to the main body when the actuator is pressed by stacked paper and PS12 turns OFF.
Then, the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
17
5. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
5. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION

5.1 Composition
SD-501
Right angle conveyance gate

Alignment claws
Alignment Right angle convey-

section ance roller /1
Right angle convey-

ance roller /2
Overlap section
Overlap stopper
Right angle conveyance Right angle conveyance

15ant2c008nb
roller /1 (Driven) roller /3 (Driven)
18 1
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 5. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION
5.2 Drive
5.2.1 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive
SD-501
[1]
[2]
[3]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[6] [7]
[8]
[4]
[5] 15ant2c009na
[1] Alignment claws [7] Right angle conveyance roller /4

[2] Torque limiter [8] Right angle conveyance roller /3
[3] Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) [9] Right angle conveyance roller /2
[4] Front side direction [10] Right angle conveyance motor (M6)
[5] Top side view [11] Right angle conveyance roller /1
[6] Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6)
19
5.2.2 Overlap drive

SD-501
[7] [8]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] 15ant2c010nb
[1] Overlap stopper [5] Front side view

[2] Overlap motor (M13) [6] Right angle conveyance gate
[3] Right side view [7] Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)
[4] Overlap home sensor (PS17) [8] Overlap assist roller
20 1
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Paper overlap control
SD-501
A. Overlap mechanism
When the folding operation is conducted for more than one sheet of paper, they are overlapped in the right angle
conveyance section, and then conveyed to the folding section.
The overlap mechanism is the mechanism to overlap the paper in adequate paper conveyance order. The oper-
ation is conducted by the right angle conveyance gate [1] driven by the right angle conveyance gate solenoid
(SD2) [7] and the overlap stopper [5] driven by the overlap motor (M13) [3]. The overlap home sensor (PS17) [4]
detects the home position of the overlap stopper.
The overlap stopper [5] is positioned at the position where the trailing edge of paper [2] is positioned 20 mm
below from the right angle conveyance gate [1] in accordance with the paper size when it stands by for the
paper.
When the SD2 is turned off, the paper from the main body is conveyed into between the right-angle conveyance
gate [1] and the overlap assist roller [8]. Then the paper is conveyed further by the overlap assist roller [8] driven
by the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and stopped by the overlap stopper.
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[3]
[4]
[6] [5] 15ant2c011nb
[1] Right angle conveyance gate [5] Overlap stopper

[2] Trailing edge of paper [6] Front side view
[3] Overlap motor (M13) [7] Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)
[4] Overlap home sensor (PS17) [8] Overlap assist roller
1 21
The first stacked sheet of paper [5] is conveyed while the overlap stopper is located at the standby position [4].
Before conveying the second paper, right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) turns ON to move the right
angle conveyance gate [6] to the right [7]. At the time, overlap motor (M13) moves the overlap stopper 30 mm
SD-501
upward [3]. It transfers the stacked paper to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate. The right angle
conveyance gate is replaced [9] to clear the conveyance path. The subsequent paper [8] passes the right side of
the right angle conveyance gate and the paper is overlapped in adequate order. Then, M13 moves the overlap
stopper downward [1].
The same as the second sheet is conducted until all of sheets are stacked.
[7] [8] [9]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4] [3] [2] 15ant2c012nb
[1] Overlap stopper moving 30 mm downward [6] Right angle conveyance gate
[2] Front side view [7] Right angle conveyance gate moved
[3] Overlap stopper moving 30 mm upward [8] 2nd paper
[4] Standby position of the overlap stopper [9] Right angle conveyance gate replaced
[5] 1st paper
22 1
B. Overlap control
(1) Multi letter folding mode control
In the multi letter folding mode, up to 5 sheets are stacked in the right angle conveyance section and conveyed
SD-501
to the folding section. The multi letter folding is available only with paper of 50 to 91 g/m2 in weight and is
unavailable with others.
The overlap motor (M13) turns ON when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and moves the overlap stopper
upward to its standby position.
Turning ON the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [3] after a specified period of time since the entrance
sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of the paper, the right angle conveyance gate is switched, M13 moves the
paper upward [4], and isolate the paper from the conveyance gate by transferring it to the left side of the right
angle conveyance gate. Turning OFF SD2 [5], the conveyance gate opens and waits for the subsequent paper.
Conveying the subsequent paper through the right side of the right angle conveyance gate [6] and detecting the
trailing edge of paper by the entrance sensor (PS1) [7], M13 moves the overlap stopper downward [8]. When the
trailing edge of paper passes under the right angle conveyance gate, SD2 turns ON [9] to switch the right angle
conveyance gate and M13 moves up the overlap stopper [10] to send the conveyed sheets of paper to the left
side of the right angle conveyance gate. Then, SD2 turns OFF [11] and stands by for the subsequent paper.
The overlap stopper moves down to the standby position and stands by for the 1st paper of the subsequent set
[12] after a specified period of time since PS1 detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set.
[4] [7] [10]
Overlap motor Up
(M13)
Down
Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)
[12]
[1] [2] [3] [5] [6] [8] [9] [11] 15ant2c074na
[1] Main body start signal [7] Trailing edge of the subsequent paper detected
[2] Overlay stopper moved to its standby position [8] Paper moved downward
[3] Right conveyance gate switched [9] Right conveyance gate switched
[4] Paper isolated [10] Paper isolated
[5] Conveyance path cleared [11] Conveyance path cleared
[6] Subsequent paper conveyed [12] Overlay stopper moved to its standby posi-
tion
23
(2) Center folding/saddle stitching mode control

In the center folding and saddle stitching modes, 1, 2, or 3 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the
folding section. The number of the stacked sheets is different depending on its paper weight and the convey-
SD-501
ance pattern.
Normal paper (less than 130 g/m2): up to 3 sheets are stacked and conveyed to the folding section.
Thick paper (more than 131 g/m2): due to the limit of the folding performance, up to 2 sheets are stacked and
conveyed to the folding section.
• Normal paper
For the 1st set, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first. Similarly, 2 sheets of
paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section for the subsequent sheets. At the final conveyance, 2
sheets are conveyed (if the total number of the paper is even) or 1 sheet is conveyed (if the number is odd). It
does not convey 3 sheets at a time for the odd case because the timing to transmit the information such as the
page count, the paper type, and so on is too late when the printing is conducted from a PC.
For the 2nd and following set, 3 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first to take
adequate time to conduct the folding operation for the preceding set. At the final conveyance, 2 sheets are con-
veyed (if the total number of the paper is even) or 3 sheets are conveyed (if the number is odd).
• Thick paper
Up to 2 sheets of paper can be stacked for the thick paper.
For every set, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first. Similarly, 2 sheets of
paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section for the subsequent sheets. At the final conveyance, 2
sheets are conveyed (if the total number of the paper is even) or 1 sheet is conveyed (if the number is odd).
• Using PI function
The same as the thick paper control is conducted because the paper type information cannot be obtained in the
print job using PI.
24

A. Alignment mechanism
The alignment is conducted by driving the alignment claws [2] by the right angle conveyance motor (M6) [5]
SD-501
through the belt [3] and the torque limiter [4].
The alignment claws move to the rear of the shelter direction [7] and are stopped by the mechanical stoppers [1]
through the torque limiter when M6 is rotating toward the paper conveyance direction. Rotating M6 in the
reverse direction, the alignment claws push the edge of paper to conduct the alignment [6].
[4] [5] [6] [7]
[1]
[3] [2]
15ant2c013na
[1] Mechanical stoppers [5] Right angle conveyance motor (M6)

[2] Alignment claws [6] Aligning direction
[3] Belt [7] Shelter direction
[4] Torque limiter
25
B. Alignment control
The right angle conveyance motor (M6) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns
ON and the alignment claws move to the standby position [2] in accordance with the paper size.
SD-501
No alignment operation is conducted for the 1st paper. M6 rotates in the reverse direction to align paper with the
alignment claws [3] after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of
2nd paper. Then, M6 rotates in the forward direction to replace the alignment claws to the standby position [4].
M6 rotates to convey the paper to the folding section [6] and evacuate the alignment claws to the home position
after a specified period of time after the alignment operation [5] for the last paper of the set. After a specified
period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper, M6 rotates in
the reverse direction to move the alignment claws to the standby position [7] for the subsequent copy.
[7]
Right angle Forward

conveyance
motor (M6) Reverse
Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] 15ant2c075na
[1] Main body start signal [5] Alignment operation

[2] Alignment claws moved to the standby position [6] Paper conveyed to the folding section
[3] Alignment operation [7] Alignment claws moved back to the standby position
[4] Alignment claws moved back to the standby
position
26
5.3.3 Right angle conveyance control

A. Right angle conveyance mechanism
In the right angle conveyance, the right angle conveyance motor (M6) and the roller release solenoids /1 (SD5)
SD-501
[5] and /2 (SD6) [10] convey the paper.
When conveying the paper to the overlap section, the paper falls vertically [6] to the overlap stopper [7] by its
own weight after conveyed by the overlap assist roller. At the time, the press by the right angle conveyance roller
/1 [3] is released by default since the conveyance direction is not the rotational direction of the right angle con-
veyance roller /1 [3] but the axial direction of the right angle conveyance roller /1.
After stacking and aligning the specified number of papers, the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) [5] turns ON to
nip the paper and convey the paper to the position rotated 90° from the right side to the front side [8]. The roller
release solenoid /3 (SD7) [14] is OFF to release the pressure of the folding entrance roller by default since the
upper edge of the paper [1] passes over the folding entrance roller [13].
When conveying the paper from the right angle conveyance section to the folding section [12], the roller release
solenoid /2 (SD6) [10] turns ON to release the pressure of the right angle conveyance roller /4 [9] and convey the
paper to the folding section by nipping the paper with the folding entrance roller [13].
[14] [1]
[2]
[13] [3]
[12]
[4]
[11]
[10] [5]
[9] [6]
[8]
[7]
15ant2c014na
[1] Upper edge of the paper path [8] Right angle conveyance
[2] Entrance sensor (PS1) [9] Right angle conveyance roller /4
[3] Right angle conveyance roller /1 [10] Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6)
[4] Right angle conveyance sensor /1 (PS5) [11] Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)
[5] Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) [12] Paper conveyed to the folding section
[6] Paper conveyed to the overlap section [13] Folding entrance roller
[7] Overlap stopper [14] Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7)
1 27
B. Conveyance control
The roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) turns ON to press the right angle conveyance roller /1 [2] after a specified
period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set [1]. After the
SD-501
alignment operation [3], the right angle conveyance motor (M6) rotates in the forward direction to convey the
paper to the front side [4] by rotating 90°. At this time, the roller release solenoid (SD7) turns OFF a specified
period of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of paper and releases the pressure of the
folding entrance roller /1 [5]. A specified period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects
the leading edge of paper, SD7 turns ON to pressure the folding entrance roller /1 and nip [6] the upper section
of paper that has been conveyed to the front side. And also, a specified period of time after that, when the roller
release solenoid /2 (SD6) turns ON to release the right angle conveyance roller /4 [7] and convey the paper to
the folding section.
[1] [3] [4]
Right angle Forward

conveyance
motor (M6) Reverse
[2] [5] [6] [7] 15ant2c076na
[1] Trailing edge of the last paper of the set detected [5] Folding entrance roller pressure release
[2] Right angle conveyance roller /1 pressure [6] Folding entrance roller pressure
[3] Paper alignment [7] Right angle conveyance roller /4 pressure release
[4] Paper conveyance
28
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 6. FOLDING SECTION
6. FOLDING SECTION
6.1 Composition
SD-501
Alignment claws /Fr Conveyance belt
(main scan) (tri-folding) 2nd folding blade Folding roller /3
Folding roller /2
Alignment stop-
per /Rr
(main scan)
Folding roller /1 1st folding blade

Folding exit Folding alignment
Guide shaft stoppers /Rt
claws
(Center folding exit) (sub scan)
(sub scan) 15ant2c015nb
1 29
6. FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
6.2 Drive
6.2.1 Folding entrance drive
SD-501
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

15ant2c016na
[1] Folding entrance motor (M3) [3] Folding entrance roller /1

[2] Right side view [4] Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7)
30
6.2.2 Folding conveyance drive
SD-501
[7] [8] [9] [1]
[2]
[3]
[6] [5] [4] 15ant2c017na
[1] One way clutch [6] Right side view

[2] Oscillation connecting gear [7] Exit belt
[3] Folding conveyance motor (M4) [8] Folding roller /3
[4] Folding roller /2 [9] Tri-folding exit clutch (CL1)
[5] Folding roller /1
31
6.2.3 Folding blade drive
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]

SD-501
[1]
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] 15ant2c018na
[1] 1st folding blade motor (M18) [8] 2nd folding blade motor (M19)
[2] Folding roller /2 [9] 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23)
[3] 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) [10] 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22)
[4] 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) [11] 2nd folding blade
[5] 1st folding blade [12] Folding roller /3
[6] Folding roller /1 [13] Spring (pressing the folding rollers /2 and /3)
[7] Right side view [14] Spring (pressing the folding rollers /1 and /2)
32
6.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive
[1]
SD-501
[8]
[2]
[6] [7]
[5] [4] [3] 15ant2c019na
[1] Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) [5] Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7)
[2] Alignment stoppers /Rr [6] Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)
[3] Right side view [7] Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr2 (PS49)
[4] Alignment claws /Fr [8] Folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14)
33
6.2.5 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive

SD-501
[7] [8] [9] [1]
[6]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] 15ant2c020na
[1] Folding alignment stoppers /Rt [6] Front side direction

[2] Home position stoppers /Rt [7] Folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56)
[3] Folding exit home sensor (PS24) [8] Folding exit claws
[4] Torque limiter [9] Alignment stoppers /Lt
[5] Folding sub scan alignment motor (M8)
34
6.2.6 Guide shaft drive
[4]
SD-501
[3] [2] [1] 15ant2c021na
[1] Guide shaft home sensor (PS46) [3] Front side view
[2] Guide shaft motor (M25) [4] Guide shaft
35
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Folding entrance conveyance control
SD-501
A. Mechanism
The folding entrance motor (M3) and the roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) [5] conduct the folding entrance con-
veyance operation.
The paper [1] conveyed from the right angle conveyance section is conveyed to the folding entrance with the
pressure of the folding entrance roller /1 [7] released. Once the right angle conveyance is completed, SD7 [5]
turns ON to pressure the nipping of the folding entrance roller /1 and the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) [3] turns
ON to release the right angle conveyance roller /4, M3 convey the paper to the folding section.
The folding entrance sensor (PS60) [6] detects the paper at the folding entrance.
[5] [6] [7]
[4]
[3] [2] [1] 15ant2c022na
[1] Paper [5] Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7)

[2] Right angle conveyance roller /4 [6] Folding entrance sensor (PS60)
[3] Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) [7] Folding entrance roller /1
[4] Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)
36
B. Control
The roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) turns ON to nip the paper with the folding entrance roller [2] after a specified
period of time since the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper [1], and then
SD-501
the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) turns ON to release the nip of the right angle conveyance roller /4 [3] after a
specified period of time. Then the folding entrance motor (M3) turns ON and conveys the paper to the folding
section [4].
At the time, the folding conveyance motor (M4) rotates in the reverse direction [5] to prevent the paper from
being caught between the folding rollers /1 and /2.
SD7 turns OFF to release the pressure of the folding entrance roller [7] after a specified period of time since the
entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of last paper of the subsequent set [6] and it stands by for the
paper of the subsequent set being conveyed to the front side of the right angle conveyance section.
[1] [4] [6]
Folding entrance motor (M3)
Folding Forward
conveyance
motor (M4) Reverse
[2][3] [5] [7] 15ant2c078na
[1] Last paper of the 1st set [5] Caught-protection to the folding section
[2] Folding entrance roller nipped [6] Last paper of the subsequent set
[3] Nip of the right angle conveyance roller /4 released [7] Nip of the folding entrance roller released
[4] Folding entrance conveyance
37
6.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control

A. Mechanism
In the folding main scan alignment, the alignment stoppers /Rr [5] driven by the folding main scan alignment
SD-501
motor /Rr (M14) stop at the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size, and then the alignment
claws /Fr [2] driven by the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) conduct the alignment operation. The
home position of the alignment claws /Fr is detected by the folding main scan alignment home sensors /Fr1
(PS18) [8] and /Fr2 (PS49) [7] and the home position of the alignment tab /Rr is detected by the folding main
scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) [4].
The alignment claws /Fr [2] convey [6] the paper by pushing its trailing edge once the paper passes the folding
entrance roller /3 [3] and until the leading edge of paper contacts with the alignment stopper /Rr [5] because
there is no conveyance roller between the folding entrance conveyance roller /3 and the alignment stopper /Rr.
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3] 15ant2c023na
[1] Front side direction [5] Alignment stoppers /Rr

[2] Alignment claws /Fr [6] Paper conveyance
[3] Folding entrance roller /3 [7] Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr2 (PS49)
[4] Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) [8] Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)
38
B. Control
The folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) drives the alignment stoppers /Rr to the appropriate position in
accordance with the paper size [2] when the main body start signal [1] turns ON.
SD-501
The folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) rotates in the forward direction to let [3] the alignment claws /Fr
push the trailing edge of paper for conveyance after a specified period of time since the folding entrance sensor
(PS60) detects the trailing edge of paper, and then M7 stops after a specified period of time [4]. The alignment
stoppers /Rr push the leading edge of paper to conduct the alignment. M7 rotates in the reverse direction [5],
and after a specified period of time it rotates in the forward direction to conduct the alignment again [6].
M7 rotates in the reverse direction to replace the alignment claws to the home position [7] when the 1st folding
blade home sensor /1 (PS20) detects the completion of the folding operation. M7 starts rotating to replace the
alignment claws to the home position for subsequent set when PS21 detects the completion of the folding oper-
ation since the 1st folding blade conducts the reciprocal operation in which the 1st folding blade home sensor /
1 (PS20) and the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) counter changes their positions at each folding oper-
ation. M7 stops rotating when the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) detects the home posi-
tion of the alignment claws.
Transmitting the print termination signal from SD, M14 rotates to move the alignment stoppers to the home posi-
tion [8]. It stops rotating when the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) detects the home posi-
tion of the alignment stoppers.
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Folding main Forward

scan alignment
motor /Fr (M7) Reverse
scan alignment
motor /Rr (M14) Reverse
Folding entrance sensor (PS60)
Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)
Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19)
1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20)
[1] 15ant2c079na
[1] Main body start signal [5] Alignment claws /Fr shelter operation
[2] Alignment stopper /Rr moved for appropriate paper size [6] Alignment operation
[3] Paper conveyed by the alignment claws /Fr [7] Alignment claws /Fr moved to the home position
[4] Alignment operation [8] Alignment stoppers /Rr moved to the home position
1 39
6.3.3 Folding control

A. Mechanism
Folding consists of the 1st folding and 2nd folding.
SD-501
The 1st folding is conducted in the multi letter folding mode, the multi center folding mode, and the saddle
stitching mode. The 2nd folding is conducted only in the multi letter folding mode.
In the 1st folding operation, the 1st folding blade [7] pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /1
[8] and /2 [3].
The folding rollers /1 and /2 are pressured each other by the spring [2]. The 1st folding blade is driven by the 1st
blade motor (M18) [4] via the crank mechanism [5].
In the 2nd folding operation, the 2nd folding blade [13] pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers
/2 [3] and /3 [14].
The folding rollers /2 and /3 are pressured each other by the spring [15]. The 2nd folding blade is driven by the
2nd blade motor (M19) [10] via the crank mechanism [11].
The folding sensor /2 (PS44) [9], the folding sensor /1 (PS7) [1], and the folding passage sensor (PS8) [12] detect
the paper.
[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[1]
[2]
[9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] 15ant2c024na
[1] Folding sensor /1 (PS7) [9] Folding sensor /2 (PS44)

[2] Spring [10] 2nd folding blade motor (M19)
[3] Folding roller /2 [11] Crank mechanism
[4] 1st folding blade motor (M18) [12] Folding passage sensor (PS8)
[5] Crank mechanism [13] 2nd folding blade
[6] Right side view [14] Folding roller /3
[7] 1st folding blade [15] Spring
[8] Folding roller /1
40
B. Tri-folding control
(1) Operation
After the initial operation, the 1st folding blade [8] is at the standby position /1 [5]. In the actuator [7], the 1st fold-
SD-501
ing blade home sensor /2 (PS21) [3] turns ON and the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) [6] turns OFF.
When the paper [9] is conveyed to the folding section and the 1st folding blade motor (M18) is rotated [2], the
crank [4] rotates 90° to project the 1st folding blade to the paper and push the paper [12] between the folding
roller /1 [10] and /2 [11] with its edge. At the time, the actuator also rotates 90° so that PS21 [3] and PS20 [6]
turns OFF and ON respectively.
M18 keeps rotating in the same direction [13], and then the crank [4] stops when it reaches at the standby posi-
tion /2 [1] (PS20 turns OFF) where is 180° opposite from the standby position /1. In the 1st folding operation for
the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the reverse direction [14] and the crank [4] also rotates 180° in the reverse
direction to conduct the 1st folding operation.
The 2nd folding operation is operated as in the 1st folding operation.
[11] [12]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7] [14]
[13]
[5] [2] [1]

[6] [4] [3] 15ant2c025na
[1] Standby position /2 [8] 1st folding blade

[2] Projecting position [9] Paper
[3] 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) [10] Folding roller /1
[4] Crank [11] Folding roller /2
[5] Standby position /1 [12] Paper inserted
[6] 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) [13] Rotational direction to the standby position /2
[7] Actuator [14] 1st folding for the subsequent set
41
(2) Control
When the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) stops rotating at the completion of the paper alignment
operation, the 1st folding blade motor (M18) turns ON and starts rotating in the reverse direction. The 1st folding
SD-501
blade folds and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /1 and /2. When the 1st folding blade home sensor
/1 (PS20) turns ON, the folding conveyance motor (M4) turns ON to conduct the 1st folding [2]. M18 stops when
PS20 turns OFF. Then, M4 turns OFF and the 1st folding operation is completed [4] after a specified period of
time since the folding passage sensor (PS8) detects the leading edge of paper.
After a specified period of time since PS8 turns ON, the 2nd folding blade motor (M19) turns ON and rotates in
the reverse direction to start the 2nd folding operation. When the 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) turns
ON, M4 rotates in high speed to perform the 2nd folding, and then the tri-folded paper is conveyed to the tri-
folding exit. M19 stops when PS22 turns OFF.
In the 1st folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the 1st fold-
ing [7] and stops rotating when the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) turns ON [8]. In the 2nd folding
operation, M19 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the 2nd folding [9] and stops rotating when the 2nd
folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) turns ON [10].
[1] [2] [4] [5] [7] [9]
High speed
Folding
conveyance Low speed
motor (M4)
Reverse

scan alignment
Forward
1st folding blade
motor (M18)
Reverse
2nd folding blade Forward

motor (M19)
Reverse
2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22)
Folding passage sensor (PS8)
[10]
[3] [6] [8] 15ant2c080na
[1] Paper alignment operation completed [6] 2nd folding blade motor (M19) stopped
[2] 1st folding [7] 1st folding by M18 rotating the forward direction
[3] 1st folding blade motor (M18) stopped [8] M18 stopped
[4] 1st folding completed [9] 2nd folding by M19 rotating the forward direction
[5] 2nd folding [10] M19 stopped
42
C. Tri-folding exit control

(1) Operation
In the multi letter folding exit, the driving force of the folding conveyance motor (M4) is transmitted via the tri-fold-
SD-501
ing exit clutch (CL1).
CL1 turns ON and the exit belt [4] is driven approximately 7 mm to convey the paper to the front side for every
paper exit.
The tri-folding paper full sensor (PS10) [3] detects the paper when it is reached at the front, and then the main
body displays the message on its operation panel.
[3] [4]
[1]
[2] 15ant2c081na
[1] Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9) [3] Tri-folding paper full sensor (PS10)
[2] Right side view [4] Exit belt
(2) Control
The tri-folding exit clutch (CL1) turns ON and drives the exit belt [1] and stops it [2] after a specified period of
time when the tri-folding exit sensor (PS9) detects the leading edge of paper.
The folding conveyance motor (M4) stops [3] after a specified period of time since PS9 detects the trailing edge
of paper.
Folding conveyance motor (M4)
Tri-folding exit clutch (CL1)
Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9)
[1] [2] [3] 15ant2c082na
[1] Exit belt driven [3] Folding conveyance motor (M4) stopped
[2] Exit belt stopped
43
D. Center folding control

When the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) stops at the completion of the paper alignment operation,
the 1st folding blade motor (M18) turns ON and rotates in the reverse direction [2] to let the 1st folding blade
SD-501
insert the paper between the folding rollers /1 and /2. When the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) turns
ON, the folding conveyance motor (M4) rotates in the reverse direction to rotate the folding rollers /1 and /2 in
the reverse direction to release the paper. When PS20 turns OFF, M18 and M4 stop rotating [3].
In the folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the forward direction [4] and it stops when the 1st
folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) turns ON [5].
[1] [2] [4]
Folding Forward
conveyance
motor (M4) Reverse
scan alignment
1st folding blade Forward

motor (M18)
Reverse
[3] [5] 15ant2c083na
[1] 1st folding blade is projected with the paper [4] M18 rotating the forward direction
[2] Folding conveyance motor (M18) rotating the [5] M18 rotating the reverse direction
reverse direction
[3] M18 and M4 stopped
44
6.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control

A. Mechanism
The folding sub scan alignment operation is conducted in the multi letter folding mode and is conducted with the
SD-501
folding exit claws [13] and the folding alignment stoppers /Rt [3] driven by the folding sub scan alignment exit
motor (M8) [8].
The folding exit claws move to the right [14] and the folding alignment stoppers /Rt move to the left [2] when M8
rotates in the reverse direction [9]. The folding alignment stoppers /Rt are contacted with the alignment stopper
[1] and stopped by the torque limiter [7]. The folding exit claws move to the positions for the paper width of A4R
or 8.5 x 11R and conduct the folding sub scan alignment operation, and then the folding is conducted.
In the multi center folding mode and the saddle stitching mode, M8 rotates in the forward direction to move the
folding exit claws to the left [11] after the folding operation. Once the folding exit claws make a round, they con-
duct the paper exit operation to the saddle stitching section. At the time, the folding alignment stoppers /Rt
moving to the right [4] are contacted with the alignment stopper [5] and stopped by the torque limiter [7].
The home position of the folding exit claws in the alignment operation is detected by the folding sub scan align-
ment home sensor (PS56) [12]. The initial position and the center folding exit operation are detected by the fold-
ing exit home sensor (PS24) [6].
[11] [12] [13] [14]

[1]
[2]
[10] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9] [8] [7] 15ant2c026na
[1] Alignment stopper [8] Folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8)
[2] Direction at the alignment operation (to the left) [9] M8 rotated in the reverse direction
[3] Folding alignment stoppers /Rt [10] Folding sensor /2 (PS44)
[4] Direction at the center folding exit operation (to the right) [11] Direction at the center folding exit operation
[5] Home position stopper [12] Folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56)
[6] Folding exit home sensor (PS24) [13] Folding exit claws
[7] Torque limiter [14] Direction at the alignment operation (to the right)
45
B. Folding sub scan alignment control

The folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the alignment opera-
tion in the sub scan direction [2] after a specified period of time since the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)
SD-501
detects the trailing edge of paper and the alignment operation in the main scan direction is conducted [1]. When
the folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) detects the folding exit claws, M8 conducts the alignment
by pressing the side of the paper, and then it stops [3]
The M8 conducts the shelter operation and stops [4] after a specified period of time since PS6 detects the trail-
ing edge of paper.
[1]

scan alignment
Folding sub Forward

scan alignment
motor (M8) Reverse
Folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56)
[2] [3] [4] 15ant2c084na
[1] Alignment operation in the main scan direction [3] M8 stopped

[2] Alignment operation in the sub scan direction [4] Shelter operation
46
C. Center folding exit operation

The folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) does not conduct the alignment operation in the sub scan direc-
tion in the multi center folding/saddle stitching mode. It conducts the operation only when it exits the paper to
SD-501
the saddle stitching section.
M8 drives the folding exit claws to conduct the paper exit operation [2] to the saddle stitching section after a
specified period of time since the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) completes the realignment opera-
tion in the main scan direction [1] (after the center folding operation). After a specified period of time since the
folding sensor /2 (PS44) detects the trailing edge of paper, M8 rotates in low speed [3] and conduct the home
position search operation, and then it stops [4] when the folding exit home sensor (PS24) turns ON.
[1] [2] [3] [4]

scan alignment
High speed
Folding sub
scan alignment Low speed
motor (M8)
Reverse
Folding exit home sensor (PS24)

Folding sensor /2 (PS44)
15ant2c085na
[1] Realignment operation in the main scan direction [3] M8 switched to the low speed
[2] Paper exit operation started [4] Stopped at home position
47
6.3.5 Guide shaft control

A. Mechanism
The guide shaft [2] holds the fold line [4] from the bottom and makes certain of the stack [3] in the saddle stitch-
SD-501
ing section when the folding exit claws [7] exit the folded paper [1] to the saddle stitching section.
The guide shaft is projected [5] in sync with the paper exit only when the first folded paper for each set is exited
and put away immediately to the folding section [6]. In the subsequent paper exit, the guide shaft does not oper-
ate because the paper [3] stacked in the saddle stitching section works as the guide.
[4] [5] [6] [7] [1]
[3] [2] 15ant2c027na
[1] Folded paper [5] Projection direction of the guide shaft

[2] Guide shaft [6] Storage direction of the guide shaft
[3] Stacked paper [7] Folding exit claws
[4] Fold line
48
B. Guide shaft control

The guide shaft motor (M25) turns ON [2] and the guide shaft is projected after a specified period of time since
the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) completes the realignment operation in the main scan direction
SD-501
[1] (after the folding operation). The guide shaft conducting the back and forth operation by the belt rotation
stops when the guide shaft home sensor (PS46) turns ON [3].
[1] [2] [3]

scan alignment
Guide shaft motor (M25)
Guide shaft home sensor (PS46)
15ant2c086na
[1] Realignment operation in the main scan direction [3] Guide shaft motor (M25) stopped
[2] Guide shaft projected
C. Folding unit lock control

During the print operation, the folding unit lock solenoid (SD8) locks the folding unit to prevent the guide shaft or
the folding exit claws from damage due to pulling out the folding unit by mistake.
When the paper get jammed, the positions of the guide shaft and the folding exit claws are monitored. SD8
turns OFF and releases the lock only when both the folding exit home sensor (PS24) and the guide shaft home
sensor (PS46) detect the home position.
49
7. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
7. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION

7.1 Composition
SD-501
Saddle stitching Saddle stitching Saddle stitching

Stapler hold /Up hold /Lw alignment plate
Clip
Bundle arm
Bundle arm
assist plate
Clincher
15ant2c028nb
50 1
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 7. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION
7.2 Drive
7.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive
SD-501
[6] [7] [8] [1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] 15ant2c029na
[1] Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) [5] Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29)
[2] Folding sensor /2 (PS44) [6] Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16)
[3] Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) [7] Saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt
[4] Front side view [8] Saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt
7.2.2 Saddle stitching hold drive
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6] [5] [4] [2]
[3] 15ant2c030na
[1] Saddle stitching hold /Up [5] Eccentric cam

[2] Arm [6] Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
[3] Left side view [7] Saddle stitching hold motor (M21)
[4] Spring [8] Stapler
51
7.2.3 Clincher up down drive

SD-501
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] 15ant2c031na
[1] Left side view [5] Clincher up down motor (M20)

[2] Roller [6] Spring
[3] Eccentric cam [7] Clinchers /Rt, /Lt
[4] Clincher up down home sensor (PS26) [8] Saddle stitching hold /Lw
52
7.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive
SD-501
[1]
[8] [2]
[4]
[7] [3]
[5]
[6]
[1]
15ant2c032na
[1] Top side view [5] Stapler movement home sensor (PS25)
[2] Stapler /Rt [6] Stapler movement motor (M15)
[3] Clincher /Rt [7] Clincher /Lt
[4] Front side view [8] Stapler /Lt
53
7.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive

SD-501
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7] [5]
[4]
[6]
15ant2c077na
[1] Stapling arm [5] Staple

[2] Staple bending arm [6] Left side view
[3] Clincher plate [7] Eccentric cam
[4] Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) [8] Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M39)
54
7.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive
[1]
SD-501
[7]
[2]
[3]
[6] [5]
[4]
15ant2c033na
[1] Bundle arm [5] Guide shaft

[2] Slide guide [6] Fulcrum shaft
[3] Left side view [7] Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)
[4] Bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
55
7.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive
[1]
SD-501
[3]
[2]
[4]
[6] [5] 15ant2c034na
[1] Bundle arm [4] Bundle arm motor (M10)

[2] Guide shaft [5] Bundle arm home sensor (PS32)
[3] Folding sensor /2 (PS44) [6] Fulcrum shaft
56
7.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive
SD-501
[5] [1]
[3]
[2]
[4] 15ant2c035na
[1] Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [4] Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38)
[2] Left side view [5] Bundle arm assist motor (M26)
[3] Bundle arm assist plate
57
7.2.9 Bundle clip drive

SD-501
[9] [10]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[6] [5]
[2]
[4] [3] 15ant2c036nb
[1] Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) [6] Release roller
[2] Bundle clip motor (M11) [7] Wire
[3] Left side view [8] Spring
[4] Bundle clip lower limit motor (PS30) [9] Release plate /Up
[5] Release plate /Lw [10] Clip
58 1
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control
SD-501
A. Mechanism
In the saddle stitching alignment, the saddle stitching alignment plates /Lt [2] and /Rt [8] align the center folded
paper [5] in the sub scan direction.
The saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) [3] drives the saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt [2] in the sub
scan direction via the belt by rotating in the forward and reverse directions. The saddle stitching alignment plate
/Lt moves to the position for the appropriate paper size when the main body start signal turns ON, and it does
not move during the print operation. It return to the position at the saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt
(PS29) [4] after the print operation.
The saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) [7] drives the saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt [8] in the sub
scan direction via the belt by rotating in the forward and reverse directions. The alignment operation is con-
ducted by M9 by rotating in the forward and reverse directions every time the center folded paper is conveyed.
It return to the position at the saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) [6] after the print operation.
[7] [8]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4] 15ant2c037na
[1] Front side direction [5] Paper

[2] Saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt [6] Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28)
[3] Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) [7] Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9)
[4] Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt [8] Saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt
(PS29)
59
B. Control
The saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal
[1] turns ON and the saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt moves to the position for the appropriate paper size [2].
SD-501
The saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) rotates in the forward direction and the saddle stitching alignment
plate /Rt conducts the preliminary alignment operation [4] when the folding sensor /2 (PS44) at the exit of the
folding section detects the trailing edge of the paper [3]. Then, M9 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the
alignment operation [5] when the paper is stacked at the stapler position. After a specified period of time, M9
rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment plate to its home position and stands
by for the subsequent set [6].
For the last paper of the set [7], M9 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment
plate to its home position when the saddle stitching press motor (M21) [8] is completed with holding the paper.
[7]
Saddle stitching Forward

alignment motor
/Rt (M9) Reverse

alignment motor
/Lt (M16) Reverse
Saddle stitching press motor (M21)
[9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [8] 15ant2c087na
[1] Main body start signal [6] Moved to the home position
[2] Moved for appropriate paper size [7] Last paper of the set
[3] Detected the trailing edge of paper [8] Held the paper with the saddle stitching hold
[4] Preliminary alignment operation [9] Moved to the home position
[5] Alignment operation
60
7.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control

A. Mechanism
The staplers/clinchers move to the stapling position in accordance with the paper size.
SD-501
The stapling position is different for every paper size to make the stapling distance half of the paper size.
The staplers /Rt [10] and /Lt [8] are fixed to the belt /Up [9] and the clinchers /Rt [2] and /Lt [4] to the belt /Lw [1].
They are moved in the sub scan direction by the stapler movement motor (M15) [5] via the connecting shaft [6].
To prevent the tooth skipping of the belts /Up and /Lw at the maintenance, the gear-shaped rotating knob [7] is
provided on the connecting shaft [6]. Rotating the knob, you can manually move the staplers /Rt and /Lt and the
clinchers /Rt and /Lt simultaneously.
[7] [8] [9] [10]
[6]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 15ant2c038na
[1] Belt /Lw [6] Connecting shaft

[2] Clincher /Rt [7] Rotating knob
[3] Stapler movement home sensor (PS25) [8] Stapler /Lt
[4] Clincher /Lt [9] Belt /Up
[5] Stapler movement motor (M15) [10] Stapler /Rt
B. Control
The stapler movement motor (M15) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal turns ON
and moves the staplers and the clinchers to the position for the appropriate paper size.
They go back to their home position at the end of the printing operation.
61
7.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control

A. Mechanism
The saddle stitching hold is the mechanism to prevent the paper misalignment at stapling. The saddle stitching
SD-501
hold /Up [1] moves down to the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2] at its lower position and hold the center folded
paper [3] at the fold line from both up and down.
The eccentric cam [5] moves the saddle stitching hold /Up [1] up and down via the arm [6].
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4] 15ant2c039na
[1] Saddle stitching hold /Up [4] Left side view

[2] Saddle stitching hold /Lw [5] Eccentric cam
[3] Center folded paper [6] Arm
62
The saddle stitching hold /Up [6] is enforced by the spring [3] toward the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5]. When the
saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates the eccentric cam [2] via the gear [1], the arm [4] moves along with
the shape of the eccentric cam and the saddle stitching hold /Up is lowered by the spring [3].
SD-501
The saddle stitching hold /Up [6] holding the center folded paper at its lower position is pushed up to its upper
position by the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5] during the stapling operation. This allows the paper to be moved
from the lower position to the upper position without any misalignment.
The saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) [8] detects the home position of the eccentric cam.
[8]
[6] [7]
[1]
[5]
[4] [3] [2] 15ant2c040na
[1] Gear [5] Saddle stitching hold /Lw

[2] Eccentric cam [6] Saddle stitching hold /Up
[3] Spring [7] Front side direction
[4] Arm [8] Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
63
B. Control
(1) Saddle stitching mode
At the end of the paper alignment operation [1], the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates to move the sad-
SD-501
dle stitching hold /Up downward [2] and hold the paper between the saddle stitching holds /Up and /Lw. Then,
the clincher up down motor (M20) starts rotating and the saddle stitching hold /Up is pushed up by the saddle
stitching hold /Lw while holding the paper [3]. M20 rotates in the reverse direction and lowers the saddle stitch-
ing hold /Lw [5] when the clinching operation [4] is started. The saddle stitching hold /Up is also lowered by the
spring. M21 turns ON and go back the saddle stitching hold /Up to its standby position [6] after a specified
period of time since the clinching operation is started.
[1] [5]

alignment
motor /Rt (M9) Reverse
Clincher up down Forward

motor (M20)
Reverse
Clinchers /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10)
Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
[2] [3] [4] [6] 15ant2c088na
[1] Alignment operation [4] Clinching operation

[2] Saddle stitching hold /Up moved down [5] Saddle stitching hold /Lw moved down
[3] Saddle stitching hold /Lw moved up [6] Saddle stitching hold /Up moved up
(2) Multi center folding mode

At the end of the paper alignment operation [1], the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates to move the sad-
dle stitching hold /Up downward [2] and stack the paper securely. Then, M21 keeps rotating to move the saddle
stitching hold /Up upward to its standby position [3].
[1]

alignment motor
/Rt (M9) Reverse
Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
[2] [3] 15ant2c089na
[1] Alignment operation [3] Saddle stitching hold /Up moved up

[2] Saddle stitching hold /Up moved down
64
7.3.4 Clincher up down control

A. Mechanism
The clincher shelters at the lower position to obtain space between the stapler and the clincher when the paper
SD-501
is conveyed between them.
After the alignment operation, the saddle stitching hold /Up [7] moves down and holds the center folded paper
[6]. Then the eccentric cam [5] drives the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2] and the clincher [3] to push up the saddle
stitching hold /Up [7] to the position where the stapler [1] is positioned while holding the center folded paper.
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5] [4] 15ant2c041na
[1] Stapler [5] Left side view

[2] Saddle stitching hold /Lw [6] Center folded paper
[3] Clincher [7] Saddle stitching hold /Up
[4] Eccentric cam
65
The clincher [7] moves down to the lower position by its own weight and moves upward by the clincher up down
motor (M20).
The roller [2] attached to the arm [5] is pushed up and the clincher is contacted with the stapler when M20
SD-501
rotates the eccentric cam [3]. The paper between the clincher and the stapler is hold securely by the spring [6].
Once the stapling operation is completed, M20 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the eccentric cam,
and then the clincher moves down by its own weight.
[8]
[3] [4]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[9]
[5] [2] [5] [4] [3] [2] 15ant2c042na
[1] Left side view [6] Spring

[2] Roller [7] Clinchers /Rt, /Lt
[3] Eccentric cam [8] Saddle stitching hold /Lw
[4] Clincher up down home sensor (PS26) [9] Front side direction
[5] Arm
66
B. Control
The clincher moves up or down only in the saddle stitching mode.
Once the saddle stitching press motor (M21) moves down the saddle stitching hold /Up [1], the clincher up
SD-501
down motor (M20) rotates in the forward direction to move up the clinchers /Rt and /Lt and the saddle stitching
hold /Lw [2]. M20 is stopped when the clincher up down home sensor (PS26) turns ON.
M20 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the clinchers /Rt and /Lt and the saddle stitching hold /Lw
when the clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) starts the clinching operation [4]. They are stopped at the
lower position [5] when PS26 turns OFF.
[2] [3] [5]
Clincher up Forward
down motor
(M20) Reverse
Clincher up down home sensor (PS26)
Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10)
[1] [4] 15ant2c090na
[1] Saddle stitching hold /Up stopped at lower position [4] Clinching operation
[2] Clinchers /Rt and /Lt moved up [5] Clinchers /Rt and /Lt stopped at lower position
[3] Clinchers /Rt and /Lt stopped at the upper
position
67
7.3.5 Stapler control

A. Mechanism
The stapler operation is conducted by the stapler motors /Rt (M29) and /Lt (M30) [10] and the clincher solenoids
SD-501
/Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) [5].

The stapler operation is detected by the stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) [8] and the clincher start
sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4) [11]. HS1, HS2, HS3, and HS4 are hall element sensors and control the position
of the magnet [12] of the rotating eccentric cam [9].
M29 and M30 [10] drive the staple bending arm [3] and the stapling arm [2] via the eccentric cam [9]. The staple
bending arm bends the rolled staple [6] into the U-shape and the stapling arm staples it toward the clincher.
Then the SD9 and SD10 bend the staple by driving the clincher plate [4]. The stapling operation is completed by
these operations.
The staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt (SW2) [7] detect whether the staple or cartridge is set or not.
[11] [12]
[10] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[9] [8] [7] [6]
[5]
15ant2c091na
[1] Front side direction [8] Stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3)
[2] Stapling arm [9] Eccentric cam
[3] Staple bending arm [10] Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30)
[4] Clincher plate [11] Clincher start sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4)
[5] Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10) [12] Magnet
[6] Staple
[7] Staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt
(SW2)
68
B. Control
(1) Stapling control
The stapler motors /Rt (M29) and /Lt (30) start the stapling operation [2] when the clincher up down home sen-
SD-501
sor (PS26) detects that the clinchers /Rt and /Lt are contacted with the stapler unit [1].
The clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) bend the staple and the stapling operation is completed when
the clincher start sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) in the stapler unit turn ON [3]. M29 and M30 stop and return to
the home position [4] when the stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) detects the home position.
[1]
Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30)
Stapler home sensors (HS1) and /Lt (HS3)
Clincher start sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4)
[2] [3] [4] 15ant2c092na
[1] Clincher contacted [3] Clinching operation

[2] Stapling operation [4] Returned to the home position
(2) Staple and cartridge detection

When the remaining amount of the staple becomes 20 or the cartridge is not set, the staple empty switches /Rt
(SW1) and /Lt (SW2) turn ON and the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
69
7.3.6 Bundle arm control

The bundle arm [4] rotates and moves in the sub scan direction.
It rotates to convey the paper from the stapling section to the bundle clip section and moves in the sub scan
SD-501
direction to catch/release the paper.

In the multi center folding mode, the bundle arm rotates to the stapling position after the last paper of the set is
conveyed. In the saddle stitching mode, it rotates after the stapling operation.
By moving the bundle arm, the tip of the bundle arm is inserted under the fold line of the paper and the paper is
caught [1].
The caught paper is conveyed to the bundle clip section [2] by the rotation of the bundle arm. The bundle arm
moves in the outside of the sub scan direction and releases the paper [3] when the bundle clip holds the paper
at the folding side.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c043na
[1] Paper catch [3] Paper release

[2] Conveyance [4] Bundle arm
70
A. Bundle arm movement mechanism

The bundle arm [5] is driven by the bundle arm motor (M10) [6] to catch/release the paper [4] in the sub scan
direction via the belt.
SD-501
The bundle arm home sensor (PS32) [1] detects the home position of the bundle arm.
[4] [5] [6]
[1]
[2]
[3] 15ant2c044na
[1] Bundle arm home sensor (PS32) [4] Paper

[2] Front side direction [5] Bundle arm
[3] Guide shaft [6] Bundle arm motor (M10)
71
B. Bundle arm rotation mechanism

The bundle arm rotation motor (M22) [2] drives the bundle arm [8] via the belt, slide guide [5], and guide shaft [6].
When M22 drives the slide guide [5] in the main scan direction, the guide shaft [6] passing through the long hole
SD-501
of the slide guide is rotated, and then the bundle arm [8] is rotated around the fulcrum. When it is driven to the
paper [3] side, M22 stops where the ring [7] is contacted with the guide plate [4].
The bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) [9] detects the home position of the bundle arm.
[9]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[7] [6] [5] 15ant2c045na
[1] Front side direction [6] Guide shaft

[2] Bundle arm rotation motor (M22) [7] Ring
[3] Paper [8] Bundle arm
[4] Guide plate [9] Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)
[5] Slide guide
72
In the rotation drive of the bundle arm [8], the slide guide [5] has to be overrun to be sure to make the ring [7] of
the bundle arm contact with the guide plate [6]. To prevent any parts from damage due to the overrun, the guide
shaft [3] can be moved by the shock absorbing guide [4] and the spring [2].
SD-501
[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
15ant2c046na
[1] Front side direction [5] Slide guide

[2] Spring [6] Guide plate
[3] Guide shaft [7] Ring
[4] Shock absorbing guide [8] Bundle arm
73
C. Bundle arm control

The bundle arm motor (M10) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and
moves the bundle arm to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size.
SD-501
The bundle arm rotation motor (M22) rotates in the forward direction to rotate the bundle arm to the stapling
section [3] after a specified period of time since the folding sensor /2 (PS44) detects the trailing edge of paper of
the last set. It stops the bundle arm in an upright position [4] when the bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)
turns OFF.
Then, M22 rotates again [5] to drive the bundle arm until it is contacted with the guide plate on the stapling sec-
tion [6]. The timing for M22 to restart the rotation [5] is different between in the multi center folding mode and in
the saddle stitching mode.
• Multi center folding mode: When the saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) detects the saddle stitch-
ing hold /Up has been moved to the its upper position.
• Saddle stitching mode: After a specified period of time since the clincher up down home sensor (PS26)
detects that the clinchers are contacted with the staplers.
M10 inserts the tip of the bundle arm under the fold line of the paper [7] when the bundle arm assist motor (M26)
starts the assisting operation by pushing up the trailing edge of paper at the back side and M10 stops after a
specified period of time [8].
M22 rotates in the reverse direction to convey the paper to the bundle clip section when M10 stops [8]. It stops
after a specified period of time since PS31 turns ON.
M10 rotates in the forward direction to pull out the bundle arm from the paper and take shelter it from the con-
veyance path [11] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip starts to catch the paper [10]. M10 stops
when the bundle arm home sensor (PS32) turns ON [12].
M10 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the bundle arm to its standby position [13] for the subsequent
set after a specified period of time since it stops.
74
[14] [9] [11] [12][13]
SD-501
Bundle arm assist motor (M26)
Bundle arm Forward

motor (M10)
Reverse
Bundle arm Forward

rotation motor
(M22) Reverse
Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)
Bundle arm home sensor (PS32)
Bundle clip Forward

motor (M11)
Reverse
[1][2] [3] [4] [5] [6][7] [8] [10] 15ant2c093na
[1] Main body start signal [8] Insertion completed and conveyance started
[2] Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size [9] Conveyance completed
[3] Bundle arm started to rotate [10] Paper clip caught paper
[4] Bundle arm stopped in an upright position [11] Bundle arm shelter operation
[5] Bundle arm restarted to rotate [12] Shelter completed
[6] Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate [13] Bundle arm moved for the subsequent set
[7] Bundle arm inserted under the fold line [14] Time chart of the saddle stitching mode
75
7.3.7 Bundle arm assist control

A. Mechanism
The bundle arm assist mechanism is the mechanism to assist the paper conveyance of the bundle arm rotation
SD-501
drive to be conducted without fault. It pushes up the fore edge side of the paper [6] with the bundle arm assist
plate [4] to tilt it to the front.
The bundle arm assist motor (M26) [2] drives the bundle arm plate [4] via the belt.
The bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [1] detects the upper home position and the bundle arm assist
home sensor (PS38) [3] detects the lower home position.
The bundle arm assist plate [4] waits at the position 5 mm below the fore edge side of the paper during standby.
To keep the error to a minimum, the small size paper (313 mm or less) and the large size paper (314 mm or
more) are moved to the standby position from the position of PS39 and PS38 respectively since the standby
position for the paper is positioned by the driving time of M26 (DC brush motor).
In the bundle arm assist operation, the fore edge side of the paper is pushed up 35 mm (or until PS39 turns ON).
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c065na
[1] Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [4] Bundle arm assist plate
[2] Bundle arm assist motor (M26) [5] Front side direction
[3] Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) [6] Paper
76
B. Control
(1) Small size paper (313 mm or less)
For the small size paper, the bundle arm assist motor (M26) rotates in the forward direction when the main body
SD-501
start signal [1] turns ON to drive the bundle arm assist plate at the home position to the position at the bundle
arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [2]. After a specified period of time, M26 rotates in the reverse direction to
drive the bundle arm assist plate from the upper limit position to the standby position in accordance with the
paper size [3] and stands by for the paper.
Then, M26 rotates in the forward direction to push up the fore edge side of the paper [6] for assisting the bundle
arm to be inserted under the fold line of the paper. The operation timing [6] of M26 is different between in the
multi center folding mode and in the saddle stitching mode.
• Multi center folding mode: When the bundle arm is contacted with the guide plate of the stapler section [4]
by the bundle arm rotation motor (M22).
• Saddle stitching mode: When the clincher moves downward [5] at the end of the stapling operation.
M26 rotates in the forward direction to assist the bundle arm to convey the paper [7] after a specified period.
Then the bundle arm assist plate go back to the standby position and stands by for the subsequent set [8].
[2] [3] [6] [7] [8]

[9]
Bundle arm Forward

assist motor
(M26) Reverse
Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38)
Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39)
Clincher up Forward
down motor
(M20) Reverse
Bundle arm Forward

rotation motor
(M22) Reverse
[1] [4] [5] 15ant2c095na
[1] Main body start signal [6] Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm
[2] Movement to the upper limit [7] Assist of the bundle arm conveyance
[3] Bundle arm moved in accordance with the [8] Bundle arm moved in accordance with the
paper size paper size
[4] Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate [9] Time chart of the saddle stitching mode
[5] Clincher moved down
77
(2) Large size paper (314 mm or more)

For the large size paper, the bundle arm assist motor (M26) rotates in the forward direction when the main body
start signal [1] turns ON to drive the bundle arm assist plate to the standby position in accordance with the
SD-501
paper size [2] and stands by for the paper.

The subsequent operation is conducted in the same manner as for the small size paper.
[2] [5] [6] [7]

[8]
Bundle arm assist Forward

motor (M26)
Reverse
Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38)
Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39)
Clincher up Forward
down motor
(M20) Reverse
Bundle arm Forward

rotation motor
(M22) Reverse
[1] [3] [4] 15ant2c096na
[1] Main body start signal [5] Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm
[2] Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size [6] Assist of the bundle arm conveyance
[3] Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate [7] Bundle arm moved in accordance with the
[4] Clincher moved down paper size
[8] Time chart of the saddle stitching mode
78
7.3.8 Bundle clip control

A. Mechanism
The bundle clip is the mechanism to hold the paper that the bundle arm conveyed to the slope and convey the
SD-501
paper to the bundle press stage with its fore edge side to the trimmer section.
The bundle clip catches, releases, and conveys the paper. It catches the paper at the upper limit position [1],
conveys it [2], and then release it at the lower limit position [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c047na
[1] Catching [3] Releasing

[2] Conveying
79
The bundle clip motor (M11) [5] drives the bundle clip [1] up [8] and down [7] via the gear and belt.
The spring [9] provides the bundle clip the force to catch the paper, and the wire [2] and the winding shaft [3]
open the bundle clip to release the paper.
SD-501
The upper limit of the bundle clip is detected by the bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) [4] and the lower limit
is detected by the bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) [6].
[9] [1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7] [4]
[6] [5] 15ant2c048na
[1] Bundle clip [6] Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)
[2] Wire [7] Down
[3] Winding shaft [8] Up
[4] Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) [9] Spring
[5] Bundle clip motor (M11)
80
The bundle clip is closed all the time except when it is located at the upper and lower limit position. When the
bundle clip moves up [1], the release roller /Up [6] gets onto [7] the release plate /Up [8]. Then the wire winding
shaft [4] rotates [3] and takes up the wire [5] to open the bundle clip.
SD-501
In the same way, when the bundle clip moves down [2], the release roller /Lw [10] gets onto [12] the release
plate /Lw [11] and then the wire winding shaft [4] rotates [9] and takes up the wire [5] to open the bundle clip.
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[1] [10] [4] [3]
[2] [1]
[5]
[12] [11] [10] [4] [9] 15ant2c049na
[1] Up [7] Getting over at up

[2] Down [8] Release plate /Up
[3] Wire winding rotation [9] Wire winding rotation
[4] Wire winding shaft [10] Release roller /Lw
[5] Wire [11] Release plate /Lw
[6] Release roller /Up [12] Getting over at down
81
B. Control
The bundle clip motor (M11) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle clip until the bundle clip
upper limit sensor (PS33) turns ON [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle assist motor (M26) starts
SD-501
the assisting operation [1]. Then, the bundle clip stops with its clip opened.
The bundle arm conveys the paper from the stapling section to the bundle clip section, and then the bundle arm
rotation motor (M22) stops [3]. After a specified period of time, M11 rotates in the reverse direction to move
down the bundle clip and close the bundle clip to catch the paper, and then M11 stops after a specified period
of time [4]
When the bundle arm motor (M10) completes the shelter operation [5], M11 rotates in the reverse direction to
move down the bundle clip [6]. The bundle clip opens the clip to release the paper [7] and M11 stops when the
bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) turns ON.
M11 rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle clip after a specified period of time since M11 stops.
Then, M11 stops to move the bundle clip at the standby position for the subsequent set after a specified period
of time since PS30 turns OFF [8].
[3] [5] [8]
Bundle arm Forward

motor (M10)
Reverse
Bundle arm Forward
rotation motor
(M22) Reverse
Bundle arm assist motor (M26)
Bundle clip Forward

motor (M11)
Reverse
Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33)
Bundle clip lower limit motor (PS30)
[1] [2] [4] [6] [7] 15ant2c099na
[1] Assisting operation by the bundle arm [5] Bundle arm shelter operation
[2] Bundle clip opened [6] Conveyed by the bundle clip
[3] Paper conveyance by the bundle arm completed [7] Paper released
[4] Paper caught [8] Returned to the standby position for the sub-
sequent set
82
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 8. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION
8. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION

8.1 Composition
SD-501
Trimmer scraps Bundle press Bundle press
removal fan (FM1) Up down wire stage plate Exit claws
Bundle regis-
tration plate Bundle tray
paper full sen-
sor (PS61)
Shutter Registration
claws
Trimmer scraps Trimmer scraps full Scraps box Bundle exit con- Bundle exit tray
press plate sensor (PS41) veyance belt
15ant2c050nb
1 83
8. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
8.2 Drive
8.2.1 Bundle press stage lift drive
SD-501
[10] [11] [12] [13] [1]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
15ant2c051na
[1] Bundle registration plate [8] Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35)
[2] Bundle registration plate wire [9] Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45)
[3] Lift wire [10] Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)
[4] Bundle press stage [11] Over-winding-prevention stopper
[5] Front side direction [12] Wire winding shaft
[6] Bundle exit auxiliary roller [13] Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)
[7] Knob
84
8.2.2 Bundle press movement drive
[1]
SD-501
[5] [4] [3] [2] 15ant2c052na
[1] Bundle press [4] Left side view

[2] Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) [5] Bundle press movement motor (M17)
[3] Bundle press stage
8.2.3 Bundle registration drive
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4] [3] [2] 15ant2c053na
[1] Exit claws [4] Registration claws

[2] Left side view [5] Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)
[3] Bundle press stage [6] Bundle registration motor (M12)
1 85
8.2.4 Bundle press drive

SD-501
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[6]
15ant2c054nb
[1] Bundle press plate /Up [6] Front side direction

[2] Release wire /Rt [7] Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47)
[3] Wire winding shaft [8] Bundle press home sensor (PS37)
[4] Bundle press motor (M23) [9] Spring
[5] Release wire /Lt
86 1
8.2.5 Bundle exit drive
SD-501
[13]
[1]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8] [2]
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] 15ant2c055nb
[1] Bundle exit conveyance belt [8] Trimmer scraps press plate
[2] Left side view [9] Pin
[3] Bundle exit drive belt [10] Trimmer scraps press claws
[4] Actuator [11] Scraps press home sensor (PS48)
[5] Belt [12] Shutter
[6] Bundle exit motor (M5) [13] One-way clutch (for pressing the trimmer
[7] One-way clutch (for the bundle exit convey- scraps)
ance belt)
1 87
8.3 Operation
8.3.1 Bundle press stage up down control
SD-501
The bundle press stage conducts the up and down operation to convey and exit the paper by the switch back
method.
The bundle press stage is moved up [7] to decrease the angle difference when receiving the paper [8] conveyed
by the bundle clip from the slope [1]. The bundle press stage exits the paper [5] to the bundle exit tray at the hor-
izontal position [4] at the paper exit.
The bundle registration plate [6] and the bundle exit auxiliary roller [3] move up and down together with the up
and down operation of the bundle press stage.
[7] [8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6] [5] [4] 15ant2c057na
[1] Slope [5] Paper path at the paper exit

[2] Front side direction [6] Bundle registration plate
[3] Bundle exit auxiliary roller [7] Bundle press stage (upper position)
[4] Bundle press stage (horizontal position) [8] Paper path to the bundle press stage
The registration claws [3] push in the paper to make sure that the paper is conveyed to the bundle press stage
when the bundle press stage [4] receives the paper from the bundle clip [6].
[5] [6]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3] 15ant2c061na
[1] Slope [4] Bundle press stage

[2] Front side direction [5] Paper conveyance
[3] Registration claws [6] Bundle clip
88
A. Mechanism
The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) [12] rotates the wire winding shaft [14] and winds up the lift wire
[3]. During the initial phase, the wire is tightened and the wire arm [4] comes to the horizontal position but the
SD-501
bundle press stage [5] doesn't move up. At the time, as the wire arm comes horizontal, the bundle registration
plate wire [2] is loosen and the bundle registration plate [1] moves down and works as the stopper against the
registration operation.
Then, the bundle press stage moves up as the wire winding shaft [14] rotates and winds up the up down wire [3]
and it stops when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) [11] turns ON.
The home positions (shelter position) for the bundle registration plate and the bundle press stage are detected
by the bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16) [15] and the bundle press stage up down home sensor
(PS35) [10] respectively.
The over-winding-prevention stopper [13] prevents the over winding since you can move up and down the bun-
dle press stage manually by rotating the knob [9].
[12] [13] [14] [15] [1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[9] [3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[6] 15ant2c056na
[1] Bundle registration plate [9] Knob

[2] Bundle registration plate wire [10] Bundle press stage up down home sensor
[3] Lift wire (PS35)
[4] Wire arm [11] Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45)
[5] Bundle press stage [12] Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)
[6] Bundle exit auxiliary roller arm [13] Over-winding-prevention stopper
[7] Front side direction [14] Wire winding shaft
[8] Bundle exit auxiliary roller [15] Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)
1 89
B. Control
(1) Trimming mode
The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press
SD-501
stage [2] when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slant-
ing position when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) turns ON [3].
M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage [5] after the bundle clip releases the
paper, the bundle registration motor (M12) assists the paper conveyance operation, and the bundle press move-
ment motor (M17) conveys the paper to the paper conveyance position [4]. M24 stops when the bundle press
stage up down home sensor (PS35) turns ON [6].
M24 starts to rotate in the forward direction and moves up the bundle registration plate [8] to open the paper
path to the trimmer section when the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press operation after the
registration operation.
M24 moves up the bundle press stage [10] for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit [9].
[7] [9]
Bundle press Forward *

movement
motor (M17) Reverse
Bundle press Forward

motor (M23)
Reverse
Bundle registra- Forward

tion motor
(M12) Reverse

stage up down
motor (M24) Reverse
Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35)

Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45)
Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)
[1] [2] [3] [4][5][6] [8] [10] 15ant2c100na
[1] Main body start signal [7] Paper press completed

[2] Bundle press stage moved up [8] Bundle registration plate moved up
[3] Stopped at the upper limit [9] Paper exit completed
[4] Paper conveyance assisting operation completed [10] Bundle press stage moved up
[5] Bundle press stage moved down
[6] Returning to the home position * Only for the paper of 297 mm or more
(before folding)
90
(2) No trimming mode

The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press
stage [2] when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slant-
SD-501
ing position when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) turns ON [3].
M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage [5] after the bundle clip releases the
paper, the bundle registration motor (M12) assists the paper conveyance operation, and the bundle press move-
ment motor (M17) conveys the paper to the paper conveyance position [4]. M24 stops when the bundle press
stage up down home sensor (PS35) turns ON [6].
M24 moves up the bundle press stage [8] for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit [7].
[7]

movement
motor (M17) Reverse

motor (M23)
Reverse

tion motor
(M12) Reverse
stage up down
motor (M24) Reverse
[1] [2] [3] [4][5][6] [8]

15ant2c101na
[1] Main body start signal [6] Returning to the home position
[2] Bundle press stage moved up [7] Paper exit completed
[3] Stopped at the upper limit [8] Bundle press stage moved up
[4] Paper conveyance assisting operation completed
[5] Bundle press stage moved down * Only for the paper of 297 mm or more
(before folding)
91
8.3.2 Bundle press movement control

The bundle press movement is the mechanism to convey the paper to the trimmer section by pressing the
paper with the press section to prevent the trimming skew at the trimmer operation after the paper registration
SD-501
operation.
A. Mechanism
The bundle press movement motor (M17) drives the bundle press section [9] in the main scan direction.
When receiving the paper with the bundle press stage [2], the bundle press section [9] moves 100 mm back-
ward from the home position to obtain the paper conveyance path.
When conducting the bundle registration operation, the bundle press section moves to the appropriate position
in accordance with the paper size.
The bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) [3] detects the home position of the bundle press section.
When the bundle press section moves to the home position, the metal plate [7] gets down the actuator [6] for
the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) [8] and obtains the paper conveyance path.
The bundle sensor /4 (PS54) [10] is for the paper jam detection.
[9] [8] [10] [1]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[2]
[6] [4] [3] 15ant2c058na
[1] Actuator [6] Actuator

[2] Bundle press stage [7] Metal plate
[3] Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) [8] Trimmer registration sensor (PS55)
[4] Actuator [9] Bundle press section
[5] Front side direction [10] Bundle sensor /4 (PS54)
92
B. Control
(1) Trimming mode
The bundle press movement motor (M17) rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to
SD-501
the paper conveyance position [2] after specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts convey-
ing the paper [1]. Then M17 rotates in the forward direction to move the bundle press section to the appropriate
press standby position in accordance with the paper size [3].
M17 rotates in the reverse direction and searches for the press position [6] for the paper when the bundle press
stage up down home sensor (PS35) detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down [5]. M17 stops
the bundle press section at the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size [7] after a specified period
of time since the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) turns OFF.
M17 searches the home position [8] and then moves the bundle press section to the paper trimming position [9]
after a specified period of time since the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press operation.
The bundle press section is returned to the home position [10] after a specified period of time since the trimming
operation is completed.
[1] [2] [3] [4][6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
Bundle clip Forward

motor (M11)
Reverse

movement
motor (M17) Reverse

motor (M23)
Reverse
Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36)
Trimmer registration sensor (PS55)
Trimmer blade motor (M31)
[5] 15ant2c102na
[1] Conveyed by the bundle clip [7] Stopped at the press position
[2] Moved to the paper conveyance position [8] Searching the home position
[3] Moved to the press standby position [9] Moved to the trimming position
[4] Home position detected [10] Returning to the home position
[5] Bundle press stage moved down
[6] Searching the press position * Only for the paper of 297 mm or more
(before folding)
93
(2) No trimming mode

The bundle press movement motor (M17) rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to
the paper conveyance position [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts con-
SD-501
veying the paper [1]. Then M17 rotates in the forward direction to move the bundle press section to the appro-
priate press position in accordance with the paper size [3].
M17 rotates in the forward direction to return the bundle press section to the home position [5] when the bundle
press stage up down home sensor (PS35) detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down [4].
[1] [2] [3] [5]
Bundle clip Forward

motor (M11)
Reverse

movement
motor (M17) Reverse
Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36)
[4] 15ant2c103na
[1] Conveyed by the bundle clip [4] Bundle press stage up down home position
[2] Moved to the shelter position [5] Returning to the home position
[3] Moved to the press position * Only for the paper of 297 mm or more
(before folding)
94
8.3.3 Bundle press control

The bundle press is the mechanism to hold the paper during trim operation to prevent the trimming skew after
the paper registration operation.
SD-501
A. Mechanism
The bundle press plates /Up [1] and /Lw [15] hold the paper. The bundle press plate /Up is pulled to the bundle
press plate /Lw [15] (to the direction to hold and press the paper) by the spring [13] via the press wires /Rt [2]
and /Lt [12]. The bundle press plate /UP [1] moves down by the spring [13] when the wire winding shaft [4] is
rotated by the bundle press motor (M23) [5] and the release wires /Rt [3] and /Lt [6] are released. The force of
the spring presses the paper.
When M23 keeps rotating, the press wire /Lt [6] is loosen and the bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) [8]
turns OFF by the actuator [9] due to the spring [10], and then the paper press position is detected.
The wire winding shaft [4] winds the release wires /Rt [3] and /Lt [6] to move up the bundle press plate /Up [1] for
releasing the press on the paper [16] when M23 rotates in reverse.
The bundle press home sensor (PS37) [11] detects the home position of the bundle press plate /Up [1].
[12]
[13] [1]
[11]
[10]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[9]
[8] [7] [5] [4]
[14]
[16]
[15]
15ant2c059nb
[1] Bundle press plate /Up [9] Actuator

[2] Press wire /Rt [10] Spring
[3] Release wire /Rt [11] Bundle press home sensor (PS37)
[4] Wire winding shaft [12] Press wire /Lt
[5] Bundle press motor (M23) [13] Spring
[6] Release wire /Lt [14] Bundle press plate /Up (down)
[7] Front side direction [15] Bundle press plate /Lw
[8] Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) [16] Bundle press plate /Up (up)
1 95
B. Control
The bundle press motor (M23) rotates in the forward direction to conduct the paper press operation [2] to press
the paper properly when the bundle press movement motor (M17) completes the press position search [1]. M23
SD-501
rotates in the reverse direction to move up the bundle press plate /Up slightly to prevent the paper from becom-
ing loose [4] when the bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) detects the lower limit [3] and turns OFF.
M23 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper [5] after a specified period of time since the trimmer reg-
istration sensor (PS55) detects the completion of the registration operation.
M23 rotates in the reverse direction to return the bundle press plate /Up to the home position [7] when the trim-
mer blade motor (M31) completes the paper trimming operation [6].
[1][2] [5] [7]

movement
motor (M17) Reverse
Forward
Bundle press
motor (M23) Reverse
Bundle press home sensor (PS37)
Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47)
[3][4] [6] 15ant2c105na
[1] Searching the press position completed [5] Press

[2] Press operation [6] Trimming completed
[3] Lower limit detected [7] Returning to the home position
[4] Press release
96
8.3.4 Bundle registration control

The paper registration operation reforms the skew at trimming.
SD-501
A. Mechanism
The bundle registration motor (M12) drives the registration claws [4].
Two registration claws [4] conduct the registration by making the paper [14] contact [3] with the bundle registra-
tion plate [13] from the gutter side.
In the registration operation, the bundle press section [7] conducts the pressing by moving to the appropriate
position in accordance with the paper size. To conduct the bundle registration, the registration claws [4] press
the paper until the actuator [2] on the bundle press section comes in the upright position and the trimmer regis-
tration sensor (PS55) [1] turns ON.
The bundle exit claws [9] are located at the 180° opposite to the registration claws on the belt. M12 rotates in
the reverse direction [10] to exit the paper at the paper exit.
The home position of the registration claws [4] is detected when the registration claws push the actuator [11]
and turns ON the bundle registration home sensor (PS34) [12].
[14] [1] [2]
[13]
[3]
[4]
[12]
[11]
[5]
[10] [9] [8] [7] [6] 15ant2c060na
[1] Trimmer registration sensor (PS55) [8] Bundle sensor /4 (PS54)

[2] Actuator [9] Bundle exit claws
[3] Registration direction [10] Drive direction of the bundle exit tabs
[4] Registration claws [11] Actuator
[5] Left side view [12] Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)
[6] Bundle sensor /2 (PS15) [13] Bundle registration plate
[7] Bundle press section [14] Paper
97
B. Control
The bundle registration motor (M12) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal turns ON
and the registration claws move to the standby position in accordance with the paper size [2].
SD-501
The bundle registration motor (M12) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the paper conveyance assisting
operation [4] and the preregistration operation [5] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor
(M11) starts conveying the paper [3]. Then M12 stops when the registration claws reach at the specified posi-
tion.
M12 rotates in the reverse direction and conducts the registration operation [7] with the registration claws when
the bundle press motor (M23) completes the press releasing operation [6]. The registration claws stop when the
trimmer registration sensor (PS55) turns ON [8].
M12 rotates in the forward direction to move the registration claws to the specified shelter position [10] when
M23 completes the press operation [9].
M12 rotates in the forward direction to let the bundle exit claws push the paper to conduct the paper exit oper-
ation [12] after a specified period of time since the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming operation
[11]. M12 stops when the bundle registration home sensor (PS34) turns ON [13]. M12 rotates in the reverse
direction to move the bundle exit claws to the standby position [14] after a specified period of time. Then it
stands by for the subsequent set.
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [9][10] [12] [14]
Forward
Bundle clip
motor (M11) Reverse

motor (M23)
Reverse

tion motor
(M12) Reverse
Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)
[13]
[1] [7] [8] [11] 15ant2c106 na
[1] Main body start signal [8] Registration operation completed

[2] Moved to the standby position [9] Paper press completed
[3] Conveyance by the bundle clip started [10] Shelter operation
[4] Paper conveyance assisted [11] Trimming completed
[5] Pre-registration [12] Paper exit operation
[6] Press release [13] Home position detected
[7] Registration [14] Moved to the standby position
98
8.3.5 Bundle exit control

A. Mechanism
(1) Bundle exit mechanism
SD-501
The paper is exited to the bundle exit tray [12].
The paper exited to the bundle exit tray is conveyed to the front by the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] and
stacked.
The bundle exit motor (M5) [5] drives the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] via the bundle exit drive belt [4] and the
bundle exit belt drive shaft [3].
M5 drives the bundle exit conveyance belt for a specified period of time to convey the paper to the front [13] for
every paper exit.
The bundle exit tray is expandable. The bundle tray set sensor (PS58) [9] detects whether the bundle exit tray is
stored or not.
M5 also drives the scrap press plate [11]. In each drive path from M5 to the bundle exit drive belt and the scraps
press plate, there is a one-way clutch respectively that switches the rotational direction of M5. Therefore, the
bundle exit drive and the scraps press plate are not driven simultaneously.
[12] [13]
[1]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[9]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7] 15ant2c062na
[1] Bundle exit conveyance belt [8] Scrap press claws

[2] Bundle exit auxiliary roller [9] Bundle tray set sensor (PS58)
[3] Bundle exit belt drive shaft [10] Trimmer scraps full sensor (PS41)
[4] Bundle exit drive belt [11] Scraps press plate
[5] Bundle exit motor (M5) [12] Bundle exit tray
[6] Scraps press home sensor (PS48) [13] Front side direction
[7] Scraps box set sensor (PS40)
99
(2) Bundle exit tray expanding mechanism

The bundle exit tray is expandable. The folded bundle exit conveyance belt [6] is also expanded [1] when the
bundle exit tray is expanded. At the time, it also moves the bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft [5] for the
SD-501
bundle exit conveyance belt [1] and [6].
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant2c063na
[1] Bundle exit conveyance belt (expanded) [4] Bundle exit drive belt
[2] Folding stand [5] Bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft
[3] Drive shaft [6] Bundle exit conveyance belt (folded)
100
(3) Trimmer scraps press mechanism

Trimmer scraps press is executed by driving the bundle exit motor (M5). The M5 motor drives the pins [10] via
the scraps press craws [4] on the belt [5] to move the scraps press plate [2] forward, then the trimmer scraps are
SD-501
pressed by the plate. The spring [11] pushes the scraps press plate to put it back.
The trimmer scraps press is carried out when the actuator [8] turns on the scraps press home sensor (PS48) [9]
with the press position of the scraps press plate is at the home position
The maximum travel distance of the scraps press plate is 200 mm.
The trimmer scraps press is carried out when the trim is performed five times or when the total trimmed number
of sheets becomes 60 sheets (30 sheets before folding) or more.
[10] [11]
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2]

15ant2c064nb
[1] Front side direction [6] Trimming position

[2] Scraps press plate (maximum movement [7] Backmost position
position) [8] Actuator
[3] Home position [9] Scraps press home sensor (PS48)
[4] Scrap press claws [10] Pin
[5] Belt [11] Spring
1 101
(4) Shutter mechanism

When the spring [10] pushes the scraps press plate [2] to its backmost position, the shutter arm [6] is pushed up
and the shutter [9] is opened. On the other hand, the shutter is closed when the scraps press plate is moved for-
SD-501
ward from the back most position to the position [3] by the spring of the shutter arm.
Opening the shutter allows the guide sheet [7], which is attached to the shutter, to be straightened [8] due to the
tension. Closing the shutter allows slack in the guide sheet to widen the dropping path of scraps.
Before trimming, the scraps press plate moves 50 mm [3] from the backmost position and stops to be ready for
trimming.
The shutter repeats opening/closing operation by shuttling the scraps press plate 50mm back and forth in each
trimming operation. This shutter operation creates vibration with the guide sheet to shake off the trimmer scraps.
[8] [9] [10]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4] [3] [2]

15ant2c117na
[1] Front side direction [6] Shutter arm

[2] Scraps press plate [7] Guide sheet
[3] Shutter closing position [8] Guide sheet (straightened)
[4] Shutter opening position [9] Shutter
[5] Scraps press claws [10] Spring
102 1
B. Trimmer scraps removal control

The scraps removal fan (FM1) [3] blows air [4] to make sure to put the trimmer scraps to the scraps box.
SD-501
[5] [6]
[4] [3] [2] [1] 15ant2c115na
[1] Left side view [4] Air

[2] Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) [5] Bundle press
[3] Trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1) [6] Bundle clip
The trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1) operates only in the trimmer mode.
When the main body start signal [1] turns ON, FM1 is rotated and the bundle clip releases [2] the paper, FM1
stops for a time to prevent the paper from having the uneven edge. When the bundle press motor (M23) com-
pletes the paper press [3], FM1 is rotated again to send air so that sheet trimming scraps get in the scraps box
without fail.

motor (M23)
Reverse
Trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1)

Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)
[1] [2] [3] 15ant2c116na
[1] Main body start signal [3] Paper press operation completed
[2] Bundle clip released the paper
103
C. Bundle exit control

The bundle exit motor (M5) rotates in the forward direction and the bundle exit conveyance belt conveys the exit
paper [2] after a specified period of time since the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming [1]. M5
SD-501
stops after a specified period of time since the bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57) detects the trailing edge of paper [3].
[2]
Bundle exit Forward

motor (M5)
Reverse
Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)
[1] [3] 15ant2c107na
[1] Trimming completed [3] Trailing edge of paper detected

[2] Bundle exit conveyance
[1] 15ant2c114na
[1] Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)
104
D. Shutter / trimmer scraps press control

When the trimming is executed with the shutter closed, the bundle exit motor (M5) starts rotating forward to exit
paper [1]. Then the scraps press plate moves backward to drop the trimmer scraps with the shutter opened [2].
SD-501
After a specified period of time since the paper exit is finished [3], the M5 motor rotates in reverse to move the
scraps press plate frontward 50 mm and stops [4] with the shutter closed. Then the next trimming is excused in
this condition. After a specified period of time from paper exit when the trimming is performed five times or when
the total trimmed number of sheets becomes 60 sheets (30 sheets before folding) or more after the previous
scraps press operation, the M5 motor starts rotating in reverse to start the press operation. When the press
operation is started, the shutter opened by the paper exit operation is closed again [7]. When the scraps press
home sensor (PS48) detects that the scraps press plate is at the home position, the M5 motor stops [8] and
next operation of the trimming and paper exit [9] is performed.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5][6][7] [9]
Forward
Bundle exit
motor (M5) Reverse
Scraps press home

sensor (PS48)
[8]
15ant2c118na
[1] Start of paper exit [6] Start of press operation

[2] Shutter is opened [7] Shutter is closed
[3] Paper exit completed [8] Press position stop
[4] Shutter is closed [9] Start of paper exit
[5] Finish of paper ejection
1 105
E. Bundle exit paper full control

The bundle tray paper full sensor (PS61) [1] detects the bundle exit paper full. The main body displays the mes-
sage on its operation panel when the paper full is detected.
SD-501
[1] 15ant2c109na
[1] Bundle tray paper full sensor (PS61)
F. Trimmer scraps full control

The trimmer scraps full sensor (PS41) detects the paper scraps full of the scraps box. When the PS 41 is turned
on for three seconds after the paper exit operation driven by the (M5) is finished, the scraps is detected as full.
The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the paper scraps full is detected.
G. Trimmer scraps tray set detection

The scraps box set sensor (PS40) detects whether the scraps box is set or not. The main body displays the
message on its operation panel when the scraps box is not set.
106 1
Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006 9. TRIMMER SECTION
9. TRIMMER SECTION
9.1 Composition
SD-501
Trimmer press plate
Front side direction
Trimmer paddle Trimmer blade Trimmer board

15ant2c119na
1 107
9. TRIMMER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver3.0 Nov.2006
9.2 Drive
9.2.1 Trimmer press drive
SD-501
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[3] [2] [1]

15ant2c067na
[1] Trimmer board [5] Press drive screw

[2] Press arm [6] Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
[3] Trimmer press motor (M32) [7] Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
[4] Slide block [8] Trimmer press plate
108
9.2.2 Trimmer blade drive
SD-501
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[4] [3] [2] [1] 15ant2c068na
[1] Trimmer blade drive screw [5] Trimmer blade

[2] Drive plate [6] Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)
[3] Drive guide holes [7] Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
[4] Drive shafts [8] Trimmer blade motor (M31)
109
9.2.3 Trimmer board drive

SD-501
[1]
[2]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[4] [3]
15ant2c069na
[1] Trimmer board solenoid (SD11) [5] Trimmer board

[2] Trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59) [6] One-way clutch
[3] Pinion [7] Front side direction
[4] Rack
110
9.2.4 Paddle drive
SD-501
[1]
[2]
15ant2c120na
[1] Trimmer paddle [2] Trimmer paddle motor (M33)
1 111
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Trimmer press control
SD-501
A. Mechanism
The trimmer press is the mechanism to hold the paper at its fore-edge side to prevent the trimming misalign-
ment.
There is approximately 5 mm of opening at the home position. The press arms [4] press the paper with the trim-
mer board [2] when the trimmer press motor (M32) [1] drives and the slide blocks [7] move to the closing direc-
tion [8]. M32 detects the completion of the paper press via overcurrent.
M32 rotates in the reverse direction to widen the opening to approximately 20 mm before conveying the paper
to the trimmer section if the number of the print paper is 16 or more (32 or more for the saddle stitched paper).
The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [6] and the trimmer press home sensor (PS52) [5] detect the home posi-
tion and 20 mm of opening respectively.
[6] [7] [8]
[5]
[1]
[4] [3] [2] 15ant2c070na
[1] Trimmer press motor (M32) [5] Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
[2] Trimmer board [6] Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
[3] Front side direction [7] Slide blocks
[4] Press arms [8] Press direction
112
When changing the trimming position of the trimmer board or replacing the trimmer board via the I/O check
mode, M32 rotates in the reverse direction to move up the press board higher than the position of the trimmer
press upper limit sensor (PS52) and release the trimmer board [3] by pushing the trimmer board retaining spring
SD-501
[2] by the plate [1]. At the time, the opening is approximately 23 mm. The position is detected via overcurrent.
[3] [2] [1] 15ant2c071na
[1] Plate [3] Trimmer board

[2] Trimmer board retaining spring
113
B. Control
(1) The number of the print paper is 16 or more (32 or more for the saddle stitched paper)
The trimmer press motor (M32) rotates in the reverse direction [2] when the bundle clip motor starts conveying
SD-501
the paper [1]. When the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) [3] detects upper limit position of the trimmer
board, M32 is stopped and waits for the paper. At this time, the opening is approximately 20 mm.
M32 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper when the paper is conveyed to the opening by the bun-
dle press movement motor (M17) [4]. M32 stops when the overcurrent is detected [5].
The returning operation to the home position [7] is conducted when the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes
the trimming [6].
[1] [2] [4] [5]
Bundle clip motor (M11)

movement
motor (M17) Reverse
Trimmer press Forward

motor (M32)
Reverse
Trimmer blade Forward

motor (M31)
Reverse
Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
[3] [6] [7] 15ant2c110na
[1] Conveyance by the bundle clip started [5] Trimmer press completed
[2] Opening operation [6] Trimming completed
[3] Stopped when the opening is approx. 20 mm [7] Returning operation to the home position
[4] Conveyance of the trimmed paper completed
(2) The number of the print paper is 15 or less (30 for the saddle stitched paper)
The trimmer press motor (M32) rotates in the forward direction to press the paper without widening the opening
when the paper is conveyed to the opening.
114 1
9.3.2 Trimmer blade control

A. Mechanism
The trimming is conducted by the trimmer blade driven by the trimmer blade motor (M31) while the paper is
SD-501
pressed by the trimmer press.
The drive shafts [4] moves up in a slanting direction along with the drive guide holes [2] when M31 pulls the trim-
mer blade retaining plate [5] to the direction [1]. It trims the paper with the trimmer blade [6] attached on the trim-
mer blade retaining plate [5].
The completion of the trimming is detected by the overcurrent of M31 caused when the trimmer blade retaining
plate [5] is contacted with the trimmer stoppers [7] attached to the trimmer press plate.
If the overcurrent of M31 is not detected even if the trimmer blade keeps moving up, the trimmer blade upper
limit sensor (PS51) detects the upper limit.
[7]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2] 15ant2c072na
[1] Trimming direction [5] Trimmer blade retaining plate

[2] Drive guide holes [6] Trimmer blade
[3] Front side direction [7] Trimmer stoppers
[4] Drive shafts
115
B. Control
The trimmer blade motor (M31) starts the trimming [2] when the trimmer press motor (M32) completes the press
and stops [1]. M31 stops when the overcurrent is detected [3].
SD-501
M31 starts the returning operation to the home position [5] when the bundle press motor (M23) starts releasing
the press [4]. M31 stops when the trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) turns ON [6].
[1] [4]

motor (M23)
Reverse

motor (M32)
Reverse
Forward
Trimmer blade
motor (M31) Reverse
Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)
[2] [3] [5] [6] 15ant2c112na
[1] Trimmer press completed [4] Releasing the press started

[2] Trimmer operation [5] Returning operation to the home position
[3] Stopped by the overcurrent [6] Home position detected
116
9.3.3 Trimmer board control

A. Mechanism
The trimmer operation may be conducted improperly due to the damage on the trimmer board if the trimmer
SD-501
board is subjected to the trimmer blade many times at the same position. For this reason, the trimmer board is
slid 1 mm backward for sheet cutting each time a job of 700 times trimming is completed.
The trimmer board solenoid (SD11) [1] slides the trimmer board [5] with its fixing released by the trimmer press
motor (M32).
The pinion [3] pushes the rack [4] 0.5 mm every time SD11 turns ON. The rotation of the pinion is transmitted to
the rack by the one-way clutch [6] and pushes the trimmer board when SD11 turns ON. The pinion does not
rotate and push the trimmer board when SD11 turns OFF by the one-way clutch.
Each time a job of 700 times trimming is completed, SD11 is turned on twice to move the trimmer board 1 mm.
The trimmer board can be slid up to approximately 26 mm. The main body displays the message on its opera-
tion panel when the trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59) [2] turns ON. The trimmer operation is prohibited
when the trimming is conducted 700 times since PS59 turns ON.
Note
• For C6500, the operation timing of the trimmer board solenoid can be selected among 700/500/300
(700 by default), and the travel distance can be selected among 1.0/1.5/2.0 mm (1.0 by default)
from “Finisher adjustment” in service mode.
• For 1050, if the DIPSW22-5 setting in service mode is changed to 1, the operation timing of the
trimmer board solenoid becomes selectable among 700/500/300 (700 by default) on the adjust-
ment screen in the user mode.
• The barr may occur on the trimmed edge of the paper before the movement cycle of the trimmer
board depending on the paper type.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[4] [3]
15ant2c073na
[1] Trimmer board solenoid (SD11) [4] Rack

[2] Trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59) [5] Trimmer board
[3] Pinion [6] One-way clutch
1 117
B. Control
The trimmer press motor (M32) starts the returning operation [2] to the home position when the 700th trimmer
operation [1] is completed. M32 does not stop by defection of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [3]. The
SD-501
opening keeps widening until the overcurrent of M32 is detected [4]. When M32 stops, the trimmer board sole-
noid (SD11) turns ON and OFF twice [5] to move the trimmer board 1 mm. Then, M32 starts the returning oper-
ation to the home position [6].
[4] [5] [6]
Trimmer board solenoid (SD11)

motor (M32)
Reverse
Forward
Trimmer blade
motor (M31) Reverse
Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
[1] [2] [3] 15ant2c113na
[1] 700th trimmer operation [4] Overcurrent of M32 detected

[2] Opening operation of the trimmer press [5] Trimmer board moved 1 mm
[3] Home position detected [6] Returning operation to the home position
118
9.3.4 Trimmer paddle

A. Mechanism
The trimmer paddle [2] is provided to prevent the saddle-stitched paper from creating trails with scraps by get-
SD-501
ting into the paper during the press operation, and to drop the scraps forcibly. The trimmer paddle is driven by
the trimmer paddle motor (M33).
Trimming amount is 15mm or less: The M33 motor rotates in reverse [1] to drop [3] the trimming scraps with the
trimming paddle.
Trimming amount is more than 15mm: The M33 motor rotates forward to rake and drop the scraps to the wider
dropping path [4].
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c121na
[1] Trimmer paddle (M33) reverse direction [4] Dropping path

[2] Trimmer paddle (Trimming amount is more than 15mm)
[3] Dropping path [5] Trimmer paddle (M33) forward direction
(Trimming amount is 15mm or less)
1 119
B. Control
In trimming mode, the trimmer paddle motor (M33) starts forward/reverse rotation after paper clipping is oper-
ated by the bundle clip motor (M11), and then the M33 motor stops when the trimming JOB is finished.
SD-501
If the trimming amount value is set in the "Trimming adjustment" in service mode, the forward/reverse rotation of
motor is controlled by the trimming amount that is added the adjusted value. (Edges of standard sized paper is
trimmed by 2mm even when the adjutment value is set to 0.)
120 1
PB-501
2006.11
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
PB-501
PB-501
OUTLINE
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.1 Exit to the Sub Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.2 Perfect Binding Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3.1 Gate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3.2 Entrance conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.3.3 Intermediate conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.3.4 Cover paper conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.3.5 Sub tray exit release control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.3.6 Sub tray full-status detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.3.7 Cover paper multi feed detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5. SC SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.3.1 SC section operation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.3.2 SC entrance conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.3.3 SC switchback conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.3.4 SC main scan alignment control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.3.5 Sub scan alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.3.6 SC papers conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.3.7 Clamp entrance movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.3.8 SC stopper control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.3.9 SC pressure arm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6. CLAMP SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6.3.1 Clamp alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6.3.2 Clamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.3.3 Clamp rotation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.3.4 Book thickness detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
i
7.3.1 Pellet supply operation overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

7.3.2 Pellet supply arm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.3.3 Pellet supply control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
PB-501
7.3.4 Pellet supply amount control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

7.3.5 Pellet remaining amount detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.3.6 Pellet supply door opening/closing detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.3.7 Stirring stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8. GLUE TANK SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.3.1 Glue tank unit movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.3.2 Glue apply roller control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.3.3 Glue tank lifting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8.3.4 Cover paper glue control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
8.3.5 Glue temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
9. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
9.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
9.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9.2.1 Cover paper tray lift drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9.2.2 Paper feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
9.2.3 Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
9.3.1 Plate up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
9.3.4 Paper feed mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.3.6 Cover paper tray empty detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
9.3.7 Paper feed assist plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
10. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.3.1 Cover paper table section operation overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.3.2 Cover paper conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
10.3.3 Cover paper trimming control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
10.3.4 Cover paper alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
10.3.5 Cover paper table up down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
10.3.6 Cover paper folding plate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
10.3.7 Cover paper conveyance arm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
10.3.8 Cover paper lifting (supporting) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10.3.9 Book exit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10.3.10 Waste paper control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11. BOOK STOCK SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
11.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
11.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
11.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
11.3.1 Book stock section operation overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
11.3.2 Book conveyance & movement control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
ii
11.3.3 Book conveyance belt control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

11.3.4 Book conveyance up down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
11.3.5 Book movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
PB-501
11.3.6 Book stopper control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
11.3.7 Book full status detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
12. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
12.1 Fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
12.2 Door opening/closing control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
iii
PB-501
Blank page
iv
OUTLINE
PB-501
A. Type
Type Simplified perfect binding machine (Consoled hot-melt type)
B. Functions
Perfect binding mode Automatically binds and stocks in a book stock section.
Binding sheets and thickness Min. 10 sheets
Max. 300 sheets or 30 mm
Binding sheets with Z-fold sheets: See the
table below
- Single-sided print -
No. of Z-fold sheets Max. No. of unfold sheets Total
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
2 sheets 150 sheets 152 sheets
- Double-sided print -
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
- Single/double-sided print -
Book stock capacity : Max. 11 books*1 x 2 rows*2 (book thickness: 30mm)

10 to 30 sheets book: 50 books
31 to 150 sheets book: 35 books or until the upper limit
is detected.
151 to 300 sheets book: Until the upper limit is
detected.
Cover paper tray : Selectable from the PB, main body, or PI.
PB cover paper tray capacity 1,000 sheets (82g/m2)
500 sheets (161g/m2)
Trimming : Selectable from Trim/Not trim.
*1: The available number of books may decrease due to curls of papers.
*2: When books have been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the first stack
is automatically moved to the second row, and piling books at the first row
is continued.
Sub tray mode Exit into the sub tray with no being processing mode.
Tray capacity: 200 sheets (80g/m2)
Warm-up time Approx. 20 minutes
1
C. Paper type
(1) Paper size
PB-501
Perfect binding mode Inside paper : A4, A4W, B5, B5W, A5, A5S, A5W, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11W, 51/2 x 81/2,
51/2 x 81/2W, 16K
Available only in Z-folding: 11 x 17, A3, B4, 81/2 x 14, A4S,
81/2 x 11S, 12 x 18
Cover paper : Vertical (main scan direction) Same size as the inside paper.
Horizontal (sub scan direction) Wide L
L= book size in the sub scan direction x 2 + book thickness
(book spine) + 3mm (for trimming)
Sub tray mode SRA3, A3, B4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
81/4 x 13, 81/2 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 71/4 x 101/2,
71/4 x 101/2, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S
Custom paper (Max. 331 (W) x 488 (L) mm, Min.100 (W) x 139 (L) mm),
Wide paper, Standard index paper*1
*1 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
(2) Paper weight
Perfect binding mode Inside paper : 62 to 91g/m2

Cover paper : 82 to 161g/m2
Sub tray mode 50 to 300g/m2
D. Maintenance

E. Machine data
Power source Inch: 120VAC 60Hz

Metric: 230VAC 50Hz
5VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption 720W or less
Dimensions 1,303 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 775(D) mm
Binding section: 740 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 775 (D) mm
Book stock section: 563 (W) x 740 (H) x 685 (D) mm
Weight Approx. 210kg
Temperature 10 to 30 °C
Note
2
Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006 2. UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM
PB-501
[6] [7] [8] [1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a075t1c001ca
[1] Conveyance section [5] Glue tank section

[2] Cover paper table section [6] Pellet supply section
[3] Cover paper supply section [7] Sub compile (SC) section
[4] Book stock section [8] Clamp section
3
3. PAPER PATH
3.1 Exit to the Sub Tray
PB-501
[1]
[2]
a075t1c002ca
[1] Exit to the sub tray [2] Exit from the FD sub tray
4
3.2 Perfect Binding Mode

A. Conveyance of inside papers to the clamp section and conveyance of cover paper
PB-501
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075t1c003ca
[1] Conveyance of inside papers [3] Conveyance of cover paper from the PB
[2] Conveyance of cover paper from the main tray
body [4] Switchback conveyance
5
B. Clamping and glue application

PB-501
[2]
[1]
a075t1c004ca
[1] Switchback conveyance [2] Bypass conveyance
6
C. Glue application to cover paper and cover paper folding operation
PB-501
[1]
a075t1c005ca
[1] Cover paper folding operation
7
D. Book stock
PB-501
[2]
[1] a075t1c006ca
[1] Moving to the second row [2] Exit of the book
8
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
PB-501
4.1 Configuration
SC entrance sensor (PS2)
Sub tray full sensor (PS5)

Bypass gate
Sub tray
Sub tray exit sensor (PS4)
Sub tray conveyance

roller
Sub tray gate
Entrance sensor
(PS1)
Intermediate
conveyance roller
Entrance gate
Entrance
conveyance roller
Cover paper entrance sensor

Cover paper (PS3)
conveyance roller
Cover paper conveyance
sensor /4 (PS78)
Multi feed detection board /1

(MFDTB71)
Multi feed detection

board /2 (MFDTB72)
Cover paper feed roller
sensor /5 (PS79)
a075t2c001ca
9
4.2 Drive
A. Entrance conveyance drive/Intermediate conveyance drive/Cover paper conveyance drive
PB-501
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
a075t2c002ca
[1] Entrance conveyance motor (M1) [4] Cover paper feed motor (M74)
[2] Registration roller (to the cover paper supply [5] Intermediate conveyance motor (M2)
section)
[3] Paper feed roller (to the cover paper supply
section)
10
B. Entrance gate drive/Bypass gate drive/Sub tray gate drive/Sub tray exit & separation drive
PB-501
[6] [7] [8] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a075t2c003ca
[1] Sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) [5] Entrance gate

[2] Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3) [6] Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)
[3] Sub tray gate [7] Bypass gate
[4] Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) [8] Paper exit driven roller
11
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Gate control
PB-501
A. Entrance gate control

• The entrance gate switches the paper path for the cover paper used for perfect binding so that the paper
conveyed from the FD’s PI or the main body is conveyed to the cover paper table section.
• The entrance gate solenoid (SD1) activates the gate. When the SD1 is Off, the gate is opened to convey the
cover paper toward the sub tray gate, and when the SD1 becomes On, the gate is changed to make a
paper path toward the cover paper table section.
• The SD1 stays Off while the inside papers for perfect binding are conveyed, or while they are exit on the sub
tray. It is kept On while cover paper is conveyed from the FD’s PI or the main body.
(1) When cover paper being conveyed from the main body
1. When a print job is received, the entrance gate solenoid (SD1) turns Off [1] to open the entrance gate toward
the sub tray gate.
2. Cover paper is conveyed through the entrance gate [2].
3. When the paper exit sensor (PS3) of the main body detects the leading edge of the cover paper, the SD1
turns On to switch the entrance gate direction toward the cover table section [4].
4. Once a prescribed time period has elapsed after the cover paper entrance sensor (PS3) detects the trailing
edge of cover paper [4], the SD1 turns Off to switch the entrance gate direction toward the sub tray gate.
[1] [2] [3]
Paper exit sensor (main body PS3)
Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)
Cover paper entrance sensor (PS3)
[4] a075t2c004ca
[1] Print start signal is received [3] Cover paper leading edge detection
[2] Cover paper conveyance [4] Cover paper trailing edge detection
B. Sub tray gate control

• The sub tray gate switches the paper path for inside papers used for perfect binding between toward the
SC section and toward the sub tray to be exit.
• The sub tray gate is activated by the sub tray gate solenoid (SD3). When the SD3 is Off, the gate is opened
toward the SC section, and when the SD3 becomes On, the gate direction is switched toward the sub tray
to exit inside papers.
• While inside papers are exit on the sub tray, the SD3 turns On upon receiving a print job, and turns Off when
the job is finished.
12
C. Bypass gate control

• The SC section is designed to stack a certain number of inside papers (n) of the subsequent book while the
previous book inside papers are glued at the clamp section. The bypass gate [3] operates to lay two next
PB-501
inside paper (“n+1”th and “n+2”th) one on top of another and keep them until the stacked “n” inside papers
at the SC section are conveyed to the clamp section [1]. This saves time for conveying the inside paper and
increases productivity.
• The bypass gate is activated by the bypass gate solenoid (SD2).
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
a075t2c005ca
[1] “n” inside papers of subsequent book [3] Bypass gate

[2] “n+1”th inside paper of subsequent book [4] “n+2”th inside paper of subsequent book
(1) Control
1. The bypass gate solenoid (SD2) turns On when a prescribed time has elapsed after the SC entrance sensor
(PS2) detects the trailing edge [1] of the “n+1”th inside paper of subsequent book.
2. The solenoid turns Off when a prescribed time period has elapsed after the “n+2”th inside paper is laid over
the “n+1”th inside paper, and the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the trailing edge of the “n+2”th inside
paper [2].
[1] [2]

Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)
a075t2c006ca
[1] Detection of trailing edge of “n+1”th inside [2] Detection of trailing edge of “n+2”th inside
paper of subsequent book paper of subsequent book
13
4.3.2 Entrance conveyance control

• The entrance conveyance roller, sub tray conveyance roller, main body cover paper conveyance roller, and
the cover paper conveyance roller are driven by the entrance conveyance motor (M1). The drive force is
PB-501
transmitted via the gear and the timing belt.
A. Perfect binding mode

(1) When feeding cover paper from the PB cover paper tray
• The entrance conveyance motor (M1) starts to turn at high speed upon receiving a print job.
• The M1 stops when the job is finished.
(2) When feeding cover paper from the main body

1. The entrance conveyance motor (M1) starts to turn at high speed [1] upon receiving a print job.
2. When the main body paper exit sensor (PS3) is turned On [4] by the leading edge of the cover paper, the M1
starts to turn at the same speed as that of the main unit.
3. Upon detection of the trailing edge of the cover paper by the PS3, the M1 starts to turn at high speed [5] to
convey the paper.
[1] [2] [4] [5]
Main body paper exit sensor (PS3)
Cover paper entrance sensor (PS3)
Entrance conveyance High speed

motor (M1) Main body
speed
[3] a075t2c007ca
[1] Print start signal is received [4] Changes to the same speed as that of the
[2] Paper main unit
[3] Change of main body process speed [5] Changes to high speed rotation
14
B. Sub tray exit mode

(1) Large size double side mode, single side main unit straight mode (320mm or longer in the sub
scan direction)
PB-501
1. The entrance conveyance motor (M1) starts to turn at high speed [1] upon receiving a print job, and starts to
decelerate [2] in accordance with the main body process speed when the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the
leading edge of paper.
2. After the specified time period from the entrance sensor (PS1), the M1 starts to turn at high speed again.
[1] [2]
Fusing paper exit sensor (main body PS22)
Entrance conveyance High speed

motor (M1) Main body
speed
a075t2c008ca
[1] Print start signal is received [2] Change of main body process speed
(2) Small size all modes, large size main unit reverse paper exit mode (320mm or shorter in the sub
scan direction)
• The entrance conveyance motor (M1) starts to turn at high speed upon receiving a print job.
4.3.3 Intermediate conveyance control

• The intermediate conveyance roller is driven by the drive force of the intermediate conveyance motor (M2)
transmitted via the gear and the timing belt.
A. Perfect binding mode

• The intermediate conveyance motor (M2) starts to rotate when a print job is received.
B. Sub tray exit mode

• The intermediate conveyance motor (M2) does not work.
4.3.4 Cover paper conveyance control

• The cover paper conveyance section and the cover paper conveyance roller are driven by the drive force of
the cover paper feed motor (M74) transmitted via the gear, timing belt, and the coupling.
• The M74 stops when a prescribed time period has elapsed after the cover paper conveyance sensor/4
(PS78) detects the trailing edge of the cover paper.
• For more information on the feeding operation, see “9. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION”. (See P.79)
4.3.5 Sub tray exit release control

• The sub tray release operation is performed to align edges of papers exit onto the sub tray.
• The operation is activated by the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4). The sub tray exit roller separates from the
spring when the SD4 becomes On, and the roller moves to push the spring when the SD4 turns Off.
15
(1) When paper size is large (320mm or longer in the sub scan direction)
1. When a prescribed time period has elapsed after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the leading edge of
paper [1], the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) turns On to release the sub tray exit roller from the spring [2].
PB-501
2. The SD4 turns Off to make the roller push the spring [3] when a prescribed time period has elapsed after the
PS1 detects the trailing edge of the paper.
[1] [3]
Sub tray exit solenoid (SD4)
[2] a075t2c009ca
[1] Paper leading edge detection [3] The sub tray exit roller pushes against the
[2] The sub tray exit roller separates from the spring
spring
(2) When paper size is small (320mm or shorter in the sub scan direction)
1. After the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of paper, the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) turns On
to make the sub tray exit roller separate from the spring [1].
2. The SD4 turns Off to make the roller push the spring [2] when a prescribed time period has elapsed after the
PS1 detects the trailing edge of the paper.
[1] [2]
a075t2c010ca
[1] The sub tray exit roller separates from the [2] The sub tray exit roller pushes against the
spring spring
4.3.6 Sub tray full-status detection control

• When the sub tray becomes full, the full-status is detected by the sub tray full sensor (PS5).
16
4.3.7 Cover paper multi feed detection control

• When multiple papers are conveyed from the PB cover paper tray at a time, the supersonic sensors; multi
feed detection board /1 (MFDTB71) [2] and /2 (MFDTB72) [1] detect the error. The MFDTB71 transmits a
PB-501
supersonic wave and the MFDTB72 receives it.
[1] [2]
a075t2c011ca
[1] MFDTB72 [2] MFDTB71
17
5. SC SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006
5. SC SECTION
5.1 Configuration
PB-501
Switchback roller
Straight gate
SC alignment plate
SC entrance roller
Pressure arm
Clamp entrance roller
Straight gate FD alignment plate
Switchback roller
SC entrance roller
SC paper detection sensor

SC alignment plate (PS16)
SC roller Pressure arm
Clamp entrance roller
SC stopper FD alignment plate

a075t2c021ca
18
Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006 5. SC SECTION
5.2 Drive
A. SC entrance conveyance drive/Switchback conveyance drive/Paper conveyance drive
PB-501
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a075t2c022ca
[1] SC switchback conveyance motor (M12) [5] SC roller

[2] SC switchback roller [6] Clamp entrance roller
[3] SC entrance conveyance motor (M11) [7] SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
[4] SC entrance roller
19
B. Switchback release drive
[12] [13] [1]

PB-501
[11]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[8] [5]
[7]
[6]
a075t2c023ca
[1] SC switchback release motor (M13) [8] Pressure plate

[2] SC switchback arm pressure detection [9] Switchback spring
sensor (PS12) [10] Switchback cam
[3] One-way clutch [11] Switchback arm
[4] Pressure cam [12] One-way clutch
[5] SC switchback roller [13] SC switchback spring pressure detection
[6] Pressure bracket sensor (PS13)
[7] Pressure spring
20
C. SC roller release drive/Clamp entrance release drive
PB-501
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[6] [5] a075t2c024ca
[1] SC roller cam [4] Clamp entrance roller release motor (M20)
[2] SC roller release motor (M18) [5] Clamp entrance driven roller
[3] Clamp entrance roller cam [6] SC driven roller
21
D. Clamp entrance movement drive

PB-501
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a075t2c025ca
[1] Clamp entrance movement motor (M19) [4] FD alignment plate

[2] SC roller [5] Clamp entrance movement HP sensor (PS18)
[3] Clamp entrance roller
22
E. SC main scan alignment drive
[3] [4] [1]
PB-501
[2]
a075t2c026ca
[1] SC alignment HP sensor (PS14) [3] SC alignment plate/Fr

[2] SC alignment motor (M15) [4] SC alignment plate/Rr
F. Sub scan alignment drive
[1]
[2]
a075t2c027ca
[1] FD alignment plate [2] FD alignment solenoid (SD11)
23
G. SC stopper drive/SC pressure arm drive/Straight gate drive

PB-501
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c028ca
[1] SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) [4] SC stopper solenoid (SD12)

[2] SC pressure arm [5] Straight gate solenoid (SD91)
[3] SC stopper
24
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 SC section operation overview
PB-501
• The SC section is provided to stack a certain number of papers for subsequent book while papers for the
previous book being glued at the clamp section and the glue tank section.
• The number of papers stacked in the SC section varies depending on the print mode and paper size.
(Example: A4-sized one-side printed paper can be stacked up to about 46 sheets.)
A. Operation overview
1. A page [2] for the first book [3] goes to the SC section and then goes to the clamp section. Once the page
[2] is set in the SC section, the SC stopper [4] is released, and the page is conveyed to the clamp section by
the SC switchback roller [1], SC roller [5], and the clamp entrance roller [6]. All inside papers for the first book
are conveyed to the clamp section in this manner one by one.
2. When the last page of the first book reaches the clamp section, the SC stopper [7] moves back to its original
position, and the SC driven roller [5] and the clamp entrance driven roller [6] move away from their paper-
feed position. A certain number of papers (n) for the next book are stacked in the SC section by the SC
switchback roller [1].
[1]
[5]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[3] [7]
[8]
[3]
a075t2c029ca
[1] Switchback roller [5] SC driven roller

[2] Page [6] Clamp entrance driven roller
[3] Page for the first book [7] Page for the next book
[4] SC stopper [8] All inside papers for the first book
25
3. When binding of the first book is finished, the clamp unit inclines from its upright position to receive paper for
the next book. At the same time, the SC stopper [7] moves to open the path, and the SC driven roller [1] and
clamp entrance driven roller [5] go into the position to convey the paper (n) [6] stacked in the SC section.
PB-501
During the above operation, the next two papers (“n+1”th [4] and “n+2”th [2]) are set in the bypass gate [3].
4. The two papers are conveyed to the clamp section at a time.
5. The rest of the papers for the book are conveyed to the clamp section one by one in the same manner as for
the first book.
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a075t2c030ca
[1] SC driven roller [5] Clamp entrance driven roller

[2] “n+2”th page [6] Stacked inside papers (n)
[3] Bypass gate [7] SC stopper
[4] “n+1”th page
26
5.3.2 SC entrance conveyance control

• The SC entrance roller is driven by the drive force of the SC entrance conveyance motor (M11) transmitted
via the belt.
PB-501
A. Control
1. The SC entrance conveyance motor (M11) starts to turn at low speed [1] upon receiving a print job.
2. The M11 speed changes to high speed when the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the trailing edge of
paper [2].
3. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the M11 acceleration, the M11 returns to low speed [3] before the
paper goes through the SC entrance roller.
4. The above conveyance operation is carried out for the last paper of the first book [4] and the first page [5] to
the “n”th page [6] of the next book (n=37 to 38 when the papers are A4 sized and one-side printed).
5. The M11 stops to stop the SC entrance roller when the PS2 detects [7] the trailing edge of “n+1”th page.
6. When the PS2 detects [8] “n+2”th paper trailing edge, the M11 starts to turn at high speed [9] to convey the
“n+1”th and “n+2”th papers at a time.
7. The rest of the papers for the second book are conveyed in the same manner as for the first book, and the
papers for the subsequent books are conveyed in the same manner as for the second book.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

High
SC entrance conveyance speed
motor (M11) Medium
speed
[9]
a075t2c031ca
[1] Print start signal is received [7] Trailing edge detection of “n+1”th page of
[2] Paper trailing edge detection by PS2 second book
[3] M11 changes to low speed [8] Trailing edge detection of “n+2”th page of
[4] First book second book
[5] First page of the second book [9] M11 turns at high speed
[6] “n”th page of the second book
27
5.3.3 SC switchback conveyance control

• The SC switchback roller is driven by the SC switchback conveyance motor (M12). The releasing operation
of the roller is driven by the SC switchback release motor (M13).
PB-501
A. SC switchback roller release mechanism

• The SC switchback release motor (M13) drives the pressure cam [3] and the switchback cam [9].
The forward rotation of the motor drives the pressure cam [3] and the reverse rotation of the motor drives
the switchback cam [9].
• The SC switchback roller [4] has three preset positions for releasing (kept away from the driven roller),
pressing strongly or lightly against the driven roller.
• The “pressing strongly” status of the SC switchback roller [4] is used when conveying inside paper to the
clamp section, and the roller becomes the “pressing lightly” status when conveying inside paper to the SC
section so that the paper are properly stopped by the SC stopper.
• The pressure cam position is detected by the SC switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12) [2], and
the position of the switchback cam is detected by the SC switchback spring pressure detection sensor
(PS13) [6]. When the pressure cam is at its home position, the PS12 is On, while the PS13 is Off when the
switchback cam is at its home position.
PS12 PS13 SC switchback roller status (position)

ON OFF Releasing (kept away from the driven
roller)
OFF OFF Pressing strongly against the driven
roller
ON ON Pressing lightly against the driven
roller
ON OFF Not used (“pressing strongly” status)
28
[6] [1]
PB-501
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c032ca
[1] SC switchback release motor (M13) [4] SC switchback roller

[2] SC switchback arm pressure detection sen- [5] Switchback cam
sor (PS12) [6] SC switchback spring pressure detection
[3] Pressure cam sensor (PS13)
29
(1) Switchback cam drive (light pressure)

• The switchback cam [1] rotates counterclockwise [5] to switch the SC switchback roller [4] position
between releasing and light pressing while the pressure cam [3] is at its home position.
PB-501
• While the SC switchback spring pressure detection sensor (PS13) is Off, the SC switchback roller is in the
release position (kept away from the driven roller).
• When the PS13 becomes On [2], the SC switchback roller moves to lightly press against the driven roller.
• The PS13 is kept Off while the switchback cam is at its home position.
[1] [2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c033ca
[1] Switchback cam (home position) [4] SC switchback roller

[2] Switchback cam (light pressure) [5] Rotating direction of the switchback cam
[3] Pressure cam
30
(2) Pressure cam drive (strong pressure)

• The pressure cam [2] rotates clockwise [4] to switch the SC switchback roller [5] position between releasing
and strong pressing. The switch operation of the pressure cam is made while the switchback cam [1] is at
PB-501
its home position.
• While the SC switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12) is On, the SC switchback roller is in the
release position (kept away from the driven roller).
• When the PS12 becomes Off [3], the SC switchback roller moves to strongly press against the driven roller.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a075t2c034ca
[1] Switchback cam (home position) [4] Rotation direction of the pressure cam
[2] Pressure cam (home position) [5] SC switchback roller
[3] Pressure cam (PS12 is Off)
31
B. SC switchback roller control

• Inside papers of the first book are conveyed to the clamp section one by one without being stacked at the
SC section.
PB-501
• When conveying inside papers to the clamp section without stacking them in the SC section, the SC
switchback roller position is switched between releasing and strong pressing. And the rotation direction of
the roller is also switched between forward and reverse.
• When conveying inside papers of the next and subsequent books, a certain number of papers (n) are first
stacked in the SC section, and the stacked inside papers are conveyed to the clamp section at a time.
“n+1”th paper and the subsequent papers are conveyed to the clamp section one by one without being
stacked at the SC section.
• When stacking papers in the SC section, the SC switchback roller position is switched between releasing
and light pressing. During the stacking, the SC switchback roller rotates in the reverse direction.
(1) First book

1. The SC switchback conveyance motor (M12) starts to turn in the reverse direction [1] upon receiving of a
print job. The switchback roller is in its release position to make paper go to the SC section.
2. The M12 reverses the direction of rotation (starts to turn in the forward direction) after the SC entrance sen-
sor (PS2) detects the trailing edge of paper [2]. At the same time, the SC switchback release motor (M13)
starts to rotate in the forward direction.When the SC switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12) turns
Off, the M13 stops and the switchback roller is strongly pressed against the driven roller [4].
3. The inside papers are nipped between the switchback roller and the driven roller strongly [4] and conveyed
to the SC section by the forward rotation of the roller.
4. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS2 detects the trailing edge of the paper, the M12 reverses
the direction of rotation [5] to convey inside papers to the clamp section.
5. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS2 detects the trailing edge of the paper, the M13 starts to
turn in the forward direction again to move the switchback roller away from the driven roller [6], and when the
PS12 turns On, the motor stops.
6. The operations described above are repeated until the last page [7] of the first book reaches the clamp sec-
tion.
[1] [2] [3] [7]

SC switchback Forward
conveyance motor
(M12) Reverse
release motor (M13)
Reverse
SC switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12)
[4] [6]
[5] a075t2c035ca
[1] Print start signal is received [5] Switchback conveyance start

[2] Paper trailing edge detection by PS2 [6] Releasing (kept away from the driven roller)
[3] M12 forward rotation and strong pressure [7] Last page of the first book
[4] Roller strong pressed status
32
(2) The second and subsequent books

1. The SC switchback conveyance motor (M12) continues to turn in the reverse direction after the last page [1]
of the previous book is conveyed to the clamp section [2].
PB-501
2. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the trailing edge of the first
page of the next book [3], the SC switchback release motor (M13) starts to rotate in the reverse direction [4].
3. When the SC switchback spring pressure detection sensor (PS13) turns On, the M13 stops and the switch-
back roller is lightly pressed against the driven roller. The inside papers are then conveyed to the SC section
and stopped by the SC stopper.
4. After the PS2 detects the trailing edge of the paper, the M13 reverses the direction of rotation again. Then
the switchback roller is moved away from the driven roller to accept the next page.
5. The above operations are repeated until a certain number of papers (n) are stacked in the SC section.
6. While the next two papers (“n+1”th page [5] and “n+2”th page [6]) are set in the bypass gate, the stacked n
papers are conveyed to the clamp section at a time.
7. When the PS2 detects the trailing edge of the “n+2”th page, the M12 starts to turn in the forward diretion. At
the same time, the M13 also starts to turn in the forward direction to strongly push the switchback roller
against the driven roller. After the “n+1”th page and the “n+2”th page are conveyed to the clamp section
through the SC section at a time, the following papers are conveyed to the clamp section one by one in the
same manner as for the first book.
[1] [3] [5] [6]
conveyance motor
(M12) Reverse
Forward
SC switchback
release motor (M13)
Reverse
SC switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12)
SC switchback spring pressure detection sensor
(PS13)
[2] [4]
a075t2c036ca
[1] The last page of the previous book [4] The roller is lightly pressed against the
[2] Conveyance of the last page of the first driven roller
book [5] “n+1”th page
[3] Detection of the first page of the next book [6] “n+2”th page
33
5.3.4 SC main scan alignment control

• The SC alignment motor (M15) drives the SC alignment plate/Fr and /Rr via the belt to move them by 9 mm
as they are shaken. This movement aligns the edges of the papers stacked in the SC section in the main
PB-501
scan direction.
• The alignment operation is carried out every time a page is stacked in the SC section when stacking a cer-
tain number of papers of the second or subsequent books.
• While inside papers are conveyed to the clamp section without being stacked in the clamp section, this
alignment operation is not performed.
(1) Control
1. Upon receiving of a print job, the SC alignment motor (M15) starts to turn in the reverse direction to move
the SC alignment plate/Fr and /Rr until the both plates are set at the position 9mm outer than the paper
edges [1].
2. After the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the trailing edge of the first page of the second or subsequent
book, the M15 starts to turn in the reverse direction to carry out the main-scan- direction alignment by
means of the SC alignment plate/Fr and /Rr.
3. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS2 detection, the M15 starts to turn in the forward direction
to move the SC alignment plate/Fr and /Rr back to their standby positions.
4. Every time a page is stacked in the SC section, this alignment operation is performed.
Note
• The set positions of the two alignment plates (the distance between the two plates) can be
adjusted in the service mode.
[1]
Forward (open)
SC alignment motor
(M15) Reverse (close)
SC alignment HP sensor (PS14)
a075t2c037ca
[1] Print start signal is received
34
5.3.5 Sub scan alignment control

• The FD alignment solenoid (SD11) drives the FD alignment plate [4] so that the inside papers [2] are hit
against the reference plate [3] of the clamp section to be aligned in the sub scan direction.
PB-501
• The timing of the movement is detected by the SC paper detection sensor (PS16).
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a075t2c038ca
[1] SC paper detection sensor (PS16) [3] Reference plate

[2] Paper [4] FD alignment plate
(1) Control
1. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS16 detects the trailing edge of the first page of the first
book [1], the SD11 turns On if the clamp alignment plate/Fr and /Rr are closed for alignment operation.
2. The SD11 turns Off after a prescribed time has passed since its becomes On, and waits for the next page.
3. Until the last page [2] reaches the clamp section, the sub-scan-direction alignment is performed every time a
page comes to the section.
4. After the PS16 detects trailing edge of n paper (from the first page to the “n”th page) of the second book [3],
the alignment operation is performed.
5. The alignment operation is also carried out for the two papers (“n+1”th and “n+2”th page) laid one on top of
another at the bypass gate.
[1] [2] [3]
SC paper detection sensor (PS16)
FD alignment solenoid (SD11)
a075t2c039ca
[1] Paper trailing edge detection by PS16 [3] Paper

[2] Last page of the first book
35
5.3.6 SC papers conveyance control

• The SC bundle conveyance motor (M17) [9] drives the SC roller and the clamp entrance roller.
• The SC roller release motor (M18) [5] drives the SC driven roller [7] via the cam [8] to move the roller away
PB-501
from (release) or contact with (press) the opposite roller.

• The press/release operation of the roller is detected by the SC roller release sensor (PS17) [6]. While the
roller is pressed against the opposite roller, the PS17 is kept On.
• The clamp entrance roller release motor (M20) [1] drives the cam [3] and the clamp entrance roller [4] to
move them away from (release) or contact with (press) the opposite roller.
• The press/release operation of the roller is detected by the clamp entrance roller release sensor (PS19) [2].
While the roller and the cam are in the pressed status, the PS19 is kept On.
[7]
[8]
[9]
[6]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

a075t2c040ca
[1] Clamp entrance roller release motor (M20) [6] SC roller release sensor (PS17)
[2] Clamp entrance roller release sensor (PS19) [7] SC driven roller
[3] Cam [8] Cam
[4] Clamp entrance driven roller [9] SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
[5] SC roller release motor (M18)
36
(1) Control
1. Upon receiving of a print job, the SC bundle conveyance motor (M17) starts to rotate [1], and the inside
paper are conveyed to the clamp section one by one by means of the SC roller and the clamp entrance
PB-501
roller.
2. When the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) detects the trailing edge of the last paper [2], the SC roller
release motor (M18) starts to rotate to start stacking paper in the SC section. When a prescribed time has
elapsed after the M18 starts to rotate, the M17 stops to stop conveying paper to the clamp section. The
clamp entrance roller release motor (M20) also starts to rotate to release the clamp entrance roller [3].
3. The M18 stops when the PS17 becomes Off, and the M20 stops when the PS19 becomes Off. The next
paper are kept stacked in the SC section until the clamp section is ready for them.
4. The M18 starts to rotate again [5] after a prescribed time has passed since the SC entrance sensor (PS2)
detects [4] the trailing edge of the last page of the paper to be stacked in the SC section.
5. When the SC roller is set in the position for paper conveyance after the PS17 becomes On, the M17 starts
to rotate to convey the stacked paper.
6. When the leading edges of the paper go through the clamp entrance, the M20 starts to rotate to convey the
paper to the clamp section.
7. Then the next two paper set in the bypass gate are conveyed to the clamp section at a time. All the above
operations are repeated for the subsequent books.
[1] [2] [4]

SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
SC roller release motor (M18)
SC roller release sensor (PS17)
Clamp entrance roller release motor (M20)

Clamp entrance roller release sensor (PS19)
[3] [5]
a075t2c041ca
[1] Print start signal is received [4] Trailing edge of “n”th page detection
[2] Trailing edge of the last page of each book [5] The SC roller is set in the position for paper
detection conveyance
[3] Clamp entrance roller moves away from the
paper conveyance position
37
5.3.7 Clamp entrance movement control

• The clamp entrance movement motor (M19) drives the clamp entrance assy [4] via the belt.
• The clamp entrance assy consists of the clamp entrance roller [2], FD alignment plate [3], SC pressure arm
PB-501
[1], and the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) [5].

• The FD alignment plate is moved by the clamp entrance assy movement in accordance with the paper size.
[1]
[2]
[5] [3]
[4]
a075t2c042ca
[1] SC pressure arm [4] Clamp entrance assy

[2] Clamp entrance roller [5] SC paper detection sensor (PS16)
[3] FD alignment plate
38
(1) Control
1. When the clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) becomes On [1] and the clamp section is set at the compil-
ing position, the clamp entrance movement motor (M19) reverses its rotation direction to lower the clamp
PB-501
assy. The motor stops [2] when the clamp assy is set at the position corresponding to the paper size, and
the clamp assy becomes ready for accepting the next paper.
2. When the clamp motor (M22) initiates clamping operation [3], the M19 starts to turn in the forward direction
to lift the clamp entrance assy until the assy reaches the position out of way of the clamping operation. The
clamp entrance movement HP sensor (PS18) detects that the assy reaches the position (the sensor
becomes On), and the M19 is stopped [5].
3. The above operations are repeated for each book.
[1] [2] [4]

Forward
Clamp entrance movement motor
(M19) Reverse
Clamp entrance movement HP sensor (PS18)
Clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25)
Clamp motor (M22)
[3] a075t2c043ca
[1] Clamp section is set at the compiling position [3] Clamping starts
[2] Movement of clamp entrance assy in [4] Clamp entrance assy is in its home position
accordance with paper size
39
5.3.8 SC stopper control

• The SC stopper is activated by the SC stopper solenoid (SD12) and closes the paper feed path toward the
clamp section in order to stack paper in the SC section.
PB-501
(1) Control
1. Upon receiving of a print job [1], the SC stopper solenoid (SD12) turns On to move the SC stopper away
from the paper path (open the path).
2. When the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) detects the trailing edge of the last page of each book, the
SD12 turns Off to set the SC stopper to close the path [2].
3. When the SC roller release sensor (PS17) becomes On and the SC roller holds down a bundle of paper, the
SD12 turns On to move the SC stopper out of the path [3].
[1] [2] [3]
SC stopper solenoid (SD12)
SC roller release sensor (PS17)
a075t2c044ca
[1] Print start signal is received [3] Move SC stopper out of the paper path
[2] Set SC stopper to close the paper path
40
5.3.9 SC pressure arm control

• The SC pressure arm [2] presses paper [3] conveyed from the SC section to neatly stack paper in the clamp
section.
PB-501
• The timing of the movement is detected by the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) [1].
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075t2c045ca
[1] SC paper detection sensor (PS16) [3] Paper

[2] SC pressure arm
(1) Control
1. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) detects the paper trailing
edge [1], the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) turns On to make the SC pressure arm press paper [2].
2. The SD13 becomes Off to move the SC pressure arm back to its original position [3] after a prescribed time
has passed since the PS2 detected the trailing edge of the paper.
3. The above operations are also performed when a bundle of paper [4] or two paper [5] are conveyed to the
clamp section.
[1] [4] [5]

SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)
[2] [3]
a075t2c046ca
[1] Trailing edge paper detection [4] Conveyance of a bundle of paper

[2] Pressure arm presses paper [5] Conveyance of two paper at a time
[3] SC pressure arm goes back to its original
position
41
6. CLAMP SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006
6. CLAMP SECTION
6.1 Configuration
PB-501
Clamp rotation assy

Reference plate
Clamp alignment
Clamp paper sensor (PS28) plate/Rr
Clamp fixing plate
Book thickness sensor

(PS29)
Clamp pressure plate
Clamp alignment plate/Fr Clamp paper LED (LED21)
a075t2c047ca
42
Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006 6. CLAMP SECTION
6.2 Drive
A. Clamp drive
PB-501
[7] [8]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4] [3] [2]
a075t2c048ca
[1] Clamp pressure sensor (PS23) [5] Front side

[2] Clamp pressure plate [6] Clamp motor (M22)
[3] Clamp fixing plate [7] Book thickness sensor (PS29)
[4] Pressure drive plate [8] Clamp HP sensor (PS22)
43
B. Clamp rotation drive

PB-501
[4] [5] [1]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c049ca
[1] Clamp rotation assy [4] Clamp rotation motor (M23)

[2] Reference plate [5] Clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25)
[3] Clamp rotation HP sensor (PS24)
44
C. Clamp alignment drive
PB-501
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
a075t2c050ca
[1] Clamp alignment HP sensor (PS21) [3] Clamp alignment plate/Fr

[2] Clamp alignment plate/Rr [4] Clamp alignment motor (M21)
45
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Clamp alignment control
• The clamp alignment motor (M21) drives the clamp alignment plate/Fr and /Rr via the belt in order to line up
PB-501
edges of paper stacked in the clamp section in the main scan direction.
• The main-scan-direction alignment operation is performed when the following paper are set in the clamp
section; all inside paper of the first book, “n” paper of the subsequent books stacked in the SC section, the
next two paper (“n+1”th and “n+2”th paper) of the subsequent books, and “n+3”th and the subsequent
page.
(1) Control
1. Upon receiving a print job, the clamp alignment motor (M21) starts to turn in the reverse direction to move
the clamp alignment plate/Fr and /Rr to the positions 9mm outer than the paper edges [1].
2. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) detects [2] the trailing edge
of the first page of the first book, the M21 starts reverse rotation again to perform the main-scan-direction
alignment [3] with the clamp alignment plate/Fr and /Rr.
3. Then, while the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) turns On and paper edges in the sub scan direction are lined
up [4], the M21 turns in the forward direction to move the clamp alignment plate/Fr and /Rr away from the
paper [5].
4. The SD11 is kept On until the sub-scan-direction alignment for the last page of the first book [6] is finished.
When the SD11 turns Off and the pressure toward the papers is released, the M21 starts to turn in the
reverse direction to press the bundle of paper from its front and back sides [8].
5. When the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) turns On and clamping the paper is finished, the M21 starts to turn
in the forward direction to release the paper [9].
6. After a prescribed time has passed since the PS16 detects the trailing edge of the “n” paper [10] stacked in
the SC section, the alignment operations are performed.
7. The alignment operation is also carried out for the two paper (“n+1”th and “n+2”th page) laid one on top of
another [11] at the bypass gate.
[1] [2] [4] [6] [7] [9] [10] [11]

Forward
(open)
Clamp alignment motor (M21)
Reverse
(close)
Clamp alignment HP sensor (PS21)
Clamp pressure sensor (PS23)
[3][5] [8]
a075t2c051ca
[1] Movement of clamp plates in accordance [7] Alignment in sub scan direction is in
with paper size progress
[2] Trailing edge of the first page [8] Pressing a bundle of paper from its front and
[3] Line up edges in main scan direction back
[4] Alignment in sub scan direction is in [9] A bundle of paper is released from the pres-
progress sure
[5] Plates move back to their standby position [10] A bundle of “n” paper
[6] Last page of the first book
46
6.3.2 Clamp control

• A bundle of paper stacked in the clamp section is clamped by the clamp fixing plate and the clamp pres-
sure plate.
PB-501
A. Mechanism
1. The gap between the clamp fixing plate [7] and the clamp pressure plate [1] is 45 mm when the clamp HP
sensor (PS22) [6] is On [2].
2. Before applying pressure by the clamp motor (M22), the pressure drive plate [5] is move to the left side.
3. The clamp pressure plate moves together with the pressure drive plate [5].
4. When the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) [4] becomes On after applying pressure to the papers, the clamp-
ing operation is finished [3].
[6] [7]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c052ca
[1] Clamp pressure plate [5] Pressure drive plate

[2] Home position [6] Clamp HP sensor (PS22)
[3] Finish of clamping [7] Clamp fixing plate
[4] Clamp pressure sensor (PS23)
47
B. Control
1. When alignment of the last page is finished [1] by the clamp alignment motor (M21), the clamp motor (M22)
starts to turn in the reverse direction to close the clamp pressure plate.
PB-501
2. Upon completion of clamping, the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) turns On and the M22 stops [2].
3. After the spine edges of the compressed inside paper is evened up, the cover paper table up down motor /
Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47) lift the cover paper table, and the M22 starts to turn in the forward direction. Then,
the clamp pressure plate opening operation is started [3].
4. The M22 stops when the clamp HP sensor (PS22) becomes Off.
[1] [3] [4]

Forward (open)
Reverse (close)
Forward (open)
Clamp motor (M22)
Reverse (close)
Clamp HP sensor (PS22)
Cover paper table up Forward (up)

down motor
/Fr (M46), /Rr (M47) Reverse (down)
[2]
a075t2c053ca
[1] Clamp pressure plate is closed [3] Clamp pressure plate is opened
[2] Completion of clamping [4] Clamp pressure plate returns to its home
position
48
6.3.3 Clamp rotation control

• A bundle of inside papers of a book is clamped and rotated to be glued on its spine.
PB-501
A. Clamp assy angle change/fixing mechanism
• The clamp rotation assy is rotated by the drive force of the clamp rotation motor (M23).
There are three preset tilt angles of the clamp rotation assy as shown below.
Home position: 45 degrees
Clamping: 50 degrees
Glueing: 90 degrees
49
(1) Angle change mechanism

• The tilt angle of the clamp assy is changed for clamping and glueing as described below.
• When the clamp rotation assy is in its home position and the clamp pressure plate [7] is also in its home
PB-501
position [3], the tab [6] of the pressure plate presses [2] the release cover [4], and the pin [1] of the switch
arm [12] is inserted in the clamp angle stopper notch [11] to stop the rotation of the clamp rotation assy at
the angle for clamping.
• When the clamp rotation assy is in its home position, and the clamp pressure plate is not [5], the switch arm
drops by its own weight as the tab of the clamp pressure plate is not pressing the release cover. Because of
this, the switch arm pin is not inserted in the clamp angle stopper notch, and the clamp rotation assy keeps
rotating until the glue angle stopper notch [10] is inserted over the shaft [8] [9].
• The tilt angle of the clamp assy cannot be changed directly between the clamping angle and the glueing
angle. To change the angle, the assy first needs to go back to the home position to release the stoppers.
[10] [11] [12] [1]

[9]
[8]
[2]
[5] [3]
[7] [6] [4] a075t2c124ca
[1] Pin [7] Clamp pressure plate

[2] Release [8] Shaft
[3] Clamp pressure plate is at its home position [9] Engaging of notch and shaft to stop at glue-
[4] Release bar ing angle
[5] Clamp pressure plate is out of its home [10] Glueing angle stopper notch
position [11] Clamping angle stopper notch
[6] Tab of the clamp pressure plate [12] Switch arm
50
(2) Fixing of the clamp rotation assy

• While clamping or glueing is performed, the clamp rotation assy is locked by the corresponding stopper.
Moreover, the clamp rotation motor (M23) [5] rotates the gear [1] 10 degrees [2] to pull the spring [4] apply-
PB-501
ing the spring force to the assy in order to reinforce the fixing state of the assy. The clamp rotation assy is
securely fixed by the operations.
• The clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) detects that the prescribed pressure is applied to the clamp
rotation assy and becomes On.
[3] [4] [5]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c125ca
[1] Gear [4] Spring

[2] Gear rotates 10 degrees to apply spring [5] Clamp rotation motor (M23)
force to the assy
[3] Clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25)
51
B. Reference plate opening/closing mechanism

(1) Opening/closing of the reference plate
• The reference plate [5] opens/closes in synchronization with the rotation of the clamp rotation assy [1].
PB-501
1. When the clamp rotation assy stops at the angle for glueing, the release arm [8] presses the reference plate
mounting bracket [6] down by means of , and the reference plate is separated from a bundle of inside
papers. The separation of the reference plate prevents the paper edges from being damaged by the plate
when the clamp rotation assy is upstanding.
2. Further rotation [3] of the reference plate mounting bracket [6] makes the pin [7] go down [2], and the refer-
ence plate is released [4] from the spring [9].
3. The reference plate goes back to its home position by means of the reference mounting bracket [6] which
pushes up the pin [7].
4. While clamping operation is in progress, the reference plate is fixed at the upper position by means of the
spring [10].
5. When the clamp pressure plate returns to its home position, the release arm [8] is pushed up by the tab [11]
of the clamp pressure plate and moved back to its standby position.
[7] [8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[8] [12] [11] [10] [8] [7] [9] a075t2c126ca
[1] Clamp rotation assy [7] Pin

[2] Pin of the reference plate goes down [8] Release arm
[3] Rotation of the reference plate mounting bracket [9] Spring (for release)
[4] Release of the reference plate [10] Spring (for applying pressure)
[5] Reference plate [11] Tab of the clamp pressure plate
[6] Reference plate mounting bracket [12] Pin
52
(2) Paper guard tabs mechanism for clamping

• The reference plate [6] has paper guard tabs [2] to prevent inside papers [4] from going off the reference
plate while they are clamped [1].
PB-501
• While the reference plate contacts with the stopper, the paper guard tabs are protruding.
• When the reference plate is opened [3], the paper guard tabs are retracted [5] so as not to damage the
paper edges.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6] [5]
a075t2c127ca
[1] Clamped [4] Inside papers

[2] Paper guard tabs [5] Paper guard tabs retracted
[3] When the reference plate is opened [6] Reference plate
53
C. Control
1. Upon receiving of a print job [1], the clamp rotation motor (M23) starts to turn in the reverse direction.
2. The M23 stops when the clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) becomes On, and the clamp rotation assy
PB-501
is set at the compiling position [2].

3. When clamping of the inside papers by the clamp motor (M22) is finished [3], the M23 starts to turn in the
forward direction to rotate the clamp rotation assy 15 degrees counterclockwise.
4. The M23 stops [4] when the clamp rotation HP sensor (PS24) becomes On. The tilt angle of the gear is 15
degrees when the assy returns to the home position, however, the clamp rotation assy rotates 5 degrees as
the gear has rotated 10 degrees more separately for fixing the assy. As the result, the clamp rotation assy tilt
angle changes from 50 degrees for clamping to 45 degrees (home position). At this time, since the clamp
pressure plate is out of the home position, the pin is free from the clamp angle stopper notch, which allows
the clamp rotation assy to rotate to the glueing angle.
5. After a prescribed time has elapsed, the M23 starts to turn in the reverse direction to rotate the clamp rota-
tion assy clockwise [5].
6. When the PS25 turns On, the assy is fixed by the spring, and the M23 stops [6]. At this time, the gear has
rotated 55 degrees, however, it has rotated 10 degrees more than the clamp rotation assy in order to secure
the assy, the clamp rotation assy rotates 45 degrees clockwise from its home position and becomes upright
state (90 degress).
7. When the clamp paper sensor (PS28) detects [7] that the bundle of paper is released from the clamp, the
M23 starts to turn in the forward direction to return the clamp rotation assy to the home position.
8. The M23 stops [8] when the PS24 becomes On, and the clamp rotation assy stops at its home position (tilt
angle of 45 degrees).At this time, since the clamp pressure plate is in the home position, the pin is engaged
with the clamp angle stopper notch, which allows the clamp rotation assy to rotate to the clamping angle.
9. Then, the M23 starts to turn in the reverse direction [9] to move the clamp rotation assy to the clamping
position [10] and stops when the PS25 becomes On.
[1] [2] [3] [4][5] [7] [8] [9] [10]

Clamp paper sensor (PS28)
Forward (open)
Clamp motor (M22)
Reverse (close)
Forward (release)
Clamp rotation motor (M23)
Reverse (apply
pressure)
Clamp rotation HP sensor (PS24)
[6] a075t2c128ca
54
6.3.4 Book thickness detection control

• The book thickness is detected by the book thickness sensor (PS29).
• The detected thickness is used to determine the trimming amount of the cover paper.
PB-501
A. Mechanism
• The clamp pressure plate [1] is moved by winding up the wire [6] .
• When the wire [6] is wound up, the encoder plate [4] rotates.
• The book thickness sensor (PS29) [5] detects and counts how much the encoder scale is rotated.
• The sensor continue the counting until the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) [2] becomes On.
[5]
[4] [6]
[3]
[2] [1]
a075t2c054ca
[1] Clamp pressure plate [4] Encoder scale

[2] Clamp pressure sensor (PS23) [5] Book thickness sensor (PS29)
[3] Clamp HP sensor (PS22) [6] Wire
55
B. Control
1. When the clamp HP sensor (PS22) switches to On from Off, pulse count by the book thickness sensor
(PS29) is started [1].
PB-501
2. The pulse count is stopped [2] when the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) turns On.
3. During the initial operation at power-ON, the no paper status data is detected and memorized as an initial
data. The book thickness is determined according to the difference.
Forward (open)
Clamp motor (M22)
Reverse (close)
Book thickness sensor (PS29)
[1] [2]
a075t2c055ca
[1] Count start [2] Count end
56
Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006 7. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION
7. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION

7.1 Configuration
PB-501
Stirring stick
Pellet remain sensor

(PS36) Stirring comb
Front
Pellet count sensor

(PS37)
Conveyance belt
Shutter
Pellet count
LED (LED32)
Pellet supply arm

a075t2c056ca
57
7. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006
7.2 Drive
A. Pellet supply drive
PB-501
[5] [1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
a075t2c057ca
[1] Plate cam [4] Stirring comb

[2] Pellet supply motor (M33) [5] Shaking plate
[3] Pellet conveyance belt
58
B. Pellet supply arm drive
PB-501
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c058ca
[1] Pellet supply arm lower limit sensor (PS39) [4] Pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38)
[2] Shutter [5] Drive arm
[3] Pellet supply arm [6] Pellet supply arm motor (M34)
59
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Pellet supply operation overview
PB-501
• The pellet supply arm [4] is moved above the glue tank [5] to supply pellets [1].
Then the pellets [1] are conveyed by the pellet conveyance belt [2] to drop them into the glue tank.
• The timing to supply pellets into the glue tank is determined by the glue tank temperature sensor/Up (TH2)
provided in the glue tank unit. As the molten glue inside the glue tank decreases, the TH2 surface not
soaked in the glue becomes wider. This finally causes the TH2 temperature lower than a prescribed level,
and it is judged that the glue is getting low and another pellets need to be supplied.
• Checking the TH2 temperature is carried out in the following timing.
a. When the glue tank HP sensor (PS33) becomes On after glueing operation.
• The amount of pellets supplied at a time varies depending on the thickness of the book.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a075t2c059ca
[1] Pellet [4] Pellet supply arm

[2] Pellet conveyance belt [5] Glue tank
[3] Shutter
60
7.3.2 Pellet supply arm control

• The pellet supply arm is activated by the pellet supply arm motor (M34). When the pellet supply arm moves
above the glue tank, the shutter is opened to drop pellets in the glue tank.
PB-501
• Except when supplying pellets, the arm is kept at its home position in order to prevent the arm from the
evaporated glue or radiant heat rose from the glue tank. In this case, the shutter shuts down to stop the
pellets from dropping down by the vibration. They are dropped next time the pellets are supplied.
A. Control
1. When the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects a temperature lower than 132 degrees, the pellet
supply arm motor (M34) starts to turn in the forward direction [1].
2. When the pellet supply arm reaches the pellet supply position (above the glue tank) and the pellet supply
arm upper limit sensor (PS38) becomes On, the M34 stops [2].
3. When a prescribed time has elapsed after a certain number of pellets is counted by the pellet count sensor
(PS37), the M34 starts reverse rotation to move the arm back to its home position [3].
4. When the pellet supply arm reaches the home position and the pellet supply arm lower limit sensor (PS39)
becomes On, the M34 stops.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Glue tank temperature 132 °C

sensor /Up (TH2)
Forward
Pellet supply
arm motor (M34) Reverse
Pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38)
Pellet supply arm lower limit sensor (PS39)
Pellet count sensor (PS37)
a075t2c060ca
[1] Pellet supply arm motor (M34) forward rota- [3] The arm starts to return to its home position
tion starts [4] The arm is set at its home position
[2] The arm stops at the pellet supply position
B. Pellet supply stopping operation

• When all the inside papers have stacked up, while the pellet supply arm motor (M34) is turning in the for-
ward direction, the M34 reverses the rotation direction to move the pellet supply arm back to the home
position.
61
7.3.3 Pellet supply control
A. Mechanism
PB-501
• The pellet conveyance belt, the shaking plate, and the stirring comb are driven by the pellet supply motor
(M33).
(1) Pellet conveyance belt

• The pellets [5] are conveyed by the pellet conveyance belt moved by the motor.
• The conveyance roller [3] presses the pellet conveyance belt [4] by means of the spring force.
• The tension plate [2] is pulled by the spring and applies tension [1] to the pellet conveyance belt in order to
keep the belt in a constant tension while the belt is shaking to convey pellets.
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c061ca
[1] Belt tension [4] Pellet conveyance belt

[2] Tension plate [5] Pellet
62
(2) Shaking the pellet conveyance belt

• The pellet supply motor (M33) rotates the plate cam [2] and the rotation force is transmitted to the shaking
plate [1] via the connecting plate [3].Then the introduction roller [5] is driven to shake the pellet conveyance
PB-501
belt [4] in synchronization with the belt rotation movement.
[1] [1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a075t2c062ca
[1] Shaking plate [4] Conveyance belt

[2] Plate cam [5] Introduction roller
[3] Connecting plate
63
(3) Stirring comb

• The pellets are stirred by the stirring comb which is shaking.
• The pellet supply motor (M33) moves the plate cam [4] in synchronization with the pellet conveyance belt
PB-501
movement, and the cam moves the stirring comb mounting plate [2] up and down via the shaking plate [3]
in order to shake the stirring comb [1].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c063ca
[1] Stirring comb [3] Shaking plate

[2] Mounting plate [4] Plate cam
64
B. Control
(1) Normal operation
1. When the pellet supply arm moves to the pellet supply position and the pellet supply arm upper limit sensor
PB-501
(PS38) becomes On, the pellet supply motor (M33) starts to rotate to start supplying pellets [1] to the glue
tank.
2. The M33 stops to stop the pellet supply operation when a certain number of pellets is counted by the pellet
count sensor (PS37).
[1] [2]
Pellet supply motor (M33)
Pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38)
Pellet count sensor (PS37)
a075t2c064ca
[1] Supplying pellets is started [2] Supplying pellets is finished
(2) When the PS37 does not count the prescribed number of pellets
• When the number of pellets counted by the pellet count sensor (PS37) do not reach the specified amount
within the specified time, the pellet supply motor (M33) stops. At the next pellet supply, the M33 rotates in
reverse direction for three seconds and then starts forward rotation. This prevents the pellets from getting
stuck in the conveyance belt section.
(3) Pellet supply stopping operation

• When all the inside papers have stacked up, while the pellet supply motor (M33) is turning, the M33 stops.
65
7.3.4 Pellet supply amount control

(1) Pellet passage detection
• The pellets passed through the pellet supply path are detected by the pellet count LED (LED32) and the
PB-501
pellet count sensor (PS37). (the sensor turns On/Off for every two or three pellets.)
(2) Control
• The amount of pellets to be supplied is calculated as a required number of counts to be counted by the pel-
let count sensor (PS37) based on the glue consumption expected according to the book thickness
detected at the last time.
• When the calculated count is reached, pellet supply is stopped.
7.3.5 Pellet remaining amount detection

• While the pellet supply arm is in the home position turning the pellet supply arm lower limit sensor (PS39)
On, the detection of remaining amount of pellets inside the pellet supply hopper is carried out.
• When the remaining amount of pellets becomes about 300g, the pellet supply hopper is detected as empty.
• When one second has elapsed after the pellet remain sensor (PS36) switches to Off from On, a message to
notify the empty status appears on the main body touch panel.
7.3.6 Pellet supply door opening/closing detection

• The pellet supply door is equipped with the pellet supply door switch (MS1) [1] and the pellet supply door
sensor (PS40) [2].
• When the MS1 is turned Off, a 24VDC supplied to the pellet supply motor (M33) is shut off to stop the motor.
• When the PS40 detects the above status, a message appears on the main body touch panel.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075t2c130ca
[1] Pellet supply door switch (MS1) [2] Stirring stick

[2] Pellet supply door sensor (PS40)
7.3.7 Stirring stick

• The stirring stick is provided to manually stir the pellets when the pellets are stuck to the lower part of the
pellet supply hopper.
66
Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006 8. GLUE TANK SECTION
8. GLUE TANK SECTION

8.1 Configuration
PB-501
Glue apply position LED Scrape plate Scrape bar
(LED31)
Glue apply
position detection
sensor (PS32)
Glue apply roller
Cover paper
glue roller
Glue tank Glue tank temperature

Glue apply roller
sensor /Up (TH2)
heater (H2)
Glue tank temperature

sensor /Md (TH3) Glue tank temperature
sensor /Lw (TH4)
Glue tank heater (H1)
Timing belt
a075t2c065ca
67
8. GLUE TANK SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006
8.2 Drive
A. Glue tank movement drive
PB-501
[5] [6]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c066ca
[1] Front side [4] Glue tank HP sensor (PS33)

[2] Glue tank movement limit sensor (PS31) [5] Glue tank movement motor (M31)
[3] Glue tank unit [6] Timing belt
B. Glue apply roller drive
[3] [4]
[1]
[2] a075t2c067ca
[1] Front side [3] Glue apply roller

[2] Glue apply roller motor (M32) [4] Cover paper glue roller
68
C. Glue apply roller drive
PB-501
[8]
[6] [7]
[5] [2]
[4] [3] [1] a075t2c068ca
[1] Arm [5] Left side view

[2] Front side view [6] Glue apply roller
[3] Glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31) [7] Cover paper glue roller
[4] Glue tank up solenoid /2 (SD33) [8] Glue tank
D. Cover paper glue lifting drive
[5] [6]
[4] [1]
[3] [2] a075t2c069ca
[1] Front side view [4] Left side view

[2] Glue tank base plate [5] Glue apply roller
[3] Cover paper glue up solenoid (SD32) [6] Cover paper glue roller
69
8.3 Operation
8.3.1 Glue tank unit movement control
PB-501
A. Mechanism
• The glue tank unit is moved by the drive force of the glue tank movement motor (M31) transmitted via the
timing belt. The gap [5] between the glue tank HP sensor (PS33) and the center [7] of the inside papers [6]
is 322.5 mm.
• The glue apply position detection sensor (PS32) [3] detects the edge of the inside papers.
[5] [6] [7] [1]
[10]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c070ca
[1] Front side [5] 322.5 mm

[2] Glue tank movement limit sensor (PS31) [6] Inside papers
[3] Glue apply position detection sensor (PS32) [7] Center of the inside papers
[4] Glue tank HP sensor (PS33)
70
B. Control
1. When the upright movement of the clamp section is finished turning the clamp rotation pressure sensor
(PS25) On, the glue tank movement motor (M31) starts to turn in the forward direction at high speed to
PB-501
move the glue tank frontward [1]. This operation applies glue to the spine of the inside papers.
2. When the glue tank movement limit sensor (PS31) becomes On after a prescribed time has elapsed since
the PS25 turns On, the M31 pauses [3].
3. Then, the M31 starts reverse rotation at low speed [4] , and the glue apply position detection sensor (PS32)
starts to detect edges of the inside papers.
4. After the PS32 becomes On upon detection of the inside papers edge, the M31 shifts to high speed [5] to
move the glue tank backward applying glue to the spine again.
5. When the glue tank HP sensor (PS33) becomes On after a prescribed time has elapsed since the PS32
turns On, the M31 stops [7].
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
High speed
For-
ward Low speed
Glue tank
movement motor
(M31) Reve Low speed
rse
High speed
Glue tank HP sensor (PS33)
Glue tank movement limit sensor (PS31)
Glue apply position detection sensor (PS32)
a075t2c071ca
[1] Clamp rotation assy is upright [4] Shifts to high speed upon detection of edge
[2] Decelerates at the position 2 mm before the of inside papers
limit [5] Decelerates before the home position
[3] Stops at the limit position [6] Stops at the home position
71
8.3.2 Glue apply roller control

A. Mechanism
• The glue apply roller motor (M32) drives the glue apply roller and the cover paper glue roller via the gear.
PB-501
• As the glue apply roller rotates, a 1.5mm-thickness layer of molten glue is formed on the roller’s metal sur-
face due to the viscosity of the glue.
B. Control
• The glue apply roller motor (M32) starts to rotate when the glue tank temperature sensor/Md (TH3) detects
a prescribed temperature *1.
• When the glue applying mode is switched to standby mode, the M32 stops.
*1 Default: 145 degrees C (changeable in the service mode)
72
8.3.3 Glue tank lifting control

A. Mechanism
• The glue apply roller is lifted to the glue apply position when the glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31) [3] and /2
PB-501
(SD33) [4] become On.
• The arm [5] is activated by the SD31 and SD33 to lift the roller [2], and the glue tank [1] is lifted being
rotated pivoted to the cover paper roller shaft.
[5] [1]
[4] [3] [2] a075t2c072ca
[1] Glue tank [4] Glue tank up solenoid /2 (SD33)

[2] Roller [5] Arm
[3] Glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31)
73
• While the SD31 and the SD33 are On, the gap between the level tangent line [5] of the metal surface [1] of
the glue apply roller and the spine surface [7] of inside papers [6] is about 1 mm *1.
• The scrape plate [2] and the scrape bar [4] scrape off excess glue from the spine of inside papers.
PB-501
• While the SD31 and SD33 are On, the scrape plate is placed 0.5 mm *2 away from the metal surface of the
glue apply roller.
• While the SD31 and SD33 are On, the scrape bar contacts with the metal surface of the glue apply roller
(0.0mm *2 gap).
*1 The glue application quantity can be adjusted by the mechanical adjustment “Glue apply roller gap adjust-
ment”.
*2 The thickness of molten glue layer to be formed on the roller surface can be adjusted by the mechanical
adjustment “Glue tank positioning”.
[6] [7] [8] [1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c073ca
[1] Metal surface of the glue apply roller [5] Level tangent line
[2] Scrape plate [6] Inside papers
[3] Front side [7] Spine surface
[4] Scrape bar [8] Layer of molten glue
74
B. Control
1. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the clamp section is set at its upright position [1] turning the
clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) On, the glue tank assy starts movement toward the front side.
PB-501
While the glue tank assy is moving, the glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31) and /2 (SD33) become On to lift the
glue apply roller to apply glue to the spine of inside papers [2].
2. When the glue has applied along the inside paper spine by a length of 5 mm longer than the paper length
during a predetermined time period after the PS25 turns On, the SD31 and SD33 become Off to lower the
glue apply roller [3].
3. Then, the glue tank assy starts to move backward. The second glue application [4] during the backward
movement is activated when the SD31 and SD33 turn On again at the time the glue apply roller passed the
inside paper edge through by 4 mm, which is the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the
glue apply position detection sensor (PS32) detects the inside paper edge.
4. During a predetermined time period after the PS32 turns On, the SD31 and SD33 turn Off [5] at the position
the glue apply roller passed trailing edge of the inside paper through by 4 mm.
Note
• The sensors On/Off timing can be changed in the service mode.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31) , /2 (D33)
Glue apply position detection sensor (PS32)
a075t2c074ca
[1] Clamp rotation assy is upright [4] Glue application during backward move-
[2] Glue application during frontward movement ment
[3] Completion of glue application [5] Completion of glue application
75
8.3.4 Cover paper glue control

A. Mechanism
• The cover paper glue up solenoid (SD32) [5] lifts the cover paper roller side [9] of the glue tank base plate
PB-501
[2].
• The glue tank up solenoid/1 (SD31) [4] and /2 (SD33) [3], which lift the glue apply roller [8] side of the glue
tank, are also attached to the glue tank base plate, and as the result, the whole glue tank assy is lifted.
[8] [9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a075t2c075ca
[1] Glue tank [6] Pivot shaft

[2] Glue tank base plate [7] Left side view
[3] Glue tank up solenoid /2 (SD33) [8] Glue apply roller
[4] Glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31) [9] Cover paper roller
[5] Cover paper glue up solenoid (SD32)
B. Control
• The cover paper glue up solenoid (SD32) turns on and off at the same time as the glue tank up solenoid/1
(SD31), /2 (SD33). However, during backward movement of the glue tank, SD32 turns off with a specified
time delay after the SD31 and SD33 turns off.
76
8.3.5 Glue temperature control
A. Mechanism
PB-501
• The glue tank heater (H1) heats the glue tank bottom to melt the pellets.
• The glue apply roller heater (H2) heats the glue apply roller to keep the glue adhered to the roller surface at
a constant viscosity.
B. Temperature detection
The temperature of the glue apply roller [8] is detected by the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) [7], and
that of the glue tank [5] is detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) [6], /Md (TH3) [3], and /Lw
(TH4) [2].
(1) TH1
• Detects temperature of the center portion of the glue apply roller, and the glue apply roller heater (H2) [9] is
controlled according to the detected temperature.
• The target temperature is 165 degrees C .
(2) TH2
• This sensor is provided on the inner surface of the glue tank, at the position 29 mm above the bottom of the
tank, in order to detect glue level.
• When the glue runs low, the glue surface becomes lower, and finally the TH2 comes out of the glue. This
causes a sudden drop in temperature of the TH2.The temperature drop is detected as a low glue level, and
activates the pellet supply operation.
• The threshold temperature is 132 degrees C.*1
*1 Changeable in the service mode.
(3) TH3
• This sensor is also provided on the inner surface of the glue tank, at the position 15.4 mm above the tank
bottom, to detect the viscosity of the molten glue. According to the detected result, rotating or not rotating
the glue apply roller is determined.
• The threshold temperature is 145 degrees C.*1
*1 Changeable in the service mode.
77
(4) TH4
• The glue tank temperature sensor/Lw (TH4) is provided on the inner bottom surface of the glue tank and
detects temperature of the glue tank heater (H1) [3] to control the heater.
PB-501
• The target temperature is 185 degrees C.
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2] a075t2c076ca
[1] Glue apply roller heater (H2) [5] Glue tank

[2] Glue tank temperature sensor/Lw (TH4) [6] Glue tank temperature sensor/Up (TH2)
[3] Glue tank heater (H1) [7] Glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1)
[4] Glue tank temperature sensor/Md (TH3) [8] Glue apply roller
C. Control
(1) Glue apply roller heater (H2) control
• The H2 is turned On/Off according to a temperature detected by the glue apply roller temperature sensor
(TH1) in order to keep 165 degrees C.
• When the temperature drops/rises 1 degree from the target temperature, the H2 turns On/Off.
(2) Glue tank heater (H1) control

• The H1 is turned On/Off according to a temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor/Lw
(TH4) in order to keep 185 degrees C.
• When the temperature drops/rises 1 degree from the target temperature, the H1 turns On/Off.
78
Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006 9. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION
9. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION

9.1 Configuration
PB-501
Cover paper empty sensor (PS71)
Cover paper tray fan Pick-up roller
Conveyance roller
Cover paper feed roller
Separation roller
Cover paper tray lift plate

a075t2c012ca
79
9. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006
9.2 Drive
9.2.1 Cover paper tray lift drive
PB-501
[1] [2]
[7] [8] [3]
[4]
[6] [5] [4]

a075t2c013ca
[1] Cover paper tray lift wire/Fr1 and /Rr1 [5] Cover paper tray lift motor (M73)
[2] Cover paper tray lift wire/Fr2 and /Rr2 [6] One-way gear
[3] Cover paper tray lift plate [7] Lift release coupling gear
[4] Pulley [8] Torque limiting gear (oil damper)
80
[4]
PB-501
[1]
[5]
[6] [7] [2]
[8]
[10] [3]
[9]
[13] [12] [11]

a075t2c014ca
[1] PB backside [8] Cover paper separation clutch (MC72)

[2] Backside of cover paper tray [9] Pick-up roller
[3] Center of cover paper tray [10] Cover paper feed roller
[4] Cover paper feed motor (M74) [11] Conveyance roller
[5] Coupling [12] Torque limiter
[6] Cover paper pick up clutch (MC71) [13] Separation roller
[7] Coupling
81
9.2.3 Pick-up drive

PB-501
[2]
[1]
a075t2c015ca
[1] Cover paper pick up solenoid (SD71) [2] Pick-up roller
82
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Plate up/down control
PB-501
A. Up operation
• The cover paper tray lift plate is lifted with the cover paper tray lift wire wound up around the pulley by the
drive force of the cover paper tray lift motor (M73) [1].
B. Down operation
• When the cover paper tray is pulled out, the coupling gear [4] that transmits the motor drive force from the
motor shaft [2] to the pulley [3] is separated by the release lever [5]. (the lever goes down by its own weight)
[4]
[3]
[2] [1] [5]

a075t2c016ca
[1] Cover paper tray lift motor (M73) [4] Coupling gear
[2] Motor shaft [5] Release lever
[3] Pulley
• The torque limiting gear [1] works only when lowering the cover paper tray lift plate in order to lower the
plate slowly by its own weight.
[1]
a075t2c017ca
[1] Torque limiting gear
83
C. Operation timing
(1) When cover paper is set
• When cover papers are loaded on the tray, the cover paper tray lift motor (M73) starts to rotate to lift the
PB-501
cover paper lift plate.

• The M73 stops when the cover paper tray upper limit sensor (PS74) [1] turns On.
(2) While feeding cover paper
• While cover papers being fed, the PS74 turns Off due to a decrease in stacking height of papers, and the
M73 starts to rotate again.
• The M73 keeps rotating to lift the cover paper lift plate until the PS74 turns On again.
[1]
a075t2c132ca
[1] Cover paper tray upper limit sensor (PS74)
84

• Picking up the cover paper is activated when the cover paper pick up solenoid (SD71) turns off.
PB-501
A. Control
1. With cover paper feed signal, cover paper feed motor (M74), cover paper pick up clutch (MC71) and cover
paper separation clutch (MC72) turn on, and rotate the pick-up roller which is pressing down the cover
paper with its own weight, and starts the paper feeding of the cover paper [1].
2. When the cover paper conveyance sensor/1 (PS75) is turned on by the leading edge of the cover paper,
M74, MC71, MC72 are temporary turned off, and cover paper feeding is stopped [2].
3. After the specified time, M74, MC71, MC72 are turned back on, and the leading edge of the cover paper is
sent to the cover paper conveyance sensor/2 (PS76), then M74, MC71 are turned off again [3].
4. After the specified time, M74, MC71, MC72 are turned back on, and the leading edge of the cover paper is
sent to the cover paper conveyance sensor/3 (PS77), then M74, MC71, MC72 are turned off again [4].
5. After the specified time, M74, MC71, MC72 and the cover paper pick up solenoid (SD71) are turned on, the
pick up roller is put back to its original position, and the cover paper is conveyed by only the paper feed roller
and the conveyance roller [5].
6. When the leading edge of the cover paper turns the cover paper conveyance sensor/4 (PS78) on, M74,
MC71, MC72, SD71 turn off [6].
7. After the specified time, M74 rotates at high speed, cover paper is conveyed by only the conveyance roller
while MC72 turns on and the next cover paper is sent to the reverse direction to be separated [7].
8. After the back edge of the cover paper has passed the PS76, MC72 and SD71 turn off, and the paper feed-
ing of the first sheet of cover paper completes [8].
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

High
Cover paper feed speed
motor (M74) Medium
speed
Cover paper pick up clutch (MC71)
Cover paper separation clutch (MC72)
Cover paper pick up solenoid (SD71)
Cover paper conveyance sensor/1 (PS75)
a075t2c018ca
[1] Cover paper supply signal on [6] Conveyed to PS78

[2] Conveyed to PS75 [7] Conveyance of conveyance roller only
[3] Conveyed to PS76 [8] Pick up paper feeding of first sheet of cover
[4] Conveyed to PS77 paper complete
[5] Pick up roller goes back to its original posi-
tion
85

• The drive force of the cover paper feed motor (M74) is transmitted to the separation roller [4] via the torque
limiter [3] when the cover paper separation clutch (MC72) [2] is On.
PB-501
• The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the cover paper feeding direction. However, the
roller rotates in the same direction with the paper feed direction as long as one sheet of cover paper or no
paper is fed because the friction force between the cover paper feed roller [1] and separation roller [4], or
paper and the separation roller is larger than the torque limited by the torque limiter [3].
• When multi-feed occurs, the separation roller reverses the rotation direction to feed the lower sheet that
contacts with the roller back to the tray because the friction force drops due to the multi-feed and becomes
lower than the torque limited by the torque limiter.
[7] [1]
[6] [2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c019ca
[1] Cover paper feed roller [5] Second sheet of cover paper
[2] Cover paper separation clutch (MC72) [6] First sheet of cover paper
[3] Torque limiter [7] Pick-up roller
[4] Separation roller
9.3.4 Paper feed mechanism

• The cover paper feed motor (M74) drives the conveyance roller. Cover papers fed from the feeding section
are conveyed to the conveyance section by the conveyance roller.
86

• The cover paper tray is equipped with the cover paper tray fan/1 (M71) and /2 (M72), which blow air [4] to
the cover papers [3] from the front and back cover paper guides.
PB-501
• Using the tray fans is effective especially when feeding heavy paper or coated paper. However, using them
for plain paper may cause a feeding trouble.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3] a075t2c020ca
[1] Cover paper tray fan/1 (M71) [3] Cover paper

[2] Cover paper tray fan/2 (M72) [4] Air-blowing
A. Operation timing
• When receiving a print job, cover paper tray fan/1 (M71), /2 (M72) turn on, and after the specified time,
cover paper feed motor (M74) turns on.
9.3.6 Cover paper tray empty detection

• The cover paper empty sensor (PS71) detects an empty status of the cover paper tray.
87
9.3.7 Paper feed assist plate

(1) Purposes
The paper feed assist plates can be attached to the pick-up roller to adjust the pressure to cover paper applied
PB-501
from the roller.By changing the number of plates to be attached to the roller depending on the cover paper type,
paper feed accuracy can be improved.
Using the plates is effective especially when feeding coated cover paper or similar type that is likely to stick
tightly causing no-feed trouble.
The paper feed assist plate weighs about 10 g and up to four plates can be attached to one pick-up roller in nor-
mal condition (refer to Field Service “19. PAPER SETTING ”). When the surface of the cover paper is powdery,
up to eight plates can be attached (refer to Field Service “12.5 Overlay printing adjustment”). Increase or
decrease the number of plates according to paper type or condition to improve cover paper feed accuracy.
(2) Configuration
The paper feed assist plate package includes the following items.
• [1] Paper feed assist plate: 4 pcs.
• [2] Screw (M3 to M8): 2 pcs.
The above package is provided with the main body. The package is separately available as service part.
[1]
[2]
1050to2312c
88
Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006 10. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION
10. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION

10.1 Configuration
PB-501
Cover paper lift plate/Lt Book exit belt/Fr
arm/Lt Cover paper Book exit belt/Rr Cover paper
conveyance roller/Lt conveyance roller/Rt
Cover paper sensor/Lt Cover paper align-
ment plate/Rr Cover paper lift
(PS46) plate/Rt
Cover paper
conveyance
arm/Rt
Cover
Cover paper paper sen-
folding plate/Lt sor/Rt
(PS45)
Cover paper
folding plate/Rt
Front
side
Cutter
Cover paper Cover paper table entrance roller
alignment plate/Fr
Cover paper switchback sensor (PS44)
Cover paper table up down belt/ Cover paper table up down belt/Fr_Rr
Rr_Rt
Cover paper table

up down belt/Fr_Lt
Cover paper table
up down belt/
Rr_Lt Front
side
a075t2c077ca
89
10. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006
10.2 Drive
A. Cover paper table up down/Fr and /Rr drive
PB-501
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3] [2]
a075t2c078ca
[1] Cover paper table up down belt/Rr_Rt [4] Cover paper table up down belt/Fr_Lt
[2] Cover paper table up down belt/Fr_Rt [5] Cover paper table up down belt/Rr_Lt
[3] Cover paper table up down motor/Fr (M46) [6] Cover paper table up down motor/Rr (M47)
90
B. Cover paper alignment drive
[3]
PB-501
[4]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c079ca
[1] Cover paper alignment motor (M41) [3] Cover paper alignment plate/Rr
[2] Cover paper alignment HP sensor (PS41) [4] Cover paper alignment plate/Fr
C. Cover paper conveyance drive
[3] [4] [1]
[2] a075t2c080ca
[1] Cover paper table entrance roller [3] Cover paper conveyance roller/Lt
[2] Cover paper conveyance motor (M45) [4] Cover paper conveyance roller/Rt
91
D. Book exit drive
[1]
PB-501
[2] a075t2c081ca
[1] Book exit belt/Fr, /Rr [2] Book exit motor (M42)
92
E. Cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt drive
PB-501
[8]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4] [3] a075t2c082ca
[1] Cover paper folding plate/Rt [6] Cover paper folding plate HP sensor/Lt
[2] Cover paper folding plate HP sensor/Rt (PS49)
(PS48) [7] Cover paper folding plate position sensor
[3] Cover paper folding pressure sensor (PS52) (PS51)
[4] Cover paper folding motor/Rt (M48) [8] Cover paper folding plate/Lt
[5] Cover paper folding plate encoder sensor [9] Cover paper folding motor/Lt (M49)
(PS50)
93
F. Cover paper conveyance arm/Rr and /Lt drive

PB-501
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4] [3]
a075t2c083ca
[1] Cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [5] Cover paper conveyance arm HP sensor/Lt
[2] Cover paper conveyance arm HP sensor/Rt (PS43)
(PS42) [6] Cover paper conveyance arm/Lt
[3] Cover paper conveyance arm motor/Rt (M43) [7] Cover paper lift plate/Lt
[4] Cover paper conveyance arm motor/Lt (M44)
G. Cover paper lift drive
[1]
[2] a075t2c084ca
[1] Cover paper lift plate/Rt [2] Cover paper lift solenoid (SD41)
94
H. Cutter drive
PB-501
[2] [3]
[4]
[1]
a075t2c085ca
[1] Cutter [3] Cutter end position switch (SW42)

[2] Cutter HP switch (SW41) [4] Cutter motor (M50)
95
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Cover paper table section operation overview
PB-501
1. The cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [4] and /Lt [10] are activated upon receiving of a print job, and they are
pressed against the cover paper conveyance roller/Rt [5] and /Lt [8].
2. When a cover paper is fed [7], alignment operation is carried out by the cover paper alignment plate/Rr and
/Fr [6].
3. After the thickness of inside papers [11] is detected by clamping operation made by the clamp pressure
plate [12], the cover paper is fed backward (switchback) [2].
4. The backward feeding is made to feed the cover paper to the roller cutter assy so that the paper edge pro-
trudes away from the cover paper switchback sensor (PS44) [3] by the trimming amount.
5. The cover paper edge is trimmed by the roller cutter [1] and then the paper is conveyed leftward again.
6. Alignment operation to attach the cover paper to the inside papers is carried out.
7. The cover paper is moved to left and right by the reverse/forward rotation of the cover paper conveyance
roller/Rt and /Lt in order to be positioned properly with reference to the cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) [9] as
starting point.
[11] [12]
[1]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3]
a075t2c086ca
[1] Roller cutter [7] Cover paper conveyance

[2] Switchback conveyance [8] Cover paper conveyance roller/Lt
[3] Cover paper switchback sensor (PS44) [9] Cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46)
[4] Cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [10] Cover paper conveyance arm/Lt
[5] Cover paper conveyance roller/Rt [11] Bundle of inside papers
[6] Cover paper alignment plate/Rr, /Fr [12] Clamp pressure plate
96
8. When the alignment operation of the cover paper completes and CD alignment plate returns to home posi-
tion, the cover paper folding plate/Rt [3] and /Lt [5] are opened [4].
9. When the cover paper on the lifted unit attaches to the spine of inside papers [8], the book spine backing
PB-501
plate [1] presses against the spine to securely attach the cover paper.
10. The cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt are moved inward to press [6] the both edge surfaces of the spine
to create the perfect corners. During up and down operation of the cover paper table unit, the cover paper
conveyance arm/Rt [9] and /Lt [7] are moved away from the cover paper so as not to let the paper pulled by
the arms.
11. The pressures to the spine are applied for three seconds for the glue to fully harden.
[7] [8] [9]
[6]
[1]
[5] [4] [3] [2]
a075t2c087ca
[1] Book spine backing plate [6] Apply pressure

[2] Lift of cover paper table unit [7] Cover paper conveyance arm/Lt
[3] Cover paper folding plate/Rt [8] Bundle of inside papers
[4] Opening [9] Cover paper conveyance arm/Rt
[5] Cover paper folding plate/Lt
97
12. The cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt are opened, and the cover paper table unit is lowered [3].
13. While the cover paper table is going down, the inside papers of the book [7] are held by the clamp pressure
plate [8]. Since the both sides of the cover paper [9] bow, the cover paper lift plate/Lt [5] integrated with the
PB-501
cover paper conveyance arm/Lt [6] supports the left side of the cover paper. The right side of the paper is
supported by the cover lift plate/Rt [2]. The cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [1] is moved away from the
cover paper lift plate/Rt.
14. The book exit belt [4] is moved to the position to receive the book.
[7] [8] [9]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4] [3]
a075t2c088ca
[2] Cover paper lift plate/Rt [7] Book
[3] Going down [8] Clamp pressure plate
[4] Book exit belt [9] Cover paper
[5] Cover paper lift plate/Lt
98
15. When the book exit belt is set at the receiving position, the cover paper table unit is lifted again.
16. When lifting the unit is started, the cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [2] and /Lt [3] are folded [1] [4] to keep
them from contact with the clamp section.
PB-501
[4] [1]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c089ca
[1] The arm is folded [3] Cover paper conveyance arm/Lt

[2] Cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [4] The arm is folded
99
17. When the book (inside papers) [8] is released from the clamp pressure plate [9], the cover paper table unit is
lowered.
18. At the start of the unit lowering operation, the cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [2], /Lt [7], and the cover
PB-501
paper folding plate/Rt [3], /Lt [4] are returned to their home positions.When the cover paper lift plate/Lt [6]
returns to its home position, it flips the left side of the cover paper up toward the inside papers.
19. The book exit belt [5] is activated after a prescribed time has elapsed since the table unit lowering operation
is started so that the belt starts to move at the same time the book contacts with the belt and the book is
laid down on the belt.
[8] [9]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5] [4] [3]

a075t2c090ca
[1] Clamp pressure plate releases the inside [5] Book exit belt
papers [6] Cover paper lift plate/Lt
[3] Cover paper folding plate/Rt [8] Book
[4] Cover paper folding plate/Lt [9] Clamp pressure plate
100
20. The cover paper table unit goes down to its home position, and then goes up until the book exit belt surface
becomes horizontal to the book conveyance belt [3] surface.
21. The book exit belt [1] starts to move again to convey the book [3] on it to the book stock section.
PB-501
[3]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c091ca
[1] Book exit belt [3] Book

[2] Book conveyance belt
101
10.3.2 Cover paper conveyance control

A. Mechanism
• The cover paper table entrance roller [3], the cover paper conveyance roller/Rt [5] and /Lt [6] are driven by
PB-501
the cover paper conveyance motor (M45) drive force transmitted via the gear and the belt.
• A cover paper is conveyed being nipped between the driven rollers [9] and [10] provided on the tips of the
cover paper conveyance roller/Rt, /Lt and the cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [1], /Lt [8].
• On the cover paper conveyance path, the cover paper sensor/Rt (PS45) [4], /Lt (PS46) [7] and the cover
paper switchback sensor (PS44) [2] are provided.
• The PS44 is used to position the cover paper to be trimmed.
• PS45 is the starting point of when carrying in cover paper to the up/down cover paper section. Cover paper
is carried in after specified time from when PS45 detected the leading edge of the paper, cover paper stops
and alignment operation is carried out.
• The PS46 is used to position the cover paper to be attached to the spine of inside papers.
[9]
[10]
[8]
[1]
[7] [2]
[6] [5] [4] [3]
a075t2c092ca
[1] Cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [6] Cover paper conveyance roller/Lt
[2] Cover paper switchback sensor (PS44) [7] Cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46)
[3] Cover paper table entrance roller [8] Cover paper conveyance arm/Lt
[4] Cover paper sensor/Rt (PS45) [9] Driven roller/Rt
[5] Cover paper conveyance roller/Rt [10] Driven roller/Lt
102
B. Control
(1) When conveying cover paper from the PB cover paper tray
1. Upon receiving of a print job, the cover paper conveyance motor (M45) starts to turn in the forward direction
PB-501
[1].
2. The M45 stops [2] when a prescribed time has elapsed after the cover paper sensor/Rt (PS45) detects the
leading edge of the cover paper.
3. When clamping the inside papers is finished, the book thickness sensor (PS29) detects the last pulse and
the book thickness information is obtained. Then the M45 starts reverse rotation [3] to convey the cover
paper toward the roller cutter assy.
4. The cover paper is conveyed until it reaches the position to be trimmed off by the amount determined
according to the paper size setting and the book thickness information, and the M45 stops [4].
5. When the cutter end position switch (SW42) detects [5] the finish of the cutting operation, the M45 starts for-
ward rotation to convey the cover paper leftward to be aligned.
6. The M45 stops [6] when a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS44 detects the trailing edge of the cover
paper.
7. When the alignment operation by the cover paper alignment motor (M41) is finished [7], the cover paper is
conveyed rightward by the M45 reverse rotation for the next positioning operation.
8. The M45 keeps rotating to position the cover paper properly to be attached to the inside papers until the
cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46), the reference sensor for the positioning, turns Off [8].
9. After a prescribed time has elapsed, the M45 starts forward rotation to convey the cover paper leftward [9]
and stops [10] after the PS46 detects the leading edge of the cover paper.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [6] [7] [9] [10]

For-
Cover paper alignment
ward
motor (M41)
Rever
se
Cover paper conveyance For-
motor (M45) ward
Reve
rse
Cover paper sensor/Rt (PS45)
Cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46)
Cover paper switchback sensor (PS44)
Cutter end position switch (SW42)
[5] [8] a075t2c093ca
[1] Print start signal is received [5] Trimming is completed

[2] Cover paper conveyance to the cover paper [6] Cover paper stops for alignment
table is finished [7] Cover paper alignment is finished
[3] Starting conveyance toward the roller cutter [8] Cover paper positioning reference search
assy [9] Starting cover paper positioning
[4] Stop at the trimming position [10] Cover paper positioning is completed
103
10.3.3 Cover paper trimming control

A. Mechanism
• The cutter motor (M50) drives the roller cutter via the pulley and the wire.
PB-501
• The front side is the home position and the trimming is carried out when the cover paper is moved to the
back side from the front side.
B. Control
1. When the cover paper is conveyed to the trimming position by the cover paper conveyance motor (M45), the
motor stops [1] and the cutter motor (M50) starts forward rotation to start the trimming operation.
2. When the cutter blade cut the paper and reaches the limit position, the cutter end position switch (SW42)
turns On and the M50 stops. At the same time, the M45 starts forward rotation to convey the cover paper.
3. When the conveyance by the M45 is finished [3], the M50 starts to rotate again to make the cutter return to
its home position.
4. When the cutter is set in its home position [4], the cutter HP switch (SW41) becomes On and the M50 stops.
[1] [3]
For-
Cover paper conveyance ward
motor (M45) Rever
se
For-
Cutter motor (M50) ward
Rever
se
Cutter HP switch (SW41)
Cutter end position switch (SW42)
[2] [4] a075t2c094ca
[1] Start of cutting [3] Starting HP return operation

[2] Trimming is completed [4] Cutter is set in its HP
104
10.3.4 Cover paper alignment drive

A. Mechanism
• The cover paper alignment motor (M41) drives the cover paper alignment plate/Fr [2], /Rr [5], the book exit
PB-501
belt/Fr [3], and /Rr [4] for changing their positions.
• The cover paper alignment plate/Rr presses the cover paper against the cover paper alignment plate/Fr to
position the cover paper properly, and the alignment accuracy is judged by the cover paper alignment/Fr.
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3] [2]
a075t2c095ca
[1] Cover paper [4] Book exit belt/Rr

[2] Cover paper alignment plate/Fr [5] Cover paper alignment plate/Rr
[3] Book exit belt/Fr
105
B. Control
(1) Cover paper trimming mode
1. Upon receiving of a print job [1], the cover paper alignment motor (M41) starts forward rotation to set the
PB-501
alignment parts in the positions for the alignment operation, and stops [2].
2. After the conveyance arm/Rt and /Lt move away from the cover paper conveyance roller/Rt and /Lt by the
cover paper conveyance arm motor/Rt (M43) and /Lt (M44), and the arms stops, the M41 starts forward
rotation to position the cover paper to be trimmed [3].
3. When the cover paper is set at the trimming position with the cover paper alignment plate/Rr and /Fr holding
down the both sides of the paper, the M41 stops [4].
4. The conveyance arm/Rt and /Lt are pressed against the cover paper conveyance roller/Rt and /Lt [5] by the
M43 and M44 drive force. Then the M41 starts reverse rotation to move the cover paper alignment plate/Rr
and /Fr away from the cover paper, and stops.
5. When the cover paper trimming is finished, the cover paper alignment operation [6] to be attached to the
inside papers is performed in the same manner as for the trimming.
6. When positioning the cover paper by the cover paper conveyance motor (M45) is finished, the M41 starts
reverse rotation to perform preparation operation [7] for the next cover paper table lifting operation.
7. The M41 stops [8] when the cover paper alignment HP sensor (PS41) becomes On.
[1] [2]
Cover paper alignment HP
sensor (PS41)
Cover paper For-
alignment motor ward
Rever
(M41)
se
Cover paper For-
conveyance arm ward
motor/Rt (M43) Rever
se
Cover paper con- For-
veyance motor ward
(M45) Rever
se
[5] a075t2c093ca
[1] Print start signal is received [6] Positioning (alignment) cover paper to be
[2] Setting the plates and belts ready for the attached to inside papers
conveyance [7] Starting preparation for cover table lifting
[3] Positioning (alignment) cover paper to be operation
trimmed [8] Alignment-related parts return to its home
[4] Stops at the trimming position position
[5] Returning to the cover paper conveyance
position
(2) Cover paper Not trimming mode

When the sub-scanning direction length of inside papers is over 182 mm, the first positioning operation for trim-
ming is not performed. Only the positioning operation for attaching the cover to the inside papers is performed.
However, when the inside paper is smaller than B5 size, alignment is done twice, once when cover paper is car-
ried in, and the other after leading edge positioning is done.
106
10.3.5 Cover paper table up down control

A. Mechanism
• The cover paper table up down motor/Fr (M46) drives the cover paper table up down belt/Fr_Rt [9] and /
PB-501
Fr_Lt [5], and the cover paper table up down motor/Rr (M47) drives the cover paper table up down belt/
Rr_Rt [1] and /Rr_Lt [2].
• The cover paper table upper limit sensor/Fr (PS26) [3] detects that the front side of the cover paper table
that is driven by the M46 reaches the upper limit.
• The cover paper table upper limit sensor/Rr (PS27) [4] detects that the rear side of the cover paper table
that is driven by the M47 reaches the upper limit.
• The cover paper table HP sensor/Fr (PS47) [7] detects that the front side of the cover paper table is in its
home position, and the cover paper table HP sensor/Rr (PS53) [8] detects that the rear side of the cover
paper table is in the home position.
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
[1] [9]
[5]
[6]
[2] [8] [7] a075t2c097ca
[1] Cover paper table up down belt/Rr_Rt [6] Front side

[2] Cover paper table up down belt/Rr_Lt [7] Cover paper table HP sensor/Fr (PS47)
[3] Cover paper table upper limit sensor/Fr (PS26) [8] Cover paper table HP sensor/Rr (PS53)
[4] Cover paper table upper limit sensor/Rr (PS27) [9] Cover paper table up down belt/Fr_Rt
[5] Cover paper table up down belt/Fr_Lt
107
B. Control
1. When applying glue to the spine of inside papers is finished and the glue tank HP sensor (PS33) turns On,
the cover paper table up down motor/Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47) start forward rotation to lift the cover paper
PB-501
table [1].
2. During a prescribed time period after the cover paper table upper limit sensor/Fr (PS26) and /Rr (PS27)
become On, the cover paper is pressed against the spine of inside papers, and then M46 and M47 stop [2].
3. After the book spine ends are neatly folded, the cover paper folding motor/Rt (M48) moves the cover paper
folding plate/Rt away from the book and stops, then, the cover paper table is lowered by the reverse rotation
of the M46 and M47 [3].
4. The M46 and M47 keeps rotating until the cover paper table reaches the position to receive the book, and
they stops [4].
5. When the cover paper alignment motor (M41) drives the book exit belt (attached to the cover paper align-
ment plate/Fr and /Rr) to the position to receive the book, and stops, the M46 and M47 start forward rota-
tion to lift the cover paper table [5].
6. The motors stop [6] when the cover paper table reaches to the position to receive the book.
7. When the clamp HP sensor (PS22) turns On upon completion of opening movement of the clamp pressure
plate (the book is released from the plate), the M46 and M47 starts reverse rotation to lower the cover paper
table [7] to receive the book.
8. The M46 and M47 stop when the cover paper table HP sensor/Fr (PS47) and /Rr (PS53) detect that the
cover paper table reaches its home position.
9. When the book exit motor (M42) drives the book exit belt to convey the book to the predetermined position
and stops, the M46 and M47 starts forward rotation to lift the cover paper table [9].
10. In order to align the surface of the book exit belt with that of the book conveyance belt in the book stock
section, the cover table is lifted by 60 mm and the M46 and M47 stop [10].
11. When the book end sensor (PS61) turns On detecting that the book has exit to the book stock section [11],
the M46 and M47 starts reverse rotation to lower the cover paper table until the PS47 and PS53 become
On, and the motors stop [12].
108
[1] [2] [3] [5] [8] [9][10] [12]

PB-501
Glue tank HP sensor (PS33)
For-
Cover paper alignment ward
motor (M41) Rever
se
Cover paper table For-
up down motor/Fr ward
(M46), /Rr (M47) Rever
se
Cover paper table upper limit
sensor/Fr (PS26), /Rr (PS27)
Cover paper table HP sensor/Fr
(PS47), /Rr (PS53)
For-
Cover paper folding ward
se
Book exit motor (M42)
Book end sensor (PS61)
[4] [6] [7] [11]

a075t2c098ca
[1] Completion of glue application [7] Starting book receiving operation

[2] Completion of pressing the book spine [8] Stops at the home position
[3] Starting to lower the cover paper table for [9] Starting lifting to the book exit position
preparing book receiving operation [10] Lifting by 60 mm
[4] Standby for receiving book [11] Book exit is finished
[5] Book exit belt movement is finished [12] Returning to the home position
[6] Going up and stopping at the position to
receive book
109
10.3.6 Cover paper folding plate control

A. Mechanism
(1) Outline
PB-501
• In order to let the book spin ends to form perfect corners, the cover paper folding motor/Rt (M48) and /Lt
(M49) move the cover paper folding plate/Rt [1] and /Lt [3] respectively inward to press the book spine [6]
from left and right sides with the spine pressed by the book spine backing plate [2].
• The cover paper folding plate/Lt is used as the reference position [4], and the cover paper folding plate/Rt
presses the book against the plate/Lt by means of spring force.
• The standby position of the cover paper folding plate/Lt is 15 mm [5] leftward from the reference position
[4], and that of the cover paper folding plate/Rt is 15 mm [7] rightward from the right end of the book
regardless of the book thickness.
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[3] [2] [4] [1] [3] [2] [1]

a075t2c099ca
110
(2) Pressure mechanism

1. The cover paper folding motor/Rt (M48) [5] drives the cover paper folding operation via the gear.
2. The pressure applied to the book is detected by the cover paper folding pressure sensor (PS52) [4].
PB-501
3. The cover paper folding plate encoder sensor (PS50) [6] detects how much the M48 has rotated.
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a075t2c100ca
[1] Cover paper folding plate/Rt [4] Cover paper folding pressure sensor (PS52)
[2] Book [5] Cover paper folding motor/Rt (M48)
[3] Pressure drive plate/Rt [6] Cover paper folding plate encoder sensor (PS50)
111
B. Control
1. When the cover paper table up down motor /Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47) start to rise to stick the cover paper to
the book spine and cover paper alignment completes, when the CD alignment plate returns to home posi-
PB-501
tion, the cover paper folding motor /Rt (M48) and /Lt (M49) start forward rotation to move the cover paper
folding plate/Rt and /Lt outward [1].
2. The M49 stops [2] when a prescribed time has elapsed after the cover paper folding plate position sensor (PS51) turns On.
3. The M48 stops [3] when the cover paper folding plate encoder sensor (PS50) has count certain pulses cor-
respond to the book thickness.
4. When the M46 and M47 stop upon completion of pressing the cover paper against the spine of inside papers, the
M48 and M49 start reverse rotation to move the cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt inward (toward the book) [4].
5. When the cover paper folding plate/Lt has moved to the reference position during a prescribed time period
after the cover paper folding plate HP sensor/Lt (PS49) turns On, the M49 stops [5].
6. When the cover paper folding pressure sensor (PS52) turns On [6], the PS50 starts to count again until the
pressure plate moves 3 mm pressing the book, and then the M48 stops [7].
7. The M48 and M49 start forward rotation to release the book from the pressure [8].
8. The M49 stops [9] when the cover paper folding plate/Lt reaches its standby position after the PS51 turns On.
9. The M48 stops [10] when the cover paper folding plate/Rt reaches its standby position after the PS50
counted certain pulses.
10. When the M46 and M47 start to rotate to lower the cover paper table, the M48 and M49 start to drive to
return the cover paper folding plates to their home positions [11].
[1] [3] [4] [7] [8] [10] [11]

Cover paper table up For-
down motor/Fr (M46), /Rr ward
(M47) Reve
rse
For-
se
Cover paper folding plate HP
sensor/Rt (PS48)
Cover paper folding plate
encoder sensor (PS50)
Cover paper folding pressure sensor
(PS52)
For-
motor/Lt (M49) Rever
se
Cover paper folding plate HP sensor/Lt (PS49)
Cover paper folding plate position
sensor (PS51)
[2] [5] [6] [9] a075t2c101ca
[1] Movement to the standby position [7] Stops applying a certain pressure to the book
[2] Cover paper folding plate/Lt stops at the [8] Releasing book after pressing it for a certain
standby position time to harden the glue
[3] Cover paper folding plate/Rt stops at the [9] Cover paper folding plate/Lt stops at the
standby position standby position
[4] Starts to fold cover paper [10] Cover paper folding plate/Rt stops at the
standby position
[5] Cover paper folding plate/Lt stops at the ref- [11] Returning to the home position
erence position
[6] Start to apply pressure to the book
112
10.3.7 Cover paper conveyance arm control

A. Mechanism
• The cover paper conveyance arm/Rt [5] and /Lt [9] press/separate the driven rollers [4] [11] against/from the
PB-501
cover paper conveyance roller/Rt [7] and /Lt [8].
• The cover paper conveyance arm/Lt is equipped with the cover paper lift plate/Lt [10] which lifts the left side
of the cover paper to prevent it from being fold while the cover paper alignment plates are moved inward to
attach the cover paper to the inside papers.
• The cover paper conveyance arm motor /Rt (M43) and /Lt (M44) drive the cover paper conveyance arm/Rt
and /Lt via the pins [2][14].
• While conveying a cover paper, the pins [2] [14] come off the cutouts [1] [12] of the cover paper conveyance
arms, and the cover paper conveyance roller/Rt and /Lt are pressed against the paper by means of the
spring force [3] [13].
• The cover paper conveyance arm HP sensor/Rt (PS42) [6] and /Lt (PS43) [15] detect that the arms are in
their home positions.The upright positions of the paper cover conveyance arm/Lt and /Rt are their home
positions.
[1]
[14]
[2]
[13]
[3]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[4]
[9]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
a075t2c102ca
113
• The table below shows the preset angles of the cover paper conveyance arms for each operation.
Operation Cover paper conveyance arm/Lt Cover paper conveyance arm/Rt

PB-501
[1] [2]
Home position [1] [2] +90 degrees +90 degrees
Cover paper conveyance [3] -30.4 degrees -8 degrees
Cover paper alignment, attachment [4] -29.4 degrees -7 degrees
Temporary lowering of cover paper table +25.4 degrees +41.2 degrees
(for book exit belt preparation) [5]
Re-lifting of cover paper table (to receive -14.1 degrees +15.3 degrees
book) [6]
[1] [5]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[3] a075t2c103ca
[1] Cover paper conveyance arm/Lt [5] Temporary lowering of cover paper table (for
[2] Cover paper conveyance arm/Rt book exit belt preparation)
[3] Cover paper conveyance [6] Re-lifting of cover paper table (to receive
[4] Cover paper alignment, attachment book)
114
B. Control
(1) Cover paper trimming mode
1. Upon receiving of a print job [1], the cover paper conveyance arm morot/Rt (M43) and /Lt (M44) start for-
PB-501
ward rotating to make the driven rollers provided on the tips of the arms press against the conveyance roller/
Rt and /Lt, and the motors stop [2].
2. When the cover paper conveyance motor (M45) stops [3] after conveying the cover paper to the cover paper
table, the M43 and M44 start reverse rotation to move the driven rollers away from the paper [4].
3. When the cover paper alignment motor (M41) stops [5] after making the arms press against the both edges
of the cover paper for alignment, the M43 and M44 start forward rotation to hold down the paper with the
driven rollers [6] to prevent the paper from moving.
4. When the cover paper trimming is finished, the cover paper alignment operation [7] to be attached to the
inside papers is performed in the same manner as for the trimming.
5. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the cover paper table is lifted [8] by the cover paper table up down
motor/Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47), the cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt start to move inward to fold the cover
paper along the inside papers, and at the same time, the M43 and M44 start reverse rotation to move the
driven rollers away from the paper [9].
6. When the cover paper table starts temporary lowering to prepare for receiving the book by means of the
M46 and M47 drive forces, the M43 and M44 start reverse rotation [10] to support the both sides of the
cover paper with the cover paper lift plate/Lt and /Rt. This prevents the cover paper from being unexpect-
edly folded by the cover paper alignment plate/Fr and /Rr.
7. When the M41 stops [11] after setting the book exit belt/Fr and /Rr at the book receiving position, the cover
paper table starts to move upward again, and at the same time, the M43 and M44 start forward rotation to
move the arms so that they do not contact with the clamp section.
8. When the cover paper table starts to move downward receiving the book, the M43 and M44 drives the arms
to return them to the home positions [13].
115
[1] [2] [3] [5] [7] [9] [11][12][13]
For-
PB-501
Cover paper alignment ward

motor (M41) Rever
se
For-
arm motor/Rt (M43) Rever
se
Cover paper conveyance arm HP
sensor/Rt (PS42)
For-
arm motor/Lt (M44) Rever
se
Cover paper conveyance arm HP sen-
sor/Lt (PS43)
For-
motor (M45) Rever
se
Cover paper table up For-
ward
down motor/Fr (M46), /Rr Reve
(M47) rse
[4] [6] [8] [10] a075t2c104ca
[1] Print start signal is received [8] Starting lifting the cover paper table
[2] Driven rollers are pressed against the con- [9] Driven rollers release the paper for cover
veyance rollers paper folding operation
[3] Cover paper conveyance is completed [10] Temporary lowering of the cover paper table
[4] The driven rollers release the paper [11] Book exit belt is set to standby
[5] Positioning (alignment) cover paper to be [12] Moving the arms to avoid contact with
trimmed is finished clamp section
[6] Driven rollers are pressed against the paper [13] Returning to the home position
[7] Positioning (alignment) cover paper to be
attached to inside papers
(2) Cover paper Not trimming mode

When the sub-scanning direction length of inside papers is over 182 mm, the first positioning operation for trim-
ming is not performed. Only the positioning operation for attaching the cover to the inside papers is performed.
However, when the inside paper is smaller than B5 size, alignment is done twice, once when cover paper is car-
ried in, and the other after leading edge positioning is done.
116
10.3.8 Cover paper lifting (supporting) control

A. Mechanism
• The cover paper lift plate/Rt is activated by the cover paper lift solenoid (SD41).
PB-501
• The cover paper lift plate/Rt supports the right side of the cover paper to prevent it from bowing downward
and being unexpectedly folded when the cover paper table is temporary lowered for setting the book exit
belt at the standby position.
B. Control
1. When the cover paper table up down motor/Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47) stop after lowering the table for setting
the book exit belt at the standby position, the cover paper lift solenoid (SD41) is activated to move the cover
paper lift plate in order to support the right side of the cover paper.
2. The SD41 turns Off when the cover paper alignment motor (M41) stops after setting the book exit belt at the
standby position.
For-
ward
Cover paper alignment motor
(M41) Rever
se
For-
ward
Cover paper table up down motor/
Fr (M46), /Rr (M47)
Reve
rse
Cover paper lift solenoid (SD41)
[1] [2]
a075t2c105ca
[1] Supporting cover page with the cover lift [2] Ending supporting cover paper
plate
117
10.3.9 Book exit control

A. Mechanism
• The book exit motor (M42) drives the book exit belt/Fr and /Rr.
PB-501
B. Control
1. After the cover paper is folded along the inside papers, the cover paper table up down motor/Fr (M46) and /
Rr (M47) start reverse rotation to lower the cover paper table [1].
2. When the book spine corner touches the book exit belt surface (when a prescribed time has elapsed after
the table starts to go down), the book exit motor (M42) starts to rotate at low speed so that the book is
slowly laid down on the belt [2].
3. When a prescribed time has elapsed after starting the rotation, the M42 stops [3].
4. The M42 starts high-speed rotation to exit the book [4] toward the book stock section when the M46 and
M47 have moved the cover paper table upward by 60 mm so that the book exit belt horizontally aligns with
the book conveyance belt in the book stock section.
5. The M42 stops [5] when the book end sensor (PS61) turns On detecting that the book has conveyed to the
book stock section.
For-
Cover paper table up
ward
down motor/Fr (M46), /Rr
(M47)
Reve
rse
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

a075t2c106ca
[1] Cover paper table goes down to convey the [3] Temporary stop of M42
book to the belt [4] Exiting book toward the stock section
[2] Receiving the book [5] Completion of exiting book
118
10.3.10 Waste paper control

• The waste box full sensor (PS80) [1] detects a full status of the waste box by receiving a light reflected off
the waste paper in the box.
PB-501
• The waste box set sensor (PS81) [2] is provided to detect whether the waste box is properly set or not. The
actuator of the waste box activates the sensor.
[2]
[1]
a075t2c107ca
[1] Waste box full sensor (PS80) [2] Waste box set sensor (PS81)
119
11. BOOK STOCK SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006
11. BOOK STOCK SECTION

11.1 Configuration
PB-501
Book end sensor (PS61) Book load limit sensor (PS65)
Book upper limit

LED (LED61)
Book conveyance
arm/Rr
Book convey-
ance arm/Fr
Book guide/Rr
Book guide/Fr Book conveyance
belt/Rr
Book convey-
ance belt/Fr
Book sensor/2
(PS67)
Book sensor/1 (PS66) Book stopper
Book movement belt

a075t2c108ca
120
Theory of Operation Ver1.0 Nov.2006 11. BOOK STOCK SECTION
11.2 Drive
A. Book conveyance drive
PB-501
[11]
[10] [1]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[6] [5]
a075t2c109ca
[1] Book conveyance belt movement motor [7] Book conveyance arm/Fr
(M62) [8] Guide shaft/Rt
[2] Book conveyance arm/Rr [9] Guide shaft/Lt
[3] Book guide/Rr [10] Timing belt
[4] Book conveyance belt/Rr [11] Book conveyance belt movement HP sen-
[5] Book conveyance belt/Fr sor (PS62)
[6] Book guide/Fr
121
B. Book conveyance belt drive

PB-501
[3] [1]
[2]
a075t2c110ca
[1] Book conveyance belt/Rr [3] Book conveyance belt motor (M61)
[2] Book conveyance belt/Fr
122
C. Book conveyance up down drive
PB-501
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c111ca
[1] Book conveyance belt up down motor [3] Book lift wire/Fr
(M63) [4] Guide shaft/Lt
[2] Guide shaft/Rt [5] Book lift wire/Rr
123
D. Book movement drive

PB-501
[2] [3] [1]
a075t2c112ca
[1] Book movement motor (M64) [2] Book movement belt
E. Book stopper drive
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
a075t2c113ca
[1] Book stopper [3] Front side

[2] Book stopper HP sensor (PS68) [4] Book stopper motor (M65)
124
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Book stock section operation overview
PB-501
1. Upon receiving of a print job, the book conveyance arm/Fr and /Rr [3] and the book stopper [1] are moved to
the positions correspond to the selected paper size.
2. The book conveyance belt [5] is driven in synchronization with the drive of the book exit belt [6] in the cover
paper table section, and the conveyance belt receives the book from the exit belt.
3. The book guide/Fr and /Rr [4] are moved to the positions where they contact with the book side edges to
align the book.
4. The book is conveyed downward until it reaches to the position to be stacked.
5. The book conveyance arm/Fr and /Rr are opened to drop the book onto the book movement belt [3].
[4] [5]
[6]
[3] [2] [1]

a075t2c114ca
[1] Book stopper [4] Book guide/Fr, /Rr

[2] Book conveyance arm/Fr, /Rr [5] Book conveyance belt
[3] Book movement belt [6] Book exit belt
125
6. When books have been stacked to the upper limit, the stack of books [1] is moved to the second row [3] by
the book movement belt [2], then, stacking the subsequent books in the first row is continued.
PB-501
[4]
[3]
[2] [1]
a075t2c115ca
[1] Stack of books at the first row [3] Second row

[2] Book movement belt
126
11.3.2 Book conveyance & movement control

A. Mechanism
• The book conveyance belt movement motor (M62) [1] drives the book movement arm/Fr [8] and /Rr [2] via
PB-501
the timing belt.
• The book movement arm/Fr and /Rr move in the main scan direction along the guide shaft/Rt [5] and /Lt [9].
• The book conveyance belt movement HP sensor (PS62) is provided to detect whether the arms in their
home position or not.
• The guide shaft/Fr and /Rr are moved up or down by the book conveyance belt up down motor (M63).
• The book movement arm/Fr and /Rr include the book conveyance belt/Fr [6], /Rr [3], and the book guide/Fr
[7], /Rr [4].
• Registration regulating plate/Fr [7], /Rr [4] slides along the guide shaft/Rt [5], /Lt [9].
[9] [10] [11] [1]
[2]
[3]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4]

a075t2c116ca
[1] Book conveyance belt movement motor [7] Book guide/Fr

(M62) [8] Book movement arm/Fr
[2] Book movement arm/Rr [9] Guide shaft/Lt
[3] Book conveyance belt/Rr [10] Timing belt
[4] Book guide/Rr [11] Book conveyance belt movement HP sen-
[5] Guide shaft/Rt sor (PS62)
127
(1) Operation
1. When receiving a book from the cover paper table section [1], the book movement arm/Fr [6] and /Rr [11]
are moved to the positions correspond to the book size, and the book guide/Fr [7] and /Rr [10] are set at the
PB-501
positions 17 mm outer the book edges [9].

2. Then the book guides are moved inward to the positions 2 mm away from the book edges to align the book
to be stacked.
3. When the book is conveyed downward to the position to be stacked, the book movement arm/Fr [6] and /Rr
[10] are moved outward to drop the book [3].
[10] [9] [8] [7]

[6]
[11]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4] a075t2c118ca
[1] Standby/receiving book [6] Book movement arm/Fr

[2] Aligning the book and conveying it down- [7] Book guide/Fr
ward [8] Gap between the book edge and the guide
[3] Releasing the book is 17 mm in the standby status
[4] Book drops [9] Book
[5] Gap between the book edge and the guide [10] Book guide/Rr
is 2 mm during alignment [11] Book movement arm/Rr
128
B. Control
1. Upon receiving of a print job [1], the book conveyance belt movement motor (M62) starts forward rotation to
move the book movement arm/Fr and /Rr to the positions correspond to the book size [2].
PB-501
2. When the book end sensor (PS61) turns On [3], the M62 starts forward rotation again to move the book
guide/Fr and /Rr inward until the gap between the guides and book edges become 2 mm to perform align-
ment [4].
3. When the book conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64) turns On [5], the M62 starts reverse rotation to
move the arms to home position and stops [6]. However, when there are subsequent books, book convey-
ance assy moves the book movement arms to standby position after returning to the upper limit home posi-
tion.
4. After releasing the book, the M62 reverse rotation is continued until the arms stop at their home positions [7]
turning On the book conveyance belt movement HP sensor (PS62).
[1] [2] [3] [6]

For-
Book conveyance belt ward
movement motor (M62) Rever
se
Book conveyance belt movement HP
sensor (PS62)
Book conveyance belt lower limit
sensor (PS64)
[4] [5] [7]
a075t2c119ca
[1] Print start signal is received [5] Start to move the arms to their standby
[2] Stop the arms at the positions correspond position
to the book size [6] Stopping at the standby position
[3] Receiving the book is completed [7] Returning to the home position
[4] Guides stop at the positions for alignment
129
11.3.3 Book conveyance belt control

A. Mechanism
• The book conveyance belt motor (M61) drives the book conveyance belt.
PB-501
• The book conveyance belt/Fr [2] and /Rr [1] receive the book conveyed from the cover paper table section.
• The completion of the receiving operation is detected by the book end sensor (PS61) [3] that turns On by
being pressed by the book.
[3]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c120ca
[1] Book conveyance belt/Rr [3] Book end sensor (PS61)

B. Control
1. The book conveyance belt motor (M61) starts to drive upon starting of the book exit motor (M42) to receive
the book [1] conveyed from the cover paper table section.
2. The M61 stops [2] when the book end sensor (PS61) turns ON.
Book conveyance belt motor (M61)
[1] [2]
a075t2c121ca
[1] Book conveyance belt drive [2] Receiving the book is completed
130
11.3.4 Book conveyance up down control

A. Mechanism
• The book conveyance assy [5] is moved up and down with the book lift wire/Fr [4] and /Rr [3] driven by the
PB-501
book conveyance belt up down motor (M63) [1].
• The book conveyance belt HP sensor (PS63) [6] detects whether the book conveyance assy is at its upper
limit home position or not. The book conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64) [2] provided at the bottom of
the book movement arm/Rr detects whether the book conveyance assy is at its lower limit position (top
surface of the stacked books or the movement belt position).
[1]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c122ca
[1] Book conveyance belt up down motor [3] Book lift wire/Rr
(M63) [4] Book lift wire/Fr
[2] Book conveyance belt lower limit sensor [5] Book conveyance assy
(PS64) [6] Book conveyance belt HP sensor (PS63)
131
B. Control
1. When the book alignment driven by the book conveyance belt movement motor (M62) is finished, the book
conveyance belt up down motor (M63) starts forward rotation to lower the book conveyance assy [1].
PB-501
2. The M63 stops when the book conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64) turns On [2].
3. When the M62 stops [3], the M63 starts reverse rotation to lift the book conveyance assy.
4. The M63 stops [4] when the book conveyance belt HP sensor (PS63) detects that the assy reaches its
upper home position.
[1] [3]
For-
Book conveyance belt move- ward
ment motor (M62) Rever
se
For-
Book conveyance belt up down ward
motor (M63) Rever
se
Book conveyance belt HP sensor (PS63)
Book conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64)
[2] [4]
a075t2c123ca
[1] Book conveyance assy starts to go down [3] Releasing book is completed
[2] Stopping at the book release position [4] Returning to the home position
132
11.3.5 Book movement control

A. Mechanism
• The book movement motor (M64) drives the book movement belt.
PB-501
• The belt moves the first row of books to the second row.
B. Control
(1) During printing
• The book movement motor (M64) is allowed to drive only when the book sensor/2 (PS67) is Off (no stack of
books exist at the second row).
• When the book load limit sensor (PS65) detects that books has been stacked up to the limit at the first row,
the M64 starts to drive the belt and stops when the PS67 turns On.
(2) Book manual movement

• The book sensor/1 (PS66) is On. The book movement motor (M64) is allowed to drive only when the book
sensor/2 (PS67) is Off.
• When the book movement button is turned On, the book movement motor (M64) starts to drive the belt,
and stops when the PS67 turns On.
133
11.3.6 Book stopper control

A. Mechanism
• The book stopper supports the stacked books to prevent them from falling down.
PB-501
• The book stopper motor (M65) drives the book stopper.

• The book stopper HP sensor (PS68) detects whether the book stopper is at is home position or not.
B. Control
• Upon receiving of a print job, the book stopper motor (M65) starts forward rotation to move the stopper to
the position correspond to the book size.
• When the job is finished, the M65 starts reverse rotation to return the stopper to its home position, and the
motor stops when the book stopper HP sensor (PS68) turns On.
11.3.7 Book full status detection control

• When books have been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the full-status is detected by the book load
limit sensor (PS65) and notified by the book upper limit LED (LED61).
• Since any light to the PS65 is blocked while the book conveyance assy is moving up or down, the PS65
status is checked only while the book conveyance belt HP sensor (PS63) is On.
• Even when the PS65 is not detecting the full-status, continuing stacking books cannot be made under the
following conditions.
Book thickness is classified into three levels; a, b, and c, and allowable number of books to be stacked is
determined according to the combination of a, b, and c as shown in the table below.
Book a: 10 to 30 sheets
Book b: 31 to 150 sheets
Book c: 151 to 300 sheets
Mixing more than two among the a, b, and c-level books in one stack is not allowed.
Books already stacked Books to be stacked over
Book a Book b Book c
Book a 50 copies in total (30 - a) copies (20 - a) copies
Book b (35 - b) copies 35 copies in total (20 - b) copies
Book c 30 copies 30 copies Until detected by
PS65
*Stacking more books is stopped when the result of the calculations shown in the table become negative
value.
*Stacking more books is stopped when the PS65 detects full status even when the result of the calculations
is positive.
134
12. OTHERS
12.1 Fan control
PB-501
1. Configuration
[1]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c129ca
[1] Exhaust fan/1 (M80) [3] Pellet supply cooling fan motor (M4)
[2] Exhaust fan/2 (M81)
A. Pellet supply cooling fan motor (M4)

(1) Purposes
• The fan cools the air above the molten glue surface in the glue tank in order to maintain a temperature dif-
ferential to molten glue. This allows the glue tank temperature sensor/Up (TH2) to detect a drop in temper-
ature precisely when it comes out of the molten glue that is getting low in order to notify that pellets need to
be supplied.
(2) On timing
• The M4 turns On upon completion of warm-up of the glue tank.
• The M4 turns On when the temperature sensor/Md (TH3) detects the temperature around the middle in the
glue tank is higher than the preset temperature.
(3) Off timing

• The M4 turns Off when the temperature sensor/Md (TH3) detects the temperature around the middle in the
glue tank is lower than the preset temperature.
135
B. Exhaust fan/1 (M80), /2 (M81)

(1) Purposes
• The fans are provided to prevent an excessive increase in temperature inside the PB-501 exhausting air and
PB-501
deodorize.
(2) On timing
• The M80 and M81 turn On upon completion of warm-up of the glue tank.
• The M80 and M81 turn On when the temperature sensor/Md (TH3) detects the temperature around the
middle in the glue tank is higher than the preset temperature.
(3) Off timing

• The M80 and M81 turn Off when the temperature sensor/Md (TH3) detects the temperature around the
middle in the glue tank is lower than the preset temperature.
136
12.2 Door opening/closing control

• When the front door, upper door, and stacker door are opened with the front door switch (MS2), upper door
PB-501
switch (MS3), and stacker door switch (MS4) [3] turned Off, a 24 VDC/2 (DCPU/2) supply is shut down to
stop all operations instantly.
• When the pellet supply door is opened with the pellet supply door switch (MS1) turned Off, the pellet supply
motor (M33) is stopped instantly.
• During initialization and printing operations, the front door lock solenoid (SD80), book door solenoid (SD61)
turn on, and disables the stacker door to open/close. During idling, jam occurrence or in service mode,
SD80 and SD61 turn off and open/close of the front door is enabled.
• A message is displayed in the touch panel when the stacker door sensor (PS57) switches from on to off.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075t2c131ca
[1] Book door solenoid (SD61) [3] Stacker door switch (MS4)
[2] Stacker door sensor (PS57)
137
PB-501
Blank page
138
RC-501
(
1050/1050P/1050e/1050eP(
2006.11
Ver. 2.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
Revision associated with the addition of a metal box to

2006/11 2.0
the waste toner recycle box.
CONTENTS
RC-501
RC-501
OUTLINE
2. PRECAUTIONS ON INTRODUCING THE RC-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4. WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
6. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX FULL DETECTION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
i
RC-501
Blank page
ii
OUTLINE
RC-501
A. Type
Name Toner recycle cut unit

Type Air conveyance waste toner collecting unit
B. Functions
Toner ejection Air conveyance by the diaphragm pump

Waste toner container Waste toner recycle box
C. Capacity
Recycle amount of the Max. 8,000 g

untransferred toner
Recycle rate of the untrans- 98% or more
ferred toner
D. Maintenance

E. Machine data
Power source 24 VDC (supplied from the main body)

Dimensions Recycle pump: 70 (W) x 135 (D) x 100 (H) mm
Waste toner recycle box
Paper box: 200 (W) x 330 (D) x 500 (H) mm
Metal box: 215 (W) x 335 (D) x 590 (H) mm
Weight Recycle pump: 0.85 kg
Waste toner recycle box
Paper box: 1.2 kg
Metal box: 5.8 kg
Others: 0.65 kg (hose, recycle pump control board, accumulator)
1 1
2. PRECAUTIONS ON INTRODUCING THE RC-501 Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
2. PRECAUTIONS ON INTRODUCING THE RC-501

A. When installing the RC-501 to the main body that has already been used, we recommend to
RC-501
replace the developer in advance.

B. If the RC-501 is installed without replacing the developer, image density may temporarily drop. To
recover the density, make about 100 copies of test pattern No.11 in the service mode.
2 1
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 3. UNIT CONFIGURATION
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION
RC-501
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] 14rtt1c001nb
[1] Accumulator [4] Hose joint

[2] Recycle pump [5] Waste toner recycle box
[3] Recycle pump drive board (RCPDB)
Note
• Do not sit or get on top of the waste toner recycle box. Doing so may cause the box to topple over
and could result in personal injury.
1 3
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
RC-501
Blank page
4
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 4. WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION
RC-501
4. WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.1 Composition
[4] [3] [2] [1] 14rtt2c001na

[1] Waste toner backflow prevention method Accumulator
[2] Waste toner suction method Recycle pump + conveyance hose
[3] Recycle pump drive method Recycle pump drive board (RCPDB)
[4] Waste toner conveyance method Recycle pump + conveyance hose
5
4. WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
4.2 Operation
A. Purpose
RC-501
The surplus of the toner used at the printing is recycled to the developing section by the recycling mechanism.
The toner circulating in the device may slightly deteriorate the print quality because the paper dust adhering to
the drum at the transfer/separation is mixed in the cleaning section.
To maintain the certain print quality, the toner circulation must be stopped and the fresh toner must be used for
development. The recycle cut device makes it possible.
B. Characteristics
As the recycle cut unit discharges the non-transferred toner to the outside before it is returned to the developing
unit, only unused toner is kept always in the developing unit. It also makes possible to perform the development
with the toner in which no paper dust is mixed so that you can maintain the certain print quality. However, the
toner consumption is increased because it ejects the used toner.
C. Waste toner conveyance path

The waste toner sucked from the toner recycle intake [2] of the toner recycle pipe [1] is conveyed to the accu-
mulator [3] via the accumulator hose [10]. The one-way valves are provided at the outlet and inlet of the accu-
mulator to prevent the backflow of the waste toner. The waste toner passing the accumulator is conveyed to the
intake [5] of the recycle pump [8] via the hose joint [9] and the hose /5 [4]. The waste toner in the recycle pump
is pressurized by the recycle pump and ejected from the outlet [7] to the hose /6 [6].
[7] [8] [9] [10]
[1]
[6] [4] [5] [4] [3] [2] 14rtt2c002na
[1] Toner recycle pipe [6] Hose /6

[2] Toner recycle intake [7] Outlet
[3] Accumulator [8] Recycle pump
[4] Hose /5 [9] Hose joint
[5] Intake [10] Accumulator hose
6
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 4. WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION
Hose /6 connected to the hose joint [1] conveys the waste toner to the outside. The toner conveyed to the out-
side is conveyed and recycled to the waste toner recycle box [3] via the hose /3 [2].
RC-501
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
14rtt2c003nb
[1] Hose joint [3] Hose joint

[2] Hose /3 [4] Waste toner recycle box
Note
• Make sure that the hose/3 [2] is connected to the waste toner recycle box without any slack,
bending, or twisting. Otherwise a toner clogging inside the hose may occur.
D. Operation timing
The recycle pump turns ON/OFF in sync with ON/OFF of the drum motor (M2) to perform the waste toner recy-
cle during the drum rotation. The recycle pump is operated only when the software DIPSW12-5 is set to ON.
1 7
5. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
5. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX

5.1 Composition
RC-501
[1]
[2]
[3]
14rtt2c004nb

[1] Toner/air separation method Filter (bilayer type)
[2] Waste toner container 1st recycle box
[3] Toner/air path separation method 2nd recycle box
8 1
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 5. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX
5.2 Operation
A. Purpose
RC-501
The large amount of air is contained in the recycled waste toner. In the waste toner box, the waste toner and the
air is separated to recycle the waste toner only.
B. Waste toner/air separation mechanism

The waste toner [8] conveyed to the top of the 1st recycle container [4] via the hose /3 [10] falls in the 1st recycle
container by its own weight and it is accumulated. The air conveyed together with the waste toner is introduced
into the hose [5] from the air inlet [3] provided on the top of the No.1 collection box. It provides the area to which
the waste toner can fall at the maximum as well as it decreases the content of the waste toner in the air taken to
the hose [5]. The conveyance direction of the air taken to the 2nd recycle container [6] is switched upward.
Waste toner contained in the air drops into the No.2 collection box by its own weight so that the waste toner
conveyed to the filter [2] can be further reduced. The air is conveyed to the filter [2] via the hose [9] and the
waste toner is separated from the air definitively, and then the air [1] is exhausted to the outside.
[10]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
14rtt2c005nb
[1] Air [6] 2nd recycle box

[2] Filter [7] Air + Waste toner (less)
[3] Air intake [8] Air + Waste toner
[4] 1st recycle box [9] Hose
[5] Hose [10] Hose /3
1 9
6. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX FULL DETECTION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
6. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX FULL DETECTION CONTROL

RC-501
A. Purpose
When the waste toner recycle box becomes full, it is detected to prevent an overflow of the waste toner and
pipe clogging.
B. Control
• The amuont of waste toner is calculated for each page totalizing the remaining toner on the drum, black
bands created between pages, process control patch, black bands created when starging/stopping
drums.
• When the waste toner in the waste toner recycle box reaches a certain level, a message to replace the box
appears on the operation panel.
• Resetting the parts counter of the waste toner recycling box resets the waste toner amount to zero.
Note
• This detection function is supported under Firmware-Version 3.0 or later.
• When printing is continued after the message is displayed, the recycle cut motor (M30) is stopped
forcibly at a predetermined timing and an error code SC23-50 appears.
10 1
IC Unit
2006.11
Ver. 2.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
2006/11 2.0 Revision in relation to launching of 1050e/1050eP

Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
CONTENTS
IC Unit
IC Unit
OUTLINE
1.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Maintenance and Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.5 Machine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.6 Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2. COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 Print Controller’s Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Print Controller’s Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2.1 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2.2 PostScript Protection Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.2 Each Function on the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.3 Data flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
i
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
IC Unit
Blank page
ii
OUTLINE
IC Unit
1.1 Type
Type: Built-in box type for the KONICA MINOLTA Printer/Copier
1.2 Functions
Resolution: Printing System: 600 x 600 dpi
Scanning Resolution: 200 dpi / 300 dpi/ 400 dpi / 600 dpi
Gradation: binary
Printable Area: PCLXL: 2.54mm (left, right, top and bottom without varia-
tion)
PCL5e: 4.23mm (left, right, top and bottom without varia-
tion)
PS: 2.84mm (left, right, top and bottom without variation)
314 x 460mm (The maximum paper size: 324 x 460mm)
No. of Print: 1 to 9999
Continuous Print Speed: 105 ppm (A4, 8.5 x 11) / (600 x 600 dpi)
Printer Description Language: PCL (TIFF/PDF)
PostScript3 (TIFF/PDF) (Option)
Built-in fonts: Agfa Microtype fonts
Adobe PostScript Font (optional PS3 kit required)
Compliant OS: Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 (NT Service Pack 3 or more)
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Mac OS 8.x - 9.x (optional PS3 kit required)
Mac OS X v10.2/v10.3 (optional PS3 kit required)
Printer Driver: Printer driver for Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP
PS printer driver for Windows (optional PS3 kit required)
PS printer driver for Windows/Macintosh (optional PS3 kit
required)
Network Functions
Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPP, EtherTalk
Compliant OS (NOS): Novell NetWare (3.x, 4.x-6), Windows 95/98/Me, Windows
NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS 8.x - 9.x,
Mac OS X v10.2/v10.3
Multiple Protocols: Automatic selection
Printing Method: Peer-to-Peer (TCP/IP for Windows 95/98/Me), Pserver
(IPX/SPX), lpd/lpr (TCP/IP for Windows NT 4.0/2000), lpd/
lpr (TCP/IP for UNIX), AppleTalk (EtherTalk), NPrinter/
RPrinter (IPX/SPX), Port9100(TCP/IP)
Dedicated Utilities: Peer to Peer Printing Tool
Compliant Web Browser: Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer
1
1.3 Paper
Paper Size: Same as copier
IC Unit
Paper Type: Same as copier

Paper Weight: Same as copier
1.4 Maintenance and Life

Maintenance: Same as copier
Machine Service Life: Same as copier
1.5 Machine Data

CPU: Low Voltage Pentium III Tualatin 933 MHz
System Memory: 256 MB (Standard), Expandable up to 512 MB (Option:
EM-701)
Host Interface: Parallel port Centronics (IEEE 1284 / amphenol 36 pin male
connector)
Hard Disk Drive: EIDE drive 40 GB or more
Option: PS3 kit
Memory: (EM-701: 256 MB)
Power: Obtain from main body printer
Network Functions
Network Interface: Ethernet (100Base-TX / 10Base-T)
Frame Type: IEEE 802.3
Ethernet Connection: 100Base-TX / 10Base-T
Network Connector: RJ-45
LED: Green 2
1.6 Operating Environment

Temperature: Same as copier
Humidity: Same as copier
2
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 2. COMPOSITION
IC Unit
2. COMPOSITION
2.1 Print Controller’s Capabilities
This product is a print controller to serve as a printer or as a network scanner when used in combination with the
copier that may be connected to computers or to networks. This print controller gets files from computers or
over networks and converts their contents into image data for the copier to be able to print out.
Also, the copier functions as network scanner thus making it possible to send images that scanned into the
copier to e-mail recipients as an attachment, to send to the FTP server/SMB server, or to store those scanned
images on the hard disk in the print controller and import them by Adobe Acrobat or other TWAIN-compliant
applications.
This chapter describes product structure, how to use service tools, how to disassemble and reassemble, HDD
formatting, troubleshooting, etc.
When used as a printer

For use as a network printer
Copier
For use as a local printer
Print Controller
prn_1050_system
3
2. COMPOSITION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
When used as a scanner

Receiving as an E-Mail attached file:
E-Mail software
IC Unit
Downloading from FTP: Import Storing in the internal HDD:

FTP client TWAIN-compliant applications
Network Scanner Driver
File sharing using SMB protocol

Original
SCAN
Copier
SMB server
Box0003
Box0002
Box0001Copy Report Report
0001
Copy Report Report
0001 Copy Document Printing DocumentScanning Document
Copy Report Report
0001 Copy Document Printing
Copy
DocumentScanning Document
Report Report
0002
Copy Document Printing DocumentScanning Document
Copy Report Report
Copy Report Report
Copy Document Printing DocumentScanning Document
FTP server Internal HDD
Data flow in scanning by the copier

Data flow in importing by a computer
SMTP server
(E-Mail)
prn_Scan_sys_10_v100
4
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 2. COMPOSITION
2.2 Print Controller’s Options

The Print Controller has the following options.
IC Unit
Memory (EM-701), PostScript Protection Kit (PS-502)
2.2.1 Memory
The IC unit is equipped with 256 MB memory by default. Memory expansion is available by adding DIMM in the
memory slot of the system board. Memory expansion enables more complex printing. When expanding mem-
ory, be sure to install 256 MB memory (EM-701).
About memory expansion, see “3.2.2 Removal / Installation of Memory” in Field Service section.
Combinations of memory expansion
DIMM1 DIMM2 Total Memory Size

256 MB --- 256 MB
256 MB 256 MB 512 MB
Caution
• At maximum, 512MB can be installed. Use the specified memory (EM-701) only.
• Use the memory slot with smaller number first.
2.2.2 PostScript Protection Kit

Adding PostScript Protection Kit enables to print PostScript data. If PostScript Protection Kit is fitted and print
PostScript data, data are rasterized and printed with the highest resolution of the resulting in high-definition
results.
About installation of PostScript Protection Kit, see “3.2.3 Removal / Installation of PostScript Protection Kit” of
Fild service section.
5
3. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
3. OPERATION
3.1 Operating Environment
IC Unit
The print controller includes a 933-MHz Intel Low Voltage Pentium III CPU to perform high-speed image pro-
cessing (rasterization). While rasterized image data are sent to the engine, data in the following pages are simul-
taneously rasterized. Thus, it has 256MB memory by default, and this memory is expandable to 512 MB to
accommodate extremely complex print data processing requirements. This design enables the print controller to
produce outputs at high speed without causing the print engine to stop in the process even when processing a
large number of pages.
The print controller system software runs on VxWorks from Wind River and is included on the CF(Compact
Flash).
The hard disk is used for storing configured settings, storing the copier’s scanned data and downloaded fonts,
and for spooling print data.
The scanned data is sent to PCs via the standard Ethernet Network Interface.
The transmission and reception of scanned data between the print controller and the print engine is a task of a
built-in engine interface (video interface).
As well, the serial interface is used for checking software operations/memory, thus giving access to the system
in the print controller.
System Board
Service Port
CPU
Memory Memory
(Standard) (Optional)
BIOS Serial
HDD2 Compact I/F
GMCH*1 (Flash ROM)
Flash
ICH2*2
IDE Bus LPC Bus
PCI Bus
PS Protection Network
Kit I/F Rasterization Engine
Parallel I/O I/F
Ethernet Parallel Port Engine

Network
*1:GMCH =Graphics & Memory Controller Hub

*2:ICH2 =I/O Controller Hub
prn_1050_system_flow
6
Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006 3. OPERATION
3.2 Each Function on the System Board

Clock Generator BIOS Chip
IC Unit
Slot for Memory2
Slot for Memory1
CPU GMCH*1
Serial Port
(for servicing)
Parallel I/F Super I/O

Connector
ICH2*2
Slot for EBC

Compact Flash
Parallel Chip
PostScript
Protection Kit
PHY*3
RJ-45 Ethernet
Network Port
Compression / Decompression Chip

IDE Connector
prn_1050fig20
*1: GMCH = Graphics & Memory Controller Hub

*2: ICH2 = I/O Controller Hub
*3: PHY = PHYsical layer device (for LAN)
I/F Controller Hub: Hard Disk Controller

Compact Flash Controller
PCI I/F
LAN Controller
Parallel I/F Controller
EBC Controller
Graphics & Memory Controller Hub: CPU Local Bus I/F
Memory Controller
Super I/O: Serial I/F Controller
7
3. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver2.0 Nov.2006
3.3 Data flow

IC Unit
Computer Application Web Browser
Print Commands
Printer Driver
Spooler
Parallel I/F Ethernet Network I/F

( IEEE 1284 ) ( TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk )
Interface
Parallel I/F ( IEEE 1284 ) RJ-45 Network I/F

I/F
Print Controller
PCI bus
Input Buffer
Hard Disk
PDL Processing ( Rasterization ) / Interpreter
Page Memory
Printer
Engine PCI bus
Image Memory
Print Engine ( Print )
PDL command Rasterized image data Printer status
prn_1050_data_flow
8
© 2006 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Printed in Japan
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid
CC564A-M-TE3
disclosure of confidential information.
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
1050/1050P/
1050e/1050eP
2006.11
Ver. 3.0
FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2
SAFETY INFORMATION ...............................................................................................S-11
IMPORTANT NOTICE ..............................................................................................S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE .....................................................S-12
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-16
Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1
Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P/1050e/1050eP

OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 7
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ........................................................................................... 317
TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................................................ 533
APPENDIX.................................................................................................................. 651
* For particulars, see the contents of the main body.
DF-603
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 5
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ............................................................................................. 27
* For particulars, see the contents of DF-603.
PF-701/PP-701
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 3
* For particulars, see the contents of PF-701/PP-701.
FD-501
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 5
* For particulars, see the contents of FD-501.
LS-501/502
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 5
* For particulars, see the contents of LS-501/502.
i
FS-503
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 5
* For particulars, see the contents of FS-503.
SD-501
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 9
* For particulars, see the contents of SD-501.
PB-501
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 3
* For particulars, see the contents of RC-501.
RC-501
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 3
* For particulars, see the contents of PB-501.
IC Unit
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 3
ADJUSTMENT / SETTING ........................................................................................... 23
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................. 25
* For particulars, see the contents of IC Unit.
ii

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-
vice work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to
the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while ser-
vicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions " DANGER", " WARNING", and " CAUTION" is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.

General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when using the copier.

General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble
:Direction when using the copier.

General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-
quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electri-
cal aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors.
For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such
modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the
reasoning behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
• Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT
• Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-2
2. POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In
that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or
power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.
Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection AC230V
to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current,
and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough current capacity,
and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
AC208V 240V
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:

- having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropri-
ate for the product's rated voltage and current, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connecting to inade-
quate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result
• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to terminals of the plug
according to the following order:
• Black or Brown: L (line)
• White or Light Blue: N (neutral)
• Green/Yellow: PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product, and results
S-3
3. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Konica Minolta brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety stan-
dards are met, in order to protect the customer and CE from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electri-
cal equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE
must perform regular safety checks.
1. Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
?V
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.

Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as
the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power kw
supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or
electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact quali-
fied electrician for the installation.
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater
than the maximum power consumption.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer elec-
tric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
S-4
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product,
make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture prop-
erly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord or cord set (with plug and connector on each end) specified by
KMBT.
Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
S-5
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can
flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may
result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
2. Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Place
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that
may catch fire.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not using product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of time (holidays,
dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful
to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
S-6
Fixing
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to
a injury.
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following
the prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break
and a risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs
from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still
powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.
Work Performed with the product Powered
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation
check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
S-7
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into
the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a

laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the
write unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
S-8
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether
the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Handling of Consumable
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken
not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact
with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-9
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent rem-
nants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
S-10
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.
This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined
within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user
operation.
S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
For metric area:


electric shock.
1050sa001e
S-12
For inch area:


electric shock.
1050sa050e
S-13

invisible laser beam. The
cover should not be opened
when the power is turned on.
1050sa002e
S-14
CAUTION
The paste tank
unit is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
1050sa005e
CAUTION:
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from. Do not remove caution labels. And also, when the caution label is peeled off or soiled and
cannot be seen clearly, replace it with a new caution label.
S-15
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF

AN ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately
take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further dam-
age.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded
through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in
"Serious Accident Report/Follow-up Procedures."
S-16
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:
<Theory of Operation section>

OUTLINE: System configuration, product specifications, unit configuration, and
paper path
COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Configuration of each unit, explanation of the operating system,
and explanation of the control system
This section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a rough outline of the
object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system,
and the timing of operation of each part.
<Field service section>

OUTLINE: System configuration, and product specifications
MAINTENANCE: Service schedule *, maintenance steps,
list of service tools and directions for use *,
firmware version up method *,
and removal/reinstallation methods of major parts
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Utility mode *, service mode *, security *, mechanical adjustment and
POD corresponding adjustment
TROUBLESHOOTING *: List of jam codes, their causes, operation when a jam occurs and its
release method, and list of error codes, their causes, operation when a
warning is issued and estimated abnormal parts.
APPENDIX *: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing chart, overall
layout drawing
This section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer's premise), a rough out-
line of the service schedule and its details, maintenance steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error
codes and supplementary information.
The details of items with an asterisk "*" are described only in the service manual of the main
body.
C-1
Notation of the service manual
1. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) IC board: Standard printer
(2) KonicaMinolta bizhub PRO 1050/1050P/1050e/1050eP:Main body
(3) PS-502 PostScript3 Option: PS3 Option
(4) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above:
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP
2. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered
trademark of each company.
3. Electrical parts and signals

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.

IN
PS
Sensor PS Door PS1 Sensor detection signal
SIG
102 PS
24V Power to drive the solenoid
Solenoid SD DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the clutch
Clutch CL DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1
Motor M
DRV2
Drive signals of two kinds
D1
D2
C-2
_U
_V
_W
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1
D2
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV A
DRV B Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
DRV B Motor, phases A and B control signals
A
Motor M /A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
Fan FM
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
Ground
PG, P.GND Power ground
C-3
DCD Data carrier detection
SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
Serial commu-
DSR, DSET Data set ready
nication
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
4. Paper feed direction

When the direction in which paper is fed is in parallel with the longer side of paper, the paper feed direction
like this is referred to as the longitudinal feed.
And the paper feed direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal feed is referred to as the transverse
feed.
When specifying the longitudinal feed, "S (abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)" is added to the paper size.
For the transverse feed, no specific notation is employed.
However, when only the longitudinal feed is specified for one and the same paper size with no specification
made for the transverse feed, "S" is not added even when being fed longitudinally.
<Example>
Paper size Feed direction Notation

Transverse feed A4
A4
Longitudinal feed A4S
A3 Longitudinal feed A3
C-4
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
1050/1050P/
1050e/1050eP
Main body
2006.11
Ver. 3.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left ass they are.
Revision due to the addition of a new optional unit (PB)

2006/11 3.0
Revision due to the minor changes for enhancing its reliability
2005/04 2.0 Revision due to the addition of a new option (SD, RC)
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 CONTENTS

CONTENTS
1050e/1050eP
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P/1050e/1050eP
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.5 Machine data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.6 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MAINTENANCE
3. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1 Life value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.3 Maintenance item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3.1 Main body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3.2 DF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3.3 PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3.4 FD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.5 LS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.3.6 FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.3.7 SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3.8 PB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.9 RC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.4 Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.1 Main body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.2 Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.3 Spot replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.5 Maintenance procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5.1 External section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5.2 Photo conductor section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.5.3 Developing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5.4 Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.5.5 Cleaning/toner recycle section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.5.6 Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.5.7 Vertical conveyance section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.5.8 ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.5.9 Fusing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.5.10 Paper exit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4. SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.1 Service material list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.2 Jig list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
4.3 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4.4 Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
4.4.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

4.4.2 Operating environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.4.3 Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
/1050e/1050eP
4.4.4 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

4.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.4.6 Mail sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.1 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.1.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.1.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5.1.3 Installation of the ISWTrns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.1.4 Usage of the ISWTrns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5.1.5 Error list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.1.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5.2 Internet ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.2.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.2.2 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.2.3 Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.2.4 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.2.5 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
5.2.6 Notes for use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.2.7 Internet ISW using the touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.2.8 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
6. OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.1.1 Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.1.2 CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
6.1.3 Writing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
6.1.4 Developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
6.1.5 Transfer/separation charger unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.1.6 Main body (write position adjusting shaft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
6.2 List of parts to be disassembled and reassembled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6.3 Disassembling/reassembling procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.3.1 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.3.2 Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.3.3 Writing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6.3.4 Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6.3.5 Registration section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
6.3.6 ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
6.3.7 HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
6.4 Commercially available parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
6.4.1 Status indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
6.4.2 Coin vendor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
6.5 PCS corresponding parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
6.5.1 PCS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
6.5.2 PCS corresponding parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
6.5.3 Procedure for reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
6.5.4 Periodic maintenance of the PCS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
6.6 CMS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
6.6.1 CMS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
ii

6.6.2 CMS corresponding parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
6.6.3 CMS corresponding parts counter management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
1050e/1050eP
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
7. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT / SETTING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
8. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
9. UTILITY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
9.1 List of utility modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
10. SERVICE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
10.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
10.1.1 Start and exit service mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
10.2 List of service mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
10.3 Machine adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
10.3.1 Tray adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
10.3.2 Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
10.3.3 Timing adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
10.3.4 Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
10.3.5 Warp adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
10.3.6 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
10.3.7 ADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10.3.8 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
10.4 Process adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
10.4.1 High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
10.4.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
10.4.3 Drum peculiarity manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
10.4.4 User paper setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
10.5 Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
10.5.1 PM count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
10.5.2 Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.5.3 Copy count of part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
10.6 Machine condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
10.6.1 I/O check mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
10.7 List output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
10.7.1 List output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
10.8 Test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
10.8.1 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
10.8.2 Test pattern density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
10.8.3 Running test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
10.9 System setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
10.9.1 Software DIPSW setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
10.9.2 Telephone number setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
10.9.3 Serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
10.9.4 Setting date input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
10.10 ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
10.11 CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10.11.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10.11.3 List of combinations of E-Mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . 454
iii
10.11.4 Detailed setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

10.11.5 Software DIPSW setting for CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
10.11.6 Mail address setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
/1050e/1050eP
10.11.7 Modem First Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

10.11.8 Receiving the initial connection mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
10.11.9 Setup confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
10.11.10 Maintenance call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
10.11.11 Center call from manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
10.11.12 Confirm communication log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
10.11.13 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
10.11.14 Error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
10.11.15 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
10.12 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
10.13 Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
10.13.1 Staple Finisher adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
10.13.2 Multi folder (hole-punch) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
10.13.3 Multi folder (Fold) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
10.13.4 Multi folder (PI) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
10.13.5 Stacker adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
10.13.6 Saddle stitcher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
10.13.7 Perfect binder adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
10.14 Machine manager setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
10.14.1 Manager authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
10.14.2 Machine manager password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
10.15 CE Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
10.15.1 CE authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
10.15.2 CE password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
10.16 IP HDD format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
11.1 Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
11.1.1 Tray centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
11.1.2 Separation pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
11.1.3 Pick-up roller load adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
11.1.4 Pick-up roller height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
11.1.5 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
11.1.6 Paper lift plate skew adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
11.2 REGISTRATION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
11.2.1 Registration roller paper skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
11.3 ADU section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
11.3.1 Pre-transfer roller nip pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
12. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
12.1 Before using the adjustment for POD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
12.2 The front and back registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
12.2.1 The front and back registration (printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
12.2.2 The front and back registration (scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
12.2.3 The front and back registration (ADF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
12.2.4 The front and back registration by user (by paper brand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
12.2.5 The front and back registration by user (for fine adjustments). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
12.3 Image density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
iv

12.3.1 Darken image density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
12.3.2 Lighten image density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
12.4 Transfer jitter adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
1050e/1050eP
12.5 Overlay printing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
12.6 User setting of each paper brand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
12.7 Settings for feeding carbonless paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
TROUBLESHOOTING
13. JAM CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
13.1 Jam code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
14. MALFUNCTION CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
14.1 Malfunction code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
APPENDIX
15. ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
15.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
15.2 DF-603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
15.3 PF-701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
15.4 FD-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
15.5 LS-501/502. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
15.6 FS-503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
15.7 SD-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
15.8 PB-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
16. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
16.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
16.2 DF-603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
16.2.1 Connector in the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
16.3 PF-701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
16.4 FD-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
16.5 LS-501/502. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
16.6 FS-503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
16.7 SD-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
16.8 PB-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
17. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
17.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
17.2 DF-603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
17.3 PF-701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
17.4 FD-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
17.5 LS-501/502. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
17.6 FS-503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
17.7 SD-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
17.8 PB-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
18. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
18.1 Main body 1/4
v
18.2 Main body 2/4

18.3 Main body 3/4
18.4 Main body 4/4
/1050e/1050eP
18.5 DF-603
18.6 PF-701
18.7 FD-501
18.8 LS-501/502
18.9 FS-503
18.10 SD-501 1/4
18.11 SD-501 2/4
18.12 SD-501 3/4
18.13 SD-501 4/4
18.14 PB-501 1/4
18.15 PB-501 2/4
18.16 PB-501 3/4
18.17 PB-501 4/4
19. PAPER SETTING
19.1 Relationship between the optimum value and the control of each of setting items by paper brand
(U.S.A. paper) (for fusing hard roller)
(U.S.A. paper) (for fusing soft roller)
(European paper) (for fusing hard roller)
(European paper) (for fusing soft roller)
19.5 Conversion table of paper weight
vi
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
OUTLINE

1050e/1050eP
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. System configuration
[4] [3]
[14]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[9]
[13]
[10]
[6]
[12]
[7]
[11]
1050to1001ea
2 1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
[1] Main body [9] Expanded memory: 256 MB (EM-701) for

[2] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-701) the image controller
[3] Double sided original auto feeder (DF-603) *1 [10] Side cover *2
/1050e/1050eP
[4] Flat stapling finisher (FS-503) [11] Hand cart (LC-501)

[5] Punch and multi folding finisher (FD-501) [12] Simplified perfect binding machine (PB-501)
[6] Large capacity stacker (LS-501) [13] Saddle stitching trimmer finisher (SD-501)
[7] Large capacity stacker (LS-502) [14] Overlay printing kit (PP-701)
[8] Toner recycle cut kit (RC-501)
*1 In the case of the 1050P, no scanner/DF function is provided.

*2 Attach the side cover when PF-701 is not connected. The side cover is available as the service parts.
B. Option coupling formation
NOTE
• The option can be connected. However, be sure to take note of the AC connection mode.
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option AC power to be connected to
1 Main body LS-502 —
2 Main body FD-501 FS-503 External (FD-501)
3 Main body SD-501 External (SD-501)
4 Main body FD-501 SD-501 External (FD-501/SD-501)
5 Main body FD-501 PB-501 External (FD-501/PB-501)
6 Main body FD-501 SD-501 FS-503 External (FD-501/SD-501)
7 Main body FD-501 SD-501 PB-501 External (FD-501/SD-501/PB-501)
8 Main body FS-503 —
9 Main body LS-501 LS-501 FS-503 External (1st tandem LS-501)
External (2nd tandem LS-501)
10 Main body LS-501 LS-502 External (LS-501)

11 Main body LS-501 FS-503 External (LS-501)
12 Main body LS-501 PB-501 External (LS-501/PB-501)
13 Main body PB-501 External (PB-501)
14 Main body SD-501 PB-501 External (SD-501/PB-501)
15 Main body SD-501 FS-503 External (SD-501)
16 Main body LS-501 SD-501 External (LS-501/SD-501)
17 Main body FD-501 LS-502 External (FD-501)
18 Main body FD-501 LS-501 FS-503 External (FD-501/LS-501)
NOTE
• Any coupling formation other than the above is unavailable.
• PF-701 can be either connected or disconnected.
2 2
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 Type
1050e/1050eP
Type: Console type (floor-mounted type)
Copying method: Indirect electrostatic method
Original stand: Fixed
Original alignment: Left rear standard
Photosensitive material: OPC
Sensitizing method: Laser writing
Paper feed trays: Two trays (1,500 sheets x 2, 20lb, 80 gsm)
PF-701 (2,000 x 3, 80 gsm) *1
*1 The PF-701 is optional.
2.2 Functions
Original: Sheet, book, solid object
Maximum original size: A3, or 11 x 17
Copy size:
Tray /1, /2: Inch: 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11R, 51/2 x 81/2, A3, B4,
A4, B5, B5S, 8 x 13, 81/4 x 131/4, 81/4 x 13, 81/2 x 13, wide paper
(up to 324 mm x 460 mm), standard index paper
Metric:A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x
11, 8 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4 , 81/4 x 13, 81/2 x 13, wide paper (up to 324
mm x 460 mm), standard index paper
ADU: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 51/2
x 81/2, 81/2 x 11R, 8 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 81/4 x 13, 81/2 x 13, wide paper (up to
324 mm x 460 mm)
Magnification:
Fixed magnification: Inch: x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.545, x 1.294, x 1.214, x 0.785, x 0.772,
x 0.647, x 0.500
Metric:x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154, x 0.866, x 0.816,
x 0.707, x 0.500
Special magnification setting: 3 types
Zoom magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)
Vertical magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)
Horizontal magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)
Warm-up time Hard roller: Less than 6 min. (under 20°C, at rated voltage)
Soft roller: Less than 8 min. (under 20°C, at rated voltage)
First copy out time Hard roller: Less than 3.0 sec.
Soft roller: Less than 9.0 sec.
Continuous copy speed: 105 copies/min. (for A4/81/4 x 11)
Continuous copy count: Up to 9,999 sheets
Copy density selection: AE/AES, manual (9 steps), user density (2 steps)
Resolution:
Scan: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Write: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Memory: 256 MB (DRAM) + 10 GB (HDD1)
Interface section: RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C): Main body right side
2 3
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
Serial port (USB Type B), Parallel port: Mounted on the Image process-
ing board (IPB)
No. of originals to be stored: More than 10,000 sheets
/1050e/1050eP
Under the following conditions:

Original: FAX#4CHART/A4
Density: Manual 5
Mode: Text/photo
2.3 Type of paper

Plain paper *2: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2, high-quality paper
Special paper *3: OHP film, label paper, *4
coated paper, 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 recycled paper,
40 g/m2 to 60 g/m2, 16lb, high-quality paper (thin), *5
91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2, 25lb to 72lb, high-quality paper (thick) *6
*2 Standard specified paper:
Inch: Hammermill Tidal MP (75 g/m2),
Metric: Konica Minolta Profi (80 g/m2),
*3 Special paper/recommended paper:
Thick paper: Inch: HM-Cover65lb (176 g/m2), XeroxDigitalLasr65lb (176 g/m2),
DomterCdor65lb, COUGARCOVER65lb (176 g/m2)
Metric: RDEREY200 (200 g/m2), RDEREY160 (160 g/m2), NEUCOLOR-
COPY (200 g/m2), XeroxColotech (200 g/m2), Xerox3R91798
(160 g/m2)
Thin paper: Inch: Domter16lb (Doqupach16lb)
Metric: Clair Mail (60 g/m2)
Label paper: Inch: AVERY 5160
Metric: AVERY DSP24
Coated paper: Inch: KROMEKOTE PLUSLASER HIGH GROSS 183 g/m2 (Smart
Paper Company),
Futural Laser 105 g/m2 (Stora Enso Paper Company)
Metric: —
*4 Label paper is loaded and fed one sheet at a time.
*5 Carbonless paper is only for the A4S size in the simplex mode.
Carbonless paper and recycled high-quality paper are only for character image.
Carbonless paper output is only for the main tray output of the FS-503.
*6 245 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 paper is available only for the middle stage tray of the PF-701.
2.4 Maintenance
Maintenance: Once every 750,000 prints
Machine service life: 40,000,000 prints or 7 years (whichever earlier)
4 2
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

2.5 Machine data
Power source: Inch: AC208V to 240V ± 10%, 60Hz
1050e/1050eP
Metric: AC230V ± 10%, 50Hz
Power consumption: Inch: Less than 3600W (full option)
Metric: Less than 3450W (full option)
Weight: 1050/1050e: Approx. 330 kg (with DF provided) /
1050P/1050eP: Approx. 310 kg
Dimensions:
1050/1050e: W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm
1050P/1050eP: W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm
1050/1050e + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503: W 2902 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm
1050P/1050eP + PF-701 + LS-501 + LS-502: W 3292 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm
(with no operation board included in each case)
2.6 Operating environment

Temperature: 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
Humidity: 10% RH to 80% RH
NOTE
• The information herein May be subject to change for improvement without notice.
2 5
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
/1050e/1050eP
Blank page
6
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 3. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE

1050e/1050eP
3. PERIODIC CHECK
3.1 Life value
A. Life value of materials
Item No. of prints Driving time Definition of driving time

Drum 1,000,000 220h The time during which the drum is being driven.
Idling time* is included in this time period.
Developer 1,000,000 220h The time during which the developing roller is being
driven.
Idling time* is included in this time period.
B. Life value
The life value is a value for the number of prints or a value for the drive time, whichever is earlier.
The relationship between the driving time mentioned above and the actual number of prints has certain condi-
tions. It is decided according to the amount of copy time and also idling time*. Accordingly, the number of prints
can vary substantially for the same amount of rotation time.
* Idling time: Time period during which the drum or developing roller is rotating with no image created.
Reference: Relationship between the number of prints and the drive time
220 hours drive at A4 continuous output of 11 sheets per job is equivalent to 1,000,000 prints.
Caution:
• Developer/drum replacement icon is generated only by print count or running time. The trigger
can be switched between print count and running time by setting of the DIPSW 15-7 in the service
mode.
1 7
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
3.2 Schedule
Guarantee period (7 years or 40,000,000 prints)
/1050e/1050eP
Service item x 10,000 prints No. of

xxxxxx executions
0
75
100
150
200
225
250
300
350
375
400
450
500
525
550
600
650
675
700
750
800
825
850
900
950
975
1000
2000
3800
3825
3850
3900
3950
3975
Maintenance 1 z z z z z z z z z z z z z xxxzxxx z z z 53
Main body
Every 750,000 prints times

Maintenance 2 z z z z z z z z z z z xxxzxxx z z 39
Every 1,000,000 prints times
Maintenance 3 z z z z z xxxzxxx z 26
Maintenance 4 z z z z xxxzxxx z 17
Maintenance 5 z z z xxxzxxx 13
Maintenance 6 z z xxxzxxx 8 times
Every 4,500,000 prints
Maintenance 7 z xxxzxxx 6 times
Maintenance 9 xxxzxxx 2 times
Maintenance 1 z z z z z z z z z z z z xxxzxxx z z z 53
DF

PF

FD

LS

FS

Maintenance 2 z z z xxxzxxx 13
8

Service item x 10,000 prints No. of
xxxxxx executions
0
75
100
150
200
225
250
300
350
375
400
450
500
525
550
600
650
675
700
750
800
825
850
900
950
975
1000
2000
3800
3825
3850
3900
3950
3975
1050e/1050eP
SD

Maintenance 2 z z z z z z xxxzxxx 26
Maintenance 4 z 1 time
PB

10,000,000 prints
RC

2 9
3.3 Maintenance item
Caution:
/1050e/1050eP
• For cleaning of the tools used, be sure to use a vacuum cleaner appropriate for cleaning toner.
NOTE
• For the part number of periodically replaced parts, see "Parts guide manual."
• For the replacement procedure of periodically replaced parts, see "3.5 Maintenance procedure".
3.3.1 Main body

A. Maintenance 1 (Every 750,000 prints)
No. Unit Description Quantity Implementation classification Materials

classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Tools used
1 Preparations Image check z
2 Photo conductor Cleaning of the photo z Vacuum cleaner
section conductor section
3 Cleaning/ Toner seal board z Cleaning pad
recycle section Cleaning blade 2 z Setting powder
Blade set mode
(in service mode)
56UA5351#
Cleaning of the inside of z Vacuum cleaner
the cleaning unit
Cleaning of the inside of z
the recycle pipe
4 Charger Cleaning of the back z Cleaning pad/drum
plate cleaner/cotton
swab/blower brush
Charger control plate 1 z
56UA2508#
Charger wire 2 z
56UA2509#
Charger wire vibration 2 z
proof rubber
55VA2527#
Charger cleaning unit 2 z
55VA-255#
C-clip 2 z
45AA2040#
5 Developing Cleaning of the devel- z Vacuum cleaner
section oping suction section
Replacing of the suction 1 z
filter
56UA3108#
Cleaning of the devel- z Vacuum cleaner
oping section
10

5 Developing Reinstallation to the
1050e/1050eP
section photo conductor sec-
tion
6 Writing Cleaning of the dust- z Cleaning pad
section proof glass
7 ADU Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
Cleaning of the pre- z Drum cleaner/
transfer roller cleaning pad
Cleaning of the loop z
roller
Cleaning of the ADU z
exit roller
conveyance roller /2
reverse roller
reverse/exit roller
acceleration roller
Cleaning of the paper z
exit roller /1
Cleaning of the paper z
exit roller /2
Cleaning of the fusing z
exit roller
Cleaning of the convey- z
ance section
8 Registration Cleaning of the paper dust z Vacuum cleaner/
section removing brush for the blower brush
registration roller /Lw
Cleaning of the paper dust z
removing brush for the
registration roller /Up
Cleaning of the registra- z Blower brush
tion sensor section
Cleaning of each sensor z
11

9 Transfer/sep- Cleaning of the back z Cleaning pad/drum
/1050e/1050eP
aration plate cleaner/cotton

charger Cleaning of the transfer z swab/blower brush
assist sheet assembly
Discharge wire 3 z
56UA2613#
Transfer presser rubber 3 z
56AA1783#
Transfer cleaning 1 z
assembly
56GA-276#
Separation cleaning 1 z
assembly /1
56GA-277#
Separation cleaning 1 z
assembly /2
56GA-278#
C-clip 3 z
45AA2040#
10 Fusing Cleaning of the fusing z Roller cleaner/
section claw /Up cleaning pad/drum
Cleaning of the fusing z cleaner
claw /Lw
Cleaning web 1 z
56UA5351#
Fixing cleaning web
counter reset
(in service mode)
11 Paper feed Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
section
12 Vertical Cleaning of the paper z Vacuum cleaner/
conveyance dust removing brush blower brush
section Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
13 Paper exit Removal of the paper
section exit section
Cleaning of the paper z Blower brush
exit sensor
Cleaning of the main z Drum cleaner/
body paper exit roller cleaning pad
14 Scanner Cleaning of the original z Blower brush/drum
section glass cleaner/cleaning
Cleaning of the slit glass z pad
15 Toner supply Cleaning of the toner z Vacuum cleaner/
section bottle insertion opening blower brush
12

16 Main body Cleaning of the cover/ z Drum cleaner/
1050e/1050eP
machine internal cleaning pad
17 Final check Check of the image and z
the paper through (with
various types of adjust-
ments included)
PM counter reset z
(in service mode)
B. Maintenance 2 (Every 1,000,000 prints)

1 Preparations Image check z
2 Photo conductor Replacing of the drum 1 z Replace it once for
section DR010 every 1,000,000
• Sensitive drum prints or 220 h. of
counter reset (in ser- driving time, which-
vice mode) ever is earlier.
Cleaning of the photo z Drum cleaner/clean-
conductor section ing pad/vacuum
cleaner
Replacing of the drum 3 z
claw
57GA2919#
3 Cleaning/ Cleaning of the clean- z Cleaning pad/
recycle section ing unit blower brush/vac-
uum cleaner
4 Developing Cleaning of the devel- z Cleaning pad/vac-
section oping section uum cleaner
Developer z Replace it once for
DV010 every 1,000,000
• Developer counter prints or 200 h. of
reset (in service driving time, which-
mode) ever is earlier.
5 Main body Cleaning of the cover/ z Drum cleaner/
6 Final check Check of the image z
and the paper through
(with various types of
adjustments included)
13
C. Maintenance 3 (Every 1,500,000 prints)

/1050e/1050eP
1 Toner supply Agitator plate assem- z Cleaning pad

section bly /1
56UA-347#
Agitator plate assem- z
bly /2
56UA-348#
2 Cleaning/ Cleaning of the clean- z Vacuum cleaner/
recycle section ing unit Cleaning pad
Toner guide brush 1 z
assembly
56UA-574#
Scattering prevention 1 z
felt
55VA5568#
Seal plate /Fr 1 z
56UA-559#
Seal plate /Rr 1 z
56UA-558#
3 Transfer/ Replacing of the trans- 1 z
separation fer assist sheet assem-
charger bly
56UA-281#
4 Fusing Fusing roller /Up 1 z Tri-flow (soft roller)
section 56UA5304#
(hard roller)
56UA5470#
(soft roller)
Heat insulating sleeve 2 z
45405339#
Fusing bearing /Up 2 z
45407504#
Fusing roller assembly 1 z
/Lw
56UA-528#
Fusing claw /Lw 2 z
25AA5329#
Fusing claw /Up 6 z
56UA5453#
Fusing cleaning sheet 1 z
assembly
56UA-547#
Cleaning of the fusing z Cleaning pad/blower
heating roller brush
14 2

D. Maintenance 4 (Every 2,250,000 prints)

1050e/1050eP
1 Paper feed Pick-up roller 2 Actual replacement
z
section 55VA-484# cycle: 500,000
Paper feed roller 2
z
55VA-483#
Separation roller 2
z
55VA-483#
E. Maintenance 5 (Every 3,000,000 prints)

1 Photo conductor Replacing of the drum 1 z
section temperature sensor
56GA-209#
2 Cleaning/ Toner seal board 1 z
recycle section 56UA-568#
Toner guide plate 1 z
assembly
56UA-561#
3 Fusing Fusing heater lamp /1 1 z
section 55VB8302#
Fusing heater lamp /2 1 z
56UA8303#
Fusing heater lamp /3 1 z
55VA8304#
Fusing heating roller 1 z
55UA5307#
Heating roller bearing 2 z
56UA7507#
Heat insulating sleeve / 2 z
Lw
26AA5315#
Thermistor /2 1 z
55VA8804#
Thermistor /4 1 z
55VA8806#
4 Toner supply Toner supply sleeve /1 1 z
section 55VA-334#
Toner supply sleeve /2 1 z
55VA-335#
1 15
F. Maintenance 6 (Every 4,500,000 prints)

/1050e/1050eP
1 Vertical Pre-registration clutch /1 1 z Actual replacement

conveyance 56AA8201# cycle: 3,000,000
section Pre-registration clutch /2 1 z
56AA8201#
Vertical conveyance 1 z
clutch
55VA-574#
Paper dust guide brush z
assembly
56UA-478#
2 Main body Ozone filter /A 2 z
56UA1121#
Ozone filter /K 1 z
56UA1128#
Conveyance suction filter 1 z
56UA1129#
Developing suction filter 1 z
56UA1122#
Cleaning of the cover/ z Drum cleaner/
G. Maintenance 7 (Every 6,000,000 prints)

1 Charger Charger unit 1 z
56UA-250#
2 Developing Developing suction 1 z
section assembly
56UA-325#
Developing unit 1 z
56UA-300#
3 ADU Cleaning of the ADU z Blower brush
paper reverse sensor /1
paper reverse sensor /2
Paper exit roller /1 1 z Actual replacement
56UA47432E cycle: 6,000,000
Paper exit roller /2 1 z
assembly
56UA-035#
ADU acceleration roller 1 z
56UA4740#
16

3 ADU ADU reverse/exit roller 1 z Actual replacement
1050e/1050eP
56UA4741# cycle: 6,000,000
ADU reverse roller 1 z
56UA4741#
ADU conveyance roller /1 1 z
56UA47442E
56UA47442E
56UA4595#
56UA4683#
ADU exit roller 1 z
56UA4683#
Fusing exit roller 1 z
56UA4595#
4 Registration Registration roller /Up 1 z
section 56UA46061E
Registration bearing 2 z
56UA7602#
5 Transfer/ Transfer/separation 1 z
separation charger unit
charger 56UA-270#
TSL 1 z
55VA8308#
6 Fusing Fusing gear 1 z
section 56UA7783#
Web motor 1 z
56GA8017#
Fusing actuator 1 z
56UA5383#
7 Paper exit Cleaning of the paper z Blower brush
section exit sensor
Main body paper exit 1 z
roller
56UA45571E
8 Cleaning/ Cleaning gear /A assem- 1 z
toner recycle bly
section 56GA-556#
2 17
H. Maintenance 8 (Every 10,000,000 prints)

classification Cleaning Check LubricationReplacement Tools used
/1050e/1050eP
1 ADU Reverse gate 7 z Actual replacement

56UA4760# cycle: 10,000,000
2 Vertical Conveyance roller /1 1 z Actual replacement
conveyance 56UA4413# cycle: 6,000,000
section Conveyance roller /2 1 z
56UA44141E
Conveyance roller /3 1 z
56UA44641E
Pre-registration roller /1 1 z
56UA44111E
Pre-registration roller /2 1 z
56UA44111E
Conveyance exit roller 1 z
56UA4412#
Pre-registration bearing 4 z
56UA7603#
Cleaning gear /A 1 z
55VA7920#
3 Toner supply Pump unit /Rt 1 z
section 56UA-790#
Pump unit /Lt 1 z
56UA-780#
I. Maintenance 9 (Every 15,000,000 prints)

1 Paper feed Paper feed clutch /1 1 z Actual replacement
section 56AA8201# cycle: 3,000,000
Paper feed clutch /2 1 z
56AA8201#
Separation clutch /1 1 z
56AA8201#
56AA8201#
2 Cleaning/ Cleaning gear /B 1 z
toner recycle 55VA7921#
section
18 2

3.3.2 DF
1050e/1050eP
1 Preparations Original through check z
Cover z
2 Paper feed Pick-up roller z Drum cleaner/
section Paper feed roller z cleaning pad
Paper feed assist roller z
Cleaning pad z
Registration roller z
Pre-handling rubber z
Original count sensor z Blower brush
Original size sensor /Lt z
Original size sensor /Rt z
3 Conveyance Original registration z
section sensor /Lt
Original registration z
sensor /Rt
4 Read Original conveyance z
section sensor
Original skew sensor / z
Rr
Original skew sensor /Fr z
5 Paper exit Mirror on the driven z
section roller assembly
Original reverse sensor z
Reverse jam sensor z
Original reverse/exit z
sensor
6 Final check Paper through check z
Cleaning of the cover z Drum cleaner/
cleaning pad

1 Paper feed Separation roller 1 z Actual replacement
section 13GA4606# cycle: 400,000
19

/1050e/1050eP
1 Paper feed Pick-up roller 1 z Actual replacement

section 13GA4604# cycle: 800,000
Paper feed roller 1 z
15AS4605#
Paper feed assist roller 1 z
15AS4601#
Torque limiter 1 z
13GA-135#
3.3.3 PF

1 Preparations Paper through check z
2 Tray section Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
3 Conveyance Cleaning of each sensor z
section
cleaning pad

1 Tray section Pick-up roller 3 z Actual replacement
55VA-484# cycle: 500,000
55VA-483#
Separation roller 3 z
55VA-483#
20


1050e/1050eP
1 Conveyance Pre-registration clutch /1 1 z Actual replacement
section 56AA8201# cycle: 3,000,000
Pre-registration clutch /2 1 z
56AA8201#
Pre-registration clutch /3 1 z
56AA8201#
Intermediate clutch /Up 1 z
56AA8201#
Intermediate clutch /Lw 1 z
56AA8201#
2 Tray section Paper dust removing 3 z
brush
15BY5604#

2 Conveyance Pre-registration roller 3 z Actual replacement
section 15BA45071E cycle: 6,000,000
Bearing 6 z
56UA7603#
Conveyance roller 4 z
15BA45081E
PFU paper exit roller 1 z
15BA5011#
Torque limiter 2 z
57GA4430#
cleaning pad
2 21
E. Maintenance 5 (Every 15,000,000 prints)

/1050e/1050eP
1 Tray section Paper feed clutch /1 1 z Actual replacement

56AA8201# cycle: 3,000,000
56AA8201#
56AA8201#
56AA8201#
56AA8201#
56AA8201#
Forced separation 1 z
clutch
56AA8201#
F. Spotted replacement part (Every 50,000 cycle)

1 Tray section Pick-up roller 1 z
(PP-701) A08R5621#
Feed roller 1 z
A08R5622#
A08R5622#
22 2

3.3.4 FD
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 2,250,000 prints)
1050e/1050eP
2 PI section Paper feed rubber 2 z Actual replacement
50BA-575# cycle: 100,000
Separation rubber 2 z
13QN-443#
Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
3 Tray up/down Cleaning of each sensor z
section
4 Punch Cleaning of each sensor z
section
5 Conveyance Cleaning of each sensor z
section
cleaning pad

2 PI section Pick-up rubber 6 z Actual replacement
50BA-574# cycle: 200,000
3 Tray up/down Tray up down motor 1 z Actual replacement
section 129U-108# cycle: 5,000,000
cleaning pad
23

/1050e/1050eP

2 Punch Punch motor 1 z Actual replacement
section 15AG-573# cycle: 5,000,000
3 Conveyance Roller solenoid /1 1 z
section 15AG-493#
Roller solenoid /2 1 z
15AG-493#
15AG-493#
15AG-493#
cleaning pad
24

3.3.5 LS
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 15,000,000 prints)
1050e/1050eP
2 Conveyance Paper press solenoid /3 1 z Actual replacement
section 15AV8255# cycle: 5,000,000
Paper press solenoid /1 1 z
15AV8252#
Paper press solenoid /2 1 z
15AV8251#
Rear stopper solenoid 1 z
15AV8253#
Stacker tray up down 1 z
motor
15AV8003#
Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
cleaning pad
25
3.3.6 FS

/1050e/1050eP

2 Main tray Paper exit roller /A 8 z
section 122H4825#
3 Stacker Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
section
4 Conveyance Cleaning of the paper z Vacuum cleaner/
section dust removing brush blower brush
5 Stapler Cleaning of staple z
section scraps box
cleaning pad

1 Stapler Stapler unit /Fr 1 z Actual replacement
section 15AA4222# cycle: 500,000
Stapler unit /Rr 1 z
15AA-450#

1 Stacker Intermediate roller 1 z
section release solenoid
15AA-449#
26 2

3.3.7 SD
1050e/1050eP
1 Right angle Right angle conveyance z Blower brush
conveyance sensor /1
2 section Right angle conveyance z
sensor /2
3 Right angle conveyance z Drum cleaner/
roller /1 cleaning pad
4 Right angle conveyance z
roller /2
roller /3
roller /4
7 Folding Folding main scan align- z Blower brush
section ment home sensor /Fr1
8 Folding main scan align- z
ment home sensor /Fr2
9 Folding entrance roller /1 z Drum cleaner/
10 Folding entrance roller /2 z cleaning pad
11 Folding entrance roller /3 z
12 Saddle Saddle stitching paper z Blower brush
stitching sensor
13 section Bundle sensor /1 z
14 Bundle pro- Bundle sensor /2 z
cessing sec-
tion
15 Trimmer Trimmer scraps full sensor z
16 section Trimmer board assembly z Actual replacement
15AN5282# cycle: 18,900 cuts

1 Trimmer Trimmer blade assembly 1 z Actual replacement
section 15AN-570# cycle: 37,500 cuts
2 27

/1050e/1050eP
1 Trimmer Trimmer blade motor 1 z Actual replacement

section 15AN8002# cycle: 200,000 cuts
2 Trimmer press motor 1 z
15AN8002#

1 Right angle Roller release solenoid /1 1 z Actual replacement
conveyance 15AN8251# cycle: 5,000,000
2 section Roller release solenoid /2 1 z Actual replacement
15AN-239# cycle: 5,000,000
3 Right angle gate solenoid 1 z Actual replacement
15AN-249# cycle: 5,000,000
4 Saddle Stapler assembly /Rt 1 z Actual replacement
stitching 15AN-550# cycle: 1,000,000
5 section Stapler assembly /Lt 1 z Actual replacement
15AN-550# cycle: 1,000,000
6 Folding Roller release solenoid /3 1 z Actual replacement
section 15AN8251# cycle: 5,000,000
7 Bundle pro- Bundle press stage 1 z Actual replacement
cessing sec- gear cycle: 500,000 books
tion 15AN7719# (Bundle exit tray
exit)
28 2

3.3.8 PB
1050e/1050eP
1 Conveyance Entrance sensor z Blower brush
section
2 Glue tank Glue tank z Tweezers, industrial wiper
section
3 Filter z
A0753724#
4 Cover paper Cover paper folding z*1 Tweezers, industrial wiper
section plate
5 Book spine backing z*1

plate
6 Glue supply Pellet hopper z Blower brush
7 Book stock Book load limit sensor z
8 section Book upper limit LED z
9 Cover paper Paper dust removing z
tray section brush
10 Paper dust removing z
roller
11 SC section Switchback roller z
13GQ4519#
*1 Cleaning of the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate is an abbreviated cleaning.
Remove adhered glue as necessary.

1 Cutter sec- Roller cutter blade Assy z
tion A0754421#
C. Spotted replacement part (Every 500,000 cycle)

1 Cover paper Pick-up roller 1 z
tray section 55VA-484#
55VA-483#
55VA-483#
2 29
D. Spotted replacement part (Every 3,000,000 cycle)

/1050e/1050eP
1 Cover paper Cover paper pick up 1 z

tray section clutch
56AA8201#
3.3.9 RC

1 Waste toner Hose /3 z Drum cleaner/
conveyance cleaning pad
section
2 Waste toner Waste toner collecting 1 z
collecting box
box 14RT-970#

1 Waste toner Accumulator 1 z Blower brush
conveyance 14RT-230#
2 section Recycle pump 1 z
14RT-210#
30 2

3.4 Replacement parts list
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• For the part number of periodically replaced parts, see "Parts guide manual."
• For the replacement procedure of periodically replaced parts, see "3.5 Maintenance procedure".
• The parts count No. given in the table below represents the number of the fixed parts number in
the service mode.
3.4.1 Main body
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual Parts count
replacement No.
cycle
1 Main body Ozone filter /A 56UA1121# 2 4,500,000 32
2 Ozone filter /K 56UA1128# 1 4,500,000 32
3 Conveyance suction filter 56UA1129# 1 4,500,000 33
4 Developing suction filter 56UA1122# 1 4,500,000 33
5 Photo con- Drum temperature sensor 56GA-209# 1 3,000,000 22
6 ductor section Drum DR010 1 * 1,000,000
7 Drum claw 57GA2919# 3 1,000,000 9
8 Charger Charger unit 56UA-250# 1 6,000,000 34
9 Charger control plate 56UA2508# 1 750,000 4
10 Charger wire 56UA2509# 2 750,000 3
11 Charger rubber vibration isolator 55VA2527# 2 750,000
12 Charger cleaning unit 55VA-255# 2 750,000 5
13 C-clip 45AA2040# 2 750,000
14 Developing Developing unit 56UA-300# 1 6,000,000 36
section
15 Developing suction assembly 56UA-325# 1 6,000,000 37
16 Suction filter 56UA3108# 1 750,000 6
17 Developer DV010 1 * 1,000,000
18 Agitator plate assembly /1 56UA-347# 1 1,500,000 153
19 Agitator plate assembly /2 56UA-348# 1 1,500,000 153
20 Toner supply Toner supply sleeve /1 55VA-334# 1 3,000,000 23
section
21 Toner supply sleeve /2 55VA-335# 1 3,000,000 24
22 Pump unit /Lt 56UA-780# 1 10,000,000 52
23 Pump unit /Rt 56UA-790# 1 10,000,000 51
24 Cleaning/ Cleaning blade 56UA5351# 2 750,000 2
25 recycle sec- Toner seal board 56UA-568# 1 3,000,000 25
26 tion Toner guide brush assembly 56UA-574# 1 1,500,000 12
27 Scattering prevention felt 55VA5568# 1 1,500,000
28 Seal plate /Fr 56UA-559# 1 1,500,000 14
29 Seal plate /Rr 56UA-558# 1 1,500,000 13
*
The actual replacement cycle of the drum and developer is 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours of use, whichever is earlier.
2 31
replacement No.
/1050e/1050eP
cycle
30 Cleaning/ Toner guide plate assembly 56UA-561# 1 3,000,000 26
31 recycle sec- Cleaning gear /A assembly 56GA-556# 1 6,000,000 167
32 tion Cleaning gear /B 55VA7921# 1 15,000,000 172
33 Paper feed Pick-up roller 55VA-484# 2 500,000 53,57
34 section Paper feed roller 55VA-483# 2 500,000 54,58
35 Separation roller 55VA-483# 2 500,000 54,58
36 Paper feed clutch /1 56AA8201# 1 3,000,000 55
38 Separation clutch /1 56AA8201# 1 3,000,000 56
40 Vertical con- Conveyance roller /1 56UA4413# 1 6,000,000 82
41 veyance sec- Conveyance roller /2 56UA44141E 1 6,000,000 83
42 tion Conveyance roller /3 56UA44641E 1 6,000,000 83
43 Pre-registration roller /1 56UA44111E 1 6,000,000 84
44 Pre-registration roller /2 56UA44111E 1 6,000,000 85
45 Conveyance exit roller 56UA4412# 1 6,000,000 77
46 Paper dust guide brush assembly 56UA-478# 1 3,000,000 76
47 Pre-registration bearing 56UA7603# 4 6,000,000
48 Pre-registration clutch /1 56AA8201# 1 3,000,000 79
50 Vertical conveyance clutch 56AA8201# 1 3,000,000 80
51 Cleaning gear /A 55VA7920# 1 6,000,000
52 Transfer/sep- Transfer/separation charger unit 56UA-270# 1 6,000,000 38
53 aration Discharge wire 56UA2613# 3 750,000 7
54 charger Transfer presser rubber 56AA1783# 3 750,000
55 Transfer cleaning assembly 56GA-276# 1 750,000 8
56 Separation cleaning assembly /1 56GA-277# 1 750,000 8
57 Separation cleaning assembly /2 56GA-278# 1 750,000 8
58 C-clip 45AA2040# 3 750,000
59 Transfer assist sheet assembly 56UA-281# 1 1,500,000 10, 11
60 TSL 55VA8308# 1 6,000,000 39
61 Registration Registration roller /Up 56UA46061E 1 6,000,000 40
62 section Registration bearing 56UA7602# 2 6,000,000 40
63 ADU section Paper exit roller /1 56UA47432E 1 6,000,000 44
64 Paper exit roller /2 assembly 56UA-035# 1 6,000,000
65 ADU accelerate roller 56UA4740# 1 6,000,000 41
66 Reverse/exit roller 56UA4741# 1 6,000,000 42
67 ADU reverse roller 56UA4741# 1 6,000,000 43
68 ADU conveyance roller /1 56UA47442E 1 6,000,000 45
32 2

replacement No.
cycle
1050e/1050eP
69 ADU section ADU conveyance roller /2 56UA47442E 1 6,000,000 45
70 ADU conveyance roller /3 56UA4595# 1 6,000,000 45
71 ADU conveyance roller /4 56UA4683# 1 6,000,000 45
72 ADU exit roller 56UA4683# 1 6,000,000 45
73 Fusing exit roller 56UA4595# 4 6,000,000 46
74 Reverse gate 56UA4760# 7 10,000,000
75 Fusing sec- Cleaning web 56UA5351# 1 750,000 1
76 tion Fusing heater lamp /1 55VB8302# 1 3,000,000
77 Fusing heater lamp /2 56UA8303# 1 3,000,000
78 Fusing heater lamp /3 55VB8304# 1 3,000,000
79 Fusing roller /Up 56UA5304# 1 1,500,000 15
56UA5470#
80 Heat insulating sleeve 45405339# 2 1,500,000 19
81 Fusing bearing /Up 45407504# 2 1,500,000 20
82 Heating roller bearing 56UA7507# 2 3,000,000 28
83 Fusing gear 56UA7783# 1 6,000,000 48
84 Fusing roller /Lw assembly 56UA-528# 1 1,500,000 16
85 Fusing heating roller 56UA5307# 1 3,000,000 31
86 Heat insulating sleeve /Lw 26AA5315# 2 3,000,000 27
87 Fusing claw /Up 56UA5453# 6 1,500,000 17
88 Fusing claw /Lw 25AA5329# 2 1,500,000 18
89 Thermistor /2 55VA8804# 1 3,000,000 29
90 Thermistor /4 55VA8806# 1 3,000,000 30
91 Fusing actuator 56UA5383# 1 6,000,000 50
92 Web motor 56GA8017# 1 6,000,000 49
93 Fusing cleaning sheet assembly 56UA-547# 1 1,500,000 21
94 Paper exit Main body paper exit roller 56UA45571E 1 6,000,000 47
section
33
3.4.2 Option
replacement No.
/1050e/1050eP
cycle
1 DF Pick-up roller 13GA4604# 1 800,000 141
2 Paper feed roller 15AS4605# 1 800,000 142
3 Paper feed auxiliary roller 15AS4601# 1 800,000 144
4 Separation roller 13GA4606# 1 400,000 143
5 Torque limiter 13GA-135# 1 800,000 145
6 PF Pick-up roller 55VA-484# 3 500,000 61,66,71
7 Paper feed roller 55VA-483# 3 500,000 62,67,72
8 Separation roller 55VA-483# 3 500,000 62,67,72
9 Paper dust removing brush 15BY5604# 3 3,000,000
16 Forced separation clutch 56AA8201# 1 3,000,000 70
20 Torque limiter 57GA4430# 2 6,000,000
21 Intermediate clutch /Up 56AA8201# 1 3,000,000 93
22 Intermediate clutch /Lw 56AA8201# 1 3,000,000 94
23 Pre-registration roller 15BA45071E 3 6,000,000 86,87,88
24 Bearing 56UA7603# 6 6,000,000
25 Conveyance roller 15BA45082F 4 6,000,000 86,88
26 PFU paper exit roller 15BA5011# 1 6,000,000 89
27 FD Pick-up rubber 50BA-574# 6 200,000 114,117
28 Paper feed rubber 50BA-575# 2 100,000 116,119
29 Separation rubber 13QN-443# 2 100,000 115,118
30 Roller solenoid /1 15GA-493# 1 5,000,000 121
34 Punch motor 15GA-573# 1 5,000,000 120
35 Tray up down motor 129U-108# 1 5,000,000 123
36 LS Stacker tray up down motor 15AV8003# 1 5,000,000 128, 133
37 Paper press solenoid /1 15AV8252# 1 5,000,000 124, 129
34 2

replacement No.
cycle
1050e/1050eP
40 LS Rear stopper solenoid 15AV8253# 1 5,000,000 127, 132
41 FS Intermediate roller release solenoid 15AA-449# 1 5,000,000 113
42 Stapler unit /Fr 15AA4222# 1 500,000 111
43 Stapler unit /Rr 15AA-450# 1 500,000 112
44 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 122H4825# 8 750,000
45 SD Roller release solenoid /1 15AN8251# 1 5,000,000 139
46 Roller release solenoid /2 15AN-239# 1 5,000,000 140
47 Roller release solenoid /3 15AN8251# 1 5,000,000 140
48 Right angle gate solenoid 15AN-249# 1 5,000,000 138
49 Stapler assembly /Rt 15AN-550# 1 1,000,000 134
50 Stapler assembly /Lt 15AN-550# 1 1,000,000 135
51 Trimmer blade assembly 15AN-570# 1 37,500 136
52 Trimmer board assembly 15AN5282# 1 18,900 137
53 Trimmer blade motor 15AN8002# 1 200,000
54 Trimmer press motor 15AN8002# 1 200,000
55 Bundle press stage gear 15AN7719# 1 500,000
56 PB Switchback roller 13GQ4519# 1 750,000 158
57 Cover paper separation clutch 56AA8201# 1 3,000,000 162
58 Roller cutter blade Assy A0754421# 1 100,000 163
59 Filter A0753724# 1 750,000 164
60 RC Recycle pump 14RT-210# 1 10,000,000 151
61 Accumulator 14RT-230# 1 10,000,000 152
62 Waste toner recycle box 14RT-970# 1 750,000 150
(including the waste toner filter)
3.4.3 Spot replacement parts list
replacement No.
cycle
1 PB Pick-up roller 55VA-484# 1 500,000 159
2 Paper feed roller 55VA-483# 1 500,000 160
3 Separation roller 55VA-483# 1 500,000 160
4 Cover paper pick up clutch 56AA8201# 1 3,000,000 161
5 PF (PP-701) Pick-up roller A08R5621# 1 50,000 61,66,71
6 Paper feed roller A08R5622# 1 50,000 62,67,72
7 Separation roller A08R5622# 1 50,000 62,67,72
2 35
3.5 Maintenance procedure
Caution:
/1050e/1050eP
• When replacing periodically replaced parts, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body
from the power outlet.
3.5.1 External section

A. Replacing the ozone filters /A, /K and the conveyance suction filter
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Ozone filter /A: Every 4,500,000 prints
• Ozone filter /K: Every 4,500,000 prints
• Conveyance suction filter: Every 4,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the exhaust
[1] cover [2].
[2]
1050fs2053c
2. Remove 2 ozone filters /A [1] and the ozone filter

[1]
/K [2], and the conveyance suction filter [3].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[2] steps in reverse.
[3]
1050fs2054c
36

B. Replacing the developing suction filter
• Developing suction filter: Every 4,500,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the filter cover
[2].
[1]
[2] 1050fs2055c
2. Remove the developing suction filter [1].

[1] 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
1050fs2056c
37
3.5.2 Photo conductor section

A. Removing/reinstalling the photo conductor section
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When the drum section has been removed, be sure to store it in a dark place with the drum cover
provided.
• When removing/reinstalling the photo conductor section, be careful not to rotate the drum in any
direction other than the specified direction. Rotating it in the opposite direction to the rotational
direction while printing may cause damage to the cleaning blade.
• When removing/reinstalling the photo conductor section, be absolutely sure not to touch the drum
claw.
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.
[1]
2. Bring down lever A of the ADU.
(See P.112)
3. Loosen 3 screws [1] and remove the photo con-
ductor section cover [2].
[2]
1050fs2089c
4. Remove screw [1].

[3] [2]
5. Loosen screw [2] and pull out the intermediate
toner hopper [3].
[1]
1050fs2090c
38

6. Release the lock [1] and open the intermediate
[2]
toner hopper [2].
1050e/1050eP
[1]
1050fs2091c
7. Remove the 2 screws [1].

[1] 8. Remove the screw [2], pull the knob [3] toward
you and lock the toner recycle pipe [4] while rais-
ing it up in the arrow-marked direction.
[4]
[3] [2] 1050fs2092c
9. Remove the screw [1] and pull out the coupling

[5]
[2].
10. Hold the sections marked with [3] and [4] and
pull out the photo conductor section [5].
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• For reinstallation of the coupling, see "B.
Cleaning/reinstallation of the coupling" in the
next section.
[3] [1] [2] [4] 1050fs2093c
39
B. Cleaning/reinstallation of the coupling
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• Be sure to conduct this operation when removing the photo conductor section.
(1) Procedure
1. Clean the periphery of the coupling with drum
[1]
cleaner.
2. Insert the coupling so that the protrusions [2] of
the coupling [1] get into the depressed portions
[2] [4] of the drum [3].
NOTE
• An detent [5] is provided on the inside of the
coupling [1]. So be sure to set it into the key
groove [7] of the drum shaft [6].
[4]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[5] fs503fs2094c
40

3. While attaching a plus driver lightly to the cou-
pling [1], rotate the coupling [1] clockwise until its
meshing surface fits the external surface of the
1050e/1050eP
bearing [2].
[1] [2]
1050fs2420c
4. Tighten the coupling [2] with the screw [1].
[2]
[1] 1050fs2095c
41
C. Replacing the charger unit
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• When removing the charger unit, be careful not to touch the mesh portion of the charger control
plate with bear hands.
• When cleaning the charger control plate, blow off dirt with the blower brush.

• Charger unit: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Pull the photo conductor section out of the main
body. (See P.38)
[3]
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the
wiring harness of the charger from the harness
clamps [2] at the 3 places.
3. Hold the portions marked with [3] and [4] and
[2]
remove the charger unit [5].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[5]
[4]
1050fs2096c
42

D. Replacing the charger control plate
• Charger control plate: Every 750,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the charger unit.
(See P.42)
2. Slide the lever [1] in the arrow-marked direction
[2] to release the lock [3] and remove the charger
[4] control plate [4].
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid loosening or removing the
screw [5] that fastens the lever.

steps in reverse.
[3]
[4] [5]
[1]
[2] 1050fs2104c
43
E. Replacing the charger wire/charger vibration proof rubber

• Charger wire: Every 750,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
• Charger vibration proof rubber: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the charger unit. (See P.42)
[2] [5]
2. Remove the charger control plate. (See P.43)
3. Remove the spark arrester plates /Fr [1] and /Rr
[2].
4. Remove the springs [3], one each, and then
remove the charger wires [4] and the charger
vibration proof rubber [5], one each.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the charger wire, be sure to
insert each of the wires into the cut [6] of the
[6] charger vibration proof rubber.
[5] [4] • Be sure to reinstall the charger wires so that
the hook [7] of each spring turns to the inside.

steps in reverse.
[7] [1]
[4] [3] [7] 1050fs2105c
44

F. Replacing the charger cleaning unit/C-clip
• Charger cleaning unit: Every 750,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
• C-clip: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the charger unit.(See P.42)
[4]
2. Remove the charger control plate. (See P.43)
3. Remove the charger wire. (See P.44)
4. Remove the C-clip [3], one each, from the shaft
[3]
[2] of the charger cleaning unit [1].
[2] 5. Reverse the charger unit [4] and remove the 2
charger cleaning units.
6. Remove the collar [5] from the shaft of each of
the charger cleaning units.
7. When the charger back plate is stained, clean it
with drum cleaner and a cleaning pad.
[4]
[1] NOTE
• Be careful that the collar inserted into the
[6] shaft of the charger cleaning unit does not
drop off.
• Be sure to reinstall the charger cleaning unit
so that the marking "F" [6] turns in the same
direction as shown in the drawing.

steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
[5] 1050fs2106c
1 45
G. Replacing the drum temperature sensor

• Drum temperature sensor: Every 3,000,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the photo conductor section.(See P.38)
2. Remove the charger unit. (See P.42)
[2]
3. Remove 2 connectors [1] and then remove the
wiring harness from the wiring harness clamp.
NOTE
• Take note of the direction of the connector to
be removed.
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor sup-

[3] port stay assembly [3].
[1]
[2] [1] 1050fs2097c
46

5. Disconnect the connector [1].
[3]
6. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the drum
temperature sensor [3].
1050e/1050eP
steps in reverse.
[1] [2] 1050fs2098c
47
H. Replacing the drum/cleaning of the photo conductor section
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• Be careful not to touch or damage the drum and the cleaning blade with bare hands.
• When storing the drum, be sure to store it in dark place with the drum cover attached.
• When reinstalling the drum, the cleaning blade and the toner guide brush, be sure to apply setting
powder all around the drum and the cleaning blade regardless of these parts being new or used
ones.
• When the drum is applied with setting powder, be sure to conduct the following operations before
installing the photo conductor section to the main body:
1) With the charger and the developing section removed, rotate the drum one full turn (to prevent
splashing of setting powder to the charger and prevent the image from getting blurred).
2) When installing a new drum, be sure to reset the photo conductor counter in the service mode.
If not reset, image fogging and toner splash may result.(See P.350)

• Drum: 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours drive, whichever is earlier
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the photo conductor section.
[1]
(See P.38)
2. Remove the charger unit.
(See P.42)
3. Remove the sensor support stay assembly.
(See P.46)
4. Remove the developing unit.
(See P.53)
5. Remove the cleaning section.
(See P.72)
6. Remove the drum [1].
1050fs2099c
48

7. Clean toner adhered around the drum installation
section [1] and the developing suction duct [2].
8. Clean the maximum density sensor [3] and the
1050e/1050eP
gamma sensor [4] on the toner control sensor
board (TCSB) with a cleaning pad.
[3] [4]
[1] [2] 1050fs2100c
9. Clean toner in the recycle pipe [1] and on the

toner receiving plate [2] with a vacuum cleaner.
NOTE
• When cleaning toner with a vacuum cleaner,
be sure to turn the shutter section [3] in the
arrow-marked direction.
• When cleaning the recycle pipe, be sure to tap
the pipe softly to let toner that adheres to the
inner wall drop off, and then rotate the gear
[4] to discharge the toner.
[4] [1] [2] [3] 1050fs2400c

steps in reverse.
49
I. Replacing the drum claw
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• When reinstalling the drum claw, take note of the direction and position of the claw.

• Drum claw: Every 1,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the photo conductor section.(See P.38)
[4] [3]
2. Remove the cleaning unit. (See P.72)
3. Remove the drum. (See P.48)
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the
spring [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the drum
claw unit [4].
[1] [3] [2] 1050fs2101c
50

NOTE
[3] • When reinstalling the drum claw unit [1], be
sure to set the projection [2] of the drum claw
1050e/1050eP
unit to the guide hole [4] of the photo conduc-
tor section [3].
[4]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2102c
51
6. Remove the C-clip [1], pull out the shaft [2] in the
[3]
arrow-marked direction and remove the 3 drum
claws [3].
/1050e/1050eP
7. Remove the springs [4], one each, from each of

the dram claws.
[2]
NOTE
• When reinstalling the drum claws, be sure to
clean the shaft with drum cleaner and a
cleaning pad. Reinstalling the separation
claws with toner adhered causes the opera-
tion to slow down.
• When reinstalling the drum claws, be sure to
insert the C-clip between the ribs [5].
[3]
• After reinstalling the dram claws, check to
see if they move smoothly.

[1]
steps in reverse.
[5] 1050fs2103c
52

3.5.3 Developing section
A. Replacing the suction filter
1050e/1050eP
• Suction filter: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2]
body.
(See P.38)
2. Open the cover of the developing suction assem-
[1]
bly [1].
3. Remove the suction filter [2].
4. Clean the outside and the inside of the develop-
ing suction assembly with the cleaner.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the suction filter, be sure to
expand the filter opening before installation.
1050fs2107c
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the cover
of the developing suction assembly has been
closed thoroughly.

steps in reverse.
B. Replacing the developing suction assembly

• Developing suction assembly: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
body.
(See P.38)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the
developing suction assembly [2].
steps in reverse.
[1] 1050fs2108c
53
C. Cleaning of the developing unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
/1050e/1050eP
body.
(See P.38)
2. Remove the developing suction assembly.
(See P.53)
3. Remove the developing unit.
(See P.55)
4. Remove the developing unit cover /1.
(See P.55)
5. Clean up the developer regulation blade [1], the
[3] underside of the developing roller [2] and both
[3] [2] 1050fs2401c
sides of the developer roller [3] with a vacuum
cleaner.
NOTE
• Be careful not vacuum too much developer
necessarily. Cleaning should be restricted
only to stained sections.
• Be careful not to bend the lower sheet.
6. Clean up the rear side of the developing unit

[1]
cover /1 [1] with a vacuum cleaner.
7. Clean up the suction duct [2] of the developing
unit cover /1 with a vacuum cleaner.
steps in reverse.
[2]
1050fs2402c
54 2

D. Replacing the developing unit
• Developing unit: Every 6,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
body.
(See P.38)
(See P.53)
3. Release the developing pressure lever [2] while
holding down the right side [1] of the developing
unit.
NOTE
• When releasing the developing pressure lever,
[2] [1] 1050fs2109c
be careful not to touch the front panel and the
rear panel of the photo conductor section.
4. Hold the sections [1] and [2] with both hands and
remove the developing unit [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
1050fs2110c
55
NOTE
• When reinstalling the developer unit, make
sure that the developing unit stopper roller [1]
/1050e/1050eP
is in contact with the developing unit stopper

plate [2]. (DS secured)
• When the developing unit stopper roller is too
[2] easily rotated, remove it once and then rein-
stall it.
[1] [1]
1050fs2116c

steps in reverse.
[2] NOTE
• When reinstalling the developer unit, be care-
ful that the front panel of the photo conductor
section does not come into contact with the
developing roller [1].
[1] 1050fs2111c
• Never rotate the developing gear to the
arrow-marked direction [2].
56 1

E. Replacing the developer
NOTE
[2]
1050e/1050eP
• When replacing the developer, be careful that
dirt does not get into it.
• When rotating the developing roller [1], be
sure to rotate the developing gear to the
arrow-marked direction [2] with the flat blade
driver.
• When putting in new developer, be sure to
reset the developer counter in the service
mode. If not reset, image fogging and toner
[1] splash may result. (See P.350)
1050fs2112c

• Developer: 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours drive, whichever is earlier
(2) Procedure
[4] body.
[2]
(See P.38)
(See P.53)
[3] 3. Remove the developing unit.
(See P.55)
[1] 4. Release 2 hooks [1] and remove the developing
1050fs2113c
unit cover /1 [2].
5. Release 2 hooks [3] and remove the developing
unit cover /2 [4].
1 57
6. With the developing unit [1] tilted to about 45°

[4] [2]
[2], rotate the developing gear to the arrow-
marked direction [3] with a flat blade screwdriver
/1050e/1050eP
[1] to discharge the developer [4] in the developing

unit thoroughly.
7. Use cleaner to clean the developer adhered to
the developing roller.
NOTE
• Any used developer remaining in the develop-
ing roller may cause gray background to the
image.
[3]
1050fs2114c
8. Pour new developer [1] evenly from above the

[3]
mixing screw [2].
9. Rotate the developing gear [5] counterclockwise
[4]
so that the developer gets fully into the develop-
ing unit [4].
10. Repeat the steps 8 and 9 to pour the developer
completely.
[1] 11. Rotate the developing gear counterclockwise
[5] and check the height of developer across the
entire developing roller [6].
[2] [6] 12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
1050fs2115c
steps in reverse.
58 1

3.5.4 Toner supply section
A. Replacing/cleaning of the toner bottle
(1) Procedure
1050e/1050eP
1. Open the toner supply door [1] and pull out the
[3]
toner supply cover /A assembly [2].
2. Remove the toner bottle [3].
[1]
[2] 1050fs2004c
3. Clean around the toner bottle insertion opening

[1]
[1] with a blower brush and a vacuum cleaner.
steps in reverse.
1050fs2005c
59
B. Replacing the agitator plate assembly

• Agitator plate assembly /1: Every 1,500,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
• Agitator plate assembly /2: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.
[2]
2. Bring down the lever A of the ADU.(See P.112)
3. Remove the cover on the photo conductor sec-
tion and pull out the intermediate toner hopper to
open it.(See P.38)
4. Close up the connection opening [1] of the inter-
mediate toner hopper with a cleaning pad [2].
5. Attach the toner recovery bag [4] beneath the
shutter section [3] connected to the developing
unit.
NOTE
• For the toner recovery bag, use a paper bag
made by folding a sheet of paper, or a vinyl
bag. Be sure to fix it at an appropriate place
so that toner does not spill over. And also,
[3] [4] [1] 1050fs2783c
make sure that the bag does not come down
by the toner's own weight.
• The intermediate toner hopper contains toner
about half as much as the volumetric capacity
of the hopper. Be sure to set up a bag that
accommodates of the entire toner amount.
6. Enter 54-00 in "I/O check mode" in the service

[3] [2] [5] [4]
mode and press the start button.
7. Insert the connecting shutter [1] fully deep and
open it to discharge toner in the hopper. (This
takes about 5 minutes.)
NOTE
• While discharging, be sure to rotate the gear
[2] several times in the arrow-marked direc-
tion [3] once in a while so that toner that is
above the agitator plate assembly is dis-
charged.
• When rotating the gear [2] and no more toner
is discharged, it is considered that almost all
toner has been recovered.
• Be sure to avoid sucking toner in the interme-
[1] [6] 1050fs2784c
diate toner hopper with a vacuum cleaner.
Using a cleaner may cause damage electro-
statically to the toner remaining sensor /1
(PS31).
60 2

8. Press the stop button.
[2] [1]
9. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the inter-
mediate toner hopper cover assembly [2] in the
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• The intermediate toner hopper cover assem-
bly [5] will also be adhered with toner. Be
careful that it does not scatter.
[3] 1050fs2802c
10. Rotate the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction

[1] [2]
until 2 screws [3] that hold the agitator plate
assembly [2] turns up.
NOTE
• At this time, the sheet of the agitator plate
assembly /1 jumps up. Be sure to cover about
half of it with paper so that toner does not
scatter.
11. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the agita-

tor plate assembly /1 [2].
NOTE
[5] [3] [4] 1050fs2785c
• Be sure not to rotate the gear [1] after remov-
ing the agitator plate assembly /1. Rotating it
may cause a phase lag with the agitator plate
assembly /2 [5], thus making it impossible to
detect the remaining amount of toner prop-
erly.
2 61
12. Remove the two screw [1] and remove the stir-
[2]
ring plate /2 assembly [2].
/1050e/1050eP
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• The recovered toner may get mixed with
impurities. Be sure to dispose of it, do not put
it back in the intermediate toner hopper.
[1]
1050fs5101c
62 2

C. Replacing the toner supply sleeves /1 and /2
• Toner supply sleeve /1: Every 3,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
• Toner supply sleeve /2: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover.(See P.250)
[1] 2. Open the front doors /Rt [1] and /Lt [2] and the
toner supply door [3].
3. Remove the toner bottle [4]. (See P.59)
[2] 4. Remove the toner supply door. (See P.254)
5. Replace the toner supply cover /A assembly [5].
[4]
[3]
[5] 1050fs2006c
6. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the toner

[1] [2] [1]
supply protective assembly [2].
7. Pull out the toner supply cover /A assembly [3]
until the lock is released.
NOTE
• If the toner supply cover /A assembly [3] is
set, the lock section [5] remains in contact
when the toner supply lock assembly [4] is
removed. Be sure to pull out the toner supply
cover /A assembly [3].
8. Remove 2 screws [6].

10. Pull out tray /2.
11. Remove the toner supply lock assembly [4].
[7] [5] [3] [4] [6] 1050fs2007c
63
12. Remove 2 connectors [1] and the wiring harness

from the wiring harness clamp.
/1050e/1050eP
[1] 1050fs2008c
13. Release 2 hose clamps [1] and remove 2 hoses

[2] [5]
[3] from the toner feed case [2].
NOTE
• Keep each of the released hose clamps [1]
near the connecting opening of each hose [3].
• When the hose [3] is removed from the toner
feed case [2], toner may spill out of each
hose. Be careful that the inside of the main
body does not get stained with toner.
• The hose connecting section of the toner feed
case [2] and the hose [3] are provided with the
[3] toner supply installation label [4] that indi-
cates the respective points to which a con-
[1] [3] nection is made. When installing each hose,
be sure to make a connection between the
points having the corresponding toner supply
installation label [4].
[2] 14. Release the cable clamp [5] and pull out the hose
[3] to the outside of the main body.
NOTE
• The hose [3] may be damaged when the toner
supply unit [6] is being removed. Be sure to
[4] [4] 1050fs2009c
pull it out to the outside of the main body.
64

15. Remove the screws [1] and [2], and pull out and
[2] [1]
remove the toner supply unit [3].
1050e/1050eP
[3] 1050fs2010c
NOTE
[1]
• When reinstalling the toner supply unit [1], be
sure to insert 2 guide pins [2] on the rear side
[4] and 2 guide pins [3] on the front side into the
respective guide holes [4] of the main body
frame.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2] 1050fs2011c
65

supply protective plate [2].
/1050e/1050eP
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2012c
17. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cover

/Up [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2404c
66

NOTE
• When reinstalling the cover /Up [2], set the
[6]
[8] projection [5] of the cover /Lw [4] to the posi-
1050e/1050eP
tioning hole [3] of the cover /Up [2] and then
insert the projection [6] of the cover /Up [2]
into the slit [8] of the drive board [7].
[7]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5]
1050fs2013c
67
18. Remove the toner supply sleeves /1 [1].

19. Push the coupling in the arrow-marked direction
[2] and remove the toner supply sleeve /2 [3].
/1050e/1050eP
[3]
[1]
[2] 1050fs2014c
NOTE
[1] [2]
• Be sure to reinstall the toner supply sleeves /1
[1] and /2 [2] in the direction as shown in the
drawing.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After completion of disassembly/assembly of
the toner supply unit, be sure to select the
code 54-09 (rotation of the toner pump motor
(M28) and the air pump motor (M29)) in the I/O
check mode of the service mode and then
press the start button.
When toner drops off into the mixing section
due to the vibration of the disassembly/
assembly, this may cause the codes SC23-14
and SC23-17. (See chapter III "4.6.1 G.
Removing toner from the toner mixing sec-
tion" in the Field Service for the main body.)
[1] [2] 1050fs2015c
68

D. Replacing the pump units /Lt and /Rt
• Pump unit /Lt: Every 10,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
• Pump unit /Rt: Every 10,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover and the upper covers /
Rr1 and /Rr2.(See P.250)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the exte-
rior mounting plate [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] 1050fs2016c
69
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].

[2] [1] [3] [5]
[4] from the pump unit /Rt [3].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When the hose [4] is removed from the pump
unit /Rt [3], the toner may spill out of each
body does not get stained with the toner.
• The hose connecting section of the pump unit
/Rt [3] and the hose [4] are provided with the
toner supply installation label [5] that indi-
[5] nection is made. When installing each hose,
[5] [4] 1050fs2017c
5. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].

[3] [1] [2]
[4] from the pump unit /Lt [3].
NOTE
• When the hose [4] is removed from the pump
unit /Lt [3], the toner may spill out of each
body does not get stained with the toner.
• The hose connecting section of the pump unit
/Lt [3] and the hose [4] are provided with the
toner supply installation label [5] that indi-
nection is made. When installing each hose,
[5] [4] [5] 1050fs2405c
70

7. Remove the screws [1], two each, and remove
the pump unit /Lt [2] and the pump unit /Rt [3].
[3]
1050e/1050eP
[2] NOTE
[1]
• When reinstalling each pump unit, be sure to
[1] insert the toner supply spacer [4] between the
attaching surfaces.

steps in reverse.
[4] [4] 1050fs2018c
71
3.5.5 Cleaning/toner recycle section

A. Removing/reinstalling the cleaning section
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid touching the edge of the cleaning blade with bare hands.
• Before reinstalling the cleaning section, be sure to clean the cleaning section with a blower brush
and a cleaning pad.
• When reinstalling the cleaning section, be sure to apply setting powder to the entire periphery of
the drum and the cleaning blade regardless of these parts being new or used ones.
• When the drum is applied with setting powder, be sure conduct the following operations before
installing the photo conductor section to the main body:
1) To obtain an accurate toner density, clean setting powder splashed onto the gamma sensor
and the maximum density sensor on the toner control sensor board (TCSB) with a cleaning pad
soaked in drum cleaner.
2) With the charger unit and the developing unit removed, rotate the drum one full turn (for splash
prevention of setting powder to the charger and prevention against the image getting blurred).
(1) Procedure
1. Rotate the drum one full turn by hand.
NOTE
• Be sure to rotate the drum one full turn to pre-
[7]
vent the toner on the guide brush inside the
cleaning section from falling down.

body. (See P.38)
3. Release the 2 levers [1] that holding the cleaning
[1]
section.
4. Remove the connector [2], remove the wiring
harness from the clamp [3] and then remove the
cleaning section [4].
[4]
NOTE
• When removing the cleaning section, be sure
[3] to move it along the ribs [5] of the photo con-
[2] ductor section with the opposite side of the
drum contacting section slanted to about 15°.
When reinstalling it, be sure to set the refer-
ence pin [6] of the photo conductor section to
the notch [7] of the cleaning section.

[5] steps in reverse.
[6] 1050fs2117c
72

B. Replacing the cleaning blade
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• When replacing the cleaning blades, be sure to replace 2 blades at the same time.

• Cleaning blade: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
body. (See P.38)
2. Remove the cleaning section. (See P.72)
[1] 3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the
cleaning blade /2 [2].
4. Reinstall a new cleaning blade /2.
[2] 1050fs2119c
73
5. With the blade release arm [1] raised in the

arrow-marked direction [2], rotate the blade
replacement lever [3] in the arrow-marked direc-
/1050e/1050eP
tion [4] to turn the cleaning blade /2.
[2]
NOTE
• Be sure to keep the blade release arm raised
[1] up, do not let go of it.
[3]
[4]
1050fs2120c
74

6. Bring down the blade release arm [1] in the
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
[1]
• Be sure to keep hold of the blade replacement
lever [3] being rotated, do not let go of it.
[2]
7. Release the hand that is holding the blade

replacement lever.
[3]
1050fs2121c

cleaning blade /1 [2].
9. Install a new cleaning blade /1.
[1] 10. Remove toner adhered to the lower [3] and
upper [4] blade sides of the cleaning section with
a cleaning pad.
[4]
[3] [2] 1050fs2503c
75
11. Reinstall the parts after that following the removal

[2]
steps in reverse.
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• After replacing the cleaning blades /1 and /2,
be sure to check to see if the blade replace-
ment lever [1] has been pulled.
• After replacing the cleaning blades /1 and /2,
be sure to conduct the blade set mode in the
service mode to prevent the blade from curl-
ing up.(See P.346)
• Be sure to avoid using the blade set mode
other than when replacing the cleaning blade.
[1] fs503fs2153c
Otherwise, the cleaning blade count of the
fixed parts count is reset so that the blade is
not replaced automatically at the correct tim-
ing.
76

C. Cleaning/replacing the toner seal board
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
(1) Periodic cleaning cycle

• Toner seal board: Every 750,000 prints

• Toner seal board: Every 3,000,000 prints
(3) Procedure
[4] [6] [5]
body. (See P.38)
3. Remove the screws [1] and [2], and then remove
the toner seal board [3].
4. Clean the sheet section [4] of the toner seal
[3] board with a blower brush and a cleaning pad.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the toner seal board, be
sure to first of all install the screw [1].
• When both sides [5] of the sheet section of
the toner seal board get inside of the toner
guide brush [6], an overflow toner may result.
On such an occasion, a correction should be
made so that the warp of the sheet section
[2]
[1] [3] 1050fs2122c
becomes parallel to the toner guide brush or
it turns a little to this side (less than 1 mm).

steps in reverse.
77
D. Replacing the toner guide brush/scattering prevention felt/seal plate
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• When reinstalling the toner guide brush, apply setting powder uniformly with the toner guide brush
removed.
• Be absolutely sure to avoid touching the brush section of the toner guide brush with bare hands.
Also, be careful that the brush section does not come in direct contact with other objects.

• Toner guide brush: Every 1,500,000 prints
• Scattering prevention felt: Every 1,500,000 prints
• Seal plate /Fr: Every 1,500,000 prints
• Seal plate /Rr: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2]
body. (See P.38)
3. Remove the toner seal board.(See P.77)
4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the seal
plate /Fr [2].
5. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the seal
plate /Rr [4].
[1]
[4]
[3]
1050fs2118c
78

6. Move the toner guide brush [1] in the order of the
arrow-marks [2] and [3] and remove it.
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When reinstalling the toner guide brush, be
sure to set the pin [6] of the toner guide brush
to the coupling slit [5] of the cleaning section
[6] [4].
7. After removal of the toner guide brush, clean up

[2] [1] the installation section of the seal plates /Fr and /
Rr by a vacuum cleaner.
[4] [3]
[5] 1050fs2123c
79
8. Remove the C-clip [3], the bearing [4], the scat-

[2]
tering prevention felt [5], the bearing fixing mem-
ber [6] and the toner prevention collar [7] in this
/1050e/1050eP
order from the shaft [2] of the toner guide brush

[3] [1].
NOTE
[1]
• Be careful that the toner prevention collar
does not get lost.

[5] [6] steps in reverse.
[4]
[7]
1050fs2124c
80

E. Replacing the toner guide plate assembly
• Cleaning gear /A assembly: 6,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
• Cleaning gear /B: 15,000,000 prints
• Toner guide plate assembly: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] body. (See P.38)
[5] [1] 3. Remove the toner seal board. (See P.77)
4. Remove the seal plate. (See P.78)
5. Remove the E-rings [1], one each, and then
remove 2 cleaning mounting lever collars [2].
6. Remove the screws [3] (B tight M3 x 8) and [4]
[4]
(TPM3 x 6) and then remove the drive reinforcing
plate [5].
[3] [2] [1] 1050fs2125c

NOTE
• When installing the drive reinforcing plate, be
careful not to confuse the screw [3] with the
screw [4].
• When installing the drive reinforcing plate, be
sure to tighten the screw [3] and the screw [4]
in this order after fastening each of the clean-
ing mounting lever collar with the E-ring.
7. Remove the cleaning gear /A assembly [1].
[1] 1050fs2423d
2 81
8. Remove the E-ring [2] from the toner guide shaft

[4][5] [3] [2] [1]
[1], and remove the cleaning gear /B [3].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• While removing the cleaning gear /A assembly
or the cleaning gear/B [3], the bearing [4] and
the splash prevention felt [5] may come off. If
the felt become detached, make sure to
replace it with a new one.
1050fs2424d
9. Remove the E-ring [2] from the toner guide shaft

[2] [1]
[1].
1050fs2425d
10. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the bearing

[1] [2] [3] [2].
11. Pull out the toner guide shaft [3] to remove it.
1050fs2426d
82 2

NOTE
[1][2]
• When reinstalling the toner guide shaft, be
sure to insert it while holding it down from the
1050e/1050eP
outside so that the bearing [1] does not come
off.
• If the bearing and the splash prevention felt
[2] become detached while inserting the toner
guide shaft, make sure to replace the splash
prevention felt with a new one.
1050fs2427d
2 83

[1]
guide plate assembly [2].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When reinstalling the toner guide plate
assembly, be sure to hit it against the lower
side before fixing it.
13. Clean up the exterior of the cleaning unit with a

cleaning pad and a blower brush.
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1] 1050fs2130c
84

F. Cleaning when removing the cleaning unit (when conducting maintenance work)
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• When removing the cleaning unit, be sure to clean thoroughly both the inside and the inner wall of
the cleaning unit and the recycle pipe with as little toner left as possible. When cleaning is insuffi-
cient, toner may spill over the conveyance section.
(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the photo conductor section from the
main body. (See P.38)
2. Remove the cleaning section.(See P.72)
3. Remove the toner seal board.(See P.77)
4. Remove the toner guide brush/seal plates Fr and
Rr.(See P.78)
5. Tap the casing [1] section softly to let the recy-
cled toner adhering to the inner wall drop off.
[1] 1050fs2431c
6. Rotate the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction

to discharge toner to the outside.
7. Repeat the steps 5 and 6 until there is no toner
discharged. And finally, clean the inside with a
vacuum cleaner.
[1] 1050fs2432c
8. Tap the recycle pipe softly to let the recycled toner

adhering to the inner wall drop off into the pipe.
9. Rotate the gear [1] of the recycle screw counter-
clockwise and open the shutter section [2] to dis-
charge toner.
10. Repeat the steps 8 and 9 until there is no toner
discharged.
11. Clean the cleaning unit mounting place (photo
conductor section) with a vacuum cleaner.
NOTE
• When cleaning it with a vacuum cleaner, be
[1] [2] 1050fs2433c
careful that the vacuum cleaner does not
come into contact with drum.

steps in reverse.
85
3.5.6 Paper feed section

A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• The pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly are CMS corresponding parts.
(1) Procedure
NOTE
• The method for replacing the pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly is the same for
tray /1 and tray /2. The explanation here is given for tray /1.
• After completion of the installation, rotate the pick-up roller in the direction of the paper feed
(counterclockwise as seen from the front) to check to see if the paper feed roller, the belt and the
coupling section rotate smoothly. The rotation of the pick-up roller is restricted only to the direc-
tion of the paper feed (counterclockwise as seen from the front) and be absolutely sure not to turn
it clockwise.
• Be sure to take note that the direction of the pick-up roller is different for the main body and the
PF.
1. When the power switch is off, open the toner

supply door.
2. Raise up the tray lock lever [1] lightly and pull out
[2] the tray [2].
[1]
1050fs2700c
86

3. Rotate the pick-up roller [1] in the arrow-marked
[2] [3]
direction (counterclockwise as seen from the
front) and place the coupling [2] in the longitudi-
1050e/1050eP
nal direction.
[1]
NOTE
• The rotation of the pick-up roller [1] is
restricted only to the arrow-marked direction
(counterclockwise). It does not rotate in the
reverse direction (counterclockwise). So, be
sure not to turn it in this direction forcibly.
1050fs2701c
4. Remove 2 C-clips [3].
5. Remove the bearing /Fr [1].

[2] 6. Slide the bearing /Rr [2] to the rear side.
NOTE
• When installing the bearing /Fr [1], /Rr [2],
insert it in the notch [5] of the metal frame
while pressing down a little the metal frame
[1]
[3] of the pick-up roller assembly to make
level the flat portion [4] of the bearing /Rr [2].
And then insert the bearing /Fr [1] in the same
manner as with the bearing /Rr.
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3]
1050fs2702c
87
7. Hold the pick-up roller assembly [1] by hand and

lift the paper feed roller [3] up to tilt while rotating
it around the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller, and
/1050e/1050eP
[7] then remove it from the notch [4] of the bearing

and the coupling [5].
NOTE
• When removing the pick-up roller [1], be care-
ful not to damage the sensor [7] with the
metal frame [6].
[5] [3]
[6]
[4]
[2] [1] 1050fs2703c
88

8. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm
[1] of the paper feed guide plate and then remove
[3] the pick-up roller assembly [3].
1050e/1050eP
[2]
[1]
[3]
1050fs2704c
9. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the

[2]
entrance guide plate [2].
[1] 1050fs2705c
89

[2]
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• When reinstalling it, fasten it with the screws

while pressing down the separation roller
assembly [2].
[1] 1050fs2706c
11. After pulling out the front side of the separation

roller assembly [1], remove the coupling [2] in the
rear from the joint [3].
[3]
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, be sure to engage the
coupling pin [2] with the joint [3] before instal-
lation.
[2]

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After completion of the installation, hold the
[1]
pick-up roller lightly and rotate it in the direc-
tion of the paper feed (counterclockwise as
seen from the front) to check to see if the
paper feed roller, the belt and the coupling
section rotate smoothly. (The rotation of the
pick-up roller is restricted only to the direc-
tion of the paper feed (counterclockwise as
1050fs2707c
seen from the front) and be absolutely sure
not to turn it clockwise.)
90

B. Replacing the pick-up roller/paper feed roller
• Pick-up roller: Every 2,250,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 500,000 prints)
1050e/1050eP
• Paper feed roller: Every 2,250,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 500,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
NOTE
• The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the paper feed roller and the separation roller.
However, a one-way mechanism is provided on the inside of the collar of the paper feed roller with
no mechanism provided for the separation roller. Be careful not to confuse one with the other.
1. Remove the pick-up roller assembly.

2. Remove the C-clip [1], remove the coupling bear-
ing [2] and then remove the mounting bracket [3].
[2]
[1] [3] 1050fs2708
3. Pull out the shaft [3] from the collar [1] and
remove the pick-up roller [2] from the collar [1].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, take note of the direction
of the pick-up roller. Be sure to insert the col-
lar [1] from the side provided with the groove
[4].
[3] [1] [2]
[4]
1050fs2709c
91
4. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the collar [2]
[2] [3]
and the paper feed roller [3].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
of the paper feed roller. Be sure to insert the
collar [2] from the side provided with the
groove [4].

steps in reverse.
[4] [3]
[2]
1050fs2710c
92

C. Replacing the separation roller
• Separation roller: Every 2,250,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 500,000 prints)
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
NOTE
• The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the separation roller and the paper feed roller.
However, a one-way mechanism is provided on the inside of the collar of the paper feed roller with
no mechanism provided for the separation roller. Be careful not to confuse one with the other.
1. Remove the separation roller assembly.

[1] 2. Remove the C-clip [1], slide the shaft and remove
the separation roller [3] together with the shaft
[2].
[3]
[2] 1050fs2711c
3. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separa-
[1] [4] [5] [3] [2]
tion roller [4] from the shaft [1] in the arrow-
marked direction and remove them.
NOTE
of the separation roller. Be sure to insert it
into the shaft [2] from the side provided with
the groove [5].
• The outward appearance is identical for the
collar [6] of the separation roller and the col-
[6] [7] lar [7] of the paper feed roller. However, the
one-way mechanism is provided on the inside
of the collar [7] of the paper feed roller with
[8] no mechanism provided for the collar [6] of
the separation roller. Be careful not to con-
fuse one with the other.

steps in reverse.
1050fs2712c
93
D. Removing/reinstalling the tray
Caution:
/1050e/1050eP
• The tray is heavy. Be sure to conduct this operation with two people.
NOTE
• The procedure for removing/reinstalling the trays /1 to /2 is identical. The explanation here is made
of the tray /1.
• When raising up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified positions. Holding it at positions other
than those specified may cause damage to the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
(1) Procedure
1. Open the toner supply door.
2. Lightly raise up the tray lock lever [1] and pull out
the tray [2].
[2] 3. When paper remains in the tray, take it all out.
[1]
1050fs2715c
94

4. Remove the stopper screws [2], one each, pro-
[2] [1]
vided at either side of the rail [1] and pull the tray
further out.
1050e/1050eP
[2]
1050fs2716c
95
5. Remove the screws [1], one each, provided at

[1] [2] [4] [3]
either side of he rail, hold the tray [2] at the spec-
ified positions [3] and raise it up to remove it.
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When raising up the tray, be sure to hold it at
the specified positions [3] and raise it up with
two persons.
• Be absolutely sure to avoid holding it at posi-
tions [4] that can be easily deformed. This
may affect the paper tray, thus resulting in a
[3] [1] jam.
• When reinstalling it, be sure to check to see if
the knobs [5] provided at the 4 places on the
rail are securely in the notches [6] of the tray.

steps in reverse.
[5] [6] 1050fs2717c
96

E. Replacing the paper feed clutch/separation clutch
• Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6): Every 15,000,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 3,000,000
1050e/1050eP
prints)
• Separation clutch /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7): Every 15,000,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 3,000,000
prints)
1. Remove the rail stopper screw of the tray and

[1] [2] pull out the tray.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the clutch
cover [2].
1050fs2713c
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove the 2

[4] [7]
wire binding bands [2].
4. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the paper
[3] feed clutch [4] and the separation clutch [5].
NOTE
[6]
[5] • When reinstalling it, be sure to engage the
[6] stopper [6] of the clutch with the stopper sec-
tion [7].
[7]

steps in reverse.
[2]
[1] 1050fs2714c
97
3.5.7 Vertical conveyance section

A. Removing/reinstalling the vertical conveyance unit
(1) Procedure
/1050e/1050eP
1. Remove the right cover.

[2] [1] [3] 2. Pull the knob [1] and remove the paper dust
guide holder [2].
NOTE
• The roller may get stained with paper dust
that has gathered in the paper dust guide
[4] holder [2]. Be sure to remove it when remov-
[4] ing the vertical conveyance unit.

4. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove the verti-
[5] [6] cal conveyance unit [5].
NOTE
• When placing the vertical conveyance unit, be
sure to place it with the jam open/close door
side down. Placing it with the roller side down
1050fs2732c
may cause damage to the gear [6]. When
placing it with the roller side down, be sure to
remove 2 gears [6].

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• Pulling out the main body tray with the verti-
cal conveyance unit removed may damage
the guide roller that brings down forcibly the
pick-up roller of the main body tray. Be abso-
lutely sure not to pull out the main body tray
with the vertical conveyance unit removed.
• When reinstalling it, be sure to move the verti-
cal conveyance unit [5] to the rear side and
tighten it up with the screws [4].
98

B. Replacing the pre-registration clutch/vertical conveyance clutch
• Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3): Every 4,500,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 3,000,000
1050e/1050eP
prints)
• Vertical conveyance clutch (CL2): Every 4,500,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 3,000,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
[2] 2. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (See P.98)
3. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove 2 gears
[2].
NOTE
of the gears.
[1]
1050fs2733c
4. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the 3

[4] [5] [3] [6] wire binding bands [2].
5. Remove 3 C-clips [3] and then remove the pre-
registration clutch /1 (CL1) [4], the vertical con-
veyance clutch (CL2) [5], and the pre-registration
clutch /2 (CL3) [6].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, set the stopper [7] of the
[8] [7] [1] [2] clutch to the screw [8].

steps in reverse.
1050fs2734c
99
C. Replacing the pre-registration roller /1, /2, the registration bearing and the conveyance rollers /2
and /3
/1050e/1050eP
• Pre-registration roller /1 and /2: Every 10,000,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 6,000,000 prints)
• Pre-registration bearing /1 and /2: Every 10,000,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 6,000,000 prints)
• Conveyance roller /2: Every 10,000,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 6,000,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
[4] [2] [6] 2. Remove the vertical conveyance unit.(See P.98)
3. Remove the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1)
[4]
[5] and /2 (CL3) and the vertical conveyance clutch
(CL2). (See P.99)
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and the connector
[2], and remove the wire binding bands [3] at the
[3] 5 places.
5. Remove 4 screws [4] (one each at either side of
each roller) and then remove the roller covers /1
[5] and /2 [6].
[7] [3] [1]
NOTE
[8] • Be careful that no damage is caused to the
sensor.
• When removing the roller covers /1 [5] and /2
[9] [6], be sure to pull up the upper side.
• When reinstalling the roller covers /1 [5] and /
2 [6], be sure to set the grooves at both sides
to the projection [8] and then press it lightly in
the direction of the paper through slit [9].
1050fs2735c
100

6. Remove the E-rings [1], one each provided at the
[4]
4 places, the bearings [2], one each, the pre-reg-
istration roller /1 [3] and the pre-registration roller
1050e/1050eP
/2 [4].
NOTE
[3] • When removing and reinstalling the pre-regis-
tration rollers /1 [3] and /2 [4], be careful that
they are not damaged by the corners of the
guide plate.
[1] • When reinstalling the bearing [2], be sure to
raise the conveyance guide plate so that it is
in the jam release condition.
[2]
1050fs2736c

[2] [2].
[1] 1050fs2738c
101
8. Remove 2 E-rings [1], 2 belt stoppers [2], the belt

[5]
[3], 2 pulleys [4] and 2 pins [5].
/1050e/1050eP
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2739c
9. Remove the E-rings [1], one each provided at 4

[5] [4]
places, and then remove the plastic washers [2],
one each, the bearing [3], one each, the vertical
conveyance roller /2 [4] and the vertical convey-
ance roller /3 [5].
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After completion of the installation, check to
see if each roller rotates smoothly.
[3]
[1]
[2]
1050fs2740c
102

D. Replacing the conveyance roller /1
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (See P.98)
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear
[2] and the pin [3].
[1] NOTE
• When installing the E-ring [1], be careful not
to damage the teeth of the gear [2].
[2] [3]
1050fs2741c
103
4. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove 2 plastic

[4]
washers [2], 2 bearing [3] and the conveyance
roller /1 [4].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When removing and reinstalling the convey-
ance roller /1 [4], be careful that it does not
get damaged by the corners of the guide
plate.
[1] • When reinstalling the bearing [3], be sure to
raise the conveyance guide plate so that it
gets into the jam release condition.
[3]
steps in reverse.
[2]
NOTE
• After completion of the installation, check to
see if the roller rotates smoothly.
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2742c
104

E. Replacing the conveyance exit roller
• Conveyance exit roller: Every 10,000,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 6,000,000 prints)
1050e/1050eP
• Cleaning gear /A: Every 10,000,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 6,000,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
[2]
2. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (See P.98)
[2].
[1]
[1]
1050fs2743c

[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2744c
2 105
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the gear

cover [2] and the bearing [3].
/1050e/1050eP
[2] NOTE
[1]
• When installing the bearing [3], be sure to
install it from the inside to the gear cover [2].
[3]
1050fs2745c

NOTE
• The gear removed at the step 4 is different
[3]
from the one removed at the step 6. Be care-
ful not to confuse one with the other.
[2]
[2] [1]
1050fs2746c
106

7. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the
[1]
Cleaning gear /A [2].
1050e/1050eP
1050fs5103c

[2] [3]
[1]
1050fs2747c
2 107
9. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 2 wire

[1] [2] [4] [3]
binding bands [2].
10. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the sen-
/1050e/1050eP
sor mounting plate [4].
[3]
1050fs2748c
108

11. Remove 2 E-rings [1], 2 washers [2] and 2 bear-
[3] [2] [1] [1] [2] [3]
ings [3], and take out the conveyance exit roller
[4].
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When taking out the conveyance exit roller
[4], the bearing [6] of the paper dust guide
brush assembly [5] is displaced. When rein-
stalling it, be sure to get it back to the original
place.

steps in reverse.
[4] [5]
[6]
[6] 1050fs2749c
109
F. Replacing the paper dust guide brush assembly

• Paper dust guide brush assembly: Every 4,500,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 3,000,000 prints)
/1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
1. Pull the knob [1] and remove the paper dust
[1]
guide holder [2].
[2]
1050fs2750c
[2] [3]
2. Remove the screw [1] and pull out the holder [2]
from the shaft [3] of the paper dust guide brush.
[1]
1050fs2751c
110

3. Remove the shaft [1] of the paper dust guide
[1] [2]
brush assembly from the coupling [2] and then
remove the paper dust guide brush assembly
1050e/1050eP
and the bearing [4].
[3]
steps in reverse.
[4] 1050fs2752c
G. Cleaning of the paper dust guide holder

(1) Procedure
1. Pull the knob [1] and remove the paper dust
[1]
guide holder [2].
2. Clean the paper dust guide holder [2] with the air
brush.
steps in reverse.
1050fs2753c
111
3.5.8 ADU
A. Pulling out/reinstallation of the ADU
/1050e/1050eP
Caution:
• Be absolutely sure to avoid forcibly turning ON the interlock switches /1 (MS1) and /2 (MS2) with
the ADU pulled out. Otherwise, a high voltage may unexpectedly develop.
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door /Rt [1] and the front door /Lt
[2] [1] [2].
2. While pressing the lock release lever [3] with a
driver in the arrow-marked direction, pull out the
ADU and bring the lever [4] down to pull out the
ADU section [5].
3. When reinstalling it, push in the ADU and bring
up the lever that pulls out the ADU section.
[5] [4]
[3]
1050fs2001c
112

B. Cleaning of the paper dust removing brush for the registration roller /Lw
• Paper dust removing brush for the registration roller /Lw: Every 750,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU from the main body. (See P.112)
[3] 2. After sliding once the paper dust removing lever
[1] in the arrow-marked direction [2], pull out and
remove the paper dust removing brush [3] for the
registration roller /Lw.
(The picture shows the lever that has been pulled
[2] out a little.)
NOTE
• When reinstalling the paper dust removing
brush for the registration roller /Lw, be sure to
insert it fully until it hits against the back.
[1] 1050fs2131c
When the paper dust removing brush for the
registration roller /Lw is not inserted fully, this
may block the light path of detection of the
registration sensor (PS40), thus resulting in a
jam.
3. Clean the cleaning section [2] of the paper dust

[1]
removing brush [1] for the registration roller /Lw
with the blower brush.
steps in reverse.
[2] fs503fs2132c
113
C. Cleaning of the paper dust removing brush for the registration roller /Up
• Paper dust removing brush for the registration roller /Up: Every 750,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] 2. Push out the projections [1], two each, and
release the lock to remove 2 paper dust remov-
ing brushes /1 [2] and /2 [3] for the registration
roller /Up.
[3]
[1] 1050fs2133c
3. Clean each of 2 cleaning sections [2] of the

[1]
paper dust removing brush [1] for the registration
roller /Up.
steps in reverse.
[2] fs503fs2134c
114

D. Cleaning of the registration sensor
• Registration sensor: Every 750,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the fixing of the
sensor mounting piece [2].
fs503fs2135c
3. Turn over the sensor mounting piece [1] and

[2]
clean the registration sensor (PS40) [2] with the
blower brush.
steps in reverse.
[1] fs503fs2136c
115
E. Replacing the transfer/separation charger unit

• Transfer/separation charger unit: Every 6,000,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the ADU from the main body. (See P.112)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the con-
nector cover [2].
[2]
1050fs2019c
[3] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].
NOTE
• When the transfer/separation charger unit is a
PCS corresponding part (See "6.5 PCS corre-
sponding parts"), remove also the connector
[2].
4. Loosen 2 screws [3] and remove the transfer/

separation unit [4].
steps in reverse.
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] 1050fs2020c
116

F. Removing/reinstalling the ADU cover
(1) Procedure
1050e/1050eP
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the lever
[2] that pulls out the ADU section.
[6] 3. Loosen 2 screws [4] and remove the ADU cover /
Lt [5].
[4]
4. Loosen 2 screws [6] and remove the ADU cover /
Rt [7].
steps in reverse.
[5]
[7]
[3]
[1] [2]
1050fs2023c
117
G. Removing/reinstalling the registration section

(1) Procedure
[2]
/1050e/1050eP
2. Remove the ADU cover. (See P.117)

3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the multi
feed sensor cover [2] while removing the wire
harness from the cord clamp.
[1] fs503fs2138c
4. Remove 5 connectors [1].
[1]
[1]
[1] 1050fs2139c
118

5. Remove the screw [1] and check the position of
the graduation in the screw [1] section.
[1] 6. Remove 3 screws [2].
1050e/1050eP
steps in reverse.
[2] NOTE
• Reinstall the registration section so that it
comes to the same graduation as that used
for removal.
[3]
[2] 1050fs2140c
1 119
H. Replacing the discharge wire/transfer presser rubber

• Discharge wire: Every 750,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
• Transfer presser rubber: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] [1]
2. Remove the transfer/separation charger unit.
(See P.116)
3. Release the locks [1] at the 6 places and remove
[5] the plunging prevention plates /1 [2] and /2 [3].
4. Remove the spark arrester plates /Fr [4] and /Rr
[4] [5].
[1]
[1] [3] 1050fs2146c
120

5. Remove the springs [1], one each, 3 discharge
[1]
wires [2] and 3 transfer presser rubbers [3].
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When reinstalling the discharge wire, be sure
to insert each wire into the notch [4] of each
of the transfer presser rubbers.
• Reinstall the discharge wire so that the hook
[5] of each spring turns to the inside.

[2] [5] steps in reverse.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
1050fs2147c
121
I. Replacing the transfer cleaning assembly/separation cleaning assemblies /1 and /2 and C-clips
• Transfer cleaning assembly: Every 750,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
• Separation cleaning assembly /1: Every 750,000 prints

• Separation cleaning assembly /2: Every 750,000 prints
• C-clip: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2]
(See P.116)
3. Remove the discharge wire. (See P.120)
4. Remove 3 C-clips [2] from the shaft [1] of each of
[1]
the cleaning assemblies.
[3] 5. Turn over the transfer/separation charger unit [3]
and remove the transfer cleaning assembly [4]
and the separation cleaning assemblies /1 [5]
and /2 [6].
steps in reverse.
[4]
[5]
[6] 1050fs2148c
122

J. Replacing the transfer assist sheet assembly
• Transfer assist sheet assembly: Every 1,500,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
[2]
(See P.116)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the trans-
fer assist sheet assembly [2].
[1] 1050fs2149c
123
NOTE
[2]
• When reinstalling the transfer assist sheet
assembly [1], make sure that the projections
/1050e/1050eP
[2] at both ends get into the spring [3].

• When cramping it with a screw, be sure to put
the spacer [5] in the stepped section of the
screw [4]. At this time, take note that the
spacer does not get caught by the stepped
section of the screw.
After completion of installation, be sure to
check to see if the transfer assist sheet
assembly [1] moves smoothly in the arrow-
[1] [3] marked direction.

steps in reverse.
[5]
[4] 1050fs2406c
124

K. Replacing the TSL
• TSL: Every 6,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU from the main body.(See P.112))
(See P.116)
3. Remove the ADU cover.(See P.117)
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the trans-
fer exposure cover [2].
5. Remove the connector [3] and then remove the
TSL [4].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[4] [2]
[1] [3] 1050fs2141c
125
L. Replacing the registration roller /Up and the registration bearing

• Registration roller /Up: Every 6,000,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
• Registration bearing: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU from the main body.(See P.112)
2. Remove the paper dust removing brush for the
registration roller /Lw. (See P.113)
3. Remove the paper dust removing brush for the
registration roller /Up. (See P.114)
4. Remove the registration section.(See P.118)
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the knob
[2].
[3] [4] 6. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the gear
[4].
[1]
[2] 1050fs2150c
126

7. Remove 2 springs [1].
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[1] 1050fs2151c
127
8. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the regis-

tration bearing [2].
[2]
/1050e/1050eP
[1] [4] and the pin [5].

10. Remove the E-ring [6] and then remove the regis-
tration bearing [7].
11. Open the pre-transfer jam handler [8] and move
and remove the registration roller /Up [9] in the
arrow-marked directions [10] and [11] in this
order.
[8] [9] 12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[11] [10]
[4]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5] 1050fs2152c
128

M. Replacing the ADU exit roller, ADU conveyance rollers /2, /3 and /4
• ADU exit roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
• ADU conveyance roller /2: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove the ADU cover.(See P.117)
3. Remove the registration section.(See P.118)
5. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the regis-
tration cooling fan (FM17) [3].
[3] [2] 1050fs2154c
6. Disconnect all the connectors [2] (8 pcs.) that are

[4] [3] [1] [4]
connected to the ADU drive board /2 [1]and
intermediate connector [3].
7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the stay
[5] while removing the wiring harness from the
wiring harness clamp.
[2] [5] 1050fs2155c
129
8. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the loop

[1]
motor assembly [2].
/1050e/1050eP
[2]
[1] 1050fs2156c
9. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the regis-

[2] [1]
tration motor assembly [2].
[1] 1050fs2157c
130

10. Remove 3 connectors [1], the 2 connector [2],
the 1 connector [3] and the 1 connector [4].
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
1050fs2158c
131

[2] while removing the wiring harness from the
wiring harness clamp.
/1050e/1050eP
12. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the ADU

lock solenoid assembly [4].
[1]
[1]
[1] [2] [1]
[4]
[3]
1050fs2159c
132

14. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the bear-
1050e/1050eP
ing [5].
15. Pull out the ADU exit roller [6] and remove it.
NOTE
[6]
• The roller is provided with one E-ring. Be sure
to remove also this E-ring when replacing the
roller.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3] [6] 1050fs2160c
133

[9] [8]
spacer [2].
17. Remove the belt [3] and then remove the pulley
/1050e/1050eP

ing [7].
19. Pull out the ADU conveyance roller /4 [8] and
remove it.
20. Following the steps 16 to 19, remove the ADU
conveyance roller /3 [9].
NOTE
• Each roller is provided with one E-ring. Be
sure to remove also this E-ring when replac-
ing the roller.
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[7] [5] 1050fs2161c
134

21. Remove the E-ring [1].
22. Remove 2 screws [2] and pull out and remove
the ADU conveyance roller /2 [4].
1050e/1050eP
[4]
[4]
[1] [2]
[3] 1050fs2162c
135
23. Remove 5 E-ring [2], the gear [3], the pin [4] and
[7]
the bearing [5] and [6] from the ADU conveyance
roller /2 [1].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
[2]
• When reinstalling the bearing [6], be sure that
[6] the flange [7] turns outside.

steps in reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[5] [2] 1050fs2195c
136

N. Replacing the ADU conveyance roller /1 /ADU reverse roller/Reverse/exit roller/ADU acceleration
roller/paper exit rollers /1 and /2 assembly
1050e/1050eP
• ADU reverse roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
• Reverse/exit roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
• ADU acceleration roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
• Paper exit roller /1: Every 6,000,000 prints
• Paper exit roller /2 assembly: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the fusing section.(See P.153)
3. Open the paper reverse/exit section [1].
4. Remove the connector [2].
[3] 5. Remove the connectors [4] and [5], 16 pcs in all,
that are connected to the ADU drive board /1
[2] (ADUDB1) [3].
NOTE
• It is not necessary to remove the connector
[4] [5] [8] [7] of the ADU cooling fan /1 (RM15) [6].
• It is possible to remove the connector [8] on
the wiring harness side instead of removing
the connector [5].
[4]
[6] [4] [7] [4] [4] [4] 1050fs2189c
137

[1] [3] [4] [2].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When reinstalling the stay, be sure to set the
projection [4] of the ADU to the positioning
hole [3].
[2]
[1] 1050fs2190c
138

acceleration motor assembly [2].
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When reinstalling the ADU acceleration motor
assembly, be sure to set the projection [4] of
the ADU to the positioning hole [3].
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3] [4] [1] 1050fs2191c
139
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the thick

paper assist solenoid assembly [2].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When reinstalling the thick paper assist sole-
noid assembly, be sure to set the projection
[4] of the ADU to the positioning hole [3].
[3] [4] [2]
[1]
[3] [4] 1050fs2192c
9. Loosen 3 screws [1] and release the tension of

[4]
the belt [4] while sliding the ADU reverse motor
[5] assembly [2] in the arrow-marked direction [3].
[6] NOTE
• When setting the belt, the tension is automat-
[7] ically adjusted by the spring [5]. Be sure to
[8] tighten up the screw [1] after the belt has
been set.

[3] [6] [2] reverse motor assembly [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the ADU reverse motor
assembly, be sure to set the projection [8] of
the ADU to the positioning hole [7].
[1]
[7] [8] 1050fs2193c
140

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and pull out the ADU con-
veyance roller /1 [3].
1050e/1050eP
[2]
[3]
[1] 1050fs2194c
141
12. Remove 5 E-ring [2], the gear [3], the pin [4] and
[7]
the bearing [5] and [6] from the ADU conveyance
roller /1 [1].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[5] [2] 1050fs2195c
142

13. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the belt
[1] [5]
[4] while sliding the pulley [2] of the reverse/exit
motor (M13) in the arrow-marked direction [3].
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When setting the belt, the tension is automat-
ically adjusted by the spring [5]. Be sure to
tighten up the screw [1] after the belt has
been set.
[4] [3] [2] 1050fs2196c
14. Remove the pierce ring [1], the spacer [2], the
pulley [3] and the pin [4].
15. Remove 2 screws [5] and pull out the ADU
reverse roller [6].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4] 1050fs2197c
143
16. Remove 2 pierce rings [2] and the bearing [3]

[4]
from the ADU reverse roller [1].
[3]
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
the flange [4] turns outside.
[2]
[1]
[2]
1050fs2198c
17. Following the steps 14 to 16, remove the

reverse/exit roller [1] and the ADU acceleration
roller [2].
[2] [1] 1050fs2199c
144

spacer [2].
19. Remove the belt [3] and then remove the pulley
1050e/1050eP
20. Remove 2 screws [6] and pull out the paper exit
roller /2 assembly [7].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[5] 1050fs2200c
145
21. Following the steps 18, 19 and 20, pull out the
paper exit roller /1 [1].
/1050e/1050eP
[1] 1050fs2202c
22. Remove 2 E-rings [2] and the bearing [3] from the
[4]
paper exit roller /1 [1].
[3]
NOTE

steps in reverse.
[1]
[2] 1050fs2203c
146

O. Replacing the reverse gate
• Reverse gate: Every 10,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
2. Loosen 3 screws [1] and remove the reverse sec-
tion cover [2].
[1]
[2]
1050fs2204c

[2] [5] [7] [5] [6]
4. Remove the spring [2].
5. Remove the screw [3] and release the fixing of
the actuator [4].
reverse/exit solenoid assembly [6].
NOTE
• Reinstall the reverse/exit solenoid assembly
so that it comes to the same graduation [7] as
that used for removal.
[1] [4] [3] 1503fs2205c
147
7. Remove the E-rings [1], one each, and then

remove 2 bearings [2].
[1] [2] 8. Open the reverse door [3] and remove the
/1050e/1050eP
reverse gate assembly [4] while sliding it in the

arrow-marked directions [5] and [6] in this order.
[6] [5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2206c
9. Remove the screws [1], one each, and then

[2]
remove 7 reverse gates [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
1050fs2207c
148

P. Replacing the fusing exit roller
• Fusing exit roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt, and pull out the
[1]
ADU from the main body. (See P.112)
2. Loosen 3 screws [1] and remove the reverse sec-
tion cover [2].
[2] 1050fs2786c
149

[2]
4. Remove 2 stepped screws [2] and then remove
the paper reverse/exit section [3].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When attaching the stepped screw [2], make
sure that it gets in securely up to the step of
the screw.
[3]
[2] [1] 1050fs2787c

[2] [5] [7] [5] [6]
6. Remove the spring [2].
the actuator [4].
reverse/exit solenoid assembly [6].
NOTE
• Reinstall the reverse/exit solenoid assembly
so that it comes to the same graduation [7] as
that used for removal.
[1] [4] [3] 1503fs2205c
150

ing.
1050e/1050eP
[1] 1050fs2792c
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and 2 screws [2], and slide
[2] [3]
the bearing [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1] 1050fs2788c
11. Pull out and remove gently the shaft [1] of the
fusing exit roller so that it does not touch the
guide plate.
[1]
1050fs2789c
151

[2]
13. Remove 4 E-rings [2] and slide 4 pins [3] in the
direction in which they can be removed. And
/1050e/1050eP
then pull out 4 fusing exit rollers [4] in the oppo-

site direction to remove them.
steps in reverse.
[4]
[1] [3] 1050fs2790c
152

3.5.9 Fusing section
A. Replacing the cleaning web
1050e/1050eP
Caution:
• Immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2), the fusing
section is very hot and you may get burnt. Be sure to start operations when the temperature cools
down sufficiently.

• Cleaning web: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the web
cover [2].
[1]
1050fs2163c
3. Release the couplings [1] provided at the 2

places in the arrow-marked direction and remove
the used cleaning web [2].
[2]
[1]
1050fs2164c
153
4. Set the shaft [2] on the unused side of the new

[2] cleaning web [1] to the driven couplings /Rr [3]
and /Fr [4].
[3]
/1050e/1050eP
[6]
NOTE
• Be sure to set each detent [5] on the driven
couplings to the notch [6] of the shaft on the
[5]
unused side. When the web is installed in the
wrong direction, it does not coincide with the
notch.
5. Hold either side [8] of the shaft [7] on the take-up

side of the new cleaning web with both hands,
and take up the new cleaning web until the blue
[7] line [9] disappears.
[1] NOTE
• The performance of the new cleaning web is
guaranteed from the position in which the
blue line disappears. Be sure to take up the
cleaning web up to this position.
[8]
[9]
[4]
[6]
[2] [5]
1050fs2165c
154

6. Set the shaft [2] on the take-up side of the new
[4]
cleaning web [1] to the take-up couplings /Rr [3]
and /Fr [4].
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• Be sure to set each detent [5] on the driven
coupling to the notch [6] of the shaft on the
unused side.
7. The reinstallation hereafter should be made fol-

lowing the removal steps in reverse.
[1] [2] [6] [5]
NOTE
• When the cleaning web is replaced, be sure to
reset the counter of the fusing cleaning web
in the service mode.(See P.373)
[3] [5] [6] [2] 1050fs2166c
155
B. Removing/reinstalling the fusing section
Caution:
/1050e/1050eP
• Immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2), the fusing
section is very hot and you may get burnt. Be sure to start operations when the temperature cools
down sufficiently.
(1) Procedure
[3] 3. Open the fusing paper exit section [2].
[1] 4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the fusing
cover [4].
[4]
[2] 1050fs2002c
156

assist plate [2].
1050e/1050eP
the fusing section [4].
NOTE
• When fixing the fusing section [4], be sure to
tighten up the screw [3] while pressing it
toward the rear side.
[2] [4] [7] [1] 7. Close the fusing paper exit section [5].
8. Slide the fusing section [4] diagonally to the front
side and hold it up with both hand to remove it.
NOTE
[5]
• When holding up the fusing section, be sure
to hold it at the jam release knob [6] and the
handle [7].
• When reinstalling it, be sure to slide it with the
fusing section set to the reversal section side.
[6]

steps in reverse.
[3] 1050fs2003c
157
C. Opening/closing of the web section

(1) Procedure
/1050e/1050eP
2. Remove the fusing section. (See P.156)

3. Open the fusing paper exit section [1].
4. Insert the driver [4] into the hole [3] of the shaft
[2], and rotate the shaft to release pressure.
NOTE
• When the web is closed and fixed, be sure to
rotate the shaft to apply pressure.
• Opening the web section disrupts the stabil-
[5] [6] ity. Be careful it does not fall down.
5. Remove 4 screws [6] and open the web section

[5].
steps in reverse.
[1] [2] [3]
[6] 1050fs2167c
158 1

D. Replacing the fusing heater lamps /1 and /2
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• Be sure to avoid touching the lamp section of the fusing heater lamps /1 and /2 with bare hands.
When touched, be sure to clean it with the roller cleaner.

• Fusing heater lamp /1: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3]
3. Open the web section [1]. (See P.158)
[2]
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the 2 wir-
[1]
ing harness clamps [2].
5. Remove 2 faston terminals [4] of the fusing
heater lamp /1 [3].
[4]
NOTE
• Be sure to fit in the fusing heater lamps /1 and
/2 with the manufacturer's mark in this side.
• When reinstalling the fusing heater lamp /1,
be sure to insert it securely while taking note
of the position in which the faston terminal is
installed.
6. Remove the screw [5] and then remove the wir-

ing harness clamp [6].
NOTE
[3] • When reinstalling the wiring harness clamp,
be sure to install it in the correct position.
[5] When it is installed in a wrong position, the
fusing cover cannot be attached.
[6]
[4] 1050fs2168c
159
7. Remove 2 faston terminals [2] of the fusing

[1]
heater lamp /2 [1].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
be sure to insert it securely while taking note
of the position in which the faston terminal is
installed.
8. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the lamp

fixing plate /Fr [4].
9. Pull out and remove each of the fusing heater
lamps in the arrow-marked direction [5].
NOTE
[2] [6] • When reinstalling each of the fusing heater
lamps, check to see if either end of each lamp
is set in the fitting holes of the lamp fixing
plates /Fr [4] and /Rr [6].
• After each of the fusing heater lamps is
[5] installed, check to see if it is in touch with the
inner face of the fusing roller /Up [7].

steps in reverse.
[7] [3]
[4] [5] [2] 1050fs2407c
160

E. Replacing the fusing roller /Up, the heat insulating sleeve, the bearing and the fusing gear
• Fusing roller /Up: Every 1,500,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
• Heat insulating sleeve: Every 1,500,000 prints
• Bearing: Every 1,500,000 prints
• Fusing gear: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
4. Remove the fusing heater lamps /1 and /2.
(See P.159)
5. Remove the fusing roller /Up [1].
[1] 1050fs2169c
6. Remove the C-ring [2], the fusing gear [3], the

[7]
gear [4] (part not replaced), the heat insulating
sleeve [5] and the bearing [6] from the fusing
roller /Up [1].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the heat insulating sleeve
and the bearing, make sure that the flange [7]
turns outside.
7. Remove the C-ring [8], the heat insulating sleeve

[2] [3] [4] [5] [1] [6] [9] and the bearing [10] from the fusing roller /Up
[1].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the heat insulating sleeve
and the bearing, make sure that the flange
[11] turns outside.

[11]
steps in reverse.
[9]
[8]
1050fs2170c
161
F. Replacing the fusing roller /Lw assembly

• Fusing roller /Lw assembly: Every 1,500,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
[3]
NOTE
• When removing the fusing roller /Lw assem-
bly with the web section open, the web sec-
tion may become unstable. So, be sure to
remove the cleaning web in advance.
(See P.153)

[1]
(See P.159)
5. Remove the fusing roller /Up. (See P.161)
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the jam
release knob [2].
[2] 7. Remove the fusing roller /Lw assembly [3].
1050fs2171c
NOTE
• Before the roller is pressured, fix the pressure
spring end [1] in front and rear at 2 to 4 mm
[3] from the pressure plate end [2].
When this operation is not made, insufficient
fusing may result when printing a thick paper.
Standard: [3] 2 mm to 4 mm
• Color of the pressure spring varies depending

on the type of the roller.
Soft roller: Black
Hard roller: Silver

steps in reverse.
[3]
[1] [2]
1050fs2919c
162 2

G. Replacing the fusing cleaning sheet assembly
• Fusing cleaning sheet assembly: Every 1,500,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
3. Open the web section [1].(See P.158)
(See P.159)
5. Remove the fusing roller /Up.(See P.161)
6. Remove the fusing roller /Lw assembly.
(See P.162)
7. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fusing
cleaning unit [2].
[2] [1]
[1] 1050fs2172c
163

[1]
cleaning sheet assembly [2].
9. Remove the paper dust that has gathered in [3]
/1050e/1050eP
of the fusing cleaning unit.

steps in reverse.
[2] [3] 1050fs2408c
164

H. Removing/reinstalling the fusing heating roller assembly
(1) Procedure
1050e/1050eP
3. Remove the spring [1] (long one) and [2] (short
[5]
one).
NOTE
[1]
• The springs [1] and [2] are different in size and
length. When installing them, take note of the
positions in which they are installed.

ground terminal [4].
5. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the thick
paper conveyance assist plate [6].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the thick paper conveyance
assist plate [6], be sure to install the springs
[1] and [2] and the ground terminal [4] and
then push the thick paper conveyance assist
[5] [6] plate in the direction of the paper exit. The
plate must move smoothly.
[4] [3] [2] 1050fs2173c
165
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing

plate [2].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
[1] • When reinstalling the fixing plate, be sure to
set the positioning hole [3] and the position-
ing slot [4] to 2 projections [5] of the fusing
section.
[2] [3] [5]
[1]
[4] [5] 1050fs2174c
166

7. Remove 2 springs [1].
8. Remove the screw [2] and open the fusing heat-
ing roller assembly [3].
1050e/1050eP
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
1050fs2175c
167
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fusing heating roller
assembly [1], be sure to set the guide hole [3]
/1050e/1050eP
of the fusing heating roller assembly to the

[1] guide pin [2] of the fusing section.

steps in reverse.
[2]
[3] 1050fs2176c
168

I. Replacing the fusing heater lamp /3
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• Be careful not to touch the lamp section of the fusing heater lamp /3 with bare hands. When
touched, be sure to clean it with the roller cleaner.

(2) Procedure
[1] 3. Open the fusing heating roller assembly.
(See P.165)
[2] 4. Cut off the wire binding band [1] and remove the
connector [2].
5. Cut off the wire binding band [3].
[8] NOTE
• When attaching a new wiring band, be sure to
[7] [9] use a heat-resistant one.
[10]
[16] 7. Remove the faston terminal [6].
NOTE
• Be sure to fit in the fusing heater lamp /3 with
the manufacturer's mark in this side.
[15] • When reinstalling the faston terminal, be sure
to insert it securely.
[17]
8. Remove the screw [7] and then remove the fixing

[6] plate /Rr [8].
[3]
NOTE
[5] • When reinstalling the fixing plate /Rr, be sure
to set the positioning hole [9] to the projection
[4] [10] of the fusing heating roller assembly.
9. Remove the screw [11] and then remove the fix-

ing plate /Fr [12].
[12] [13][14] [11] 1050fs2177c
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fixing plate /Fr, be sure
to set the positioning hole [13] to the projec-
tion [14] of the fusing heating roller assembly.
169
10. Pull out the fusing heater lamp /3 [1] from the
front side [3] of the fusing heating roller assembly
[2] and remove it.
/1050e/1050eP
[2]
NOTE
be sure to take note of the direction.
• After completion of the installation of the fus-
ing heater lamp /3, check to see if it is in
[1]
touch with the inner face of the fusing heating
[3] roller.
1050fs2801c
steps in reverse.
170

J. Replacing the fusing heating roller, the heat insulation sleeve /Lw and the bearing
• Fusing heating roller: Every 3,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
• Heat insulating sleeve /Lw: Every 3,000,000 prints
• Bearing: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[5] [2] [4]
3. Open the fusing heating roller assembly.
(See P.165)
4. Remove the fusing heater lamp /3. (See P.169)
5. Remove the fusing cleaning sheet assembly.
(See P.163)
6. Remove the C-rings [1], one each, and then
remove the bearings [2], one each, to remove the
fusing heating roller [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the bearing, be sure to take
note of the direction of the flange [4].
[3] [1]
7. Remove the heat insulating sleeves /Lw [5], one

each, from the fusing heating roller.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the heat insulating sleeves /
Lw, make sure that each of the flanges turn to
the fusing heating roller side.

steps in reverse.
[1] [4] [2] [5] 1050fs2178c
171
K. Replacing the fusing claw /Lw

• Fusing claw /Lw: Every 1,500,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
3. Open the fusing paper exit section
.(See P.158)
4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove 2 fusing
claw /Lw assemblies [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fusing claw /Lw assem-
bly, be sure to set the positioning hole [3] to
the projection [4] of the fusing paper exit sec-
tion.
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] 1050fs2179c
5. Remove the spring [2] from each of the fusing

[3] [2] [4] [1]
claw /Lw assembly [1] and then remove the fus-
ing claw /Lw [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fusing claw /Lw, be sure
to take note of the position [4] to which the
spring is hooked.

steps in reverse.
[4] 1050fs2180c
172

L. Replacing the fusing claw /Up
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• The procedure for replacing the fixing claw/Up differs depending on whether the separation claw
shaking mechanism exist or not.

• Fusing claw /Up: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure (when not equipped with the shaking mechanism)

3. Open the fusing paper exit section.
(See P.158)
remove 6 fusing claws /Up [2].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
1050fs2181c
2 173
(3) Procedure (when equipped with the shaking mechanism)

/1050e/1050eP
3. Open the fusing paper exit section. (See P.158)

remove 6 fusing claws /Up [2].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
1050fs2920c
174 2

M. Replacing the fusing actuator
• Fusing actuator: Every 6,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
3. Open the fusing paper exit section.(See P.158)
4. Remove the fusing sensor cover [1].
[1] 1050fs2182c
175
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the fus-

[10] [6]
ing sensor cover plate [2].
/1050e/1050eP
[7] NOTE
[8] • When reinstalling the fusing sensor cover
plate, be sure to set the positioning hole [3] to
[5] the projection [4] of the fusing paper exit sec-
tion.
6. Remove the screw [5] and then remove the fus-

ing claw /Lw assembly [6].
[1] [2] [9] NOTE

• When reinstalling the fusing claw /Lw assem-
bly, be sure to set the positioning hole [7] to
the projection [8] of the fusing paper exit sec-
tion.

actuator assembly [10].
[3][4] 1050fs2183c
176

8. Pull out the shaft fixing member [1], release the
spring [2] and remove the fusing actuator [4] from
the fusing actuator assembly [3].
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fusing actuator, be sure
to take note of the position [5] to which the
spring is hooked.
• When reinstalling the shaft fixing member, be
sure to take note of its direction.
[1] [5] [3]

steps in reverse.
[4] [2] [5] 1050fs2184c
177
N. Replacing the thermistor /2
Caution:
/1050e/1050eP
• After completion of the installation of the thermistor /2, be sure to check to see if it is in touch with
the fusing roller /Up.

• Thermistor /2: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt, and pull out the
ADU from the main body.(See P.112)
3. Open the fusing paper exit section [1].
4. Insert the driver [4] into the hole [3] of the shaft [2]
and rotate the shaft [2] clockwise to release pres-
sure.
NOTE
• Not releasing pressure may cause damage to
the fusing heater lamp. Be sure to release it.
• When reinstalling it, be sure to rotate the shaft
[1] [2] [3]
[2] counterclockwise to apply pressure.

6. Remove 4 screws [6] and 2 stepped screws [7],
and then remove the web unit [8].
NOTE
• When attaching the stepped screw [7], make
sure that it gets in securely up to the step of
the screw.
• Be sure to remove the web section with it
closed. If the web is removed with it open, the
web section becomes unstable and you may
get injured.
[2] 1050fs2185c
178

7. Cut off the wiring band [1].
[4]
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• When attaching a new wiring band, be sure to
use a heat-resistant one.
8. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the ther-

mistor /2 assembly [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the thermistor /2 assembly,
[3] [2] check surely to see if it is in touch with the
fusing roller /Up [4].
9. Remove the connector [5] of the thermistor /2.
NOTE
• There are 4 connectors for the thermistor pro-
vided at the same place and it is difficult to
identify a corresponding connector in
advance. Therefore, the connector to be
[5]
removed can be identified by following the
wiring harness of the thermistor /2.
[1] 1050fs2186c
[1]
mistor /2 [2].
steps in reverse.
[2] 1050fs2409c
179
O. Replacing the thermistor /4
Caution:
/1050e/1050eP
• After completion of the installation of the thermistor /4, check to ensure it is in touch with the fus-
ing heating roller.

• Thermistor /4: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
(See P.165)
4. Cut off 2 wiring bands [1].
[8] [5] [9] ing harness clamp [3].
mistor /4 assembly [5].
NOTE
be sure to set the attaching hole [6] to the
projection [7] of the fusing heating roller
assembly.
check to see if it is in touch with the fusing
heating roller [8].
7. Remove the connector [9] of the thermistor /4

[1]
assembly.
[3] [2] [6][7] [4] 1050fs2187c
NOTE
180

mistor /4 [3].
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
[2]
• When attaching the wiring band, be sure to
use a heat-resistant one.

steps in reverse.
[3]
[1] 1050fs2410c
181
P. Replacing the web motor

• Web motor: Every 6,000,000 prints
/1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] [3]
5. Remove 3 screws [4] and then remove the web
motor unit [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
[4] [5]
1050fs2188c
182

[1]
7. Loosen the screw [2] and pull out the web motor
[3] in the arrow-marked direction.
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When reinstalling the web motor, be sure to
align the D-cut face of the web motor shaft
with the direction of the screw [2].

steps in reverse.
[3]
[2] 1050fs2411c
183
Q. Removing/reinstalling the thermistor /1
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• Be sure to make the position adjustments when the roller has cooled down.
• When reinstalling the thermistor /1, adjust it with the temperature sensor positioning jig /A before
fixing it. Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• After completion of the reinstallation of the thermistor /1, be sure to check the wiring harness to
see if it is in touch with the fusing roller /Up.
(1) Procedure for removal

[3] 3. Remove the web section. (See P.178)
NOTE
[2] • When attaching a wiring band, be sure to use
a heat-resistant one.

mistor /1 [3].
NOTE
• For the method for installing the thermistor /
1, see "(2) Procedure for reinstallation."
NOTE
[4]
[1]
1050fs2208c
184

(2) Procedure for reinstallation
1. Insert the temperature sensor positioning jig /A
[3] between the thermistor /1 [1] and the fusing
1050e/1050eP
[3] roller /Up [2].
2. Adjust the position of the thermistor /1 so that it
become flush with the temperature sensor posi-
tioning jig /A, and then fix it with the screw [4].
NOTE
• Be sure to adjust the distance a [5] between
the thermistor /1 and the fusing roller /Up so
that it becomes equal to the thickness of the
[1] temperature sensor positioning jig /A.
[4] Specified value: a = 0.75 ± 0.1 mm
• Make sure that the thermistor /1 is parallel to
the roller.
[5] 3. Apply Screw-lock to the screw [4].

4. For the parts to be reinstalled hereafter, reinstall
them following the removal steps in reverse.
[2] 1050fs2209c
185
R. Removing/reinstalling the thermistor /3
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• When reinstalling the thermistor /3, adjust it with the temperature sensor positioning jig /A before
fixing it. Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• After completion of the reinstallation of the thermistor /3, be sure to check the wiring harness to
see if it is in touch with the fusing heating roller.

[6]
[3] (See P.165))
4. Cut off 2 wiring bands [1].
NOTE
[1] • When attaching a wire binding band, be sure
to use a heat-resistant one.
[2]
5. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the 2 wir-
6. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the ther-
mistor /3 [5].
NOTE
• For the method for installing the thermistor /
3, see "(2) Procedure for reinstallation."
[4]
NOTE
[5] advance. Therefore, the connector to be
1050fs2210c
186

1. Insert the temperature sensor positioning jig /B
[3] between the thermistor /3 [1] and the fusing
1050e/1050eP
heating roller [2].
2. Adjust the position of the thermistor /3 so that it
become flush with the temperature sensor posi-
tioning jig /B, and then fix it with 2 screws [4].
NOTE
the thermistor /3 and the fusing heating roller
so that it becomes equal to the thickness of
[4] the temperature sensor positioning jig /A.
[1]
Specified value: a = 0.7 ± 0.1 mm
• Make sure that the thermistor /3 is parallel to
[3] the roller.
3. Apply Screw-lock to 2 screws [4].

[5] 4. For the parts to be reinstalled hereafter, reinstall
[2] 1050fs2211c
187
S. Removing/reinstalling the thermostat /1
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• When reinstalling the thermostat /1, adjust it with the thermostat positioning jig /A before fixing it.
Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• After completion of the reinstallation of the thermostat /1, be sure to check the wiring harness to
see if it is in touch with the fusing roller /Up.

[1]
3. Remove the web section. (See P.178)
4. Remove 2 faston terminals [1].
mostat /1 [3].
[2]
NOTE
• For method for reinstalling the thermostat /1,
see "(2) Procedure for reinstallation."
[3]
1050fs2212c
188

1. Install 2 faston terminals [2] to the thermostat /1
[1].
[3]
1050e/1050eP
2. Insert the thermostat positioning jig /A [4]
between the thermostat /1 [1] and the fusing
roller /Up [3].
3. Adjust the position of the thermostat /1 so that it
become flush with the thermostat positioning jig /
A, and then fix it with the screw [5].
NOTE
[2]
the thermostat /1 and the fusing roller /Up so
[5]
that it becomes equal to the thickness of the
thermostat positioning jig /A.
[4]
4. Apply Screw-lock to the screw [5].

[1]
[6]
1050fs2213c
189
T. Removing/reinstalling the thermostat /2
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• When reinstalling the thermostat /2, adjust it with the thermostat positioning jig /B before fixing it.
Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• After completion of the reinstallation of the thermostat /2, be sure to check the wiring harness to
see if it is in touch with the fusing heating roller.

[1]
(See P.165)
4. Remove 2 faston terminals [1].
[3] 5. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the ther-
mostat /2 [3].
NOTE
[2] • For method for reinstalling the thermostat /2,
see "(2) Procedure for reinstallation."
1050fs2214c
190

1. Install 2 faston terminals [2] to the thermostat /2
[2]
[1].
1050e/1050eP
2. Insert the thermostat positioning jig /B [4]
[1] between the thermostat /2 [1] and the fusing
heating roller [3].
3. Adjust the position of the thermostat /2 so that it
become flush with the thermostat positioning jig /
B, and then fix it with the screw [5].
[5]
NOTE
the thermostat /2 and the fusing heating roller
so that it becomes equal to the thickness of
the thermostat positioning jig /B.
4. Apply Screw-lock to the screw [5].

[3]
[4]
[6]
1050fs2215c
191
3.5.10 Paper exit section

A. Removing/reinstalling the paper exit section
(1) Procedure
/1050e/1050eP
1. Remove the left cover. (See P.250)

[1] 3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the paper
exit section [3].
[2]
[2] NOTE
• When reinstalling the paper exit section, be
sure to hook the retention hole [4] to the pro-
jection [5] of the frame and then set the posi-
[4][5] [3] [6][7] tioning hole [6] to the positioning pin [7] of the
1050fs2216c
frame.

steps in reverse.
B. Cleaning of the paper exit sensor

• Paper exit sensor: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the paper exit section.(See P.192)
3. Clean the paper exit sensor (PS3) [1] with the
blower brush.
steps in reverse.
[1]
1050fs2217c
192

C. Replacing the main body paper exit roller
• Main body paper exit roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
1050e/1050eP
(2) Procedure
[7] 2. Remove the paper exit section.(See P.192)
[6] [2] and the pin [3].
4. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the bear-
[8] ing [5].
5. Remove the E-ring [6] and then remove the bear-
ing [7].
6. Move the main body paper exit roller [8] in the
arrow-marked directions [9] and [10] in this order,
[10]
and remove it.
steps in reverse.
[9] [5]
[1]
[4]
[2] [3] 1050fs2218c
193
4. SERVICE Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
4. SERVICE
4.1 Service material list
/1050e/1050eP
Material No. Name Shape Remark

000V-16-0 Drum cleaner 200 ml
000V-17-0 Roller cleaner 200 ml
000V-19-0 Setting powder 25 g
000V-18-0 Cleaning pad 10 pcs/1 pack
194 1
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 4. SERVICE

4.2 Jig list
Parts No. Name Shape Quantity Remark
1050e/1050eP
55VAJG011 Temperature sensor 1
positioning jig /A (for
fusing roller /Up)
55VAJG021 Temperature sensor 1

positioning jig /B (for
fusing heating roller)
55VAJG031 Thermostat position- 1

ing jig /A (for fusing
roller /Up)
55VAJG041 Thermostat position- 1

ing jig /B (for fusing
heating roller)
7050K0020 Optics unit position- 2

ing jig
00M6-2-00 Door switch jig 4
403479400# Test chart (A3 size) 1
403479410# Test chart 1

(11 x 17 size)
00VC-2-00 Drum cover 1
00VD-1000 Blower brush 1
00VE-1003 Tester 1
2 195
Parts No. Name Shape Quantity Remark

120A1052# Positioning shaft 2pc/set For DF adjustment
/1050e/1050eP
120A9711# Adjustment chart 1 For DF adjustment
120A9712# White chart 1 For DF adjustment
196 2

4.3 Materials
A. Item
1050e/1050eP
Parts name Useful life Type name
Toner bottle 80,000 prints TN010
Drum 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours DR010
Developer 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours DV010
197
4.4 Mail remote notification system

4.4.1 Outline
/1050e/1050eP
"Mail remote notification system" is a system that allows you to obtain a list print which can be output by a
copier using the Internet mail (E-mail).
Using this system dispenses not only with printing the list on paper but also visiting the users.
Sending a mail filled-in with a simple keyword to the copier allows you to receive by mail all sorts of print infor-
mation of the copier.
4.4.2 Operating environments

In order to use the functions of "Mail remote notification system", the following conditions must be met. The
operation of the functions is available while in jams, SC and a low power mode. A mail sent to the copier that is
not operating does not get lost, but it is handled when the copier is activated again.
(1) The copier has a server that can receive a mail using POP3 or IMAP protocol.
(2) The copier has a mail server that can send a mail using SMTP protocol.
(3) In the following 4 cases, "Mail remote notification system" does not operate in the copier.
When the main power switch (SW1) is turned off.
When the power switch (SW2) is turned off.
While the copier is in auto shut-off.
When the security enhanced mode is set to ON (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
In this manual, the network interface card installed in the main body is called the main body NIC.
4.4.3 Major functions

Sending a mail with a simple keyword allows you to use the following functions.
(1) The list print information of the copier you want to obtain can be received by mail.
List prints that can be obtained are the following 11 lists.
Mode memory list
User setting list
Font pattern list
Management list
Adjustment list
Parameter list
Use management list
Counter list
Pixel ratio list
Remote diagnostic report
Audit log report
(2) The counter list can be checked by cell phone.

(3) A password used for certification of a mail can be change.
(4) Directions for use of "Mail remote notification system" can be received by mail.
To make use of the above functions, it is necessary to send a mail with a simple keyword (com-
mand).
For particulars of the command, See "4.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification
system"
198 1

4.4.4 Initialization
To make use of "Mail remote notification system", it is necessary to register the network parameter on the copier
main body and the account on the mail server.
1050e/1050eP
A. Setting from the touch panel
Set the IP address of the copier from the touch panel to connect the copier to the network. When already set,
proceed to "(2) Setting from the Web browser".
(1) Procedure
Step Operating instructions

1 Select [Utility/counter] on the operation board.
2 Select "06 Machine Manager Setting."
3 Select "04 Network Setting."
4 Select "01 Machine NIC Setting."
5 Enter "IP address," "Subnet mask," and "Gateway Address."
6 Restart the copier.
NOTE
• The IP address of the copier is normally assigned by the system administrator. For particulars,
contact the system administrator.
B. Setting from the Web Utilities

Enter the setting of the mail server from the Web Utilities. To use the Web Utilities, make preparations of a PC
that can be connected to the network.
NOTE
• No space is available in all items to be set. The following characters cannot be used for setting an
E-mail address.
()<>;:“[]
When an improper entry or setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to make corrections fol-
lowing the error massage. When no correction is made, a down load error of the program may
result.
• The Web layout is subject to change without notice.
199
(1) Procedure

1 Start the Web browser.
/1050e/1050eP
• When a proxy is set on the Web browser, the main body Web may not be accessible. For particu-
lars, contact the network administrator. For Web browser, Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator
is recommended. However, no setting should be made from two or more browsers simulta-
neously.
2 Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered from "A. Setting from the operating
panel."
• "Main page" is displayed when an access is made to the Web Utilities of the copier main body.
3 Click "Extension for maintenance" on "Main page."

4 Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
User name: ce (cannot be changed)

Password: CE Enter the password. (Default: "92729272")
200

5 Click "E-Mail Initial Setting" to display the screen for setting.
1050e/1050eP
Set item Details
Enable E-mail When using the mail remote notification system, select "Use." Default is "Not
notification use."
Time difference The time at which a mail was send out is calculated based on this value. For
time difference setting, enter the difference from the standard time UTC in the
range from -1200 (- 12 hour 00 minute) to +1200 (-12 hour 00 minute). When
no value is entered, +0000 (UTC) is set. (Ex.: In the case of Japan, enter +
900.)
Sending mail Set the IP address of the SMTP server.
(SMTP) server
SMTP port Set the port No. of the SMTP server. For default, 25 is set.
number
Sending mail For SMTP default, 5-minute is set.
(SMTP) server
time out
Interval between The copier check the receiving mail server to see if a mail is newly received.
fetching mails (An interval can be specified in the range from 1 minute to 60 minutes.) Taking
into consideration the load on the network, this is usually set at the interval of
10 minutes.
Receiving mail Set the IP address of the incoming mail server.
server
Kind of mail Select either of POP3 and IMAP. For default, [POP3] is selected.
spool
Pop3 (IMAP) When 110 is used for POP3 and 143 is used for IMAP, select "Use the default
port number value." When any value other than the default, select "Setting" and enter a
port number to be used in the text box.
2 201
Set item Details

/1050e/1050eP
User name on Enter an account name assigned to the copier by the incoming mail server.
the server
Password Enter a password to the account name above.
E-mail address Enter the mail address of the copier its own. This is normally "mail account
of this copy name@incoming mail server name."
machine
Nickname Enter a nickname that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent from the
copier. No entry cause no problem.
CE password Enter a password that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent to the
copier. The copier uses this password for security purpose.
Also Notice to • Not transfer: Default
the Administra- • Transfer an unright mail: When a mail received by the copier is not con-
tor form to the above password, or when the mail size is exceeding the spec-
ified size (10k bytes), a selection is made if the mail is communicated.
• Transfer all transmission mails: Transfer all mails that use "Mail remote
notification system."
Administrator When "Transfer an unright mail" or "Transfer all transmission mails" is
E-mail address selected, enter an E-mail address for transfer.
Announce delay A selection is made if the difference (time required) between the time when a
time in replay mail was sent to the copier and the time when the copier handled the mail is
mail indicated in the mail. For default, "Not indicate" is selected.
Enable POP After authentication is made by the mail receiving server, a selection is made
(IMAP) before to decide whether to send out the mail or not. For default, "Send" is selected.
SMTP
6 After completion of entry, click the [Apply] key.

7 Conduct the mail sending/receiving test.
• Click "Sending and Receiving test" and a sending test and a receiving test are conducted collec-
tively to check to see if a test mail sent is correctly received.
When a test failed, re-check the set items following the error message.
• Click "Sending and Receiving test" to show the results of the sending and receiving test.
Sending test A mail sending test is made on the SMTP server. A test mail is sent to "E-mail
address for the copier" set in Step 2.
Receiving A receiving test is made on the incoming mail server. A test mail is received from
test "E-mail address of the copier" set in Step 2.
202

4.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system
For commands for communications with the copier and the details of options, see the table below.
Command Option Description Minimum
1050e/1050eP
input
GETLOG [List option name] Send back by mail the list print information specified G
in [List print name].
ModeMemory Send back [Mode memory list] by mail. M
UserSetting end back by [User setting list] mail. U
FontPattern Send back [Font pattern list] by mail. F
Management Send back [Management list] by mail. Ma
Adjustment Sent back [Adjustment list] by mail. A
Parameter Send back [Parameter list] by mail. P
UserManagement Send back [User management list] by mail. UseM
Counter Send back [Counter list] by mail. C
PixelRatio Send back [Pixel ratio list] by mail. Pi
CommunicationLog CommunicationLog Send back [Communication log Co
list] by mail.
AuditLog Send back [Audit log report] by mail. Au
ALL Send back all of the above list prints in mail. AL
Not specified [Counter list] is edited so that it can be shown by cell
phone. And this is sent back by mail.
CHPASS [OldPasswd][New- Change a password to be used for certification of a C
Passwd] mail.
[OldPasswd] Specify a password that is currently used.
[NewPasswd] Specify a new password.
HELP Not specified Send a help mail that describes the operating H
instructions of the commands above.
203
4.4.6 Mail sending

A command (option) printed on the mail is not case sensitive and can be identified from the minimum input listed
on the preceding page.
/1050e/1050eP
A. Notes
• When sending a mail to the copier, take note of the following.
(1)Mail software can be used without discrimination by OS and a hand-held device or a free mail
using browser.
(2)Use the mail software in the text mode.
(3)For the mail software, as a condition for reception, 128 characters or more are recommended as
the maximum number of characters displayed in a line.
(4)There are one or more spaces or TAB's required between a command and an option that are
written in the mail. (However, a line feed is not allowed.)
(5)Enter all the commands that are written in the mail in alphanumeric characters (ASCII charac-
ters). When any other characters are used, an error message "No command found" is sent
back.
(6)Start a command written in the mail from the line head with not space.
When there is a space or TAB found at the line head, the line is ignored.
(7)The maximum number of commands available in a mail is ten. Commands exceeding ten are
ignored.
(8)Avoid attaching a file to a mail that is sent to the copier.
(9)A signature on a mail that is sent to the copier may be handled as a command with an error
message sent back.
(10)When the power is shut off while the copier is sending a mail or when the copier main body is
printing the list print, the same mail may be sent back twice.
(11)The copier can receive up to 5 mails from the mail server at the same time.
When more than 5 mails have been received by the mail server, the copier receives the
remaining mails from the mail server next time.
204
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP

5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
5.1 ISW
1050e/1050eP
5.1.1 Outline
A. ISW (In-System Writer)
• This is an operation in which a control program stored in the flush ROM that is built in each control board in
the copier is rewritten with the board built in the copier main body. Conducting the ISW allows the version up
of control program without changing the board and the installation of the up to date program when replacing
the board. As a tool to conduct the ISW, (ISWTrns (PC software)) can be used for rewriting with the personal
computer (PC) connected to the copier. This tool can rewrite directly a control program in the flush ROM built
in the copier main body.
B. ISWTrns
• This is a software for Windows to rewrite the copier flush ROM and is used for the rewrite of programs (data
transfer) with the copier main body and the personal computer connected with a parallel cable or the USB
cable.
NOTE
• When this machine uses the USB to conduct the ISW, it is necessary to install the USB driver of the
ISWTrns. For procedure for installation, see "5.1.4 A. Installation of the USB driver (Windows2000/
XP)" When using the USB, be sure to turn on the radio button of the USB on the ISWTrns [Setting
(S)] - [Communications setting (C)], and then press the OK button.
205
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
5.1.2 Specifications
A. ISWTrns (PC software)
(1) ISWTrns disk composition
/1050e/1050eP
• Setup disk: 2
• Rewritable disk: Varies for each copier
(2) Operating environment of the software

• OS: Windows95/98/98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP
• CPU: Pentium 75 MHz or above
• Memory: 16 MB or more for abroad/ 32 MB or more for domestic
• Free space in hard disk: 100 MB or more
• Others: PC provided with parallel (printer) or USB interface
(3) Idling time

• Varies according to each PC
(4) Parts required to conduct the ISW

• Personal computer (PC): 1
• IBM-compatible PC/AT: Provided with D-sub25 pin parallel interface
• ISWTrns setup program
• Parallel cable or USB cable: 1
Item Specifications
Board to be rewritten Overall control board, Printer control board, RADF control board, FD
control board, LS control board, IC control board, SD control board,
PB control board
Method for rewriting program 1. Local ISW from the PC
2. Web Utilities directional type ISW by using the Internet
3. Operation panel directional type ISW by using the Internet
Protocol FTP, HTTP
Network connection Use of the NIC of the copier main body
Rewritable program Image control I1 to I4 collectively, I1- I4
Printer control C1 to C2 collectively, C1, C2
DF F
FD, FS, LS, SD, PB H1, N1, S1-1/S1-2, B1, J1
Controller P1
Conditions Main body power turned on and program server provided
NOTE
• To execute the ISW, check surely to see if the power source of the main body has been turned on
in advance.
• For rewritable programs, it is not possible to rewrite plural programs at a time.
• When using the Internet ISW, it is required for it to be connected to the network environment by
using the main body NIC. As a network environment, programs must be down-loadable from the
program server on the Internet by using a ftp or http protocol.
206 2

5.1.3 Installation of the ISWTrns
Install the ISWTrns program to the PC.
1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure
Step Operation Remarks

1 Start the PC.
2 Copy the setup disk to the PC and double click the When there remains the ISWTrns.exe of
[Setup.exe] icon to start the install program. the old version, uninstall the old version
first, and then install the new version.
3 "ISWTrns setup screen"
Following the instructions on the screen, check the 1. For default, "C:\Program Files\KONI-
folder to which an installation is made, and then click CAMINOLTA\ISWTrns" is set as a folder to
[Next]. which an installation is made.
2. When changing the folder to which an
installation is made, click [Reference] and
specify one as you please.
4 "Program confirmation screen"

Following the instructions on the screen, check the 1. For default, "ISWTrns" is set as a folder
folder to which the ISWTrns program is stored and to which an installation is made.
then click [Next]. 2. When changing the folder to which an
installation is made, enter an folder name
directly, or select one from the existing
folder displayed.
5 "Information dialog screen"

Following the instructions on the screen, click [OK].
6 "Setup completion screen"
Following the instructions on the screen, click [Com-
pleted].
7 The installation of the ISWTrns program is automati-
cally completed.
207
5.1.4 Usage of the ISWTrns

A. Installation of the USB driver (Windows2000/XP)
When a connection is made between the PC and the copier main body with a USB cable, the installation of the
/1050e/1050eP
USB driver is automatically started by the plug-and-play. However, this May result in the installation of the Win-
dows USB driver (USBPRINT.SYS) and be sure to set the USB driver following the steps given below.
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 From the screen below, select "Install from the list or the specified location," and then click [Next].
2 In the "Select the retrieve and install option screen," select "Select a driver for installation with no
retrieval," and then click [Next].
3 Select the UBS driver in the driver selection screen and click "Next" to start installation.
Driver name: Konica Minolta bizhub 1050/P USB Driver (ISW)
4 When the [Completed] in the "Hardware update wizard completed screen" is displayed, click
[Completed] to exit the installation.
5 Check the "Device manager screen" to see if the USB driver has been correctly installed.
Driver name: Konica Minolta bizhub 1050/P USB Driver (ISW)
208

B. Setting of the communication method
(1) Setting up of the parallel port
When sending the parallel port data by using the ISWTrns program, it is necessary to release the ECP mode set-
1050e/1050eP
ting of the PC parallel port. The ISWTrns does not correspond to the data transmission through the parallel port.
Accordingly, sending data in the ECP mode may result in an error while in transmission. Therefore, when using
the ISWTrns with the PC set in the ECP, it is necessary to release the ECP mode.
1) ECP port release procedure

The following procedure shows the release of the ECP mode.

1 Start the PC.
2 Open "System" in "Control panel," select the 1. The LPT1 port is "ECP printer port (LPT1)," this is
"Device manager" tab and search LPT1 in an ECP port.
"Port (COM/LPT)." 2. The LPT1 port is "Printer port (LPT1)," this is a
normal parallel port.
3 When the printer port is set to the ECP port, The change of the BIOS varies depending on the
change the BIOS setting of the PC to release PC. For release of the ECP mode, contact the sys-
the ECP port. tem administrator.
4 Conduct a transmission test to check the When a correct transmission is once made on the
operations. copier, transmission is available for all types of
machines.
209
(2) Preparations for transmission on the copier

1) Checking of the ROM version
Before rewriting the ROM data, be sure to check the ROM version of the current control program by following
/1050e/1050eP
the procedure given below.
Step Operation
1 Enter the service mode.
2 Press the [08 ROM version] key in "Service mode menu screen."
3 Press the [01 ROM version] key in the sub-menu displayed on the right side of the screen.
4 "ROM version screen"
Press the [08 ROM version] key and check the version information.
2) Standby for the ISW transfer

Open the service mode of the copier and get into the standby of the ISW transmission.

1 Enter the service mode.
2 Press the [10 ISW] key in "Service mode menu
screen."
3 Press the [01 ISW] key in the sub menu dis-
played on the right side of the screen.
4 [Service mode menu]
Example: Image control: collective The ISW standby status is a status in which the
[Start] key is shown in the display section.
210

C. Firmware copy
(1) Creation of the folder
Start the ISWTrns program the installation of which has been completed, and set a folder into which a trans-
1050e/1050eP
ferred file (rewritten data) is stored.
1) Procedure

1 Start the PC.
2 Select "ISWTrns" from the start menu or double
click the "ISWTrns" icon on the desktop to start
up the "ISWTrns program."
3 "ISWTrns dialog screen"
This screen is displayed only when the
ISWTrns is started for the first time.
Click [OK] key to set a folder into which a trans-

ferred file (rewritten data) is stored.
4 "Option screen"
1. A folder (C:\Program Files\KonicaMi-
nolta\ISWTrns)into which the ISWTrns pro-
gram has been installed as a stored folder
(data folder) for default is set.
2. When changing a stored folder, click
[Browse] and specify any one as you please,
or make an entry directly in the editor box in
full path.
3. When the [Make Folder] key is clicked, a
hierarchical folder is created using the stored
Set a folder into which a transferred file (rewritten folder set above as a route.
data) is stored and then click [Make Folder] key.
5 "Option screen"
Click [OK] key. This operation stores the data folder created
in the step 4 into the INI file of the ISWTrns
program.
6 "ISWTrns screen"
The main screen of the ISWTrns program is displayed.
211
(2) Data copy

Using the ISWTrns program, copy data (rewritten data) which is sent to the PC.
/1050e/1050eP
1) Procedure

1 Start the PC.
2 Select "ISWTrns" from the start menu or double
click the "ISWTrns" icon on the desk top to start
up the "ISWTrns program."
3 Click the "Option" menu.
4 "Option screen"
Click [Data Copy] key.

5 "File copy screen"
Click [Browse] key.

6 Select the folder into which a file to be trans- 1. A folder selected is displayed in the upper dis-
ferred (data to be rewritten) is stored as a file play section of the file from which a copy was
from which the copy is made. made.
2. In the lower display section of a file from which
a copy was made, the transferred files (rewritten
data) stored in the elected folder are displayed.
7 Select a transferred file (rewritten data) you 1. A number of transferred files (rewritten data)
want to copy from the lower display section of a can be selected.
file from which a copy was made. 2. When copying all of the transferred files (rewrit-
ten data) that are displayed, skip this step and
proceed to the step 8.
212

8 Copy the transferred file (rewritten data) 1. When copying all of the transferred files (rewritten
selected by clicking [Copy] key into the data) that are displayed in the lower display section of
1050e/1050eP
folder created at the setup of the the file from which a copy was made, click [Copy all] key
ISWTrns. instead of [Copy] key.
2. In the upper display section of the file into which a
copy has been made, a folder name created at the
setup of the ISWTrns is displayed.
3. In the list shown in the lower display section of the file
into which a copy has been made, files the copy of
which has been successfully completed are listed in full
path. In the copy error file list, files the copy of which
have been failed are listed. As the causes of failure, fol-
lowing are considered.
A. There exists a file of the same name and "O/W" is not
checked.
B. A folder into which a file is stored is not found.
C. An overwrite is made on an overwrite-prohibited file.
4. When changing a transferred file (rewritten data) that
is currently stored into a new data, click the overwrite
check box to make a check mark.
9 After completion of copy, click [Refresh]
key.
10 Click [Return] to get back to "option
screen."
11 "Option screen"
Click [OK] key.
213
D. Firmware
(1) Firmware data flow
The following shows the flow of the ISW data.
/1050e/1050eP
PC Image processing Overall control board Printer control board

board RADF control board
FNS control board
FD control board
SD control board
PB control board
LS control board
IC board
When conducting the ISW in the entire system, be sure to conduct it in the order shown below.
Step Type of programs

1 *1 FD (H1), FS (N1), SD (B1), PB (J1), LS (S1-2, S1-1)*2
2 DF (F), IC (P1), Printer control board (C1 to C2 collectively, C1, C2)
3 Image control (I1 to I4 collectively, I1, I2, I3, I4)
*1 Be sure to conduct the low end first out of those set in the sequence 1.
Ex.) When the composition is made up of "LS-501 (1st set) + LS-501 (2nd set) + FS-503"
FS-503 (N1) → LS-501 (S1-2) → LS-501 (S1-1)
*2 When the LS is the coupling of 2 sets, the 1st set (main body side) is S1-1 and the 2nd set is S1-2.
NOTE
• When the overall control board is replaced, be sure to conduct first of all the ISW of the image con-
trol program. When the image control program is not contained in the overall control board, other
programs cannot be written.
• Programs are not stored in the image processing board. So, when the board is replaced, the ISW
is not required.
For FS and SD, be sure to take note of the followings.
NOTE
• When FS, SD or PB is directly connected to the main body
Ex.1) Main body + FS
Connect the jumper connector to CN19 on the FNS control board (FNSCB)
Ex.2) Main body + SD
Connect the jumper connector to CN19 on the SD control board (SDCB)
Ex.3) Main body + PB
Connect the jumper connector to CN29 on the PB control board (PBCB)
214 2

• When other option is connected between the main body and FS, SD or PB
Ex.1) Main body + FD + FS
Connect the connector on the FS side to CN19 on FNSCB
1050e/1050eP
Ex.2) Main body + FD + SD
Connect the connector on the SD side to CN19 on SDCB
Ex.3) Main body + FD + SD + FS
Connect the connector on the SD side to CN19 on SDCB
Connect the connector on the FS side to CN19 on FNSCB
Ex.4) Main body + FD + PB
Connect the connector on the PB side to CN29 on PBCB
2 215
[When the main power switch (SW1) is required to be turned OFF/ON in the middle of the ISW]
When the system configuration is as shown below, the SW1 is required to be turned OFF/ON in the middle of
the ISW.
/1050e/1050eP
• Case 1: Main body + IC + DF-603 + LS-501 (1st set) + LS-501 (2nd set) + FS-503
ISW sequence: FS-503 → LS-501 (2nd set) → SW1 OFF/ON → LS-501 (1st set) → DF-603 → IC → Main
body
• Case 2: Main body + IC + DF-603 + LS-501 (1st set) + LS-501 (2nd set)
ISW sequence: LS-501 (1st set) → SW1 OFF/ON → LS-501 (2nd set) → DF-603 → IC → Main body
However, when the LS-501 (2nd set) is conducted first, the SW1 is not required to be turned OFF/ON.
(2) Types of the transfer mode

There are 2 types of the ISW transfer mode on the machine side as shown below.
1) When writing a new program (when replacing a board or when failed in writing a program)
Displayed normally when starting up Method for ISW transmission

Overall control board Power save LED flashing Power ON mode
No display on operation board
Others Error code display Service mode
When there is an abnormality found with the image processing program of the image processing board, or an
error is found with date displayed on the operation panel, a startup is normally unavailable. In the condition like
this, when the power switch is turned on, the system gets into the ISW standby status.
And when an abnormality occurs while in rewriting the image processing program and the contents of the mem-
ory is damaged, the power save LED is flashing when the power is turned on again, and the system gets into
the ISW standby status.
When the image processing program is in the normal condition and there is an abnormality found with other pro-
grams, an SC error is normally display on the touch panel while in the startup.
2) When in the version up of the program
Displayed normally when starting up Method for ISW transmission

Overall control board Normal Service mode
Others Normal Service mode
(3) Use of each transmission mode

• Power ON mode
This mode is used when there is no program installed in the overall control board (OACB) of the copier main
body, or when an error code is displayed.
When the image control program of the OACB is not installed, the OACB can be written with the power
switch ON.
• Service mode
This mode is used when the image control program of the OACB has been already installed.
216

E. Connection to the main body
(1) When using the parallel cables
Preparations are made of the following when a connection is made.
1050e/1050eP
• PC into which transferred files (rewritten data) have been copied.
• Parallel cables
1) Procedure
Step Operations
1 Turn OFF the power of the copier.
2 Turn OFF the power of the PC.
3 Remove 5 screws and then remove the upper right cover.
4 Connect the IEEE1284 port and the PC with the cable.
5 Connect the parallel cables of the PC to the ISW connectors of the copier.
NOTE
• When exiting the ISW, be sure to clean each mirror of the scanner.
217
(2) When using the USB cables

Preparations are made of the following when a connection is made.
• PC into which transferred files (rewritten data) have been copied.
/1050e/1050eP
• UBS cables
1) Procedure
Step Operations
1 Turn OFF the power of the copier.
2 Turn OFF the power of the PC.
3 Remove 5 screws and then remove the upper right cover.
4 Connect the USB port and the PC with the cables.
5 Connect the USB cables of the PC to the ISW connectors.
NOTE
• When exiting the ISW, be sure to clean each mirror of the scanner.
218

F. Rewriting of firmware
(1) Relationship between the ISW and the display on the operation board
When the ISWTrns program starts up, the main screen of the ISWTrns is displayed. In the main screen, the
1050e/1050eP
selection of transferred files (rewritten data), the display of information, the confirmation of a transferred file
(rewritten data) and the transmission of the transferred file (rewritten data) are conducted. For detailed informa-
tion of the functions, see the following.
[9] [10] [1]

[2]
[3]
[4]
[8] [5]
[6]
[7]
[1] Version selection frame

• When transferred files of plural versions are stored in a folder, a selection is made if the version is transferred.
[2] Version stored folder edit box
• When the condition selection frame of [10] is decided, according to the data folder set in the option screen
and the INI file information, a folder name in full path is displayed. When a transferred file is in a folder other
than a data folder, a change can be made by using the [Browse] button of [4] or rewriting directly the folder
name. A transferred file that meets the INI file conditions displayed here in the folder is displayed in the list box
of [3].
[3] Version file selection list box
• Files to be displayed that exist in the folder selected in [2] above are displayed. The files to be displayed are
described with the wild card name in the ISWTrns.INI file. Accordingly, when there are plural version files in the
same file, plural versions are to be displayed in this list box. The list displayed here is sorted in the order of
names, and when the list is displayed, an item displayed last is selected. Changing an item of selection
decides the version of a transferred file that is transmitted.
[4] Browse key
• This key is used when the transfer folder is in a folder other than the default data folder. Display the folder
selection screen to select the folder of [2].
[5] Transferred file information display list
• Display a list of files that are actually transferred when the version file is selected at [3]. The number of files
actually transferred is described in the checksum file attached to the transferred file (rewritten data). When all
of the transferred files are not stored in the folder of [2], or when unnecessary files are included in the folder,
an error message "No transferred files found or a file with an illegal name found in the folder. Make sure of it"
is displayed. When [File check] key of [6] is pressed, the checksum of all the files displayed is calculated. The
value obtained is compared with the checksum value stored in the checksum file (*.SUM) attached to the
transferred files (rewritten data) and the result is displayed.
[6] File check key
• When this button is pressed with the transferred files displayed in "Transferred file information display list" of
[5], the file checksum (checksum of the entire files) of each transferred file displayed is calculated and the
result is shown by the side of each transferred file. And the result of the checksum calculation and the check-
sum file attached to the transferred file (rewritten data) are compared and the result of comparison is dis-
played in the format shown below.
219
"OK": Accord
"NG": Not accord
"??": A corresponding checksum not found
/1050e/1050eP
[7] File Send key

• The transmission of the transferred files is started.
[8] Send file information frame
• A list of files actually transferred is displayed based on the information selected in the frames [1] and [10], and
pressing the [File Check] key displays the checksum of files and the consistency of the checksum (OK, NG,
??).
[9] File detailed information list
• When the version file of [3] is selected, the detailed information of a file are displayed.
[10] Condition selection frame
• The condition of the transferred file (rewritten data) is checked. When all the 4 types of combo boxes are
selected, the folder of [2] is set based on the information set in the INI file. The contents of the combo box
selected is stored in the ISWTrns.INI file by "Transmission," and initialized and displayed when being started
next time.
(2) Rewrite procedure

Ex.: When the image control program is written collectively.
Step Operations
1 Copy the data to the PC. (For the procedure, see "C. Firmware copy.")
2 Start the ISWTrns program.
3 Select the machine type, the destination and the board types.
• Machine type: bizhub 1050, Destination: KBJ, Board type: 11 to 14 collectively
4 The data to be used is displayed in the version file selection box and the transmitted file information
frame.
5 Press the [File Check] key to check if the data to be used has any problem.
220

Step Operations
6 Place the copier main body in the standby for the ISW transfer. (For the procedure, see "2) Standby
for the ISW transfer.")
1050e/1050eP
7 Press the [Start] key on the copier main body side first, and then press the [File Send] key of the
ISWTrns.
8 The following window is displayed on the PC while in the data transfer.
9 When the data transfer is completed, the following window is displayed.

[PC side]
[Copier side]
10 When transmitting other data, press the [Yes] key.

When exiting the rewrite, press the [No] key.
When pressing the [No] key, the copier main body is automatically rebooted.
11 Check the ROM version information in the service mode to see if the rewrite operation is completed
normally.
It is not completed normally, repeat the procedure from the step 2.
221
5.1.5 Error list

Detection function
• When the copier main body detects an abnormal condition after turning on the power, the copier does not
/1050e/1050eP
display it on the main body touch panel, but inform you of it by lighting or flashing the LED (with the ISW
placed in the standby condition). For the LED display, see the table given below.
No. Transaction Power save LED

1 CPU in initialization when the power is turned on OFF
2 Flush memory in checking OFF
3 When an error is detected while in memory check (ISW standby status) Flashing in orange
4 ISW processing (data being received from the PC and flush memory being Flashing in green
written)
5 When an abnormality is detected while in data transmission Flashing alternately in
red and green
6 When an error is detected while in writing flush memory Flashing in red
7 Memory check successfully completed: while in rebooting OFF
(1) ISWTrns error list

The ISWTrns displays messages when an error is shown or the transaction is completed. The table below
shows the contents of the message and the status of the ISWTrns.
Message Status of the ISWTrns

The opening of the file the checksum of which is The opening of the checksum file failed. The file is in use
to be taken is not available. or damaged.
The opening of the file the checksum of which is The reading of the checksum file failed. The memory is
to be taken cannot be read. insufficient or the OS is in trouble.
The file cannot be opened. The opening of the transferred file failed. The file is in use
or damaged.
The LPT port cannot be opened The opening of the LPT port failed.
Communication port setting acquisition error The access to GetCommState failed.
Communication port setting error The access to GetCommState failed.
The transferred file cannot be opened. The opening of the transferred file is unavailable. The file
is in use or damage.
The Term Test file cannot be transmitted. The transmission of the communication test block failed.
1. The copier side is not in the receiving condition.
2. The cable is disconnected.
3. The transferred file is wrong.
Transmission of the file failed. The transmission of the transferred file failed. Communi-
cation troubles such as a disconnected cable.
The transmission to the LPT port failed. The output to the LPT port failed. Communication trou-
bles such as a disconnected cable.
The folder name is illegal. The name of the input folder is illegal. Be sure that the
input be started with the drive name such as "C:\"
The generation of the thread failed. The generation of the thread failed.
The transferred file is not found. A file that copies a file is not selected or does not exist in
the folder.
222

Message Status of the ISWTrns
Some files cannot be copied. 1. When the folder into which files are stored is not
found.
1050e/1050eP
2. When a file is copied into the folder in which a file of
the same name is contained with "Overwrite check box"
not checked.
3. When overwriting is made on an overwrite prohibited
file.
4. The file is used by another application. OS trouble.
The transferred file is not found, or a file with an The number of divisions of the transferred file written in
illegal name is found in the folder. Make sure of the checksum file does not correspond with the number
it. of files that actually exist.
1. When a file with an illegal name is in the data folder, or
a file name that seems to be illegal is displayed in the
folder list.
2. The number of divided files is insufficient. Check the
insufficient number of files in the folder list and copy
them again.
3. When the checksum file is damaged, copy it again to
the folder.
223
(2) Main body error list

The table below shows error codes.
Error code Description Program applicable

/1050e/1050eP
0x02 The internal work space cannot be secured. P

0x04 The DIMM space cannot be secured.
0x05 The DIMM space cannot be opened.
0x06 Data transmission to the DIMM failed.
0x21 The DIMM space on the controller side cannot be secured.
0x41 The format of the input data is abnormal. Common
0x42 The type name of input data is abnormal.
0x43 The board name of input data is abnormal.
0x64 Rewritten address error F
0x81 Input device such as input time out is abnormal. Common
0xC1 The erasing of the flush ROM failed. I
0xC2 The writing of the flush ROM failed.
0xC3 The ROM checksum is abnormal.
0xC4 Output device such as output time out is abnormal. Common
0xE1 Program SUM check error. F
Controller I/F writing error. P
Erasure error. C/ H/ N/ S/ J
0xE2 Writing error. C/ H/ N/ S/ J
Controller I/F verify error. P
0xE3 Blanc check error. F
Communication error. C/ H/ N/ S/ J
NOTE
• When rewriting the IC firmware, the execution of the ISW is inhibited if the initialization of the IC is
not completed.
• When any one of the errors shown above occurs, an error code is not displayed, but the message
"Now initializing Controller" is shown in the touch panel section.
224 2

5.1.6 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs while in the execution of the ISWTrns program.
Condition Cause Measure taken
1050e/1050eP
1 The ISWTrns does The ISWTrns file is damaged Set it up again.
not start up. The setup disk itself is damaged. Check the setup disk and set it up
again.
2 The screen is dis- The Japanese DLL[RCJP.DLL] is Set it up again.
played in English. damaged.
The INI file is set incorrectly. (The INI Check the ISWTrns.INI file.
file in English version is used.)
3 When an item in the The transferred file is not stored in Check to see if the relevant file is stored
combo box is the relevant folder. in the folder displayed in the "Folder"
selected, the trans- text box of "Select version." When a
ferred file is not dis- folder into which a file is stored is not
played. found, use the "File copy" function.
The data folder in the option screen Check the setting of the data folder.
is set incorrectly. When a folder into which a file is stored
is not found, use the "File copy" func-
tion.
The file name is illegal (or has been The file name must be used with no
changed.) change made. When the file name is
changed, the display or selection of the
file becomes unavailable. When the file
name is changed, return it to former
state.
The folder name is illegal (or has When the folder name created by the
been changed.) "Create folder" button in the option
screen has been changed, it cannot be
found. Return it to former state and
check it again.
4 "NG" is displayed The transferred file is damaged. Copy the file and check it again. When
while in the file check. "NG" still recurs, contact the supplier of
the file.
5 "??" is displayed When the transferred file was cop- Copy the checksum file to the same file
while in the file check. ied to the PC, the copying of the as the one for the transferred file at the
checksum file (*.SUM) was forgot- same time. (If you use the "Copy a file"
ten. function, a copy is made automatically.)
6 The transfer of the file
failed.
An error "The file can- The file is being used by anther pro- Exit another program. The error still
not be opened" is gram or system. recurs, reboot Windows.
displayed.
An error "Term Test The connection of the cable is loos- Check the cable to see if it is connected
file cannot be sent" is ened. securely or if there is any problem found
displayed. with the cable itself.
The main body is not in the receiv- Check the main body to see if it is in the
ing condition. receiving condition.
225
Condition Cause Measure taken

6 An error "The transmis- The connection of the cable is Check the cable to see if it is con-
/1050e/1050eP
sion to the LPT port loosened. nected securely or if there is any prob-
failed" is displayed. lem found with the cable itself.
Wrong data has been sent. Check the file information screen to see
if the receiving mode on the copier side
(type of receiving board) corresponds
with the transferred file.
If the file is sent for the first time, con-
tact the file supplier.
The length of the cable is out Use a cable the length of which is less
of specifications. than 2 m.
The parallel port of the PC is See the PC manual to release the ECP
set to the ECP mode. mode.
There is a compatibility prob- Conduct a test with a PC with an actual
lem between the parallel port performance of transmission, and
of the PC and the port on the check to see if there is a compatibility
copier main body side. problem found.
226

5.2 Internet ISW
5.2.1 Outline
1050e/1050eP
"Internet ISW" is a system in which instructions are given to the ISW by using browser so that the copier auto-
matically obtain the program from the program server. Using the Web functions allows you to conduct the ISW
at the user's premise without taking the programs with you.
5.2.2 Operating environment

To make use of the Internet ISW functions, the following conditions must be met.
• The copier must be connected to the network environment that allows the download of programs
from the Internet by using ftp or http protocol.
• In the following 4 cases, the "Internet ISW" does not operate on the copier.
• The main power switch (SW1) is off.
• The power switch (SW2) is off.
• The copier is in the auto shut-off.
• When the security enhanced mode is set to ON (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
NOTE
• It operates while in the jam, SC and lower power mode.
5.2.3 Major functions

"Internet ISW" allows you to use the following functions.
• Internet ISW using the Web Utilities

Programs can be rewritten by accessing the Web Utilities of the copier main body on the Web browser of the
PC. However, this requires a Web terminal that is connected to the copier through the network.
• Internet ISW using the operation panel

Programs can be rewritten by using the touch panel of the copier. However, this requires a Web terminal that
is connected to the copier through the network.
1 227
5.2.4 Initialization
To make use of the Internet ISW, it is necessary to set in advance the network parameter, program server
address and the fire wall address of the copier.
/1050e/1050eP
A. Setting from the operation panel

To introduce the copier main body into the network, set the IP address of the copier from the operation panel.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(1) Procedure

1 Press the [Utility/counter] button on the operation panel.
2 Select "06 Machine Manager Setting."
3 Select "04 Network Setting."
4 Select "01 Machine NIC Setting."
5 Enter "IP address," "Subnet mask," and "Gateway Address."
NOTE
• The IP address of the copier is normally assigned by the system administrator. For particulars,
contact the system administrator.
228

B. Setting from the Web Utilities
Enter the setting of the program server from the Web browser. At this time, in order to use the Web browser,
make preparations of the PC that can be introduced into the network.
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• No "space" is allowed in all set items.
• When an incorrect setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to correct it following the error
message. Correcting no input error may result in the download error of the program.
• The Web layout is subject to change without notice.
(1) Procedure
Step Operations
1 Start up the Web browser.
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, the main body Web may not be accessed.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. For Web browser, Internet Explorer or Netscape
Navigator is recommended. However, be sure to avoid setting from two or more browsers at a
time.
2 Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "A. Setting from the oper-
ation panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
3 Click [Extension for maintenance] in "Main page."

4 Enter the user name and the CE password in the "Extension for maintenance" and then press
[OK].
User name: ce (cannot be changed)

Password: CE Enter the password. (Default: "92729272")
229
Step Operations
5 Click [Internet ISW] in "Extension for maintenance."
/1050e/1050eP
6 Click [Initial Setting].
230

Step Operations
7 Set the proxy server.
When using no proxy server (fire wall), proceed to the step 9.
1050e/1050eP
Enable Proxy Select the following:
When using no proxy: "Connect to the program server."
When using ftp proxy: "Use ftp proxy."
When using http proxy: "Use http proxy."
Proxy Server When selecting "Use ftp proxy" in "Use of proxy," then select a proxy server
Type type from among the below.
Type 1: "User user@host name"
Type 2: "OPEN host name"
Type 3: "FW host name => FW password => SITE host name"
Type 4: "FW host name => FW password => User user@host name"
NOTE
• For types 2, 3 and 4, no guarantee is made.
• For authentication of proxy server, see "3.2.7 Authentication of
the proxy server in the Internet ISW."
Proxy Server IP When using the proxy server, set the IP address of the proxy server.
Address
Port Number When using the proxy server, set the number of the port that uses the proxy
server.
User name on When selecting the type 1 or type 2 in "Type of proxy server" above set the
the Proxy Server account of the proxy server.
Password for the When selecting the type 1 or type 2 in "Type of proxy server" above set the
Proxy Server password of the proxy server.
8 After completion of entry, click [Next] and then after checking the set items in the setting check
screen, click [Next]. However, if there is an input error, click [Back] following the message shown in
red and then re-set the item.
231
Step Operations
9 Set the program server. (Proxy is used.)
/1050e/1050eP
Program server address Set the address of the server into which the program to be
down loaded is stored. Select the protocol to be used from
the pull-down menu left and enter the address after that in
the text box on the right. In the case of ftp, it is a relative path
from the home directory.
User name on the Program Enter the account name of the program server.
Server
Password for the Program Enter the password of the program server.
Server
Receiving time out Set the receiving time out of the program. When the time is
out, the down load of the program forcibly comes to an end,
and the system returns to the normal mode without conduct-
ing the ISW.
10 After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check
screen, click [Completed]. However, if there is an input error, click [Back] following the message
shown in red and then re-set the item.
11 Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Protocol Select the protocol that receives the program.

Program Server IP Address Set the IP address of the server into which the program to
be down loaded is stored.
Target directory In the case of http, set the path after the host domain. In
the case of ftp, set the relative path from the home direc-
tory.
User name on the Program Enter the account name of the program server.
Server
Password for the Program Enter the password of the program server.
Server
Receiving time out Set the receiving time out of the program. When the time is
out, the down load of the program forcibly comes to an
end, and the system returns to the normal mode without
conducting the ISW.
232

Step Operations
12 After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check
1050e/1050eP
screen, click [Complete]. However, if there is an input error, click [Back] following the message
shown in red and then re-set the item.
13 Conduct the Download test.
• In the down load test, "test.dat" is down loaded from the program server set in the initialization
to check the settings. When the down load test failed, re-check the set items following the error
message.
• When the down load test is successfully completed, the communication speed and the
expected down load time are displayed as shown below. Refer to the "Receiving time out" set-
ting.
• When the down load test failed, the response error code from the server is display as shown
below. Since there may be a setting error, re-check the initialization.
233
5.2.5 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities

Using the Web Utilities of the copier allows the customer engineer, by just making a click from the browser, to
download the programs from the program server automatically for rewriting.
/1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure
Step Operations
1 Proceed to "Internet ISW" on the Web Utilities.
The ROM version of the board is displayed beside each of the board names.
2 Select one of the ISW-intended boards in the item "ISW," and check its check box. When specify-
ing the file name to be down loaded, enter it in the "File name" text box column. When specifying
no file name, obtain the following from the specified program server address.
3 After completion of entry, click the [ISW] key.

If there is an input error, click [Back] following the message displayed in red and then enter the item
again.
234

Step Operations
4 Checking of the ISW conditions.
1050e/1050eP
From the screen shown below, you can check the current processing condition to see if there is any
error.
• "ISW in communication"
• "ISW in rewriting"
• "Completed successfully": Be sure to avoid pressing the "Read again" key of the browser to
reboot after successful completion.
• "Aborted due to a communication error."
• "Aborted due to a communication time error."
• "Aborted due to a writing error."
5 When the ISW is completed successfully, the copier restarts automatically to complete the ISW.
NOTE
• Clicking the [Check progress] key allows you to abort the ISW only while in program-
ming.
6 After restart of the copier main body, check the ROM version in "Internet ISW main screen" to see if
it is being updated successfully.
5.2.6 Notes for use

(1) Notice to the administrator
When conducting Internet ISW, be sure to notify the administrator of it and get approval from him in advance.
And conduct this operation when the copier is not used. When the copier is in use (with jobs accompanied),
Internet ISW does not operate.
(2) When the power supply is cut off while writing the image control program in the overall control
board (OACB).
When the main power switch (SW1) turns off due to a power failure, the copier does not start up.
If the main power switch is turned off due to the failure of power supply and Internet ISW is abnormally termi-
nated, be sure to go to the copier that has been conducting the Internet ISW and use the ISWTrns to reperform
the rewriting of the program.
(3) Failure while in low power mode

When ISW failed due to the down load of the program or the data check error, get it back in the normal mode.
235
5.2.7 Internet ISW using the touch panel

When the customer engineer uses the Internet ISW from the touch panel, with no PC brought with, the copier
can download programs from the program server to rewrite them automatically.
/1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure
Ex.: When the image control program is rewritten collectively.
Step Operations
1 Display "ISW rewrite screen."
2 Press [Internet ISW] key provided below the screen.
3 Press [Collective] key of <Image processing system>.
236

Step Operations
4 Pressing the [Start] key starts the download of the latest program for rewriting.
In a case in which the download of an old version programs is required, press the [File Name Input]
1050e/1050eP
key and enter the file name by hand for execution.
5 When ISW is completed normally, the copier is rebooted and exits ISW automatically.
6 After the copier main body is rebooted, check the [ROM version screen] to see if the ROM version
has been updated normally.
237
5.2.8 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW

A. Proxy server
Proxy server which is provided on the inside of the fire wall is the generic name of a mail server that serves the
/1050e/1050eP
proxy of a client who receives an access demand (HTTP and FTP) from the client.
B. Authentication of the proxy server

There are 4 types of authentication methods for the proxy server.
The Internet ISW is corresponding to these 4 types.
C. Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list

(1) Type 1: User user name@host name
When accessing the outside through the proxy, authentication to the proxy server is not required.
When accessing the outside through the proxy server, or when the entry of the user name and password of the
proxy server is not required, this proxy authentication is likely to be used.
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description

USER User name@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the
name program server address
PASS Password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
(2) Type 2: OPEN host name

This is almost the same as the type 1, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 1 authentication, this set-
ting is used.
Command

OPEN Host name ftp expanded function, Transmit the user name of the program server
defined for each server
USER User name 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
(3) Type 3: FW user name => FW password => SITE host name
This is a type that requires the authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing the outside.
The information of the server you want to access and the user name and password of the proxy server (F/W) are
required.
When accessing the outside through the proxy server and when the user name and the password of the proxy
server are required, this proxy authentication is likely to be used.
238

Command

USER FW user name 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
1050e/1050eP
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
SITE Host name ftp expanded Transmit the user name of the program server
function, defined
for each server
USER User name 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
(4) Type 4: FW user name => FW password => USER user name@host name
This is almost the same as the type 3, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 3 authentication, this set-
ting is used.
Command

USER FW user name 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
USER User name@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the
name program server address
D. Remarks
For fwtk2.1 (for Unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), the type 1 authentication is used.
For most of the proxy servers, the type 1 authentication is used.
When the authentication type of the proxy server is not known, you are recommended to make settings in type
1 authentication as a temporary measure.
239
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
6. OTHERS
6.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted
/1050e/1050eP
6.1.1 Scanner section

A. Read position adjusting plates /Fr and /Rr
(1) Positions from which the screws are not allowed to be removed
• Attaching screws, one each, of the read position adjusting plates /Fr and /Rr
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
1050fs2073c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [3] Read position adjusting plate /Rr
[2] Read position adjusting plate /Fr
(2) Reason of prohibition

The read position adjusting plates /Fr and /Rr hold in place the slit glass that becomes the read position while in
the DF scan. The displacement of the slit glass may cause the image read by the DF to be deformed. Accord-
ingly, this position of installation is not allowed to be changed.
240
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 6. OTHERS

B. Mirror unit/exposure unit
(1) Position not allowed to be adjusted
• Installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit
1050e/1050eP
[2]
[1]
1050fs2219c
[1] Mirror unit [2] Exposure unit

The distance between the mirror unit and the exposure unit affects the magnifications of the original to be read
in the sub scan direction. Therefore, the installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit must not
be arbitrarily adjusted. However, when the exposure unit and the scanner wire have been removed, these parts
must be reinstalled using the optics unit positioning jig.
241
6.1.2 CCD unit

• 9 screws used to assemble the CCD unit
/1050e/1050eP
• 4 attaching screws of the lens reference plate assembly
[4] [3] [1]
[2]
[2]
[5] [1] [1] [5] 1050fs2504c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Lens reference plate assembly
[2] Screws not allowed to be removed [5] Attaching screw of the CCD unit (allowed to
[3] CCD unit be removed when replacing the CCD unit)

The accuracy of the CCD unit is guaranteed as a unit, and if disassembled, its accuracy is not guaranteed.
Accordingly, screws that lead up to the disassembly of the CCD unit are not allowed to be removed.
The lens reference plate assembly acts as the basis for the installation position of the CCD unit. Removing this
assembly may cause the displacement of the optical axis of the CCD unit. So, be sure not to remove the attach-
ing screws of the lens reference plate assembly.
242

6.1.3 Writing section
• 11 attaching screws of the writing section cover
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1] 1050fs2220c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Writing section cover

The inside of the writing section becomes the laser light path. Opening the cover allows dust and dirt to get
inside, which may block the laser light path. Therefore, the screws of the writing section cover are not allowed to
be removed.
243
6.1.4 Developing unit

• 2 fixing screws of the developer regulation blade
/1050e/1050eP
• 1 fixing screw of the magnet angle adjusting knob
[5] [1]
[4]
[3] [2] 1050fs2221c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Developing roller

[2] Screws not allowed to be removed [5] Developer regulation blade
[3] Magnet angle adjusting knob

The developer regulation blade and the magnet angle adjusting knob both decide the heights of the developer in
the developing roller. They have been adjusted to an appropriate value in advance. Accordingly these fixing
screws are not allowed to be removed.
244

6.1.5 Transfer/separation charger unit
A. Transfer guide plate/transfer assist home sensor assembly
1050e/1050eP
• 5 attaching screws of the transfer guide plate
• 2 attaching screws of the transfer assist home sensor assembly
[4] [1]
[3]
[2] 1050fs2222c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [3] Transfer assist home sensor assembly
[2] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Transfer guide plate

The transfer guide plate decides the approach angle of paper against the transfer position and the displacement
of the installation position may result in poor transfer. Accordingly, the attaching screws of the transfer guide
plate are not allowed to be removed.
The transfer assist home sensor (PS37) detects the starting point to drive the transfer assist sheet assembly and
the displacement of this position may result in poor transfer or damage to the drum. Accordingly, the attaching
screws of the transfer assist home sensor assembly are not allowed to be removed.
245
B. Transfer assist sheet assembly

• 2 attaching screws of the actuator
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2] 1050fs2223c
[1] Actuator [2] Screws not allowed to be removed

The accuracy of the transfer assist sheet assembly is guaranteed as a unit, and if disassembled, its accuracy is
not guaranteed. Accordingly, screws that lead up to the disassembly of the transfer assist sheet assembly are
not allowed to be removed.
246

C. Separation support member
• Separation support member, 2 pcs
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[1] 1050fs2225c
[1] Separation support member

The separation support members decide the distance from the transfer wire and the separation wire to paper,
and removing them changes the attaching height of the wire, thus resulting in the reduced performance of the
transfer and the separation. Accordingly, the separation support members are not allowed to be removed.
247
6.1.6 Main body (write position adjusting shaft)

• 2 attaching screws of the write position adjusting shaft fixing plate
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[3] [2]
1050fs2224c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [3] Write position adjusting shaft
[2] Write position adjusting shaft fixing plate

The write position adjusting shaft is the reference angle of the installation of the write section to the drum.
Removing it may undermine the parallelism of the drum with the write section, thus causing the image to be
deformed. Therefore, be sure not to remove the attaching screw of the fixing plate of the write position adjusting
shaft.
248

6.2 List of parts to be disassembled and reassembled
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and reassembly of the parts which are consid-
ered necessary to replace (other than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for
the covers are not required to be disassembled while in normal service operations.
• For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, see "3.5 Maintenance procedure".
No Section Parts name Page referred to

1 Cover Front door Rt P.251
2 Front door Lt P.252
3 Toner supply door P.254
4 Rear cover P.250
5 Right cover P.250
6 Left cover P.251
7 Upper cover /Rr1 P.255
8 Upper cover /Rr2 P.255
9 Upper cover /Rt P.256
10 Upper cover /Lt P.257
11 Upper cover /Fr P.257
12 Original glass P.256
13 Scanner section CCD unit P.260
14 Exposure lamp P.262
15 Exposure unit P.264
16 Scanner wire P.266
17 Writing section Writing section P.269
18 Paper feed section Lift wire P.284
19 Paper feed assist fan P.277
20 Paper lift motor P.284
21 Registration section Multi feed detection board /1
P.289
22 Multi feed detection board /2
23 ADU ADU P.291
24 HDD Hard disk /1 P.294
25 Hard disk /2 P.295
249
6.3 Disassembling/reassembling procedure
Caution:
/1050e/1050eP
• When disassembling/reassembling the parts, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body
6.3.1 Cover
A. Removing/reinstalling the rear cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 9 screws [1] and then remove the rear
[2] [1]
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[1] 1050fs2057c
B. Removing/reinstalling the right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the right
[2]
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
1050fs2058c
250

C. Removing/reinstalling the left cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the left
1050e/1050eP
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
[2]
1050fs2059c
D. Removing/reinstalling the front door /Rt

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door /Rt [1].
2. Loosen 2 screws [2] and bring down the shaft
[3].
3. Remove the front door /Rt [1].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2060c
251
E. Removing/reinstalling the front door /Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door /Lt [1].
/1050e/1050eP
2. Loosen 2 screws [2], bring down the shaft [3]

and remove the front door /Lt [1].
[1]
[3]
[2]
1050fs2061c
252

NOTE
• When reinstalling the front door /Lt [1], be
[3] sure to insert the projection [4] of the hinge
1050e/1050eP
[3] into the hole [2] provided in the lower sec-
tion of the front door /Lt.

[4]
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2] 1050fs2062c
253
F. Removing/reinstalling the toner supply door

(1) Procedure
1. Open the toner supply door [1].
/1050e/1050eP
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the hinge

[3] together with the toner supply door [1].
[3] NOTE
• When reinstalling the toner supply door [1], be
sure to insert the projection [6] of the hinge
[2] [5] into the hole [4] provided in the lower sec-
tion of the toner supply door.
[1]
steps in reverse.
[6]
[4]
[5]
1050fs2063c
254

G. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr1
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• The same removal and reinstallation procedure is applicable when the DF-603 is provided.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the upper
cover /Rrl [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
1050fs2064c
H. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr2
NOTE
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screw caps [1].
[3]
cover /Rr2 [3].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
1050fs2065c
255
I. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rt
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screw caps [1].
[3]
[2] cover /Rt [3].
[2]
steps in reverse.
[1]
1050fs2066c
J. Removing/reinstalling the original glass
NOTE
• When reinstalling the original glass, be sure that the shading correction plate (white) is on the
upper side of the glass.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover /Rt.
[3] [6]
(See P.256)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the origi-
[4]
[5] nal stopper plate /Lt [2].
nal stopper plate /Rr [4].
[1] 4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the origi-
[2] nal stopper plate /Rt [6].
5. Remove the original glass [7].
steps in reverse.
[7] 1050fs2067c
256

K. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Lt
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure
[1]
nal stopper plate /Lt [2].
[4]
[2] cover /Lt [4].
steps in reverse.
[3]
1050fs2068c
L. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Fr
NOTE
a. Procedure
[1]
(See P.256)
2. Remove the original glass.
(See P.256))
3. Remove the upper cover /Lt.
(See P.257)
4. Remove the original glass guide /Fr [1].
1050fs2069c
257
5. Remove the front door /Rt.

(See P.251)
6. Remove the front door /Lt.
/1050e/1050eP
(See P.257)
7. Remove 4 screws [2] provided on the bottom of
the upper cover /Fr [1].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
1050fs2070c
258

[1] [2]
cover /Fr [2].
1050e/1050eP
steps in reverse.
1050fs2071c
259
6.3.2 Scanner section

A. Removing/reinstalling the CCD unit
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• After completion of reinstallation of the CCD unit, be sure to conduct the image adjustments in of
the service mode. (See P.317)
(1) Procedure
[1]
(See P.257)
(See P.256)
3. Remove 10 screws [1] and then remove the lens
light blocking cover [2].
[1]
[2] [1] 1050fs2074c
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cable

cover [2].
[2]
[1] 1050fs2075c
5. Remove the ribbon cable [2] from the CCD board

[2]
(CCDB) [1].
[1] 1050fs2076c
260

NOTE
[2]
• When removing the ribbon cable [1], bring
down the lock lever [3] of the connector [2] in
1050e/1050eP
the direction as shown in the drawing to
release the lock and pullout the ribbon cable.
[3] [1] 1050fs2077c
• When reinstalling the ribbon cable [1], make

[3]
sure that the lock lever [2] is released. And
insert the ribbon cable fully into the connector
[3] while taking care that the conductor side
of the ribbon cable comes to the under side of
the lock lever.
[1]
[2] 1050fs2078c
And then return the lock lever [1] to its origi-

nal position and lock the ribbon cable [2].
[1] [2] 1050fs2079c
261

[4]
ground terminal [2].
7. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the CCD
/1050e/1050eP
unit [4].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[1] [2]
1050fs2080c
B. Removing/reinstalling the exposure lamp

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] (See P.256)
(See P.256)
(See P.257)
4. Remove the original glass guide /Fr [1].
5. Remove the original glass guide /Rr [2].
1050fs2081c
262

6. Move the exposure unit [1] to the notch [2] of the
main body frame.
[9] 7. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the cable
1050e/1050eP
clamp [4].
[8] 8. Remove the connector [5].
9. Remove the screws [6], one each, and then
remove the lamp presser plates /Fr [7] and /Rr
[8].
[6] 10. Remove 2 screws [9] and then remove the expo-
sure lamp [10].
[2]
steps in reverse.
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[4] [7]
1050fs2082c
263
C. Removing/reinstalling the exposure unit

[5] [6]
/1050e/1050eP
(See P.256)
[3] (See P.256)
(See P.257)
[8] 4. Remove the upper cover /Fr.
(See P.257)
5. Move the exposure unit [1] to the notch position
[7] [2] of the main body frame.
6. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the cord
[4] presser member [4].
[2]
[1] ground terminal [6].
9. Remove 4 screws [8] and then remove the expo-
sure unit [1].
[2]
[8]
1050fs2083c
264

1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] toward the V-mirror
positioning hole [2].
1050e/1050eP
2. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [3] into the V-
mirror positioning hole [2] and fix the V-mirror unit
[1].
[3]
NOTE
• Be sure to insert the optics unit positioning jig
[3] from the front side and pass it through the
V-mirror unit [1].
[1] [7] [2]
• Be care full not to confuse the V-mirror posi-
tioning hole [2] with the unused hole [4].
3. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [6] into the

[5] exposure unit positioning hole [5].
4. Press the exposure unit [7] against the optics unit
[6] positioning unit [2].
5. Reinstall the exposure unit with 4 screws.
[4]
6. Remove 2 optics unit positioning jigs.
[3]
7. For the parts to be installed hereafter, reinstall
[3]
1050fs2084c
265
D. Stretching of the scanner wire
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• Be sure to wind the wire closely without overlapping each other.

• When re-stretching or replacing the scanner wire, be sure to use the optics unit positioning jig.
• When re-stretching or replacing the scanner wire, be sure to conduct the image adjustment in the
service mode.(See P.317)
(1) Procedure
[1] [2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[3]
1050fs2226c
1. Remove the upper cover /Rt. (See P.256)

2. Remove the original glass. (See P.256)
3. Remove the upper cover /Lt. (See P.257)
4. Remove the upper cover /Fr. (See P.257)
5. Move the exposure unit. (See P.264)
6. Move the V-mirror unit [1] toward the V-mirror positioning hole [2].
7. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [3] into the V-mirror positioning hole [2] and fix the V-mirror unit [1].
NOTE
• Be sure to insert the optics unit positioning jig [3] from the front side and pass it through the V-mir-
ror unit [1].
• Be care full not to confuse the V-mirror positioning hole [2] with the unused hole [4].
266

1050e/1050eP
[6] [7] [6]
[3] [3]
[5] [12]
[5]
[2] [13] [9]
[22]
[15] [13]
[14]
[17]
[22]
[4]
[8] [11] [1]

[21]
[16] [8]
[18]
[10] [4]
[20]
[15] [7]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[11]
1050fs2227c
8. Drop the metal ball [3] in between the scanner wire /Fr [1] and /Rr [2] into the installation hole of the drive
pulley [4]. And with this hole as a starting point, wind the wire 4 turns [5] outwards and 5 turns [6] inwards.
NOTE
• Be sure to wind the scanner wire with the metal ball [7] at the end outwards and the scanner wire
with the wire terminal [8] at the end inwards.
• For both scanner wires, be sure to pull out the one wound outwards in the paper feed direction [9]
from above the drive pulley and the one wound inwards in the paper exit direction [10] from above
the drive pulley.
9. For each scanner wire that has been wound round the drive pulley, fasten it to the respective wire stoppers
through the wire stopper /Fr [11] or /Rr [12] pulley /1 [13] and via the outside of the pulley [15] of the V-mir-
ror unit [14].
NOTE
• Each wire stopper is provided with 2 grooves. Fix the metal ball [7] in the groove on the outside for
the wire stopper /Fr [11], and fix it in the groove on the inside for the wire stopper /Rr [12].
267
10. For each scanner wire that has been wound round the drive pulley, after reversing it by the pulley /2 [16],
pass it through the inside of the pulley [15] of the V-mirror unit [14] and pulley /3 [17] and hook the wire ter-
minal [8] to the spring fixing plate [18].
/1050e/1050eP
11. Paste the wire restriction sheet [19] to the wire

[11][12] [19]
stoppers /Fr [11] and /Rr [12]. (The sheet is com-
mon to both the front and rear stoppers.)
NOTE
• Be sure to paste it so that the wire restriction
sheet comes in contact with the wire.
1050fs2421c
12. Fasten tentatively each of the spring fixing plates with the screw [20].
13. Loosen once the screw [20], attach the spring [21] between 2 spring fixing plate [18] and then fix each
spring fixing plate with the screw [20].
NOTE
• After attaching each of the scanner wires, check the respective exposure unit mounting brackets
[22] if they turn to the inside.
14. For the parts to be installed hereafter, reinstall them following the removal steps in reverse.
268

6.3.3 Writing section
Cautions:
1050e/1050eP
• Be absolutely sure not to turn on the writing section with it displaced from its regular position.
• Be absolutely sure not to remove the writing section cover. If laser beams get in your eyes, you
may suffer loss of sight.
• After turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2), be absolutely sure not to
remove the writing section for about 2 minutes.
A. Removing/reinstalling the writing section

(1) Procedure
(See P.250)
2. Remove 8 screws [1] and then remove the writ-
ing section cover [2].
[4]
[3] NOTE
• When reinstalling the writing section cover
[2], hold it by inserting the notch holes [3] at
either side into the hooks [4] of the main body
frame.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3] [4]
1050fs2085c
269

[1]
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] and pull out the writing sec-
tion [3] for removal.
/1050e/1050eP

steps in reverse.
[3]
[2] 1050fs2086c
270

6.3.4 Paper feed section
A. Removing/reinstalling the lift wire
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• The same procedure for removing/reinstalling the lift wire is used for both the trays /1 and /2.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray.
(See P.94)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2] with
washer.
[3] 3. Remove the connector [3] and then remove the
tray front cover [4].
[1] [4] [1]
[2]
[2]
1050fs2754c
271

[6] [4] [2]
6. Remove the screw [3].
/1050e/1050eP
7. Remove the bearing [5], the bearing [6] and the

torque restriction gear [7] together with the gear
mounting plate [4].
[3]
NOTE
[5] • When removing the gear mounting plate [4],
take note that the gear comes off freely.
[1] • When reinstalling it, make sure that the step
[7] [8] of each shaft gets in the gear mounting
[2] plate [4] securely.
• Be sure to reinstall the bearing (large) [5] from
the outside of the gear cover [4] and the bear-
ing (small) [6] from the inside.
[4]
[8]
1050fs2755c
272

1050e/1050eP
[4] [1] [2]
[2]
[3]
1050fs2756c
10. Slide the pulley [1] and remove the wire end [2]
[2]
from the shaft hole [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, lift up the paper lift plate
a little to give slack to the lift wire you want to
insert. Then insert the wire ends [2] into the
shaft hole [3] one at a time and fix it with the
pulley [1].
[3] [1] 1050fs2757c
273

[5] [4] [3] [1] [2]
2 places and then remove the wire covers [2],
one each.
/1050e/1050eP
12. Remove the lift wires /Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] from
the pulley [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the lift
wires /Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] are contained in the
wire cover [2] and they are not crossing each
other.
[4] [5]
1050fs2758c
13. Pull out from up to down the lift wires /Fr1 and /
[2] [1]
Fr2 [2] from the arm [1] of the paper lift plate.
NOTE
• Be sure to pull out the lift wire gently and take
care that the lift wire does not get damaged
by the edges of the metal frame.
1050fs2759c
274

[3] [5] ground [2].
1050e/1050eP
[4].
16. Remove 4 screws [5] and then remove the con-
nector mounting plate [6].
[4] [2] [1] [6]
1050fs2760c

[2] [3]
18. Slide the pulley [2] and remove the wire end [3]
from the hole [4].
[4]
[1] 1050fs2761c
275

[1] [2] [3] [5] [4]
2 places and then remove the wire covers [2],
one each.
/1050e/1050eP
20. Remove the lift wires /Rr1 [4] and /Rr2 [5] from
the pulley [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the lift
wires /Rr1 [4] and /Rr2 [5] are contained in the
wire cover [2] and they are not crossing each
other.
[5] [4] 1050fs2762c
21. Pull out from up to down the lift wires /Rr1 and /
[2] [1]
Rr2 [2] from the arm [1] of the paper lift plate.
NOTE
• Be sure to pull out the lift wire gently and take
care that the lift wire does not get damaged
by the edges of the metal frame.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• The lift wire /Fr is grey in color and /Rr black
in color.
• Make sure that the lift wires do not cross
each other.
• After completion of installation, check the
paper lift plate to ensure it is level.
1050fs2763c
276

B. Removing/reinstalling the paper feed assist fan
NOTE
1050e/1050eP
• The same removal and reinstallation procedures of the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Rr1
(FM21) and /Fr2 (FM22), /Fr2 (FM23) are used for trays /1 and /2.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray.
[2] [3] [1]
(See P.94)
2. Loosen a screw [1].
3. With the release lever [2] placed at its original
position, hold the stopper [3] and tighten the
screw [1] to fix the stopper.
4. Remove the tray front cover and lift wire.
(See P.271)
1050fs2422c
1 277
5. Loosen the screws [1], one each provided at the

[4] [5] [3] 4 places and slide the bracket [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
/1050e/1050eP
6. Hold down the paper stopper [3] and pull out the
lift plate cover [4] upward to remove it.
NOTE
• When removing the lift plate cover [4], raise
up the pick-up roller [5] in the arrow-marked
direction to move it out of the way.
• When reinstalling the bracket [2], push it
lightly in the opposite direction of removal
and fix it with screws.
[1]
[2]
1050fs2764c
278

7. Rotate the gear of the drive section by hand and
raise the paper lift plate [1] upward. Move the
coupling gear [2] in the arrow-marked direction
1050e/1050eP
and then fix the lift plate.
[1] [2]
1050fs2765c
8. Remove the connectors [1], one each, and the

wire binding bands [2], one each.
NOTE
• To make it clear, the picture shows the condi-
tion in which the lift plate is removed.
[1] [2] [1]

1050fs2767c
1 279
9. Remove the screw [1], the screw [2], the screw

[1] [3]
[3] and the screws [4], 3 each.
10. Remove the paper guides /Fr [5] and /Rr [6].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, be sure to fasten the
paper guides /Fr [5] and /Rr [6] with the
screws [2] and the screws [3], 3 each. Then
tentatively tighten the screws [1] and the
screws [4], 3 each and tighten them up fully
after placing the paper guides /Fr and /Rr in a
[5] [6] horizontal position.
To check the verticality of the paper guides,
move the guide plate up and down with copy
paper placed on the lift plate and check the
clearance of the paper guide.
[4]
[2] 1050fs2768c
280 1

11. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, of the paper
[1]
guide /Rr and then remove the paper guide cover
[2].
1050e/1050eP
[2]
1050fs2769c
12. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove

[2] [1]
the paper stopper mounting plate [2].
13. Remove 6 screws [3], the screw (with a washer
and a spring washer) [4], 3 screws [5] and the fan
[3] motor mounting plate [6].
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4] 1050fs2770c
281

[3]
15. Remove 2 screws (nuts) and the paper feed
assist fans /Rr1 (FM21) and /Rr2 (FM23) [3].
/1050e/1050eP
[2]
[1]
1050fs2771c
16. Remove the screws [1], 2 each of the paper

[1] guide /Fr and then remove the paper guide cover
[2].
17. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the lever
[2] cover [4].
[3]
[4]
1050fs2772c
282

18. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper
[1] stopper mounting plate [2].
[3] [2] 19. Remove 6 screws [3], the screw (with a washer
1050e/1050eP
and a spring washer) [4] and 3 screws [5], and
then remove the fan motor mounting plate [6].
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
1050fs2773c
20. Cut off the connector [1] and the wire binding
band [2].
21. Remove 2 screws [3] and the paper feed assist
fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Fr2 (FM22) [4].
[3] [4] NOTE

• When reinstalling it, be sure to replace the
wire binding band with a new one.

steps in reverse.
[2]
NOTE
• After completion of reinstallation, be sure to
[1]
conduct the paper size detection adjust-
ments. (See chapter III "4.3.1 Tray adjust-
1050fs2774c
ment.")
283
C. Removing/reinstalling the paper lift motor
NOTE
/1050e/1050eP
• The same removal and reinstallation procedures are employed for the paper lift motors /1 (M25)
and /2 (M26) of the trays /1 and /2.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray.
(See P.94)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and 2 screws [2] with
washer.
[3] 3. Remove the connector [3] and then remove the
tray front cover [4].
[1] [4] [1]
[2]
[2]
1050fs2775c
284

[1]
[2] and the stopper [3].
1050e/1050eP
[2] [3] 1050fs2776c
285

[2]
7. Remove the screw [3].
/1050e/1050eP
[4] 8. Remove the bearing [5], the bearing [6] and the
torque restriction gear [7] together with the gear
[6]
[3] mounting plate [4].
[5]
[1] NOTE
• When removing the gear mounting plate [4],
[7]
take note that the gear comes off freely.
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the step
[8] of each shaft gets in the gear mounting
plate [4] securely.
[2] • Be sure to reinstall the bearing (large) [5] from
the outside of the gear cover [4] and the bear-
ing (small) [6] from the inside.
[4]
[8]
1050fs2777c
286

1050e/1050eP
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
1050fs2778c
[1]
1050fs2779c
287
11. Remove the connector [1] and the wire binding

[3] [1] [2]
band [2], and then remove the paper lift motors /
1 (M25) and /2 (M26) [3].
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• For ease of the removal and reinstallation
operations, press the release lever [4] so that
the coupling gear [5] can raise.

steps in reverse.
[4] [5] 1050fs2780c
288

6.3.5 Registration section
A. Removing/reinstalling the multi feed detection board
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• The multi feed detection boards /1 and /2 were adjusted as a unit during the production process.
Be sure to replace it as a unit when replacing one.
• When replacing the multi feed detection board /1 and /2, be sure to conduct the sensitivity adjust-
ments of the multi feed sensor. (See P.380)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the registration section.
(See P.112)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the remove the multi
feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [2].
[2] [1]
1050fs2228c
289
3. Turn over the registration section and remove the

connector [1].
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the multi
/1050e/1050eP
feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) [3].

steps in reverse.
[3]
[1] [2] 1050fs2229c
290

6.3.6 ADU
A. Removing/reinstalling the ADU
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• The ADU is very heavy. So when removing and/or reinstalling it, be sure to conduct the operation
with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU main body.
(See P.112)
2. Remove the fusing section.
[1] (See P.153)
3. Remove the transfer/separation section.
(See P.112)
(See P.112)
6. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the con-
nector cover [3].
7. When reinstalling the connector cover, be sure to
set the positioning hole [4] to the projection [5] of
[4] [5]
the ADU.
[2] [3]
1050fs2142c
291

/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[1] 1050fs2143c
9. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the cable arm

[2].
[2]
[1]
1050fs2144c
292

10. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and release the
ADU from the guide rails /Lt [3] and /Rt [4].
[6]
11. Hold the stay [5] and the paper reverse/exit sec-
1050e/1050eP
tion [6] with 2 people and remove the ADU.
NOTE
• Be sure place the ADU in a horizontal place.
• Placing the ADU from the front side diagonally
may deform the open/close door /A [7]. Be
absolutely sure to avoid this.
[4] [1]
steps in reverse.
[7]
[2]
[5]
[1] [3] 1050fs2145c
293
6.3.7 HDD
A. Removing/reinstalling the hard disk /1
(1) Procedure
/1050e/1050eP

[4] [1] (See P.256)
3. Raise the cover [2] and remove 2 connectors [4]
connected to the image processing board (IPB)
[1] [3].
[2]
[1]
[1] [3] 1050fs2230c

[5]
5. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the hard
disk mounting bracket [3].
[1]
disk /1 (HDD1) [5].
steps in reverse.
[4]
[2]
[3]
[2] [4] 1050fs2231c
294

B. Removing/reinstalling the hard disk /2
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover.
1050e/1050eP
(See P.250)
disk mounting bracket [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and the remove the hard
disk /2 (HDD2) [5].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
[5]
[2]
[4]
1050fs2232c
295
6.4 Commercially available parts

6.4.1 Status indicator light
/1050e/1050eP
A. Connecting connector
(1) Connector position
[1]
1050fs2233c
[1] CN160
296

(2) Connector specifications
Connector Pin No. Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
1 PAT1 Light ON signal L signal output when the Open collector
1050e/1050eP
printing available
2 PAT2 L signal output while in the
scanning or printing operation
3 PAT3 L signal output when an
abnormal stop occurs due to
jams, error codes, no paper,
160
or no toner
4 PAT4 L signal output when the
toner supply message is dis-
played
5 24V 24V DC source At all times 24V,
500 mA
6 P.GND Power ground — —
297
B. Procedure for reinstallation

(1) Preparation in advance
• Be sure set the wiring harness pin assignment on the status indicator light to the pin assignment of CN160 on
/1050e/1050eP
the main body side so that the CN can be connected.
(2) Procedure on the main body side

1. Remove the rear cover (See P.250) and the upper
[2] [1]
cover /Rt (See P.256)
adjusting knob [2]. Remove 2 screws [3] and
then remove the arm cover /1 [4].
[3]
[4] 1050fs2412c
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the arm

[1]
cover /2 [2].
[2] 1050fs2413c
298

4. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the arm
[1]
cover /3 [2].
1050e/1050eP
[2] 1050fs2423c
5. Remove the IC board unit. (See IC unit Field Ser-

[1]
vice "4.2.1 Removal / Installation of IC Unit").
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the exte-
rior mounting plate /A [2].
[2] 1050fs2414c
7. Peel off the label [2] of the arm cover /3 [1].

[1] [2]
1050fs2415c
299
8. With the bolt section [1] of the status indicator

[2] [3] [1]
light provided with the nut [2] and washer [3],
pass the wiring harness of the status indicator
/1050e/1050eP
light through the arm cover /3 [4], the washer [5]

and the nut [6] and tighten up the nut [6].
[4] [5] [6]
1050fs2416c
300

9. Pass the wiring harness [1] of the status indicator
[1] [2]
light through the operation unit support member
[2] and install the arm cover /3 [4] with 3 screws
1050e/1050eP
[3].
10. Reinstall the arm cover /1, the arm cover /2 and
the adjusting knob following the removal steps in
reverse.
[3]
[4] 1050fs2417c
301
11. Connect the connector [1] of the status indicator

[2] [1]
light to the connector [2] on the main body for
wiring.
/1050e/1050eP
NOTE
• When wiring, be sure that the wiring harness
does not come in contact with the drive sec-
tion.
12. Reinstall the upper cover /Rt and the rear cover
following the removal steps in reverse.
1050fs2418c
302

6.4.2 Coin vendor
A. Connecting connector
(1) Connector position
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
1050fs2234c
[1] AC drive board (ACDB) [3] CN37 (Serial)

[2] CN36 (Parallel) [4] Printer control board (PRCB)
303
6.5 PCS corresponding parts

6.5.1 PCS corresponding parts
/1050e/1050eP
"PCS" stands for "proactive customization support," and three types of items are set so that the demands
expected in the POD market and Product printing market can be met. Providing these parts allows customiza-
tion adequate to the user's type of usage.
6.5.2 PCS corresponding parts list

A. Transfer assist sheet
(1) Purpose
For the transfer assist sheet, A3 and A4 sizes (metric)/11 inches size (inch) are provided as standard equipment.
When paper sizes other than the standard sizes are used more frequently, the transfer assist sheet can be
changed to these sizes.
(2) Characteristics
8 types of the transfer assist sheets are provided according to the paper sizes. However, when changing to
sizes other than those provided as standard equipment, it is necessary to add a new relay wiring harness and
size detection connector.
It is possible to use a number of the transfer/separation assist sheets. On that occasion, however, after adding
the relay wiring harness mentioned above, it is necessary to purchase a transfer assist sheet that has been
incorporated into the transfer/separation charger unit. This transfer/separation charger unit must be provide with
a size detection connector.
NOTE
• When using plural sizes jointly, the transfer/separation unit of standard equipment (A3 and A4/
metric, 11 inches) requires the size detection connector.
• Since no individual counter is equipped, when the unit is replaced for each size, the management
of the counter is unavailable.
(3) Counter management of the transfer/separation unit in the PCS correspondence

The copy count (fixed parts count) by parts that need to be replaced is equipped with a counter for each size.
When making the transfer/separation charger unit PCS corresponding, be sure to conduct the counter manage-
ment with this counter. However, this counter counts any relevant size regardless of the size of the transfer assist
sheet installed to the main body. So, to manage the counter correctly, the user must replace the transfer/separa-
tion charger unit with an appropriate one.
• Reference:
Double sided print job on the following condition
Transfer size: 8.5 inches
Weight: 91 g/m2 or less
No. of prints: 10
Size of the transfer assist sheet: A4S, A5
The copy count by parts that need to be replaced on this condition is as shown below. On this occasion, even if
the transfer assist sheet size is A4S or A5, the transfer size is "8.5 inches" and the count is up at 8.5 inches
No. 107 8.5 inches. double sided paper through count 10 counts
No. 108 A4S, A5 double sided paper through count 0 count
304

Unit Type Wire color of the Remarks
size detection
connector
1050e/1050eP
Transfer/separation Used exclusively for A3, A4 Brown Default size for metric area
charger unit Used exclusively for 11 inches Red Default size for inch area
Used exclusively for 8K, 16K Orange
Used exclusively for B4, B5 Yellow
Used exclusively for 8.5 inches Pink
Used exclusively for A4S, A5 Blue
Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 inches Purple
Used exclusively for B5S Gray
Transfer assist Used exclusively for A3, A4 — Default size for metric area
sheet assembly Used exclusively for 11 inches Default size for inch area
Used exclusively for 8K, 16K
Used exclusively for B4, B5
Used exclusively for 8.5 inches
Used exclusively for A4S, A5
Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 inches
Used exclusively for B5S
B. Cleaning brush
(1) Purpose
A cleaning brush is used while in the overlay printing in which coated paper is used. For coated paper while in off-set print-
ing, ink gets dry slowly. Therefore, to prevent the transfer of ink onto the backside of the paper, powder is normally sprinkled.
The cleaning brush is used to prevent the occurrence of a no feed condition due to this powder.
However, to maintain the specified performance, the cleaning brush needs to be cleaned every 2,000 sheets of
paper through while in overlay printing.
Do not use the cleaning brush for the paper with many paper powders. The cleaning brush may be clogged by
the paper powder and the conveyance power may be reduced.
(2) Characteristics
The cleaning brush can clean the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller.
Since it is used while in the overlay printing, it can be installed only in the tray 4 of PF-701 that is used while in
the overlay printing.
C. Paper feed assist plate

(1) Purpose
The paper feed assist plate is used to adjust the pick-up pressure on paper by changing the load on the pick-up
roller. Adjustments can be made according to the type of paper to increase the paper feed performance.
Improve a non feed condition that is apt to occur when feeding paper, such as a thick paper, that is hard to con-
vey.
(2) Characteristics
The paper feed assist plate weighs about 10g and the pick-up roller can be equipped with up to 4 plates.
Increasing or decreasing the number of plates allows you to adjust the pick-up pressure corresponding to the
type of paper.
4 plates only are packaged together with the main body and they can be purchased as service parts when
required.
1 305
6.5.3 Procedure for reinstallation

A. Transfer assist sheet
(1) Preparation
/1050e/1050eP
When changing from the standard size to any other size, it is necessary to purchase the following parts.
• PCS corresponding (other than the standard size) transfer /separation charger unit (assembled with the trans-
fer assist sheet) *
• Size detection connector
• Relay wiring harness
• Wire binding band
* Other than the transfer/separation charger unit assembled with each size of the transfer assist sheet, it is
possible to purchase the transfer assist sheet assembly.
(2) Addition of the size detection connector

1. Pull out the ADU.
[1]
(See P.112)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the con-
nector cover [2].
[2]
1050fs2019c
306

[2]
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] and remove the transfer/
separation charger unit [3].
1050e/1050eP
[3]
[1] [2] 1050fs2021c
307
5. Turn over the transfer/separation charger unit [1]

and tighten the wiring harness of the existing
connector [2] and the wiring harness of the size
/1050e/1050eP
detection connector [3] with the wiring band [4].
NOTE
• Be sure to install the wiring harness of the
size detection connector [3] so that the rear
end section [5] does not protrude from the
inner end [7] of the connector bracket plate
[6] [1] [6]. If it is protruding, the wiring harness may
be broken.
• For the size detection connector, it is neces-
sary to install the one corresponding to the
size to be used. This can be identified by the
[5]
wire color of the size detection connector.
[7] (See P.306)
[4]
[2] [3]
1050fs2022c

A [2].
7. Open the open/close guide /1 [3].
[6] 8. Loosen 2 screws [4] and remove the ADU cover /
Lt [5].
[4]
9. Loosen 2 screws [6] and remove the ADU cover /
Rt [7].
[5]
[7]
[3]
[1] [2]
1050fs2023c
308

10. Connect the connector [2] of the relay wiring har-
[4]
ness [1] to the CN599 of the ADU drive board /1
[3].
1050e/1050eP
11. Pull around the relay wiring harness [1] as shown
in the drawing and hold it with the relay wiring
clamps [4] provided at the 12 placed.
[4] [1]
[3]
[1]
[2] [4] 1050fs2024c
12. Reinstall the transfer/separation charger unit [1].

[1] [3]
13. Connect the size detection connector [4] to the
connector [3] of the relay wiring harness [2].
14. Reinstall the ADU covers /Rt and /Lt and the
lever A.
15. Put the ADU back to the inside of the main body.
16. Change the software DIPSW settings in the ser-
vice mode to the following.
• DIPSW26-0: On (1)
• DIPSW26-1: On (1)
NOTE
• When the above software DIPSW is changed,
the size detection connector is required by
[4] [2] 1050fs2025c
the transfer/separation charger of standard
size. When the size detection connector is not
installed, the transfer assist sheet does not
operate.
309
B. Paper feed assist plate

(1) Checking of the contents of the package
The package contains the following as a set.
/1050e/1050eP
• [1] Paper feed assist plate:4 pcs.

• [2] Screw:2 pcs (TP3 x 8)
[1]
[2]
1050fs2722c
(2) Procedure
For the main body, see "11.1.3 Pick-up roller load adjustment".
For the PF, see"5.3 Adjusting the pick-up roller pressure" in the Field Service for the PF-701.
310

6.5.4 Periodic maintenance of the PCS corresponding parts
A. Maintenance Item
1050e/1050eP
1 Transfer/ (1) Removal of trans-
separation fer/separation unit
charger unit
(2) Replacing of trans- 1 z
fer assist sheet
assembly
B. Periodically replaced parts list
No. Classification Parts name Quan- Actual replacement

tity cycle
1 Transfer assist sheet Exclusively used for A3 and A4 1 1,500,000
2 assembly * 1 Exclusively used for 11 inches 1 1,500,000
3 Exclusively used for 8K and 16K 1 1,500,000
4 Exclusively used for B4 and B5 1 1,500,000
5 Exclusively used for 8.5 inches 1 1,500,000
6 Exclusively used for A4S and A5 1 1,500,000
7 Exclusively used for 8, 8.125 and 8.25 inches 1 1,500,000
8 Exclusively used for B5S 1 1,500,000
9 Transfer/separation Exclusively used for A4 1 6,000,000
10 charger unit Exclusively used for 11 inches 1 6,000,000
11 Exclusively used for 8K and 16K 1 6,000,000
12 Exclusively used for B4 and B5 1 6,000,000
13 Exclusively used for 8.5 inches 1 6,000,000
14 Exclusively used for A4S and A5 1 6,000,000
15 Exclusively used for 8, 8.125 and 8.25 inches 1 6,000,000
16 Exclusively used for B5S 1 6,000,000
* 1 For the PCS corresponding transfer assist assembly, the counter management is not available. The numer-
ical values given here are reference.
311
C. Maintenance procedure
Caution:
/1050e/1050eP
• When replacing the periodically replaced parts, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body
(1) Replacing the transfer assist sheet assembly

1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Transfer assist sheet assembly: Every 1,500,000 prints
2) Procedure
See “3.5.8 J. Replacing the transfer assist sheet assembly”.
312

6.6 CMS corresponding parts
6.6.1 CMS corresponding parts
1050e/1050eP
"CMS" stands for "customer maintenance support," and this is applicable when the user wants to change parts
by himself.
For CMS corresponding parts, 9 types of parts are set. However, some parts provided as an assembly of parts
larger than those replaced normally by the CE so that the user can easily conduct the part replacement opera-
tion.
6.6.2 CMS corresponding parts list

A. Pick-up roller unit
(1) Purpose
To return to normal operation in a short time when the paper feedability goes down due to deterioration of the
pick-up roller.
(2) Replacement cycle

• Pick-up roller unit (Main body): Every 2,250,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 500,000 prints)
• Pick-up roller unit (DF-603): Every 4,500,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 800,000 prints)
• Pick-up roller unit (PF-701): Every 2,250,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 500,000 prints)
• Pick-up roller unit (PP-701): Periodically replaced cycle: 50,000 prints
(3) Replacement procedure

1) Pick-up roller unit (Main body)
See "3.5.6 A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly”.
NOTE
• The steps 1 to 8 are applicable.
2) Pick-up roller unit (DF-603)

See DF-603 Service Manual (Field service)
"2.1.2 Replacing the separation roller/torque limiter".
NOTE
3) Pick-up roller unit (PF-701/PP-701)

See PF-701,PP-701 Service Manual (Field service)
"2.1.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller Assy/separation roller Assy".
NOTE
2 313
B. Separation roller unit

(1) Purpose
To return to the normal operation in a short time when the paper feedability goes down due to deterioration of
/1050e/1050eP
the separation roller.

• Separation roller unit (Main body): Every 2,250,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 500,000 prints)
• Separation roller unit (DF-603): Every 2,250,000* prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 400,000 prints)
• Separation roller unit (PF-701): Every 2,250,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 500,000 prints)
• Pick-up roller unit (PP-701): Periodically replaced cycle: 50,000 prints
* For the torque limiter and the separation roller that are the component parts of the separation roller unit (DF-
603), the periodically replaced cycle is different. So, the cycle of the separation roller that is the shorter of
the two is employed.

1) Separation roller unit (Main body)
See "3.5.6 A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly”.
NOTE
2) Separation roller unit (DF-603)

See DF-603 Service Manual (Field service)
"2.1.2 Replacing the separation roller/torque limiter".
NOTE
3) Separation roller unit (PF-701/PP-701)

See PF-701/PP-701 Service Manual (Field service)
"2.1.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller Assy/separation roller Assy".
NOTE
C. Transfer/separation charger unit

(1) Purpose
To return to normal operation in a short time when the transfer or separation performance goes down due to
deterioration of the transfer/separation charger unit.

• Transfer/separation charger unit: 6,000,000 prints

See "E. Replacing the transfer/separation charger unit".
314 2

D. Waste toner recycle box
1) Purpose
To return to the normal operation as soon as possible when the waste toner recycle box of RC-501 is full.
1050e/1050eP
2) Replacement cycle
• Waste toner recycle box (RC-501) : 750,000 prints
3) Replacement procedure
See RC-501 Service Manual (Field service)
"3.1.2 Waste toner recycle box"
NOTE
6.6.3 CMS corresponding parts counter management

1. When the user replaces CMS corresponding parts, the counter needs to be reset. By changing the CMS
corresponding parts counter from DIPSW15-0 to 1, [CMS Parts Count] is displayed in the utility menu
screen.
2. The parts name/parts number/limit value of [CMS Parts Count] is registered by the user, and can also be
reset. In addition, as this count value uses the value of [Count of each part] in service mode, when
DIPSW15-0 is set to 1, the contents of the [Count of each part] settings are displayed in the [Utility] mode.
3. The counting method of the [CMS Parts Count] is shown in the table below.
DIPSW CMS Function Counter No. Counting Method

15-0
0 Apply 1 to 30 1 count for each paper exit in the single side mode, 2 counts in
the double side mode.
1 Ignore 1 to 2 When paper in tray 1 is used, 1 count for each paper exit.
3 to 4 When paper in tray 2 is used, 1 count for each paper exit.
11 to 12 When the document is scanned from the ADF, 1 count for each
paper exit.
13 to 14 1 count for each paper exit.
15 to 30 1 count for each paper exit in the single side mode, 2 counts in
the double side mode.
31 For waste toner box of RC-501
• Displayed when the DIPSW5-1, 5-4, 12-5, 15-0 are all "1".
• Timing of pre-full display, full warning display can be changed
by DIPSW5-0
2 315
/1050e/1050eP
Blank page
316
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 7. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT / SETTING SECTION
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING

1050e/1050eP
7. HOW TO USE THE ADJUST- B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site ser-
vice
MENT / SETTING SECTION
Due attention should be paid to the following when
7.1 Composition repairing the machine.
1. Be sure to unplug the power cord from the
This part "ADJUSTMENT/SETTING" describes items power outlet. Also, when operating the machine
to be adjusted and the method of adjustment that is with the power supplied, be careful of the scan
required by this machine, it also gives detailed expla- of the exposure unit and be sure not to get
nations. caught by the gear.
2. The fusing section may be very hot. Be careful
A. Checking before starting work not to get burnt when handling it.
When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary to 3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be
check first the following: careful not to bring a watch and instrument near
1. Are the power supply and voltage secured in to the unit.
accordance with the specifications? 4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
2. Is the power supply properly grounded? 5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare
3. Is any equipment that repeatedly consumes a lot hands.
of electricity connected to the same power sup-
ply? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as eleva-
tor and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the
machine?
• High temperature and high humidity, direct
sunlight, air ventilation, etc.
• Levelness of the location on which the
machine is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original
itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy consumables replaced with new ones
at their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning
blade, etc)
10. Is toner filled?
317
8. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
8. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

• This table shows the list of adjustment items when replacing a part. Items are numbered in a circle by the
/1050e/1050eP
priority if there is any.
After PM Implementation
Toner guide brush

Cleaning blade
Adjustment items Replacement parts/Others
Cleaning web
Developer
Slit glass
Drum
Machine adjustment Magnification adjustment Regist line speed adjustment
Printer drum clock adjustment (Side1)
Printer horizontal adjustment (Side1)
Scanner drum clock adjustment
ADF drum clock adjustment
Printer drum clock adjustment (Side2)
Printer horizontal clock adjustment (Side2)
Timing adjustment Printer restart timing adjustment (Side1)
Scanner restart timing adjustment
ADF restart timing adjustment
ADF regist loop adjustment
Centering adjustment Printer centering adjustment
ADF Centering adjustment
Warp adjustment Scanner (Glass) warp (Main)
Scanner (Glass) warp (Deputy)
Scanner (ADF) warp (Main)
Scanner (ADF) warp (Deputy)
ADF adjustment ADF density adjustment c
ADF original size adjustment
ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment
ADF incline offset adjustment
ADF centering sensor adjustment
Process High voltage adjustment High voltage auto adjustment
adjustment Drum peculiarity adjustment Blade setting mode e
Auto drum potential adjustment f e
Auto maximum density adjustment g f
Auto dot diameter adjustment h g
LD offset adjustment i h
Auto gamma adjustment (1dot) j i
Cartridge set mode k j
Counter Count PM cycle setting counter reset {
Developer setting counter reset c
Sensitive drum setting counter reset e
Copy count of special parts Fixing cleaning web c
ISW ISW mode
Finisher adjustment Stacker adjustment Paper width adjustment
Paper length adjustment
IP HDD format IP HDD format
Others Setting powder application c c c
Dust-proof glass cleaning (Write unit) d d
Mirror unit positioning (require the jigs)
Blade auto replacement spring charge d
Fusing lamp's installation direction (Maker's mark in front)
Thermistor positioning (require the jig)
Thermostat positioning (require the jig)
Parameter board (PB) replacement
EEPROM replacement
Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment
Trimmer board solenoid operation counter clear
Multi feed detection board adjustment
• When replacing the image processing board (IPB) due to the IPB being damaged, the parameter board (PB)
that was installed on the damaged IPB should be used on the new IPB. Contact the service manager of the
authorized distributor if it is considered that the PB is also damaged.
• The parameter board (PB) stores various adjustment data, setting data and counter data. Therefore, when
replacing the PB, perform all adjustments and settings, and be sure to replace the parts for control correc-
tion (Drum, developer, cleaning blade, cleaning web). For details, contact the service manager of the
authorized distributor.
318 2
Scanner wire · mirror
•
c
h
g
f
e
d
unit
CCD unit
k
j
i
h
g
f
e
d
c
aged.
Write unit
k
j
i
h
g
f
d
e
c
Registration roller
f
e
d
c
Multi feed detection board
/1, /2 (MFDB /1, /2)
{
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
{
{
Thermistor /1 (TH1)
{
Thermistor /3 (TH3)
{
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
{
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
{
High voltage unit /1, /2
c
(HV1, /2)
Overall control board
d
c
(OACB)
Printer control board
{
(PRCB)
Operation board /1
{
(OB1)
RADF control board
c
e
k
d
f
l
j
g
i
h
(RADFCB)
LS control board (LSCB)
d
f
e
c
FD control board (FDCB)
c
FNS control board
c
(FNSCB)
Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
{
SD control board
c
(SDCB)
PB control board
c
d
(PBCB)
2
Trimmer board assembly
{
ADU drive board /1
{
(ADUDB1)
PI drive board (PIDB)
{
8. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
was installed on the damaged control board should be used on the new control board. Install the new EEP-
ROM and perform all adjustments for the PB, SD, FD or FS if it is considered that the EEPROM is also dam-
319
board (FDCB) or the FNS control board (FNSCB) being damaged, the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) that
When replacing a board due to the PB control board (PBCB), the SD control board (SDCB), FD control
1050e/1050eP
9. UTILITY MODE Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
9. UTILITY MODE
9.1 List of utility modes
/1050e/1050eP
Note
• For details on the utility mode, refer to "User's guide."
01 System Setting 01 Language Setting

02 Buzzer Setting 01 Buzzer On/Off, Volume Setting
02 Buzzer for Job Stop Setting
03 1 SHOT Indication Time
04 Default Screen Setting
05 Auto Reset Setting
06 Key Response Time
07 Change User Password
08 Function Key Setting
02 Function 01 Feed Tray Setting 01 Feed Tray Auto Selection
Setting 02 ATS Permit
03 Auto Paper Type
02 Each Function Setting
03 Density Setting 01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode
02 User Density Setting
03 Photo Mode Density Selection
04 Image Density Selection
04 Preset Zoom
05 Tandem Setting 01 Batch Reading Mode
02 Wait/Proof Mode
03 Shift Value Setting
04 Tandem Setting after JOB
06 User Paper Selection
03 Copy Setting 01 Reset Setting 01 Initial Setting
02 Reset Function Setting
03 Initial by Key Counter Insert
02 Each Function Setting
04 Scanner Set- 01 Default Address Setting
ting 02 Each Function Setting
05 Touch Screen Adjustment
06 Machine 01 System Setting 01 Power Save Setting
Manager Setting 02 Time and Date Setting
03 Weekly Timer 01 Weekly Timer On/Off Setting
Setting 02 Time Setting
03 Timer Action On/Off Setting
04 Lunch Hour Off Setting
05 Set Password for Timer Interrupt
04 Management List Print
320 2
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 9. UTILITY MODE

06 Machine 01 System Setting 05 Operation Prohibit Setting
Manager Setting
06 Expert 01 Original Scan Area Setting
1050e/1050eP
Adjustment 02 ADF Frame Erasure Setting
03 Non Image Area Erase Setting
07 Size Setting
08 Annotation Setting
09 Perfect Binding Mode Setting
02 Manager/Machine Register 01 Machine Manager Register
03 User Auth./Volume 01 Authentication Method 02 Authentication Setting
Track 02 Section Management Setting
02 Volume Track
03 User Authentication Set
04 Non register/Output Set
04 Network Setting 01 Machine NIC Setting
02 Controller NIC 01 TCP/IP
Setting 02 NetWare
03 IPP
04 FTP
05 SNMP
06 SMB
07 AppleTalk
08 E-Mail 01 E-Mail Send Setting
02 E-Mail Receive Setting
03 Title Setting
04 Sentence Setting
09 HDD
10 Alert Mail
11 CSRC 01 CSRC Send Setting
02 CSRC Receive Setting
03 CSRC Communication Test
12 AP I/F
13 PSWC
14 Network Setting Clear
15 SNMP Trap
05 Copy/Printer Setting 01 Job Offset Operating
02 Continuation print(Print)
03 Page No. pos.(Booklet)
04 Fixing Prerotation Set
05 Image Auto Rotation
06 Interruption Suspend
07 Copy Reserve Operation
08 Scan Stop (pull out tray)
09 Continuation Print (Copy)
2 321
9. UTILITY MODE Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
06 Machine 05 Copy/Printer Setting 10 Original Glass SDF

Manager Setting 11 SDF Auto Setting
06 System Connection 01 User Call
/1050e/1050eP
07 Security Setting 01 Machine Manager Password

02 HDD Management 01 Folder Box List/Delete
Setting 02 HDD Data Auto Delete Period Setting
03 Change HDD Lock Password
03 Security Strengthen Mode
08 Scanner Address 01 Send Address Edit/Delete
Register
322
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 10. SERVICE MODE

10. SERVICE MODE
10.1 Setting method
1050e/1050eP
This machine is provided with a service mode for var-
ious adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set in this
mode is stored in the parameter board (PB).
10.1.1 Start and exit service mode

You can access the service mode while the power is
both turned ON and OFF. In either way, the started
service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
A. Starting and exiting service mode while the

power is ON
1. Be sure that the ordinary copy screen is dis-
played.
2. Press the Utility/Counter button.
3. "Utility Menu screen"
On the Operation panel, press the following but-
tons.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
When the CE password has been set, you must
enter the password to enter the service mode.
4. "Service mode menu screen"
The service mode appears.
5. Press the key for an item you want to configure.
The setting screen for each item appears.
6. Press the [Exit] key to go back to the "Utility
Menu" screen.
7. The new settings become effective.
B. Starting and exiting service mode while the

power is OFF
1. While pressing the Utility/Counter button, turn
ON the power switch (SW2).
When the CE password has been set, you must
enter the password to enter the service mode.
The service mode appears.
3. Press the key for an item you want to configure.
The setting screen for each item appears.
4. Turn OFF the SW2.
5. After the reboot, the new settings become effec-
tive.
323
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
10.2 List of service mode
01 Machine Adjustment 01 Tray Adjustment

/1050e/1050eP
02 Magnification 01 Regist Line Speed Adjustment

Adjustment 02 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1>
03 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2>
04 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1>
05 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2>
06 Scanner Drum Clock Adjustment
07 ADF Drum Clock Adjustment
03 Timing Adjustment 01 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1>
02 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2>
03 Printer Regist Loop Adjustment
04 Printer Pre-regist Adjustment
05 Printer Lead Edge Timing Adjustment
06 Transfer Assistance Timing Adjustment
07 Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment
08 ADF Restart Timing Adjustment
09 ADF Regist Loop Adjustment
04 Centering Adjust- 01 Printer Centering Adjustment
ment 02 Scanner Centering Adjustment
03 ADF Centering Adjustment
05 Warp Adjustment
06 NonImage Area Erase Check
07 ADF Adjustment 01 ADF Density Adjustment
02 ADF Original Size Adjustment
03 ADF Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
04 ADF Incline Offset Adjustment
05 ADF Centering Sensor Adjustment
08 Recall Standard Data Recall standard data: Machine adjustment
02 Process Adjustment 01 High Voltage 01 High Voltage Auto Adjustment
Adjustment 02 HV Adjustment (Charge)
03 HV Adjustment (Transfer)
04 HV Adjustment (Separation AC)
05 HV Adjustment (Separation DC)
06 HV Adjustment (Charging grid voltage)
07 HV Adjustment (Bias of development DC)
08 Transfer Guide Confirm
02 Drum Peculiarity Adj. 01 Blade Setting Mode
02 Auto Drum Potential Adjustment
03 Auto Maximum Density Adjustment
04 Auto Dot Diameter Adjustment
05 LD Offset Adjustment
324

02 Process Adjustment 02 Drum Peculiarity 06 Auto Gamma Adjustment (1dot)
Adjustment 07 LD1 Bias Adjustment
08 LD2 Bias Adjustment
1050e/1050eP
09 Cartridge Set Mode
03 Drum Peculiarity Manual
04 User Paper Setting
05 Recall Standard Data
03 Counter 01 PM Count
02 Data Collection 01 Total count of each paper size
02 Copy count of each paper size
03 Print count of each paper size
04 Large size count
05 ADF Count
06 Pixel ratio of each section
07 Pixel ratio ranking list
08 JAM data of time series
09 JAM Count
10 Count of each copy mode
11 SC data of time series
12 SC Count
13 JAM count of each section
14 SC count of each section
03 Parts Counter 01 Count of special parts
02 Count of each parts
04 Machine Condition 01 I/O Check mode
05 List Output 01 List Output
06 Test Mode 01 Test Pattern Output Mode
02 Test Pattern Density
03 Running Test Mode
07 System Setting 01 Software SW Setting
02 Telephone Number Setting
03 M/C Serial Number Setting
04 Setting Date Input
08 ROM Version 01 ROM Version
09 CS Remote Care 01 CS Remote Care 01 E-Mail
02 Modem
10 ISW 01 ISW
11 Finisher Adjustment 01 Stapler Position Adj. 01 Stapling Center Position Adjustment
02 Paper Width Adjustment
02 Multi Folder (Punch) 01 Paper Width Adjustment
Adj. 02 Hole-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment
325
11 Finisher Adjustment 03 Multi Folder (Fold) 01 Folding Position Adjustment

Adj. 02 Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment
03 Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment
/1050e/1050eP
04 Double Parallel Position Adjustment

05 Z-Fold Position Adjustment
06 Gate Position Adjustment
07 Fold Regist Loop Adjustment
04 Multi Folder (PI) Adj.
05 Stacker Adjustment 01 Paper Width Adjustment
02 Paper Length Adjustment
06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. 01 Stapling Centring Adjustment
02 Stapling Paper Width Adjustment
03 Stapling Pitch Adjustment
04 Folding Position Adjustment
05 Three-Fold Position Adjustment
06 Fold Paper Width Adjustment
07 Trimming Adjustment
07 Perfect Binder 01 Cover Trimming Adjustment
Adjustment 02 Cover Lead Edge Adjustment
03 Spine Corner forming Position Adj.
04 Pasting Start Postion Adjustment
05 Pasting Finish Position Adjustment
06 Paste Formation Finish Position Adj.
07 Temperature Adjustment
08 Sub Compile CD Width Adjustment
09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment
11 Clamp FD Position Adjustment
08 Recall Standard Data
12 Machine Manager Setting 01 Manager Authentication
02 Machine Manager Password
13 CE Setting 01 CE Authentication Setting
02 CE Password Setting
14 IP HDD Format 01 IP HDD Format
326 2

10.3 Machine adjustment 5. Pull out the selected tray and widen the paper
guide [1] to the max. width. Narrow the paper
10.3.1 Tray adjustment guide [1] slowly to fill a gap [3] between the lift
1050e/1050eP
Adjust the paper size from tray /1 to tray /5. plate cover [2] and the paper guide [1] until it
This adjustment is needed when a paper size is not reaches the scale "250"[4]. (The scale inside
detected properly. the paper guide is 250 mm)
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [1]
1. Enter the service mode.
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen.
Press the [01 Tray Adjustment] key on the sub
menu.
4. "Tray adjustment screen"
Tray adjustment includes the following items.
Press the [Next] key or the [Back], and select
(1) of the tray you adjust.
[Tray 1 (1)] [4]
[Tray 1 (2)]
[Tray 2 (1)]
250mm
[Tray 2 (2)]
[Tray 3 (1)]
[Tray 3 (2)]
[Tray 4 (1)]
[Tray 4 (2)]
[Tray 5 (1)]
[Tray 5 (2)]
[1] 1050fs3021c
Note
• Be sure to select (1) of the tray you adjust. 6. Set the tray.
7. Press the [Start] key on the screen.
The current position of the selected tray is read
in. When the adjustment is done, the message
"Complete" appears.
8. Press the [Next] key and select (2) of the trays
you want to adjust.
Note
• Be sure to select (2) of the trays you want
to adjust.
9. Pull out the tray and widen the paper guide to
the max. width. Narrow the paper guide slowly
to fill a gap between the lift plate cover and the
paper guide until it reaches the scale "A3·A4".
(The scale inside the paper guide is 297 mm)
10. Set the tray.
327
11. Press the [Start] key on the screen. 10.3.2 Magnification adjustment
The current position of the selected tray is read Adjust various kinds of image magnification.
in. When the adjustment is done, the message
/1050e/1050eP
"Complete" appears. A. Regist line speed adjustment

Change the line speed of the registration roller to
12. To adjust other trays, repeat steps 4 to 11.
match the line speed of the drum.
NOTE
• This adjustment changes the line speed of
the registration roller only. Unless properly
adjusted, it may cause a transfer jitter at a
position 145 mm from the paper trailing edge.
• Usually, do not use this adjustment in the
field. Use this only when replacing the regis-
tration roller and when a transfer jitter occurs
at a position 145 mm from the paper trailing
edge.
(1) Procedure

screen.
Press the [02 Magnification Adjustment] key on
the sub menu.
4. "Magnification adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [01 Regist Line Speed Adjustment]
key.
5. "Regist Line Speed Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the [Inside Pattern] is displayed
"16", and press the [COPY] key.
6. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper (130 g/m2 or 35 lb
Bond) in the tray. Press the Start button to out-
put the test pattern (No.16).
Note
• Select [72-91g] for the basic weight setting.
328 1

7. Measure the magnification of the sub scan 15. Check the transfer jitter around 145 mm from
direction with a scale. the paper trailing edge, and find an output with
• Standard value: ± 0.5% or less (When in life-size) the least transfer jitter (Density of half-tone is
1050e/1050eP
even with surrounding area).
Within 102.8 0 mm
-0.5 16. Press the [SERVICE] key.
0 Through the numeric keys, enter the adjusted
102.8 -0.5
step number of the output paper you selected
in step 15, and press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-40 (short) to +55 (long)
1 step = 0.05%
1050fs3001c
8. When the value is not within the standard value,

press the [SERVICE] key.
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
and press the [Set] key.
1 step = 0.05%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
can be obtained.
11. "Regist Line Speed Adjustment"
Press the [Inside Pattern] key and enter 9 with
the numeric key. Press the [Set] key.
Press the [Inside Pattern] key again and press
the [COPY] key.
Note
• The density of "Test pattern density set-
ting" is reflected. So, be sure to check the
set value of "Test pattern density setting"
to ensure it is "255."
12. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper (130 g/m2 or 35 lb
Bond) in the tray. Press the Start button to out-
13. Press the [SERVICE] key to return to the [Regist
Line Speed Adjustment] screen.
14. Repeat steps 11 to 13 to output test patterns
for two steps before and after the value you
entered in step 10.
e.g.: When the adjusted value is "-1"
Output 5 test patterns for -3, -2, -1, 0, 1.
1 329
B. Printer drum clock adjustment (Side 1) C. Printer drum clock adjustment (Side 2)
Adjust the magnification of the sub scan direction on Adjust the magnification of the sub scan direction on
only side 1 of the printer system. only side 2 of the printer system.
/1050e/1050eP
This adjustment changes the line speed of the drum This adjustment changes the line speed of the drum
and the registration roller on side 1 evenly. and the registration roller on side 2 evenly.
(1) Procedure (1) Procedure
1. Enter the service mode. 1. Enter the service mode.

2. "Service mode menu screen" 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen. screen.
Press the [02 Magnification Adjustment] key on Press the [02 Magnification Adjustment] key on
the sub menu. the sub menu.
4. "Magnification adjustment mode menu screen" 4. "Magnification adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [02 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment Press the [03 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment
<SIDE1>] key. <SIDE2>] key.
5. "Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1> 5. "Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2> screen"
screen" Tray can be adjusted by each (tray /1 to /5).
Press the [COPY] key. Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
6. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper (130 g/m2 or 35 lb item you adjust, and press the [COPY] key.
Bond) in the tray. Press the Start button to out- 6. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper (130 g/m2 or 35 lb
put the test pattern (No.16). Bond) in the tray. Press the Start button to out-
7. Measure the magnification of the sub scan put the test pattern (No.16).
direction with a scale. 7. Measure the magnification of the sub scan
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size) direction with a scale.
Within 205.7 ± 1 mm • Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size)
Within 205.7 ± 1 mm
205.7 1
205.7 1
1050fs3002c
1050fs3003c
press the [SERVICE] key. 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
9. "Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1> press the [SERVICE] key.
screen" 9. "Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2> screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
and press the [Set] key. and press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-10 (short) to +10 (long) • Setting range:-10 (short) to 0 (long)
1 step = 0.05% 1 step = 0.05%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
can be obtained. can be obtained.
330

D. Printer horizontal adjustment (Side 1) E. Printer horizontal adjustment (Side 2)
Adjust the magnification of the main scan direction on Adjust the magnification of the main scan direction on
only side 1 of the printer system. only side 2 of the printer system.
1050e/1050eP
This adjustment changes the horizontal magnification This adjustment changes the horizontal magnification
in image processing prior to the laser exposure. in image processing prior to the laser exposure.

screen. screen.
Press the [04 Printer Horizontal Adjustment Press the [05 Printer Horizontal Adjustment
<SIDE1>] key. <SIDE2>] key.
5. "Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1> 5. "Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2> screen"
screen" Tray can be adjusted by each (tray /1 to /5).
Press the [COPY] key. Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- item you adjust, and press the [COPY] key.
ton to output the test pattern (No.16). 6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but-
7. Measure the magnification of the main scan ton to output the test pattern (No.16).
direction with a scale. 7. Measure the magnification of the main scan
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size) direction with a scale.
Within 190 ± 1 mm • Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size)
Within 190 ± 1 mm
190
190
1050fs3004c
1050fs3005c
press the [SERVICE] key. 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
9. "Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1> press the [SERVICE] key.
screen" 9. "Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2> screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
and press the [Set] key. and press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-10 (short) to +10 (long) • Setting range:-5 (short) to 0 (long)
1 step = 0.1% 1 step = 0.1%
331
F. Scanner drum clock adjustment G. ADF drum clock adjustment

Adjust the magnification of the main scan direction of Adjust the magnification of the main scan direction of
the scanner system. the scanner system.
/1050e/1050eP
This adjustment changes the scanning speed of the This adjustment changes the scanning speed of the
exposure unit. ADF.

screen. screen.
Press the [06 Scanner Drum Clock Adjustment] Press the [07 ADF Drum Clock Adjustment]
key. key.
5. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) drum clock adj. screen" 5. "Scanner (ADF) drum clock adj. screen"
Press the [COPY] key. Press the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "test magnification you adjust. Press the [COPY] key.
chart" on the original glass. Press the Start but- The magnification changes as follows:
ton. 100% → 75% → 200% → 400%
7. Measure the magnification of the sub scan 6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "adjust-
direction with a scale. ment chart" on the ADF. Press the Start button.
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size) 7. Measure the magnification in the sub scan
Within 200 ± 1 mm direction with a scale.
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size)
Within 190 ± 1 mm
200
1050fs3006c

190 1050fs3007c
9. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) drum clock adj. screen" 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys press the [SERVICE] key.
and press the [Set] key. 9. "Scanner (ADF) drum clock adj. screen"
• Setting range:-40 (short) to +40 (long) Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
1 step = 0.05% and press the [Set] key.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value • Setting range:-40 (short) to +40 (long)
can be obtained. 1 step = 0.05%
can be obtained.
332 2

10.3.3 Timing adjustment 9. "Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1>
Adjust various image timing. screen"
1050e/1050eP
A. Printer restart timing adjustment (Side 1) and press the [Set] key.
Adjust the image leading edge timing on only side 1. • Setting range:-30 (short) to +30 (long)
This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim- 1 step = 0.1 mm
ing.
can be obtained.
NOTE
• Be sure the printer drum clock adjustment
(Side 1) has been adjusted. B. Printer restart timing adjustment (Side 2)
Adjust the image leading edge timing on only side 2.
(1) Procedure This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim-
ing.
2. "Service mode menu screen" NOTE
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. • Be sure the printer drum clock adjustment
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the (Side 2) has been adjusted.
screen.
Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the (1) Procedure
sub menu.
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
Press the [01 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment 2. "Service mode menu screen"
<SIDE1>] key. Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
5. "Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1> 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen" screen.
Tray can be adjusted as a whole and by each Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the
(tray /1 to /5). Press the [Next] or the [Back] key sub menu.
to select the item you adjust, and press the 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
[COPY] key. Press the [02 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- <SIDE2>] key.
ton to output the test pattern (No.16). 5. "Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2>
7. Measure the leading edge timing with a scale. screen"
• Standard value:20 ± 0.5 mm Tray can be adjusted by each (tray /1 to /5).
Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
item you adjust, and press the [COPY] key.
20
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start
button to output the test pattern (No.16).
1050fs3008c

1 333
7. Measure the leading edge timing with a scale. 5. "Printer regist loop adj. screen"
• Standard value:20 ± 0.5 mm Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
/1050e/1050eP
20 The item changes as follows:

Side 1 → Side 2 → Side 1 thick → Side 2 thick
Note
• The adjustment values for "Side 1" and
"Side 2" are reflected on the paper weight
50 to 161 g/m2.
• The adjustment values for "Side 1 thick"
1050fs3009c
and "Side 2 thick" are reflected in 162 to
300 g/m2.
6. Set the copy according to the item that has
been adjusted and press the Start button to
9. "Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2> output a test pattern (No. 16).
screen"
7. When the trouble is not solved, press the
[SERVICE] key.
8. "Printer regist loop adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
• Setting range:-10 (small) to +10 (large)
can be obtained.
1 step = 1 ms
9. Repeat the steps 5 to 8 until an appropriate
C. Printer regist loop adjustment value is obtained.
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller
section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper
D. Printer pre-regist adjustment
jamming in the registration section.
Adjust the paper loop amount in the pre-registration
roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or
(1) Procedure
paper jamming in the pre-registration section.
2. "Service mode menu screen" (1) Procedure
screen.
Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the
sub menu.
screen.
Press the [03 Printer Regist Loop Adjustment]
sub menu.
key.
Press the [04 Printer Pre-regist Adjustment]
key.
5. "Printer pre-regist adj. screen"
Tray can be adjusted by each (tray /1 to /5).
334

6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- F. Transfer assist timing adjustment
ton to output the test pattern (No.16). Adjust the pressure/release timing and the pressure
amount of the transfer assist sheet when transfer
7. When the trouble is not solved, press the
1050e/1050eP
error (such as missing image portions) occurs.
[SERVICE] key.
8. "Printer pre-regist adj. screen"
Preparation:
• Select the appropriate paper setting beforehand
so that the transfer assist sheet (50 to 91 g/m2)
can be fed through.
1 step = 1ms
9. Repeat the steps 5 to 8 until an appropriate NOTE
value is obtained.
• Perform "Transfer Assist Pressure Level adj."
properly, or the photoconductor may get
E. Printer lead edge timing adjustment damaged.
Adjust the image erasure amount of the leading edge. • Only perform this adjustment when the trans-
fer error still occurs after performing "Trans-
(1) Procedure fer Assist Push Position adjustment" and
"Transfer Assist Release Position adj."
1. Enter the service mode. • Always perform "Transfer Assist Push Posi-
2. "Service mode menu screen" tion adjustment" and "Transfer Assist
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. Release Position adj." after performing
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the "Transfer Assist Pressure Level adj."
screen.
Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the (1) Procedure
sub menu.
Press the [05 Printer Lead Edge Timing Adjust-
ment] key.
5. "Printer lead edge timing adjustment screen"
screen.
Press the [COPY] key.
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- sub menu.
ton to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the printer lead edge timing. Press the [06 Transfer Assistance Timing
• Standard value:within 4 mm Adjustment] key.
8. When the value is not within the standard value, Press the [NEXT] or the [Back] key to select the
press the [SERVICE] key. item to be adjusted, and press [COPY].
9. "Printer lead edge timing adjustment screen" 5. "COPY screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys Change the print mode to [1 - 2], and select the
and press the [Set] key. tray in which the transfer assist sheet is loaded.
• Setting range:-20 (small) to +40 (large) 6. Press [START] to print the test pattern (No. 16).
1 step = 0.1 mm Print a halftone image or the original as neces-
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value sary.
can be obtained. 7. If the transfer error still occurs, press the
[SERVICE] key.
2 335
8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys G. Scanner restart timing adjustment
and press the [Set] key. Adjust image leading edge timing of original scanning
• [Transfer Assist Push Position adjustment] from the original glass.
/1050e/1050eP
• [Transfer Assist Release Position adj.] In this adjustment, the starting position for reading
Setting range:-32 (earlier) to +31(later) while in the original scanning mode is adjusted.
1 step = 0.5mm
• [Transfer Assist Pressure Level adj.] (1) Procedure
Setting range:-10 (pressure amount-low) to
+10 (pressure amount-high)
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the

• The following table shows the relation screen.
among pressure amount, pressure point, Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the
release point, and limit step of the adjust- sub menu.
ment. If the adjustment value exceeds the 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
limit steps, the transfer assist sheet may Press the [07 Scanner Restart Timing Adjust-
contact and damage the photoconductor. ment] key.
(Note that the steps described below are 5. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) restart timing adj.
only used as a guide.) screen"
Pressure amount Pressure point Release point
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "test
(Step) (Step) (Step)
chart" on the original glass. Press the Start but-
0 -10 +12
ton.
-10 -20 +22
7. Check the leading edge timing.
+10 0 +2 • Standard value:within ± 1.5 mm
9. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 until an appropriate press the [SERVICE] key.
value is obtained.
9. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) restart timing adj.
screen"
• Setting range:-40 (image, fast) to
+40 (image, slow)
1 step = 0.1 mm
can be obtained.
336 2

H. ADF restart timing adjustment I. ADF regist loop adjustment
Adjust image leading edge timing of original scanning Adjust the original loop amount in the ADF registra-
from the ADF. tion roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle,
1050e/1050eP
In this adjustment, the starting position for reading or original jamming in the registration section.
while in the ADF scanning mode is adjusted.
(1) Procedure
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the service mode. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
2. "Service mode menu screen" Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the screen.
screen. Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the
Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the sub menu.
sub menu. 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" Press the [09 ADF Regist Loop Adjustment]
Press the [08 ADF Restart Timing Adjustment key.
key. 5. "ADF regist loop adj. screen"
5. "ADF restart timing adj. screen" Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the side of original you adjust, and press the
side of original you adjust, and press the [COPY] key.
[COPY] key. The side of original changes as follows:
The side of original changes as follows: SIDE1 → SIDE2
SIDE1 → SIDE2
Note
Note • SIDE 1 represents the front side and SIDE 2
• SIDE 1 represents the front side and SIDE 2 represents the back side.
represents the back side. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "adjust- "adjustment chart" on the ADF. Press the Start
ment chart" on the ADF. Press the Start button. button.
7. Check the image leading edge timing. 7. When the ADF regist loop amount is not appro-
• Standard value: ± 2 mm priate, press the [SERVICE] key.
8. When the value is not within the standard value, 8. "ADF regist loop adj. screen"
press the [SERVICE] key. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
9. "ADF restart timing adj. screen" and press the [Set] key.
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys • Setting range:-10 (small) to +10 (large)
and press the [Set] key. 1 step = 0.1 mm
• Setting range:-50 (image, fast) to 9. Repeat the steps 5 to 8 until an appropriate
+50 (image, slow) value is obtained.
1 step = 0.1 mm
can be obtained.
2 337
10.3.4 Centering adjustment B. Scanner centering adjustment

Adjust the mis-centering of images in the main scan Adjust the mis-centering of images when scanning
direction. from the original glass.
/1050e/1050eP
This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim-

ing. NOTE
• Be sure the printer centering has been
A. Printer centering adjustment adjusted.
Adjust the mis-centering of images on the printer.
(1) Procedure
NOTE
• Be sure the printer horizontal adjustment
(Side 1) and the printer horizontal adjustment 2. "Service mode menu screen"
(Side 2) have been adjusted. Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
(1) Procedure screen.
Press the [04 Centering Adjustment] key on the
1. Enter the service mode. sub menu.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 4. "Centering adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. Press the [02 Scanner Centering Adjustment]
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the key and press the [COPY] key.
screen. 5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "test
Press the [04 Centering Adjustment] key on the chart" on the original glass. Press the Start but-
sub menu. ton.
4. "Centering adjustment mode menu screen" 6. Fold the printed paper into two along the center
Press the [01 Printer Centering Adjustment] key in the main scan direction, and measure how
and press the [COPY] key. much the left and right lines misalign from each
5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- other.
ton to output the test pattern (No.16). • Standard value: within ± 2 mm
6. Fold the printed paper into two along the center 7. When the value is not within the standard value,
in the main scan direction, and measure how press the [SERVICE] key.
much the left and right lines misalign from each 8. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) centering Adj. screen"
other. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
• Standard value: within ± 1.5 mm and press the [Set] key.
7. When the value is not within the standard value, • Setting range:-30 (image in front) to
press the [SERVICE] key. +30 (image in back)
8. "Printer centering adjustment screen" 1 step = 0.1 mm
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys 9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the standard value
and press the [Set] key. can be obtained.
• Setting range:-64 (image in front) to
+63 (image in back)
1 step = 0.1 mm
can be obtained.
338 2

C. ADF Centering adjustment Note
Adjust the mis-centering of images when scanning • SIDE 1 represents the front side and SIDE 2
from the ADF. represents the back side.
1050e/1050eP
• "Small" represents paper which is smaller
NOTE than 300 mm in the sub-scan direction.
• Be sure the printer centering has been However, this excludes A4 or 8.5 x 11 which
adjusted. is automatically adjusted by the centering
sensor.
(1) Procedure • "Large" represents paper which is larger
than 300 mm in the sub-scan direction.
However, this excludes A3 or 11 x 17 which
is automatically adjusted by the centering
sensor.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the • When adjusting ADF centering sensor
screen. adjustment (SIDE1:8.5 x 11) and (SIDE1:11 x
Press the [04 Centering Adjustment] key on the 17), change the centering sensor /Fr posi-
sub menu. tion to "LT" side. Then, turn OFF/ON the
4. "Centering adjustment mode menu screen" power switch, and follow the procedure of
Press the [03 ADF Centering Adjustment] key this adjustment. (See chapter III "1.5
and press the [COPY] key. Centering sensor switchover adjustment"
5. "ADF centering adjustment screen" in the Theory of Operation for DF-603)
Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the 6. Select paper according to the adjusted item.
item you adjust, and press the [COPY] key. Set the "adjustment chart" on the ADF and
The item switches as follows: press the Start button.
ADF Centering Adjustment (SIDE1:Small)
7. Fold the printed paper into two along the center
↓
in the main scan direction, and measure how
ADF Centering Adjustment (SIDE2:Small)
much the left and right lines misalign from each
↓
other.
ADF Centering Adjustment (SIDE1:Large)
• Standard value: within ± 2 mm
↓
ADF Centering Adjustment (SIDE2:Large)
↓
9. [ADF centering adjustment screen]
ADF Centering Sensor Adjustment (SIDE1:A4)
or (SIDE1:8.5 x 11)*1
↓
• Setting range:-30 (image in front) to
ADF Centering Sensor Adjustment (SIDE1:A3)
+30 (image in back)
or (SIDE1:11 x 17)*1
1 step = 0.1 mm
*1 When the power switch is ON, the ADF's 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
centering correction sensor /Fr position is can be obtained.
automatically detected and displayed.
2 339
10.3.5 Warp adjustment 10.3.6 Non-image area erase check

Adjust the image distortion in scanning. When installing the copier or moving its installation
location, check to see if the non-image area erase
/1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure function of the copy application functions works sat-

isfactorily. This also automatically adjusts sensitivity to
correctly detect the non-image area.
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. Preparation:
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the • Open fully the DF.
screen. • There should not be anything on the original glass.
Press the [05 Warp Adjustment] key on the sub • Clean the original glass.
menu.
4. "Warp adjustment menu screen" A. Procedure
The item switches as follows: 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Scanner (Orig. Glass) warp adj. (Main) Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
↓ 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
Scanner (Orig.Glass)warp adj. (Deputy) screen.
↓ Press the [06 Non Image Area Erase Check]
Scanner (ADF) warp adj. (Main) key on the sub menu.
↓ 4. "Non image area erase check screen"
Scanner (ADF) warp adj. (Deputy) Press the [Start] key.
5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Set the "test chart" 5. Make sure the following message appears.
at the position (original glass or ADF) according
to the adjusted item, and press the Start but- NORMAL adjustment selected.
ton. The machine is set to appropriate parame-
6. Measure the image distortion with a scale. ters for Non-image area erase.
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (difference in the
diagonals of 200 mm square If any other message appears, refer to "B. Error
must be 1.4 mm or less) message and Handling", and perform the non-
7. When the value is not within the standard value, image area erase check again.
8. "Warp adjustment menu screen"
• Setting range:-50 (counterclockwise) to
+50 (clockwise)
1 step = 0.05%
can be obtained.
340

B. Error message and Handling 10.3.7 ADF adjustment
If an error is detected while performing the "Non A. ADF density adjustment
Image Area Erase Check" mode, the following error Since the slit glass of the scanning section is coated
1050e/1050eP
message will be displayed. with electrical conductive material, The way it refracts
light from the exposure lamp is different from that of
(1) Error message 1 the original glass. Thus, perform this adjustment
when replacing the slit glass.
Adjust for Moderate Brightness.
The Non-image area erase function may not Preparation:
operate correctly with dark (density) origi- • Clean the slit glass.
nals. • Make sure the white chart is not dirty. (Partial dirt
can be ignored)
Handling 1
When the non-image area erase function is not used (1) Procedure
very frequently, or when copy originals that have a
dark background are not copied very frequently in
non-image area erase, the copier can be used in the 2. "Service mode menu screen"
current installation location. However, when copy Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
originals that have a dark background are frequently 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
copied, install the copier in a location where less screen.
external light gets in (darker) than the present loca- Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub
tion, and check the non-image area erase check menu.
mode again. 4. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [01 ADF Density Adjustment] key.
(2) Error message 2 5. "ADF density adjustment screen"
Set the "white chart" on the ADF.
Adjust for Extreme Brightness.
In many case, the non-image area erase Note
function will not operate correctly. • Set the "white chart" in the A4-direction.
6. Press the [Start] key.
Handling 2
The white chart is scanned, and density is
When the non-image area erase function is not
automatically adjusted.
used very frequently, the copier can be used in
7. When an error message appears, turn OFF/ON
the current installation location. However, if the
the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
non-image area erase function is frequently
Repeat steps 1 to 6 until it is completed prop-
used, install the copier in a location where less
erly.
external light gets in (darker) than the present
location, and check the non-image area erase
check mode again. At this time, when there is a
B. ADF original size adjustment
bright light source such as a fluorescent light
Conduct this adjustment when the ADF original size is
installed directly above the copier, reconsider the
not properly detected.
installation location, or take some measures to
shield the light source and check the mode
(1) Procedure
again.
1 341
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 5. "ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment screen"
screen. Press the [Start] key.
Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub The ADF sensor sensitivity is automatically
/1050e/1050eP
menu. adjusted, and the message of completion

4. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen" appears.
Press the [02 ADF Original Size Adjustment] 6. Press the [COPY] key to check to see if there is
key. any malfunction.
5. "ADF original size adj. (A4 or 8.5 x 11) 1/2 7. When malfunction is found, press the [SERV-
screen" ICE] key to repeat steps 5 and 6.
Set A4 paper (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11
paper (for inch machine) on the ADF and press
D. ADF incline offset adjustment
the [Start] key.
Adjust image skew in the ADF scanning mode.
6. Confirm the message of completion, press the
This adjustment is reflected on the skew adjustment
[Next] key.
control in ADF scanning mode.
7. "ADF original size adj. (A5R or 5.5 x 8.5R) 2/2
screen"
(1) Procedure
Set A5R paper (for metric machine) or 5.5 x
8.5R paper (for inch machine) on the ADF and 1. Enter the service mode.
press the [Start] key. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
8. Confirm the message of completion, press the Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
[COPY] key. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
9. Make sure the ADF original size is properly screen.
detected. Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub
menu.
4. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen"
C. ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment
Press the [04 ADF Incline Offset Adjustment]
Conduct this adjustment when a malfunction (JAM
key.
display does not disappear despite no paper JAM)
5. "ADF Incline offset adjustment screen"
occurs in the reflective type sensors.
Preparation: 6. Set the "adjustment chart" on the ADF and

• Clean each of the ADF reflective sensors. press the Start button.
7. Measure the image skew with a scale.
(1) Procedure • Standard value:within ± 0.5%
Difference between a and b is 2.1mm or less
screen.
Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub
menu.
Press the [03 ADF Sensor Sensitivity Adjust-
ment] key.
a
1050fs3026c

342

9. "ADF Incline Offset Adjustment screen" 6. Remove one screw [1] to remove the sensor
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys cover [2].
1050e/1050eP
• Setting range:-60 (counterclockwise) to
+60 (clockwise)
1 step = 0.05%
can be obtained.
E. ADF centering sensor adjustment

Adjust sensitivity of the centering sensor /Fr.
NOTE
• Be sure to conduct adjustment for both A4
[1] [2]
and 8.5 x 11.
(1) Procedure

screen.
Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub
menu.
Press the [05 ADF Centering Sensor Adjust-
ment] key.
5. "ADF Centering Sensor Adj. screen"
Press the [Next] or [Back] key to select "ADF
1050fs3022c
Centering Sensor Adj. (A4)".
7. Remove one screw [1] to place the sensor
mounting plate [2] to the "A4" side [3] impress,
the two locating projections [4] to their places.
[2] [3]
[4] [1] [4] 1050fs3023c
343
8. "ADF Centering Sensor Adj. (A4) screen" 10.3.8 Recall standard data
Press the [Start] key. Sensitivity of the sensor is Reset the adjustment values of the machine adjust-
adjusted, and message of completion is dis- ment to the factory initial data or the installation initial
/1050e/1050eP
played. data.
9. Press the [Next] key to select "ADF Centering

A. Procedure
Sensor Adj. (8.5 x 11)."
10. Remove one screw [1] to place the sensor 1. Enter the service mode.
mounting plate [2] to the "LT" side [3] impress, 2. "Service mode menu screen"
the two locating projections [4] to their places. Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
[3] [2] screen.
Press the [08 Recall Standard Data] on the sub
menu.
4. "Recall standard data (Machine adjustment)
screen"
Press the [Factory Initial Data] or the [Installa-
tion Initial Data] key.
Note
• Selecting [Factory initial data] recalls the
factory initial data.
[4] [1] 1050fs3024c • Selecting [Installation initial data] recalls
11. "ADF Centering Sensor Adj. (8.5 x 11) screen" the adjustment values stored when code
Press the [Start] key. Sensitivity of the sensor is "91" of the I/O check mode was conducted.
adjusted, and message of completion is dis- • When selecting [Data at shipment] or [Data
played. at installation], the data returns with no dis-
play changed on the screen.
12. Replace the sensor plate to the position of orig-
inal size (A4 or 8.5 x 11) that the customer
mainly uses.
344 1

10.4 Process adjustment G. HV adjustment (Bias of development DC)
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
Make various adjustments around the process.
1050e/1050eP
H. Transfer guide confirm
10.4.1 High voltage adjustment Do not use this adjustment in the field.
Adjust various high voltage values.
A. High voltage auto adjustment

Current values and voltage values of a transfer, sepa-
ration (AC), separation (DC), developing bias are
automatically adjusted respectively.
Preparation:
• The photo conductor section must be set.
(1) Procedure

Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key.
screen.
Press the [01 High Voltage Adjustment] key on
the sub menu.
4. "High voltage adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [01 High Voltage Auto Adjustment]
key.
5. "HV adjustment (Auto adjustment) screen"
Press the [Start] key.
NOTE
• When an error message appears during the
adjustment, check to see if the error unit is
properly installed and cleaned. Conduct the
adjustment again.
B. HV adjustment (Charge)
C. HV adjustment (Transfer)
D. HV adjustment (Separation AC)

E. HV adjustment (Separation DC)

F. HV adjustment (Charging grid voltage)

345
10.4.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu

Make various adjustments related to image creation screen"
to the drum. Press the [02 Auto Drum Potential Adjustment]
/1050e/1050eP
key.
A. Blade setting mode
5. "Auto drum potential adjustment screen"
Perform this adjustment when changing the cleaning
Press the [Start] key. After the automatic
blade. In this mode, apply toner to the cleaning blade
adjustment, the message of completion
and drum, to prevents damages to them.
appears.
NOTE NOTE
• Perform this only when changing the cleaning • When the following error messages appear,
blade. Otherwise, the cleaning blade special check to see if the drum potential sensor
parts counter is reset, thus making it impos- (DPS) is properly installed and cleaned. Con-
sible to implement the auto blade change in duct the adjustment again.
the right timing. 1) Error 1
• Apply setting powder to the cleaning blade In the 0V check of the DPS, voltage over
and drum. 100V is detected 5 times or more.
2) Error 2
(1) Procedure The drum potential after laser exposure is
detected to be over 350V, and it is deter-
mined that control patch detect signal is
2. "Service mode menu screen" not outputted.
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. 3) Error 3
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Drum potential has been corrected 10 or
screen. more times, but it does not converge.
Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the
sub menu. C. Auto maximum density adjustment
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu Automatically adjust maximum density of images.
screen"
Press the [01 Blade Setting Mode] key. (1) Procedure
5. "Blade setting mode screen"
Press the [Start] key. With toner applied, the
drum is cleaned with the cleaning blade. The
message of completion appears.
screen.
B. Auto drum potential adjustment Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the
Measure the charging potential of drum, and adjust sub menu.
automatically the developing bias value, charging 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
voltage and grid voltage. screen"
Press the [03 Auto Maximum Density Adjust-
(1) Procedure ment] key.
5. "Auto maximum density adjustment screen"
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. NOTE
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the • When the following error messages appear,
screen. check to see if the toner control sensor board
Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the (TCSB) is properly installed and cleaned.
sub menu. Conduct the adjustment again.
346

1) Error 1 E. LD offset adjustment
The maximum density sensor (on the Equally adjust two laser intensity.
TCSB) dirt correction has been corrected
1050e/1050eP
10 or more times, but it does not con- (1) Procedure
verge.
2) Error 2
The auto maximum density adjustment is 2. "Service mode menu screen"
not completed, when the developing roller Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key.
rotation speed reaches the specified 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
value. screen.
3) Error 3 Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the
No signal is outputted from the maximum sub menu.
density sensor. Control patch detect sig- 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
nal is not outputted. screen"
Press the [05 LD Offset Adjustment] key.
D. Auto dot diameter adjustment 5. "LD offset adjustment screen"
Automatically adjust the diameter of laser beam. Press the LD1 offset line speed [490 mm] key,
and press the [COPY] key.
(1) Procedure
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the Start
1. Enter the service mode. button to output a test pattern.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 7. Adjust laser intensity of LD1 and LD2.
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. Standard value: Compare image patterns cre-
ated by the LD1 and LD2. Confirm that density
is uniform (± 1 gap is OK) as per the following
screen.
figure, and the highlighted patterns start
between the two reference lines.
sub menu.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
screen"
Press the [04 Auto Dot Diameter Adjustment]
key. [1]
5. "Auto dot diameter adjustment screen"
NOTE
• When the following error messages appear,
check to see if the toner control sensor board
(TCSB) is properly installed and cleaned.
Conduct the adjustment again.
1) Error 1
The gamma sensor (on the TCSB) dirt cor-
rection has been corrected 10 or more LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
times, but it does not converge.

1050fs3010c
2) Error 2
The auto dot diameter adjustment com- [1] Reference lines
pleted with an abnormal value.
347
9. "LD Offset Adjustment screen"

Press the [490mm] key for the laser you want G. LD1 bias adjustment
to adjust (LD1 offset or LD2 offset). Enter a Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
/1050e/1050eP
numeric value through the numeric keys and

press the [Set] key and then the [COPY] key. H. LD2 bias adjustment
• Setting range:-128 (lighter) to +127 (darker) Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
10. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the Start

I. Cartridge set mode
button to output a test pattern.
Conduct this adjustment when black spots (toner)
appear on the print-out after removing/inserting the
press the [SERVICE] key to repeat steps 5 to
photo conductor section.
10 until the standard value can be obtained.
12. Adjust the line speed 425 mm and 290 mm (1) Procedure
likewise as well.
F. Auto gamma adjustment (1 dot)
Automatically adjust image gradation (gamma).
screen.
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the service mode. sub menu.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. screen"
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Press the [09 Cartridge Set Mode] key.
screen. 5. "Cartridge set mode screen"
Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the Press the [Start] key. The development unit and
sub menu. the drum rotate for 3 minutes to charge low-
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu charge toner.
screen" 6. After the rotation stops, press the [COPY] key.
Press the [06 Auto Gamma Adjustment (1dot)] 7. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start
key. button to output 10 blank papers, thus cleaning
5. "Auto gamma adjustment (1dot) screen" the drum.
Press the [Start] key. 8. When the black spot does not disappear, press
the [SERVICE] key to repeat steps 5 to 7.
NOTE
• When the following error messages appear,
check to see if the toner control sensor board
(TCSB) is properly installed and cleaned.
Conduct the adjustment again.
1) Error 1
The gamma sensor (on the TCSB) dirt cor-
rection has been corrected 10 or more
times, but it does not converge.
2) Error 2
No signal is outputted from the gamma
sensor. Control patch detect signal is not
outputted.
3) Error 3
Regression error during the gamma curve
calculation.
348 1

10.4.3 Drum peculiarity manual 10.4.5 Recall standard data
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field. Reset the adjustment values of the process adjust-
ment to the factory initial data or the installation initial
1050e/1050eP
10.4.4 User paper setting data.
Use this adjustment when the transfer and separation
functions do not work satisfactorily with the standard A. Procedure
adjustments because of using special papers, etc.
This setting is applied when you select [User] as the
paper type. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
By default, the following data are inputted. Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key.
• For Japan: 62 to 71 g/m2 Normal paper 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
• For inch area: 72 to 91 g/m2 Normal paper screen.
• For metric area: 72 to 91 g/m2 Normal paper Press the [05 Recall Standard Data] key on the
sub menu.
NOTE 4. "Recall standard data (Process adjustment)
• Input data according to instructions of KMBT screen"
field support section. Press the [Factory initial data] or the [Installation
initial data] key.
A. Procedure
Note
• Selecting [Factory initial data] recalls the
2. "Service mode menu screen" factory initial data.
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. • Selecting [Installation initial data] recalls
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the the adjustment values stored when code
screen. "91-00" of the I/O check mode was con-
Press the [04 User Paper Setting] key on the ducted.
sub menu. • When selecting [Data at shipment] or [Data
4. "User Paper Setting screen" at installation], the data returns with no dis-
Select one of the followings; [User Paper 1] / play changed on the screen.
[User Paper 2] / [User Paper 3]
Press the [Next] and [Back] key to select an
item you adjust.
5. Input data for the selected item, and press the
[Set] key.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to configure other items.
2 349
10.5 Counter Also, the “Drum/Deve” icon on the user

screen does not disappear.
Confirm and configure settings of various counters.
/1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure
10.5.1 PM count
Configure the reset and cycle of the PM count, devel-
oper count and drum count. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Press the [03 Counter] key.
NOTE 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the screen.
• The PM count is different in the count con- Press the [01 PM Count] key on the sub menu.
dition depending on the setting of DIPSW8- 4. "PM count/cycle screen"
6. Press the key for an item you reset, and press
When set to "0": 1 count for a single side of the [Count Reset] key.
each large paper exit, and 5. "Reset confirm screen"
2 counts for a double side. Press the [Yes] key to reset the counter.
When set to "1": 2 counts for a single side The counter is reset, and the start date is auto-
of each large paper exit matically inputted.
(the definition of large size Press the [No] key not to reset the counter. You
paper is set by DIPSW10-3 return to the "PM count/cycle screen."
and 4), and 4 counts for a
6. "PM count/cycle screen"
double side. For those
Pressing the [OK] key validates resetting.
other than the large size,
Pressing the [Cancel] key invalidates the count
the count is same as when
reset.
set to "0."
• The developer count and the sensitive drum
count are made at all times 1 count for a sin-
gle side and 2 counts for a double side for a
small size paper, 2 counts for a single count
and 4 counts for a double count for a large
size paper.
A. Counter reset
Reset the PM count, developer count and drum
count.
NOTE
• Be sure to reset the PM count after imple-
menting a periodic check (every 750,000
prints).
Otherwise, the periodic check alert message
and icon do not disappear.
• Be sure to reset the developer count after
replacing a developer. Otherwise, gray back-
ground image and toner scatter may occur.
Also, the “Drum/Deve” icon on the user
screen does not disappear.
• Be sure to reset the sensitive drum count
after replacing a drum. Otherwise, image gray
background and toner scatter may occur.
350 1

B. PM cycle 10.5.2 Data collection
Configure settings of the PM cycle, developer cycle It is possible to confirm various data held in the
and drum cycle. machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data
1050e/1050eP
by the CS Remote Care, list output and the mail
NOTE remote notification system.
• The PM cycle, developer cycle and drum
cycle are already inputted in the initial set- A. Confirmation method
tings. Usually, do not change these settings. (1) Procedure

(1) Procedure
1. Enter the service mode. Press the [03 Counter] key.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
Press the [03 Counter] key. screen.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Press the [02 Data Collection] key on the sub
screen. menu.
Press the [01 PM Count] key on the sub menu. 4. "Data collection menu screen"
4. "PM count/cycle screen" Data collection include the followings:
Press the key for an item you configure. [01 Total count of each paper size]
5. Enter the first three digits of the cycle value [02 Copy count of each paper size]
through the numeric keys [03 Print count of each paper size]
6. "PM count/cycle screen" [04 Large size count]
Pressing the [OK] key returns you to the "Serv- [05 ADF count]
ice mode menu screen." [06 Pixel ratio of each section]
Press the [Cancel] key to invalidate the [07 Pixel ratio ranking list]
changed settings. [08 JAM data of time series]
[09 JAM count]
[10 Count of each copy mode]
[11 SC data of time series]
[12 SC count]
[13 JAM count of each section]
[14 SC count of each section]
Note
When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 08 to 14 can be
confirmed.
5. Press the data collection item key you want to
confirm.
351
6. "Individual data confirmation screen"

Press the [Next] or [Previous] key to scroll the
screen.
/1050e/1050eP
Note
• The [Count Reset] key is shown in the indi-
vidual data confirmation screen of the [13
JAM count of each section] and the [14 SC
count of each section].
When pressing the [Count Reset] key,
"Count reset confirmation screen" is
shown, and when pressing the [Yes] key,
the section data is reset. Pressing the [No]
key returns to "Individual data confirmation
screen" with the interval data not reset.
Reset these data while in the PM imple-
mentation to confirm the jam or SC occur-
rence count after it was visited last time.
352

B. Details of the data collection
(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and print count of each paper size
Confirm the number of print of each paper size.
1050e/1050eP
Note
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
• 1 count is made for paper of all types regardless of the paper size.
• All size of paper not included in the below table are counted as special. However, wide paper and
R-direction paper are counted as the same size.
Example: A4W and A4S are counted as A4.
• 8K is counted as B4, and 16K is counted as B5.
NO. CSRC parameter For Remark

(B1, B6, B8) Japan Inch Metric
1 00 A2 17 x 22 A2 Not used
2 01 A3 11 x 17 A3
3 02 B4 81/2 x 14 B4 (8K)
4 03 A4 81/2 x 11 A4
5 04 B5 51/2 x 81/2 B5 (16K)
6 05 A5 — A5
7 06 B6 — F4
8 07 81/2 x 14 — —
9 08 81/2 x 11 A4 —
10 09 Special Special Special
11 0A PostCard — —
(2) Data collection No. 04: Large size count

Confirm the number of print of the large size paper.
Note
• Definition of the large size can be changed by DIPSW10-3, 4 (A3, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 for default).
NO. CSRC command Item Remark

(Parameter)
1 BH (00) Large size printer count
2 BI (00) Large size copy count
3 F6 (01) Large size scan count
353
(3) Data collection No. 05: ADF count

Confirm the number of originals fed in each ADF mode.
/1050e/1050eP
Note
• No.1, 2 are not counted as No.3 to 8.
NO. CSRC parameter Item Remark

(F0)
1 00 N of originals fed in ADF mode Simplex mode
2 01 N of originals fed in RADF mode Duplex mode
3 02 N of 1 sided SDF original fed Single Feed mode
4 03 N of 2 sided SDF original fed Single Feed mode
5 04 N of 1 sided mixed original fed Mixed Original mode
6 05 N of 2 sided mixed original fed Mixed Original mode
7 06 N of 1 sided Z-folded original fed Z-Fold mode
8 07 N of 2 sided Z-folded original fed Z-Fold mode
354

(4) Data collection No. 06: Pixel ratio of each section
It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of 5,000 print sheets (At max. 30 data. Older data are deleted
first).
1050e/1050eP
Note
• This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is
different from the print ratio when actually printed.
NO. CSRC parameter Item Average pixel Remark

(V0) ratio (%)
1 00 Total count Displaying up to
2 01 Print count 1 the first place of a Newest data
3 02 Print count 2 decimal point
4 03 Print count 3
5 04 Print count 4
6 05 Print count 5
7 06 Print count 6
8 07 Print count 7
9 08 Print count 8
10 09 Print count 9
11 0A Print count 10
12 0B Print count 11
13 0C Print count 12
14 0D Print count 13
15 0E Print count 14
16 0F Print count 15
17 10 Print count 16
27 1A Print count 26
28 1B Print count 27
29 1C Print count 28
30 1D Print count 29
31 1E Print count 30 Oldest data
355
(5) Data collection No. 7: Pixel ratio ranking list

Confirm data for the top 15 jobs with higher pixel ratio ranks.
To exclude faulty operations (skyshot) by a user, display only data for continuous 5 or more print-outs.
/1050e/1050eP
Note
• This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is
different from the print ratio when actually printed.
NO. CSRC parameter Pixel ratio Print Paper Size Mode Date Remark
(V1) (%) Quantity
1 00 Displaying Displaying Copier or
2 01 up to the first the number Printer
3 02 place of a of papers
decimal
4 03
point
5 04
6 05
7 06
8 07
9 08
10 09
11 0A
12 0B
13 0C
14 0D
15 0E
(6) Data collection No. 08: JAM data of time series

With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm jam code, total count, date of occurrence, time
of occurrence, tray, paper size and magnification.
356

(7) Data collection No. 9, 13: JAM count, JAM NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section
count of each section parameter the operation panel when
Confirm the JAM occurrence count for each JAM (J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
1050e/1050eP
code (except idling JAM).
34 21 J18-08 Tray /5
35 22 J21-01 Sensitive drum
NOTE
36 23 J31-01 Registration
• Maximum count: 999,999
37 24 J31-02
38 25 J32-01 Fixing/exit
NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section
39 26 J32-02
parameter the operation panel when
40 27 J32-03
(J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
41 28 J32-04
1 00 J11-01 Tray /1
42 29 J32-05
2 01 J11-02
43 2A J32-06
3 02 J11-03
44 2B J92-01 ADU
4 03 J11-04
45 2C J92-02
5 04 J12-01 Tray /2
46 2D J93-01
6 05 J12-02
47 2E J94-01
7 06 J12-03
48 2F J19-01 Paper feed con-
8 07 J12-04
veyance
9 08 J13-01 Tray /3
49 30 J19-02 PF
10 09 J13-02
50 31 J51-01 Main body
11 0A J13-03
51 32 J61-01 DF
12 0B J13-04
52 33 J61-02
13 0C J14-01 Tray /4
53 34 J62-01
14 0D J14-02
54 35 J62-02
15 0E J14-03
55 36 J62-03
16 0F J15-01 Tray /5
56 37 J62-04
17 10 J15-02
57 38 J62-05
18 11 J15-03
58 39 J62-06
19 12 J15-04
59 3A J62-07
20 13 J17-01 Paper feed
60 3B J62-08
21 14 J17-02 conveyance
61 3C J62-09
22 15 J17-03
62 3D J62-10
23 16 J17-04
63 3E J63-01
24 17 J17-05
64 3F J63-02
25 18 J17-06
65 40 J63-03
26 19 J17-12
66 41 J63-04
27 1A J18-01 Tray /3
67 42 J63-05
28 1B J18-02
68 43 J63-06
29 1C J18-03 Tray /4
69 44 J63-07
30 1D J18-04 Tray /5
70 45 J63-08
31 1E J18-05
71 46 J63-09
32 1F J18-06 Tray /3
72 47 J63-10
33 20 J18-07 Tray /4
73 48 J63-11
357
NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section
parameter the operation panel when parameter the operation panel when
(J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 (J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
/1050e/1050eP
74 49 J72-01 FD 115 72 J72-66 SD

75 4A J72-02 116 73 J72-67
76 4B J72-03 117 74 J72-68
77 4C J72-04 118 75 J72-69
78 4D J72-05 119 76 J72-70
79 4E J72-06 120 77 J72-71
80 4F J72-09 121 78 J72-72
81 50 J72-10 122 79 J72-73
82 51 J72-11 123 7A J72-74
83 52 J72-12 124 7B J72-75
84 53 J72-13 125 7C J72-76
85 54 J72-14 126 7D J72-77
86 55 J72-16 FS 127 7E J72-78
87 56 J72-17 128 7F J72-79
88 57 J72-18 129 80 J72-80
89 58 J72-19 130 81 J72-81
90 59 J72-20 131 82 J72-82
91 5A J72-21 132 83 J72-83
92 5B J72-22 133 84 J72-84
93 5C J72-23 134 85 J72-85
94 5D J72-28 135 86 J72-86
95 5E J72-30 136 87 J72-87
96 5F J72-39 137 88 J72-88
97 60 J72-40 FD 138 89 J72-89
98 61 J72-41 139 8A J72-90
99 62 J72-42 140 8B J72-99
100 63 J72-43 141 8C J74-01 LS
101 64 J72-44 142 8D J74-02
102 65 J72-45 143 8E J74-03
103 66 J72-46 144 8F J74-04
104 67 J72-47 145 90 J74-05
105 68 J72-48 146 91 J74-06
106 69 J72-49 147 92 J74-07
107 6A J72-50 148 93 J74-08
108 6B J72-58 149 94 J74-09
109 6C J72-59 150 95 J74-10
110 6D J72-61 SD 151 96 J74-11
111 6E J72-62 152 97 J74-12
112 6F J72-63 153 98 J74-19
113 70 J72-64 154 99 J74-31
114 71 J72-65 155 9A J74-32
358 1

NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section
parameter the operation panel when parameter the operation panel when
(J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 (J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
1050e/1050eP
156 9B J74-33 LS 197 C4 J74-90 PB
157 9C J74-34 198 C5 J74-91
158 9D J74-35 199 C6 J74-92
159 9E J74-36 200 C7 J74-93
160 9F J74-37 201 C8 J74-96
161 A0 J74-38 202 C9 J74-97
162 A1 J74-39 203 CA J74-98
163 A2 J74-40 204 CB J74-99
164 A3 J74-41
165 A4 J74-42
166 A5 J74-49
167 A6 J74-60 PB
168 A7 J74-61
169 A8 J74-62
170 A9 J74-63
171 AA J74-64
172 AB J74-65
173 AC J74-66
174 AD J74-67
175 AE J74-68
176 AF J74-69
177 B0 J74-70
178 B1 J74-71
179 B2 J74-72
180 B3 J74-73
181 B4 J74-74
182 B5 J74-75
183 B6 J74-76
184 B7 J74-77
185 B8 J74-78
186 B9 J74-79
187 BA J74-80
188 BB J74-81
189 BC J74-82
190 BD J74-83
191 BE J74-84
192 BF J74-85
193 C0 J74-86
194 C1 J74-87
195 C2 J74-88
196 C3 J74-89
2 359
(8) Data collection No. 10: Count of each copy mode

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
/1050e/1050eP
Note
NO. CSRC parameter Item Count conditions

(F1)
1 00 1-1 mode
2 01 1-2 mode
3 02 2-1 mode
4 03 2-2 mode
5 04 ADF 1-1 mode
6 05 ADF 1-2 mode
7 06 Mixed original mode
8 07 SDF mode
9 08 Z-folded original mode
10 09 LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Reg.)
11 0A LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Reg.)
12 0B LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Rev.)
13 0C LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Rev.)
14 0D Text & Photo
15 0E Text
16 0F Photo
17 10 Low contrast
18 11 Custom size
19 12 1 oblique staple (Upper left)
20 13 1 oblique staple (Upper right)
21 14 2 parallel staples (Left binding)
22 15 2 parallel staples (Upper binding)
23 16 Right & Left binding
24 17 2 parallel staples (Right binding)
25 18 Upper binding
26 19 Tab original
27 1A Folding & Stapling
28 1B Stacker1 5000 sheets full alarm
29 1C Group
30 1D Offset group
31 1E Collated
32 1F Offset collated
33 20 Face down
34 21 Face up
35 22 1 to N
36 23 N to 1
360

(F1)
37 24 Stacker 2 5000 sheets full alarm
1050e/1050eP
38 25 Cover sheet
39 26 Trimmer
40 27 Real size copy
41 28 Preset magnification E4
42 29 Preset magnification E3
43 2A Preset magnification E2
44 2B Preset magnification E1
45 2C Preset magnification R4
46 2D Preset magnification R3
47 2E Preset magnification R2
48 2F Preset magnification R1
49 30 Preset Zoom 1
50 31 Preset Zoom 2
51 32 Preset Zoom 3
52 33 ZOOM
53 34 Vertical/Horizontal ZOOM
54 35 Maximum ZOOM
55 36 Minimum ZOOM
56 37 APS
57 38 AMS
58 39 Auto density
59 3A Preset density level 1
60 3B Preset density level 2
61 3C Interrupted copy
62 3D Auto image rotation cancellation
63 3E Sheet insertion
64 3F Chapter control
65 40 Combination
66 41 Booklet copy
67 42 OHP interleave copy
68 43 OHP interleave blank
69 44 Image insert
70 45 Book copy
71 46 Program job
72 47 Non-image area erase
73 48 Neg-/Positive reverse
74 49 Auto repeat
75 4A Manual repeat
76 4B Standard size repeat
77 4C Frame erasure
78 4D Fold erasure
361

(F1)
79 4E Image centering
/1050e/1050eP
80 4F All-image area
81 50 Image shift
82 51 Reduction shift
83 52 Overlay
84 53 Watermark
85 54 Stamp
86 55 Date/Time
87 56 Page
88 57 Numbering
89 58 Set quantity 1
90 59 Set quantity 2-5
91 5A Set quantity 6-10
92 5B Set quantity 11 or more
93 5C Time while power remote 1 is On Accumulation of time during which the overall
control board/image processing board is pow-
ered (main power switch is ON). (in minutes)
94 5D Time while power remote 2 is On Time during which the main relay is ON. (in minutes)
95 5E Time while power remote 3 is On Time during which the power control signal
(REM3) is ON. (in minutes)
96 5F Time while power remote 4 is On Time during which the power control signal
(REM4) is ON. (in minutes)
97 60 Time during Low Power mode Time in the LOW POWER mode. (in minutes)
98 61 Time during warm up time Time for warm-up, except print ready time.
(in minutes)
99 62 Time during which the front door is Time during which the front door is open.
open (in seconds)
100 63 Ope.time in 1side straight exit Time from the start of print and the end of
101 64 Ope.time in 1side reverse exit print. (in seconds)
102 65 Operation time in 2side print (Down time due to jam omitted)
103 66 Operation time in ADF mode Time during which ADF operates. (in seconds)
104 67 Morning correction count Counts 1 per image stabilization control (fix-
ing temperature is 50°C or lower)
105 68 Time during APS sensor On Time during which the APS sensor is ON.
(in seconds)
106 69 —
107 6A —
108 6B N of folding & stapling used jobs
109 6C N of ADF special error 5 occurred Number of ADF double feed detection
110 6D N of ADF NF occurred Number of ADF no feed detection
111 6E N of ADF special error 1 occurred Number of wrong detection of original size
112 6F N of ADF special error 2 occurred Number of wrong detection of next original
information
362

(F1)
113 70 N of ADF special error 3 occurred Number of error in size for which mixed
1050e/1050eP
size mode is not allowed
114 71 N of scanner scanned Counts 1 for pressing Start button in the
platen mode
115 72 N of electrode cleaned
116 73 N of memory overflow Sum of No.124, 125, 126 plus HDD mem-
ory shortage
117 74 N of fixing alarm occurred
118 75 N of no toner stop occurred
119 76 N of AGC retry
120 77 Multi letter tray full alarm
121 78 N of mis-centering correct error
122 79 N of ADF distortion adjust error
123 7A N of ADF distortion data error
124 7B Compression memory overflow Scanner compression/print compression
memory shortage
125 7C Page memory overflow (scan) Shortage in memory for receiving print data
126 7D Page memory overflow (print) Decompression page memory shortage
127 7E Staple Finisher main tray alarm
128 7F Staple Finisher staple alarm
129 80 Saddle Stitcher trash full alarm
130 81 N of ADF special error 4 occurred Ready timeout error
131 82 Store for HDD (Sync.with Copying)
132 83 Store for HDD (Store Scan → HDD)
133 84 Store for PC (Store Scan → PC)
134 85 Store for PC (Store HDD → PC)
135 86 Recall from HDD (Recall HDD)
136 87 Recall from PC (PC/JobEditer)
137 88 Saddle Stitcher staple alarm
138 89 Wide paper count (A3W or 11 x 17W)
139 8A Wide paper count (A4W or 8.5 x 11W)
140 8B Wide paper count (A4SW or 8.5 x 11SW)
141 8C Wide paper count (A5W or 5.5 x 8.5W)
142 8D Wide paper count (Others)
143 8E Hole-Punch
144 8F Z-Folding
145 90 Multi Folder trash full alarm
146 91 Mixplex (Simplex)
147 92 Mixplex (Duplex)
148 93 Right/Left binding originals
149 94 Upper binding originals
150 95 Inside print multi letter
363

(F1)
151 96 Outside print multi letter
/1050e/1050eP
152 97 Inside print letter fold-in

153 98 Outside print letter fold-in
154 99 Inside print letter fold-out
155 9A Outside print letter fold-out
156 9B Inside print double parallel
157 9C Outside print double parallel
158 9D Inside print gate
159 9E Outside print gate
160 9F Multi Center
161 A0 Inside print folding
162 A1 Outside print folding
163 A2 Main tray output
164 A3 Stacker 1 tray output
165 A4 Stacker 2 tray output
166 A5 Stacker auto setting output
167 A6 Stacker pile setting permit
168 A7 Folding & Stapling tray output
169 A8 Three-Folding tray output
170 A9 Folding sub tray output
171 AA Stacker 1 sub tray output
172 AB Stacker 2 sub tray output
173 AC Folding & Stapling sub tray output
174 AD Stapling sub tray output
175 AE Main tray output Job number
176 AF Stacker 1 tray output Job number
177 B0 Stacker 2 tray output Job number
178 B1 Folding & Stapling output Job No.
179 B2 Three Folding tray output Job No.
180 B3 Folding sub tray Job number
181 B4 Stacker 1 sub tray Job number
182 B5 Stacker 2 sub tray Job number
183 B6 Fold & Staple sub tray Job number
184 B7 Stapling sub tray Job number
185 B8 Multi center Job number
186 B9 Inside print folding Job number
187 BA Outside print folding Job number
188 BB Arbitrary stamp
189 BC Perfect binding blank cover mode
190 BD Perfect binding 1 in 1 mode
191 BE Perfect binding 2 in 1 mode
192 BF Perfect binding 3 in 1 mode
364 2

(F1)
193 C0 PB cover paper tray mode
1050e/1050eP
194 C1 Number of perfect binding cover Number of books created by perfect bind-
ing machine.
195 C2 Number of perfect binding cover with Number of books when cover paper trim-
trim ming is set.
196 C3 Number of perfect binding cover Number of books when cover paper trim-
without trim ming is not set.
197 C4 Number of ejected paper on the sub
tray (perfect binding)
198 C5 Number of ejected paper on the
stacker (perfect binding)
199 C6 Number of times PB tray is pulled
200 C7 Number of times PB front door is
opened/closed
201 C8 Number of times PB upper door is
opened/closed
(9) Data collection No. 11: SC data of time series

With respect to the latest 20 SC, confirm SC code, total count, date of occurrence, time of occurrence and
machine condition (00: Idling, 01: Scanner operating, 02: Printer operating, 03: Scanner and printer operating).
2 365
(10) Data collection No. 12, 14: SC count, SC NO. CSRC SC code Section
count of each section parameter
Confirm the number of SC occurrence of each SC (E0/E1)
/1050e/1050eP
code.
28 1B SC21-04 Transfer/separation
29 1C SC21-05 cleaning motor
NOTE
30 1D SC21-06 abnormality
• When the service mode DIPSW3-1 is 1 31 1E SC21-07 Transfer assist motor
(Latched), SC34, 35, 36, 23-14 and 23-17 are 32 1F SC21-08 abnormality
not counted. 33 20 SC23-01 Toner bottle motor
abnormality
NO. CSRC SC code Section
34 21 SC23-02 Developing motor
parameter
abnormality
(E0/E1)
35 22 SC23-03 Blade motor abnor-
1 00 SC13-01 Paper feed motor
36 23 SC23-04 mality
abnormality
2 01 SC13-02 Paper feed motor 37 24 SC23-05
abnormality (PF) 38 25 SC23-06
3 02 SC13-03 Vertical conveyance 39 26 SC23-07
motor abnormality 40 27 SC23-08
(PF) 41 28 SC23-09
4 03 SC13-05 Exit conveyance motor 42 29 SC23-10 Drum motor abnormality
abnormality (PF)
43 2A SC23-11 Toner supply abnor-
5 04 SC18-11 Tray /1 abnormality 44 2B SC23-12 mality
6 05 SC18-12 45 2C SC23-13
7 06 SC18-13 46 2D SC23-14
8 07 SC18-10 47 2E SC23-15
9 08 SC18-21 Tray /2 abnormality 48 2F SC23-17
10 09 SC18-22 49 30 SC23-20
11 0A SC18-23 50 31 SC23-21
12 0B SC18-20 51 32 SC23-22
13 0C SC18-31 Tray /3 abnormality 52 33 SC23-24
14 0D SC18-32 53 34 SC23-25
15 0E SC18-33 54 35 SC23-26
16 0F SC18-30 55 36 SC24-01 Drum temperature
17 10 SC18-41 Tray /4 abnormality 56 37 SC24-02 sensor abnormality
18 11 SC18-42 57 38 SC28-01 High voltage abnor-
19 12 SC18-43 58 39 SC28-02 mality
20 13 SC18-40 59 3A SC28-03
21 14 SC18-51 Tray /5 abnormality 60 3B SC28-04
22 15 SC18-52 61 3C SC29-01 Process abnormality
23 16 SC18-53 62 3D SC29-02
24 17 SC18-50 63 3E SC29-03
25 18 SC21-01 Charger cleaning 64 3F SC29-04
26 19 SC21-02 motor abnormality
65 40 SC29-05
27 1A SC21-03 66 41 SC29-06
366

NO. CSRC SC code Section NO. CSRC SC code Section
parameter parameter
(E0/E1) (E0/E1)
1050e/1050eP
67 42 SC29-07 Process abnormality 108 6B SC32-33 Fan abnormality
68 43 SC29-08 109 6C SC32-34
69 44 SC29-09 110 6D SC32-35
70 45 SC29-10 111 6E SC32-36
71 46 SC29-11 112 6F SC32-37
72 47 SC29-12 High voltage abnor- 113 70 SC32-38
73 48 SC29-13 mality 114 71 SC32-39
74 49 SC29-14 115 72 SC32-40
75 4A SC29-15 116 73 SC32-41
76 4B SC29-16 117 74 SC32-42
77 4C SC32-01 Fan abnormality 118 75 SC32-43
78 4D SC32-02 119 76 SC32-44
79 4E SC32-03 120 77 SC32-45
80 4F SC32-04 121 78 SC32-46
81 50 SC32-05 122 79 SC32-47
82 51 SC32-06 123 7A SC32-48
83 52 SC32-07 124 7B SC32-49
84 53 SC32-09 125 7C SC32-50
85 54 SC32-10 126 7D SC32-51
86 55 SC32-11 127 7E SC32-52
87 56 SC32-12 128 7F SC32-53
88 57 SC32-13 129 80 SC32-54
89 58 SC32-14 130 81 SC32-55
90 59 SC32-15 131 82 SC33-01 ADU drive board
91 5A SC32-16 132 83 SC33-02 abnormality
92 5B SC32-17 133 84 SC33-04 Printer control board
93 5C SC32-18 134 85 SC33-05 abnormality
94 5D SC32-19 135 86 SC33-06
95 5E SC32-20 136 87 SC34-01 Fusing abnormality
96 5F SC32-21 137 88 SC34-02
97 60 SC32-22 138 89 SC34-03
98 61 SC32-23 139 8A SC34-04
99 62 SC32-24 140 8B SC35-01
100 63 SC32-25 141 8C SC35-02
101 64 SC32-26 142 8D SC36-01
102 65 SC32-27 143 8E SC36-02
103 66 SC32-28 144 8F SC36-03
104 67 SC32-29 145 90 SC36-04
105 68 SC32-30 146 91 SC36-05
106 69 SC32-31 147 92 SC36-06
107 6A SC32-32
367

parameter parameter
(E0/E1) (E0/E1)
/1050e/1050eP
148 93 SC41-01 Scanner abnormality 189 BC SC46-36 Image processing

149 94 SC41-02 190 BD SC46-40 abnormality
150 95 SC41-03 191 BE SC46-41
151 96 SC41-10 Write abnormality 192 BF SC46-42
152 97 SC41-11 193 C0 SC46-43
153 98 SC42-01 Fan abnormality 194 C1 SC46-50
154 99 SC42-02 195 C2 SC46-51
155 9A SC42-03 196 C3 SC46-61
156 9B SC42-04 197 C4 SC46-62
157 9C SC42-05 198 C5 SC46-63
158 9D SC42-06 199 C6 SC46-64
159 9E SC42-07 200 C7 SC46-66
160 9F SC42-08 201 C8 SC46-80
161 A0 SC42-09 202 C9 SC46-81
162 A1 SC42-10 203 CA SC46-82
163 A2 SC42-16 204 CB SC46-83
164 A3 SC42-17 205 CC SC46-90
165 A4 SC42-18 206 CD SC46-91
166 A5 SC42-19 207 CE SC46-99
167 A6 SC46-01 Image processing 208 CF SC49-01
168 A7 SC46-02 abnormality 209 D0 SC49-03
169 A8 SC46-03 210 D1 SC49-04
170 A9 SC46-05 211 D2 SC49-05
171 AA SC46-06 212 D3 SC49-06
172 AB SC46-08 213 D4 SC50-01
173 AC SC46-12 214 D5 SC50-02
174 AD SC46-13 215 D6 SC50-03
175 AE SC46-14 216 D7 SC50-04
176 AF SC46-15 217 D8 SC50-05
177 B0 SC46-16 218 D9 SC50-10
178 B1 SC46-17 219 DA SC50-11
179 B2 SC46-19 220 DB SC52-01 Fan abnormality
180 B3 SC46-21 221 DC SC52-02
181 B4 SC46-23 222 DD SC52-03
182 B5 SC46-24 223 DE SC52-04
183 B6 SC46-25 224 DF SC52-05
184 B7 SC46-26 225 E0 SC52-06
185 B8 SC46-27 226 E1 SC52-07
186 B9 SC46-31 227 E2 SC52-08
187 BA SC46-32 228 E3 SC52-09
188 BB SC46-35 229 E4 SC52-10
368

parameter parameter
(E0/E1) (E0/E1)
1050e/1050eP
230 E5 SC52-11 Fan abnormality 268 0B SC70-01 Communication
231 E6 SC52-12 269 0C SC70-02 abnormality
232 E7 SC53-01 Fusing motor abnormality 270 0D SC76-01 LS abnormality
233 E8 SC53-02 Total count abnormality 271 0E SC76-02
234 E9 SC53-03 272 0F SC76-03
235 EA SC53-04 Key counter abnormality 273 10 SC76-04
236 EB SC53-05 274 11 SC76-05
237 EC SC53-06 Power source abnor- 275 12 SC76-06
238 ED SC53-07 mality 276 13 SC76-07
239 EE SC53-08 277 14 SC76-08
240 EF SC53-11 Paper feed abnormality 278 15 SC76-09
241 F0 SC53-12 279 16 SC76-10
242 F1 SC53-13 280 17 SC76-11
243 F2 SC53-14 281 18 SC76-31
244 F3 SC53-15 PF paper feed abnor- 282 19 SC76-32
245 F4 SC53-16 mality 283 1A SC76-33
246 F5 SC53-17 Printer control board 284 1B SC76-34
abnormality 285 1C SC76-35
247 F6 SC53-18 Erase lamp abnormality 286 1D SC76-36
248 F7 SC53-19 Conveyance motor 287 1E SC76-37
abnormality 288 1F SC76-38
249 F8 SC53-20 ADU reverse paper 289 20 SC76-39
exit motor abnormality
290 21 SC76-40
250 F9 SC60-01 DF abnormality
291 22 SC76-41
251 FA SC60-02
292 23 SC77-01 FS abnormality
252 FB SC60-03
293 24 SC77-02
253 FC SC60-11
294 25 SC77-03
254 FD SC67-01
295 26 SC77-04
255 FE SC67-02
296 27 SC77-05
256 FF SC67-03
297 28 SC77-06
257 00 SC67-04
298 29 SC77-07
258 01 SC67-05
299 2A SC77-08
259 02 SC67-06
300 2B SC77-11
260 03 SC67-07
301 2C SC77-12
261 04 SC67-08
302 2D SC77-15
262 05 SC67-09
303 2E SC77-21
263 06 SC67-10
304 2F SC77-22
264 07 SC67-11
305 30 SC77-25
265 08 SC67-12
306 31 SC77-28
266 09 SC67-13
267 0A SC67-14
369

parameter parameter
(E0/E1) (E0/E1)
/1050e/1050eP
307 32 SC77-30 FD abnormality 348 5B SC77-82 SD abnormality

308 33 SC77-31 349 5C SC77-83
309 34 SC77-32 350 5D SC77-84
310 35 SC77-33 351 5E SC77-85
311 36 SC77-34 352 5F SC77-86
312 37 SC77-35 353 60 SC77-87
313 38 SC77-36 354 61 SC77-88
314 39 SC77-37 355 62 SC77-89
315 3A SC77-38 356 63 SC77-90
316 3B SC77-39 357 64 SC77-95
317 3C SC77-40 358 65 SC77-96
318 3D SC77-41 359 66 SC77-97
319 3E SC77-42 360 67 SC77-98
320 3F SC77-43 361 68 SC77-99
321 40 SC77-44 362 69 SC80-01 Communication
322 41 SC77-48 363 6A SC80-02 abnormality
323 42 SC77-49 364 6B SC80-03
324 43 SC77-58 365 6C SC80-1* ISW abnormality
325 44 SC77-59 366 6D SC80-30
326 45 SC77-60 SD abnormality 367 6E SC80-31
327 46 SC77-61 368 6F SC80-32
328 47 SC77-62 369 70 SC80-40
329 48 SC77-63 370 71 SC80-41
330 49 SC77-64 371 72 SC80-42
331 4A SC77-65 372 73 SC80-43
332 4B SC77-66 373 74 SC80-44
333 4C SC77-67 374 75 SC80-45
334 4D SC77-68 375 76 SC90-01 ADU abnormality
335 4E SC77-69 376 77 SC90-02
336 4F SC77-70 377 78 SC90-03 Communication
337 50 SC77-71 378 79 SC90-04 abnormality
338 51 SC77-72 379 7A SC93-01 ADU drive board
339 52 SC77-73 abnormality
340 53 SC77-74 380 7B SC93-05 Power source abnor-
341 54 SC77-75 mality
342 55 SC77-76 381 7C SC93-06 ADU drive board

382 7D SC93-07 abnormality
343 56 SC77-77
344 57 SC77-78 383 7E SC93-08 PF drive board abnor-
mality
345 58 SC77-79
384 7F SC95-01 Fan abnormality
346 59 SC77-80
385 80 SC49-07 IC abnormality
347 5A SC77-81
370 1

parameter parameter
(E0/E1) (E0/E1)
1050e/1050eP
386 81 SC49-08 IC abnormality 427 AA SC78-38 PB abnormality
387 82 SC49-09 428 AB SC78-39
388 83 SC49-10 429 AC SC78-40
389 84 SC77-91 SD abnormality 430 AD SC78-41
390 85 SC23-50 Main body abnormality 431 AE SC78-42
391 86 SC78-01 PB abnormality 432 AF SC78-43
392 87 SC78-02 433 B0 SC78-44
393 88 SC78-04 434 B1 SC78-45
394 89 SC78-05 435 B2 SC78-46
395 8A SC78-06 436 B3 SC78-47
396 8B SC78-07 437 B4 SC78-48
397 8C SC78-08 438 B5 SC78-49
398 8D SC78-09 439 B6 SC78-50
399 8E SC78-10 440 B7 SC78-51
400 8F SC78-11 441 B8 SC78-52
401 90 SC78-12 442 B9 SC78-53
402 91 SC78-13 443 BA SC78-54
403 92 SC78-14 444 BB SC78-55
404 93 SC78-15 445 BC SC78-56
405 94 SC78-16 446 BD SC78-57
406 95 SC78-17 447 BE SC78-58
407 96 SC78-18 448 BF SC78-59
408 97 SC78-19 449 C0 SC78-60
409 98 SC78-20 450 C1 SC78-61
410 99 SC78-21 451 C2 SC78-62
411 9A SC78-22 452 C3 SC78-63
412 9B SC78-23 453 C4 SC78-64
413 9C SC78-24 454 C5 SC78-91
414 9D SC78-25 455 C6 SC78-92
415 9E SC78-26 456 C7 SC78-93
416 9F SC78-27 457 C8 SC78-94
417 A0 SC78-28 458 C9 SC78-96
418 A1 SC78-29 459 CA SC78-97
419 A2 SC78-30 460 CB SC78-98
420 A3 SC78-31 461 CC SC78-99
421 A4 SC78-32 462 CD SC80-46
422 A5 SC78-33
423 A6 SC78-34
424 A7 SC78-35
425 A8 SC78-36
426 A9 SC78-37
2 371
10.5.3 Copy count of part

A. Copy count of special parts
When a part is replaced, reset the counter of the part
/1050e/1050eP
that has been replaced to manage the service history.
(1) Procedure

screen.
Press the [03 Parts Counter] key on the sub
menu.
4. "Copy count of part menu screen"
Press the [01 Count of special parts] key.
5. "Count of special parts screen"
screen.
Press the [S] or [T] key to select an item you
want to reset.
6. Press the [Count Reset] key.
7. "Reset confirm screen"
Press the [Yes] key to reset the counter.
Press the [No] key not to reset the counter. You
return to the "Count of special parts screen."
372

B. Count of special parts list
Note
1050e/1050eP
• Be sure to reset the fixing cleaning web counter (No.001) after replacing the cleaning web. Other-
wise, fuser cleaning trouble may occur.
• Be sure to perform the blade set mode of the service mode after replacing the cleaning blade. This
automatically resets the cleaning blade counter (No.002). Otherwise, the auto blade replacement
cannot be implemented.
NO CSRC Parts name Parts No. Count conditions

parameter
(Z1)
001 00 Fixing cleaning web 56UA5351 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
002 01 Cleaning blade 56UA5601 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
003 02 Charging wire 56UA2509
004 03 Charging grid 56UA2508
005 04 Charging cleaning unit 55VA-255
006 05 Develop suction filter 56UA3108
007 06 Trans./sep. wire 56UA2613
008 07 Trans./sep. CL unit 56GA-276/
56GA-277/
56GA-278
009 08 Drum Separation claws 55VA2919 2 counts for each A3, 11x17, 8K paper exit in
the single side mode, 4 counts for double.
Except these, 1 count for the single and 2
counts for the double.
010 09 Trans Assist PET1 56UA-281 For the paper type which is 297 mm width or
more and 91 g/m2 or less, 0 count for each
paper exit in the single side mode, and 1 count
for the double side mode.
011 0A Trans Assist PET2 56UE-281 For the paper type which is between 279 and
297 mm width and 91 g/m2 or less, 0 count for
each paper exit in the single side mode, and 1
count for the double side mode.
012 0B Cleaner fur brush 56UA-574 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
013 0C Cleaner side seal R 56UA-558 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
014 0D Cleaner side seal F 56UA-559
015 0E Fix. roller (U) 56UA5304
016 0F Fix. roller Unit (L) 56UA-528
017 10 Fixing claws upper 55VA5321
018 11 Fixing claws lower 25AA5329
019 12 Heat sleeve (Upper) 45405339
020 13 Upper roller bearing 45407504
021 14 Fixing CL sheet 56UA-547
022 15 Temperature sensor 56GA-209
023 16 Toner supply sleeve /1 55VA-334
373

parameter
(Z1)
/1050e/1050eP
024 17 Toner supply sleeve /2 55VA-335 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
025 18 Cleaner toner tray 56UA-568 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
026 19 Fur brush scraper 56UA-561
027 1A Heat sleeve (Heated) 26AA5315
028 1B Heat roller bearing 56UA7507
029 1C Upper roller sensor 55VA8804
030 1D Heat roller sensor 55VA8806
031 1E Fixing sub roller 56UA5307
032 1F Ozone filter 56UA1121
56UA1128
033 20 Ozone suction filter 56UA1122
56UA1129
034 21 Charging corona 56UA-250
035 22 PCL 56UA-257
036 23 Developing unit 56UA-300
037 24 Develop suction box 56UA-325
038 25 Trans/Sep unit 56UA-270
039 26 TSL 55VA8308
040 27 Regis. feed count 56UA7602
56UA4606
041 28 ADU accelerator roller 56UA4740 1 count for each reverse exit paper in the single
side mode, 0 count for each 1side straight
mode, 1 count in the double side mode.
042 29 Reversal output roller 56UA4741 2 count for each reverse exit paper in the single
043 2A ADU reversal roller 56UA4741 2 count for each reverse exit paper in the single
044 2B Output convey roller 56UA4742 1 count for each reverse exit paper in the single
56UA4743 side mode, 0 count for each 1side straight
045 2C ADU convey roller 56UA4744 0 count for each paper exit in the single side
56UA4683 mode, 1 counts in the double side mode.
046 2D Fixing exit roller 56UA4595 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
(N = 4) mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
047 2E Output roller 56UA4557
048 2F Fixing gear /2 56UA7783
049 30 Web Motor 56GA8017
050 31 Fixing output actuator 56UA5383
051 32 Toner pump /1 56UA-780
052 33 Toner pump /2 56UA-790
374 1

parameter
(Z1)
1050e/1050eP
053 34 Tray 1 feed roller 55VA-464 1 count for each paper exit from tray /1.
054 35 Tray 1 conv/rev roller 55VA-463
055 36 Tray 1 feed clutch 56AA8201
056 37 Tray 1 handle clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit when the clutch is
turned ON by paper from tray /1.
059 3A Tray 2 feed clutch 56AA8201
060 3B Tray 2 handle clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit when the clutch is
turned ON by paper from tray /2.
061 3C Tray 3 feed roller 55VA-484 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
062 3D Tray 3 conv/rev roller 55VA-483
063 3E Tray 3 feed clutch 56AA8201
064 3F Tray 3 handle clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit when the clutch is
065 40 Tray 3 reverse clutch 56AA8201 turned ON by paper from tray /3.
070 45 Tray 4 reverse clutch 56AA8201 turned ON by paper from tray /4.
075 4A Tray 5 reverse clutch 56AA8201 turned ON by paper from tray /5.
076 4B Paper fur brush 55VA-574 1 count for each paper exit.
077 4C V-convey exit roller 56UA4412
078 4D Paper powder scraper 56UA4419
079 4E V-convey clutch top 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /1 and /2.
080 4F V-convey clutch mid. 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /2.
081 50 V-convey clutch low 56AA8201
082 51 V-convey roller /1 56UA4413 1 count for each paper exit.
083 52 V-convey roller 2/3 56UA4414 1 count for each paper exit from tray /2.
56UA4464
084 53 Tray 1 pre-reg. roller 56UA4411 1 count for each paper exit from tray /1 and /2.
085 54 Tray 2 pre-reg. roller 56UA4411 1 count for each paper exit from tray /2.
086 55 PFU V-convey roller /T 15BA4507 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
15BA4508
087 56 PFU V-convey roller /M 15BA4507 1 count for each paper exit from tray /4.
088 57 PFU V-convey roller /L 15BA4507 1 count for each paper exit from tray /5.
15BA4508
375

parameter
(Z1)
/1050e/1050eP
089 58 PFU output roller 15BA5011 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3, /4 and
/5.
090 59 PFU V-convey clutch /T 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
091 5A PFU V-convey clutch /M 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /4.
092 5B PFU V-convey clutch /L 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /5.
093 5C PFU Mid-conv clutch /T 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
094 5D PFU Mid-conv clutch /L 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /5.
095 5E Exposure On time 56UA8301 Accumulation of time lamp is on. 1 count per
second.
096 5F Fixing cleaning roller 56UA5353 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
097 60 Web prevention part 56UA-544 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
098 61 Main Switch 55GA8601 1 count each time the main power switch turns
OFF the power.
099 62 Door Switch 40AA8501 1 count each time the front door is opened
100 63 Tray 1 feed count 56UA-400 1 count for each paper exit from tray /1.
101 64 Tray 2 feed count 56UA-400 1 count for each paper exit from tray /2.
102 65 Tray 3 feed count 15BA-300 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
105 68 8k,16k Duplex count For the paper type which is between 270 mm
and 279 mm width and 91 g/m2 or less, 0
count for each paper exit in the single side
mode, and 1 count for the double side mode.
106 69 B4, B5 Duplex count For the paper type which is between 257 mm
107 6A 8.5 Duplex count For the paper type which is between 215 mm
108 6B A4S, A5 Duplex count For the paper type which is between 210 mm
109 6C 8, 8.125, 8.25 Dup.count For the paper type which is between 203 mm
110 6D B5R Duplex count For the paper type which is between 182 mm
376

parameter
(Z1)
1050e/1050eP
111 6E FS Staple/Front 15AA4222 1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1-
staple at front or the 2-staple mode.
112 6F FS Staple/Back 15AA4222 1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1-
staple at rear or the 2-staple mode.
113 70 FS solenoid /A 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
mode and the sort mode.
114 71 FD feed roller /A Top 50BA-574 Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Up.
115 72 FD reverse rubber /Top 13QN-443
116 73 FD feed roller /B Top 50BA-575
117 74 FD feed roller /A Low 50BA-574 Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Lw.
118 75 FD reverse rubber /Low 13QN-443
119 76 FD feed roller /B Low 50BA-575
120 77 FD punch motor assy 15AG-573 1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode.
121 78 FD solenoid /A (release 1) 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the punch or fold-
ing mode (all size).
122 79 FD solenoid /A (release 2) 56QA8251 • 1 count for each paper exit in the folding
mode (all size)
• 1 count for each paper exit in the punch
mode (paper length 220 mm or larger).
123 7A FD motor assy 129U-108 1 count for each paper exit to the main tray.
124 7B LS1 solenoid (Lead) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
125 7C LS1 solenoid (Rear) 15AV8253 sort mode (all size).
126 7D LS1 solenoid (Center) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (Length 295 mm or more and Width
226 or more).
127 7E LS1 solenoid (Curl) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
mode.
128 7F LS1 Up/Down motor 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the
stacker tray up down motor.
129 80 LS2 solenoid (Lead) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
130 81 LS2 solenoid (Rear) 15AV8253 sort mode (all size).
131 82 LS2 solenoid (Center) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (Length 295 mm or more and Width
226 or more).
132 83 LS2 solenoid (Curl) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
mode.
133 84 LS2 Up/Down motor 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the
stacker tray up down motor.
134 85 SD Staple/Right 15AN-550 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
135 86 SD Staple/Left 15AN-550 mode.
136 87 SD trimmer edge 15AN-570 1 count for each paper exit in the trimming
137 88 SD trimmer receiver 15AN5282 mode.
1 377

parameter
(Z1)
/1050e/1050eP
138 89 SD convey solenoid 15AN8251 1 count for each paper exit to the folding sec-
139 8A SD solenoid 13QE8251 tion.
140 8B SDFNS solenoid /2 12QR8252 1 count for each paper exit to the stacker.
141 8C ADF pick up roller 13GA4604 Original feed count in all modes.
142 8D ADF feed roller 15AS4605
143 8E ADF retard roller 13GA4606
144 8F ADF sub pick roller 13GA4601
145 90 ADF torque limiter 13GA-135
146 91 ADF SDF solenoid 13GA8252 Total original feed count in the single feed mode.
147 92 ADF LSB solenoid 13GA8251 • 1 count for each set of the large size original
single side mode.
• 1 count for each sheet of the large size orig-
inal double side mode. *1
148 93 ADF press/release SD 13GA8251 1 count for each sheet of the large size original
double side mode. *1
149 94 ADF SSB solenoid 13GA8251 1 count for each sheet of the small size original
double side mode.
150 95 Toner collect box 14RT-970 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
151 96 Recycling cut pump 14RT-210 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
152 97 Accumulator 14RT-230
153 98 Stirring plate assy 56UA-347 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
56UA-348 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
154 99 PB sub tray exit solenoid 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit on the sub tray.
155 9A PB SC roller release 13GQ8005 1 count for each paper exit on the stacker.
motor
156 9B PB SC stopper solenoid 15AA8251
157 9C PB SC pressure arm sole- 15AA8251
noid
158 9D PB switchback roller 13GQ4519 1 count for each paper exit.
159 9E PB pick-up roller 55VA-464 1 count for each book exit in PB tray cover
160 9F PB paper feed roller sep- 55VA-463 mode.
aration roller
161 A0 PB paper pick up clutch 56AA8201
162 A1 PB cover paper separa- 56AA8201
tion clutch
163 A2 PB roller cutter blade assy A0756230 1 count for each book exit in cover trimming mode.
164 A3 PB filter /1 A0753724 1 count for each paper exit.
165 A4 PB filter /2 A0753734
166 A5 PB straight gate solenoid 56QA8251 1 count for each book exit except in PB tray
cover mode.
*1 The large size original represents all originals in the mixed original mode; A3, B4, A4S, B5S, 8K, 16KS, 11
x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 8 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 13 and 81/2 x 13.
378 2

C. Copy count of each part (2) Resetting of each part counter
This is used when you want to control the service his- 1) Procedure
tory of each part not registered as a special part.
1050e/1050eP
Confirm and reset part name, part number, limit value
setting and print count. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Up to 30 data from No.01 to No.30 can be set. Press the [03 Counter] key.
1 count is taken for each passage of paper, regard- 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
less of the paper size. screen.
(1) Setting of each part and confirmation of the menu.
copy count 4. "Copy count of part menu screen"
1) Procedure Press the [02 Count of each parts] key.
5. "Copy count of each part screen"
screen.
Press the [S] or [T] key to select an item you
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the want to reset.
screen.
6. Press the [Count Reset] key.
7. "Reset confirm screen"
menu.
Press the [Yes] key to reset the counter.
4. "Copy count of part menu screen"
Press the [No] key not to reset the counter. You
Press the [02 Count of each parts] key.
return to the "Copy count of each part screen."
5. "Copy count of each part screen"
screen. NOTE
Press the [S] or [T] key to select a data • When the copy count is in excess of a limit
number. value, an asterisk "*" is shown to the right of
6. Select either the [Name Setting], [P/N Setting] the limit value.
or [Limit Setting] key.
7. Press one of the key you want to set or
change, and enter it with the alphanumeric
keys.
• [Name Setting] : Enter a part name (8 digits)
• [P/N Setting] : Enter a part number (9 dig-
its)
• [Limit Setting] : Enter a limit value (8 digits)
8. Press the [OK] key to update data.
Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the update.
379
D. Relationship between each data number 10.6 Machine condition

and CSRC parameter
10.6.1 I/O check mode
NO. NAME P/N COUNT LIMIT
/1050e/1050eP
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/

01 Z4:00 Z3:00 G0:00 H0:00 output check function) to check and adjust the vari-
02 Z4:01 Z3:01 G0:01 H0:01 ous signals and loads.
03 Z4:02 Z3:02 G0:02 H0:02
04 Z4:03 Z3:03 G0:03 H0:03 A. I/O check screen
05 Z4:04 Z3:04 G0:04 H0:04

06 Z4:05 Z3:05 G0:05 H0:05
07 Z4:06 Z3:06 G0:06 H0:06
08 Z4:07 Z3:07 G0:07 H0:07
09 Z4:08 Z3:08 G0:08 H0:08
10 Z4:09 Z3:09 G0:09 H0:09
11 Z4:0A Z3:0A G0:0A H0:0A
12 Z4:0B Z3:0B G0:0B H0:0B
13 Z4:0C Z3:0C G0:0C H0:0C
14 Z4:0D Z3:0D G0:0D H0:0D
15 Z4:0E Z3:0E G0:0E H0:0E
[1] [2] [3] [4]
16 Z4:0F Z3:0F G0:0F H0:0F
17 Z4:10 Z3:10 G0:10 H0:10 [1] I/O check code
18 Z4:11 Z3:11 G0:11 H0:11 [2] Multi code
19 Z4:12 Z3:12 G0:12 H0:12 [3] Input check
20 Z4:13 Z3:13 G0:13 H0:13 [4] Output check
21 Z4:14 Z3:14 G0:14 H0:14
B. Input check method
22 Z4:15 Z3:15 G0:15 H0:15
(1) Procedure
23 Z4:16 Z3:16 G0:16 H0:16
24 Z4:17 Z3:17 G0:17 H0:17 1. Enter the service mode.
25 Z4:18 Z3:18 G0:18 H0:18 2. "Service mode menu screen"
26 Z4:19 Z3:19 G0:19 H0:19 Press the [04 Machine Condition] key.
27 Z4:1A Z3:1A G0:1A H0:1A 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen.
28 Z4:1B Z3:1B G0:1B H0:1B
Press the [01 I/O Check Mode] key on the sub
29 Z4:1C Z3:1C G0:1C H0:1C
menu.
30 Z4:1D Z3:1D G0:1D H0:1D
4. "I/O check mode screen"
Enter the input check code with the numeric
keys.
5. To use the multi mode, press the Access but-
ton.
6. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
7. Input check result will appear in the message
display area.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 to perform the other signal
input check.
380

C. Output check method (1) Procedure
(1) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board /1, /2.
1. Enter the service mode. (See chapter II "Maintenance 4.3.5 Registration
1050e/1050eP
2. "Service mode menu screen" section")
Press the [04 Machine Condition] key. 2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the multi
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the feed detection board /1, /2, and rotate the
screen. rotary switch [2] on the ADU drive board /1
Press the [01 I/O Check Mode] key on the sub (ADUDB1) as shown in the table below.
menu.
4. "I/O check mode screen" [1]
Enter the output check code with the numeric
keys.
5. To use the multi mode, press the Access but-
ton.
6. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
7. Press the Start button to perform the output
check. D
8. Press the STOP button to stop it.

9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 to perform the other load
or signal output check.
[2]
D. Adjustment when replacing the multi feed
detection board (main body)
When the multi feed detection board of the main
body is replaced, conduct this adjustment. And also
adjust it when multi feed is not detected properly due
to specific types of paper (such as thin paper, coated
paper with less stiffness, and thick paper).
However, multi feed detection control is not applica-
ble to paper weight more than 210 g/m2 and coated
paper of 50 to 61 g/m2.
NOTE
1050fs3056c
• The multi feed detection board /1 and /2 are
adjusted in the manufacturing process as a
Stamp letter Rotary switch
pair of upper and lower. Be sure to replace
A 0
them as a pair.
• Adjustment error may occur because of the B 1
temperature of the sensor surface. Make the C 2
adjustment at a temperature close to that in D 3
which the copier is actually used (20 to 30°C). E 4
(In case you brought a new part from out- F 5
doors, make the adjustment after the temper-
ature of the sensor surface and the room 3. Select the input check code "56-00" of the I/O
temperature become the same) check mode in the service mode.
381
4. Insert one sheet of the paper (P/N 65AA-9910) 8. Insert one sheet of paper that customer mainly
between the multi feed detection board /1 and use (paper weight 62 to 209 g/m2), and confirm
2
/2 (200 to 300 g/m paper can also be used). that "L" appears on the input check display.
/1050e/1050eP
Be sure the paper does not trail down. "L": no multi feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
"H": multi feed (2 sheets of paper)
Note
• If the paper trails down, the angle of paper Note
insertion is different from that of paper pas- • When "H" is once detected, the guide plate
sage, thus making it impossible to make an to which the multi feed detection board /2
accurate adjustment. is installed must be opened and closed.
5. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following Otherwise, a return to "L" is not available.
positions of the ADUDB1. 9. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all),
+terminal: test pin No. TP60 (white) [1] that customer mainly use and confirm that "H"
- terminal: test pin No. TP57 (green) [2] appears on the input check display.
Range: DC 20 V 10. In case of detection error, return to step 4 to
conduct the adjustment again. In step 6, set
power voltage to the value 1.0 V lower than the
previous adjustment.
11. Repeat the steps 8 to 10 until detection error is
resolved.
12. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the
parts you removed.
E. Cleaning blade transportation lock

This separates the cleaning blade from the drum,
thus preventing any damage on the cleaning blade
while moving the machine or during a long-term stor-
[1] [2] 1050fs3057c age.
Use this when packing the machine while moving an
installation location.
Note
• Because the ADU is powered, do not drop
NOTE
any metal material on the board, or do not
• While conducting this mode, the blade is
connect the tester pin to an irrelevant ter-
automatically replaced. In case the first
minal.
cleaning blade was used before packing, be
It may cause the board to short circuit and
sure to perform a spring charge for the auto
be damaged.
blade replacement as you reinstall the
6. In the multi feed detection board /2 volume, set machine.
power voltage to the standard value.
• Standard value: 8.0 ± 0.2 V (1) Procedure
7. Pull out the paper inserted in step 4.
1. Check whether the currently used cleaning
blade is the first one or the second one.
2. Enter the I/O check mode.
3. Enter "17" with the numeric keys. Confirm that
"17-00" is displayed in the message display
area.
382 1

4. Open the front door /Rt. 6. The toner pump motor (M28) and the air pump
motor (M29) start rotating. Press the STOP but-
Note ton to stop them after abut 1 minute.
1050e/1050eP
• If the front door /Rt is not open, the blade
motor (M22) does not rotate.
H. Adjustment when replacing the multi feed
5. Press the Start button.
detection board (PI)
6. The blade motor (M22) starts rotating, and the Adjust when replacing the multi feed detection board
cleaning blade moves from the drum to the
of the PI section. Also, perform this adjustment when
transportation lock position.
multi feed of special paper (thin paper, coated paper
with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be detected
F. Scanner transportation lock properly.
Move the scanner mirror to the transportation lock
position, thus making it easy to fix the mirror with NOTE
screws. • The multi feed detection board /1 and /2 are
Use this when packing the machine while moving an adjusted in the manufacturing process as a
installation location. pair of upper and lower. Be sure to replace
them as a pair.
(1) Procedure • Adjustment error may occur because of the
temperature of the sensor surface. Make the
1. Enter the I/O check mode. adjustment at a temperature close to that in
2. Enter "36" with the numeric keys. Confirm that which the copier is actually used (20 to 30°C).
"36-00" is displayed in the message display (In case you brought a new part from out-
area. doors, make the adjustment after the temper-
3. Press the Start button. ature of the sensor surface and the room
temperature become the same)
4. The scanner motor (M27) starts rotating, and
the mirror moves to the left.
(1) Procedure
5. Fix the mirror with the lock screws of the scan-
ner mirror you removed when unpacking the 1. Replace the multi feed detection board /1, /2.
machine. (See "3.3.17 Removing/reinstalling the multi
feed detection boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2
(MFDB/2)") in Field Service for FD-501)
G. Removing toner in the toner mixing section
After moving the installation location of the machine,
remove toner which may have dropped into the mix-
ing section of the toner supply section.
(1) Procedure

area.
3. Press the Access button.
area.
383
2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the multi 4. Open the FD upper door and front door to turn
feed detection board /1, /2, and rotate the the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert one sheet of
rotary switch [2] on the PI drive board (PIDB) as paper [2] (P/N 65AA-9910) between the multi
/1050e/1050eP
per following table. feed detection board /1 and /2 [3] (200 to 300
g/m2 paper can also be used).
Note
• Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper
hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the
paper is between the multi feed detection
board /1 and /2.
[2]
[1]
[2] fd501fs3005c [3]

[1] [4] fd501fs3006c
Stamp letter Rotary switch

A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 6
F 7
Note
• The rotary switch 5 is not used.
3. Select the output check code "70-82" of the I/
O check mode in the service mode.
384

5. Press the Start button to activate the output 12. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the
check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to parts you removed.
the following positions of the PIDB.
1050e/1050eP
+ terminal: test pin No. TP51 (GAIN) [1]
I. FD/FS adjustment data EEPROM storage
- terminal: test pin No. TP11 (SGND) [2]
(Installation initial data)
Range: DC 20 V
Backup adjustment data of the FD and FS which are
adjusted in the field are stored in the non-volatile
VR2 memory (EEPROM) of the FD control board (FDCB)
and the FNCB (FNS control board). When necessary,
it can be recalled with installation initial data of Recall
standard data (Finisher adjustment data) in the ser-
vice mode.
NOTE
• Only one type of data can be backed up.
When backed up again, data will be overwrit-
ten.
• When the main body is connected to both the
FS and FD, data is backed up to both
EEPROMs. If you want to back up data to one
LED1 option only, connect only that option to the
[1] [2] fd501fs3007c
main body.
Note (1) Procedure

• Because the FD is powered, do not drop
any metal material on the board, or do not
connect the tester pin to an irrelevant ter- 2. Enter "90" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "90-
minal. 00" is displayed in the message display area.
It may cause the board to short circuit and 3. Press the Start button.
be damaged. 4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. And
6. In the PIDB volume (VR2), set power voltage to when completed, "FIN" is displayed and the
the standard value. current finisher adjustment data is backed up in
Standard value: 8.0 ± 0.2 V the EEPROM.
7. Pull out the paper inserted in step 4.
8. Insert one sheet of paper that customer mainly
J. Main body adjustment data parameter
use (paper weight 50 to 300 g/m2), and confirm
board storage (Installation initial data)
that the PIDB's LED (LED1) can be turned on.
Adjustment data of the main body which are adjusted
LED on: no multi feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
in the field are backed up to the parameter board
LED off: multi feed (2 sheets of paper)
(PB). When necessary, it can be recalled with installa-
9. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all),
tion data of Recall standard data (Machine adjust-
that customer mainly use, and to see if the LED
ment data, Process adjustment data) in the service
is turned off.
mode.
10. In case of detection error, return to step 4 to
conduct the adjustment again. In step 6, set NOTE
power voltage to the value 1.0 V lower than the • Only one type of data can be backed up.
previous adjustment. When backed up again, data will be overwrit-
11. Repeat steps 7 to 10 until detection error is ten.
resolved.
1 385
(1) Procedure • Replace the HDD1 in case performing the

HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery do not
prevent the malfunction code.
2. Enter "91" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "91-
/1050e/1050eP
00" is displayed in the message display area.

4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. And
when completed, "FIN" is displayed and the
current machine adjustment data and the proc-
ess adjustment data are backed up in the PB.
K. Hard disk check

Perform this operation if you want to check the
copier's hard disk /1 (HDD1) total capacity, the
remaining capacity, and the malfunction code (SC46-
40 to SC46-43) related to the hard disk.
(1) Procedure

area.
3. Press the Access button.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric
keys.
Check that "99-{{" ({{ represent multi code
number) appear in the message display area.
01: HDD1 total capacity check
02: HDD1 remaining capacity check
03: HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery
• HDD1 total capacity check: The total capacity
is displayed
• HDD1 remaining capacity check: Remaining
capacity is displayed
• HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery:
During the operation-"NOW" appears
The operation succeeded - "OK" appears
The operation failed - "NG" appears
Press the Start button to perform the HDD1
bad sectors check and recovery again when
"NG" appears.
NOTE
• The operation can not be cancelled during the
HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery (the STOP
button or the [Return] key are disabled).
386

L. I/O check list
(1) Input check list
Classifica- Symbol Code Multi Name Display and signal source
1050e/1050eP
tion code H L
Analog PS31 01 01 Toner remaining sensor /1 No toner Toner
signal
PS32 02 Toner remaining sensor /2
TH5 02 00 Drum temperature sensor 0 to 255
TH1 03 00 Thermistor /1
TH3 04 00 Thermistor /3
TCSB 05 00 Humidity sensor signal
06 00 Max. density sensor monitor signal
07 00 Max. density sensor output signal
08 00 Gamma sensor output signal
DPSB 09 00 Drum potential sensor output signal
TCSB 10 00 Drum jam sensor output signal Paper No paper
Paper PS8 11 01 Paper empty sensor /1 (Tray /1)
feed PS14 02 Paper empty sensor /2 (Tray /2)
PS73 03 Paper empty sensor /1 (Tray /3)
VR1 12 01 Remaining paper VR /1 (Tray /1) 0 (FULL) to 4 (EMPTY)
VR2 02 Remaining paper VR /2 (Tray /2)
PS4 13 01 Paper size sensor /Fr1 (Tray /1) ON OFF
PS5 02 Paper size sensor /Rr1 (Tray /1)
PS10 03 Paper size sensor /Fr2 (Tray /2)
VR2 14 01 Paper size VR /1 (Tray /1) 0 to 255
VR4 02 Paper size VR /2 (Tray /2)
1 387

tion code H L
Paper — 15 01 Paper size signal (Tray /1) 0: 11 x 17, 1: A3, 2: B4,
/1050e/1050eP
feed — 02 Paper size signal (Tray /2) 3: 81/2 x 14, 4: A4S,

5: 81/2 x 11R, 6: B5S,
7: 81/2 x 11, 8: 51/2 x 81/2S,
9: A4, 10: A5S, 11: B5,
12: A5, 13: B6S,
14: 51/2 x 81/2, 15: B6,
16: Special,
17: 81/8 x 131/4,
18: 8 x 13, 19: 81/4 x 13,
20: 81/2 x 13
PS6 16 01 Upper limit sensor /1 (Tray /1) Upper limit Not at upper
PS12 02 Upper limit sensor /2 (Tray /2) limit
PS71 03 Upper limit sensor /1 (Tray /3)
— 17 01 Tray /1 set signal Set Not set
— 02 Tray /2 set signal
PS9 18 01 Handle release sensor /1 (Tray /1) ON OFF
PS15 02 Handle release sensor /2 (Tray /2)
Paper feed, PS7 20 01 Paper feed sensor /1 (Tray /1) Paper No paper
conveyance PS13 02 Paper feed sensor /2 (Tray /2)
PS72 03 Paper feed sensor /1 (Tray /3)
PS17 21 01 Pre-registration sensor /1 (Tray /1)
PS18 02 Pre-registration sensor /2 (Tray /2)
PS19 22 01 Vertical conveyance sensor /1
PS21 02 Vertical conveyance sensor /3
PS90 03 Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PF)
PS96 04 Vertical conveyance sensor /3 (PF)
PS20 05 Vertical conveyance sensor /2
PS91 06 Intermediate sensor /Up
PS97 07 Intermediate sensor /Lw
388

tion code H L
Paper feed, PS41 23 01 Paper leading edge sensor Paper No paper
1050e/1050eP
conveyance PS16 02 Loop sensor
PS40 03 Registration sensor
PS92 04 Loop sensor /1 (Tray /3)
PS99 07 PFU exit sensor
PS22 24 01 Fusing exit sensor
PS3 02 Paper exit sensor
PS48 03 Reverse sensor /1
PS47 04 Reverse sensor /2
PS23 05 Fusing jam sensor
PS50 06 ADU reverse paper exit sensor
SW4 25 01 Door switch /1 Open Close
PS2 02 Door open/close sensor /2
PS1 03 Door open/close sensor /1
MS1/2 04 Interlock switch /1, /2
PS317 05 APS timing sensor
SW5 06 Door switch /2
— 07 Fusing section set detection signal Set Not set
— 08 Sensitive drum section set detection signal
PS70 09 Door open/close sensor (PF) Open Close
SW11 10 Vertical conveyance door switch /Up (PF) ON OFF
SW12 11 Vertical conveyance door switch /Lw (PF)
SW10 12 Door switch (PF) Open Close
SW13 13 Horizontal conveyance door switch (PF) ON OFF
Scanner PS51 30 01 Scanner home sensor Home Other than
position home position
PS52 31 01 APS sensor /1 No original Original
PS53 02 APS sensor /2
PS317 08 APS timing sensor Open Close
Peculiar CNT2 52 00 Key counter Connected Unconnected
functions PS37 53 00 Transfer assist home sensor Home Other than
PS26 54 01 Charger cleaning home sensor position home position
PS27 02 Charger cleaning limit sensor Limit Other than
position limit position
PS38 03 Transfer/separation home sensor Home Other than
PS39 04 Transfer/separation limit sensor Limit Other than
position limit position
PS24 55 01 Blade sensor /1 ON OFF
PS25 02 Blade sensor /2
389

tion code H L
Peculiar MFDB1/2 56 00 Multi feed detection board /1, /2 Multi feed Other than
/1050e/1050eP
functions multi feed

DF PS303 60 1 Original size sensor /Lt Paper No paper
PS302 2 Original size sensor /Rt
PS306 3 Original registration sensor /Lt
PS308 4 Original conveyance sensor
PS309 5 Original reverse sensor
PS307 6 Original exit sensor /Lt
PS313 7 Original reverse exit sensor
PS314 8 Original exit sensor /Rt
PS305 9 Original empty sensor
PS301 10 RADF open/close sensor Open Close
MS301 11 Cover open/close sensor
PS318 12 Original registration sensor /Rt Paper No paper
PS304 13 Reverse jam sensor
PS311 14 Original skew sensor /Fr
PS310 15 Original count sensor
PS312 16 Original skew sensor /Rr
MFS1 17 Multi feed sensor /1
— 18 —
— 19 —
FD PS1 70 01 FD entrance sensor No paper Paper
PS4 02 PI exit sensor Paper No paper
PS5 03 Punch conveyance sensor No paper Paper
PS7 04 Main tray folding paper full sensor Full Other than full
PS8 05 2 holes punch home sensor Other than Home
PS9 06 3 holes/4 holes home sensor home position position
PS10 07 Alignment plate home sensor Home Other than
PS11 08 Punch registration home sensor position home position
PS12 09 Punch scraps box set sensor Set Not set
PS23 10 Intermediate conveyance sensor Paper No paper
PS16 11 Sub tray paper exit sensor
PS17 12 Sub tray paper full sensor Other than full Full
PS18 13 Main tray paper exit sensor Paper No paper
PS20 14 Main tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS22 15 Main tray lower limit sensor Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS23 16 Main tray empty sensor Other than full Full
PS26 17 Punch scraps full sensor Other than full Full
— 18 — — —
— 19 —
390

tion code H L
FD — 70 20 — — —
1050e/1050eP
DCPS 21 24 V output Normal Abnormal
PS2 22 Folding exit sensor Paper No paper
CN90 23 Main tray connection recognition (CN90 Unconnected Connected
connection)
PS51 24 1st folding conveyance sensor No paper Paper
PS52 25 Folding entrance sensor
PS53 26 2nd folding conveyance sensor
PS54 27 3rd folding conveyance sensor
PS55 28 1st folding cam home sensor Pressure Non-pressure
PS56 29 2nd folding cam home sensor
PS57 30 3rd folding cam home sensor
PS58 31 S size conveyance sensor Paper No paper
PS6 32 Punch registration sensor
FDOB 33 Staple selection switch OFF ON
FDOB 34 Punch selection switch
FDOB 35 Folding selection switch
FDOB 36 Start/Stop switch
FDOB 37 Multi feed function select switch
PS46 39 Sub tray paper full sensor Full Other than full
PS31 40 PI conveyance sensor /Up Paper No paper
PS37 41 PI conveyance sensor /Lw
PS32 42 PI upper limit sensor /Up Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS33 43 PI paper empty sensor /Up Other than full Full
PS34 44 PI lift plate home sensor /Up Home Other than
PS35 45 L size sensor /Up No paper Paper
PS36 46 S size sensor /Up
— 47 — — —
PS38 48 PI upper limit sensor /Lw Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS39 49 PI paper empty sensor /Lw Other than full Full
PS40 50 PI lift plate home sensor /Lw Home Other than
PS41 51 L size sensor /Lw No paper Paper
PS42 52 S size sensor /Lw
PS43 53 PI cover open/close sensor Close Open
PS44 54 PI paper set sensor /Up No paper Paper
PS45 55 PI paper set sensor /Lw
— 56 — — —
— 57 —
1 391

tion code H L
FD — 70 58 — — —
/1050e/1050eP
— 59 —
— 60 —
PS47 61 PI max paper size sensor /Up No paper Paper
PS48 62 PI max paper size sensor /Lw
SD PS1 71 01 Entrance sensor Paper No paper
PS2 02 Horizontal conveyance sensor /1
PS3 03 Horizontal conveyance sensor /2
PS4 04 Horizontal conveyance exit sensor
PS5 05 Right angle conveyance sensor /1 No paper Paper
PS6 06 Right angle conveyance sensor /2
PS7 07 Folding sensor /1
PS8 08 Folding passage sensor Paper No paper
PS17 09 Overlap home sensor Home Other than
PS18 10 Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 Other than Home
PS49 11 Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr2 home position position
PS20 12 1st folding blade home sensor /1
PS21 13 1st folding blade home sensor /2 Home Other than
PS22 14 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 Other than Home
home position position
PS23 15 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 Home Other than
PS24 16 Folding exit home sensor position home position
PS9 17 Tri-folding exit sensor Paper No paper
PS10 18 Tri-folding paper full sensor Other than full Full
PS11 19 Subtray exit sensor Paper No paper
PS12 20 Subtray paper full sensor Other than full Full
PS44 21 Folding sensor /2 No paper Paper
PS19 22 Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr Home Other than
PS46 23 Guide shaft home sensor position home position
HS2/HS4 24 Clincher start sensors /Rt and /Lt No clinch Clinch
— 25 — — —
— 26 —
— 27 —
— 28 —
— 29 —
— 30 —
— 31 —
— 32 —
PS13 33 Saddle stitching paper sensor No paper Paper
PS14 34 Bundle sensor /1
392 1

tion code H L
SD PS15 71 35 Bundle sensor /2 No paper Paper
1050e/1050eP
PS16 36 Bundle registration plate home sensor Other than Home
PS25 37 Stapler movement home sensor Home Other than
PS26 38 Clincher up down home sensor Other than Home
PS27 39 Saddle stitching press home sensor Home Other than
PS28 40 Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt position home position
PS29 41 Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt
PS33 42 Bundle clip upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS30 43 Bundle clip lower limit sensor Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS32 44 Bundle arm home sensor Home Other than
PS31 45 Bundle arm rotation home sensor position home position
PS34 46 Bundle registration home sensor
PS35 47 Bundle press stage up down home sensor
PS45 48 Bundle press stage up down limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS37 49 Bundle press home sensor Other than Home
PS47 50 Bundle press lower limit sensor Other than Lower limit
lower limit
PS48 51 Scraps press home sensor Other than Home
PS40 52 Scraps box set sensor Set Not set
PS41 53 Trimmer scraps full sensor Other than full Full
PS36 54 Bundle press movement home sensor Home Other than
PS38 55 Bundle arm assist home sensor position home position
PS39 56 Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
SW1 57 Staple empty switch /Rt No staple Staple
SW2 58 Staple empty switch /Lt
HS1 59 Stapler home sensor /Rt Other than Home
HS3 60 Stapler home sensor /Lt home position position
— 61 — — —
— 62 —
— 63 —
— 64 —
PS42 65 Front door sensor /Rt Open Close
PS43 66 Front door sensor /Lt
1 393

tion code H L
SD PS54 71 67 Bundle sensor /4 Paper No paper
/1050e/1050eP
PS55 68 Trimmer registration sensor Registration Other than regis-

position tration position
PS56 69 Folding sub scan alignment home sensor Home Other than
PS57 70 Bundle exit sensor /2 No paper Paper
PS58 71 Bundle tray set sensor Not set Set
PS59 72 Trimmer board replacement sensor Replace Not replace
— 73 — — —
— 74 —
PS61 75 Bundle tray paper full sensor Full Other than full
— 76 — — —
PS60 77 Folding entrance sensor No paper Paper
FS PS35 72 01 Rear stopper home sensor Home Other than
PS33 02 Intermediate roller home sensor Other than Home
PS32 03 Stack assist home sensor Home Other than
PS14 04 Stapler rotation home sensor Other than Home
PS11 05 Stapler movement home sensor Home Other than
PS34 06 Staple scraps box set sensor Scraps box No scraps
box
PS30 07 Sub tray paper full sensor Other than full Full
PS1 08 Sub tray paper exit sensor Paper No paper
PS5 09 Stacker entrance sensor
PS4 10 FNS entrance sensor No paper Paper
PS15 11 Counter reset sensor Reset Other than
reset
PS12 12 Paper exit opening sensor Other than Home
PS10 13 Main tray paper exit sensor Paper No paper
PS3 14 Tray lower limit sensor Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS7 15 Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Other than Upper limit
upper limit
PS2 16 Tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
— 17 — — —
— 18 —
FS — 72 19 — — —
394 1

tion code H L
— 20 —
1050e/1050eP
PS47 21 Staple ready sensor /Fr Other than Ready
ready
PS43 22 Cartridge set sensor /Fr No cartridge Cartridge
PS45 23 Staple empty sensor /Fr No staple Staple
PS41 24 Stapler home sensor /Fr Other than Home
PS46 25 Staple ready sensor /Rr Other than Ready
ready
PS42 26 Cartridge set sensor /Rr No cartridge Cartridge
PS44 27 Staple empty sensor /Rr No staple Staple
PS40 28 Stapler home sensor /Rr Other than Home
— 29 — — —
PS20 30 Stacker empty sensor No paper Paper
PS9 31 Paper exit arm home sensor Home Other than
MS1 32 Door switch Open Close
PS31 33 Alignment home sensor /Fr Home Other than
PS8 34 Alignment home sensor /Rr position home position
LS PS4 73 01 Entrance sensor Paper No paper
tandem PS11 02 Sub tray paper exit sensor
(1st) PS7 03 Conveyance sensor /1
PS16 04 Conveyance sensor /2 (LS-501 only)
PS18 06 Tandem exit sensor (LS-501 only)
PS3 07 Stacker tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS6 08 Paper empty sensor Full Other than full
PS13 09 2,000 sheets stacked sensor ON OFF
— 10 — — —
PS9 12 Sub tray full sensor Full Other than full
PS1 13 Stacker tray set sensor Set Not set
RS1 14 Hand cart reset switch
PS15 15 Stacker tray arm release sensor ON OFF
TOB 16 Paper exit switch
RS2 18 JAM door switch
PS8 19 Sub tray door sensor
1 395

tion code H L
LS MS2 73 20 Stacker tray upper limit switch Upper limit Other than
/1050e/1050eP
tandem upper limit

(1st) MS3 21 Stacker tray lower limit switch Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS12 22 Alignment home sensor Home Other than
PS11 23 Shift unit home sensor position home position
PS5 24 Grip conveyance home sensor
LS PS4 74 01 Entrance sensor Paper No paper
tandem PS11 02 Sub tray paper exit sensor
(2nd) PS7 03 Conveyance sensor /1
PS18 06 Tandem exit sensor (LS-501 only)
PS3 07 Stacker tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS6 08 Paper empty sensor Full Other than full
— 10 — — —
PS9 12 Sub tray full sensor Full Other than full
PS1 13 Stacker tray set sensor Set Not set
RS1 14 Hand cart reset switch
PS15 15 Stacker tray arm release sensor ON OFF
TOB 16 Paper exit switch
MS4 18 JAM door switch
PS8 19 Sub tray door sensor
MS2 20 Stacker tray upper limit switch Upper limit Other than
upper limit
MS3 21 Stacker tray lower limit switch Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS12 22 Alignment home sensor Home Other than
PS11 23 Shift unit home sensor position home position
PS5 24 Grip conveyance home sensor
PB PS1 75 01 Entrance sensor No paper Paper
PS2 02 SC entrance sensor
PS3 03 Cover paper entrance sensor
PS4 04 Sub tray exit sensor
PS5 05 Sub tray full sensor Other than full Full
M2 06 Intermediate conveyance motor Abnormal Normal
M91 07 Sub tray exit motor Normal Abnormal
396 2

tion code H L
PB PS12 75 08 SC switchback arm pressure detection OFF ON
1050e/1050eP
sensor
PS13 09 SC switchback spring pressure detection sen- ON OFF
sor
PS14 10 SC alignment HP sensor Home Other than
PS16 11 SC paper detection sensor No paper Paper
PS17 12 SC roller release sensor Press the Release the
roller roller
PS18 13 Clamp entrance movement HP sensor Home Other than
PS19 14 Clamp entrance roller release sensor Press the Release the
roller roller
PS21 15 Clamp alignment HP sensor Home Other than
PS22 16 Clamp HP sensor position home position
PS23 17 Clamp pressure sensor ON OFF
PS24 18 Clamp rotation HP sensor Home Other than
PS25 19 Clamp rotation pressure sensor Pressurize Not pressur-
ize
PS26 20 Cover paper table upper limit sensor /Fr Upper limit Not at upper
PS27 21 Cover paper table upper limit sensor /Rr limit
PS28 22 Clamp paper sensor No paper Paper
PS29 23 Book thickness sensor Detection No detection
PS31 24 Glue tank movement limit sensor Upper limit is Not reached
reached
PS32 25 Glue apply position detection sensor No paper Paper
PS33 26 Glue tank HP sensor Home Other than
PS36 27 Pellet remain sensor No Pellet Pellet
PS37 28 Pellet count sensor No detection Detection
PS38 29 Pellet supply arm upper limit sensor Upper limit Not at upper
limit
PS39 30 Pellet supply arm lower limit sensor Lower limit Not at lower
limit
M32 31 Glue apply roller motor Normal Abnormal
PS3 32 Paper exit sensor No paper Paper
PS41 33 Cover paper alignment HP sensor Home Other than
PS42 34 Cover paper conveyance arm HP sensor position home position
/Rt
PS43 35 Cover paper conveyance arm HP sensor
/Lt
PS44 36 Cover paper switchback sensor No paper Paper
2 397

tion code H L
PB PS45 75 37 Cover paper sensor /Rt No paper Paper
/1050e/1050eP
PS46 38 Cover paper sensor /Lt

PS47 39 Cover paper table HP sensor /Fr Other than Home
PS53 40 Cover paper table HP sensor /Rr home position position
PS48 41 Cover paper folding plate HP sensor /Rt Home Other than
PS49 42 Cover paper folding plate HP sensor /Lt position home position
PS50 43 Cover paper folding plate encorder sensor Detection No detection
PS51 44 Cover paper folding plate position sensor At the refer- Not at the
ence posi- position
tion
PS52 45 Cover paper folding pressure sensor Pressurize Not pressur-
ize
SW41 46 Cutter HP sensor Other than Home
SW42 47 Cutter HP sensor Other than End position
end position
MS2 48 Front door switch Close Open
— 49 — — —
PS61 50 Book end sensor Detection No detection
PS62 51 Cover paper conveyancebelt movemen- Home Other than
tHP sensor position home position
PS63 52 Cover paper belt HP sensor
PS64 53 Cover paper belt lower limit sensor Lower limit Not at lower
limit
PS65 54 Book load limit sensor Not at upper Upper limit
limit
PS66 55 Book sensor /1 No paper Paper
PS67 56 Book sensor /2
PS68 57 Book stopper HP sensor Home Other than
PS69 58 Cart set sensor Set Not set
OB/2 59 Book stock operation board SW OFF SW ON
— 60 — — —
SW1 61 Upper door switch Open Close
M81 62 Exhaust fan /2 Abnormal Normal
M4 63 Pellet supply cooling fan
PBCB 64 FNS connection detection signal Connected Not
connected
— 65 Cover paper tray set detection signal Not set Set
PS71 66 Cover paper empty sensor No paper Paper
— 67 power cord connection detection signal Connected Not
connected
398 2

tion code H L
PB PS74 75 68 Cover paper tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Not at upper
1050e/1050eP
limit
PS75 69 Cover paper conveyance sensor /1 No paper Paper
PS76 70 Cover paper conveyance sensor /2
PS80 74 Waste box full sensor Other than full Full
PS81 75 Waste box set sensor Set Not set
M71 76 Cover paper tray fan /1 Abnormal Normal
M72 77 Cover paper tray fan /2
M74 78 Cover paper feed motor Abnormal Normal
M80 79 Exhaust fan /1
PS82 80 Cover paper tray knob sensor Locked Unlocked
TH2 81 Glue tank temperature sensor /up 0 to 255
TH3 82 Glue tank temperature sensor /Md 0 to 255
TH4 83 Glue tank temperature sensor /Md 0 to 255
TH1 84 Glue apply roller temperature sensor 0 to 255
OB/1 85 Manual operation board Glue apply Glue apply
SW OFF SW ON
OB/1 86 Manual operation board Alignment Alignment
SW OFF SW ON
OB/1 87 Manual operation board Start SW Start SW
OFF ON
MS1 88 Pellet supply door switch Close Open
TH1 89 Glue apply roller temperature sensor Abnormal Normal
(overheat abnormality)
TH1 90 Glue apply roller temperature sensor
(low-temperature abnormality)
TH2 91 Glue tank temperature sensor /up
TH2 92 Glue tank temperature sensor /up
TH3 93 Glue tank temperature sensor /Md
94 Glue tank temperature sensor /Md
TH 95 Glue tank temperature sensor /Lw
96 Glue tank temperature sensor /Lw
ADU PS35 80 01 ADU conveyance sensor /1 Paper No paper
PS43 02 ADU exit sensor
2 399

tion code H L
ADU PS49 80 03 ADU accelerate sensor Paper No paper
/1050e/1050eP
PS42 04 ADU deceleration sensor

PS44 05 ADU handle release sensor Release Set
PS46 06 ADU reverse sensor /1 Paper No paper
PS45 07 ADU reverse sensor /2
PS36 08 ADU conveyance sensor /2
400

(2) Output check list
Note
1050e/1050eP
• Do not output codes which are not described in the output check list.
Classifi- Symbol Code Multi Name Remark

cation code
Analog L1,FM19 00 00 Exposure lamp + Scanner cooling fan
signal M6 01 00 Toner bottle motor
— 02 00 —
03 00 —
04 00 —
05 00 —
06 00 —
07 00 —
08 00 —
09 00 —
Data — 15 01 Data collection count clear
clear 02 Mode memory clear
98 CS Remote Care memory initialization Used in the CS Remote
Care mode
— M22 17 00 Cleaning blade packing lock move Used in re-packing
Paper — 18 01 —
feed CL11 02 Forced separation clutch (Tray /4)
— 03 —
CL5 19 01 Separation clutch /1 (Tray /1)
CL7 02 Separation clutch /2 (Tray /2)
M4, 06 Paper feed motor + Separation clutch /1
CL5 (Tray /1)
CL7 (Tray /2)
CL7 (Tray /3)
CL10 (Tray /4)
CL13 (Tray /5)
SD3 20 01 Pick-up solenoid /1 (Tray /1)
SD4 02 Pick-up solenoid /2 (Tray /2)
401

cation code
Paper CL4 21 01 Paper feed clutch /1 (Tray /1)
/1050e/1050eP
feed CL6 02 Paper feed clutch /2 (Tray /2)

CL6 03 Paper feed clutch /1 (Tray /3)
CL1 22 01 Vertical conveyance clutch /1
CL3 02 Vertical conveyance clutch /3
CL1 03 Pre-registration clutch /1 (Tray /3)
CL2 06 Vertical conveyance clutch /2
CL2 07 Intermediate clutch /Up (PF)
CL5 08 Intermediate clutch /Lw (PF)
M8 09 Vertical conveyance motor (290 mm/s)
10 Vertical conveyance motor (425 mm/s)
M4, 13 Paper feed motor + Vertical conveyance
CL1 clutch /1
CL3 clutch /3
M40, 15 Paper feed motor + Pre-registration
CL1 clutch /1 (PF)
CL3 clutch /2 (PF)
CL4 clutch /3 (PF)
CL2 clutch /2
M40, 19 Paper feed motor + Intermediate clutch /
CL2 Up (PF)
M40, 20 Paper feed motor + Intermediate clutch /
CL5 Lw (PF)
M25 23 01 Paper lift motor /1 (Tray /1) From the tray lowering
M26 02 Paper lift motor /2 (Tray /2) position to the upper limit
M42 03 Paper lift motor /1 (Tray /3)
SD1 24 01 Tray lock solenoid /1 (Tray /1)
SD2 02 Tray lock solenoid /2 (Tray /2)
402

cation code
Paper M5 25 01 Conveyance motor (290 mm/s)
1050e/1050eP
feed 02 Conveyance motor (425 mm/s)
03 Conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
M18 26 01 Loop motor (1000 mm/s)
02 Loop motor (825 mm/s)
M9 27 01 Paper exit motor /1 (290 mm/s)
02 Paper exit motor /1 (425 mm/s)
M13 10 Reverse paper exit motor (1000 mm/s)
11 Reverse paper exit motor (825 mm/s)
12 Reverse paper exit motor (520 mm/s)
M4 28 01 Paper feed motor
M40 02 Paper feed motor (PF)
SD5 29 00 Drum claw solenoid
M41 30 01 PF exit conveyance motor (290 mm/s)
02 PF exit conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)
Scanner M27 31 00 Home search + Scan
M21, 32 00 Polygon motor (low speed) + Polygon
FM18 cooling fan
01 Polygon motor (middle speed) + Polygon
cooling fan
02 Polygon motor (high speed) + Polygon
cooling fan
M27,L1 34 00 Shading correction
M27, 35 00 DF scan position move + Scanner cooling
FM19 fan
M27 36 00 Scanner packing lock move Used in re-packing
— 37 — —
LDB, M21 38 00 LD current value measurement (LD alarm level) Can be confirmed with list output
403

cation code
Main M1 40 00 Fusing motor
/1050e/1050eP
body 01 Fusing motor (290 mm/s)

02 Fusing motor (425 mm/s)
03 Fusing motor (490 mm/s)
M2,M3 41 00 Drum motor + Developing motor
01 Drum motor (290 mm/s) + Developing
motor
motor
motor
FM19 42 01 Scanner cooling fan
FM6 02 Suction fan /1 (high speed)
03 Suction fan /1 (low speed)
FM5 04 Developing suction fan
FM1 06 Cooling fan /1 (high speed)
07 Cooling fan /1 (low speed)
FM7,8 13 Suction fan /2, /3 (high speed)
14 Suction fan /2, /3 (low speed)
FM18 15 Polygon cooling fan
FM9 16 Paper exit cooling fan /1
FM10 17 Paper exit cooling fan /2
FM20, 18 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1, /Rr1 (Tray /1)
FM21
FM23
FM42
FM44
FM46
FM4 23 Transfer/separation suction fan
FM25, 24 Power supply cooling fan /1, /2
FM26
FM12 25 IPB cooling fan
FM11 26 Pump cooling fan
FM27 27 Power supply cooling fan /3 (high speed)
28 Power supply cooling fan /3 (low speed)
404

cation code
Main CNT1 43 01 Total counter
1050e/1050eP
body CNT2 02 Key counter
PS54 03 Centering sensor LED
M19 44 01 Transfer assist motor Perform with ADU pulled
out to prevent drum dam-
age
M24 45 06 Web motor
Peculiar M23 46 00 Charger cleaning motor (shuttle)
functions 01 Charger cleaning motor (to the back)
02 Charger cleaning motor (to the front)
M20 47 00 Transfer/separation cleaning motor (shut-
tle)
01 Transfer/separation cleaning motor (to the
back)
02 Transfer/separation cleaning motor (to the
front)
OB2 48 00 Illuminate all LEDs
M20, 49 00 Charger cleaning + Transfer/separation
M23 cleaning (shuttle)
M3,M2 50 00 Developing motor + Drum motor
EL 51 00 Erase lamp
TSL 52 00 Transfer exposure lamp
— 53 01 Status indicator lamp — PAT1 ON
02 Status indicator lamp — PAT2 ON
M11 54 00 Intermediate hopper motor
M7 03 Toner hopper motor
M28 04 Toner pump motor (high speed)
05 Toner pump motor (low speed)
M29 06 Air pump motor (high speed)
07 Air pump motor (low speed)
M28, 08 Toner pump motor (high speed) +
M29 Air pump motor (high speed)
09 Toner pump motor (low speed) + Used after moving the
Air pump motor (low speed) machine
M10 10 Air separation motor
LCDB 55 00 Message test
M30 56 00 Recycle cut motor PCS part
— 57 — —
58 — —
59 — —
405

cation code
DF M302 60 1 Original feed motor forward rotation
/1050e/1050eP
M302 2 Original feed motor reverse rotation

M301 3 Original conveyance motor forward rotation
M301 4 Original conveyance motor reverse rotation
M304 5 Original exit motor /1 forward rotation
M304 6 Original exit motor /1 reverse rotation
M305 7 Original exit motor /2 forward rotation
M305 8 Original exit motor /2 reverse rotation
M303 9 Tray up down motor forward rotation
M303 10 Tray up down motor reverse rotation
SD302 11 Paper press release solenoid
SD303 12 Gate solenoid
SD304 13 Paper exit gate solenoid
SD301 14 SDF switch solenoid
FM301, 15 Cooling fan /Lt + cooling fan /Rt
FM302
FD M1 70 01 Entrance conveyance motor
M2 02 Punch conveyance motor
M3 03 Intermediate conveyance motor
M4 04 1st folding motor forward
M4 05 1st folding motor reverse
M5 06 2nd folding motor forward
M5 07 2nd folding motor reverse
M6 08 3rd folding motor forward
M6 09 3rd folding motor reverse
M7 10 PI conveyance motor
M8 11 Paper lift motor /Up (down)
M8 12 Paper lift motor /Up (up)
M9 13 Paper lift motor /Lw (down)
M9 14 Paper lift motor /Lw (up)
M17 15 Main tray paper exit motor
M10 21 Punch motor (3 holes/4 holes)
M10 22 Punch motor (2 holes)
M11 23 Tray up down motor (home search)
M12 24 Alignment motor (home search)
M13 26 Punch registration motor (home search)
M14 27 1st folding release motor (conveyance
position move)
M14 28 1st folding release motor (folding position
move)
406 1

cation code
FD M15 70 29 2nd folding release motor (conveyance
1050e/1050eP
position move)
M15 30 2nd folding release motor (folding position
move)
M16 31 3rd folding release motor (conveyance
position move)
M16 32 3rd folding release motor (folding position
move)
SD1 61 Entrance gate solenoid
SD3 62 S size gate solenoid
SD4 63 L size gate solenoid
SD5 64 Roller solenoid /1
SD9 68 Sub tray gate solenoid
SD12 69 Paper exit solenoid
SD13 70 PI pick-up solenoid /Up
SD14 71 PI pick-up solenoid /Lw
SD15 72 Folding gate solenoid
— 73 —
SD18 74 2nd folding roller solenoid
CL1 75 PI registration clutch /Up
CL2 76 PI registration clutch /Lw
— 81 —
MFDB1 82 Multi feed detection board /1 (CLK output)
FDOB 89 FD operation board (lit all LEDs)
JAMIB 90 Jam indicator board (lit all LEDs)
— 99 —
SD M1 71 01 Entrance conveyance motor
M2 02 Horizontal conveyance motor
M3 03 Folding entrance motor
M4 04 Folding conveyance motor
M4 05 Folding conveyance motor
M6 06 Right angle conveyance motor
M29 07 Stapler motor /Rt (stapling)
M30 08 Stapler motor /Lt (stapling)
M5 09 Bundle exit motor
M8 10 Folding sub scan alignment exit motor
M5 21 Bundle exit motor (home search)
M7 24 Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr
(home search)
1 407

cation code
SD M7 71 25 Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr
/1050e/1050eP
(alignment)
M8 27 Folding sub scan alignment exit motor
(home search)
M9 29 Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt
(home search)
M9 30 Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt
(inward movement)
M10 31 Bundle arm motor (home search)
M10 32 Bundle arm motor (inward movement)
M11 33 Bundle clip motor (home search)
M12 34 Bundle registration motor (home search)
M13 35 Overlap motor (home search)
M14 36 Folding main scan alignment motor /Rr
(home search)
M14 37 Folding main scan alignment motor /Rr
(forward movement)
M15 39 Stapler movement motor (home search)
M15 40 Stapler movement motor
M16 41 Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt
(home search)
M16 42 Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt
(inward movement)
M17 43 Bundle press movement motor (home
search)
M18 44 1st folding blade motor (home search)
M19 45 2nd folding blade motor (home search)
M20 46 Clincher up down motor (home search)
M20 47 Clincher up down motor (stapling)
M21 48 Saddle stitching press motor (home search)
M22 49 Bundle arm rotation motor (home search)
M23 50 Bundle press motor (home search)
M24 51 Bundle press stage up down motor
(home search)
M25 52 Guide shaft motor (home search)
M31 53 Trimmer blade motor (home search)
M31 54 Trimmer blade motor (trimming position) Available after 71-53
(home search)
M32 55 Trimmer press motor (home search)
M32 56 Trimmer press motor (upper limit search)
M32 57 Trimmer press motor (pressing) Available after 71-55
(home search)
408 1

cation code
SD M32 71 58 Trimmer press motor (movement to trim- Available after 71-55
1050e/1050eP
mer board release position) (home search)
M10 59 Bundle arm motor (inward movement)
M23 60 Bundle press motor (pressing)
M24 61 Bundle press stage up down motor (up)
M24 62 Bundle press stage up down motor (home
search for the bundle registration plate)
M26 63 Bundle arm assist motor (home search)
SD2 72 Right angle conveyance gate solenoid
SD3 73 Horizontal conveyance gate solenoid
SD4 74 Roller release solenoid /4
SD5 75 Roller release solenoid /1 (roller press)
SD5 76 Roller release solenoid /1 (roller release)
SD6 77 Roller release solenoid /2
SD7 78 Roller release solenoid /3 (roller press)
SD7 79 Roller release solenoid /3 (roller release)
SD8 80 Folding unit lock solenoid (lock)
SD8 81 Folding unit lock solenoid (release)
SD11 82 Trimmer board solenoid (ON once)
SD11 83 Trimmer board solenoid (ON twice)
CL1 86 Tri-folding exit clutch
FM1 87 Scraps removal fan motor
— 95 Trimmer board solenoid operation Reset after replace the
counter reset trimmer board.
FS M1 72 01 Conveyance motor (1000 mm/sec)
M3 06 Tray up down motor (home search)
07 Tray up down motor (lower limit move)
08 Tray up down motor (staple mode up down)
M22 11 Alignment motor /Fr (home search)
12 Alignment motor /Fr (A4S standby posi-
tion move)
Note: effective after 72-11 home search
13 Alignment motor /Fr (A4S position move)
Note: effective after 72-12 A4S standby
position move
14 Alignment motor /Fr (A4S standby posi-
tion move)
Note: effective after 72-13 A4S position move
M7 16 Main tray paper exit motor (800 mm/sec)
17 Main tray paper exit motor (205 mm/sec)
M8 21 Paper exit opening motor (home search)
1 409

cation code
FS M8 72 22 Paper exit opening motor (full opening:
/1050e/1050eP
approx. 55°)
23 Paper exit opening motor (half opening:
approx. 44°)
24 Paper exit opening motor (small opening:
approx. 27°)
M31 26 Stapler motor /Fr (needles out, empty staple)
27 Stapler motor /Fr (staple)
M30 28 Stapler motor /Rr (needles out, empty staple)
29 Stapler motor /Rr (staple)
M11 31 Stapler movement motor (home search)
32 Stapler movement motor (A4 1 staple
position move)
M13 36 Stacker entrance motor (1000 mm/sec)
M26 41 Rear stopper motor (home search)
42 Rear stopper motor (stopper release)
SD5 46 Bypass solenoid
SD2 47 Gate solenoid
SD9 48 Paper exit opening solenoid (ON/OFF)
SD7 49 Intermediate roller release solenoid
M24 51 Stacker assist motor (home search)
M24 52 Stacker assist motor (assist position move)
M25 56 Intermediate roller open/close motor
(home search)
57 Intermediate roller open/close motor
(reserve position move)
M23 61 Paper exit arm motor (home search)
62 Paper exit arm motor (800 mm/sec)
63 Paper exit arm motor (400mm/sec)
M6 66 Sub tray paper exit motor (1000 mm/sec)
M5 71 Alignment motor /Rr (home search)
72 Alignment motor /Rr (A4S standby posi-
tion move)
73 Alignment motor /Rr (A4S position move)
Note: effective after 72-72 A4S standby
position move
74 Alignment motor /Rr (A4S standby posi-
tion move)
Note: effective after 72-73 A4S position move
M2 76 Paddle motor (ON/OFF)
M5, 78 Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr (home search)
M22
410

cation code
FS M5, 78 79 Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr (A4 standby
1050e/1050eP
M22 position move)
80 Alignment motor /Rr, Fr (A4 position move)
Note: effective after 72-79 A4 standby
position move
JAMIB 90 Jam indicator board (illuminate all LEDs)
— 99 No paper running mode
20 sheets of A3 with 2 staples
LS M2 73 01 Conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
tandem 02 Conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)
(1st) M3 03 Sub tray paper exit motor (490 mm/s)
04 Sub tray paper exit motor (1000 mm/s)
M6 05 Tandem conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
06 Tandem conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)
M4 07 Grip conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
08 Grip conveyance motor (1300 mm/s)
M7 09 Alignment motor (initial operation)
10 Alignment motor
M5 11 Shift unit motor (home search)
12 Shift unit motor
M1 13 Stacker tray up down motor (down)
14 Stacker tray up down motor (up)
SD1 15 1st gate solenoid
SD10 16 2nd gate solenoid (LS-501 only)
SD9 17 Front stopper solenoid
SD3 18 Rear stopper solenoid
SD8 19 Paper press solenoid /3
SD4 21 Front door lock solenoid
SD5 22 Entrance conveyance lock solenoid
SD11 Tandem conveyance lock solenoid
SD2 23 Job partition solenoid
FM1, FM3, 25 Paper cooling fan /Fr, /Mi
FM2, FM6 Paper cooling fan motor /1, /2
FM5 26 Paper cooling fan /Rr
411

cation code
LS M2 74 01 Conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
/1050e/1050eP
tandem 02 Conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)

(2nd) M3 03 Sub tray paper exit motor (490 mm/s)
04 Sub tray paper exit motor (1000 mm/s)
M6 05 Tandem conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
06 Tandem conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)
M4 07 Grip conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
08 Grip conveyance motor (1300 mm/s)
M7 09 Alignment motor (initial operation)
10 Alignment motor
M5 11 Shift unit motor (home search)
12 Shift unit motor
M1 13 Stacker tray up down motor (down)
14 Stacker tray up down motor (up)
SD1 15 1st gate solenoid
SD10 16 2nd gate solenoid (LS-501 only)
SD9 17 Front stopper solenoid
SD3 18 Rear stopper solenoid
SD4 21 Front door lock solenoid
SD5 22 Entrance conveyance lock solenoid
SD11 Tandem conveyance lock solenoid (LS-
501 only)
SD2 23 Job partition solenoid
FM1, 25 Paper cooling fan /Fr, Mi
FM3
FM5 26 Paper cooling fan /Rr
PB M1 75 01 Entrance conveyance motor
M2 02 Intermediate conveyance motor
SD2 04 Bypass gate solenoid
SD3 05 Sub tray gate solenoid
SD4 06 Sub tray exit solenoid
M11 07 SC entrance conveyance motor
M12 08 SC switchback conveyance motor
(F rotation)
09 SC switchback conveyance motor
(R rotation)
412 2

cation code
PB M13 75 10 SC switchback release motor
1050e/1050eP
(home position search)
11 SC switchback release motor
(High pressing position move)
12 SC switchback release motor
(Low pressing position move)
M15 13 SC alignment motor (home position
search)
14 SC alignment motor (A4 standby position 75-13 must have been
move) performed in advance.
15 SC alignment motor (alignment)
M17 16 SC bundle conveynace motor
M18 17 SC roller release motor
18 SC roller release motor
(movement to the pressing position)
M19 19 Clamp entrance movement motor (home
position search)
20 Clamp entrance movement motor(move- The following adjust-
ment to the entrance position) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-19
2. 75-29
3. 75-31
4. 75-32
M20 21 Clamp entranse roller release motor
22 Clamp entranse roller release motor
(pressing position move)
SD11 23 FD alignment solenoid
SD12 24 SC stopper solenoid
SD13 25 SC pressure arm solenoid
M21 26 Clamp alignment motor (home position
search)
27 Clamp alignment motor (A4 standby posi-
tion move)
28 Clamp alignment motor (alignment)
M22 29 Clamp motor (home position search)
30 Clamp motor (movement to the clamp
position)
M23 31 Clamp rotation motor (home position 75-19 must have been
search) performed in advance.
32 Clamp rotation motor (movement to the 75-19 must have been
compile position) performed in advance.
2 413

cation code
PB SD91 75 33 Straight gate solenoid
/1050e/1050eP
M31 34 Glue tank movement motor (home posi- The following adjust-
tion search) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-29
35 Glue tank movement motor (tank forward The following adjust-
movement ) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-29
3. 75-34
4. 75-49
5. 75-51
36 Glue tank movement motor (tank back- The following adjust-
ward movement ) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-35
2. 75-29
3. 75-34
4. 75-49
5. 75-51
6. 75-35
M32 37 Glue apply roller motor
SD31 38 Glue tank up solenoid /1
SD32 39 Cover paper glue up solenoid
H1 40 Glue tank heater
H2 41 Glue apply roller heater
M33 42 Pellet supply motor The following adjust-
ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-29
3. 75-34
4. 75-44
M34 43 Pellet supply arm motor
44 Pellet supply arm motor The following adjust-
(movement to the supply position) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-29
3. 75-34
M41 45 Cover paper alignment motor 75-55 must have been
(home position search) performed in advance.
414 2

cation code
PB M41 75 46 Cover paper alignment motor The following adjust-
1050e/1050eP
(A3 standby position move) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-45
3. 75-57
4. 75-60
47 Cover paper alignment motor (alignment) The following adjust-
ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-45
3. 75-57
4. 75-60
5. 75-46
M42 48 Book exit motor 75-55 must have been
performed in advance.
M43 49 Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Rt The following adjust-
(home position search) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-29
3. 75-34
50 Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Rt The following adjust-
(roller pressure) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-29
3. 75-34
4. 75-49
M44 51 Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Lt The following adjust-
(home position search) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-29
3. 75-34
52 Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Lt The following adjust-
(roller pressure) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-29
3. 75-34
4. 75-51
2 415

cation code
PB M45 75 53 Cover paper conveyance motor (F rota- 75-55 must have been
/1050e/1050eP
tion) performed in advance.

54 Cover paper conveyance motor (R rota- 75-55 must have been
tion) performed in advance.
M46 55 Cover paper table up down motor /Fr, /Rr
M47 (home position search)
56 Cover paper table up down motor /Fr, /Rr The following adjust-
(book spine corner creation) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-29
3. 75-34
4. 75-49
5. 75-50
6. 75-51
7. 75-52
8. 75-19
9. 75-31
10. 75-30
11. 75-32
12. 75-45
13. 75-58
14. 75-61
M48 57 Cover paper folding motor /Rt 75-55 must have been
58 Cover paper folding motor /Rt The following adjust-
(movement to the open position) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-45
59 Cover paper folding motor /Rt The following adjust-
(movement to the close position) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-45
3. 75-58
M49 60 Cover paper folding motor /Lt 75-55 must have been
61 Cover paper folding motor /Lt The following adjust-
(movement to the open position) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-55
2. 75-45
416 2

cation code
PB M50 75 62 Cutter motor (home position search) 75-55 must have been
1050e/1050eP
63 Cutter motor(cut position movement) 75-55 must have been
SD41 64 Cover paper lift solenoid
— 65 —
— 66 —
M61 67 Cover paper belt motor
M62 68 Cover paper belt movement motor
69 Cover paper belt movement motor 75-68 must have been
(A4 standby position move) performed in advance.
70 Cover paper belt movement motor
(book stock alignment)
M63 71 Cover paper belt up down motor
(home position search: upper limit)
72 Cover paper belt up down motor The following adjust-
(movement to the lower position) ments must have been
made in advance.
1. 75-68
2. 75-69
M64 73 Book movement motor
M65 74 Book stopper motor
75 Book stopper motor 75-74 must have been
(A4 standby position move) performed in advance.
M73 76 Cover paper tray lift motor
M74 77 Cover paper feed motor
SD71 78 Cover paper pick up solenoid
SD72 79 Cover paper tray solenoid
MC71 82 Cover paper pick up clutch
MC72 83 Cover paper separation clutch
SD80 84 Front door lock solenoid (locked)
85 Front door lock solenoid (released)
M80 86 Exhaust fan /1
— 87 Multi feed clock output signal
JAMIB/ 88 Jam indicator board /1 /2 (all the lights on)
1
JAMIB/
2
OB/1 89 Manual operation board (all the lights on)
2 417

cation code
PB M81 75 90 Exhaust fan /2
/1050e/1050eP
SD61 91 Book door solenoid (lock)

92 Book door solenoid (release)
ADU SD7 80 01 Reverse/exit solenoid
SD6 02 ADU lock solenoid
SD8 03 Thick paper assist solenoid
M17 83 01 Registration motor (490 mm/s)
02 Registration motor (290 mm/s)
03 Registration motor (425 mm/s)
M12 84 01 Reverse motor (F rotation: 1000 mm/s)
02 Reverse motor (F rotation: 490 mm/s)
03 Reverse motor (R rotation: 1000 mm/s)
M15 85 01 ADU conveyance motor /1 (1000 mm/s)
02 ADU conveyance motor /1 (490 mm/s)
M16 07 ADU conveyance motor /2 (1000 mm/s)
M13 86 01 Reverse paper exit motor (F rotation:
1000 mm/s)
02 Reverse paper exit motor (F rotation: 490
mm/s)
03 Reverse paper exit motor (R rotation:
1000 mm/s)
mm/s)
mm/s)
06 Reverse paper exit motor (R rotation: 520
mm/s)
418 2

cation code
ADU M13 86 07 Reverse paper exit motor (F rotation: 825
1050e/1050eP
mm/s)
mm/s)
09 Reverse paper exit motor (R rotation: 825
mm/s)
FM13, 87 00 ADU cooling fan /3
FM14, ADU cooling fan /1
FM15 ADU cooling fan /2
M14 88 01 ADU accelerate motor (1000 mm/s)
02 ADU accelerate motor (490 mm/s)
Others — 90 00 FD/FS adjustment data EEPROM storage Perform after installation
(installation data) adjustment
— 91 00 Main body adjustment data parameter Perform after installation
board storage (installation data) adjustment
— 92 00 Parameter board data reset Cannot adjust in the field
— 93 00 FD/FS adjustment data each EEPROM Cannot adjust in the field
storage
— 94 00 Adjustment data display
— 96 00 Main body adjustment data parameter Cannot adjust in the field
board storage (initial data)
— 97 00 Image memory (DRAM) capacity check
— 98 00 Image memory (DRAM) check
HDD1 99 01 HDD1 total capacity
02 HDD1 remaining capacity check
03 HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery
419
10.7 List output tion modes and the results of communications

are displayed in the numbers of 4 digit number.
Conduct various list outputs, test pattern outputs and For the meaning of them, refer to the table
/1050e/1050eP
running tests. below.
Communication mode Results of

10.7.1 List output
communication
Output various lists.
0000 — Transmitted
(1) Procedure successfully
0001 Initial transmission Connection time out
1. Enter the service mode. when transmitting
2. "Service mode menu screen" 0002 Emergency trans- —
Press the [05 List Output] key. mission
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 0004 Emergency recovery Received
screen. transmission successfully
Press the [01 List Output] key.
0005 — Reception failed
4. "List output mode menu screen"
0008 Transmission for —
The list output mode menu includes the follow-
warning
ing items.
0010 Warning recovery —
• Machine Management List
transmission
• Adjustment Data List
• Pixel Ratio Data List 0020 Maintenance start —
• Parameter List transmission
• Font Pattern 0040 Maintenance com- —
• Communication Log List *1 pletion transmission
• Memory Dump List 0080 Administrator trans- —
mission
Note 0100 Fixed date transmis- —
• If you set DIPSW30-1 to 1, the parameter sion
list and after are displayed. 0200 Response transmis- —
• Do not use the parameter list and the mem- sion
ory dump list in the field because they are
0*** — Transmission failed
for development.
1000 Enquiry —
5. Press the key for an item you want to output.
2000 Data rewrite —
6. "List output mode menu screen"
4000 Response reception —
8000 Test mail —
7. Press the Start button to output the selected
list.
The SMTP reply codes (200 to 554) prescribed in the
8. Press the [SERVICE] key.
RFC1846, 2554 and 2821 are displayed in this place
9. "List output mode menu screen" of ***.
To output other lists, repeat steps 4 to 8.
*1 Prints out the latest 30 items of the sending and

receiving history of the mail remote notification
system and the CS Remote Care. The start time
of communications, the time period of communi-
cations (modem only), the communication
modes, the results of communications, and the
senders (mail only) are printed. The communica-
420

10.8 Test mode
10.8.1 Test pattern output mode
1050e/1050eP
Output various test patterns to use them for trouble-
shooting.
NOTE
• Do not use any test pattern number not
described in the service manual.
(1) Procedure

Press the [06 Test Mode] key.
screen.
Press the [01 Test Pattern Output Mode] key.
4. "Test pattern output mode screen"
Enter the test pattern No. you want to output
through the numeric keys and press the [Set]
key and then press the [COPY] key.
5. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start button
to output the test pattern.
6. Press the [SERVICE] key.
7. To output other test patterns, repeat steps 4 to
6.
421
No.1 Overall halftone (8-bit output)

(created by random dot pattern)
/1050e/1050eP
[Check item]
• When density is set to 70 (halftone)
If there are white stripes, black stripes, determine whether the fault is with the scanner system or the proc-
ess system.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charger unit, transfer/separation charger
unit, scanner mirrors, slit glass, original glass
• When density is set to 0 (white)
If the test pattern is gray background image, determine whether the fault is with the process.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charger, high voltage contact
• When density is set to 255 (black)
If the density is light, determine whether the fault is with the process.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit
* For information about setting the density, see "10.8.2 Test pattern density".
Note
• All print outputs in the user mode are outputted with 1-bit or 2-bit error diffusion. However, since
this pattern is output in 8-bit, an uneven density is apt to conspicuous. Therefore, when check-
ing an uneven density in halftones (other than 0 and 255 in the density setting), be sure to use
the test pattern No. 9.
Test patterns
When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255
1050fs3011c
422

No.3 Gradation pattern (8-bit output)
1050e/1050eP
[Check item]
• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously repro-
duced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, see "10.4.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment".
Test patterns
LD1 LD2
1050fs3054c
423
No.5 Gradation pattern (8-bit output)

/1050e/1050eP
[Check item]
• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously repro-
duced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, see "10.4.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment".
Test patterns
LD1 LD2
1050fs3012c
424

No.9 Line screen halftone (8-bit output)
(created by line dot pattern)
1050e/1050eP
[Check item]
• Check if there is any uneven density or transfer jitter.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Moisture absorption of paper, developing unit, charger unit, transfer/sepa-
ration charger unit, transfer jitter adjustment
* For the transfer jitter adjustment see "12.4 Transfer jitter adjustment"
Note
• The density of halftone changes according to the test pattern density adjustment.
• All print outputs in the user mode are outputted with 1-bit or 2-bit error diffusion. However, since
this pattern is output in 8-bit, an uneven density is apt to conspicuous, but less conspicuous
than the test pattern No. 1.
Test patterns
1050fs3055c
425
No.11 Beam check (8-bit output)

/1050e/1050eP
[Check Items 1]
• Check the solid black pattern to see if there is uneven density found in the main scan and sub scan direc-
tions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charger unit, transfer/separation charger unit, developing unit, writing
dust-proof glass.
[Check Items 2]
• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern at the leading/trailing edge of the test
pattern in the sub scan direction.
[Recommended checkpoints]: transfer/separation charger unit
Test pattern
[1]
[2]
1050fs3013c
[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern
426

No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern (1-bit error diffusion output)
1050e/1050eP
[Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and leading
edge timing of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the
test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test pattern
[1]
31mm 237mm
20mm
[1]
190mm
m
m
0
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190mm
190mm 1050fs3014c
[1] Edge of pager
427
10.8.2 Test pattern density 10.8.3 Running test mode

Set the density of test pattern. Conduct a test while in the continuous print opera-
tion.
/1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure In this mode, the following items can be selected:

• Intermittent copy mode
2. "Service mode menu screen" After completion of the printing operation for the
Press the [06 Test Mode] key. set print count, the machine changes into the
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resum-
screen. ing the same operation.
Press the [02 Test Pattern Density] key. • Paperless running mode
4. "Test pattern density setting screen" Without detecting paper or jam, the printing
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys operation is made nearly at the same timing as
and press the [Set] key and then press the the normal operation. In the same manner as the
[COPY] key. intermittent mode, after completion of the print-
• Setting range: 0 (light) to 255 (dark). ing operation for the set print count, the machine
5. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start changes into the ready state and waits for 0.5
button to output the test pattern. sec. before resuming the same operation.
• Paperless mode
Without detecting paper or jam, the printing
operation is made nearly at the same timing as
the normal operation.
• Paperless endless mode
The machine operates with the print count infi-
nitely set automatically. In the same manner as
the paperless mode, without detecting paper or
jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the
same timing as the normal operation.
• Running mode
The printing operation is made in the paperless
endless mode plus the scanning operation and
the auto paper feed tray switching.
(1) Procedure

Press the [06 Test Mode] key.
screen.
Press the [03 Running Mode] key.
4. "Running mode menu screen"
Select a mode and press the [COPY] key.
5. Press the Start button to start the running test.
6. Press the STOP button to stop the running
test.
428

10.9 System setting B. Software DIPSW setting screen
10.9.1 Software DIPSW setting
1050e/1050eP
Configure settings for the software DIPSW.
NOTE
• DIPSW bits data are written into the parame-
ter board (PB) every time a change is made.
Do not change data hastily, for they cannot
be automatically restored.
• Do not change any switch not described in
the service manual.
A. Procedure
[1] [2] [3] [4]
2. "Service mode menu screen" [1] DIPSW number
Press the [07 System Setting] key. [2] 8-bit switch values indicated in hexadeci-
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the mals from 00 to FF.
screen. [3] Bit number (0 to 7)
Press the [01 Software SW Setting] key on the [4] Bit data: On (1), Off (0)
sub menu.
4. "Software switch setting mode screen"
Press the [S], [T] key or the numeric keys to
select a DIPSW bit number.
5. Press the [On (1)] or [Off (0)] key to set the
selected bit number ON/OFF.
6. Press the [Return] key to return to the "Service
mode menu screen" on which the sub menu
was displayed.
429
C. List of software DIPSW
Note
/1050e/1050eP
• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
DIPSW No Bit Function 0 1 Default setting

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW1 0 Print stop condition after toner *1 *1 0 0 0
1 supply display *1 *1 1 1 1
2 Print stop method after toner *2 *2 1 1 1
3 supply display *2 *2 0 0 0
4 Prohibition of printing when the Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
PM count is reached
*3 *3
5 Print number setting until print- 0 0 0
6 ing is prohibited after PM is *3 *3 0 0 0
7 displayed *3 *3 0 0 0
DIPSW2 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 All charger cleaning cycle (fix- *4 *4 0 0 0
2 ing temperature 50°C or less *4 *4 0 0 0
3 when turning ON) *4 *4 0 0 0
4 All charger cleaning cycle (after *5 *5 0 0 0
5 turned ON) *5 *5 0 0 0
6 Blade auto replacement cycle *6 *6 0 0 0
7 *6 *6 0 0 0
DIPSW3 0 Transfer assist timing adjust- Disabled Enabled 1 1 1
ment
1 SC latch (SC23-14, 23-17, 34-**, 35-**, 36-**, Unlatched Latched 0 0 0
78-40 to 62)
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Charger cleaning function Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
4 Transfer/separation charger Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
cleaning function
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 I/O check mode output 15 Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
memory clear
7 PageScope JobEditor recognition Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW4 0 RADF auto skew adjustment Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Key counter removal recovery Disabled Enabled 0 1 0
5 APS when change magnification Enabled Disabled 0 1 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
430 2

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW4 7 Large-size paper count method Count as 1 Count as 2 0 1 0
1050e/1050eP
(other than PM counter)
DIPSW5 0 Causes a message to notify a 65 to 80%: Near- 45 to 65%: Near- 0 0 0
waste toner full status when full full
using RC. 80% or more: Full 60% or more: Full
1 Printer operation at waste toner Not allowed Allowed (switched to 0 0 0
full status (SC23-50) toner recycling mode)
*7 *7
2 Image density selection (laser 0 0 0
3 PWM) for copier *7 *7 0 0 0
4 Display of CMS button of the *8 *8 0 0 0
toner collection box
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW6 0 Background density adjust- *9 *9 0 0 0
1 ment (photo mode) *9 *9 1 1 1
2 Transfer assist control Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
3 Minimum black band width in *10 *10 0 0 0
4 black band creation control *10 *10 0 0 0
5 Image stabilization control *11 *11 0 0 0
6 cycle *11 *11 1 1 1
7 Drum potential auto adjust- Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
ment
DIPSW7 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Background density adjustment *12 *12 0 0 0
3 *12 *12 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Control to change the black band *13 *13 0 0 0
width
*14 *14
DIPSW8 0 Image density selection (laser 0 0 0
1 PWM) for printer *14 *14 0 0 0
2 Fusing initial rotation condition *15 *15 0 0 0
3 *15 *15 1 1 1
4 Fusing initial rotation time *16 *16 0 0 0
5 *16 *16 0 0 0
6 Large-size paper count Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0
method (PM counter)
7 Page number dash length for Long ( 1 ) Short (- 1 -) 0 0 0
Stamp/Overlay mode
2 431

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW9 0 Operation at key counter Same as Immediate 0 1 1
/1050e/1050eP
removal (copier) the stop key stop (jam)

1 Operation at key counter Ignored Same as 0 0 0
removal (printer) DIPSW9-0
*17 *17
2 Message switchover 0 0 0
3 *17 *17 0 0 0
4 Copy quantity limit *18 *18 0 0 0
5 *18 *18 0 0 0
6 *18 *18 0 0 0
7 *18 *18 0 0 0
DIPSW10 0 Image memory usable area *19 *19 0 0 0
1 *19 *19 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Definition change of the large size *20 *20 0 0 0
4 paper in counter control *20 *20 0 0 0
5 Number of pages allowed for *21 *21 0 0 0
6 saddle stitch (paper weight: 90 *21 *21 0 0 0
7 to 244 g/m2) *21 *21 0 0 0
DIPSW11 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Automatic paper supply Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
2 Erasure amount of trailing edge 3 mm 1 mm 0 0 0
of tab paper
3 SC screen switchover F/E code screen F code screen 0 0 0
switch only
4 Filter for jagged edges on Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
slanting lines
5 Gradation switchover in the 2bitED 1bitED 0 0 0
photo mode
*22 *22
6 Criterion for judging custom 1 1 1
paper or wide paper as large
size
7 Jam code display Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW12 0 Control for high coverage origi- *23 *23 0 0 0
nal correspondence
1 Switching of default Job List Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
screen when using RC
2 0 0 0
3 Printer auto centering correction Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 RC recognition Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
6 Konica Minolta logo when Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
power switch is turned ON
7 — — — 0 0 0
432 2

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW13 0 Original size detection switchover 1 A5 51/2 x 81/2 0 1 0
1050e/1050eP
1 Original size detection switchover 2 A4S 81/2 x 11S 0 1 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Original size detection switcho- *24 *24 0 0 0
6 ver 3 *24 *24 0 0 0
7 *24 *24 1 1 0
DIPSW14 0 Original size detection switcho- B4, 11 x 17/B5, 8K/16K/16KS 0 0 0
ver 4 81/2 x 11/B5S
1 Wider-sized paper + punch Limited Not limited 0 0 0
support in printer mode
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW15 0 CMS function Not use Use 0 0 0
1 Number of "Fine" paper that *25 *25 0 0 0
2 can be stapled *25 *25 0 0 0
3 Finishing option alarm stop *26 *26 0 0 0
4 *26 *26 0 0 0
5 CS Remote Care recognition Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
6 Maximum density in printer mode 1.43 1.35 0 0 0
7 Trigger the display of developer/ Number of prints Running time 0 0 0
drum replacement icon
DIPSW16 0 Developer/drum running time Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0
display
1 Copy reservation function Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Count of the key counter in Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
printer mode
4 Utility mode installation date Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
display
5 Non-image area erase mode *27 *27 0 0 0
6 judge level *27 *27 0 0 0
7 NIC selection for E-Mail CS Controller NIC Machine NIC 0 0 0
Remote Care
2 433

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW17 0 Summer time setting *28 *28 0 0 0
/1050e/1050eP
1 *28 *28 1 1 1
2 *28 *28 1 1 1
3 *28 *28 0 0 0
4 Density selection at scanning *29 *29 0 0 0
5 tab paper *29 *29 0 0 0
6 *29 *29 0 0 0
7 Switching of custom size Rotates Not rotate 1 1 1
paper in printer mode
DIPSW18 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray /1 Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray /2 Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: RADF Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: HDD1 Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
DIPSW19 0 Fusing temperature setting *29 *29 0 0 0
1 *29 *29 0 0 0
2 *29 *29 0 0 0
3 *29 *29 0 0 0
4 Black band width when the *31 *31 0 0 0
inside temperature is high
5 — — — 0 0 0
*32 *32
6 Maximum black band width 0 0 0
7 (when connecting RC) *32 *32 0 0 0
DIPSW20 0 Group staple Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
1 Image scanning area with *33 Normal *33 Original priority 0 0 0
image shift
2 Total page number standard in Based on original Based on 0 0 0
stamp mode transfer paper
3 Keyboard layout ABC layout QWERTY layout 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Tandem connection *34 *34 0 0 0
DIPSW21 0 Mixed size paper staple Allowed Prohibited 0 0 0
(real-time output) (batch output)
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
434 2

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW21 4 Minimum custom size main main 0 0 0
1050e/1050eP
scanning: 182mm scanning: 150mm
sub scanning: sub scanning:
140mm 132mm
5 Touch panel adjustment method Utility/setting but- hard key 0 0 0
ton +hard key
6 Target settings to judge Target settings Not target settings 0 0 0
unmatched paper type in front (not overwrites the
and back registrations value of front and back reg-
a job read out from HDD istrations value)
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW22 0 Machine NIC setting Disabled Enabled 1 1 1
1 Number of punch holes *35 *35 1 1 0
2 *35 *35 0 0 1
3 Image position for the non-stan- Based on user Based on APS at 0 0 0
dard size original (at DF) selection DF
4 Function of power save button Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
5 SD trimmer board moving tim- Not displayed Displayed 0 0 0
ing adjustment
6 Operation when staple empty Request staple Selectable staple 0 0 0
of FNS supply supply or staple
release
7 Jam screen selection Jam position Described by 0 0 0
display illustration
DIPSW23 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Toner density of developer *36 *36 0 0 0
3 selection *36 *36 0 0 0
4 *36 *36 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW24 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Default settings of PageScope Manual Automatic 0 0 0
JobEditor when turned ON
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Z-fold output number limit *37 *37 0 0 0
5 *37 *37 0 0 0
6 Z-fold + Staple output number *38 *38 0 0 0
7 limit *38 *38 0 0 0
DIPSW25 0 PI size detection switchover 1 A5 5.5 x 8.5 0 1 0
1 PI size detection switchover 2 A4S 8.5 x 11S 0 1 0
2 435

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW25 2 PI size detection switchover 3 *39 *39 0 0 0
/1050e/1050eP
3 *39 *39 0 0 0
4 *39 *39 1 1 0
5 PI size detection switchover 4 B4, 11 x 17/B5, 8K/16K/16KS 0 0 0
81/2 x 11/B5S
6 PI size detection switchover 5 A3 12 x 18 0 1 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW26 0 Transfer assist control size *40 *40 0 1 0
1 switchover *40 *40 0 0 0
2 Multi feed detection control Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
(main body)
3 Multi feed detection control (PI) Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
4 Tray /4 forced separation Operate only in Operate always 0 0 0
clutch control high temp.
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Multi feed detection control Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
(DF)
DIPSW27 0 Paper weight-line speed con- For Japan For other than 0 1 1
trol switchover Japan
1 Fusing roller type Hard roller Soft roller 0 0 0
2 Image density selection (toner *41 *41 0 0 0
3 control patch density) *41 *41 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Thin characters reproduction Standard Thin-character 0 0 0
improvement (usage of smaller correspondent
laser dot)
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW28 0 Selection of page margin method Side1 and side2 Side1 and side2 0 0 0
set on main body for printer job collectively separately
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Changing direction of adjusting To the direction To the direction 0 0 0
print start position at back side opposite to that same as that of
in fine increments (other than of the frontside the frontside
book)
3 Changing direction of adjusting To the direction To the direction 0 0 0
print start position at back side same as that of opposite to that
in fine increments (book) the frontside of the frontside
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
436 2

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW28 6 Standard of shifting with the Based on image Based on paper 0 0 0
1050e/1050eP
shifting direction specified two
repeat.
7 SD-501 Limitation for multi half Limited Not Limited 0 0 0
fold
DIPSW29 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Switching of suction fan /4 Idling ON for 10 minutes 0 0 0
(FM29) operation control OFF after finishing printing
(when the drum tem-
perature is 45°C
or more)
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW30 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Service mode, restriction of Restricted Not restricted 0 0 0
data collection display
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 1 1 1
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW31 0 — — — 1 1 1
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW32 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
2 437

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW33 0 Faulty part isolation: FD-fold/ Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
/1050e/1050eP
punch function
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: FD main Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
tray paper exit
3 Faulty part isolation: PI function Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: FD Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: LS main Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
tray-tandem (1st)
7 Faulty part isolation: LS main Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
tray-tandem (2nd)
DIPSW34 0 Faulty part isolation: SD saddle Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
stitch
1 Faulty part isolation: SD multi Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
center fold
2 Faulty part isolation: SD multi Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
tri-fold
3 Faulty part isolation: SD trim- Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
ming
4 Faulty part isolation: SD con- Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
nection/ sub-tray exit
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW35 0 Faulty part isolation: FS staple Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
function
1 Faulty part isolation: FS main Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
tray paper exit
2 Faulty part isolation: FS Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: PB cover Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
paper insertion
4 Faulty part isolation: PB binder Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
function
5 Faulty part isolation: PB Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW36 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
438 2

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW36 6 — — — 0 0 0
1050e/1050eP
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW37 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 PB perfect binding limit Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
(includes Z-fold)
3 Upper limit setting for the num- Limited according Limited accord- 0 0 0
ber of papers to be stapled to paper size, paper ing to the paper
weight, or paper size
type, whichever is
the minimum.
4 Upper limit setting for the num- Limited by the Limited by the 0 0 0
ber of papers to be ejected for software FS-503 main tray
stapling or folding lower limit sensor
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 1 1 1
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW38 0 Default folder when selecting Private folder Shared folder 0 0 0
box function
1 File name overwriting with box function Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
2 Print quantity and output page Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
selection for Wait or Proof out-
put for box function
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Automatic change of tray set- *42 *42 0 0 0
ting names
5 Peripheral image erasure of Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
custom size
6 Buck side trailing edge erasure *43 *43 0 0 0
7 amount with duplex output *43 *43 0 0 0
DIPSW39 0 Tray1 paper leading edge Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
buckling prevention control
1 Tray2 paper leading edge Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
2 439

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW40 0 — — — 0 0 0
/1050e/1050eP
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Cover sheet single fold control *44 *44 0 0 0
3 with folding&stapling/multi *44 *44 0 0 0
center
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW42 0 TIFF direct print Not output Output 0 0 0
1 TIFF direct print *45 *45 0 0 0
2 APS target paper size (F4) *45 *45 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW43 0 Change of the scanner com- MMR MH 0 0 0
pression method
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 1 1 1
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW46 0 Visual Counter Master counter *46 *46 0 0 0
1 value read-off intervals *46 *46 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
440 2

NOTE *5 All charger cleaning cycle (after turned ON)
• Bold boxes show default settings.
Mode 2-5 2-4
* Every 10,000 prints 0 0
1050e/1050eP
1 Print stop condition after toner supply display
Every 20,000 prints 0 1
Mode 1-1 1-0
Stops after 500 prints 0 0
Stops after 750 prints 0 1
Stops after 1,000 prints 1 0 *6 Blade auto replacement cycle
Stops after 2,000 prints 1 1
Mode 2-7 2-6
*2 Print stop method after toner supply display Every 375,000 prints 0 0
Mode 1-3 1-2
Stops after exit paper in 0 0
the machine
Stops at a break between 0 1 *7 Image density selection (laser PWM) for copier
print set Change the image writing laser PWM to make image
Stops at the end of the 1 0 lighter.
current job
Does not stop 1 1 NOTE
• There are two kinds of DIPSWs to lighten
*3 Print number setting until printing is prohibited image density: laser PWM (5-2/3) and toner
after PM is displayed control patch density (27-2/3). As a priority of
adjustment, adjust in the following order.
Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5
1) Laser PWM
1,000 prints 0 0 0 2) Toner control patch density: approx. 0.5%
2,000 prints 0 0 1 down
3,000 prints 0 1 0 Using this setting alone may cause white
4,000 prints 0 1 1 spot on the solid section. Be sure to use
5,000 prints 1 0 0 together with DIPSW23-2/3/4 (toner den-

sity of developer) approx. 0.25% up or
1,000 prints 1 0 1
0.5% up.
1,000 prints 1 1 0
1,000 prints 1 1 1
Mode 5-3 5-2
*4 All charger cleaning cycle (fixing temperature Standard (*200/200/186) 0 0
50°C or less when turning ON) Lighter (*167/167/137) 0 1
Mode 2-3 2-2 2-1 Lightest (*142/142/112) 1 0
Cleaning every time 0 0 0 Standard (*200/200/186) 1 1
At 5,000 prints 0 0 1 * 0 (white) to 255 (black) represent density within

the image density range. Numbers represent
At 10,000 prints 0 1 0
each image density at the line speed 490 mm/s,
At 15,000 prints 0 1 1
425 mm/s, 290 mm/s from left.
At 20,000 prints 1 0 0
At 25,000 prints 1 0 1
At 30,000 prints 1 1 0
No cleaning 1 1 1
2 441
*12 Background density adjustment

*8 Toner collection box CMS display Change the charging potential and set the image
density of the highlight section.
Mode 5-4
/1050e/1050eP
Disabled 0 Mode 7-3 7-2

Enabled 1 Standard 0 0
Dark (25 V down) 0 1
NOTE Lighter (25 V up) 1 0
• This setting is enabled when DIPSW5-1, 12-5, Lightest (50 V up) 1 1
and 15-0 are set to "1".
*13 Black band width change control
*9 Background density adjustment (photo mode) Set black band to prevent the overflow toner and the
Change the laser PWM and set the image density for cleaning fault.
the highlight section while in the photo mode.
The numerical values given in the table represent the Mode 7-7
density in the image density range of 0 (white) to 255 Changes in synchronization 0
(black). with toner supply amount
Black band width fixed 1
Mode 6-1 6-0
PWM 16 0 0
*14 Image density selection (laser PWM) for printer
PWM 0 0 1 Change the image writing laser PWM to make image
PWM 8 1 0 lighter.
PWM 24 1 1
Mode 8-1 8-0
*10 Minimum black band width of black band cre- Standard (*200/200/186) 0 0
ation control Lighter (*167/167/137) 0 1
Specifies Minimum black band width of black band Lightest (*142/142/112) 1 0
creation control Standard (*200/200/186) 1 1
Mode 6-4 6-3 * 0 (white) to 255 (black) represent density within

the image density range. Numbers represent
0.25 mm 0 0
each image density at the line speed 490 mm/s,
0.5 mm 0 1
425 mm/s, 290 mm/s from left.
0.75 mm 1 0
No black band 1 1
*11 Image stabilization control cycle

Changes cycle of the image stabilization control
(drum potential, maximum density, gamma auto
adjustment).
Mode 6-6 6-5

442 2

*15 Fusing initial rotation condition *18 Copy quantity limit
In the low temperature environment, fusibility may be
Mode 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4
insufficient immediately after the power is turned ON.
No limit 0 0 0 0
1050e/1050eP
So, rotate the fusing roller while in the warm-up to
obtain an even heat distribution of the fusing roller to 1 prints 0 0 0 1
avoid the insufficient fusing. 3 prints 0 0 1 0
In this adjustment, determine the environment in 5 prints 0 0 1 1
which you implement the fusing initial rotation. 9 prints 0 1 0 0
• Low temperature: perform the fusing initial rotation
10 prints 0 1 0 1
in the low temperature environment only.
20 prints 0 1 1 0
• Low/normal temperature: perform the fusing initial
rotation in the low and normal temperature envi- 30 prints 0 1 1 1
ronment 50 prints 1 0 0 0
• Low/normal/high temperature: perform the fusing 99 prints 1 0 0 1
initial rotation in all environments. No limit 1 0 1 0
Mode 8-3 8-2 No limit 1 0 1 1
Low temperature 0 0 No limit 1 1 0 0
Low/normal temperature 0 1 No limit 1 1 1 0
Low/normal/high temper- 1 0 No limit 1 1 1 1

ature
*19 Image memory usable area
No preparatory rotation 1 1
Changes the usable area of DRAM (256 MB) on the
image processing board (IPB). Compression memory
*16 Fusing initial rotation time
is used within the memory area of compressed image
Mode 8-5 8-4 data, and expansion memory is used for page mem-
180 sec 0 0 ory of expanded image data. There are 2 types of
300 sec 0 1 image memory; DRAM on IPB and hard disk/1 (10
GB of total 40 GB is used). DRAM is used by priority.
60 sec 1 0
If hard disk/1 is damaged and memory overflow
0 sec 1 1
occurs during scanning or transferring data from PC,
increase compression memory. If memory overflow
*17 Message switchover
occurs before printing starts, increase expansion
Mode 9-3 9-2 memory.
Please insert key counter 0 0 Mode 10-1 10-0

Please insert copy card 0 1 Compression memory 0 0
Please insert coin 1 0 187MB
Please insert key counter 1 1 Expansion memory 69 MB
Compression memory 0 1
220MB
Expansion memory 36 MB
159MB
46MB
2 443
*20 Definition change of the large size paper in NOTE

counter control • When this setting is enabled, the background
optical density (DIPSW7-2 and 7-3) must be
Mode 10-3 10-4
/1050e/1050eP
set to " Lighter (50V up)".

A3 · 11 x 17 · 12 x 18 0 0 • When this setting is enabled, be sure to carry
Small size only 0 1 out cleaning of the conveyance belt every
A3 · 11 x 17 · 12 x 18 · 1 0 20,000 prints.
81/2 x 14 · B4 · 8K • Print density may drop immediately after
A3 · 11 x 17 · 12 x 18 · 1 1 changing the setting from "enabled" to "dis-
81/2 x 14 · B4 · 8K · F4 abled". The density will return to normal
while printing a dozen pages.
*21 Allowable number of pages for saddle stitch with • Enabling this setting increases toner con-
paper weight 92 to 244 g/m2 sumption. Print density becomes lower as
the remaining amount of toner gets lower. Be
Mode 10-7 10-6 10-5 careful not to cause a cartridge empty status
+0 0 0 0 while printing is in progress.
+5 0 0 1 • Transfer/separation output value of this con-
+10 0 1 0 trol is [User paper 1 to 3]. Be sure to set the
appropriate current value.
+15 0 1 1
+20 1 0 0
*24 Original size detection switchover 3
+25 1 0 1
Default setting for inch is 8.5 x 14 and 8 x 13 for met-
+30 1 1 0 ric.
— 1 1 1
Mode 13-7 13-6 13-5
*22 Criterion for judging custom size or wide size 8 x 13 0 0 0
paper as large size 8.25 x 13 0 0 1
8.125 x 13.25 0 1 0
Mode 11-6
8.5 x 13 0 1 1
330mm* 0
8.5 x 14 1 0 0
298mm 1
Not used 1 0 1
* Only valid when DIPSW10-3 and 10-4 are 0/1
and 1/1,respectively. Not used 1 1 0
Not used 1 1 1
*23 Control for printing high print ratio pages
Supports originals with high printing coverage by
measuring developing conditions, toner supply
period, and changes in line speed. Valid when "1" is
selected for this setting and the paper settings are as
follows: (RC-501 must be installed to use this func-
tion.)
Paper type: Rough paper
Paper weight: 131 to 161 g/m2
Mode 12-0
Disabled 0
Enabled 1
444 2

*25 Number of "Fine" paper that can be stapled Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0
Mode 15-2 15-1 110 minutes 1 0 1 1
100 sheets 0 0 120 minutes 1 1 0 0
1050e/1050eP
50 sheets 0 1 130 minutes 1 1 0 1
40 sheets 1 0 140 minutes 1 1 1 0
30 sheets 1 1 150 minutes 1 1 1 1
*29 Density selection at scanning tab paper

*26 Finishing operation alarm stop
Alarm stop means the following full detection func- Mode 17-6 17-5 17-4
tions. FD/FS/LS tray lower limit, FD/FS/LS/SD num- 80 0 0 0
ber of sheets on the tray, FD punch, FS staple 40 (Lightest) 0 0 1
scraps, SD trim scraps.
60 0 1 0
Mode 15-4 15-3 100 0 1 1
Stops immediately after 0 0 120 1 0 0
detection 160 1 0 1
Stops at a break between 0 1 200 1 1 0
print set after detection 255 (Darkest) 1 1 1
Does not stop while print- 1 0
ing *30 Fusing temperature setting
Does not stop while print- 1 1 Temperature up: Decrease insufficient fusing or wrap-
ing ping jam at fusing.
Temperature down: decrease paper exit curling or
*27 Non-image area erase mode judge level waving.
Mode 16-6 16-5 Mode 19-3 19-2 19-1 19-0

Standard 0 0 Standard 0 0 0 0
Correspond to dark origi- 0 1 (default for a soft roller)
nal Standard + 5°C 0 0 0 1
Correspond to light inter- 1 0 Standard + 10°C 0 0 1 0
ference Standard + 15°C 0 0 1 1
Not used 1 1 Standard -5°C 0 1 0 0
10 °C lower than the 0 1 0 1
*28 Summer time setting standard
Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0 (default for a hard roller)
0 minute 0 0 0 0 Standard -15°C 0 1 1 0
10 minutes 0 0 0 1 Standard -20°C 0 1 1 1
100 minutes 1 0 1 0
2 445
*31 Black band width when internal temperature *35 Number of punch holes
Black band is created with the width set in DIPSW6-
Mode 22-2 22-1
3, 4 when "1" is selected for this setting and the drum
Not used 0 0
/1050e/1050eP
temperature sensor (TH5) detects temperature above

45 °C. 2 and 3 holes 0 1
2 and 4 holes 1 0
Mode 19-4
Not used 1 1
Changes in synchronization with toner 0
supply amount
*36 Toner density of developer selection
Fixed black band width* 1 Change developing roller rotation and toner density of
* Width set in DIPSW6-3 and 6-4. developer (toner and carrier ratio) to change only
toner density of developer without changing image
*32 Maximum black band width (when connecting density.
RC) If increasing toner density of developer resulted in
Sets the maximum width of the black band in black image background, decrease toner density. If lighten-
band creation control. ing image in other DIPSW (5-0/1, 27-2/3) resulted in
Only valid when RC is installed. white spot on the solid section, increase toner den-
sity.
Mode 19-7 19-6
20mm 0 0
NOTE
10mm 0 1 • After change the DIPSW, image density does
5mm 1 0 not appear as the setting value until printing
Follows the DIPSW6-3 and 6-4 1 1 about 500 prints because it need to add toner
settings to increase toner density of developer or
need to consume toner to reduce it.
*33 Image scanning area with shift function

Mode 23-4 23-3 23-2
Normal: Compare the original size and the transfer
paper size, the smaller one is to be the image area. Standard toner density 0 0 0
Original priority: Original size is to be the image area. Approx. 0.5% down 0 0 1
Approx. 1.0% down 0 1 0
Mode 20-1
Approx. 1.5% down 0 1 1
Normal 0
Approx. 0.25% up 1 0 0
Original priority 1
Approx. 0.5% up 1 0 1
*34 Tandem connection mode Approx. 0.75% up 1 1 0

Select "Enabled" in the setting to make the tandem Approx. 1.0% up 1 1 1
connection.
The firmware of the main unit must have been set to *37 Z-fold output number limit
use the option. And the fusing rollers must be the
Mode 24-5 24-4
same type; hard rollers or soft rollers.
50 sheets 0 0
Mode 20-7 40 sheets 0 1
Disabled 0 30 sheets 1 0
Enabled 1 20 sheets 1 1
446 2

*38 Z-fold + Staple output number limit *41 Image density selection (toner control patch den-
sity)
Mode 24-7 24-6
Changes the image density by setting the developing
5 sheets 0 0
1050e/1050eP
bias for the toner control patch formed on the drum
8 sheets 0 1 to determine the toner density.
10 sheets 1 0
3 sheets 1 1 NOTE
• After changing the DIPSW, image density
*39 PI size detection switchover 3 does not appear as the setting value until
Default setting for inch is 8.5 x 14 and 8 x 13 for met- printing about 500 prints because it needs to
ric. add toner to increase the toner density of
developer or consume toner to reduce it.
Mode 25-4 25-3 25-2 • Using this setting alone may cause image
8 x 13 0 0 0 background or toner spillage. Be sure to use
81/4 x 13 0 0 1 together with DIPSW23-2/3/4 (toner density
8 / x 13 /
18 14
0 1 0 of developer) approx. 0.5% down or 1.0%
down.
8 / x 13
12 0 1 1
• There are two kinds of DIPSWs to lighten
8 / x 14
12 1 0 0
image density: laser PWM (5-2/3) and toner
Not used 1 0 1
control patch density (27-2/3). For the priority
Not used 1 1 0 of adjustment, adjust in the following order.
Not used 1 1 1 1) Laser PWM
2) Toner control patch density: approx. 0.5%
*40 Transfer assist control size switchover down
Default setting for inch is "Between 279 mm and 297 Using this setting alone may cause white
mm" and "297 mm or more" for metric. spots on the solid section. Be sure to use
together with DIPSW23-2/3/4 (toner den-
NOTE sity of developer) approx. 0.25% up or
• When you make the transfer assist sheet 0.5% up.
PCS-compliant, be sure to set this switch to
"Correspond to PCS." Mode 27-3 27-2
Standard 0 0
Approx. 0.5% up 0 1
Mode 26-1 26-0
Approx. 1.0% up 1 0
297 mm or more 0 0
Approx. 0.5% down 1 1
Between 279 mm and 0 1
297 mm
*42 Tray name is automatically changed.
Do not transfer assist 1 0
Correspond to PCS 1 1 Mode 38-4
Automatically changes the name to 0
the name of selected paper type,
when the name has been set to
"paper type".
Automatically changes the name to 1
the name of selected paper type,
when paper type, paper weight, color,
and punch settings are changed.
2 447
*43 Buck side trailing edge erasure amount with 10.9.2 Telephone number setting
duplex output Set the telephone number and FAX number of the
service center displayed when malfunction occurs.
Mode 38-7 38-6
/1050e/1050eP
* 2mm (copier) 0 0 A. Procedure

0mm (printer)
6mm 0 1 1. Enter the service mode.
8mm 1 0 2. "Service mode menu screen"

Press the [07 System Setting] key.
10mm 1 1
* It becomes 4 mm when the paper size is user-
screen.
defined with the DIPSW38-5 has been set to "1".
Press the [02 Telephone Number Setting] key
on the sub menu.
*44 Cover sheet single fold control with folding&sta-
pling/multi center 4. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen"
Enabling this setting improves accuracy of folding Press either the [Service Center Tel (16)] or the
cover paper. [Service Center Fax (16)] key you want to set.
5. Enter the telephone number or FAX number
Mode 40-3 40-2 you register through the numeric keys.
Normal control 0 0
* Enables the control 0 1 Note
under a certain condition • When a number is less than 16 digits, be
Enables the control all the 1 0 sure to use hyphen to fill up the blanks.
time 6. Press the [OK] key to register data.
— 1 1 Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you
* Enables the control only when the weight of entered.
cover paper fed from the main body is 131 g/m2
or heavier.
*45 TIFF direct print APS target paper size (F4)
Mode 42-1 42-2

8 x 13 0 0
8.5 x 13 0 1
8.25 x 13 1 0
8.125 x 13.25 1 1
*46 Visual Count Master counter value read-off inter-

vals
Mode 46-0 46-1

Once every 10 minutes 0 0
Once every 1 minute 0 1
Not read off 1 0
Once every 1 hour 1 1
448 2

10.9.3 Serial number setting 10.9.4 Setting date input
Set and display the serial number of the main body Set the starting date of the total counter that is dis-
and options. played on the utility mode.
1050e/1050eP
When setting the DIPSW 16-4 to 1, the starting date
of the total counter is not displayed.
Caution:
• Never change the serial number of the main
A. Procedure
body. Otherwise, the fixing temperature
abnormality or the drum damage may occur. 1. Enter the service mode.
A. Procedure Press the [07 System Setting] key.
1. Enter the service mode. screen.
2. "Service mode menu screen" Press the [04 Setting Date Input] key on the
Press the [07 System Setting] key. sub menu.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 4. "Setting date input screen"
screen. Enter the starting date through the numeric
Press the [03 M/C Serial Number Setting] key keys.
on the sub menu. 5. Press the [OK] key to update data.
4. "Serial number setting mode screen" Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you
Press the key for the option you want to set, updated.
and enter the serial number through the
numeric keys.
5. Press the [OK] key to register data.
Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you
entered.
NOTE
• When the entered data is incorrect, a notice
screen appears. Press the [OK] key to close
the screen and enter data again.
449
10.10 ROM version

Display the ROM version of the main body and
/1050e/1050eP
options.
NOTE
• The [Image control] that is displayed on the
screen represents the ROM version of the
overall control board (OACB).
(1) Procedure

Press the [08 ROM Version] key.
screen.
Press the [01 ROM Version]] key on the sub
menu.
4. "Indication of ROM version screen"
Each ROM version is displayed.
450

10.11 CS Remote Care
10.11.1 Outline
1050e/1050eP
The CS Remote Care is a system that manages the main body by sending and receiving various kinds of the
management data of the main body between the main body and the CS Remote Care center computer through
the phone line or E-mail.
It enables the main body to call the center computer, and the center computer to inquire regularly the main body
for various data.
The data handled by the CS Remote Care can be classified into the 3 following groups.
a. Data that allow you to grasp the use conditions of the main body, such as the total count and the PM count.
b. Data that give us the general information of when and how often an abnormality occurred with the main body.
c. All sorts of adjustment data
Note
• When the security enhanced mode is set to ON, the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.
10.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care

When a change in use is made between the main body NIC and the controller NIC, or when the mail remote
notification system is jointly used, care should be taken of the mail account and the DIPSW setting.
For particulars, see "10.11.3 List of combinations of E-Mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification sys-
tem".
In case you setup again the once setup main body, clear the RAM for CS Remote Care and start from step 5.
About how to clear the RAM for CS Remote Care, see "10.11.3 List of combinations of E-Mail CS Remote Care
and Mail remote notification system"
Step Operation
When using the phone line modem When using the E-mail
Main body NIC Controller NIC
0 Registered the machine ID in the application on the CS Remote Care center side.
When the machine ID is not registered, no initial connection cannot be made.
1 Modem connection When using the E-mail, remove the modem for the
Turn off the power of the modem, connect the phone line.
main body and the modem with a modem cable,
and the modem and the wall outlet with a modu-
lar cable.
* For the connection of a modular cable, see the
instructions of the modem to be used.
2 I/O check mode and data collection clear available
(Service mode → 07 System Setting → 01 Software SW Setting → Set 03-6 to "On (1)")
3 CS Remote Care memory initialization
(Service mode → 04 Machine Condition → 01 I/O Check Mode → [1] [5] [ACCESS] [9] [8] → [Start]
button ON)
4 CS Remote Care function ON
(Service mode → 07 System Setting → 01 Software SW Setting → Set 15-5 to "On (1)")
451
Step Operation
/1050e/1050eP
5 Proceed to the step 6. CS Remote Care used CS Remote Care used

NIC selection (main NIC selection (controller
body NIC used) NIC used)
(Service mode → 07 (Service mode → 07
System Setting → 01 System Setting → 01
Software SW Setting → Software SW Setting →
Set 16-7 to "On (1)") Set 16-7 to "Off (0)")
6 CS Remote Care function selection CS Remote Care function selection
(Service mode → 09 CS Remote Care → 01 CS (Service mode → 09 CS Remote Care → 01 CS
Remote Care → Set 02 Modem) Remote Care → Set 01 E-mail)
7 No. code entry
(Service mode → 09 CS Remote Care → 01 CS Remote Care → Press No. Code → Enter the No.
code* → Press No. Code)
* For the No. code, enter a specified code.
8 Date and time setting for the CS Remote Care
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 02 Date and time setting → Press Setting Time → Enter the
current time → Press SET → Press Time Zone → Enter the time zone)
9 Center ID setting
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 01 Basic setting → Press the Center No. → Enter the center
No.*)
* Enter the center No. in five digits.
10 Center telephone Number setting Response time out setting: Optional
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 01 Basic (Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 03
setting → Press Center Telephone Number → Response time out setting → Enter the response
Enter the center telephone Number*) time out time)
* Make an entry using "T" and "P" as required. (This is usually left as default.)
11 Machine telephone Number setting Proceed to the step 12.
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 01 Basic
setting → Press Machine Telephone Number →
Enter the machine telephone Number *)
* Make an entry using "T" and "P" as required.
12 Modem initialization AT command entry Main body mail address Controller mail address
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 04 AT setting setting
command → Press First command → Enter the This is set from the Web This is set by the admin-
initialization command *) utility on the browser of istrator set network set-
* For particulars of the initialization command, the PC connected to ting through the
see the instructions of the modem to be used. the main body NIC by operation panel of the
the network. main body.
Be sure to conduct the Be sure to conduct the
sending and receiving sending and receiving
test. test.
452

Step Operation
1050e/1050eP
13 DIPSW setting for the CS Remote Care Proceed to the step 14.
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → Software
SW setting)
(Baud rate setting: Select the baud rate at the
software DIPSW setting 01-4 to 7.)
14 Turn on and off the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
15 First call execution Initial connection mail Initial connection mail
(Service mode → 09 CS Remote Care → 01 CS reception reception
Remote Care → Press No. Code twice → Detail The initial connection The initial connection
setting → 01 Basic setting → First call*) mail is sent to the mail mail is sent to the mail
* When the connection to the center completes address of the main address of the controller
successfully, the CS Remote Care setting screen body NIC from the cen- NIC from the center.
is displayed. ter. * When the CS Remote
* When the CS Remote Care related window is
Care related screen is opened while receiving
opened while receiving the initial connection
the initial connection mail from the center, the
mail from the center, the information being cre-
information being created is destroyed and
ated is destroyed and the CS Remote Care
the CS Remote Care setting screen is dis-
setting screen is displayed.
played.
453
10.11.3 List of combinations of E-Mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system
To change a combination of E-Mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system, refer to this table to
configure the DIPSW setting or the mail account setting.
/1050e/1050eP
Case Mail remote E-Mail CS E-Mail CS Setting item Value Remark

notification Remote Care Remote Care
system using the main using the con-
body NIC troller NIC
"Use the mail remote notification Use
system" of the main body NIC’s
Web utility
1 { { — "Service mode - Software 1 (*3)
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
"Service mode - Software 1
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
system" of the main body NIC
Web utility
2 { — { "Service mode - Software 1 (*4)
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
system" of the main body NIC
Web utility
3 { — — "Service mode - Software 0 —
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
"Use the mail remote notification Do not
system" of the main body NIC use
Web utility
4 — { — "Service mode - Software 1 —
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
"Use the mail remote notification Do not
system" of the main body NIC use
Web utility
5 — — { "Service mode - Software 1 —
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
*1 Service mode - Software DIPSW: 15-5 (CS Remote Care function ON, 0=OFF, 1=ON)
*2 Service mode - Software DIPSW: 16-7 (NIC selection of E-Mail CS Remote Care, 0=controller NIC, 1=main
body NIC)
*3 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the main body NIC share the same mail account
*4 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the controller NIC use separate mail accounts
454

10.11.4 Detailed setup procedure 5. Set the bit data to "On (1)".
A. I/O check mode, data collection clear valid On (1): CS Remote Care function enabled
Off (0): CS Remote Care function disabled
1050e/1050eP
(default)
6. Press the [Return] key to finish the configura-
tion.
3. "Sub menu screen"
Press the [01 Software SW Setting] key.
4. "Software SW Setting screen" D. NIC selection for E-Mail CS Remote Care
Set "03" with the DIPSW number.
Set "6" with the DIPSW bit number.
5. Set the bit data to "On (1)".
On (1): I/O check mode, data collection clear
enabled 3. "Sub menu screen"
Off (0): I/O check mode, data collection clear Press the [01 Software SW Setting] key.
disabled (default) 4. "Software SW Setting screen"
6. Press the [Return] key to finish the configura- Set "16" with the DIPSW number.
tion. Set "7" with the DIPSW bit number.
5. Set the bit data to the NIC you use.
On (1): Use the main body NIC
B. CS Remote Care memory initialization Off (0): Use the controller NIC (default)
6. Press the [Return] key to finish the configura-
tion.
Press the [04 Machine Condition] key.
3. "Sub menu screen" E. CS Remote Care function selection (E-Mail/
Press the [01 I/O Check Mode] key. Phone line modem)
4. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter "15" with the numeric keys. Confirm that
"15-00" is displayed on the message display 2. "Service mode menu screen"
area. Press the [09 CS Remote Care] key.
5. Press the [Access] button. 3. "Sub menu screen"

Press the [01 CS Remote Care] key.
6. Enter "98" with the numeric keys.
4. "CS Remote Care setting screen"
7. Press the [Start] button.
Select the key for the function you use.
Confirm that the output check display switches
01 E-Mail: Use the E-Mail CS Remote Care
to "FIN."
02 Modem: Use the Modem CS Remote Care
5. Press the [No. Code] key.
C. CS Remote Care function ON 6. Enter the No. code* with the numeric keys.
7. Press the [No. Code] key.
8. Press the [Detail setting] key.
9. "Setting menu screen"
Press the [02 Date and time setting] key.
10. Enter the date with the numeric keys, and
press the [Set] key.
4. "Software SW Setting screen"
11. Enter the month with the numeric keys, and
Set "15" with the DIPSW number.
Set "5" with the DIPSW bit number.
455
12. "Date and Time setting screen" *1 When entering the telephone number, keys on
Enter the year in 2 digits with the numeric keys, the screen other than numeric keys represent
and press the [Set] key. the followings.
/1050e/1050eP
13. Enter time with the numeric keys, and press the [ , ] Pause: holds the self-dial delivery for some time
[Set] key. [W] Wait: detects the destination dial tone
14. Press the [Time Zone] key. [T] Tone dial: tone dialing
[P] Pulse dial: pulse dialing
15. Enter the time zone with the numeric keys, and
[—] Number delimiter: ignored when actually dialed
[*] [#] [•]: use as necessary
16. Press the [OK] key to return to the "Setting
*2 Change the modem initialization command if
menu screen."
necessary (Usually, there is no need to change).
* Enter the No. code that is assigned in advance. For details, refer to the manual of the modem.
F. Modem initial setting G. Baud rate setting
1. "Modem setting menu screen"

NOTE
Press the [01 Basic setting] key.
• In case you changed bit data by accident, be
2. "Basic setting screen"
sure to restore the previous state.
Press the [Center No.] key.
3. Enter the center ID with the keyboard, and 1. "Modem setting menu screen"
press the [OK] key. Press the [05 Software SW setting] key.
4. Press the [Center Telephone Number] key. 2. "Software SW Setting screen"
5. Enter the center telephone number with the Set "01" with the DIPSW number.
numeric and symbolic keys. Set the modem baud rate using the DIPSW bit
Use [T]s and [P]s depending on the modem number "4 to 7".*
and the phone line. *1 3. Press the [Return] key to return to the "Modem
6. Press the [Machine Telephone Number] key. setting menu screen."
7. Enter the machine telephone number with the
* Modem baud rate
numeric and symbolic keys.
Use [T]s and [P]s depending on the modem Baud rate 01-7 01-6 01-5 01-4
and the phone line. *1
1200 bps 0 0 1 1
8. Press the [OK] key to return to the "Modem set-
2400 bps 0 1 0 0
ting menu screen."
4800 bps 0 1 0 1
9. "Modem setting menu screen"
9600 bps 0 1 1 0
Press the [04 AT command] key.
19200 bps 0 1 1 1
10. "AT command setting screen"
Press the [First command] key. 38400 bps 1 0 0 0
11. Enter the modem initialization command with 57600 bps 1 0 0 1

the keyboard, and press the [OK] key. *2
12. Press the [OK] key to return to the "Modem set-
ting menu screen."
456

H. E-Mail initial setting 10.11.5 Software DIPSW setting for CS Remote
Care
1. "E-Mail Setting Menu screen"
1050e/1050eP
NOTE
2. "Basic setting screen" • DIPSW bits data are written into the Parame-
Press the [Center No.] key. ter board (PB) every time a change is made.
3. Enter the center ID with the keyboard, and In case you changed bit data by accident, be
press the [OK] key. sure to restore the previous state.
4. Press the [OK] key to return to the "E-Mail Set-
ting Menu screen." A. Input procedure
5. "E-Mail Setting Menu screen"
Press the [03 Response time out setting] key. *
6. Enter the response time out time with the
numeric keys. (in minutes)
7. Press the [OK] key to return to the "E-Mail Set-
ting Menu screen."
Press the [No. Code] key.
NOTE
• The response time out setting is automati- 5. Use the sheet setting keys to enter the No.
cally set on receiving the initial connection code. *1
mail. Change the setting if necessary. 6. Press the [No. Code] key.
9. "Software SW Setting screen"
Select the DIPSW number.
Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
10. Select the DIPSW bit number.
Use the right arrow key or the numeric keys.
11. Select DIPSW On (1), Off (0).
Use the [On (1)], [Off (0)] key.
12. Press the [Return] key to return to the "Setting
menu screen."
*1 If the No. code is already entered, confirm that
No. code.
NOTE
• About functions of each switch, see to "B.
List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care".
457
B. List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care
Note
/1050e/1050eP
• Do not change any bit not described on this table.
DIPSW No Bit Functions 0 1 Default

DIPSW1 0 — — — 1
1 Modem reception Receive*1 Do not receive*1 0
2 — — — 0
3 — — — 0
4 Baud rate *2 *2 0
5 *2 *2 0
6 *2 *2 0
7 *2 *2 1
DIPSW2 0 Auto call on SC occurrence Do not call Call 1
1 Auto call on date specification Do not call Call 1
2 Auto call on the part replacement Do not call Call 1
3 Auto call on the drum replacement Do not call Call 1
4 Auto call on the periodic maintenance Do not call Call 1
(PM)
5 — — — 0
6 — — — 0
7 — — — 0
DIPSW3 0 — — — 0
1 Auto call on the toner supply Do not call Call 1
2 Auto call on frequent JAM occurrence Do not call Call 1
3 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW4 0 CS Remote Care communication mode *3 *3 0
1 *3 *3 1
2 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW5 0 Modem redial interval *4 *4 1
1 *4 *4 1
2 *4 *4 0
3 *4 *4 0
4 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW6 0 Modem redial times *5 *5 0
1 *5 *5 1
2 *5 *5 0
3 *5 *5 1
4 *5 *5 0
5 *5 *5 0
6 *5 *5 0
7 — — — 0
DIPSW7 0 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1
1 to 7 — — — 0
458

DIPSW8 0 Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery *6 *6 0
1 error *6 *6 1
1050e/1050eP
2 *6 *6 1
3 *6 *6 0
4 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW9 0 Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery *7 *7 0
1 error *7 *7 1
2 *7 *7 0
3 *7 *7 1
4 *7 *7 0
5 *7 *7 0
6 *7 *7 0
7 — — — 0
DIPSW10 0 Time zone setting *8 *8 0
1 *8 *8 0
2 *8 *8 0
3 *8 *8 0
4 *8 *8 0
5 *8 *8 0
6 *8 *8 0
7 *8 *8 0
DIPSW11 0 Timer 1 *9 *9 0
1 RING reception → CONNECT reception *9 *9 0
2 *9 *9 0
3 *9 *9 0
4 *9 *9 0
5 *9 *9 1
6 *9 *9 0
7 *9 *9 0
DIPSW12 0 Timer 2 *10 *10 0
1 Dial request completed → CONNECT *10 *10 0
2 reception *10 *10 0
3 *10 *10 0
4 *10 *10 0
5 *10 *10 0
6 *10 *10 1
7 *10 *10 0
DIPSW13 0 Timer 3 — — 0
1 Not used — — 1
2 — — 0
3 — — 1
4 — — 0
459

DIPSW13 5 Timer 3 — — 0
6 Not used — — 0
/1050e/1050eP
7 — — 0
DIPSW14 0 Timer 4 *11 *11 0
1 Line connection → Start request telegram *11 *11 0
2 delivery *11 *11 0
3 *11 *11 0
4 *11 *11 0
5 *11 *11 1
6 *11 *11 0
7 *11 *11 0
DIPSW15 0 Timer 5 *12 *12 0
1 Wait time for other side's response *12 *12 1
2 *12 *12 1
3 *12 *12 1
4 *12 *12 1
5 *12 *12 0
6 *12 *12 0
7 *12 *12 0
DIPSW16 0 Retry data, timer 6 *13 *13 1
1 Initialization OK → Dial request *13 *13 1
2 *13 *13 1
3 *13 *13 1
4 *13 *13 1
5 *13 *13 1
6 *13 *13 1
7 *13 *13 1
DIPSW17 0 Call JAM date (main body) *14 *14 1
1 Valid copy quantity *14 *14 0
2 Call ADF JAM date *15 *15 1
3 Valid original feed quantity *15 *15 0
4 Call JAM date *16 *16 1
5 MCBJ setting *16 *16 0
6 Call ADF JAM date *17 *17 1
7 MOBJ setting *17 *17 0
DIPSW18 0 Attention display Do not call Call 1
1 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW19 to 0 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW40
460 1

*1 Modem reception *6 Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error
Mode 01-1 Mode 08-3 08-2 08-1 08-0

Receive 0 0 minute 0 0 0 0
1050e/1050eP
Issue ATA by RING delivery 10 minutes 0 0 0 1
Do not receive 1 20 minutes 0 0 1 0
Do not issue ATA by RING delivery 30 minutes 0 0 1 1
40 minutes 0 1 0 0
*2 Baud rate
50 minutes 0 1 0 1
Mode 01-7 01-6 01-5 01-4 60 minutes 0 1 1 0
1200 bps 0 0 1 1 70 minutes 0 1 1 1
2400 bps 0 1 0 0 80 minutes 1 0 0 0
4800 bps 0 1 0 1 90 minutes 1 0 0 1
9600 bps 0 1 1 0 100 minutes 1 0 1 0
19200 bps 0 1 1 1 110 minutes 1 0 1 1
38400 bps 1 0 0 0 120 minutes 1 1 0 0
57600 bps 1 0 0 1
*7 Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error
*3 CS Remote Care communication mode
Mode 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Mode 03-1 03-0 DIPSW09
Data modem 0 0 0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001
FAX (not used) 0 1 10 times 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
E-Mail 1 0 11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011
Reservation 1 1
*8 Time zone setting
*4 Modem redial interval
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Mode 05-3 05-2 05-1 05-0 DIPSW10
1 minute 0 0 0 1 -12 to -1 1111 0100 to 1111 1111
2 minutes 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 minutes 0 0 1 1 1 to 12 0000 0001 to 0001100
4 minutes 0 1 0 0
*9 Timer 1 (RING reception → CONNECT recep-
5 minutes 0 1 0 1
tion)
6 minutes 0 1 1 0
7 minutes 0 1 1 1 Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8 minutes 1 0 0 0 DIPSW11
9 minutes 1 0 0 1 0 to 31 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1111
10 minutes 1 0 1 0 32 sec 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
33 to 255 sec 0010 0001 to 1111 1111
*5 Modem redial times
Mode 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DIPSW06
0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001
10 times 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011
461
*10 Timer 2 (Dial request completed → CONNECT *15 Call ADF JAM date
reception) Valid original feed quantity
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Mode 17-3 17-2

/1050e/1050eP
DIPSW12 600 sheets 0 0

0 to 63 sec 0000 0000 to 0011 1111 1200 sheets 0 1
64 sec 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1800 sheets 1 0
65 to 255 sec 0100 0001 to 1111 1111 2400 sheets 1 1
*11 Timer 4 (Line connection → Start request tele- *16 Call JAM date
gram delivery) MCBJ setting
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Mode 17-5 17-4

DIPSW14 1000 0 0
0 to 31 (x 100 msec) 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 2000 0 1
32 (x 100 msec) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 3000 1 0
33 to 255 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 5000 1 1
(x 100 msec)
*17 Call ADF JAM date
*12 Timer 5 (Wait time for other side's response) MOBJ setting
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Mode 17-7 17-6

DIPSW15
100 0 0
0 to 29 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1101
200 0 1
30 sec 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
400 1 0
31 to 255 sec 0001 1111 to 1111 1111
600 1 1
*13 Retry data, timer 6 (Initialization OK → Dial

request)
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DIPSW16
0 to 254 (x 5 msec) 0000 0000 to 1111 1110
255 (x 5 msec) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*14 Call JAM date (main body)

Valid copy quantity
Mode 17-1 17-0

3000 copies 0 0
6000 copies 0 1
9000 copies 1 0
12000 copies 1 1
462 1

10.11.6 Mail address setting 5. Click [E-Mail Initial Setting]. The mail initial set-
A. Procedure for setting the main body NIC ting screen is displayed.
Display the Web utility on the browser of the PC that
1050e/1050eP
is connected to this machine by the network to set
the mail address. The mail setting method of the CS
Remote Care that uses the main body NIC is the
same as that for the mail remote notification system.
Corresponding browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 or
Netscape4.7x or above
1. Start up the PC that is connected to this

machine by the network.
2. Open the browser and select "Open" in the file
menu.
3. Enter the IP address of this machine or the host
name, and press the [Enter] key. The main page
of the Web utility screen of this machine is dis-
played.
4. Click [Extension for maintenance].

Enter "ce" for the user name and then enter the
8-digit CE password (default: 92729272) for
the password, and then click the [OK] button.
The CE extended function screen is displayed.
463
6. Set the following items. Supplement:

• Enable E-mail notification: [Communication log]
Select "Yes." The CE extended function page shows 5 sent-out
/1050e/1050eP
The setting method of the CS Remote Care and 5 received mail logs. The CS Remote Care
that uses the main body NIC is the same as related mails are displayed as "Kind: CS Remote
that of the mail remote notification system. Care Mail."
• Sending mail (SMTP) server:
Set the IP address of the sending mail server.
B. Procedure for setting the Controller NIC
• Interval between fetching mails:
Set the intervals from 1 minute to 60 minutes to 1. Press the [Utility] button on the operation panel.
check the receiving mail server to see if a mail is
2. "Utility menu screen"
newly received.
Press the [06 Machine Manager Setting] key.
• Receiving mail server:
3. "Machine manager setting menu screen"
Set the IP address of the receiving mail server.
Press the [04 Network Setting] key.
• Kind of mail spool:
Select either of POP3 and IMAP according to 4. "Sub menu screen"
the mail server to be used by the main body. Press the [02 Controller NIC Setting] key.
Default: "POP3" 5. "Controller NIC setting menu screen"

• User name on the server: Press the [11 CSRC] key.
Enter the account name assigned to the main 6. "CSRC setting menu screen"
body by the receiving mail server. Press the [01 CSRC Send Setting] key.
• Password: 7. Configure the following items.
Enter the password to the above account • CSRC Send
name. Select [Yes].
• E-mail address of this copy machine: • SMTP Server Address
Enter the mail address assigned to the main Specify the SMTP server address. You can use
body. symbols and alphanumeric characters within
• CE password: 63 characters.
Enter any alphanumeric characters (including • Port Number
symbols) up to 20 characters. Specify the SMTP port number within the range
• Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP: from 1 to 65535. Default is [25].
After authentication is made by the receiving • Connection Time Out Time
mail server, a selection is made if the mail is to Specify the SMTP time out time with in the
be sent out or not. Default: "To be sent." range from 30 to 300 (sec). Default is [60] sec-
* : Change "SMTP port No." and "POP (IMAP) onds.
port No." as necessary. • Machine Manager From Address
* : "Nickname for the copier," "Mail transfer Specify the From address of mails from the
option," "E-mail address for transfer" and "Dis- controller NIC.
play of the time required in the mail" are set for ==========================
the mail remote notification system. Set them In case you use a server in which authentication is
as necessary. required for sending and receiving mails, press the
7. Press the [Apply] button to decide the entry. [Next] key to configure necessary settings.
8. Click the [Sending and Receiving test] button to 8. Press the [OK] key.
conduct the sending and receiving test of the 9. "CSRC setting menu screen"
mail. Press the [02 CSRC Receive Setting] key.
When the test is completed successfully, pro-
ceed to the next step. When the test fails,
check the setting again according to the error
message to conduct the test once more.
464

10. Configure the following items. 10.11.7 Modem First Call
• CSRC Receive Send the machine ID and telephone number to the
Select [Yes]. CS Remote Care center computer to establish con-
1050e/1050eP
• POP Server Address nection with the center.
Specify the POP server address. You can use
symbols and alphanumeric characters within
63 characters.
• User Name
Enter the user name to login to the POP server. 3. "Sub menu screen"
You can use symbols and alphanumeric char- Press the [01 CS Remote Care] key.
acters within 63 characters. 4. "CS Remote Care setting screen"

• Password Press the [No. Code] key.
Enter the password to login to the POP server. 5. Enter the No. code with the numeric keys. *1
You can use symbols and alphanumeric char- 6. Press the [No. Code] key.
acters within 16 characters. 7. Press the [Detail setting] key.
• APOP
Select [On] to use the APOP function.
• Port Number
9. "Basic setting screen"
Specify the POP port number within the range
Press the [First Call] key.
from 1 to 65535. Default is [110].
• Connection Time Out Time 10. Confirm that the connection with the center is
Specify the POP time out time with in the range properly completed. *2
from 30 to 300 (sec). Default is [60] seconds. When properly completed, the "CS Remote
Care setting screen" appears.
Press the [Next] key to configure the following two *1 If the No. code is already entered, confirm that
settings. No. code.
• Auto Check *2 In case an error occurred in the communication
Select [Yes]. with the center, check the displayed code. For
• Auto Check Interval Time details on error codes, see "10.11.14 Error code
Specify the interval between checking new list".
mails within the range from 1 to 60 (minutes).
Default is 15 minutes.
11. Press the [OK] key.
12. "CSRC setting menu screen"
Press the [03 CSRC Communication Test] key.
13. "CSRC Communication Test"
Confirm that the sending and receiving are cor-
rectly performed and go to next step. If the test
failed, re-confirm the settings and perform the
test again following the error message.
465
10.11.8 Receiving the initial connection mail 10.11.9 Setup confirmation

In case E-Mails are used, after settings are done on
the main body, the center needs to send an initial
/1050e/1050eP
connection mail to the mail address of the main body,

thus enabling mail transmission between the center Press the [09 CS Remote Care] key.
and the main body. 3. "Sub menu screen"
MEMO: 4. "CS Remote Care setting screen"
• About how to send the initial connection mail, refer Make sure that only selected items for
to the CS Remote Care center's manual. "Modem" or "E-Mail" are displayed.
• Mail transmission are possible only between the
center and the main body that the initial connec-
tion has been established.
• The initial connection mail is sent from the center.
The mail address of the center used then is stored
in the main body.
• To check the center's mail address on the main
body, output "Machine Management List." Proce-
dure: Service mode → 05 List Output → 01 List
Output → Machine Management List. Press the
[COPY] key at upper left of the screen to output
the list from the basic screen.
466

10.11.10 Maintenance call 10.11.11 Center call from manager
As the CE starts the maintenance, enter the ID code If the setup of CS Remote Care is completed, the
of CE (7-digit number with which each CE is identi- manager can call the center of CS Remote Care.
1050e/1050eP
fied, managed by a distributor.) to notify the center
1. Enter the utility mode.
the start of maintenance. After the maintenance,
pressing the maintenance completion key notifies the 2. "Utility Menu screen"
center the completion of maintenance. Press the [06 Machine Manager Setting] key.
3. "Machine manager setting menu screen"
<At the start of maintenance> Press the [06 System Connection] key.
Press the [01 User Call] key.
5. "User Call screen"
3. "Sub menu screen" If the setup is not completed, or if other call is
Press the [01 CS Remote Care] key. made, the [Start] key is grayed out, disabling to
4. "CS Remote Care setting screen" make a call.
Press the [No. Code] key.
5. Enter the No. code with the numeric keys. About how to call the center and send various data of
6. Press the [No. Code] key. the main body on the specified date and time, refer to
the CS Remote Care center's manual.
During the maintenance, the [Start] button blinks until
the completion of the maintenance.
<At the end of maintenance>

Press the [Maintenance comp] key.
467
10.11.12 Confirm communication log 10.11.13 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote

You can output and confirm the communication log. Care
Initializing the RAM for CS Remote Care enables you
/1050e/1050eP
to perform the setup again.

Press the [05 List Output] key. 1. Enter the service mode.
3. "Sub menu screen" 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Press the [01 List Output] key. Press the [09 CS Remote Care] key.
4. "List output mode menu screen" 3. "Sub menu screen"
Press the [Communication Log List] key. Press the [01 CS Remote Care] key.
5. Press the [COPY] key to output the list from the 4. "CS Remote Care setting screen"
basic screen. Press the [No. Code] key.
5. Enter the No. code with the numeric keys. *1
For details of logs, see "10.7 List output". 6. Press the [No. Code] key.
Press the [04 RAM Clear] key.
9. "RAM Clear setting screen"
10. The confirmation screen appears.
Press the [OK] key.
11. The RAM is cleared, and the "CS Remote Care
setting screen" appears.
12. Perform the setup again if necessary.
*1 If the No. code is already entered, confirm that

No. code.
468

10.11.14 Error code list
Error code Error Solution

K00_00 Connection NG (Cannot connect from the modem, Redial and wait for re-reception.
1050e/1050eP
timed out).
K00_01 No response (After connection, no start telegram Redial and wait for re-reception.
from the center detected).
K00_02 Copying. Could not be written in non-volatile mem-
ory, and line disconnected.
K00_03 Center ID mismatch. Confirm the center ID.
K00_04 Serial number mismatch. Confirm the serial number.
K00_05 Grammar error (when receiving undefined com- Redial.
mands or parameters).
K00_06 Received a write order for an unwritable item.
K00_07 Unread item error.
K00_08 Signal reception time out after a response detection Redial.
(after the start telegram shuttled).
K00_09 Already registered serial number.
K00_10 Communication error occurred because of the car- Redial.
rier OFF (NO CARRIER detected in the modem).
K00_11 Dialtone (NO DIALTONE) detected in the modem. Redial.
K00_12 Busy signal (BUSY) detected in the modem. Redial.
K00_13 NO ANSWER detected in the modem. Redial.
K00_14 Telegram error (irregular telegram received in Retry standard times, and redial.
response to the telegram you sent).
K00_15 Serial number not registered in the center (4 x 40
telegrams received).
K00_16 Errors not defined in the above -00 to 15 (last 2 dig- Redial.
its).
K00_17 Telephone number you must call was not registered.
K01_00 DSR turned OFF or remains turned OFF.

K01_01 Error on creating a message queue.
K01_02 Error on generating a task.
K01_03 Error on sending a message.
K01_04 Error on receiving a message.
K01_05 Received an error (NG) from the timer task.
K02_01 Modem initialization NG.
K03_00 Center call evacuation buffer is full. Cannot evacuate

any more.
K05_90 Because of memory shortage, unable to secure
enough area for sending a mail.
469
Error code Error Solution

K05_92 Controller in operation: unable to send a mail In the manual transmission, retry
because the controller is in operation. when the controller is idling. In the
/1050e/1050eP
auto transmission, an automatic retry

is performed after 1 minute.
K05_93 Mail sending error: an error was returned on sending In the auto transmission, an auto-
a mail. matic retry is performed after the
specified time. Check if there is no
fault in the network environment and
the network settings.
K05_94 Machine in operation: unable to send a mail because In the manual transmission, retry
the machine is in operation. when the machine is idling. In the
auto transmission, an automatic retry
is performed after 1 minute.
K05_95 Controller not connected: unable to send a mail Check the connection between the
because the controller is not connected. controller and the main body.
K05_96 Controller-driven SC: unable to send a mail because In case of the controller-driven SC, a
of a controller-driven SC (49-xx). mail cannot be sent through the con-
troller. Use a telephone. This error do
not occur in the main body NIC.
* The shaded error codes are the ones that may occur when a transmission is made from the main body to
the center.
10.11.15 Troubleshooting
Check the followings when the main body neither receives the initial connection mail nor returns a response.
1) The center ID or the machine ID are not set in the main body.
2) The center ID or the machine ID are different (A machine ID error is not returned at the initial connection).
3) CS Remote Care function is disabled, or the phone line is selected in the CS Remote Care function selection.
4) Communication between the main body and the mail server is not proper (Check this with a transmission
test).
470

10.12 ISW 9. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and
See "5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP". press the [Set] key.
1050e/1050eP
• Setting range:-20 (in front) to +20 (in back)
10.13 Finisher adjustment 1 step = 0.1 mm
10.13.1 Staple Finisher adjustment
can be obtained.
Conduct various settings of the FS.
A. Stapling center position adjustment B. Paper width adjustment

Adjust the center position of the staple while in sta- When there is an uneven edge found with the bundle
pling. of paper, conduct this adjustment.
This adjustment adjusts the position of the alignment
(1) Procedure plate while in alignment.

(1) Procedure
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. 1. Enter the service mode.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 2. "Service mode menu screen"
screen. Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
Press the [01 Staple Position Adj.] key on the 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
sub menu. screen.
4. "Staple Finisher adjustment mode screen" Press the [01 Staple Position Adj.] key on the
Press the [01 Stapling Center Position Adjust- sub menu.
ment] key. 4. "Staple Finisher adjustment mode screen"
5. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen" Press the [02 Paper Width Adjustment] key.
Press the [COPY] key. 5. "Stapling Paper Width Adj. screen"
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and select the 2 Press the [COPY] key.
staplings. Press the Start button to output the 6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to
test pattern (No.16). adjust. Press the Start button to output the test
7. Fold the outputted paper in half in the paper pattern (No.16).
feed direction to check the misalignment with
the stapling center position.
• Standard value: a = ± 3mm
[1]
[2]
fs503fs3011ca
[1] Paper center [2] Stapling center position

2 471
7. Check to see if the bundle of papers is mis- 10.13.2 Multi folder (hole-punch) adjustment
aligned (a: a misalignment occurs when the Conduct the FD punch related adjustment.
paper width setting is larger than the paper
/1050e/1050eP
width) and if the bundle is curved (b: the curve A. Paper width adjustment
occurs when the paper width setting is smaller When a large mis-alignment is found with the position
than the paper width). of a punch hole, use a corresponding paper size to
• Standard value: a = ± 1.0 mm or less adjust the width of the alignment plate.
(16 sheets or less)
a = ± 1.5 mm or less (1) Procedure
(from 17 to 100 sheets)
a Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
screen.
Press the [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.] key on
the sub menu.
b
4. "Multi Folder (Hole-Punch) adj. menu screen"
Press the [01 Paper Width Adjustment] key.
fs503fs3012c
5. "Paper Width Adjustment screen"
8. When the value is not within the standard value, 6. Set paper you want to adjust in the tray, the
press the [SERVICE] key. number of copies is set to 10 and press the
9. "Stapling Paper Width Adj. screen" Start button.
Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
7. Check the diameter of the through-hole when
paper size you want to adjust.
the ejected paper is stacked.
10. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
No. of holes Standard value (mm)
• Setting range:-20 (wide) to +20 (narrow) 2 & 4 holes φ 5.0 or larger
1 step = 0.1 mm 3 holes φ 6.5 or larger
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
can be obtained. press the [SERVICE] key.
10. Enter the set value through the numeric keys
• Setting range:-20 (narrow) to +20 (wide)
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• When the alignment plate is wider than an
appropriate position, the punch centering
is displaced, and when too narrow, the
punch holes are apt to disperse.
can be obtained.
472

B. Hole-punch vertical position adjustment 11. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
Adjust punch holes in the sub scan direction. press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-40 (wide) to +40 (narrow)
1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure 1 step = 0.1 mm
1. Enter the service mode. 12. Repeat steps 5 to 11 until the standard value
can be obtained.
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. 13. To configure other punch hole/paper size,
repeat steps 5 to 11.
screen.
Press the [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.] key on
the sub menu.
4. "Multi Folder (Hole-Punch) adj. menu screen"
Press the [02 Hole-Punch Vertical Position
Adjustment] key.
5. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to
adjust in the tray, and select the number of
punch holes. Press the Start button to output
the test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the distance a from the outputted paper
leading edge to the punch holes center posi-
tion.
fs503fs3013c
Holes Standard value a (mm)

2 & 4 holes 10.5 ± 5.0
3 holes 9.5 ± 5.0

9. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
10. Press the punch hole key you want to adjust.
473
10.13.3 Multi folder (Fold) adjustment B. Letter fold-in position adjustment

Conduct the FD folding related adjustment. Adjust the folding position on the letter fold-in printing
mode.
/1050e/1050eP
A. Folding position adjustment

Adjust the folding position on the fold printing. NOTE
• When adjusting both the single fold and the
(1) Procedure double fold, be sure to start with the double
fold.
• The position of the single fold is based on the
2. "Service mode menu screen" leading edge of paper and the position of the
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. double fold is based on the position of the
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step
screen. 7 varies when either position of the single fold
Press the [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] key on the and the double fold is changed.
sub menu.
4. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. mode screen" (1) Procedure
Press the [01 Folding Position Adjustment] key.
5. "Folding Position Adjustment screen"
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
adjust in the tray. Press the Start button to out-
screen.
Press the [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] key on the
7. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the
sub menu.
outputted paper.
4. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. mode screen"
• Standard value a: ± 1.5 mm
Press the [02 Letter Fold-in Position Adjust-
ment] key.
a
5. "Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment screen"
fs503fs3014c
• Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm
• In the case of the mis-alignment given in the

step 7, enter a set value on the positive side.
can be obtained.
12. To configure other paper size, repeat steps 5 to
11.
474

7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper. C. Letter fold-out position adjustment
Adjust the folding position on the letter fold-out print-
ing mode.
1050e/1050eP
b
NOTE
[1]
a • The position of the single fold is based on the
leading edge of paper and the position of the
[2]
double fold is based on the position of the
single fold. So, the dimension "a" and "b" in
a03uf3c019ca
the step 7 varies when either position of the
[1] Single fold [2] Double fold single fold and the double fold is changed.
Paper size Standard value (mm)
a± 1.5 b± 1.5 (1) Procedure
A3 139.0 142.0 1. Enter the service mode.

B4 120.3 123.3 2. "Service mode menu screen"
A4S 98.0 101.0 Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
12 x 18 151.4 154.4 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
11 x 17 142.9 145.9 screen.
81/2 x 14 117.5 120.5 Press the [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] key on the
sub menu.
81/2 x 11S 92.1 95.1
8K 129.0 132.0
Press the [03 Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment]
8. When the value is not within the standard value, key.
press the [SERVICE] key. 5. "Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment screen"
9. "Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment screen" Press the [COPY] key.
Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the 6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to
paper size you want to adjust. adjust in the tray. Press the Start button to out-
10. Press the [Double Fold] key. put the test pattern (No.16).

• The dimension "a" in the step 7 gets larger

when the set value is moved to the positive side
and gets smaller when moved to the negative
side.
12. Press the [Single Fold] key.
• The dimension "b" in the step 7 gets larger

side.
can be obtained.
2 475
7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper. D. Double parallel position adjustment
Adjust the folding position on the double parallel posi-
tion.
/1050e/1050eP
b
NOTE
• When adjusting both the single fold and the
a [1]
double fold, be sure to start with the double
[2]
fold.
a03uf3c020ca
• The position of the single fold is based on the
[1] Single fold [2] Double fold leading edge of paper and the position of the
Paper size Standard value (mm) double fold is based on the position of the
single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step
a± 1.5 b± 1.5
7 varies when either position of the single fold
A3 282.0 144.0
and the double fold is changed.
B4 243.7 123.3
A4S 199.0 101.0 (1) Procedure
12 x 18 306.8 156.4
11 x 17 289.9 147.9
81/2 x 14 238.1 120.5
81/2 x 11S 187.3 95.1
8K 262.0 134.0 screen.
sub menu.
9. "Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment screen"
Press the [04 Double Parallel Position Adjust-
ment] key.
5. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"

when the set value is moved to the plus side
and gets smaller when moved to the minus
side.
12. Press the [Double Fold] key.

side.
can be obtained.
476 2

7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper. E. Z-fold position adjustment
Adjust the folding position on the Z-fold position.
1050e/1050eP
b NOTE
[1] • When adjusting both the single fold and the
double fold, be sure to start with the single
a
fold.
[2] • The position of the single fold is based on the
a03uf3c021ca
[1] Single fold [2] Double fold single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step
Paper size Standard value (mm) 7 varies when either position of the single fold
and the double fold is changed.
a± 1.5 b± 1.5
A3 208.5 103.8
(1) Procedure
B4 180.5 89.8
A4S 147.0 73.0 1. Enter the service mode.
12 x 18 227.1 113.1 2. "Service mode menu screen"
11 x 17 214.4 106.7
81/2 x 14 176.3 87.7
screen.
81/2 x 11S 138.2 68.6
8K 193.5 96.3
sub menu.
Press the [05 Z-Fold Position Adjustment] key.
5. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
9. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
paper size you want to adjust. 6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to
• The dimension "a" in the step 7 gets smaller

and gets larger when moved to the negative
side.
• The dimension "b" in the step 7 gets smaller

side.
can be obtained.
2 477
7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper. 13. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
/1050e/1050eP
• The dimension "b" in the step 7 gets smaller

[2] a [1] when the set value is moved to the positive side
a03uf3c022ca
side.
8 1㧛214 can be obtained.
[1] a
a03uf3c031ca
[1] Single fold [2] Double fold
Paper size Standard value (mm)

a± 1.5 b± 1.5
A3 105.5 108.5
B4 91.5 94.5
A4S 74.8 77.8
12 x 18 114.8 117.8
11 x 17 108.5 111.5
81/2 x 14 94.0 —
81/2 x 11S 70.4 73.4
8K 98.0 101.0

9. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"

side.
478 2

F. Gate position adjustment 7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
Adjust the folding position on the gate position.
1050e/1050eP
NOTE b
• When adjusting the single fold, the double a
fold and the triple fold, be sure to conduct the
[1]
single fold, the double fold and the triple fold
in this order. c [2]
• The position of the single fold is based on the [3]
a03uf3c023ca
single fold. So, the dimension "a" and "b" in [1] Single fold [2] Double fold [3] Triple fold
the step 7 varies when either position of the Paper size Standard value (mm)
single fold and the double fold is changed.
a± 1.5 b± 1.5 c± 1.5
A3 103.5 213.0 106.5
(1) Procedure
B4 89.5 185.0 92.5
1. Enter the service mode. A4S 72.8 151.5 75.8
2. "Service mode menu screen" 12 x 18 112.8 231.6 115.8
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. 11 x 17 106.5 218.9 109.5
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 81/2 x 14 87.4 180.8 90.4
screen.
81/2 x 11S 68.4 142.7 71.4
8K 96.0 198.0 99.0
sub menu.
4. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. menu screen" 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
Press the [06 Gate Position Adjustment] key. press the [SERVICE] key.
5. "Gate Position Adjustment screen" 9. "Gate Position Adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY] key. Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to paper size you want to adjust.
adjust in the tray. Press the Start button to out- 10. Press the [Single Fold] key.
put the test pattern (No.16). 11. Enter a value through the numeric keys and

side.

side.
14. Press the [Triple Fold] key.
2 479
15. Enter a value through the numeric keys and 10.13.5 Stacker adjustment
press the [Set] key. Conduct the LS related adjustments.
/1050e/1050eP
A. Paper width adjustment

• The dimension "c" in the step 7 gets smaller Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-align-
when the set value is moved to the positive side ment occurs in the main scan direction of the stacker
and gets larger when moved to the negative tray.
side. This adjusts the position of the alignment plate while
in alignment.
can be obtained.
(1) Procedure

G. Fold regist loop adjustment
Adjust the paper loop amount at the registration roller 2. "Service mode menu screen"
section to adjust the folding skew, the wrinkling of Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
paper or a jam at the registration section. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen.
(1) Procedure Press the [05 Stacker Adjustment] key on the
sub menu.
4. "Stacker Adjustment Mode Menu screen"
2. "Service mode menu screen" Press the [01 Paper Width Adjustment] key.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Press the [COPY] key.
screen.
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the start
button to output the test pattern (No. 16).
sub menu.
7. When a paper exit mis-alignment occurs, press
4. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. menu screen"
the [SERVICE] key.
Press the [07 Fold Regist Loop Adjustment]
key.
Press the [Next] or [Back] key to select either
5. "Fold Regist Loop Adjustment screen"
the stacker 1 or the stacker 2.
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the start
button to output the test pattern (No. 16).
7. When the trouble recurs, press the [SERVICE] 1 step: 0.1 mm
key.
8. "Fold Regist Loop Adjustment screen" value is obtained.
1 step = 0.1 mm
value is obtained.
10.13.4 Multi folder (PI) adjustment

This is not used in the field.
480

B. Paper length adjustment 10.13.6 Saddle stitcher adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-align- Conduct various adjustment related to SD
ment occurs in the sub scan direction of the stacker
1050e/1050eP
tray. A. Stapling center position adjustment
This adjusts the position of the leading edge stopper. Adjust the center position of the staple for the saddle
stitching mode.
(1) Procedure
(1) Procedure
2. "Service mode menu screen" 1. Enter the service mode.
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
screen. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the screen.
Press the [05 Stacker Adjustment] key on the Press the [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.] key on the
sub menu. sub menu.
4. "Stacker Adjustment Mode Menu screen" 4. "Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu screen"
Press the [02 Paper Length Adjustment] key. Press the [01 Staple Center Adjustment] key.
5. "Paper Length Adjustment screen" 5. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY] key. Press the [COPY] key.
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the start 6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the start
button to output the test pattern (No. 16). button to output the test pattern (No. 16).
7. When a paper exit mis-alignment occurs, press 7. Check the misalignment between the staple-
the [SERVICE] key. center and the paper center.
8. "Paper Length Adjustment screen" • Standard value: a = ± 2 mm
Press the [Next] or [Back] key to select either
the stacker 1 or the stacker 2.
1 step: 0.1 mm [2] [1]

value is obtained.
a
fs503fs3300c
[1] Single fold [2] Stapling center

9. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen"
• Setting range:-20 (right) to +20 (left)
1 step = 0.1 mm
can be obtained.
1 481
B. Stapling paper width adjustment 9. "Staple Paper Width Adj.screen"

When there is an uneven edge found with the bundle Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
paper at the saddle stitching mode, conduct this paper size you want to adjust.
/1050e/1050eP
adjustment.
This adjustment adjusts the position of the saddle
stitching alignment plate.
Setting range:-20 (narrow) to +20 (wide)
1 step = 0.1 mm
NOTE
• Make sure that the folding skew adjustment
can be obtained.
of the mechanical adjustment has been com-
pleted.
C. Staple pitch adjustment
(1) Procedure Adjust the stapling interval for the saddle stitching
mode.
(1) Procedure
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 1. Enter the service mode.
screen. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Press the [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.] key on the Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
sub menu. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the screen.
4. "Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu screen" Press the [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.] key on the
Press the [02 Stapling Paper Width Adjust- sub menu.
ment] key. 4. "Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu screen"
5. "Staple Paper Width Adj. screen" Press the [03 Staple Pitch Adjustment] key.
Press the [COPY] key. 5. "Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to Press the [COPY] key.
adjust. Press the Start button to output the test 6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to
pattern (No. 16). adjust. Press the Start button to output the test
7. Check to see if the bundle of papers is mis- pattern (No. 16).
aligned (a: a misalignment occurs when the 7. Check the interval "a" between the staples
paper width setting is larger than the paper against the paper size "b."
width) and if the bundle is curved (b: the curve • Standard value: a = (b/2) ± 2 mm
occurs when the paper width setting is smaller
than the paper width).
• Standard value a: 1.0 mm or less
a
b
b
fs503fs3011c
fs503fs3012c
482 2

9. "Staple Pitch Adjustment screen" 7. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the
Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the outputted paper.
paper size you want to adjust. • Standard value a: 1.5 mm or less
1050e/1050eP
press the [Set] key. a
1 step = 1 mm
• Setting range is restricted by the paper size.
Minimum value is determined based on the sta- fs503fs3014c
pler movable range and the maximum value is
determined so that the saddle stitching align-
ment plate and stapler do not interfere with
each other. 9. "Folding Position Adjustment screen"
B5S: Setting is not possible (fixed to 91 mm) Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
B4: -20 to +20 mm (108.5 to 148.5 mm) paper size you want to adjust.
A4S: -14 to +14 mm (91 to 119 mm) 10. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
A3: -20 to +16.5 mm (128.5 to 165 mm) press the [Set] key.
81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S: -16.95 to +16.95 mm Setting range: -20 to +20
(91 to 124.9 mm) 1 step = 0.1 mm
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11: -20 to +20 mm • In case of the misalignment given in the step 7,
(119.7 to 159.7 mm) enter a set value on the positive side.
D. Folding position adjustment E. Three-Fold position adjustment

Adjust the folding position at the center folding mode. Adjust the folding position on the multi letter folding
mode.
(1) Procedure
NOTE
1. Enter the service mode. • When adjusting both the single fold and the
2. "Service mode menu screen" double fold, be sure to start with the double
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. fold.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the • The position of the single fold is based on the
screen. leading edge of paper and the position of the
Press the [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.] key on the double fold is based on the position of the
sub menu. single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step
4. "Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu screen" 7 varies when either position of the single fold
Press the [04 Folding Position Adjustment] key. and the double fold is changed.
Press the [COPY] key. (1) Procedure
6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to 1. Enter the service mode.
adjust. Press the Start button to output the test
pattern (No. 16).
screen.
Press the [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.] key on the
sub menu.
2 483
4. "Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu screen" F. Fold paper width adjustment

Press the [05 Three-Fold Position Adjustment] key. When there is an uneven edge found with the bundle
paper at the folding or multi letter folding mode, con-
5. "Three-Folding Position Adj. screen"
/1050e/1050eP
duct this adjustment.

This adjustment adjusts the alignment width for the
main scan alignment.
pattern (No. 16).
(1) Procedure
7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
a
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the screen.
b sub menu.
4. "Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu screen"
fs503fs3015c Press the [06 Fold Paper Width Adjustment] key.
5. "Fold Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Paper size Standard value (mm) Press the [COPY] key.
a b 6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to
A4S 97.5 ± 2.5 102.0 ± 2.5 adjust. Press the Start button to output the test
81/2 x 11S 91.6 ± 2.5 96.1 ± 2.5 pattern (No. 16).
7. Check the printed pages for misalignment.
8. When the value is not within the standard value, a. When the paper width setting is set to wider
press the [SERVICE] key. than the actual paper width, misalignment
9. "Three-Folding Position Adj. screen" occurs at random.
Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the b. When the paper width setting is set to nar-
paper size you want to adjust. rower than the actual paper width, misalign-
10. Press the [Double fold] key. ment occurs in one direction.
a
side.
12. Press the [Single-folding] key.
press the [Set] key. b
when the set value is moved to the positive side fs503fs3302ca
and gets smaller when moved to the negative 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
side. press the [SERVICE] key.
14. Repeat steps 5 to 13 until the standard value 9. "Fold Paper Width Adjustment screen"
can be obtained. Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
484 2

10. Enter a value through the numeric keys and 10. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
press the [Set] key. press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-20 (narrow) to +20 (wide) • Setting range:-400 (smaller) to +400 (larger)
1050e/1050eP
1 step = 0.1mm 1 step = 0.1mm
G. Trimming adjustment
When there is misalignment in the trimmed fore-edge
or the trimming is too much, conduct this adjustment.
(1) Procedure

screen.
sub menu.
4. "Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu screen"
Press the [07 Trimming Adjustment] key.
5. "Trimming Adjustment screen"
pattern (No. 16).
7. Check the trimming distance "a" on the cover
paper.
• Standard value: a = 2 mm or more
Note
• Trimming distance less than 2mm may
cause trimming fault.
fs503fs3301c

9. "Trimming Adjustment screen"
1 485
10.13.7 Perfect binder adjustment 10. "Cover Trimming Adjustment"

A. Cover trimming adjustment Enter a value through the numeric keys and
Adjusts the trimming position of the right side edge of press the [Set] key.
/1050e/1050eP
the cover paper. • Setting range: -128 (reduces the trimming amount) to
+127 (enlarges the trimming amount)
NOTE 1 step = 0.1mm
• In order to align the leading edges on the left
and right covers, perform the adjustments in
value is obtained.
the order shown below:
1. B Cover lead edge adjustment
2. A Cover trimming adjustment B. Cover lead edge adjustment
Sets the length that the left side of cover paper
(1) Procedure exceeds the length (width) of inside pages.

(1) Procedure
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. 1. Enter the service mode.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 2. "Service mode menu screen"
screen. Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
Press the [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] key 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
on the sub menu. screen.
4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu Press the [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] key
screen" on the sub menu.
Press the [01 Cover Trimming Adjustment] key. 4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu screen"
5. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen" Press the [02 Cover Lead Edge Adjustment] key.
Press the [Next] or [Back] key to select PB Tray 5. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen"
or Main Tray. Press the [Main Tray] or [PB Tray] key to select
6. Press the [COPY] key. PB tray or tray on the main body.
7. Select the paper type and press the start but- 6. Press [Next] or [Back] key to select the paper
ton to make test prints and carry out perfect size from the following options.
binding. All Size
8. Check the cover of the created book if its right 8.5 x 11
side edge and left side edge align with each 5.5 x 8.5R
other. A4
A5R
B5
[3]
A5
5.5 x 8.5
Special
16K
8.5 x 11W
[2] [1] 5.5 x 8.5W

1050fs3357c
A4W
[1] Trimming position [2] Right cover paper A5W
[3] Left cover paper B5W
9. Press the [SERVICE] key to change the trim-
ming position of the right cover paper. Note
• Above paper sizes are book (the inside
pages) finished sizes.
486 2

C. Spine corner forming position adjustment
7. Press the [COPY] key.
Adjusts the corner folding position of the cover paper.
8. Select the paper type and press the start but-
ton to make test prints and carry out perfect
1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure
binding.
9. Check that the width of the left cover paper is 1. Enter the service mode.
longer than that of the inside pages by speci- 2. "Service mode menu screen"
fied amount. Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
[3] [4] screen.
Press the [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] key
[5]
on the sub menu.
[1] 4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu
screen"
Press the [03 Spine Corner forming Position
[2] 1050fs3358c
Adj.] key.
[1] Inside pages [2] Right cover paper 5. "Spine Corner forming Up/Down Adj. screen"
[3] Left cover paper [4] Length differential Press the [COPY] key.
[5] Edge of the left cover paper 6. Select the paper type and press the start but-
10. To change the width of the left cover paper, ton to make test prints and carry out perfect
press the [SERVICE] key. binding.
11. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen" 7. Check that the corner edges of the cover paper
Enter a value through the numeric keys and are created uniformly in the main scan direc-
press the [Set] key. tion.
1 step = 0.1mm [4]
value is obtained. [1]
[2]
[3]
1050fs3359c
[1] Right cover paper [2] Main scanning direction

[3] Cover paper [4] Left cover paper
8. When the corner edges of the cover paper are
not created uniformly, press the [SERVICE] key.
9. "Spine Corner forming Up/Down Adj. screen"
Press [Next] or [Back] key to Select the front
edge/rear edge adjustment
• Setting range:-128 (down) to +127(up)
1 step = 0.1mm
value is obtained.
2 487
D. Pasting start postion adjustment 9. Check that the glue applying start position to
Adjusts the start position for applying glue to inside the inside pages is appropriate.
pages.
/1050e/1050eP
[3]
(1) Procedure

3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the [1]
screen.
on the sub menu. [2] 1050fs3360c
4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu screen"

[1] Start position for frontward applying
Press the [04 Pasting Start Postion Adjustment]
[2] Start position for backward applying
key.
[3] Inside pages
5. "Pasting Start Pos. Adj. screen"
10. To adjust the start position, press the [SERV-
Press [Go Ahead] or [Go Back] to select which
ICE] key.
start position, for applying during frontward
11. "Pasting Start Pos. Adj. screen"
movement or backward movement, to be
adjusted.
6. Press [Next] or [Back] key to select the paper
• Setting range:-128 (earlier) to +127 (later)
size from the following options.
1 step = 0.1mm
All Size
8.5 x 11
value is obtained.
A4
B5
A5
5.5 x 8.5
16K
A4W
B5W
A5W
8.5 x 11W
5.5 x 8.5 W
Special
Note
binding.
488 2

E. Pasting finish position adjustment 9. Check that the glue applying finish position to
Adjusts the position to finish applying glue. the inside pages is appropriate.
1050e/1050eP
(1) Procedure
[3]
screen. [1]
on the sub menu.
4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu screen" [2] 1050fs3361c
Press the [05 Pasting Finish Position Adjust-

[1] Finish position for frontward applying
ment] key.
[2] Finish position for backward applying
5. "Paste Finish Pos. Adj. screen" [3] Inside pages
Press [Go Ahead] or [Go Back] to select which
10. To adjust the finish position, press the [SERV-
finish position, for applying during frontward
ICE] key.
movement or backward movement, to be
11. "Paste Finish Pos. Adj. screen"
adjusted.
6. Press [Next] or [Back] key to select the paper
size from the following options.
• Setting range:-128 (earlier) to +127 (later)
All Size
1 step = 0.1mm
8.5 x 11
A4
value is obtained.
B5
A5
5.5 x 8.5
16K
A4W
B5W
A5W
8.5 x 11W
5.5 x 8.5 W
Special
Note
binding.
2 489
F. Paste formation finish position adjustment 10. "Paste Formation Finish Adj. screen"
Adjusts the finish position of the process to make a Enter a value through the numeric keys and
uniform layer of glue applied on the inside pages press the [Set] key.
/1050e/1050eP
spine. • Setting range:-128 (earlier) to +127 (later)

1 step = 0.1mm
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the service mode. value is obtained.

screen.
on the sub menu.
4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu
screen"
Press the [06 Paste Formation Finish Position
Adj.] key.
5. "Paste Formation Finish Adj. screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] key to select the
paper size from the following options.
All Size
8.5 x 11
A4
B5
A5
5.5 x 8.5
16K
A4W
B5W
A5W
8.5 x 11W
5.5 x 8.5 W
Special
Note
binding.
8. Check that the finish position of the process to
make a uniform layer of glue on the inside
pages spine is appropriate.
9. When adjusting the the finish position of the
process to make a uniform layer of glue,
490 2

G. Temperature adjustment 10. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
Sets the temperatures to be detected by the glue press the [Set] key.
apply roller temperature sensor (TH1), the glue tank • Melt Tank - Top
1050e/1050eP
temperature sensor/Up (TH2), the glue tank tempera- Setting range: 10 to 200 °C
ture sensor/Md (TH3), and the glue tank temperature Default: 132 °C
sensor/Lw (TH4) provided in the glue tank. • Melt Tank - Mid
Setting range: 140 to 200 °C
(1) Procedure Default: 145 °C
• Melt Tank - Low
Setting range: 140 to 200°C
Default: 185 °C
• Pasting Roller
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Setting range: 140 to 200 °C
screen. Default: 165 °C
on the sub menu.
value is obtained.
4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu
screen"
Press the [07 Temperature Adjustment] key.
5. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
binding.
7. Check that the glue applied has dried appropri-
ately.
8. To adjust the dryness of the glue, press the
[SERVICE] key.
9. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Press the [NEXT] or the [Back] key to select the
option of which the temperature is set.
The following options are provided.
Melt Tank - Top
Melt Tank - Mid
Melt Tank - Low
Pasting Roller
2 491
H. Sub Compile CD width adjustment I. Clamp CD width adjustment

Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when
aligning in the main scan direction. aligning in the main scanning direction.
/1050e/1050eP

Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
screen. screen.
Press the [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] key Press the [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] key
on the sub menu. on the sub menu.
4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu screen" 4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [08 Sub Compile CD Width Adjust- Press the [09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment]
ment] key. key.
5. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen" 5. "Clamp CD Width Adj. screen"
Press [Next] or [Back] key to select the paper Press [Next] or [Back] key to select the paper size
size from the following options. from the following options.
All Size All Size
8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11
A4 A4
B5 B5
A5 A5
5.5 x 8.5 5.5 x 8.5
16K 16K
A4W A4W
B5W B5W
A5W A5W
8.5 x 11W 8.5 x 11W
5.5 x 8.5 W 5.5 x 8.5 W
Special Special
Note Note
• Above paper sizes are book (the inside • Above paper sizes are book (the inside
pages) finished sizes. pages) finished sizes.
6. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen" 6. "Clamp CD Width Adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press Enter a value through the numeric keys and press
the [Set] key. the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-20 (wider) to +20 (narrower) • Setting range:-20 (wider) to +20 (narrower)
1 step = 0.1mm 1 step = 0.1mm
7. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, 7. Create multiple books in normal copy mode,
and check the alignment of the second and and check the alignment of the second and
later book. Change set value set in Step 5 until later book. Change set value set in Step 5 until
an properly aligned book is created. an properly aligned book is created.
492 2

J. Cover up/down CD width adjustment K. Clamp FD position adjustment
Adjusts the positional relation in the main scan direc- Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when
tion between the cover paper and the inside pages. aligning in the sub scan direction.
1050e/1050eP

Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
screen. screen.
Press the [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] key Press the [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] key
on the sub menu. on the sub menu.
4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu 4. "Perfect Binder adjustment mode menu
screen" screen"
Press the [10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Press the [11 Clamp FD Position Adjustment]
Adjustment] key. key.
5. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. screen" 5. "Clamp FD Position Adj. screen"
Press the [Next] and [Back] key to select PB Press [Next] or [Back] key to select the paper
Tray or Main Tray on the main body. size from the following options.
6. Press the [COPY] key. All Size
7. Select the paper type and press the start but- 8.5 x 11
ton to make test prints and carry out perfect A4
binding. B5
A5
8. Check if the relation between the main-scan-
5.5 x 8.5
ning position of the cover and that of the inside
16K
pages are appropriate.
A4W
9. To adjust the relation of their main-scanning
B5W
positions, press the [SERVICE] key.
A5W
10. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. screen" 8.5 x 11W
Enter a value through the numeric keys and 5.5 x 8.5 W
press the [Set] key. Special
• Setting range:-20 (wider) to +20 (narrower)
1 step = 0.1mm Note
11. Repeat the steps 5 to 10 until an appropriate • Above paper sizes are book (the inside
value is obtained. pages) finished sizes.
binding.
8. Check if the sub-scanning direction of all the
inside pages are properly aligned.
9. To adjust the alignment width in sub-scanning
direction of the inside pages, press the [SERV-
ICE] key.
2 493
10. "Clamp FD Position Adj. screen"

/1050e/1050eP
• Setting range:-20 (wider) to +20 (narrower)

1 step = 0.1mm
value is obtained.
Note
• If the setting is too wide, pages are mis-
placed in sub-scanning direction.
• If the setting is too narrow, mark of the FD
alignment plate may appear.
494 2

10.13.8 Recall standard data 10.14 Machine manager setting
Reset various setting values of the finisher adjustment
to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
Important
1050e/1050eP
• The use of the security strengthen mode in
NOTE
the machine manager setting in the utility
• The stacker adjustments cannot recall.
mode is limited only when the manager
authentication is set to "Authentication On."
A. Procedure

10.14.1 Manager authentication
2. "Service mode menu screen" To strengthen security of the machine manager set-
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. ting of the utility mode, configure the setting so that a
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the password is required to enter the machine manager
screen. setting.
Press the [07 Recall Standard Data] key on the
sub menu. (1) Procedure
4. "Recall Standard Data (Finisher adj.) screen"
Pressing [Factory Initial Data] or [Installation Ini-
tial Data] displays "Standard data is returning." 2. "Service mode menu screen"
When completed, the data returns with "Stand- Press the [12 Machine Manager Setting] key.
ard data has returned" displayed. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen.
Note Press the [01 Manager Authentication] key.
• Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the 4. "Manager Authentication Setting screen"
factory initial data. Press the [Authentication On] key and press the
• Selecting [Installation Initial Data] recalls [OK] key to confirm.
the adjustment values stored when code 5. To disable the authentication setting, press the
"90-00" of the I/O check mode was con- [Cancel] key or [Authentication Off] key.
ducted.
495
10.14.2 Machine manager password 10.15 CE Setting

Configure a password to enter the machine manager
setting of the utility mode.
Important
/1050e/1050eP
The machine manager password can also be set in

• The use of the security strengthen mode in
the machine manager setting of the utility mode.
the machine manager setting in the utility
mode is limited only when the CE authentica-
NOTE
tion setting is set to "Authentication On."
• The selection of the [Machine Manager Pass-
word] key is limited only when the [Manager
Authentication] is set to "Authentication On." 10.15.1 CE authentication
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others To strengthen security of the service mode, configure
such as your name, birthday. the setting so that a password is required to enter the
service mode.
(1) Procedure
(1) Procedure
2. "Service mode menu screen" 1. Enter the service mode.
Press the [12 Machine Manager Setting] key. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Press the [13 CE Setting] key.
screen. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
Press the [02 Machine Manager Password] key. screen.
4. "Machine Manager Password setting screen" Press the [01 CE Authentication Setting] key.
Enter an 8-digit password with alphanumeric 4. "CE Authentication Setting screen"
keys. Press the [Authentication On] key and press the
Default is "00000000." [OK] key to confirm.
5. Press the [OK] key to register data. 5. To disable the authentication setting, press the
Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you [Cancel] key or [Authentication Off] key.
entered.
496

10.15.2 CE password setting 10.16 IP HDD format
Configure a password to enter the service mode.
Format the hard disk /2 (HDD2) on the print controller.
1050e/1050eP
NOTE Formatting enables you to secure space/delete inter-
• The selection of the [CE Password Setting] nal data.
key is limited only when the CE authentica-
tion setting is set to "Authentication On." (1) Procedure
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others
such as your name, birthday.
• CE should not inform other people of the 2. "Service mode menu screen"
password. Press the [14 IP HDD Format] key.
(1) Procedure screen.
Press the [01 IP HDD Format] key on the sub
1. Enter the service mode. menu.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 4. "IP HDD Format screen"
Press the [13 CE Setting] key. HDD format includes the following five items.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the [ALL]
screen. [Document]
Press the [02 CE Password Setting] key. [Parameter]
4. "CE Password Setting screen" [Font]
Enter an 8-digit password with alphanumeric [Spool]
keys. 5. Press the item you want to format.
Default is "92729272." 6. "Format confirmation screen"
5. Press the [OK] key to register data. The message "Execute Format Yes/No?"
Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you appears.
entered. Press the [Yes] key.
(2) Purpose of each item

• [ALL]
Formats all areas of the hard disk.
This is equal to performing the following four
operations at once. Conduct this on such occa-
sions as replacing the hard disk /2 (HDD2).
• [Document]
Formats the document storage area. Conduct
this when deleting the Scan to HDD job.
• [Parameter]
Formats the storage area for the controller set-
ting information.
Conduct this when deleting the whole setting
information on the print controller (the network
setting and default settings of each port, etc).
NOTE
• Be sure to output the settings information list
before formatting parameters.
497
• [Font]
Formats the font data storage area.
Conduct this when deleting downloaded exter-
/1050e/1050eP
nal font data.
NOTE
• By formatting, all downloaded external fonts
are deleted.
• [Spool]
Formats the spool area.
There is no need to format this area alone.
498
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT

11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
11.1 Paper feed section
1050e/1050eP
11.1.1 Tray centering adjustment
This adjustment is made when the mis-centering of paper varies each paper supplied from the trays /1 and /2.
The mis-centering is automatically adjusted in the image processing unit, and this adjustment is made only when
a mis-centering exceeding the range of auto correction (±5 mm) occurs.
1. Disable (data=1) the Software DIPSW12-3 "Printer

[2]
mis-centering correction. (See P.429).
2. Perform copying/printing without automatic cor-
rection to check the mis-centering of image.
3. Pull out the paper feed tray.
4. If any paper remaining, remove it.
5. If the paper guide [1] is at the small size position,
stretch the guide.
6. Loosen 2 screws [2].
7. Move the paper guide [1]. According to the mis-
centering you checked in step 2, adjust the center
position using the marking line [3].
[1] [1] [3] 8. Tighten 2 screws [2].
9. Insert a paper and set the tray.
10. Make a copy/print and check to see if the mis-
centering is within the standard value (±2 mm).
11. When not up to the standard value, repeat the
steps 3 to 10.
12. Enable (data=0) the Software DIPSW12-3 "Printer
mis-centering correction."
1050fs3028c
499
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
11.1.2 Separation pressure adjustment

Perform the separation pressure adjustment when the no feed (a paper is conveyed to the paper feed roller sec-
tion but stops there) or the double feed occurs at the paper feed.
/1050e/1050eP
Note
• Affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed is likely in the low temper-
ature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment).
• Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom.

2. Change the position of the spring adjustment
lever [1].
Note
• The separation pressure is strengthened
when the lever is moved to the direction [2]
and is weakened when the lever is moved to
the direction [3].
Weak: a double feed jam is improved.
[2] [1] [3] Strong: a no feed jam is improved.
Reference
• The spring load changes 10% as the spring is
moved one step.
3. Set the tray to perform copying/printing. Check

whether the no feed or the double feed occurs or
not.
4. In case either jam occurs, repeat steps 1 to 3.
1050fs3029c
500

11.1.3 Pick-up roller load adjustment
In case a no feed jam occurs frequently, perform the pick-up roller load adjustment.
1050e/1050eP
[2] [1]
2. In the pick-up roller section [1], put paper feed
assist plate [3] on the paper feed assist plate
holder [2], and fix them with accompanying screw
(M3 x 8 mm) [4].
3. Set the tray.
4. Perform copying/printing to check whether the no
feed or the double feed occurs or not.
Note
• The maximum number of the paper feed
assist plates that can be attached is 4 plates.
For the number of plates to be attached, see
[4] [3] [4] chapter V "5. Paper setting."
• The paper feed assist plate is approx. 10g
each.
1050fs3030c
501
11.1.4 Pick-up roller height adjustment

Perform this adjustment when the following situations occurred.
• A no feed jam is not improved by the pick-up roller load adjustment
/1050e/1050eP
• A no feed jam in which a thick paper is stuck on the entrance guide (a metallic guide plate near the separa-
tion roller)
• A double feed jam is not improved by the separation pressure adjustment
Note
• On performing the pick-up roller height adjustment, the paper feed pick-up amount is changed. Be
sure to confirm the paper feed pick-up amount in the paper feed pick-up amount adjustment.
(See P.505)

[2] [3] [1]
1050fs3031c
502

5. Set the tray. Confirm that the paper lift finished its
[1]
elevation to the top by hearing the sound of the
paper lift motor. Pull out the tray again.
1050e/1050eP
6. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper feed
cover [2].
[2] 1050fs3032c
7. Check whether the actuator [1] of the pick-up

[1] [3] [2]
roller section matches with the center [3] position
of the upper limit sensor /1 (PS6), /2 (PS12) [2].
8. Remove the pick-up roller section [4]. (See P.86)
[4]
1050fs3033c
503
9. Record a mark for the height of the sensor placing

[2] [3] [1] plate.
10. Remove 2 screws [3], and place them temporarily
/1050e/1050eP
in the slotted hole on the upper limit sensor plac-

ing plate [1].
11. Adjust the height of the sensor placing plate [1],
and fix it with the screws [3].
Note
• Place the upper limit sensor placing plate [1]
horizontally.
[4] [1]
Adjustment standard
• Lifting the upper limit sensor position lowers
the height of the pick-up roller [5]. (The differ-
ence of elevation [7] between the paper feed
roller [6] and the pick-up roller [5] becomes
larger.)
• Lowering the upper limit sensor position lifts
the height of the pick-up roller [5]. (The differ-
ence of elevation [7] between the paper feed
[3] roller [6] and the pick-up roller [5] becomes
[5] [6] smaller.)
• In case a no feed occurred, lower the upper
limit sensor.
• In case a double feed occurred, lift the upper
limit sensor.
[7]
12. Place the pick-up roller section, and replace the
stopper of step 4 to the original position.
Note
1050fs3034c
• If you set the tray without placing the pick-up
roller, the paper lift does not stop at the upper
limit, thus damaging the tray. Be sure to place
the roller.
13. Insert a paper, and set the tray.

14. Perform copying/printing to confirm that the no
feed or jam do not occur. In case they are not
improved, repeat steps 7 to 14.
15. Confirm the paper feed pick-up amount.
(See P.505)
steps in reverse.
Note
• After the adjustment, be sure to replace the
stopper of the release lever to the original
position.
504

11.1.5 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment
Perform the paper feed pick-up amount adjustment as you have done the pick-up roller height adjustment.
1050e/1050eP
[2] [3] [1]
1050fs3035c
[1]
6. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper feed
cover [2].
[2] 1050fs3036c
505
7. Pull the plunger [2] of the pick-up solenoid [1] to

[1] [2]
measure the gap "A" between the pick-up roller
[3] and the paper lift plate [4] with the gap gauge.
/1050e/1050eP
Standard value A = 0.1 to 1.5 mm

If it is not within the standard value, follow step 8
and after.
8. Loosen the screw [5].
Note
• Before loosening the screw [5], record the
position of the pick-up solenoid [1] with the
marking line [6].
9. With the plunger [2] pulled, adjust the position of

[5] [3] [6] [4] the pick-up solenoid [1] so that the standard value
can be obtained for the gap A between the pick-
up roller [3] and the paper lift plate [4].
10. Tighten the screw [5] to fix the pick-up solenoid
[1].
11. Replace the stopper of step 4 to the original posi-
A
tion.
feed does not occur.
1050fs3037c
steps in reverse.
Note
position.
506

11.1.6 Paper lift plate skew adjustment
Perform the paper lift plate skew adjustment after replacing a lift wire or when the paper lift plate is skewed.
1050e/1050eP
[2] [3] [1]
1050fs3038c
[1] [2]
6. Remove 2 screws [2] of the stopper of the rails [1]
on the right and left side. Pull out the tray.
1050fs3039c
507
7. Remove 2 screws (with washers) on the right and

[1]
left side[1] and 2 screws on the upper side [2].
/1050e/1050eP
Note
• Removing the screws [1] and [2] causes the
tray front cover [3] to fall. Support the cover
not to drop.
8. Remove the connector [4] to remove the tray front

cover [3].
[1]
Note
• Be sure to connect the connector as you
place it. Otherwise, all trays in the main body
become unable to be pulled out.
[2]
[3]
[4]
1050fs3040c
508

9. Lift up the pick-up roller [1].
[3] [4]
10. In case the paper guide [2] is open, close it to the
smallest-size position.
1050e/1050eP
11. Remove the screw [3], and place them temporarily
in the slotted screw hole [4].
12. While holding the pulley placing plate being
placed with the screw [5], loosen the screw [5] to
adjust the skewed paper lift plate [7] with the
marking line [6].
13. Confirm that the paper lift plate is horizontal, and
fix the screw [5] and [8].
14. Pull down the pick-up roller [1].
15. Place the tray front cover.
jam occurs, and that papers are properly fed.
steps in reverse.
[5] [7] [1] [6] [8]

Note
position.
[2] 1050fs3041c
509
11.2 REGISTRATION SECTION

11.2.1 Registration roller paper skew adjustment
/1050e/1050eP
Perform this adjustment when there is skew in the registration section.
1. Remove the screw [1] and then make sure the

graduation of the screw [1].
[1] 2. Loosen 3 screws [2].
3. Move the registration section [3] to the arrow on
the basis of the graduation.
4. Tighten the screw [1] and screws [2].
[2] 5. Perform copy/printing to check the paper skew.
6. In case it is not improved, repeat steps 1 to 5.
[3]
[2] 1050fs3070c
510 1

11.3 ADU section
11.3.1 Pre-transfer roller nip pressure adjustment
1050e/1050eP
This adjustment enables you to up/down the pre-transfer roller nip pressure.
Perform this adjustment when a transfer jitter occurred. For more information on how to perform this adjust-
ment, see "12.4 Transfer jitter adjustment".
A. Nip pressure up adjustment procedure

1. Pull out the ADU. (See P.36)
2. Remove the ADU cover /Lt, /Rt. (See P.36)
3. Twist counterclockwise the conveyance roller /T
axis [1] until the axis stopper [2] is locked.
Note
• To restore the previous nip pressure, twist
clockwise the conveyance roller /T axis until
the axis stopper is locked.

steps in reverse.
[2] [1] 1050fs3025c
1 511
B. Nip pressure down adjustment procedure

1. Pull out the ADU.
[5] [4] [3] [6]
(See P.112)
/1050e/1050eP
2. Remove the ADU cover /Lt, /Rt.

(See P.117)
(See P.118)
4. Twist clockwise the conveyance roller /T axis [1] to
make the nip pressure standard.
(See P.511)
5. Remove 2 springs /Fr [2], /Rr [3] from the hook
hole /Up [4], /Lw [5]. (By removing the spring, pre-
transfer roller's own weight becomes the only nip
pressure.)
Note
[1] [7]
• To restore the standard nip pressure, place
the spring /Fr [2], /Rr [3].
• Removing/placing the spring with the nip
pressure up tends to stretch the spring. Thus,
remove/place the spring with the standard nip
pressure. If tension of the spring /Fr and /Rr
differs, a transfer misalignment occurs. When
restoring the standard nip pressure, in case
the spring was stretched, do not use it and
replace it with a new one.
• In case the spring /Fr [2], /Rr [3] are not easily
removed from the hook hole /Lw [5], remove it
from the hook hole /Up [4] first. Then, while
holding the spring not to drop, twist counter-
clockwise (nip pressure up) the conveyance
roller /T axis [1] and rotate the cam [6] to
make a gap, thus making it easy to remove
the spring.
• Be careful not to drop the spring. Put a paper
over the ADU section [7] so that the spring
does not fall inside the machine.

steps in reverse.
[4]
[2] [6] [5] 1050fs3058c
512
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 12. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD

12. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD 12.2.1 The front and back registration (printer)
A. Procedure
12.1 Before using the adjustment 1. Adjust the paper skew on both side.
1050e/1050eP
for POD With the registration roller paper skew adjust-
ment in the mechanical adjustment, adjust the
This section describes how to make adjustments to
skew of the sub scan direction on both side to
improve image quality (The front and back registra-
be parallel to each other.
tion, image density, transfer jitter) and paper feeding
so as to satisfy the needs of customers (especially
POD customers) who demand even higher quality of
image and feeding than the factory settings.
12.2 The front and back registra-

tion
Align image printing position on the front side and
back side.
Misalignment of image printing position occurs for the
following reasons.
• The image leading edge on the front and back side
are different. Thus, in case leading edge timings
are misaligned, image positions on the front and
back side are misaligned.
• Even the standard size papers are not cut off
according to the standard size.
• A paper that passes the fusing section becomes
smaller because of moisture evaporation of the
paper due to heat. In duplex printing, the front side
[1]
passes the fusing section twice and the back side
passes once, thus image on the front side [2] 1050fs3350c
becomes smaller than the back side. [1] Front [2] Back
• The shrinkage ratio in passing the fusing section is
different depending on the paper type, paper
brand, temperature/humidity of a paper storage
location. To adjust misalignment due to these fac-
tors, use the front and back adjustment in the user
mode, selecting [MACHINE] - [Paper Set] - [Regis-
ter Type/Weight]. To adjust misalignment due to
individual difference of each tray, select the tray
you want to adjust in the user mode, selecting
[MACHINE] - [Paper Set] - [Tray Setting]. Then,
select [Change] - [Both Sides Adj.] to make an
adjustment.
1 513
12. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
2. Adjust distortion in the main scan direction on both sides. 3. Use the service mode to adjust various image
Remove the photo conductor cover and open the timing in the front side of printer system.
intermediate toner hopper. Mark current position of
/1050e/1050eP
the positioning plate [1] as a reference point with Note

something like a pencil. Loosen 2 screws [2] to move • With the [Printer Centering Adjustment] in
the positioning plate [1] side to side and move the the service mode, there is no adjustment
shaft [3] that positions the write unit, thus adjusting for individual tray. In case you need to
the distortion and making the lines in the main scan adjust individual tray, select the user mode,
direction parallel on both sides. selecting [MACHINE] - [Paper Set] - [Tray
When distortion is found as shown in the drawing Setting]. Then, select [Change] - [Both
below, move the positioning plate to the right. Sides Adj.] to make adjustment with the
Image Shift function.
Reference 4. Adjust the leading edge timing of the back side.
• Attaching the long screw M4 to the shaft [3] Use [Printer Restart Timing Adjust-
makes the adjustments easy. ment<SIDE2>] in the service mode. Use the
cross on the figure A to align the leading edge
[3] [2] timing of the back side to that of the front side.
[1]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3043c
[1] Front [2] Back
[4]
[5]
1050fs3042c
[4] Front [5] Back
514

5. Align the magnification of the back side to the 6. Adjust the centering of the back side.
front side. At the user mode, select the tray you want to
Use [Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2>] adjust from [MACHINE] - [Paper Set] - [Tray
1050e/1050eP
and [Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2>] to Setting]. Then, select [Change] - [Both Sides
align magnification of the back side to the front Adj.] to make adjustment. Use the Image Shift
side. function to align the centering of the back side
on the figure A to the front side.
Note
• With the [Printer Centering Adjustment] in
the service mode, there is no adjustment
for individual tray.
• Since a test pattern cannot be output in the
user mode, output an image from a PC so
you can confirm the image centering or use
[Test Pattern Output Mode] in Service
mode.
• The [Tray Setting] you set in step 5 is an
individual adjustment, in which the updated
settings are not applied to the registered
paper type. Thus, to change the registered
paper type, select the paper name key you
want to adjust in [MACHINE] - [Paper Set] -
[1] [Register Type/Weight]. Make the adjust-
[2] ment with the Image Shift function of [Both
1050fs3044c
Sides Adj.].
[1] Front [2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3045c
[1] Front [2] Back
515
12.2.2 The front and back registration (scan- 5. Adjust the original skew.
ner) Remove the original stopper plate /Rr, and
A. Procedure mark the current position of the adjustment
/1050e/1050eP
plate [1] with something like a pencil. Loosen

1. Set a test chart on the original glass. Make the
the screw [2] to move the adjustment plate [1]
sub scan magnification with [Scanner Drum
up and down, thus adjusting the mounting
Clock Adjustment] in the service mode.
position of the original stopper plate /Rr.
2. Set a test chart on the original glass. Adjust dis-
tortion with [Scanner (Orig. Glass) warp
[1] [2]
adj.(Main)] and [Scanner (Orig.Glass) warp adj.
(Deputy)] in the service mode.
3. Align the leading edge timing of both sides.
Use [Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment] in the
service mode. Use the cross on the figure A to
align the leading edge timing of both sides.
[1]
[2] 1050fs3046c
[1] Front [2] Back

4. Align the centering of both sides.
Use [Scanner Centering Adjustment] in the
service mode to align the centering of both
sides on the figure A.
[1]
[2] [1]
1050fs3047c
[2] 1050fs3048c
[1] Front [2] Back
[1] Front [2] Back
516

6. Perform steps 3 and 4 to adjust the misalign- 4. Align the centering of both sides.
ments of timing and centering caused by the Use [ADF centering adj.(SIDE2)] in the service
original skew adjustment and the magnification mode to align the centering of the back side on
1050e/1050eP
adjustment. the figure A to the front side.
12.2.3 The front and back registration (ADF)

A
A. Procedure
1. Set an adjustment chart on the ADF. Make the

sub scan magnification, leading edge timing
and centering adjustment on the front side with
[Scanner(ADF) drum clock adj.], [ADF restart
timing adj.(SIDE1)] and [ADF centering
adj.(SIDE1)] in the service mode.
2. Set the "adjustment chart" on the ADF. Adjust a
distortion with [Scanner(ADF) warp adj.(Main)]
[1]
and [Scanner(ADF) warp adj.(Deputy)] in the
service mode. [2] 1050fs3050c
3. Align the leading edge timing of both sides. [1] Front [2] Back
Use [ADF restart timing adjustment(SIDE2)] in 5. Adjust the ADF paper skew.
the service mode. Use the cross on the figure A With the ADF paper skew adjustment in the
to align the leading edge timing of the back mechanical adjustment, adjust the skew on the
side to the front side. front and back side.
[1]
[2] 1050fs3049c
[1] Front [2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3051c
[1] Front [2] Back
517
6. Perform steps 3 and 4 to adjust the misalign- 3. Press the name key of paper you want to
ments of timing and centering caused by the change, or press [Next] key to register paper
ADF paper skew adjustment. newly.
/1050e/1050eP
12.2.4 The front and back registration by user

(by paper brand)
Even when conducting the front and back registration
in 12.2.1 to 12.2.3, adjustments may be required
depending on the type and brand of paper to be
used.
NOTE
• Check to see if the front and back registra-
tions in 12.2.1 to 12.2.3 are completed.
A. Procedure 4. Enter the type of paper, the name of paper, the

weight, the color paper and the punch hole. For
1. From "MACHINE screen" in the user mode, the type of paper and the weight, see "19.
press the [Paper Set] key. PAPER SETTING"."
2. Press the [Register Type/Weight] key. 5. Press the [Both Sides Adj.] key, and adjust the
front and back registration.
518

12.2.5 The front and back registration by user 3. Press the tray key you want to adjust, and then
(for fine adjustments) press the [Change] key.
Even when conducting the adjustments for brand of
1050e/1050eP
paper as described in 12.2.4, an adjustment may be
required depending on the number of tray in which
paper is fed, the storage condition (temperature and
humidity) of paper and the temperature and humidity
in the room, etc.
This adjustment describes the method for fine adjust-
ment of each tray to the front and back adjustment of
the paper brand setting described in 12.2.4.
NOTE
• Check to see if the front and back registra-
tions in 12.2.1 to 12.2.4 are completed.
4. Press the [Both Sides Adj.] key.
1. From "MACHINE screen" in the user mode,

press the [Paper Set] key.
2. Press the [Tray Setting] key.
2 519
5. Register the front and back of the paper. 12.3 Image density adjustment
There are two modes for the registration, auto-
matic (adjustment) and manual (adjustment). 12.3.1 Darken image density
/1050e/1050eP
• Manual registration (adjustment) Print industry customers may demand image settings
with dark image density in the shadow area such as
the offset printing.
This section describes how to adjust the shadow
area (max. density) to make its image density darker.
If the adjustment to make image density darker is not
performed properly, toner spillage or image back-
ground occurs. By this procedure, the density can be
adjusted more safely, minimizing occurrences of
these problems. However, perform this adjustment
only when necessary.
Related adjustments are as follows.
• Utility mode
1) Image density selection
This setting changes the charger voltage and the
• Automatic registration (adjustment)
developing bias.
Press [Chart Adjustment] to execute the auto-
• Service mode
matic registration (adjustment).
1) DIPSW23-2, 3, 4 toner density of developer
This setting changes the developing roller rota-
tion and toner density, thus changing the toner
density of developer without changing image
density.
2) DIPSW27-2, 3 image density selection (toner con-
trol patch density)
This setting changes the developing bias for cre-
ating the toner control patch formed on the drum
to determine toner density, thus changing toner
density of developer to change image density.
A. Procedure
6. When adjusting another tray, repeat the steps 3
to 5. 1. With the image density selection of the density
setting in the utility mode, set Darker [+1].
2. In the test pattern output mode, output the test
pattern No.11 to check image density.
3. When image density is insufficient, set the
image density selection "approx. 0.5% up" in
the DIPSW27-2, 3.
4. With the DIPSW23-2, 3, 4 toner density of
developer, set "approx. 0.5% down" or
"approx. 1.0% down" to prevent from image
background and toner spillage.
520 2

5. Output 500 prints of test pattern No.11 in the A. Procedure
test pattern output mode.
1. With the image density selection of the density
setting in the utility mode, set Lighter [-1].
1050e/1050eP
Note
2. Output test pattern No.11 in the test pattern
• The settings in steps 3 and 4 change the
output mode to confirm image density.
toner density of developer. Thus, image
density does not change without making 3. When image density is insufficient, repeat steps
prints. 1 and 2 until "-5."
6. Confirm image density. 4. When image density is insufficient, set as

"lighter" in the DIPSW5-2, 3.
7. When image density is insufficient, set the
image density selection "approx. 1.0% up" in 5. Output test pattern No.11 in the test pattern
DIPSW27-2, 3. output mode to confirm image density.
8. With DIPSW23-2, 3, 4 toner density of devel- 6. When image density is insufficient, set as "light-
est" in the DIPSW5-2, 3.
oper, set "approx. 1.5% down."
9. Output 500 prints of the test pattern No.11 in 7. Output test pattern No.11 in the test pattern
output mode to confirm image density.
the test pattern output mode.
10. Confirm image density.
12.3.2 Lighten image density

Such printing materials as books use lighter letters so
as to reduce readers' eyestrain. Thus, print industry
customers may demand light image settings.
This section describes how to lighten image density
of the shadow section (max. density) without chang-
ing image density of the highlight section.
If the adjustment to make image density lighter is not
performed properly, white spots in the shadow sec-
tion occurs. By this procedure, the density can be
adjusted more safely, minimizing occurrences of
problems. However, perform this adjustment only
when necessary.
Related adjustments are as follows.
• Utility mode
1) Image density selection
This setting changes the charger voltage and the
developing bias.
• Service mode
1) DIPSW5-2, 3 image density selection (laser PWM) for copier
This setting changes the image writing laser
PWM.
521
12.4 Transfer jitter adjustment B. Cause and tendency of occurrence

(1) 250 mm from the trailing edge
Describes how to adjust transfer jitter. 1) When the trailing edge of the paper passed
/1050e/1050eP
through the loop roller, the stiffness of the

A. Preparation: paper caused the loop created to try and
Adjustments differ depending on the position at revert.
which transfer jitter occurs. Thus, locate the position This may be found with paper weight 161 g/
where transfer jitter occurs. Measure with a scale. m2 or less. (Because less loop is created for
paper weight 162 g/m2 or more by paper
(1) Procedure loop control.)
1. Output No.9 of the "test pattern output mode"

with A3 paper.
1) When the line speed of the registration roller
is faster than that of the drum, paper is
Note
pushed out from the registration roller to
• Check to ensure the test pattern density is
the drum and a loop is formed between the
set to 255.
registration roller and the drum. Accord-
2. Confirm the position where transfer jitter ingly, the paper conveyance speed may
occurs. change when paper passes through the reg-
istration roller.
2) When the trailing edge of the paper passed
[1]
through the registration roller, the load
[2]
decreased and the transfer paper speed
[5]
became faster momentarily.
Possible with thick papers 200 g/m2 or
heavier.

1) Fluctuation of load when the paper entered
the fusing roller.
heavier
[3][4] 2) When paper gets into the fusing unit, the
1050fs3052c leading edge of paper hits against the
entrance guide plate and the paper does not
[1]: Approx. 250 mm from the trailing edge
enter smoothly. Possible with paper weight
80 g/m2 or less.
[4]: Approx. 138 to 103 mm from the trailing edge
(4) 138 to 103 mm from the trailing edge
[5] Approx. 40 mm from the trailing edge
1) When paper gets into the fusing unit, the
Transfer jitter occurs randomly other than the
leading edge of paper hits against the
above
entrance guide plate, and the resulting
shock creates a loop between the drum and
the pre-transfer roller. The stiffness of paper
NOTE
causes the loop created to try and revert,
• The position where transfer jitter occurs dif-
thus resulting in transfer jitter of band
fers depending on the paper type, paper
shape.
weight or paper conveyance behavior.
Possible with paper weight around 160 g/m2
at a low humidity.
522

(5) 40 mm from the trailing edge (3) Approx. 138 mm from the trailing edge
1) When the trailing edge of the paper passed
1. Strengthen the nip pressure of the pre-transfer
through the pre-transfer roller, the load
roller. (See P.511)
1050e/1050eP
decreased and the paper speed became
faster momentarily.
Note
• If the nip pressure is strengthened it is pos-
heavier.
sible that transfer jitter 40 mm from the
trailing edge may occur. In this instance
(6) Random occurrence
select whichever image is best. (before
1) Transfer jitter that occurs when the leading
pressure increase or after)
edge of paper touches the conveyance sec-
• If transfer jitter occurs at around 140 mm
tion. Main causes are as follows.
from the trailing edge, it may be impossible
• Speed change of the conveyance belt itself
to determine if the jitter is caused by the
• Speed difference between the registration roller
registration roller (145 mm) or by the fusing
and the conveyance belt
unit (138 mm). In this instance cut 20 mm
• Rough paper movement while it passes through
off the trailing edge of an A3 sheet and
the conveyance belt
print a test pattern to the cut paper. If the
• Shock because of the paper leading edge touch-
position of the jitter changes in relation to
ing the conveyance belt
the leading edge the cause can be deter-
mined to be the registration roller.
C. Procedure
(1) Approx. 250 mm from the trailing edge 2. Remove 2 screws [2] to remove 2 suction cov-
ers [1] at the lower side of the conveyance belt
1. With the [Printer Regist Loop Adjustment] in the on both sides of the conveyance section so as
service mode, reduce loop amount. to improve the conveyance suction ability.
(2) Approx. 145 mm from the trailing edge

[2] [1]
1. Adjust the registration line speed. (See P.328))
2. Strengthen the nip pressure of the pre-transfer
roller. (See P.511)
Note
• If the nip pressure is strengthened it is pos-
sible that transfer jitter 40 mm from the
trailing edge may occur. In this instance
select whichever image is best. (before
registration roller (145 mm) or by the fusing [2] [1] 1050fs3053c

off the trailing edge of an A3 sheet and Note
print a test pattern to the cut paper. If the • If the transfer suction ability is increased it
position of the jitter changes in relation to is possible that transfer jitter may occur
the leading edge the cause can be deter- 145 mm from the trailing edge. Select
mined to be the registration roller. whichever image is best. (before adjust-
ment or after)
523
3. Reverse the paper set direction in the tray. Set (5) Approx. 40 mm from the trailing edge
paper so that the curling direction of paper
1. Remove 2 pressure springs of the pre-transfer
becomes concave on the conveyance section.
roller.
/1050e/1050eP
When the curling is convex, the leading edge of

(See P.511)
paper hits against the entrance guide plate and
this may be apt to cause a transfer jitter.
(6) Random occurrence

(4) Approx. 138 to 103 mm from the trailing
1. Remove the 2 suction covers provided under
edge
the conveyance belts on both sides of the con-
1. Strengthen the nip pressure of the pre-transfer veyance section.
roller. (See P.511)
Note
Note • If the transfer jitter is due to the speed dif-
• If the nip pressure is strengthened it is pos- ference between the registration roller and
sible that transfer jitter 40 mm from the the conveyance belt, the transfer jitter
trailing edge may occur. In this instance occurs more easily. Select whichever
select whichever image is best. (before image is best. (before adjustment or after)
registration roller (145 mm) or by the fusing
off the trailing edge of an A3 sheet and
print a test pattern to the cut paper. If the
position of the jitter changes in relation to
the leading edge the cause can be deter-
mined to be the registration roller.
2. Remove the 2 suction covers provided under
the conveyance belts on both sides of the con-
veyance section.
Note
• If the transfer suction ability is increased it
is possible that transfer jitter may occur
145 mm from the trailing edge. Select
whichever image is best. (before adjust-
ment or after)
3. Reverse the paper set direction in the tray. Set
paper so that the curling direction of paper
become concave on the conveyance section.
When the curling is convex, the leading edge of
paper hits against the entrance guide plate and
this may be apt to cause a transfer jitter.
524 1

12.5 Overlay printing adjustment A. Preparation
1. Make the following settings with the tray /4 in the
Overlay printing is to re-print the company name, the user mode.
1050e/1050eP
address, the logo, etc. on offset printed paper. • Set paper on which overlay printing has been
When performing overlay printing, take notice the fol- made.
lowing description. • Set the type of paper to [Coated B].
• Set the air assist setting to [On].
Reference:
• The surface of coated paper is applied with a coat- NOTE
ing agent and so it takes more time for the ink of • Registration of back and front sides must be
offset printing to dry. Therefore, to prevent block- checked every day before starting printing.
ing (back transfer), the entire surface of paper is
applied with powder. 2. Make the following settings in the service mode.
The powder drastically reduces the conveyance • Set software DIPSW26-4 to 1. (Sets tray /4 forced
forces of the pick-up roller and the paper feed separation clutch control to the operation at all times.)
roller, and this may be apt to cause a no feed jam • When performing overlay printing on both front
or a double feed jam. and back sides of paper weighing 91 g/m2 or
lighter, set the software DIPSW6-2 to "1". (this dis-
NOTE ables the transfer assist control.)
• Before overlay printing, be sure to take note • Set the DIPSW2-4/5 to "1". (sets the cleaning
of following. cycle of the charging corona to every 5,000 prints )
a) Be sure to install the PP-701 (urethane • When using paper other than coated paper for
roller) overlay printing, make the paper type setting to
b) We recommend use of RC-501 for the other than "coated B" and set the software DIPSW
overlay printing. corresponds to the selected paper tray to "1".
c) Apply as little powder as possible when tray 1: DIPSW39-0
offset printing. tray 2: DIPSW39-1
d) Get paper loosened sufficiently before tray 3: DIPSW39-2
setting it in the tray /4. tray 4: DIPSW39-3
e) Adjust paper condition with the same tray 5: DIPSW39-4
environments (temperature and humidity)
as those for the main body. When left in a NOTE
high humidity environment, paper strongly • When the above mentioned DIPSW is set to
adhere to each other making them unable "1", paper feed control will be the same as
to feed. that of [Coated paper B]. This improves the
endurance of the urethane roller, however,
• A paper centering error is likely to occur due double feed may occur at frequent intervals.
to contamination of the centering sensor • The above mentioned DIPSW will not work
(PS54) with powder. Clean the sensor if the when [Coated paper A] or [Paper weight 92 g/
error occurs or before starting overlay print- m2] or more is selected for the paper setting.
ing.
• Registration of paper must be checked every 3. Install the paper feed assist plate.
30,000 prints. (See "5.3 Adjusting the pick-up roller pressure"
in the Field Service for the PF-701.)
NOTE
• The number of paper feed assist plates varies
according to the paper weight.
130 g/m2 or less → None
131 g/m2 or more → 4 pcs.
2 525
B. Air assist adjustment 4. Check the measurement "a" between the

Check to see if the height of the air supply opening of center position [1] (The center is 4.5 mm from
the paper feed assist fan and the upper surface of the upper edge [2].) of the air supply openings
/1050e/1050eP
paper are appropriate. Otherwise air assist is not con- of the paper feed assist fan /Fr and /Rr and the
ducted properly and this may result in a jam occur- upper surface of paper [3].
rence. • Standard value a: within 4.5 ± 2.5 mm
(1) Procedure When the value is not within the standard, con-
duct step 7 and succeeding steps.
1. Pull out tray /4 and set about 10 sheets of
coated paper that have been printed.
2. Push in the release lever [1], insert the screw [2]
into the hole [3] to fix the release lever, and then
set the tray /4.
[2]
[1] [2]
[3]
[3]
[1] 1050fs3059c
1050fs3067c 5. Release the release lever that was fixed at step

2 and bring down the paper lift plate.
3. After stop sound of the paper lift motor opera-
6. Pull out tray /4 and load it fully with coated
tion (when the paper lift plate gets to the upper
paper that has been printed, and perform steps
limit position), pull out tray /4 again.
2 to 5.
7. Conduct the following adjustments according
to the curling condition of paper.
1) When there is no paper curling with no paper

slant.
Conduct "Pick-up roller height adjustment."
(See "5.2 Adjusting the pick-up roller height" in
the Field service for the PF-701.)
526

2) If there is slant found due to paper curling: 3) When there is a convex curling found with
paper:
1050e/1050eP
1050fs3060c
Put the underlays (included in the PP package) 1050fs3062c
[1] under the lower side of the stacked paper.

Put the underlays (included in the PP package)
Note [1] under the both sides of the stacked paper.
• To prevent air from blowing upon the pad
when the remaining paper gets low, place Note
the pad to the right side of the air supply • To prevent air from blowing upon the pad
opening position [2]. when the remaining paper gets low, place
the pad to the right side of the air supply
[2] [1] opening position [2].
[2] [1]
1050fs3351c
1050fs3352c
2 527
4) When there is a concave curling found with 9. Remove the PF right cover.
paper: (See chapter II "2.2.1 A. Removal/reinstallation of the
right cover" in the Field service for the PF-701.)
/1050e/1050eP
10. Select the code 42-21 of the service mode - I/

O check and press the Start button to operate
the paper feed assist fan.
11. After checking the paper separation condition
[1] from the right side of the PF, press the Stop
button to complete the I/O check.
12. Conduct the respective operations depending
on the condition of separation.
a. Air is blown upon more than 10 sheets of
paper and separate a sheet each.
b. Paper separation is not made for one sheet each, but 10
or more sheets of paper are being floated by air.
c. The number of sheets of paper that are being
1050fs3064c floated by air is less than 4 or 5.
d. No paper is floated
Put the underlays (included in the PP package)
[1] under the center part of the stacked paper.
Note
• To prevent air from blowing upon the pad
when the remaining paper gets low, place [1]
the pad to the right side of the air supply
opening position [2], hitting it against the
paper rear guide plate [3].
In the case of a concave curling, it is nor-
mally possible to adjust curling by placing a
pad at the center position 40 mm away
from the front and rear paper guides.
[2] [1]
1050fs3066c
In the cases of "a" and "b," conduct step 12

and succeeding steps.
In the cases of "c" and "d," repeat step 1 to
1050fs3353c step 11.
8. After adjustment, repeat step 1 to step 6 to

check again the paper height at the air supply
opening section.
528 2

13. Conduct a test print to check to see if a jam
occurs. [2]
When a jam occurs, conduct "C. Paper feed
1050e/1050eP
pressure adjustment."
steps in reverse.
Note
• Be sure to release the release lever that
has been fixed at the step 2.
C. Paper feed pressure adjustment [5] [1] [6]

Despite the paper separation being made correctly by
air from the paper feed assist fan, when a paper jam
occurs, conduct the following adjustments.
(1) Procedure
1. Conduct the respective operations depending

on the condition of jam.
• J14-01 (Paper is not conveyed to the separa-

tion roller due to slipping of pick-up roller.)
Add paper feed assist plates to raise pressure
on the pick-up roller. (See "5.3 Adjusting the [3] [4]
pick-up roller pressure" in PF-701 Field Serv- 1050fs3354c
ice.)
• J14-01 with thick paper (Paper is not conveyed
to the separation roller due to paper being una-
Note
ble to get over the entrance guide plate.)
• 4 sheets of paper feed assist plate are nor-
Up the pick-up roller height. (Down the sensor
mally used. However, when a no feed con-
position. 2 mm as a tentative)
dition recurs, it is possible to use up to 8
sheets.
PF-701 Field Service.)
• J14-01 (paper bumps against the both • J14-01 (Jam with a crushed leading edge of
sides [2] of the entrance guide plate [1] and paper)
cannot go over the entrance guide plate Increase the separation pressure.
[1].) Put the underlays (included in the PP (See "5.4 Adjusting the separation pressure" in
package) [3] on the bottom of the tray PF-701 Field Service.)
locating them directory below [4] the both • J14-02 (No feed occurs before the pre-registra-
edges [2] of the entrance guide plate [1]. tion roller.)
Increase the separation pressure.
• Be sure to set the underlays [3] so that (See "5.4 Adjusting the separation pressure" in
those top edges are not contacted with the PF-701 Field Service.)
surface [5] of the tray, otherwise they may
• J17-02 (Double feed)
interfere with the paper lift plate operation.
Down the pick-up roller height. (Up the sensor
• Put the underlays [3] avoiding the paper
position. 2 mm as a tentative)
empty sensor [6].
the Field Service for the PF-701.)
2 529
12.6 User setting of each paper 12.7 Settings for feeding carbon-
brand less paper
/1050e/1050eP
For the user setting method for paper which is com- When using carbonless paper (thin paper), take the
monly used in the POD market, see "19. PAPER SET- following measures.
TING", by paper brand.
This document shows the optimum set values for Reference
paper brands tested by KMBT. • The carbonless paper adheres to the conveyance
However, it does not assure the same image quality belt under suction while it is conveyed by the belt.
and paper feed ability as the paper specified by This makes the paper reading edge to be flipped
KMBT. Only the basic performance under usual envi- up when it comes to the fusing section, and the
ronment (temperature and humidity) has been tested reading edge is rubbed against the fusing entrance
and confirmed. guide causing soiled on the printed side.
Information on other brand of paper will be also pro-
vided when the test is finished, by updating the docu- NOTE
ment. • When feeding carbonless paper, take the fol-
lowing countermeasures.
a) When printing on carbonless middle
sheets, 50mm width of the sheet leading
edge reacts by the pressure and changes
in color. If this cannot be allowed, use
middle sheets 60 mm longer in main scan
direction, and 20 mm longer in sub scan
direction to trim off the discolored portion.
b) Set carbonless paper in SEF position (the
narrower side of paper comes to the
paper feed roller side).
c) Set the paper so that the paper curls con-
vexly in the conveyance section.
d) Allowable curl amount is less than 3 mm.
When using paper curled more than 3 mm,
use the overlays included in the PP-701
package to correct the curl.
e) Only [Simplex mode] is acceptable for
carbonless paper.
A. Preparation
1. Configure the settings below in user mode.
• Set the paper type to [Coated A].
• Set the air-blow setting to [ON].
• Set the output setting to [Face-down].
2. Carry out the following mechanical adjustment.

• Weaken the separation pressure of the paper feed
section for 1 step. (See P.500)
530 2

B. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU main body. (See P.291)

2. Turn over the conveyance belt [1] so that the
1050e/1050eP
suction holes [2] can be seen.
[2] [1] 1050fs3355c
3. Install the cover [2] with the screw [1].

steps in reverse.
[2] [1] 1050fs3356c
2 531
/1050e/1050eP
Blank page
532
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 13. JAM CODE
TROUBLESHOOTING

1050e/1050eP
13. JAM CODE
13.1 Jam code list
Classifi- Jam Cause Resulting Correction
cation code operation
Tray 1 J11-01 The paper feed sensor /1 (PS7) does If there is a sheet Pull out tray /1 and
During operation
not turn ON within a specified period of of paper being remove jammed paper if
time after the paper feed clutch /1 (CL4) printed when a any.
turns ON. jam occurs, the
J11-02 The pre-registration sensor /1 (PS17) main body com- Open tray /1 and the
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper main body vertical con-
period of time after the paper feed exit before stop- veyance door, and
clutch /1 (CL4) turns ON. ping operations. remove jammed paper if
J11-03 The vertical conveyance sensor /1 any.
(PS19) does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time after the pre-registra-
tion sensor /1 (PS17) turns ON.
J11-04 When the trailing edge of paper is pass- After completion
ing through the vertical conveyance of the exit of the
sensor /1 (PS19), the pre-registration preceding paper,
sensor /1 (PS17) is turned ON by the the main body
succeeding paper. stops operations.
J11-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /1 — Open the main body ver-
When idling
(PS19) turns ON while in idling. tical conveyance door

and remove jammed
paper if any.
J11-06 The pre-registration sensor /1 (PS17) Pull out tray /1 and
turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper if
any.
During operation
not turn ON within a specified period of of paper being remove jammed paper if
time after the paper feed clutch /2 (CL6) printed when a any.
J12-02 The pre-registration sensor /2 (PS18) main body com- Open tray /2 and the
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper main body vertical con-
period of time after the paper feed- exit before stop- veyance door, and
clutch /2 (CL6) turns ON. ping operations. remove jammed paper if
J12-03 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 any.
2 533
13. JAM CODE Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006

Tray 2 J12-04 When the trailing edge of paper is pass- After completion Open tray /2 and the
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
ing through the vertical conveyance of the exit of the main body vertical con-
sensor /3 (PS21), the pre-registration preceding paper, veyance door, and
sensor /2 (PS18) is turned ON by the the main body remove jammed paper if
succeeding paper. stops operations. any.
J12-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 — Open the main body ver-
When idling
(PS21) turns ON while in idling. tical conveyance door

and remove jammed
paper if any.
any.
During operation
(PF) not turn ON within a specified period of of paper being remove jammed paper if
time after the pick-up clutch /1 (CL6) printed when a any.
J13-02 The pre-registration sensor /1 (PS89) main body com- Open tray /3, the PF
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper front door and the verti-
period of time after the pick-up clutch / exit before stop- cal conveyance door /
1 (CL6) turns ON. ping operations. Up, and remove jammed
J13-03 The vertical conveyance sensor /1 paper if any.
J13-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /1 — Open the PF front door
When idling
(PS90) turns ON while in idling. and the vertical convey-

ance door /Up and
remove jammed paper if
any.
any.
534 2

During operation
1050e/1050eP
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper front door and the hori-
period of time after the pick-up clutch / exit before stop- zontal conveyance jam
2 (CL9) turns ON. ping operations. release lever and remove
J14-03 When the trailing edge of paper is pass- jammed paper if any.
ing through the loop sensor /2 (PS94),
the pre-registration sensor /2 (PS93) is
turned ON by the succeeding paper.
J14-04 The pre-registration sensor /2 (PS93) — Pull out tray /4 and
When idling

any.
During operation
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper front door and the verti-
period of time after the pick-up clutch / exit before stop- cal conveyance door /
3 (CL12) turns ON. ping operations. Lw, and remove jammed
J15-03 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 paper if any.
J15-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 — Open the PF front door
When idling
(PS96) turns ON while in idling. and the vertical convey-

ance door /Lw and
any.
any.
2 535

Paper J17-01 The registration sensor (PS40) does not If there is a sheet Open the main body
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
feed turn ON within a specified period of of paper being front doors /R and /L,
convey- time after the ADU deceleration sensor printed when a pull out the ADU section
ance (PS42) turns ON. jam occurs, the and remove jammed
(com- J17-02 The ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) main body com- paper if any.
mon to does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper
each period of time after the loop sensor exit before stop-
tray) (PS16) turns ON. ping operations.
Paper J17-03 The loop sensor (PS16) does not turn After completion Open the main body ver-
feed ON within a specified period of time of the exit of the tical conveyance door
convey- after the vertical conveyance sensor /1 preceding paper, and remove jammed
ance (PS19) turns ON. the main body paper if any.
(trays 1/ stops operations.
and /2)
Paper J17-04 The vertical conveyance sensor /2
feed (PS20) does not turn ON within a speci-
convey- fied period of time after the vertical con-
ance veyance sensor /3 (PS21) turns ON.
(tray /2) J17-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /1
fied period of time after the vertical con-
veyance sensor /2 (PS20) turns ON.
Paper J17-06 The loop sensor (PS16) does not turn Open the PF front door
feed ON within a specified period of time and the horizontal con-
convey- after the PF exit sensor (PS99) turns veyance jam release
ance (PF) ON. lever, and remove
jammed paper if any.
Paper J17-07 The paper leading edge sensor (PS41) — Open the main body
When idling
feed turns ON while in idling. front doors /R and /L,

convey- J17-08 The registration sensor (PS40) turns ON pull out the ADU section
ance while in idling. and remove jammed
J17-09 The ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) paper if any.
turns ON while in idling.
J17-10 The loop sensor (PS16) turns ON while
in idling.
J17-11 The vertical conveyance sensor /2
(PS20) turns ON while in idling.
J17-12 The multi feed detection boards /1 and If there is a sheet
During operation
/2 detect a double feed. of paper being

printed when a
jam occurs, the
main body com-
pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
536

Paper J18-01 The intermediate sensor /Up (PS91) If there is a sheet Open the PF front door
During operation
1050e/1050eP
feed does not turn ON within a specified of paper being and the PF vertical con-
convey- period of time after the vertical convey- printed when a veyance door /Up, and
ance (PF) ance sensor /1 (PS90) turns ON. jam occurs, the remove jammed paper if
J18-02 The loop sensor /1 (PS92) does not main body com- any.
turn ON within a specified period of pletes the paper
time after the intermediate sensor /Up exit before stop-
(PS91) turns ON. ping operations.
J18-03 The loop sensor /2 (PS94) does not Open the PF front door
turn ON within a specified period of and the horizontal con-
time after the pre-registration sensor /2 veyance jam release
(PS93) turns ON. lever, and remove
J18-04 The intermediate sensor /Lw (PS97) Open the PF front door
does not turn ON within a specified and the PF vertical con-
period of time after the vertical convey- veyance door /Lw, and
ance sensor /3 (PS96) turns ON. remove jammed paper if
J18-05 The loop sensor /3 (PS98) does not any.
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the intermediate sensor /Lw
(PS97) turns ON.
J18-06 The PF exit sensor (PS99) does not turn Open the PF front door,
ON within a specified period of time the PF vertical convey-
after the loop sensor /1 (PS92) turns ance door /Up and the
ON. horizontal conveyance
jam release lever, and
any.
J18-07 The PF exit sensor (PS99) does not turn Open the PF front door
ON within a specified period of time and the PF horizontal
after the loop sensor /2 (PS94) turns conveyance jam release
ON. lever, and remove
J18-08 The PF exit sensor (PS99) does not turn Open the PF front door,
ON within a specified period of time the PF vertical convey-
after the loop sensor /3 (PS98) turns ance door /Lw and the
ON. horizontal conveyance
jam release lever, and
any.
J18-09 The intermediate sensor /Up (PS91) — Open the PF front door
When idling
turns ON while in idling. and the PF vertical con-

J18-10 The loop sensor /1 (PS92) turns ON veyance door /Up, and
while in idling. remove jammed paper if
any.
537

Paper J18-11 The loop sensor /2 (PS94) turns ON — Open the PF front door
When idling
/1050e/1050eP
feed while in idling. and the horizontal con-

convey- veyance jam release
ance (PF) lever, and remove
J18-12 The intermediate sensor /Lw (PS97) Open the PF front door
turns ON while in idling. and the PF vertical con-
J18-13 The loop sensor /3 (PS98) turns ON veyance door /Lw, and
while in idling. remove jammed paper if
any.
J18-14 The PF exit sensor (PS99) turns ON Open the PF front door
while in idling. and the horizontal con-
veyance jam release
lever, and remove
Convey- J19-01 The main body vertical conveyance The main body Close the vertical con-
During operation
ance door is opened while in printing. stops immedi- veyance door.

ately.
PF J19-02 The PF front door is opened while in The main body/ Close the PF front door.
printing. PF stops immedi-
ately.
Fusing/ J21-01 While in the print sequence, the maxi- If there is a sheet Open the main body
paper mum density sensor detects paper at of paper being front doors /R and /L,
exit the specified timing. printed when a pull out the ADU section
jam occurs, the and remove jammed
main body com- paper if any.
pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
J21-02 While in idling, the maximum density —
When idling
sensor detects paper at the specified

timing.
J31-01 The paper leading edge sensor (PS41) If there is a sheet

During operation
does not turn ON within a specified of paper being

period of time after the registration printed when a
motor (M17) turns no. jam occurs, the
J31-02 The fusing exit sensor (PS22) does not main body com-
time after the paper leading edge sen- exit before stop-
sor (PS41) turns ON. ping operations.
J32-01 The paper exit sensor (PS3) does not
time after the fusing exit sensor (PS22)
turns ON.
538

Fusing/ J32-02 The ADU acceleration sensor (PS49) If there is a sheet Open the main body
During operation
1050e/1050eP
paper does not turn ON within a specified of paper being front doors /R and /L,
exit period of time after the fusing exit sen- printed when a pull out the ADU section
sor (PS22) turns ON. jam occurs, the and remove jammed
J32-03 The reverse sensor /1 (PS48) does not main body com- paper if any.
time after the ADU acceleration sensor exit before stop-
(PS49) turns ON. ping operations.
J32-04 The PS46 does not turn ON again
within a specified period of time after
the reverse sensor /1 (PS48) turns ON.
time after the reverse sensor /1 (PS48)
turns ON.
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the PS3 turns ON.
J32-07 The paper exit sensor (PS3) turns ON —
When idling
while in idling.
J32-08 The ADU acceleration sensor (PS49)
J32-09 The fusing exit sensor (PS22) turns ON
while in idling.
J32-10 The reverse/exit sensor (PS50) turns
ON while in idling.
J32-11 The fusing jam sensor (PS23) turns ON
while in idling.
J32-12 The reverse sensor /1 (PS48) turns ON
while in idling.
J32-13 The reverse sensor /2 (PS47) turns ON
while in idling.
External J51-01 The front door/R, /L of the main body The main body Open the main body
During operation
was opened while printing. stops immedi- front doors /R and /L,
ately. pull out the ADU section
and remove jammed
paper if any.
2 539

DF J61-1 The RADF open/close sensor (PS301) The DF stops Open the DF open/close
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
turns OFF while in operation. immediately. If cover and remove

J61-2 The cover open/close switch (MS301) there is paper jammed paper if any.
turns OFF while in operation. being transferred
J62-1 The original registration sensor /Rt or having been
(PS306) does not turn OFF within a transferred, the
specified period of time after the pre- main body com-
feed start. pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
J62-2 The original conveyance sensor
(PS308) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the pre-
feed start of the front side of the double
sided original (including the single sided
original).
specified period of time after the pre-
feed start of the back side of the double
sided original.
J62-4 While in the forward rotation of the orig-
inal conveyance motor (M301), the orig-
inal conveyance sensor (PS308) does
not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.
J62-5 While in the reverse rotation of the origi-
nal conveyance motor (M301), the origi-
nal conveyance sensor (PS308) does
J62-6 When entering a large size double sided
original in the reverse section, the origi-
nal reverse sensor (PS309) does not
time after the original conveyance sen-
sor (PS308) turns ON.
J62-7 When exiting a large size single sided
original, the original exit sensor /Lt
specified period of time after the original
conveyance sensor (PS308) turns ON.
540

DF J62-8 When exiting a large size double sided The DF stops Open the DF open/close
During operation
1050e/1050eP
original, the original exit sensor /Lt immediately. If cover and remove
(PS307) does not turn ON within a there is paper jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the original being transferred
reverse sensor (PS309) turns ON. or having been
J62-9 When exiting a large size single sided transferred, the
original, the original exit sensor /Lt main body com-
(PS307) does not turn OFF within a pletes the paper
specified period of time after it turns exit before stop-
ON. ping operations.
J62-10 When exiting a large size double sided
original, the original exit sensor /Lt
(PS307) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after it turns
ON.
J63-1 When outputting a large size double
sided original from the reverse section,
the original reverse sensor (PS309)
does not turn ON.
J63-2 When entering a large size double sided
original into the reverse section, the
original reverse sensor (PS309) does
J63-3 When outputting a large size double
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON.
J63-4 When exiting a small size single sided
original, the original exit sensor /Rt
reverse sensor (PS309) turns ON.
J63-5 When exiting a small size double sided
reverse/exit sensor (PS313) turns ON.
J63-6 When exiting a small size single sided
ON.
541

DF J63-7 When exiting a small size double sided The DF stops Open the DF open/close
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
original, the original exit sensor /Rt immediately. If cover and remove
(PS314) does not turn OFF within a there is paper jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after it turns being transferred
ON. or having been
J63-8 When entering a small size double transferred, the
sided original into the reverse section, main body com-
the original reverse sensor (PS309) pletes the paper
does not turn ON within a specified exit before stop-
period of time after original conveyance ping operations.
sensor (PS308) turns ON.
J63-9 When outputting a small size double
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after original conveyance
J63-10 When entering a small size double
sided original into the reverse section,
J63-11 When outputting a small size double
J65-1 The original registration sensor /Rt
J65-4 The original reverse sensor (PS309)
J65-8 The original exit sensor /Lt (PS307)
J65-10 The original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)
J65-20 The original exit sensor /Rt (PS314)
J65-40 The reverse jam sensor (PS304) turns
ON while in idling.
J65-80 The original registration sensor /Lt
542

FD J72-01 The FD entrance sensor (PS1) does not The FD and the Remove jammed paper if
During operation
1050e/1050eP
turn ON within a specified period of main body stop any from the FD/main
time after the main body paper exit sen- immediately. body.
sor (PS3) turns ON.
J72-02 The intermediate conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the FD entrance
J72-03 The main tray exit sensor (PS18) does
not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the intermediate conveyance
J72-05 The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS16)
period of time after the intermediate
J72-09 The punch conveyance sensor (PS5)
period of time after the FD entrance
J72-10 The 3rd folding conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the punch con-
veyance sensor (PS5) turns ON.
J72-11 The punch registration sensor (PS6)
period of time after the punch convey-
ance sensor (PS5) turns ON.
J72-12 The 1st folding conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the punch regis-
tration sensor (PS6) turns ON.
J72-13 The 3rd folding conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the 1st folding
J72-14 The intermediate conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the 3rd folding
543

FS J72-16 The FNS entrance sensor (PS4) does The FS and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
not turn ON within a specified period of main body stop if any, from the FS/main
sor (PS3) turns ON.
time after the stacker entrance sensor
(PS5) turns OFF.
J72-18 The stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
period of time after the FNS entrance
J72-19 While in stapling, the stacker entrance
sensor (PS5) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the
stacker entrance motor (M13) turns
ON. While in any other operations than
stapling, the PS5 does not turn OFF
within a specified period of time after it
turns ON.
J72-20 While in stapling a small size paper, the
main tray exit sensor (PS10) does not
time after the paper exit arm motor
(M23) turns ON.
J72-21 While in stapling a large size paper, the
main tray exit sensor (PS10) does not
time after the paper exit arm motor
(M23) turns ON.
J72-22 While in exiting paper in the sub tray,
the sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
period of time after the FNS entrance
J72-23 While in exiting paper in the sub tray,
the sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
period of time after the PS1 turns ON.
J72-28 While in the straight/shift of the small
size paper, the main tray paper exit sen-
sor (PS10) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the PS10
turns ON.
544

FS J72-30 While in stapling a small size paper, the The FS and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
1050e/1050eP
main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) does main body stop if any, from the FS/main
not turn OFF within a specified period of immediately. body.
time after the PS10 turns ON.
J72-39 The door switch (MS1) turns OFF while The copier stops Close the front door.
in the copy/print. immediately.
FD J72-40 While in the folding operation, the 2nd The FD and the Remove jammed paper if
folding conveyance sensor (PS53) does main body stop any from the FD/main
not turn ON within a specified period of immediately. body.
time after the 1st folding motor (M4)
starts to accelerate.
J72-41 While in the folding operation, the 3rd
folding conveyance sensor (PS54) does
time after the 1st folding motor (M4)
time after the 2nd folding motor (M5)
J72-43 While in the folding operation, the inter-
mediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
period of time after the 3rd folding
motor (M6) starts to accelerate.
time after the 2nd folding conveyance
J72-45 While in the folding operation, the inter-
mediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
period of time after the 3rd folding con-
veyance sensor (PS54) turns ON.
J72-46 The PI conveyance sensor /Up (PS31)
period of time after the PI pick-up sole-
noid /Up (SD13) turns ON.
J72-47 The PI exit sensor (PS4) does not turn
ON within a specified period of time
after the PI conveyance sensor /Up
(PS31) turns ON.
545

FD J72-48 The PI conveyance sensor /Lw (PS37) The FD and the Remove jammed paper if
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
does not turn ON within a specified main body stop any from the FD/main
period of time after the PI pick-up sole- immediately. body.
noid /Lw (SD14) turns ON.
J72-49 The PI exit sensor (PS4) does not turn
after the PI conveyance sensor /Lw
(PS37) turns ON.
J72-50 The FD entrance sensor (PS1) does not
time after the PI exit sensor (PS4) turns
ON.
J72-58 The PI multi feed is detected.
J72-59 The door switch (MS1) turns OFF.
SD J72-61 The entrance sensor (PS1) does not The SD and the Remove jammed paper if
turn ON within a specified period of main body stop any from the SD/main
time after the exit sensor (PS3) on the immediately. body.
main body turns ON.
J72-62 The horizontal conveyance sensor /1
fied period of time after the entrance
J72-63 The horizontal conveyance sensor /2
fied period of time after the horizontal
conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) turns ON.
J72-64 The horizontal conveyance exit sensor
fied period of time after the horizontal
J72-65 The horizontal conveyance exit sensor
(PS4) does not turn OFF within a speci-
fied period of time after it turns ON.
J72-66 The subtray exit sensor (PS11) does
time after the horizontal conveyance
sensor /1 (PS2) turns ON.
J72-67 The subtray exit sensor (PS11) does
J72-68 The entrance sensor (PS1) does not
time after the exit sensor (PS3) on the
main body turns ON.
546 2

SD J72-69 The right angle conveyance sensor /2 The SD and the Remove jammed paper if
During operation
1050e/1050eP
(PS6) does not turn ON within a speci- main body stop any from the SD/main
fied period of time after the right angle immediately. body.
conveyance motor (M6) turns ON.
J72-70 The folding sensor /1 (PS7) does not
time after the folding entrance motor
(M3) turns ON.
J72-71 The saddle stitching paper sensor
fied period of time after the folding sub
scan alignment exit motor (M8) turns
ON.
J72-72 The bundle sensor /1 (PS14) does not
time after the bundle arm rotation motor
(M22) turns ON.
time after the bundle clip motor (M11)
turns ON.
time after the bundle sensor /2 (PS15)
turns ON.
J72-75 The entrance sensor (PS1) does not
turn Off within a specified period of time
after it turns ON.
J72-76 The horizontal conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the entrance
J72-77 The right angle conveyance sensor /2
fied period of time after the folding
entrance motor (M3) turns ON.
J72-78 The folding sensor /2 (PS44) does not
time after the folding sub scan align-
ment exit motor (M8) turns ON.
J72-79 The saddle stitching paper sensor
specified period of time after the folding
sub scan alignment exit motor (M8)
turns ON.
2 547

SD J72-80 The bundle sensor /1 (PS14) does not turn The SD and the Remove jammed paper if
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
OFF within a specified period of time after main body stop any from the SD/main
the bundle clip motor (M11) turns ON. immediately. body.
time after the bundle registration motor
(M12) turns ON.
J72-82 With paper bundle exit, the bundle sen-
sor /4 (PS54) does not turn OFF within
a specified period of time after the bun-
dle registration motor (M12) turns ON.
J72-83 The folding passage sensor (PS8) does
time after the folding conveyance motor
(M4) turns ON.
J72-84 The tri-folding exit sensor (PS9) does
(M4) turns ON.
J72-85 The folding sub scan alignment exit
motor (M8) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after it turns ON.
J72-86 The folding passage sensor (PS8) does
(M4) turns ON.
J72-87 The tri-folding exit sensor (PS9) does
J72-88 With paper bundle exit, the bundle sen-
sor /2 (PS15) does not turn OFF within a
J72-89 The trimmer registration sensor (PS55)
period of time after the bundle press
movement motor (M17) turns ON.
J72-90 The trimmer registration sensor (PS55)
period of time after the bundle registra-
tion motor (M12) turns ON.
J72-99 During printing, either the SD front door
switch /Rt (MS1) or /Lt (MS2) turns OFF.
FS J73-01 The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) — Open the FS front door
When idling
turns ON while in idling. and the jam release lever,

J73-02 The FNS entrance sensor (PS4) turns and remove jammed
ON while in idling. paper, if any.
548 2

FS J73-03 The main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) — Open the FS front door
When idling
1050e/1050eP
turns ON while in idling. Or, the stack and the jam release lever,
empty sensor (PS20) turns ON while and remove jammed
turning ON the power source. paper, if any.
FD J73-05 Either of the FD entrance sensor (PS1), — Open the FD front door,
the punch conveyance sensor (PS5) open then the entrance
and the punch registration sensor (PS6) conveyance jam release
turns ON while in idling. levers /1 and /2 and the
punch conveyance jam
release levers /1 and /2,
and then remove
jammed paper, if any.
J73-06 Either of the intermediate conveyance Open the FD front door
sensor (PS13), the sub tray paper exit and the intermediate
sensor (PS16) and the main tray paper conveyance jam lever,
exit sensor (PS18) turns ON while in and remove the jammed
idling. paper, if any.
J73-07 Either of the 1st folding conveyance Open the FD front door,
sensor (PS51), the 2nd folding convey- pull out the folding con-
ance sensor (PS53), the 3rd folding veyance section, open
conveyance sensor (PS54), the S size the folding conveyance
conveyance sensor (PS58), the folding jam release levers /1 to /
entrance sensor (PS52) and the folding 5, and remove jammed
exit sensor (PS2) turns ON while in paper, if any.
idling.
J73-08 Either of the PI conveyance sensor /Up Open the FD upper door
(PS31), the PI conveyance sensor /Lw and remove jammed
(PS37) and the PI exit sensor (PS4) paper, if any. When
turns ON while in idling. jammed paper gets in
the PI exit, open the
entrance conveyance
jam release lever /1 and
remove the jammed
paper.
SD J73-09 The entrance sensor (PS1) turns ON Open the SD front door /
while in idling. Rt and remove jammed
J73-10 Either of the horizontal conveyance paper, if any.
sensor /1 (PS2), the horizontal convey-
ance sensor /2 (PS3), or the subtray
exit sensor (PS11) turns ON while in
idling.
J73-11 The horizontal conveyance exit sensor Open the SD front door /
(PS4) turns ON while in idling. Lt and remove jammed
paper, if any.
1 549

SD J73-12 Either of the right angle conveyance — Open the SD front door /
When idling
/1050e/1050eP
sensor /1 (PS5) or the right angle con- Rt and remove jammed

veyance sensor /2 (PS6) turns ON while paper, if any.
in idling.
J73-13 Either of the folding sensor /1 (PS7), the
folding passage sensor (PS8), the tri-
folding exit sensor, or the folding sensor
/2 (PS44) turns ON while in idling.
J73-14 The saddle stitching paper sensor Open the SD front door /
(PS13) turns ON while in idling. Lt and remove jammed
J73-15 Either of the bundle sensor /1 (PS14), paper, if any.
the bundle sensor /2 (PS15), the bundle
sensor /4 (PS54), or the bundle exit
sensor /2 (PS57) turns ON while in
idling.
LS J73-17 The entrance sensor (PS4) of the tan- Open the tandem (1st)
dem (1st) LS turns ON while in idling. LS front door, open then
entrance conveyance
jam release lever and
remove jammed paper, if
any.
J73-18 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) of the Open the tandem (1st)
tandem (1st) LS turns ON while in idling. LS sub tray cover, and
any.
J73-19 Either of the conveyance sensors /1, /2 Open the tandem (1st)
and /3 (PS7, 16 and 17) of the tandem LS JAM door, and
(1st) LS turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if
any.
J73-20 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) of the Open the tandem (1st)
tandem (1st) LS turns ON while in idling. LS front door, open then
the coupling exit jam
release lever, and
any.
J73-21 The entrance sensor (PS4) of the tan- Open the tandem (2nd)
dem (2nd) LS turns ON while in idling. LS front door, open then
entrance conveyance
jam release lever and
any.
J73-22 The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS10) Open the tandem (2nd)
of the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON while LS sub tray cover, and
in idling. remove jammed paper, if
any.
550 1

LS J73-23 Either of the conveyance sensors /1, /2 — Open the tandem (2nd)
When idling
1050e/1050eP
and /3 (PS7, 16 and 17) of the tandem LS JAM door, and
(2nd) LS turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if
However, in the case of LS-502, only any.
the conveyance sensor /1 (PS7) is
applicable.
J73-24 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) of the Open the tandem (2nd)
tandem (2nd) LS turns ON while in LS front door, open then
idling. the coupling exit jam
However, in the case of LS-501 only. release lever and remove
jammed paper, if any.
PB J73-30 The entrance sensor (PS1) turns ON Open the front door and
while in idling. remove jammed paper, if
The SC entrance sensor (PS2) turns ON any.
while in idling.
The cover paper entrance sensor (PS3)
The sub tray exit sensor (PS4) turns ON Open the upper door
while in idling. and remove jammed
paper, if any.
J73-31 The SC paper detection sensor (PS16) Open the front door and
turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if
J73-32 The clamp paper sensor (PS28) turns any.
ON while in idling.
J73-33 The cover paper switchback sensor
The cover paper sensor/Rt (PS45) turns
ON while in idling.
The cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) turns
ON while in idling.
J73-34 The book end sensor (PS61) turns ON Open the stacker door
while in idling. and remove jammed
paper, if any.
J73-35 The cover paper conveyance sensor /1 Pull out the paper feed
(PS75) turns ON while in idling. tray and remove jammed
The cover paper conveyance sensor /2 paper, if any.
The cover paper conveyance sensor /3
2 551

LS J74-01 The entrance sensor (PS4) of the tan- The LS and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
dem (1st) LS does not turn ON within a main body stop if any, from the LS/main
specified period of time after the main immediately. body.
body paper exit sensor (PS3) turns ON.
J74-02 The entrance sensor (PS4) of the tan-
dem (1st) LS does not turn OFF within a
J74-03 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) does
During operation

time after the entrance sensor (PS4) of
the tandem (1st) LS turns ON.
J74-04 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) of the
tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
J74-05 The conveyance sensor /1 (PS7) does
the tandem (1st) LS turns ON.
J74-06 The conveyance sensor /1 (PS7) of the
tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
time after the conveyance sensor /1
(PS7) of the tandem (1st) LS turns ON.
J74-08 The conveyance sensor /2 (PS16) of
the tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
the tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
J74-11 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) does
552

LS J74-12 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) of the The LS and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
1050e/1050eP
tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF main body stop if any, from the LS/main
within a specified period of time after it immediately. body.
turns ON.
J74-19 The LS front door open jam. While in
any other modes than the tandem
mode, the front door switch (MS1) of
the tandem (1st) LS turns OFF while in
the print/print.
dem (2nd) LS does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the cou-
pling exit sensor (PS18) of the tandem
(1st) LS turns ON.
dem (2nd) LS does not turn OFF within a
J74-33 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) does
the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON.
J74-34 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) of the
tandem (2nd) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON.
J74-36 The conveyance sensor /1 (PS7) of the
turns ON.
(PS7) of the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON.
the tandem (2nd) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
(PS16) of the tandem (2nd) LS turns
ON.
553

LS J74-40 The conveyance sensor /3 (PS17) of The LS and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
the tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF main body stop if any, from the LS/main
within a specified period of time after it immediately. body.
turns ON.
J74-41 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) does
(PS17) of the tandem (2nd) LS turns
ON.
J74-42 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) of the
turns ON.
J74-49 The LS front door open jam. While in
any other modes other than the tandem
mode, the front door switch (MS1) of
the tandem (2nd) LS turns OFF while in
the print/print.
PB J74-60 The entrance sensor (PS1) does not The PB and the Remove jammed paper,
turn ON within a specified period of main body stop if any, from the PB/main
sor (PS3) turns ON.
J74-61 The SC entrance sensor (PS2) does not
time after the entrance sensor (PS1)
turns ON.
J74-62 The SC entrance sensor (PS2) does not
J74-63 The cover paper entrance sensor (PS3)
period of time after the main body
paper exit sensor (PS3) turns ON.
J74-64 The sub tray exit sensor (PS4) does not
time after the entrance sensor (PS1)
turns ON.
J74-65 The sub tray exit sensor (PS4) does not
J74-66 The SC paper detection sensor (PS16)
period of time after the SC entrance
554 2

PB J74-67 The SC paper detection sensor (PS16) The PB and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
1050e/1050eP
does not turn OFF within a specified main body stop if any, from the PB/main
period of time after it turns ON. immediately. body.
J74-68 When conveying two pages at a time,
the SC paper detection sensor (PS16)
time period after the SC entrance sen-
sor (PS2) turns ON.
J74-69 When conveying two pages at a time,
the SC paper detection sensor (PS16)
J74-70 The SC paper detection sensor (PS16)
period of time after the SC bundle con-
veynace motor (M17) turns ON.
J74-71 The clamp paper sensor (PS28) does
time after the Clamp motor (M22) turns
OFF.
J74-72 The glue apply position detection sen-
sor (PS32) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after reversal of
glue tank movement motor (the tank
moves back) turns ON.
J74-73 The glue apply position detection sen-
sor (PS32) does not turn OFF within a
ON.
J74-74 The cover paper sensor/Rt (PS45) does
time after the cover paper pick up
clutch (MC71) turns ON.
J74-76 When starting trimming of the cover
paper fed from the PB, the cover paper
switchback sensor (PS44) does not
turn ON within a specified time period
after the cover paper conveyance
motor (M45) turns ON.
J74-77 When trimming of the cover paper fed
from the PB is complete, the cover
paper switchback sensor (PS44) does
not turn OFF within a specified time
period after the cover paper convey-
ance motor (M45) turns ON.
2 555

PB J74-78 When positioning the leading edge of The PB and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
the cover paper fed from the PB, the main body stop if any, from the PB/main
cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not immediately. body.
turn OFF within a specified time period
J74-79 When positioning the leading edge of
the cover paper fed from the PB, the
cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not
turn ON within a specified time period
J74-80 When cover paper is fed from the main
body, the cover paper sensor/Rt (PS45)
time period after the cover paper
entrance sensor (PS3) turns ON.
J74-82 When starting trimming of the cover
paper fed from the main body, the
cover paper switchback sensor (PS44)
period of time after the cover paper
J74-83 When trimming of the cover paper fed
from the main body is complete, the
cover paper switchback sensor (PS44)
period of time after the cover paper
the cover paper fed from the main
body, the cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46)
time period after the cover paper con-
veyance motor (M45) turns ON.
the cover paper fed from the main
body, the cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46)
time period after the cover paper con-
veyance motor (M45) turns ON.
J74-86 The book end sensor (PS61) does not
time after the book conveyance belt
556 2

PB J74-87 When loading first book, the book sen- The PB and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
1050e/1050eP
sor /1 (PS66) does not turn ON within a main body stop if any, from the PB/main
specified period of time after the book immediately. body.
conveyance belt up down motor (M63)
turns ON.
J74-88 When first row of book moves, the
book sensor /2 (PS67) does not turn
after the book movement motor (M64)
turns ON.
J74-89 When feeding paper, the cover paper
conveyance sensor /1 (PS75) does not
J74-90 The cover paper conveyance sensor /2
fied period of time after the cover paper
J74-91 When re-feeding paper, the cover paper
conveyance sensor /3 (PS77) does not
J74-92 The cover paper conveyance sensor /4
J74-93 The multi feed detection board /2
(MFDTB72) turns OFF.
J74-96 The cover paper switchback sensor
feed motor (M74) turns ON.
J74-97 No paper is detected (the paper has
removed) when restarting the job after
recovery.
J74-98 A cover paper has not been conveyed
to the cover paper table section when
clamping of inside pages is finished.
J74-99 The front door switch (MS2), the upper
door switch (MS3) and the stacker door
switch (MS4) became OFF during print-
ing.
2 557

ADU J92-01 The ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) does If there is a sheet Open the main body
During operation
/1050e/1050eP
not turn ON within a specified period of of paper being front doors /R and /L,
time after the reverse sensor /1 (PS48) printed when a pull out the ADU section
turns ON. jam occurs, the and remove jammed
J92-02 The ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) does main body com- paper if any.
not turn ON again within a specified pletes the paper
period of time after the PS46 turns ON. exit before stop-
ping operations.
J92-03 The ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) —
When idling

J92-04 The ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45)
J93-01 The ADU exit sensor (PS43) does not If there is a sheet Open the main body
During operation
turn ON within a specified period of of paper being front doors /R and /L,
time after the ADU reverse sensor /1 printed when a pull out the ADU section
(PS46) turns ON. jam occurs, the and remove jammed
main body com- paper if any.
pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
J93-02 The ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS35) —
When idling

J93-03 The ADU conveyance sensor /2 (PS36)
J94-01 The ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) If there is a sheet
During operation
does not turn ON within a specified of paper being

period of time after the ADU exit sensor printed when a
(PS43) turns ON. jam occurs, the
main body com-
pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
J94-03 The ADU exit sensor (PS43) turns ON —
When idling
while in idling.
558
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 14. MALFUNCTION CODE

14. MALFUNCTION CODE
14.1 Malfunction code list
1050e/1050eP
A. Note for use
Turn OFF/ON the power switch (SW2) of the main body when releasing an abnormal condition.
B. Code list
NOTE
• For codes with "*" in the code column, "Turn ON the power switch again" is displayed on the touch
panel. For other codes, "Please call service" is displayed.
• For codes with "**" in the code column (SC78-40 to 62: perfect binding tank temperature abnor-
mality related), always repair defective parts then set the DipSW3-1 software of service mode to 0.
If DipSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it may cause fire.
Classification Code Causes Resulting Estimated abnormal parts

operation
Drive SC13-01 An abnormal speed signal of the The main body Paper feed motor (M4)
Main body
paper feed motor (M4) is checked. stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
An error detection signal is to turn OFF the
detected twice in succession a RL1 (main).
specified period of time after M4
was turned ON (the first signal is
ignored).
SC13-02 An abnormal speed signal of the Paper feed motor (M40)
PF
PFU paper feed motor (M40) is PF drive board (PFUDB)

checked.
An error detection signal is
detected twice in succession a
was turned ON (the first signal is
ignored).
SC13-03 The blowout of a fuse for the verti- Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
cal conveyance motor (M8) in the Vertical conveyance motor

printer control board (PRCB) is (M8)
checked.
An error detection signal (blowout
of a fuse) of M8 is detected when
M8 is turned ON.
SC13-05 The blowout of a fuse for the exit PF exit conveyance motor
PF
conveyance motor (M41) in the PF (M41)

drive board (PFUDB) is checked. PF drive board (PFUDB)
of a fuse) of M41 is detected when
M41 is turned ON.
2 559
14. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006

operation
Tray /1 SC18-10 The locking of the paper lift motor The main body Paper lift motor /1 (M25)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
/1 (M25) is detected. stops immediately Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6)

An error detection signal of M25 is to turn OFF the
detected while M25 is ON. RL1 (main).
SC18-11 When the upper limit sensor /1 Error code is not DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(PS6) is OFF, PS6 does not turn displayed on the 2)
ON within 20 seconds after the operation panel,
paper lift motor /1 (M25) turns ON but displayed only
for lifting operation. And at this on the data collec-
time, an error detection signal tion, the list output
(24V cut off) is detected. and CSRC. Since
SC18-12 When the upper limit sensor /1 the lifting opera- Printer control board (PRCB)
(PS6) is OFF, PS6 does not turn tion of the tray is
ON within 20 seconds after the not completed,
paper lift motor /1 (M25) turns ON "Set paper in the
for lifting operation. And at this tray 1" is displayed
time, an error detection signal on the operation
(blowout of a fuse) is detected. board.
SC18-13 When the upper limit sensor /1 Paper lift motor /1 (M25)
(PS6) is OFF, PS6 does not turn
ON within 20 seconds after the
paper lift motor /1 (M25) turns ON
for lifting operation. And at this
time, an error detection signal is
not detected.
When M26 is ON, an error detec- to turn OFF the
tion signal of the M26 is detected. RL1 (main).
SC18-22 When the upper limit sensor /2 the lifting opera- Printer control board (PRCB)
560

operation
Tray /2 SC18-23 When the upper limit sensor /2 Error code is not Paper lift motor /2 (M26)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
(PS12) is OFF, PS12 does not turn displayed on the
time, an error detection signal is tion, the list output
not detected. and CSRC. Since
the lifting opera-
tion of the tray is
not completed,
"Set paper in the
tray 2" is displayed
on the operation
board.
PF

SC18-32 When the upper limit sensor /1 the lifting opera- PF drive board (PFUDB)
SC18-33 When the upper limit sensor /1 Paper lift motor /1 (M42)
(PS71) is OFF, PS71 does not turn
ON within 20 seconds after the
paper lift motor /1 (M42) turns ON
for lifting operation. And at this
not detected.
561

operation
Tray /4 SC18-41 When the upper limit sensor /2 Error code is not DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
PF
/1050e/1050eP

SC18-43 When the upper limit sensor /2 Error code is not Paper lift motor /2 (M43)
the lifting opera-
tion of the tray is
not completed,
"Set paper in the
on the operation
board.
562

operation
Tray /5 SC18-53 When the upper limit sensor /3 Error code is not Paper lift motor /3 (M44)
PF
1050e/1050eP
the lifting opera-
tion of the tray is
not completed,
"Set paper in the
on the operation
board.
Wire SC21-01 It is checked that the time for the The main body Charger cleaning motor
Main body
cleaning charger cleaning motor (M23) stops immediately (M23)

abnor- operations is over. to turn OFF the Charger cleaning home sen-
mality • When the charger cleaning RL1 (main). sor (PS26)
home sensor (PS26) is OFF Printer control board (PRCB)
with the main power switch
(SW1) ON, PS26 does not turn
ON within 35 seconds after
the M23 turns ON for home
position research operation
(return operation). At this time,
an error detection signal
(blowout of a fuse) is not
detected.
• PS26 does not turn OFF within
15 seconds after the reverse
operation (return operation) is
started. At this time, an error
detection signal (blowout of a
fuse) is not detected.
• The charger cleaning limit sen-
sor (PS27) does not turn ON
within a specified period of
time after the reverse opera-
tion (return operation) is
started for detection of PS26
being OFF. Or, PS26 does not
turn ON within a specified
period of time after PS27 turns
ON. At this time, an error
563

operation
Wire SC21-02 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Charger cleaning motor
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
cleaning charger cleaning motor (M23) in stops immediately (M23)

abnor- the printer control board (PRCB) is to turn OFF the Printer control board (PRCB)
mality checked. RL1 (main).
• When the charger cleaning
home sensor (PS26) is OFF
with the main power switch
(SW1) ON, PS26 does not turn
ON within 35 seconds after
the M23 turns ON for home
(return operation). And at this
time, an error detection signal
(blowout of a fuse) is detected.
15 seconds after the reverse
started. And at this time, an
error detection signal (blowout
of a fuse) is detected.
• The charger cleaning limit sen-
sor (PS27) does not turn ON
within a specified period of
time after the reverse opera-
tion (return operation) is
fuse) is detected.
SC21-03 The locking of the charger clean- Charger cleaning motor
ing motor (M23) is detected. (M23)
A motor lock signal is detected Charger/cleaning member
while moving from the charger
cleaning limit sensor (PS27) side
to the charger cleaning home sen-
sor (PS26) side, and after a retry
operation, a fifth motor lock signal
is detected.
564

operation
Wire SC21-04 It is checked that the operations of The main body Transfer/separation clean-
Main body
1050e/1050eP
cleaning the transfer/separation cleaning stops immediately ing motor (M20)
abnor- motor (M20) are over. to turn OFF the Transfer/separation clean-
mality • When the transfer/separation RL1 (main). ing home sensor (PS38)
cleaning home sensor (PS38) Transfer/separation clean-
is OFF with the main power ing limit sensor (PS39)
switch (SW1) ON, PS38 does ADU drive boards /1, /2
not turn ON within a specified (ADUDB/1, /2)
period of time after the trans-
fer/separation cleaning motor
(M20) turns ON for a home
detected.
a specified period of time after
the reverse operation (return
operation) is started. At this
detected.
• The transfer/separation clean-
ing limit sensor (PS39) does
not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the reverse
565

operation
Wire SC21-05 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Transfer/separation clean-
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
cleaning transfer/separation cleaning motor stops immediately ing motor (M20)

abnor- (M20) in the ADU drive boards /1 to turn OFF the ADU drive boards /1, /2
mality and /2 (ADUDB/1 and /2)is RL1 (main). (ADUDB/1, /2)
checked.
• When the transfer/separation
cleaning home sensor (PS38)
is OFF with the main power
switch (SW1) ON, PS38 does
period of time after the trans-
fer/separation cleaning motor
(M20) turns ON for a home
operation) is started. At this
• PS39 does not turn ON within
operation) is started for detec-
tion of PS38 being OFF. Or,
PS38 does not turn ON within
PS39 turns ON. At this time,
SC21-06 The locking of the transfer/separa- Transfer/separation clean-
tion cleaning motor (M20) is ing motor (M20)
detected. Transfer/separation charger/
Motor lock signals are detected Transfer/separation clean-
while moving from the transfer/ ing member
separation limit sensor (PS39) side
to the transfer/separation home
sensor (PS38) side, and after a
retry operation, a fifth motor lock
signal is detected.
566

operation
Wire SC21-07 The home position search time of The main body Transfer assist motor (M19)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
cleaning the transfer assist motor is out. stops immediately Transfer assist home sensor
abnor- The transfer assist home sensor to turn OFF the (PS39)
mality (PS39) does not turn ON within a RL1 (main). ADU drive boards /1, /2
specified period of time after the (ADUDB/1, /2)
home position search operation of
the transfer assist motor (M19) is
started.
SC21-08 An error is detected while in the Transfer assist motor (M19)
operation of the transfer assist Transfer/separation clean-
motor. ing limit sensor (PS39)
An error is detected of the transfer Transfer assist home sensor
assist motor (M19) while in the (PS39)
print operation.
Motor SC23-01 The speed error signal of the toner Toner bottle motor (M6)
abnor- bottle motor (M6) is checked. Printer control board (PRCB)
mality An error detection signal is Toner bottle/large capacity
detected twice in succession a hopper
turns ON (the first signal is
ignored).
SC23-02 The speed error signal of the Developing motor (M3)
developing motor (M3) is checked. Printer control board (PRCB)
Since an error detection signal is
detected a second after M3 turns
ON, turn OFF M3 for 0.5 seconds.
Then, an error detection signal is
detected again a second after it is
turned ON again.
SC23-03 The locking of the blade motor is Blade motor (M22)
detected. Blade sensor /1 (PS24), /2
The error detection signal (over (PS25)
current) of M22 is detected.
SC23-04 It is checked that the movement of DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
the blade motor (M22) is not com- 2)
pleted, and the 24V power source
is also checked.
The drum READY1 signal (READY
condition) cannot be detected
within a specified period of time
after the drum motor (M2) turns
ON. Or, the drum READY1 signal
(READY release condition) cannot
be detected within a specified
period of time after M2 turns OFF.
At this time, an error detection sig-
nal (24V cut out) is detected.
567

operation
Motor SC23-05 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Blade motor (M22)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- blade motor (M22) in the printer stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
mality control board (PRCB) is checked. to turn OFF the
The drum READY1 signal (READY RL1 (main).
At this time, the error detection
signal (blowout of a fuse) of the
blade motor (M22) is detected.
SC23-06 It is checked that the movement of
the blade motor (M22) is not com-
pleted.
The drum READY1 signal (READY
nal is not detected.
SC23-07 It is checked that the movement of DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
the blade motor (M22) is not com- 2)
pleted, and 24V power source is
also checked.
The blade READY signal (READY
after the blade replacement signal
turns ON. Or, the blade READY
signal (READY release condition)
cannot be detected within a spec-
ified period of time after the blade
replacement signal turns OFF. At
this time, an error detection signal
(24V cut off) is detected.
568

operation
Motor SC23-08 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Blade motor (M22)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnor- blade motor (M22) in the printer stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
mality control board (PRCB) is checked. to turn OFF the
The blade READY signal (READY RL1 (main).
after the blade replacement signal
turns ON. Or, the blade READY
signal (READY release condition)
cannot be detected within a spec-
ified period of time after the blade
replacement signal turns OFF. At
this time, an error detection signal
(blowout of a fuse) of the blade
motor (M22) is detected.
SC23-09 It is checked that the movement of
the blade motor (M22) is not com-
pleted. The blade READY signal
(READY condition) cannot be
detected within a specified period
of time after the blade replace-
ment signal turns ON. Or, the
blade READY signal (READY
release condition) cannot be
of time after the blade replace-
ment signal turns OFF. At this
not detected.
SC23-10 It is checked that the drum motor Drum motor (M2)
(M2) does not start. The drum Printer control board (PRCB)
READY2 signal (READY signal) is
not detected within a specified
period of time after M2 turns ON.
SC23-11 The blowout of a fuse for the inter- Intermediate hopper motor
mediate hopper motor (M11) in (M11)
the printer control board (PRCB) is Printer control board (PRCB)
checked.
of a fuse) is detected when M11
turns ON.
569

operation
Motor SC23-12 The blowout of a fuse for the air The main body Air separation motor (M10)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- separation motor (M10) in the stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
mality printer control board (PRCB) is to turn OFF the
checked. RL1 (main).
of a fuse) is detected when M10
turns ON.
Toner SC23-13 Air separation motor (M10) rota- Air separation motor (M10)
convey- tion abnormality. Since an error is Air motor encoder sensor
ance detected when M10 turns ON, (PS30)
abnor- turn it OFF. An error is still Resetting of the intermedi-
mality detected when turn it ON again. ate toner hopper section
SC23-14 The toner conveyance abnormality Toner pump motor (M28)
is detected. When toner is sup- Air pump motor (M29)
plied for 8 minutes and the toner Toner remaining sensor /1
remaining sensor /1 (PS31) does (PS31)
not turn ON, it is found that the Toner remaining sensor /3
toner remaining sensor /3 (PS33) (PS33)
of the large capacity hopper turns
ON for the last 15 seconds in suc- Note:
cession. • When the code SC23-
14 occurs, be sure to
repair defective parts
before setting the
software DIPSW3-1 to
0. Setting the
DIPSW3-1 to 0 with-
out repairing defec-
tive parts may cause
toner to overflow
inside and outside of
the machine.
SC23-15 Toner remaining detection sensor / Toner remaining sensor /2
3 (PS33) abnormality. When the (PS32)
toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31) Toner remaining sensor /3
does not turn ON even if toner is (PS33)
supplied for 8 minutes, it is found
that the toner remaining sensor /2
(PS32) of the large capacity hop-
per turns ON for the last 15 sec-
onds in succession, and the toner
remaining sensor /3 (PS33) turns
OFF.
570

operation
Toner SC23-17 Leakage at the mixing section is The main body Toner pump motor (M28)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
convey- detected. When the toner pump stops immediately Air pump motor (M29)
ance motor (M28) is operating, the to turn OFF the Toner remaining sensor /4
abnor- toner remaining sensor /4 (PS34) RL1 (main). (PS34)
mality detects the toner being provided
in succession for 20 seconds. Note:
• When the code SC23-
17 occurs, be sure to
repair defective parts
before setting the
software DIPSW3-1 to
0. Setting the
DIPSW3-1 to 0 with-
out repairing defec-
tive parts may cause
toner to overflow
inside and outside of
the machine.
SC23-20 Toner pump motor (M28) abnor- DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
mality. The rotation of the toner 2)
pump motor (M28) and the 24 V Toner pump motor (M28)
power source are checked. While
M28 is rotating, an error detection
signal (abnormal rotation) is
detected for more than 1 second.
nal (24V cut off) is detected.
SC23-21 • Toner pump motor (M28) Printer control board (PRCB)
abnormality. The blowout of a Toner pump motor (M28)
fuse for the toner pump motor Recycle cut motor (M30)
(M28) in the printer control
board (PRCB) is checked.
While M28 is rotating, an error
detection signal (abnormal
rotation) is detected for more
than 1 second. At this time, an
error detection signal (blowout
of a fuse) is detected, but an
error signal (24V cut off) is not
detected.
• When recycle cut motor (M30)
is operating, abnormality
detection signal was continu-
ously detected twice for the
specified time. (First time
ignored)
2 571

operation
Toner SC23-22 Toner pump motor (M28) abnor- The main body Toner pump motor (M28)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
convey- mality. The rotation of the toner stops immediately Pump encoder sensor /1
ance pump motor (M28) is checked. to turn OFF the (PS28)
abnor- While M28 is rotating, an error RL1 (main).
mality detection signal (abnormal rota-
tion) is detected for more than 1
second. At this time, error signals
(blowout of a fuse and 24V cut off)
are not detected.
SC23-24 Air pump motor (M29) abnormal- DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
ity. The rotation of the air pump 2)
motor (M29) and the 24V power Air pump motor (M29)
source are checked.
detection signal (abnormal rota-
second. At this time, an error sig-
SC23-25 Air pump motor (M29) abnormal- Printer control board (PRCB)
ity. The blowout of a fuse for the Air pump motor (M29)
air pump motor (M29) in the
printer control board (PRCB) is
checked.
detection signal (abnormal rota-
second. At this time, an abnormal-
ity signal (blowout of a fuse) is
detected, but no abnormality sig-
SC23-26 Air pump motor (M29) abnormal- Air pump motor (M29)
ity. The rotation of the air pump Pump encoder sensor
motor (M29) is checked for more (PS29)
than 1 second. An error detection Load of the pump
signal (abnormal rotation) is
detected for more than 1 second.
At this time, error signals (blowout
of a fuse and 24V cut off) are not
detected.
572

operation
Toner SC-23-50 Toner collection box detected full When the waste Toner collection box
Main body
1050e/1050eP
convey- toner amount
ance exceeds 80% of
abnor- the toner collec-
mality tion box, a warn-
ing message is
displayed in the
operation panel
and the recycle
cut motor (M30) is
stopped after spe-
cific printing.
Drum SC24-01 When the change in temperature The main body Drum temperature sensor
of the drum temperature sensor stops immediately (TH5)
(TH5) is less than -2°C a specified to turn OFF the
period of time after the main RL1 (main).
power switch (SW1) turns ON to
start the control of the dehumidifi-
cation heater /1 (HTR1) and the
drum temperature is below 10°C
after the elapse of 1 minute.
SC24-02 When the main power switch
(SW1) turns ON with the fusing
temperature below 50°C, the
detected temperature of the drum
temperature sensor (TH5) is more
than 52°C, and when the detected
temperature is above 52°C after a
specified period of time.
High SC28-01 A charge leak is detected. After a Charger
voltage charge error detection signal is Power feeding contact
power detected while in the charge ON, High voltage unit /1 (HV1)
source up to 5 charge ON/OFF opera-
abnor- tions occur in succession while in
mality 10 prints.
SC28-02 A transfer leak is detected. After a Transfer/separation charger
transfer error detection signal is Power feeding point
detected while in the transfer ON, High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
up to 5 transfer ON/OFF opera-
tions occur in succession while in
10 prints.
SC28-03 A separation leak is detected.
After a separation error detection
signal is detected while in the sep-
aration ON, up to 5 separation
ON/OFF operations occur in suc-
cession while in 10 prints.
2 573

operation
High SC28-04 The error detection signal (blowout The main body ADU drive boards /1, /2
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
voltage of a 24V fuse) of the high voltage stops immediately (ADUDB1, 2)

power unit /2 (HV2) is detected. to turn OFF the High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
source RL1 (main).
abnor-
mality
Process SC29-01 The dirt correction of the sensor is Toner control sensor board
abnor- not completed. While in the maxi- (TCSB)
mality mum density correction, the dirt
correction of the maximum density
sensor is not sufficient. When this
condition is detected 10 times in
succession, the error code is dis-
played.
SC29-02 The maximum density correction Error code is not Toner control sensor board
is not completed. While in the displayed on the (TCSB)
maximum density correction, the operation panel, Developing motor (M3)
number of rotations of the devel- but displayed only
oping sleeve gets to the maxi- on the data collec-
mum. tion, the list output
SC29-03 The maximum density sensor out- and the CSRC. Toner control sensor board
put abnormality. While in the maxi- The control of the (TCSB)
mum density correction, a patch main body is Write unit
for control is not output. (No out- made by using a Image processing board
put is made from the maximum data previously (IPB)
density sensor.) obtained. Overall control board
(OACB)
SC29-04 The dirt correction of the sensor is The main body Toner control sensor board
not completed. While in gamma stops immediately (TCSB) (gamma sensor
correction, the dirt correction of to turn OFF the cleaning required)
the gamma sensor is not suffi- RL1 (main).
cient. When gamma sensor less
than the specified value is
detected ten times in succession,
this error code is displayed.
574 2

operation
Process SC29-05 The gamma sensor output abnor- Error code is not Toner control sensor board
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnormality. While in the gamma correc- displayed on the (TCSB)
mality tion, a patch for control is not operation panel, Write unit
output. (No output is made from but displayed only Image processing board
the gamma sensor.) on the data collec- (IPB)
tion, the list output Overall control board
and the CSRC. (OACB)
SC29-06 The gamma correction data is The control of the Image processing board
defective. The gamma correction main body is (IPB)
output is abnormal. A regression made by using a Printer control board (PRCB)
error when carrying out a gamma data previously
curve operation while in the obtained.
gamma correction.
SC29-07 The dirt correction of the sensor is The main body Toner control sensor board
not completed. While in the dot stops immediately (TCSB) (gamma sensor
diameter correction, the dirt cor- to turn OFF the cleaning required)
rection of the gamma sensor is RL1 (main).
not sufficient. When gamma sen-
sor less than the specified value is
detected five times in succession,
this error code is displayed.
SC29-08 Correction abnormality. While in Error code is not Image processing board
the dot diameter correction, the displayed on the (IPB)
correction is terminated with an operation panel, Printer control board (PRCB)
abnormal value. but displayed only
on the data collec-
tion, the list output
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
SC29-09 Drum potential sensor (DPS) out- The main body Drum potential sensor (DPS)
put abnormality. While in the 0V stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
check of the DPS, more than to turn OFF the
100V of the drum surface potential RL1 (main).
is detected more than 5 times.
When the error code is detected 5
times in succession, this error
code is displayed.
2 575

operation
Process SC29-10 Drum potential sensor (DPS) out- The main body Drum potential sensor (DPS)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- put abnormality. While in the drum stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
mality potential correction, a patch for to turn OFF the
control is not output with the V1 RL1 (main).
getting to more than 350V. When
this condition is detected 5 times
in succession, the error code is
displayed.
SC29-11 The data is defective. While in the
drum potential correction, no con-
vergence is obtained even after
correction is made more than 10
times. When this condition is
detected 5 times in succession,
the error code is displayed.
SC29-12 Auto adjustment monitor value Error code is not High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
abnormality. No convergence is displayed on the
made in the auto adjustment of operation panel,
the transfer current. but displayed only
SC29-13 Auto adjustment monitor value on the data collec-
abnormality. No convergence is tion, the list output
made in the auto adjustment of and the CSRC.
the separation (AC) current. The control of the
SC29-14 Auto adjustment monitor value main body is
abnormality. No convergence is made by using a
made in the auto adjustment of data previously
the separation (DC) current. obtained.
SC29-15 Auto adjustment monitor value High voltage unit /1 (HV1)

abnormality. No convergence is
made in the auto adjustment of
the developing bias.
SC29-16 Drum charger capacity deteriora- The main body Drum
tion abnormality. When the stops immediately Drum potential sensor (DPS)
charger grid/developing bias is in to turn OFF the
excess of the limit of correction, RL1 (main).
lower the developing potential/
fogging margin potential in steps
of 50V. And as a result, less than
50V of the difference with the tar-
get charger potential is detected
10 times in succession.
576

operation
Fan SC32-01 The rotation of the IPB cooling fan The main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnor- (FM12) is checked, and the 24V stops immediately 1)
mality power source is also checked. An to turn OFF the
abnormal signal condition occurs RL1 (main).
FM12 is turned ON. This abnormal
condition recurs even a specified
period of time after FM12 is turned
OFF and then turned ON, and an
error detection signal (24V cut off)
is detected.
SC32-02 The blowout of a fuse for the IPB AC drive board (ACDB)
cooling fan (FM12) in the AC drive IPB cooling fan (FM12)
board (ACDB) is checked.
An abnormal condition occurs
with the FM12 EM signal a speci-
fied period of time after FM12 is
turned ON. This abnormal condi-
tion recurs even a specified period
of time after FM12 is turned OFF
and then turned ON, and an error
fuse) is detected with the 24V nor-
mal.
SC32-03 The rotation of the IPB cooling fan
(FM12) is checked.
detection signal (24V cut off/blow-
out of a fuse) is not detected.
SC32-04 When the print is started, the EM Error code is not AC drive board (ACDB)
signal of the PB cooling fan displayed on the IPB cooling fan (FM12)
(FM12) turns ON. operation panel,
but displayed only
on the data collec-
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
577

operation
Fan SC32-05 The rotation of the pump cooling The main body DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- fan (FM11) is checked, and the stops immediately 2)

mality 24V power source is also to turn OFF the
detection signal (24V cut off) is
detected.
SC32-06 The blowout of a fuse for the Pump cooling fan (FM11)
pump cooling fan (FM11) in the Printer control board (PRCB)
checked.
fuse) is detected.
SC32-07 The rotation of the pump cooling Pump cooling fan (FM11)
fan (FM11) is checked. Printer control board (PRCB)
578

operation
Fan SC32-09 The rotation of the transfer/sepa- The main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnor- ration suction fan (FM4) is stops immediately 1)
mality checked, and the 24V power to turn OFF the
source is also checked. RL1 (main).
with the FM4 EM signal a specified
ON. This abnormal condition
recurs even a specified period of
time after FM4 is turned OFF and
then turned ON, and an error
detected.
SC32-10 The blowout of a fuse for the Transfer/separation suction
transfer/separation suction fan fan (FM4)
(FM4) in the printer control board Printer control board (PRCB)
(PRCB) is checked.
mal.
SC32-11 The rotation of the transfer/sepa- Transfer/separation suction
ration suction fan (FM4) is fan (FM4)
checked. Printer control board (PRCB)
579

operation
Fan SC32-12 The rotation of the developing The main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- suction fan (FM5) is checked, and stops immediately 1)

mality the 24V power source is also to turn OFF the
detected.
SC32-13 The blowout of a fuse for the Developing suction fan
developing suction fan (FM5) in (FM5)
checked.
mal.
SC32-14 The rotation of the developing Developing suction fan
suction fan (FM5) is checked. (FM5)
An abnormal condition occurs Printer control board (PRCB)
580

operation
Fan SC32-15 The rotation of the paper exit cool- The main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnor- ing fan /1 (FM9) is checked, and stops immediately 1)
detected.
SC32-16 The blowout of a fuse for the Paper exit cooling fan /1
paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM9) in (FM9)
checked.
mal.
SC32-17 The rotation of the paper exit cool- Paper exit cooling fan /1
ing fan /1 (FM9) is checked. (FM9)
581

operation
Fan SC32-18 The rotation of the paper exit cool- The main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- ing fan /2 (FM10) is checked, and stops immediately 1)

detected.
SC32-19 The blowout of a fuse for the Paper exit cooling fans /2
paper exit cooling fans /2 (FM10) (FM10), /3 (FM28)
and /3 (FM28) in the printer control
mal.
SC32-20 The rotation of the paper exit cool- Paper exit cooling fans /2
ing fans /2 (FM10) and /3 (FM28) (FM10), /3 (FM28)
is checked.
582

operation
Fan SC32-21 The rotation of the paper feed The main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnor- assist fan /Fr1 (FM20) is checked, stops immediately 1)
mality and the 24V power source is also to turn OFF the
detected.
SC32-22 The blowout of a fuse for the Paper feed assist fan /Fr1
paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM20) (FM20)
in the printer control board (PRCB) Printer control board (PRCB)
is checked.
mal.
SC32-23 The rotation of the paper feed Paper feed assist fan /Fr1
assist fan /Fr1 (FM20) is checked. (FM20)
583

operation
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- assist fan /Rr1 (FM21) is checked, stops immediately 1)

detected.
SC32-25 The blowout of a fuse for the Paper feed assist fan /Rr1
paper feed assist fan /Rr1 (FM21) (FM21)
is checked.
mal.
SC32-26 The rotation of the paper feed Paper feed assist fan /Rr1
assist fan /Rr1 (FM21) is checked. (FM21)
584

operation
Main body
1050e/1050eP
detected.
is checked.
fuse) is detected.
585

operation
Main body
/1050e/1050eP

detected.
is checked.
mal.
586

operation
PF
1050e/1050eP
detected.
in the printer control board (PRCB) PF drive board (PFUDB)
is checked.
mal.
An abnormal condition occurs PF drive board (PFUDB)
587

operation
PF
/1050e/1050eP

detected.
is checked.
mal.
588

operation
PF
1050e/1050eP
detected.
is checked.
mal.
589

operation
PF
/1050e/1050eP

detected.
is checked.
mal.
590

operation
PF
1050e/1050eP
detected.
is checked.
mal.
and then turned ON, and no error
out of a fuse) is detected.
591

operation
PF
/1050e/1050eP

detected.
is checked.
mal.
592

operation
Fan SC32-51 The rotation of the cooling fan The main body DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
PF
1050e/1050eP
abnor- (FM20) is checked, and the 24V stops immediately 2)
mality power source is also checked. to turn OFF the
An abnormal condition occurs RL1 (main).
detected.
SC32-52 The blowout of a fuse for the cool- Cooling fan (FM20)
ing fan (FM20) in the printer con- PF drive board (PFUDB)
trol board (PRCB) is checked.
mal.
SC32-53 The rotation of the cooling fan
Main body
(FM20) is checked.
593

operation
Fan SC32-54 The rotation of the power supply The main body DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- cooling fan /3 (FM27) is checked. stops immediately 2)

mality An abnormal condition occurs to turn OFF the
with the FM27 EM signal a speci- RL1 (main).
and then turned ON, and no error
out of a fuse) is detected.
SC32-55 The EM signal of the power supply Error code is not
cooling fan /3 (FM27) is ON when displayed on the
starting the print. operation panel,
but displayed only
on the data collec-
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
ADU SC33-01 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body ADU drive board /2
sec- motor of the registration section in stops immediately (ADUDB2)
tion the ADU drive board /2 (ADUDB2) to turn OFF the ADU conveyance motor /2
motor is checked. RL1 (main). (M16)
abnor- An error detection signal (blowout Registration motor (M17)
mality of a fuse) of the ADU conveyance Loop motor (M18)
motor /2 (M16)/ registration motor
(M17)/loop motor (M18) is
detected after the print is started.
At this time, the closing of the
door detection/PFU door is
detected 10 times in succession.
594

operation
ADU SC33-02 The blowout of a fuse for the ADU The main body ADU drive board /1
Main body
1050e/1050eP
sec- motor in the ADU drive board /1 stops immediately (ADUDB1)
tion (ADUDB1) is checked. to turn OFF the Reverse/exit motor (M13)
motor An error detection signal (blowout RL1 (main). ADU accelerate motor (M14)
abnor- of a fuse) of the reverse/exit motor ADU conveyance motor /1
mality (M13)/ADU acceleration motor (M15)
(M14)/ ADU conveyance motor /1 ADU reverse motor (M12)
(M15)/ADU reverse motor (M12) is
detected after the print is started.
At this time, the closing of the
door detection/PFU door is
detected 10 times in succession.
SC33-04 The blowout of a fuse for the Printer control board (PRCB)
transfer assist motor (M19) in the Transfer assist motor (M19)
checked.
When M19 turns ON from OFF, an
error detection signal (blowout of a
fuse) is detected. At this time, the
closing of the door is detected 10
times in succession.
SC33-05 The blowout of a fuse for the web DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
motor (M24) in the printer control 2)
board (PRCB) is checked, and the
24V power source is also
checked.
When M24 turn ON from OFF,
error detection signals (blowout of
a fuse and the 24V cut off) are
detected.
SC33-06 The blowout of a fuse for the web Printer control board (PRCB)
motor (M24) in the printer control Web motor (M24)
When M24 turns ON from OFF, an
fuse) is detected. At this time, an
is not detected.
595

operation
Fusing SC34-01 Thermistor /1 (TH1) high tempera- The main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
high tem- ture detection (software). stops immediately AC drive board (ACDB)
perature TH1 detects a temperature of to turn OFF the Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
abnor- 210°C or above 5 times in a RL1 (main). Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3)
mality period of 1 second. Fusing heater lamp /3 (L4)
SC34-02 Thermistor /3 (TH3) high tempera- Thermistor /1 (TH1)
ture detection (software). Thermistor /2 (TH2)
TH3 detects a temperature of Thermistor /3 (TH3)
230°C or above 5 times in a Thermistor /4 (TH4)
period of 1 second. Caution:
SC34-03 Thermistor /1 (TH1) high tempera- • When SC34-**, SC35-
ture detection (hardware). ** or SC36-** (fusing
An abnormal condition is detected temperature related
with the fusing error detection sig- abnormalities) occur,
nal 1. be sure to repair
defective parts before
SC34-04 Thermistor /3 (TH3) high tempera-
setting the software
ture detection (hardware). An
DIPSW3-1 to 0. Set-
abnormal condition is detected
ting the DIPSW3-1 to
with the fusing error detection sig-
0 with defective parts
nal 4.
not repaired may
Fusing SC35-01 Thermistor /1 (TH1) low tempera-
result in a fire.
low tem- ture detection (software). TH1
perature does not get to 50°C when a
abnor- specified period of time elapses
mality after the main switch (SW1) is
turned ON for the fusing ON con-
trol.
SC35-02 Thermistor /3 (TH3) low tempera-
ture detection (software). TH3
does not get to 50°C when a
specified period of time elapses
after the main switch (SW1) is
turned ON for the fusing ON con-
trol.
Fusing SC36-01 Thermistor /1 (TH1) high tempera-
sensor ture detection (long time/soft-
abnor- ware). TH1 detects a temperature
mality of 200°C or above 30 times in a
row in a period of 1 second.
SC36-02 Thermistor /3 (TH3) high tempera-
ture detection (long time/soft-
ware). TH3 detects a temperature
of 220°C or above 30 times in a
row in a period of 1 second.
596

operation
Fusing SC36-03 Thermistor /1 (TH1) low tempera- The main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
sensor ture detection (hardware). TH1 stops immediately AC drive board (ACDB)
abnor- detects an abnormal condition to turn OFF the Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
mality with the fusing error detection sig- RL1 (main). Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3)
nal 2. Fusing heater lamp /3 (L4)
SC36-04 Thermistor /1 (TH1) low tempera- Thermistor /1 (TH1)
ture detection (hardware). TH3 Thermistor /2 (TH2)
detects an abnormal condition Thermistor /3 (TH3)
with the fusing error detection sig- Thermistor /4 (TH4)
nal 5. Caution:
SC36-05 Thermistor /3 (TH3) low tempera- • When SC34-**, SC35-
ture detection (hardware). TH1 ** or SC36-** (fusing
detects an abnormal condition temperature related
with the fusing error detection sig- abnormalities) occur,
nal 3. be sure to repair
defective parts before
SC36-06 Thermistor /3 (TH3) low tempera-
setting the software
ture detection (hardware). TH3
DIPSW3-1 to 0. Set-
detects an abnormal condition
ting the DIPSW3-1 to
with the fusing error detection sig-
0 with defective parts
nal 6.
not repaired may
result in a fire.
Scanner SC41-01 It is checked that the movement DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
abnor- time for the scanner motor (M27) 1)
mality is over, and the 24V power source
is also checked. The scanner
home sensor (PS51) or the APS
sensor /1 (PS52) does not turn
ON within a specified period of
time after the home position
search is started. And an error
detected with the scanner motor
(M27).
SC41-02 The blowout of a fuse for the Scanner drive board (SDB)
scanner motor (M27) in the scan- Scanner motor (M27)
ner drive board (SDB) is checked.
The scanner home sensor (PS51)
or the APS sensor /1 (PS52) does
period of time after the home posi-
tion search is started. And an error
fuse) is detected with M27. At this
(24V cut off) is not detected with
the M27.
2 597

operation
Scanner SC41-03 The time for the movement of the The main body Scanner drive board (SDB)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- scanner motor (M27) is over. The stops immediately Scanner motor (M27)
mality scanner home sensor (PS51) or to turn OFF the Scanner home sensor
the APS sensor /1 (PS52) does RL1 (main). (PS51)
period of time after the home posi-
tion search is started. And an error
fuse/24V cut off) is not detected
with the M27.
Write SC41-10 The abnormal speed of the poly- DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
abnor- gon motor (M21) is checked, and 1)
mality the 24V power source is also
checked. When switching the
speed of M21, the lock signal of
M21 is not detected within a
switchover is started, and an error
detected.
SC41-11 The abnormal speed of the poly- Polygon motor (M21)
gon motor (M21) is checked. Printer control board (PRCB)
When switching the speed of
M21, the lock signal of M21 is not
of time after the switchover is
started.
Fan SC42-01 The rotation of the scanner cool- DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
abnor- ing fan (FM19) is checked, and 2)
mality 24V power source is also
checked. An abnormal condition
occurs with the FM19 EM signal a
specified period of time after
FM19 turns ON. This abnormal
is detected.
598

operation
Fan SC42-02 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Scanner drive board (SDB)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnor- scanner cooling fan (FM19) in the stops immediately Scanner cooling fan (FM19)
mality scanner drive board (SDB) is to turn OFF the
checked. An abnormal condition RL1 (main).
is not detected.
SC42-03 The rotation of the scanner cool- Scanner cooling fan (FM19)
ing fan (FM19) is checked. An
abnormal condition occurs with
the FM19 EM signal a specified
period of time after FM19 turns
SC42-04 The rotation of the suction fan /1 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(FM6) is checked, and 24V power 2)
source is also checked. An abnor-
mal condition occurs with the FM6
EM signal a specified period of
time after FM6 turns ON. This
abnormal condition recurs even a
specified period of time after FM6
is turned OFF and then turned
ON, and an error detection signal
599

operation
Fan SC42-05 The blowout of a fuse for the suc- The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- tion fan /1 (FM6) in the AC drive stops immediately Suction fan /1 (FM6)
mality board (ACDB) is checked. An to turn OFF the
abnormal condition occurs with RL1 (main).
period of time after FM6 turns ON.
This abnormal condition recurs
even a specified period of time
after FM6 is turned OFF and then
turned ON, and an error detection
signal (blowout of a fuse) is
detected. At this time, an error
detection signal (24V cut off) is not
detected.
SC42-06 The rotation of the suction fan /1
(FM6) is checked. An abnormal
condition occurs with the FM6 EM
signal a specified period of time
after FM6 turns ON. This abnor-
mal condition recurs even a speci-
turned OFF and then turned ON,
and an error detection signal (24V
cut off/blowout of a fuse) is not
detected.
SC42-07 The EM signal of the suction fan /1 Suction fan /1 (FM6)
(FM6) is ON when the printing is
started.
SC42-08 The rotation of the suction fans /2 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(FM7) and /3 (FM8) is checked, 2)
and the 24V power source is also
occurs with the FM7/FM8 EM sig-
nal a specified period of time after
FM7/FM8 turns ON. This abnor-
fied period of time after FM7/FM8
600

operation
Fan SC42-09 The blowout of a fuse for the suc- The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnor- tion fans /2 (FM7) and /3 (FM8) in stops immediately Suction fan /2 (FM7)
mality the AC drive board (ACDB) is to turn OFF the Suction fan /3 (FM8)
checked. An abnormal condition RL1 (main).
occurs with the FM7/FM8 EM sig-
nal a specified period of time after
FM7/FM8 turns ON. This abnor-
(blowout of a fuse) is detected. At
this time an error detection signal
(24V cut off) is not detected.
SC42-10 The rotation of the suction fans /2
(FM7) and /3 (FM8) is checked. An
the FM7/FM8 EM signal a speci-
turns ON. This abnormal condition
time after FM7/FM8 is turned OFF
SC42-16 The rotation of the polygon cool- DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
ing fan (FM18) is checked, and the 2)
24V power source is also
is detected.
601

operation
Fan SC42-17 The blowout of a fuse for the poly- The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- gon cooling fans (FM18) in the AC stops immediately Polygon cooling fan (FM18)
mality drive board (ACDB) is checked. to turn OFF the
An abnormal condition occurs RL1 (main).
fied period of time after FM18
turns ON. This abnormal condition
is not detected.
SC42-18 Rotation of the polygon cooling
fans (FM18) is checked. An abnor-
mal condition occurs with the
FM18 EM signal a specified period
of time after FM18 turns ON. This
abnormal condition recurs even a
FM18 is turned OFF and then
signal (24V cut off/blowout of a
SC42-19 The EM signal of the polygon Error code is not Polygon cooling fan (FM18)
cooling fan (FM18) is ON when the displayed on the
printing is started. operation panel,
but displayed only
on the data collec-
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
602

operation
Image SC46-01* APC abnormality. While in the If there is a copy Write unit
Main body
1050e/1050eP
pro- image write, APC is not applicable being made, the Power connector of the
cess- for the correction of the sub scan main body com- image processing board
ing beam. Due to the 12V DC power pletes the paper (IPB)
abnor- for the laser drive not supplied, the exit before stop-
mality MPC being wrong and the laser ping operations.
defective, the laser does not light Turn OFF the RL1
up. (main).
Also, due to the rotation of the
polygon mirror unavailable, the
displacement of the index sensor,
and the index sensor being defec-
tive, the index sensor cannot
detect the laser.
SC46-02* Scanner FIFO abnormality. FIFO Image processing board
address abnormality for the scan- (IPB)
ner.
While in the image read, the com-
pression of image data that is read
in is not correctly terminated.
SC46-03* FIFO address abnormality for the
printer.
While in the image write, the
expansion processing of image
data that is read in is not correctly
terminated.
SC46-05* Compression input FIFO abnor-
mality. An error interrupt occurs
with the compression/expansion
chip FIFO.
SC46-06* Elongation abnormality. Due to the
elongation of data the compres-
sion of which is not completed,
the destruction of the compressed
data and the abnormal length of
data, an elongation abnormality is
detected.
SC46-08* Index sensor abnormality. While in Write unit
the execution of APC, no change Power connector of the
is found in the output of the index image processing board
sensor. (IPB)
SC46-12* SVV length abnormality. After Image processing board
negation of SVV, the compression (IPB)
of images that are read in and their
development into the page mem-
ory are not terminated within a
603

operation
Image SC46-13* Scanner time out. While in the If there is a copy Image processing board
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
pro- image read, the compression pro- being made, the (IPB)
cess- cessing from the scanner into the main body com- ADF
ing memory does not terminate within pletes the paper Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- a specified period of time. The exit before stop-
mality development from the scanner ping operations.
into the page memory does not Turn OFF the RL1
terminate within a specified period (main).
of time. The SVV is not detected
within a specified period of time.
SC46-14* Printer time out. While in the Image processing board
image write, the expansion pro- (IPB)
cessing from the memory to the Printer control board (PRCB)
printer does not terminate within a
The output from the page memory
to the printer does not terminate
The PVV is not detected within a
SC46-15* Expansion device access abnor- Image processing board
mality. While in the image write, (IPB)
despite of no resource provided, Image processing program
an inappropriate processing such
as accessing to the elongation
device is made.
SC46-16* Compression device access
abnormality. When writing images,
in spite of no resource provided,
an inappropriate processing such
as an access to the compression
device is made.
SC46-17* Filter coefficient abnormality.
When processing images, a filter
coefficient cannot be created nor-
mally.
SC46-19* When accessing to the memory
device, a defective software is
detected.
604

operation
Image SC46-21* Memory time out. The expansion If there is a copy Image processing board
Main body
1050e/1050eP
pro- processing from the memory to being made, the (IPB)
cess- the pate memory is not terminated main body com- Image processing program
ing within a specified period of time. pletes the paper Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- The compression processing from exit before stop-
mality the page memory to the memory ping operations.
is not terminated within a specified Turn OFF the RL1
period of time. (main).
The development from the mem-
ory into the page memory is not
terminated within a specified
period of time. The transmission of
the compressed data from mem-
ory to memory is not terminated
SC46-23* SVV off abnormality. While in the Image processing board
image read, SVV does not turn (IPB)
OFF within a specified period of
time and the preparation for scan-
ning the next page cannot be
started.
SC46-24* Shading correction abnormality Image processing board
(GA abnormality). (IPB)
SC46-25* AOC/AGC adjustment level abnor- Image processing program
mality.
• The light blocking cover at the
read section and the lens
cover are removed.
• The connector of the A/D con-
verter board is disconnected.
• The power cable of the A/D
converter board is unplugged.
• The IC protector of the A/D
converter board is cut off.
• The light volume of the expo-
sure lamp is excessive.
• The exposure lamp does not
light up.
605

operation
Image SC46-26 The adjustment data evacuated Error code is not Image processing board
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
pro- by resolutions is not available. displayed on the (IPB)

cess- operation panel,
ing but displayed only
abnor- SC46-27 A density conversion gamma on the data collec-
mality curve cannot be created normally. tion, the list output
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
SC46-31* Despite of the MPC not being ter- If there is a copy Image processing board
minated, the initial sampling of the being made, the (IPB)
APC is attempted. main body com- Image processing program
SC46-32* While executing the APC, the exe- pletes the paper
cution of the MPC is attempted. exit before stop-
SC46-35* Sequentially shot page area ping operations.
abnormality. Due to an image area Turn OFF the RL1
abnormality on the memory, (main).
images cannot be developed on
the memory.
SC46-36* Initial APC timing abnormality. The Write section
PVV is turned ON before the initial Printer control program
APC start processing is com- Image processing program
pleted.
SC46-40 Hard disk initialization abnormality. The main body Image processing board
The hard disk is defective, or the stops immediately (IPB)
connector is poorly connected. to turn OFF the Image processing program
(1050,1050e only) RL1 (main). Hard disk /1 (HDD1)
SC46-41 The JOB information cannot be
stored on the hard disk.
(1050,1050e only)
SC46-42 While in a periodical cleaning,
opening the rote to hard disk is
not succeed. (1050,1050e only)
SC46-43 Hard disk access defective.
The hard disk is defective or the
connector is connected improp-
erly. (1050,1050e only)
SC46-50 Communication error is detected Image processing board
during tandem operation. (IPB)
SC46-51 Communication error is detected Image processing program
during tandem image transmis-
sion.
606 2

operation
Image SC46-61 The scan operation starts before Error code is not ADF
Main body
1050e/1050eP
pro- the original skew adjustment is displayed on the Original skew sensor /Fr
cess- terminated. (The skew adjustment operation panel, (PS312), /Rr (PS311)
ing is too late.) but displayed only
abnor- SC46-62 The print operation starts before on the data collec- Centering sensor (PS54)
mality the paper mis-centering adjust- tion, the list output
ment is terminated. (The mis-cen- and the CSRC.
tering adjustment is too late.) The control of the
SC46-63 The AGC is retried due to the main body is Exposure lamp (L1)
decreased light volume of the made by using a
exposure lamp. However, no error data previously
occurs. obtained.
SC46-64 A PWM gamma curve is not cre- Toner control sensor board
ated properly. (TCSB)
SC46-66 Shift amount abnormality while in
the repeat (when the width is
specified, or in the auto mode).
When the shift amount while in the
repeat is negative (-).
SC46-80* The message queue is insufficient If there is a copy Image processing program
or destroyed. being made, the
SC46-81* The parameter value is in excess main body com- Image processing board
of the permissible limits. pletes the paper (IPB)
SC46-82* The ID of the task that sends the exit before stop-
message queue is undefined. ping operations.
Turn OFF the RL1
SC46-83* The receiving event of the mes-
(main).
sage is undefined.
SC46-90* Memory access abnormality.
SC46-91* Header readout address abnor-
mality.
SC46-99* DIMM memory abnormality. An
error is detected in the DIMM
memory check at the start.
IC SC49-01 Printer controller initial communi- The main body IC board (ICB)
Con- cation abnormality stops immediately Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
troller SC49-03 Transfer error to the main body to turn OFF the IC board (ICB)
abnor- image memory RL1 (main).
mality SC49-04 Hard disc /2 (HDD2) abnormality IC board (ICB)
Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
SC49-05 IC cooling fan (FM24) lock abnor- IC board (ICB)
mality
SC49-06 Unregulations IP error. –
SC49-07 The CF version is different from Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
the version information in the hard format HDD2
disc /2 (HDD2).
2 607

operation
IC SC49-08 While in the security ON, the The main body Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
Con- unlock of the HDD results in a fail- stops immediately format HDD2
troller ure due to the mismatched pass- to turn OFF the
abnor- word of the hard disk /2 (HDD2). RL1 (main).
mality SC49-09 Unlocked hard disk/2 (HDD2) is
detected when security turns ON.
SC49-10 An unformatted hard disc /2
(HDD2) is detected.
Drive SC50-01* Main body drive serial input abnor- Printer control board (PRCB)
abnormality 1. PF drive board (PFUDB)
mality In the I/O initial communication The connector between the
check in the printer control board PF and the main body.
(PRCB) from the power on ACK, a
serial data is not received from the
main body drive unit within a
SC50-02* Main body drive serial input abnor-
mality 2.
In the I/O initial communication
check in the printer control board
mality 3.
mality 4.
Commu- SC50-05* Drive communication reception
nication error detection abnormality.
abnor- SC50-06* Drive communication reception Printer control board (PRCB)
mality error detection abnormality.
SC50-07* Drive communication reception
error detection abnormality.
608 2

operation
Commu- SC50-08* Drive communication reception The main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
nication error detection abnormality. stops immediately
abnor- SC50-10 When the power switch is turned to turn OFF the Printer control board (PRCB)
mality ON, the printer control board RL1 (main). Image processing board
(PRCB) cannot receive initial data (IPB)
from the image processing board
(IPB) within a specified period of
time.
SC50-11 Any of the following error is Printer control board (PRCB)
detected during data reception Image processing board
between image processing board (IPB)
(IPB) and printer control board The connector between the
(PRCB). PRDB and the IPB.
• Data head error
• Data checksum error
• Undefined command recep-
tion error
• Occurrence of communica-
tion GA error vector
SC51-01* Drive communication reception Printer control board (PRCB)
error detection abnormality. PF drive board (PFUDB)
SC51-02* Drive communication reception The connector between the
error detection abnormality. PF and the main body.
SC51-03* Drive communication reception
error detection abnormality.
Fan SC52-01 The rotation of the cooling fan /1 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
abnor- (FM1) is checked, and +24V 2)
mality power source is also checked. An
signal (24V cut off) is detected.
2 609

operation
Fan SC52-02 The blowout of a fuse for the cool- The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- ing fan /1 (FM1) in the AC drive stops immediately Cooling fan /1 (FM1)
mality board (ACDB) is checked. An to turn OFF the Printer control board (PRCB)
detected.
SC52-03 Rotation of the cooling fan /1 AC drive board (ACDB)
(FM1) is checked. An abnormal Cooling fan /1 (FM1)
condition occurs with the FM1 EM Printer control board (PRCB)
detected.
SC52-04 The rotation of the cooling fan /2 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(FM2) is checked, and +24V 2)
power source is also checked. An
610

operation
Main body
1050e/1050eP
detected.
detected.
SC52-07 The rotation of the cooling fan /3 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(FM3) is checked, and +24V 2)
power source is also checked. An
611

operation
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
detected.
detected.
SC52-10 The EM signal of the cooling fan /1 Error code is not Cooling fan /1 (FM1)
(FM1) is ON when the print is displayed on the
started. operation panel,
SC52-11 The EM signal of the cooling fan /2 but displayed only Cooling fan /2 (FM2)
(FM2) is ON when the print is on the data collec-
started. tion, the list output
SC52-12 The EM signal of the cooling fan /3 and the CSRC. Cooling fan /3 (FM3)
(FM3) is ON when the print is The control of the
started. main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
Power SC53-01 A speed error signal of the fusing The main body Fusing motor (M1)
abnor- motor (M1) is checked. An error stops immediately
mality detection signal is detected twice to turn OFF the
in succession a specified period of RL1 (main).
time after M1 turns ON. (The first
signal is ignored.)
612

operation
Power SC53-02 The 24V power source for the total The main body DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnor- counter (CNT1) is checked. When stops immediately 2)
mality CNT1 is turned ON from OFF, an to turn OFF the
error detection signal (blowout of a RL1 (main).
fuse/24V cut off) is detected.
SC53-03 The blowout of a fuse for the total Main relay (RL1)
counter (CNT1) in the AC drive Total counter (CNT1)
board (ACDB) is checked. When AC drive board (ACDB)
CNT1 is turned ON from OFF, an
fuse) is detected. However, an
is not detected.
SC53-04 The 24V power source for the key DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
counter (CNT2) is checked. When 2)
fuse/24V cut off) is detected.
SC53-05 The blowout of a fuse for the key Key counter (CNT2)
counter (CNT2) in the AC drive
board (ACDB) is checked. When
fuse) is detected. However, an
is not detected.
SC53-06 The blowout of a 12V fuse for the AC drive board (ACDB)
AC drive board (ACDB) is
checked. In the serial initial com-
munication, a signal of the blow-
out of a 12V fuse (AC drive) is
detected.
SC53-07 The blowout of a 5V fuse for the
AC drive board (ACDB) is
checked. In the serial initial com-
munication, a signal of the blow-
out of a 5V fuse (AC drive) is
detected.
SC53-08 The 12V power source in the DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
printer control board (PRCB) is 1)
checked. An error detection signal Printer control board (PRCB)
of the 12V in PRCB is detected.
613

operation
Power SC53-11 The blowout of a SD/CL fuse in The main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
Main body
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- the tray is detected 1. The 24V stops immediately 1)

mality power source for the SD/CL in the to turn OFF the
printer control board (PRCB) is RL1 (main).
checked. At the start, an error
detection signal (blowout of a fuse
for the solenoid/clutch) is
detected, and an error detection
signal (24V cut off) is also
detected.
SC53-12 The blowout of a SD/CL fuse in Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4), /
the tray is detected 2. The blow- 2 (CL6)
out of a fuse for the SD/CL in the Separation clutch /1 (CL5), /
printer control board (PRCB) is 2 (CL7)
checked. At the start, an error Printer control board (PRCB)
detection signal (blowout of a fuse
for the solenoid/clutch) is
detected. However, an error
detected.
SC53-13 The blowout of a fuse for SD/CL in DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
the vertical conveyance is 1)
detected 1. The 24V power
source for SD/CL in the printer
control board (PRCB) is checked.
At the start, an error detection sig-
nal (blowout of a fuse for the sole-
noid/clutch) is detected, and an
is detected.
SC53-14 The blowout of a fuse for SD/CL in Tray lock solenoid /1 (SD1),
the vertical conveyance is /2 (SD2), /3 (SD5)
detected 2. The blowout of a fuse Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
for SD/CL in the printer control Pre-registration clutch /1
board (PRCB) is checked. At the (CL1), /2 (CL3)
start, an error detection signal Vertical conveyance clutch
(blowout of a fuse for the solenoid/ (CL2)
clutch) is detected. However, an Printer control board (PRCB)
is not detected.
614

operation
Power SC53-15 The blowout of a fuse for SD/CL in The main body PF drive board (PFUDB)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
abnor- the PF is detected 1. The 24V stops immediately
mality power source for SD/CL in the PF to turn OFF the
drive board (PFUCB) is checked. RL1 (main).
At the start, an error detection sig-
nal (blowout of a fuse for the sole-
noid/clutch) is detected, and an
is detected.
SC53-16 The blowout of a fuse for SD/CL in
the PF is detected 2. The blowout
of a fuse for SD/CL in the PF drive
board (PFUDB) is checked. At the
start, an error detection signal
(blowout of a fuse for the solenoid/
motor) is detected. However, an
is not detected.
SC53-17 The blowout of the sensor 5VICP Printer control board (PRCB)
is detected. An error detection
signal of the blowout of the 5VICP
is detected.
SC53-18 The fall-off of the erase lamp (EL) The main body Erase lamp (EL)
CN is detected. When turning ON stops immediately
the power, an error detection sig- to turn OFF the
nal (fall-off) is detected a specified RL1 (main).
period of time after the fall-off
detection control signal of the EL
CN turns ON.
SC53-19 An M5 EM error detection signal is Conveyance motor (M5)
detected twice in succession a Printer control board (PRCB)
SC53-20 An M31 EM error detection signal ADU reverse paper exit
is detected twice in succession a motor (M31)
specified period of time after the Printer control board (PRCB)
ADU reverse/exit motor (M31)
turns ON.
SC56-02 The communication between the Operation board /1 (OB1)
image processing board (IPB) and Overall control board
the operation board /1 (OB1) is (OACB)
checked. An initial communica-
tion from the main body to the
operation board is not sent within
30 seconds after the power is
turned ON.
615

operation
DF SC60-01* Although the main body sent out If there is a copy Image processing board
DF
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- data according to the data trans- being made, the (IPB)
mality mission request by the DF, the main body and the
same request is received again. DF complete the
SC60-02* When a checksum error or an paper exit before RADF control board
SRGA reception error was stopping opera- (ADFCB)
detected while in the reception in tions. Turn OFF
serial communication, a signal the RL1 (main).
was sent to make a request for
sending data again. And when
data is being received upon this
request, a checksum error or an
SRGA reception error is detected
again.
SC60-03* When the main power switch RADF control board
(SW1) is ON, there is no response (ADFCB)
to the initial communication
request from the main body to the
DF even after a specified period of
time elapses.
SC60-11 When the main power switch RADF control board
(SW1) is ON, a region into which (ADFCB)
no write was made by the ISW is RADF program
detected in the DF control pro-
gram.
SC67-01 Original registration sensor /Rt If there is a copy Original registration sensor /
(PS306) abnormality. being made, the Rt (PS306)
SC67-02 Original conveyance sensor main body com- Original conveyance sensor
(PS308) abnormality. pletes the paper (PS308)
SC67-03 Original reverse sensor (PS309) exit before stop- Original reverse sensor
abnormality. ping operations. (PS309)
Turn OFF the RL1
SC67-04 Non-volatile memory error RADF control board
(main).
(ADFCB)
SC67-05 Cooling fan /Lt (FM301) abnormal- Cooling fan /Lt (FM301)
ity.
SC67-06 Original reverse sensor (PS309) Original reverse sensor
abnormality. (PS309)
SC67-07 Original reverse/exit sensor Original reverse/exit sensor
(PS313) abnormality. (PS313)
SC67-08 Tray up/down motor (M303) Tray up/down motor (M303)
abnormality.
SC67-09 Original skew sensor /Fr (PS312) Original skew sensor /Fr
SC67-10 Original skew sensor /Rr (PS311) Original skew sensor /Rr
616

operation
DF SC67-11 Original registration sensor /Lt If there is a copy Original registration sensor /
DF
1050e/1050eP
abnor- (PS318) abnormality. being made, the Lt (PS318)
mality main body com-
SC67-12 Mis-centering sensor /Fr (PS320) pletes the paper Centering sensor /Fr
abnormality. exit before stop- (PS320)
SC67-13 Mis-centering sensor /Rr (PS321) ping operations. Centering sensor /Rr
abnormality. Turn OFF the RL1 (PS321)
(main).
SC67-14 Multi feed sensor /1 (MFS1) Multi feed sensor /1 (MFS1)
abnormality.
Commu- SC70-01 FS, FD, SD serial receive error. The main body , FNS control board (FNSCB)
FS, FD, SD
nication During re-transmission demand, the FS, The FD FD control board (FDCB)
abnor- either one of the error vector and the SD stop SD control board (SDCB)
mality occurrence or data checksum immediately to
error was continuously detected turn OFF the main
for specified time. relay (RL1).
SC70-02 FS, FD, SD start up response
error.
When there is no response to
operation starting order, even after
several retries.
LS SC76-01 The Stacker tray encoder sensor The main body Stacker tray up down motor
LS
abnor- (PS2) does not turn ON within a and the LS stop (M1)
mality specified period of time after the immediately to LS control board (LSCB)
stacker tray up down motor (M1) turn OFF the main
of the tandem (1st) LS turns ON. relay (RL1).
Or, the initial operation or the
stacker tray down operation is not
completed within a specified
period of time.
SC76-02 The shift unit home sensor (PS11) Shift unit motor (M5)
does not turn OFF within a speci- LS control board (LSCB)
fied period of time after the shift
unit motor (M5) of the tandem (1st)
LS turns ON. Or, PS11 does not
turn ON within a specified period
of time.
SC76-03 The alignment plate home sensor Alignment motor (M7)
(PS12) does not turn OFF within a LS control board (LSCB)
alignment motor (M7) of the tan-
dem (1st) LS turns ON. Or, PS12
does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time.
2 617

operation
LS SC76-04 The grip conveyance home sensor The main body Grip conveyance motor (M4)
LS
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- (PS5) does not turn ON within a and the LS stop

mality specified period of time after the immediately to
grip conveyance motor (M4) of the turn OFF the main
tandem (1st) LS turns ON. relay (RL1).
SC76-05 The stacker tray upper limit switch Stacker tray up down motor
(MS2) is ON when the stacker tray (M1)
up down motor (M1) of the tan- Stacker tray upper limit
dem (1st) LS is in the up opera- switch (MS2)
tion.
SC76-06 The stacker tray lower limit switch Stacker tray up down motor
dem (1st) LS is in the down opera- switch (MS3)
tion.
SC76-07 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Fr
detected for a specified period of (FM1)
time in succession while the paper LS control board (LSCB)
cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) of the
tandem (1st) LS is ON.
SC76-08 An error detection signal is Cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
detected for a specified period of LS control board (LSCB)
time in succession while the cool-
ing fan motor /1 (FM2) of the tan-
dem (1st) LS is ON.
SC76-09 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Mi
cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) of the
SC76-10 An error detection signal is Motor cooling fan motor
time in succession while the motor LS control board (LSCB)
cooling fan motor (FM4) of the tan-
dem (1st) LS is ON.
SC76-11 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Rr
cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) of the
618

operation
LS SC76-31 The stacker tray encoder sensor The main body Stacker tray up down motor
LS
1050e/1050eP
abnor- (PS2) does not turn ON a speci- and the LS stop (M1)
mality fied period of time after the immediately to LS control board (LSCB)
stacker tray up down motor (M1) turn OFF the main
of the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON. relay (RL1).
Or, the initial operation or the
stacker tray down operation is not
completed within a specified
period of time.
SC76-32 The shift unit home sensor (PS11) Shift unit motor (M5)
does not turn OFF within a speci- LS control board (LSCB)
fied period of time after the shift
unit motor (M5) of the tandem
(2nd) LS turns ON. Or, PS11 does
period of time.
(PS12) does not turn OFF within a LS control board (LSCB)
alignment motor (M7) of the tan-
dem (2nd) LS turns ON. Or, PS12
does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time.
SC76-34 The grip conveyance home sensor Grip conveyance motor (M4)
grip conveyance motor (M4) of the
tandem (2nd) LS turns ON.
SC76-35 The stacker tray upper limit switch Stacker tray up down motor
dem (2nd) LS is in the up opera- switch (MS2)
tion.
SC76-36 The stacker tray lower limit switch Stacker tray up down motor
up down motor (M1) of the tan- Stacker tray lower limit
dem (2nd) LS is in the down oper- switch (MS3)
ation.
SC76-37 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Fr
cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) of the
tandem (2nd) LS is ON.
619

operation
LS SC76-38 An error detection signal is The main body Paper cooling fan motor /1,
LS
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- detected for a specified period of and the LS stop /2 (FM2, FM6)
mality time in succession while the paper immediately to LS control board (LSCB)
cooling fan motor /1, /2 (FM2, turn OFF the main
FM6) of the tandem (2nd) LS is relay (RL1).
ON.
SC76-39 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Mi
cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) of the
SC76-40 An error detection signal is Motor cooling fan motor
time in succession while the motor LS control board (LSCB)
cooling fan motor (FM4) of the tan-
dem (2nd) LS is ON.
SC76-41 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Rr
cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) of the
FS SC77-01 The conveyance motor (M1) oper- The main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
FS
abnor- ates for more than the allowed and the FS stop FNS drive board (FNSDB)
mality time at a speed out of the speci- immediately to Conveyance motor (M1)
fied one. turn OFF the main
SC77-02 The tray up down motor (M3) relay (RL1). FNS control board (FNSCB)
does not turn OFF even when a FNS drive board (FNSDB)
specified period of time elapses Tray up down motor (M3)
after it starts operations. Or, it Tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
operates for more than the Tray lower limit sensor (PS3)
allowed time at a speed out of the
specified one.
SC77-03 The alignment home sensors /Rr FNS control board (FNSCB)
(PS8) and /Fr (PS31) do not turn FNS drive board (FNSDB)
ON within a specified period of Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
time after the home position Alignment motor /Fr (M22)
search operation of the alignment Alignment home sensor /Rr
motors /Rr (M5) and /Fr (M22) (PS8)
starts. Alignment home sensor /Fr
(PS31)
SC77-04 The main tray paper exit motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M7) operates for more than the FNS drive board (FNSDB)
allowed time at a speed out of the Main tray exit motor (M7)
specified one.
620

operation
FS SC77-05 The paper exit opening unit does The main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
FS
1050e/1050eP
abnor- not get to the specified opening and the FS stop FNS drive board (FNSDB)
mality position within a specified period immediately to Paper exit opening motor
of time after the paper exit open- turn OFF the main (M8)
ing motor (M8) starts operations. relay (RL1). Paper exit opening sensor
(PS12)
SC77-06 The stapler movement home sen- FNS control board (FNSCB)
sor (PS11) does not turn ON FNS drive board (FNSDB)
within a specified period of time Stapler movement motor
after the home position search (M11)
operation of the stapler movement Stapler movement home
motor (M11) starts. sensor (PS11)
SC77-07 The stapler rotation home sensor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(PS14) does not turn ON within a FNS drive board (FNSDB)
specified period of time after the Stapler rotation motor (M4)
home position search operation of Stapler rotation home sen-
the stapler rotation motor (M4) sor (PS14)
starts.
SC77-08 The stapler rotation home sensor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(PS14) does not turn OFF within a FNS drive board (FNSDB)
specified period of time after the Stapler rotation motor (M4)
home position search operation of Stapler rotation home sen-
the stapler rotation motor (M4) sor (PS14)
starts.
SC77-11 After the stapler motor /Fr (M31) FNS control board (FNSCB)
starts operations, it does not com- FNS drive board (FNSDB)
plete operations within a specified Stapler board (SB)
period of time, and the stapler Stapler motor /Fr (M31)
home sensor /Fr (PS41) does not Stapler home sensor /Fr
turn ON. (PS41)
SC77-12 After the stapler motor /Rr (M30) FNS control board (FNSCB)
starts operations, it does not com- FNS drive board (FNSDB)
plete operations within a specified Stapler board (SB)
period of time, and the stapler Stapler motor /Rr (M30)
home sensor /Rr (PS40) does not Stapler home sensor /Rr
turn ON. (PS40)
SC77-15 After the paper exit arm motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M23) starts operations, it does FNS drive board (FNSDB)
not complete operations within a Paper exit arm motor (M23)
specified period of time, and the Paper exit arm home sensor
paper exit arm sensor (PS9) does (PS9)
not turn ON. Or, it operates for
more than the allowed time at a
speed out of the specified one.
621

operation
FS SC77-21 After the home position search The main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
FS
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- operation of the rear stopper and the FS stop FNS drive board (FNSDB)
mality motor (M26) starts, the rear stop- immediately to Rear stopper motor (M26)
per home sensor (PS35) does not turn OFF the main Rear stopper home sensor
turn ON within a specified period relay (RL1). (PS35)
of time.
SC77-22 After the home position search FNS control board (FNSCB)
operation of the stack assist guide FNS drive board (FNSDB)
motor (M24) starts, the stack Stack assist guide motor
assist home sensor (PS32) does (M24)
not turn ON within a specified Stack assist home sensor
period of time. (PS32)
SC77-25 After the home position search FNS control board (FNSCB)
operation of the intermediate roller FNS drive board (FNSDB)
open close motor (M25) starts, the Intermediate roller open
intermediate roller home sensor close motor (M25)
(PS33) does not turn ON within a Intermediate roller home
specified period of time. sensor (PS33)
SC77-28 Data was resent according to the FNS control board (FNSCB)
re-dispatch request of communi-
cation data, but the error recurs.
FD SC77-30 After the 1st folding release motor The main body 1st folding release motor
FD
abnor- (M14) turns ON, the 1st folding and the FD stop (M14)
mality cam home sensor (PS55) does immediately to Folding drive board (FDB)
not turn ON within a specified turn OFF the main 1st folding cam home sen-
period of time. relay (RL1). sor (PS55)
SC77-31 After the 2nd folding release motor 2nd folding release motor
(M15) turns ON, the 2nd folding (M15)
cam home sensor (PS56) does Folding drive board (FDB)
not turn ON within a specified 2nd folding cam home sen-
period of time. sor (PS56)
SC77-32 After the 3rd folding release motor 3rd folding release motor
(M16) turns ON, the 3rd folding (M16)
cam home sensor (PS57) does Folding drive board (FDB)
not turn ON within a specified 3rd folding cam home sen-
period of time. sor (PS57)
SC77-33 The 2 holes punch home sensor Punch motor (M10)
(PS8) does not turn OFF within a Punch drive board (PDB)
specified period of time after the 2 2 holes punch home sensor
holes punch home position return (PS8)
operation starts. Or, after the
punch motor (M10) turns ON, the
2 holes punch home sensor (PS8)
does not turn OFF.
622

operation
FD SC77-34 The 3 holes/4 holes punch home The main body Punch motor (M10)
FD
1050e/1050eP
abnor- sensor (PS9) does not turn OFF and the FD stop Punch drive board (PDB)
mality within a specified period of time immediately to 3 holes/4 holes punch home
after the 3 holes/4 holes punch turn OFF the main sensor (PS9)
home position return operation relay (RL1).
starts. Or, after the punch motor
(M10) turns ON, the 3 holes/4
holes punch home sensor (PS9)
does not turn OFF.
(PS10) does not turn ON within a Punch drive board (PDB)
specified period of time after the Alignment plate home sen-
alignment plate home position sor (PS10)
return operation starts. Or, after
the alignment motor (M12) turns
ON, the alignment plate home
sensor (PS10) does not turn OFF.
SC77-36 The punch registration home sen- Punch registration motor
sor (PS11) does not turn ON (M13)
within a specified period of time Punch drive board (PDB)
after the punch registration claw Punch registration home
home position return operation sensor (PS11)
starts. Or, after the punch registra-
tion motor (M13) turns ON, the
punch registration home sensor
(PS11) does not turn OFF.
SC77-37 The main tray upper limit sensor Tray up down motor (M11)
(PS20) does not turn ON within a Main tray upper limit sensor
specified period of time after the (PS20)
main tray home position search Punch drive board (PDB)
starts. Or, after the tray up down
motor (M11) turns ON, the main
tray upper limit sensor (PS20)
does not turn OFF.
SC77-38 The main tray lower limit sensor Tray up down motor (M11)
(PS22) does not turn ON within a Punch drive board (PDB)
specified period of time after the Main tray lower limit sensor
tray up down motor (M11) is in the (PS22)
down operation.
623

operation
FD SC77-39 After the FD paper lift motor /Up The main body Paper lift motor /Up (M8)
FD
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- (M8) is in the down operation, the and the FD stop PI drive board (PIDB)
mality PI lift plate home sensor /Up immediately to PI lift plate home sensor /Up
(PS34) does not turn ON within a turn OFF the main (PS34)
specified period of time. Or, after relay (RL1). PI tray upper limit sensor /
the paper lift motor /Up (M8) is in Up (PS32)
the up operation, the PI tray upper
limit sensor /Up (PS32) does not
turn ON.
SC77-40 After the FD paper lift motor /Lw Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
(M9) is in the down operation, the PI drive board (PIDB)
PI lift plate home sensor /Lw PI lift plate home sensor /Lw
(PS40) does not turn ON within a (PS40)
specified period of time. Or, after PI tray upper limit sensor /
the paper lift motor /Lw (M9) is in Lw (PS38)
the up operation, the PI tray upper
limit sensor /Lw (PS38) does not
turn ON.
SC77-41 The entrance conveyance motor Entrance conveyance motor
(M1) detects an error detection (M1)
signal for a specified period of Punch drive board (PDB)
time in succession.
SC77-42 The intermediate conveyance Intermediate conveyance
motor (M3) detects an error detec- motor (M3)
tion signal for a specified period of Punch drive board (PDB)
time in succession.
SC77-43 The PI conveyance motor (M7) PI conveyance motor (M7)
detects an error detection signal PI drive board (PIDB)
for a specified period of time in
succession.
SC77-44 The main tray paper exit motor Main tray paper exit motor
(M17) detects an error detection (M17)
signal for a specified period of Punch drive board (PDB)
time in succession.
SC77-48 Resending of communication data Main body I/F wiring har-
due to an error is not available. ness
SC77-49 When non-volatile memory is FD control board (FDCB)
being accessed, no response is EEPROM
obtained for a specified period of
time.
SC77-58* When the FD is unready, a signal Software bug
to start operations is received from
the main body.
SC77-59* Communication error in FD
624 1

operation
SD SC77-60 Scraps press home sensor (PS48) The main body Bundle exit motor (M5)
SD
1050e/1050eP
abnor- does not turn ON within a speci- and the SD stop Scrap press home sensor
mality fied period of time after the bundle immediately to (PS48)
drive motor (M5) starts the home turn OFF the main SD control board (SDCB)
position search operation. relay (RL1). SD drive board (SDDB)
SC77-61 Folding main scan alignment Folding main scan alignment
home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) does not motor /Fr (M7)
turn ON within a specified period Folding main scan alignment
of time after the folding main scan home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)
alignment motor /Fr (M7) starts SD control board (SDCB)
the home position search opera- SD drive board (SDDB)
tion.
Or, even after a specified period of
time after M7 starts the operation,
it does not stop.
SC77-62 Folding exit home sensor (PS24) Folding sub scan alignment
does not turn ON within a speci- exit motor (M8)
fied period of time after the folding Folding exit home sensor
sub scan alignment paper exit (PS24)
motor (M8) starts the home posi- SD control board (SDCB)
tion search operation. SD drive board (SDDB)
time after M8 starts to decelerate,
it does not stop.
SC77-63 Saddle stitch alignment home Saddle stitching alignment
sensor /Rt (PS28) does not turn motor /Rt (M9)
ON within a specified period of Saddle stitching alignment
time after the saddle stitch align- home sensor /Rt (PS28)
ment motor /Rt (M9) starts the SD control board (SDCB)
home position search operation. SD drive board (SDDB)
time after M9 starts the operation,
it does not stop.
SC77-64 Bundle arm home sensor (PS32) Bundle arm motor (M10)
does not turned ON within a spec- Bundle arm home sensor
ified period of time after the bun- (PS32)
dle arm motor (M10) starts the SD control board (SDCB)
home position search operation. SD drive board (SDDB)
time after M10 starts the opera-
tion, it does not stop.
1 625

operation
SD SC77-65 Bundle clip upper limit sensor The main body Bundle clip motor (M11)
SD
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- (PS33) does not turned ON within and the SD stop Bundle clip upper limit sen-
mality a specified period of time after the immediately to sor (PS33)
bundle clip motor (M11) starts the turn OFF the main Bundle clip lower limit sen-
home position search operation. relay (RL1). sor (PS30)
Or, even after a specified period of SD control board (SDCB)
time after M11 starts the opera- SD drive board (SDDB)
SC77-66 Bundle registration home sensor Bundle registration motor
(PS34) does not turned ON within (M12)
a specified period of time after the Bundle registration home
bundle registration motor (M12) sensor (PS34)
starts the home position search SD control board (SDCB)
operation. SD drive board (SDDB)
SC77-67 Overlap home sensor (PS17) does Overlap motor (M13)
not turned ON within a specified Overlap home sensor
period of time after the overlap (PS17)
SC77-68 Folding main scan alignment Folding main scan alignment
home sensor /Rr (PS19) does not motor /Rr (M14)
turned ON within a specified Folding main scan alignment
period of time after the folding home sensor /Rr (PS19)
main scan alignment motor /Rr SD control board (SDCB)
(M14) starts the home position SD drive board (SDDB)
search operation.
SC77-69 Stapler moving home sensor Stapler movement motor
a specified period of time after the Stapler movement home
stapler moving motor (M15) starts sensor (PS25)
the home position search opera- SD control board (SDCB)
tion. SD drive board (SDDB)
626 1

operation
SD SC77-70 Saddle stitching alignment home The main body Saddle stitching alignment
SD
1050e/1050eP
abnor- sensor /Lt (PS29) does not turned and the SD stop motor /Lt (M16)
mality ON within a specified period of immediately to Saddle stitching alignment
time after the saddle stitching turn OFF the main home sensor /Lt (PS29)
alignment motor /Lt (M16) starts relay (RL1). SD control board (SDCB)
the home position search opera- SD drive board (SDDB)
tion.
SC77-71 Bundle press movement home Bundle press movement
sensor (PS36) does not turned ON motor (M17)
within a specified period of time Bundle press movement
after the bundle press movement home sensor (PS36)
SC77-72 1st folding blade home sensor /2 1st folding blade motor
a specified period of time after the 1st folding blade home sen-
1st folding blade motor (M18) sor /1 (PS20), /2 (PS21)
Or 1st folding blade home sensor
/1 (PS20) does not turned ON
after M18 starts the operation.
SC77-73 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 2nd folding blade motor
a specified period of time after the 2nd folding blade home
2nd folding blade motor (M19) sensor /1 (PS22), /2 (PS23)
Or the 2nd folding blade home
sensor /1 (PS22) does not turned
ON within a specified period of
tion.
1 627

operation
SD SC77-74 Clincher up down home sensor The main body Clincher up down motor
SD
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- (PS26) does not turned ON within and the SD stop (M20)
mality a specified period of time after the immediately to Clincher up/down home
clincher up down motor (M20) turn OFF the main sensor (PS26)
starts the home position search relay (RL1). SD control board (SDCB)
SC77-75 Saddle stitching press home sen- Saddle stitching press
sor (PS27) does not turned ON motor (M21)
within a specified period of time Saddle stitching press home
after the saddle stitching press sensor (PS27)
SC77-76 Bundle arm rotation home sensor Bundle arm rotation motor
a specified period of time after the Bundle arm rotation home
bundle arm rotation motor (M22) sensor (PS31)
SC77-77 Bundle press home sensor (PS37) Bundle press motor (M23)
does not turned ON within a spec- Bundle press home sensor
ified period of time after the bun- (PS37)
dle press motor (M23) starts the Bundle press lower limit
home position search operation. sensor (PS47)
Or, even after a specified period of SD control board (SDCB)
time after M23 starts the opera- SD drive board (SDDB)
SC77-78 Bundle press stage up down . Bundle press stage up
home sensor (PS35) does not down motor (M24)
turned ON within a specified Bundle press stage up
period of time after the bundle down home sensor (PS35)
press stage up down motor (M24) Bundle press stage up
starts the home position search down limit sensor (PS45)
operation. SD control board (SDCB)
Or PS35 or the bundle press SD drive board (SDDB)
stage up down upper limit sensor
(PS45) does not turned ON after a
specified period of time M24
starts the operation.
628 1

operation
SD SC77-79 Guide shaft home sensor (PS46) The main body Guide shaft motor (M25)
SD
1050e/1050eP
abnor- does not turned ON within a spec- and the SD stop Guide shaft home sensor
mality ified period of time after the guide immediately to (PS46)
shaft motor (M25) starts the home turn OFF the main SD control board (SDCB)
position search operation. relay (RL1). SD drive board (SDDB)
SC77-80 Stapler home sensor /Rt (HS1) or Stapler assembly /Rt
clincher start sensor /Rt (HS2) SD control board (SDCB)
does not turned ON within a spec- SD drive board (SDDB)
ified period of time after the stapler
motor /Rt (M29) starts the opera-
tion.
SC77-81 Stapler home sensor /Lt (HS3) or Stapler assembly /Lt
clincher start sensor /Lt (HS4) SD control board (SDCB)
does not turned ON within a spec- SD drive board (SDDB)
ified period of time after the stapler
motor /Lt (M30) starts the opera-
tion.
SC77-82 Trimmer blade motor (M31) does Trimmer blade motor (M31)
not turned OFF within a specified Trimmer blade home sensor
period of time after it turned ON. (PS50)
Trimmer blade upper limit
sensor (PS51)
SD control board (SDCB)
SD drive board (SDDB)
SC77-83 Trimmer press motor (M32) does Trimmer press motor (M32)
not turned OFF within a specified Trimmer press home motor
period of time after it turned ON. (PS53)
Trimmer press upper limit
sensor (PS52)
SC77-84 Bundle arm assist motor (M26) Bundle arm assist motor
does not turned OFF within a (M26)
specified period of time after it Bundle arm assist home
turned ON. sensor (PS38)
Bundle arm assist upper
limit sensor (PS39)
SC77-85 An error detection signal is Entrance conveyance motor
detected for a specified period of (M1)
time in succession while the SD control board (SDCB)
entrance conveyance motor (M1) SD drive board (SDDB)
is ON.
1 629

operation
SD SC77-86 An error detection signal is The main body Horizontal conveyance
SD
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- detected for a specified period of and the SD stop motor (M2)
mality time in succession while the hori- immediately to SD control board (SDCB)
zontal conveyance motor (M2) is turn OFF the main SD drive board (SDDB)
ON. relay (RL1).
SC77-87 An error detection signal is Folding entrance motor (M3)
detected for a specified period of SD control board (SDCB)
time in succession while the fold- SD drive board (SDDB)
ing entrance motor (M3) is ON.
SC77-88 An error detection signal is Folding conveyance motor
detected for a specified period of (M4)
time in succession while the fold- SD control board (SDCB)
ing conveyance motor (M4) is ON. SD drive board (SDDB)
SC77-89 An error detection signal is Bundle exit motor (M5)
detected for a specified period of SD control board (SDCB)
time in succession while the bun- SD drive board (SDDB)
dle exit motor (M5) is ON.
SC77-90 An error detection signal is detected Folding sub scan alignment
for a specified period of time in suc- exit motor (M8)
cession while the folding sub scan SD control board (SDCB)
alignment exit motor (M8) is ON. SD drive board (SDDB)
SC77-91 An error detection signal is Scraps removal fan motor
time in succession while the SD control board (SDCB)
scraps removal fan motor (FM1) is SD drive board (SDDB)
ON.
And normal operation is not
detected after the restart (retry).
(even after being started for the
specified times)
Or, an error detection is detected
at the start operation and normal
operation is not detected even
after the restart (retry). (normal
operation is not detected after the
start of the specified times after
error detection)
SC77-95 5VDC power supply error detec- SD drive board (SDDB)
tion signal is detected for a speci- SD control board (SDCB)
fied period of time in succession.
SC77-96 Resending of communication data SD control board (SDCB)
to the main body is not available
due to an error.
630 1

operation
SD SC77-97 When non-volatile memory is being The main body SD control board (SDCB)
SD
1050e/1050eP
abnor- accessed, no response is obtained and the SD stop EEPROM
mality for a specified period of time. immediately to
SC77-98* When the SD is unready, a signal turn OFF the main Software bug
to start operations is received from relay (RL1).
the main body.
SC77-99* Communication error in SD
PB SC78-01 After the main CPU in the PB con- The main body PB control board (PBCB)
PB
abnor- trol board (PBCB) sends an and the PB stop PB drive board (PBDB)
mality entrance conveyance start signal immediately to Entrance conveyance motor
to the sub CPU, a signal to notify turn OFF the main (M1)
the completion of the procvess is relay (RL1).
not returned to the main CPU
within a specified time period.
SC78-02 An error detection signal is PB control board (PBCB)
detected continuously for a speci- PB drive board (PBDB)
fied time period while the interme- Intermediate conveyance
diate conveyance motor (M2) is motor (M2)
driving.
SC78-04 After the main CPU on the PB PB control board (PBCB)
control board (PBCB) sends a SC PB drive board (PBDB)
entrance conveyance start signal SC entrance conveyance
to the sub CPU, a signal to notify motor (M11)
the completion of the process is
switchback conveyance start sig- SC switchback conveyance
nal to the sub CPU, a signal to motor (M12)
notify the completion of the pro-
cess is not returned to the main
CPU within a specified time
period.
SC78-06 The switchback roller release PB control board (PBCB)
operation has not completed PB drive board (PBDB)
within a specified time period after SC switchback release
the SC switchback release motor motor (M13)
(M13) turns ON.
control board (PBCB) sends an PB drive board (PBDB)
SC alignment start signal to the SC alignment motor (M15)
sub CPU, a signal to notify the
completion of the process is not
returned to the main CPU within a
specified time period.
2 631

operation
PB SC78-08 After the main CPU on the PB The main body PB control board (PBCB)
PB
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- control board (PBCB) sends an and the PB stop PB drive board (PBDB)
mality SC pages conveyance start signal immediately to SC bundle conveynace
to the sub CPU, a signal to notify turn OFF the main motor (M17)
the completion of the process is relay (RL1).
SC78-09 The SC roller release operation PB control board (PBCB)
has not completed within a speci- PB drive board (PBDB)
fied time period after the SC roller SC roller release motor
release motor (M18) turns ON. (M18)
SC78-10 The movement of the SC entrance PB control board (PBCB)
fied time period after the clamp Clamp entranse movement
entrance movement motor (M19) motor (M19)
turns ON.
SC78-11 The SC entrance roller release PB control board (PBCB)
operation has not completed PB drive board (PBDB)
within a specified time period after Clamp entranse roller
the clamp entrance roller release release motor (M20)
motor (M20) turns ON
SC78-12 After clamp alignment motor PB control board (PBCB)
(M21) turns on, the alignment PB drive board (PBDB)
operation is not complete within Clamp alignment motor
the specified time. (M21)
SC78-13 After clamp motor (M22) turns on, PB control board (PBCB)
the open/close process of the PB drive board (PBDB)
clamp section is not complete Clamp motor (M22)
within the specified time.
SC78-14 The rotation of the clamp section PB control board (PBCB)
fied time period after the clamp Clamp rotation motor (M23)
rotation motor (M23) turns ON.
SC78-15 The movement of the glue tank PB control board (PBCB)
fied time period after the glue tank Glue tank movement motor
movement motor (M31) turns ON. (M31)
fied time period while the glue Glue apply roller motor
apply roller motor (M32) is driving. (M32)
632 2

operation
PB SC78-17 The count of a specified number The main body PB control board (PBCB)
PB
1050e/1050eP
abnor- of pellets, which is counted by the and the PB stop PB drive board (PBDB)
mality pellet count sensor (PS37), has immediately to Pellet supply motor (M33)
not been reached after the pellet turn OFF the main
supply motor (M33) turns ON. The relay (RL1).
status was detected by a speci-
fied number of times in succes-
sion.
SC78-18 The movement of the pellet supply PB control board (PBCB)
arm has not completed within a PB drive board (PBDB)
specified time period after the pel- pellet supply arm motor
let supply arm motor (M34) turns (M34)
ON.
alignment start signal to the sub Cover paper alignment
CPU, a signal to notify the com- motor (M41)
pletion of the process is not
control board (PBCB) sends a PB drive board (PBDB)
book ejection start signal to the Book exit motor (M42)
sub CPU, a signal to notify the
completion of the process is not
control board (PBCB) sends a PB drive board (PBDB)
driven arm/Rt shaking operation Cover paper conveyance
start signal to the sub CPU, a sig- arm motor /Rt (M43)
nal to notify the completion of the
process is not returned to the
main CPU within a specified time
period.
SC78-22 After the main CPU in the PB con- PB control board (PBCB)
trol board (PBCB) sends a driven PB drive board (PBDB)
arm/Lt shaking operation start sig- Cover paper conveyance
nal to the sub CPU, a signal to arm motor /Lt (M44)
period.
2 633

operation
PB SC78-23 After the main CPU on the PB The main body PB control board (PBCB)
PB
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- control board (PBCB) sends a and the PB stop PB drive board (PBDB)
mality cover paper conveyance start sig- immediately to Cover paper conveyance
nal to the sub CPU, a signal to turn OFF the main motor (M45)
notify the completion of the pro- relay (RL1).
period.
SC78-24 The cover paper table up or down PB control board (PBCB)
movement has not completed PB drive board (PBDB)
within a specified time period after Cover paper table up down
the cover paper table up down motor /Fr (M46)
motor/Fr (M46) turns ON.
SC78-25 The cover paper table up or down PB control board (PBCB)
movement has not completed PB drive board (PBDB)
within a specified time period after Cover paper table up down
the cover paper table up down motor /Rr (M47)
motor/Rr (M47) turns ON.
SC78-26 The movement of the cover paper PB control board (PBCB)
folding plate/Rt has not completed PB drive board (PBDB)
within a specified time period after Cover paper folding motor /
the cover paper folding motor/Rt Rt (M48)
(M48) turns ON.
SC78-27 The movement of the cover paper PB control board (PBCB)
folding plate/Lt has not completed PB drive board (PBDB)
within a specified time period after Cover paper folding motor /
the cover paper folding motor/Lt Lt (M49)
(M49) turns ON.
SC78-28 The trimming of the cover paper PB control board (PBCB)
fied time period after the cutter Cutter motor (M50)
SC78-30 After the main CPU in the PB con- PB control board (PBCB)
trol board (PBCB) sends a car- PB drive board (PBDB)
riage belt driving operation start Book conveyance belt
signal to the sub CPU, a signal to motor (M61)
period.
SC78-31 The carriage section movement PB control board (PBCB)
according to paper size has not PB drive board (PBDB)
completed after the book convey- Book conveyance belt
ance belt movement motor (M62) movement motor (M62)
turns ON.
634 2

operation
PB SC78-32 The up/down process of the car- The main body PB control board (PBCB)
PB
1050e/1050eP
abnor- riage section has not completed and the PB stop PB drive board (PBDB)
mality within a specified time period after immediately to Book conveyance belt up
the cover paper conveyance belt turn OFF the main down motor (M63)
up/down motor (M63) turns ON. relay (RL1).
SC78-34 The pressing of the back edge of PB control board (PBCB)
the book process has not com- PB drive board (PBDB)
pleted within a specified time Book stopper motor (M65)
period after the book stopper
detected continuously for speci- PB drive board (PBDB)
fied time period while the cover Cover paper tray fan /1
paper tray fan/1 (M71) is started or (M71)
driving.
fied time period while the cover Cover paper tray fan /2
paper tray fan/2 (M72) is started or (M72)
driving.
SC78-37 The tray up movement has not PB control board (PBCB)
completed within a specified time PB drive board (PBDB)
period after the cover paper tray Cover paper tray lift motor
lift motor (M73) turns ON. (M73)
fied time period while the cover Cover paper feed motor
paper feed motor (M74) is driving. (M74)
fied time period while the ventila- Exhaust fan /1 (M80)
tion fan/1 (M80), /2 (M81) is Exhaust fan /2 (M81)
started of driving.
SC78-40 After the warm-up is started, tem- AC drive board (ACDB)
** perature detected by the glue tank Glue tank heater (H1)
temperature sensor /Md (TH3) has Glue apply roller heater (H2)
not risen to a prescribed level PB control board (PBCB)
within a specified time period. PB drive board (PBDB)
Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
Glue tank temperature sen-
sor /Md (TH3)
2 635

operation
PB SC78-41 After the warm-up is started, tem- The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
PB
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- ** perature detected by the glue tank and the PB stop Glue tank heater (H1)
mality temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) has immediately to Glue apply roller heater (H2)
not risen to a prescribed level turn OFF the main PB control board (PBCB)
within a specified time period. relay (RL1). PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
sor /Lw (TH4)
SC78-42 After the warm-up is started, tem- AC drive board (ACDB)
** perature detected by the glue Glue tank heater (H1)
apply roller temperature sensor Glue apply roller heater (H2)
(TH1) has not risen to a prescribed PB control board (PBCB)
level within a specified time PB drive board (PBDB)
period. Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
Glue apply roller tempera-
ture sensor (TH1)
SC78-43 After the pellet supply, tempera- AC drive board (ACDB)
** ture detected by the glue tank Glue tank heater (H1)
temperature sensor/Up (TH2) has Glue apply roller heater (H2)
not risen to a prescribed level PB control board (PBCB)
within a specified time period. PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
sor /Up (TH2)
SC78-44 During standby, after the glue tank AC drive board (ACDB)
** heater (H1) is turned ON, temper- Glue tank heater (H1)
ature detected by the glue tank Glue apply roller heater (H2)
temperature sensor /Md (TH3) has PB control board (PBCB)
not risen to a prescribed level PB drive board (PBDB)
within a specified time period. Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
sor /Md (TH3)
SC78-45 When control temperature is AC drive board (ACDB)
** reached, after the glue tank heater Glue tank heater (H1)
(H1) is turned ON, temperature Glue apply roller heater (H2)
detected by the glue tank temper- PB control board (PBCB)
ature sensor/Lw (TH4) has not PB drive board (PBDB)
risen to a prescribed level within a Glue apply roller motor
specified time period. (M32)
sor /Lw (TH4)
636 2

operation
PB SC78-46 When control temperature is The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
PB
1050e/1050eP
abnor- ** reached, after the glue tank heater and the PB stop Glue tank heater (H1)
mality (H1) is turned ON, temperature immediately to Glue apply roller heater (H2)
detected by the glue apply roller turn OFF the main PB control board (PBCB)
temperature sensor (TH1) has not relay (RL1). PB drive board (PBDB)
risen to a prescribed level within a Glue apply roller motor
specified time period. (M32)
ture sensor (TH1)
SC78-47 An abnormal high temperature is AC drive board (ACDB)
** detected by the glue apply roller Glue tank heater (H1)
temperature sensor (TH1). Glue apply roller heater (H2)
PB control board (PBCB)
PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
ture sensor (TH1)
** detected by the glue tank temper- Glue tank heater (H1)
ature sensor /Up (TH2). Glue apply roller heater (H2)
(M32)
sor /Up (TH2)
ature sensor /Md (TH3). Glue apply roller heater (H2)
(M32)
sor /Md (TH3)
ature sensor /Lw (TH4). Glue apply roller heater (H2)
(M32)
sor /Lw (TH4)
2 637

operation
PB SC78-51 The glue apply roller temperature The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
PB
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- ** sensor (TH1) high temperature and the PB stop Glue tank heater (H1)
mality hardware detection. immediately to Glue apply roller heater (H2)
An abnormal high temperature is turn OFF the main PB control board (PBCB)
detected by the glue apply roller relay (RL1). PB drive board (PBDB)
temperature sensor (TH1). Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
ture sensor (TH1)
SC78-52 The glue tank temperature sensor AC drive board (ACDB)
** /Up (TH2) high temperature hard- Glue tank heater (H1)
ware detection. Glue apply roller heater (H2)
An abnormal high temperature is PB control board (PBCB)
detected by the glue tank temper- PB drive board (PBDB)
ature sensor /Up (TH2). Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
sor /Up (TH2)
** /Md (TH3) high temperature hard- Glue tank heater (H1)
ature sensor /Md (TH3). Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
sor /Md (TH3)
** /Lw (TH4) high temperature hard- Glue tank heater (H1)
ature sensor /Lw (TH4). Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
sor /Lw (TH4)
SC78-55 An abnormal low temperature is AC drive board (ACDB)
** detected by the glue apply roller Glue tank heater (H1)
temperature sensor (TH1), after Glue apply roller heater (H2)
completion of warm-up. PB control board (PBCB)
(M32)
ture sensor (TH1)
638 2

operation
PB SC78-56 An abnormal low temperature is The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
PB
1050e/1050eP
abnor- ** detected by the glue tank temper- and the PB stop Glue tank heater (H1)
mality ature sensor /Up (TH2), after immediately to Glue apply roller heater (H2)
reaching glue supply control tem- turn OFF the main PB control board (PBCB)
perature. relay (RL1). PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
sor /Up (TH2)
** detected by the glue tank Glue tank heater (H1)
temperature sensor /Md (TH3), Glue apply roller heater (H2)
after the warming-up is com- PB control board (PBCB)
pleted. PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
sor /Md (TH3)
ature sensor /Lw (TH4), after the Glue apply roller heater (H2)
warming-up is completed. PB control board (PBCB)
(M32)
sor /Lw (TH4)
SC78-59 Glue apply roller temperature sen- AC drive board (ACDB)
** sor (TH1) low temperature abnor- Glue tank heater (H1)
mality hardware detection. Glue apply roller heater (H2)
TH1 detected low temperature PB control board (PBCB)
abnormality of the glue apply roller PB drive board (PBDB)
abnormality detection signal after Glue apply roller motor
the warming-up is completed. (M32)
ture sensor (TH1)
SC78-60 Glue tank temperature sensor/Up AC drive board (ACDB)
** (TH2) low temperature abnormality Glue tank heater (H1)
hardware detection . Glue apply roller heater (H2)
abnormality of the glue tank PB drive board (PBDB)
reaching the glue supply control (M32)
temperature. Glue tank temperature sen-
sor /Up (TH2)
2 639

operation
PB SC78-61 Glue tank temperature sensor/Md The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
PB
/1050e/1050eP
abnor- ** (TH3) low temperature abnormality and the PB stop Glue tank heater (H1)
mality hardware detection. immediately to Glue apply roller heater (H2)
TH3 detected low temperature turn OFF the main PB control board (PBCB)
abnormality of the glue tank relay (RL1). PB drive board (PBDB)
sor /Md (TH3)
SC78-62 Glue tank temperature sensor /Lw AC drive board (ACDB)
** (TH4) low temperature abnormality Glue tank heater (H1)
hardware detection. Glue apply roller heater (H2)
abnormality of the glue tank PB drive board (PBDB)
sor /Lw (TH4)
SC78-63 Abnormal rotation of the exhaust AC drive board (ACDB)
fan/2 (M81) on start-up does not PB control board (PBCB)
recover by reboot. PB drive board (PBDB)
Abnormal rotation of the exhaust Exhaust fan /2 (M81)
fan/2 (M81) during M81 is on does
not recover by reboot.
SC78-64 Abnormal rotation of the pellet AC drive board (ACDB)
cooler fan (M4) on start-up does PB control board (PBCB)
not recover by reboot. PB drive board (PBDB)
Abnormal rotation of the pellet Pellet supply cooling fan
cooler fan (M4) during M4 is on motor (M4)
does not recover by reboot.
SC78-91 Message queue full or the control PB control board (PBCB)
abnormality of Sub CPU1 in the Control program
PB control board (PBCB).
SC78-92 Message queue full or the control PB control board (PBCB)
abnormality of Sub CPU2 in the Control program
PB control board (PBCB).
SC78-93 Communication abnormality PB control board (PBCB)
between Main CPU in the PB con- Control program
trol board (PBCB) and Sub CPU1.
SC78-94 Communication abnormality PB control board (PBCB)
between Main CPU in the PB con- Control program
trol board (PBCB) and Sub CPU2.
SC78-96 Paper feed abnormality between PB control board (PBCB)
the main body and the PB. Control program
SC78-97 Non-volatile memory error in the PB control board (PBCB)
PB control board (PBCB). Control program
640 2

operation
PB SC78-98 PB operation prohibition abnor- The main body Control program
PB
1050e/1050eP
abnormality. and the PB stop
mality PB received operation start signal immediately to
from the main body when the PB turn OFF the main
is unready. relay (RL1).
SC78-99 Message queue of the communi- Control program
cation among tasks in the PB is
full.
Commu- SC80-01 In the communication check The main body Overall control board
Main body
nication between the image processing stops immediately (OACB)

abnor- board (IPB) and the printer control to turn OFF the Printer control board (PRCB)
mality board (PRCB), the printer control main relay (RL1). Loose connection
does not respond within a speci-
fied period of time after the main
power switch (SW1) and the sub
power switch (SW2) turn ON.
Or ISW information is not written
on PRCB.
SC80-02 In the communication check
between the image processing
board (IPB) and the printer control
board (PRCB), an error is detected
from PRCB. Or transmission is not
completed.
SC80-03 In the communication check Overall control board
between the image processing (OACB)
board (IPB) and the operation Operation board /1 (OB1)
board (OB1), an error is detected Loose connection
from the OB1. Or transmission is
not completed.
SC80-11 ISW information is not written on Printer control board (PRCB)
Printer control board (PRCB).
SC80-30 No normal header is transmitted Overall control board
within a specified period of time (OACB)
after ISW is started. ISW Cable
SC80-31 An error is detected while down- Overall control board
loading ISW. (OACB)
ISW file abnormality
ISW Cable
SC80-32 An error is detected because ISW ROM on each board
data cannot be written on image Inter-board communication
processing board (IPB). harness
SC80-40 The firmware is not written on FD FD firmware
FD
or an error is detected during the FD control board (FDCB)

ROM check. Wiring harness between the
FDCB and the main body
2 641

operation
Commu- SC80-41 The firmware is not written on SD The main body SD firmware
SD
/1050e/1050eP
nication or an error is detected during the stops immediately SD control board (SDCB)
abnor- ROM check. to turn OFF the Wiring harness between the
mality main relay (RL1). SDCB and the main body
SC80-42 The firmware is not written on FS FS firmware
FS
or an error is detected during the FNS control board (FNSCB)

ROM check. Wiring harness between the
FNSCB and the main body
SC80-43 The firmware is not written on first LS firmware
LS
LS or an error is detected during LS control board (LSCB)

the ROM check. Wiring harness between the
LSCB and the main body
SC80-44 The firmware is not written on sec- LS firmware
ond LS or an error is detected LS control board (LSCB)
during the ROM check. Wiring harness between the
LSCB and the main body
SC80-45 The firmware is not written on ICB IC firmware
IC
or an error is detected during the IC board (ICB)

ROM check.
SC80-46 The firmware is not written on PB PB firmware
PB
or an error is detected during the PB control board (PBCB)

ROM check.
SC90-01 In the initial communication check Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
between ADU drive board /1 ADU drive board /1

(ADJDB1) and printer control (ADJDB1)
board (PRCB), no response is Loose connection
returned from ADUDB1 after a
specified time from turning ON of
the main power switch (SW1) and
sub power switch (SW2) (ID=0).
SC90-02 In the initial communication check Printer control board (PRCB)
(ADJDB2) and printer control (ADJDB1)
board (PRCB), no response is Loose connection
sub power switch (SW2) (ID7).
SC90-03 In the communication check between Printer control board (PRCB)
ADU drive board /1 (ADUDB1) and ADU drive board /1
printer control board (PRCB), an error (ADJDB1)
was detected (ID=0). Loose connection
SC90-04 In the communication check between Printer control board (PRCB)
ADU drive board /1 (ADUDB2) and ADU drive board /1
printer control board (PRCB), an error (ADJDB1)
was detected (ID='). Loose connection
642 2

operation
Commu- SC90-05 In the initial communication check The main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
1050e/1050eP
nication between ADU drive board /1 stops immediately ADU drive board /1
abnor- (ADJDB1) and printer control to turn OFF the (ADJDB1)
mality board (PRCB), no response is Rl1 (main). Loose connection
sub power switch (SW2) (ID=11).
SC90-06 In the communication check Printer control board (PRCB)
(ADUDB1) and printer control (ADJDB1)
board (PRCB), an error was Loose connection
detected (ID=11).
Power SC93-01 Error detection signal (blown fuse) ADU drive board /1
abnor- of ADU drive board /1 (ADUDB1) (ADJDB1)
mality was detected.
SC93-05 Error detection signal (blown fuse) DC power supply /1
of offset sensor (PS54) or transfer (DCPS1)
exposure lamp (TSL) was
detected and an error signal (24V
disconnection) was detected.
SC93-06 Error detection signal (blown fuse) Centering sensor (PS54)
of offset sensor (PS54) or transfer Transfer exposure lamp
exposure lamp (TSL) was (TSL)
detected but no error signal (24V ADU lock solenoid (SD6)
disconnection) is detected. Reverse/exit solenoid (SD7)
Thick paper assist solenoid
(SD8)
SC93-08 Error detection signal (24V blown PF drive board (PFUDB)
fuse) of PF drive board (PFUDB)
was detected.
Fan SC95-01 The EM signal is found abnormal a ADU drive board /1
abnor- specified period of time after the (ADJDB1)
mality ADU cooling fans /1 (FM14), /2 ADU cooling fan /1 (FM14), /
(FM15) and /3 (FM13), the sensor 2 (FM15), /3 (FM13)
cooling fan (FM16) and the regis- Sensor cooling fan (FM16)
tration cooling fan (FM17) turn on. Registration cooling fan
And the signal is still found abnor- (FM17)
mal a specified period of time after
it turns on again after turning off,
and the door close of the door
open/close sensors /1 (PS1) and /
2 (PS2) and the PF door open/
close sensor (PS70) has been
detected 10 times in a row.
1 643
C. Function to detach defective sections

For those abnormalities listed in the table below, defective units can be detached temporarily to use other con-
trol units.
/1050e/1050eP
While detached, an error detection is not carried out on these detached units.
There are 2 methods of setting for limited use.
(1) User operation

When an error code occurs, press the HELP key following the message on the LCD and then turn the power
switch (SW2) OFF and ON. This allows you to use it temporarily until the main power switch (SW1) is OFF and
ON (including an OFF/ON operation by the weekly timer) next time.
(2) DIPSW setting

Turning the main switch OFF and ON after setting the specified software DIPSW bit allows you to make a limited
use of it until the bit setting is released next time (this requires the OFF/ON operation of the main power switch
(SW1)).
Classifi- Error code Description Control while detached DIPSW

cation
SC18-10 Paper lift motor /1 abnormality Paper feed in tray /1 is unavail- DIPSW18-0
Main body
SC18-11 Tray /1 up abnormality 1 able

SC18-12 Tray /1 up abnormality 2 (The operation panel is displayed
in hatching)
SC18-13 Tray /1 up abnormality 3
SC18-22 Tray /2 up abnormality 2 (The control panel is displayed in
hatching)
PF

hatching)
hatching)
hatching)
SC46-40 HDD initialization abnormality The use of HDD is unavailable DIPSW18-7
Main body
SC46-41 JOB RAM storage abnormality (not connected)

SC46-42 HDD periodic cleaning abnormality
SC46-43 HDD access error
SC67-01 Original registration abnormality DF mode unavailable DIPSW18-4
DF
SC67-02 Original conveyance abnormality (DF connection not recognized)

SC67-03 Original reverse abnormality
SC67-04 RADF control board abnormality
644

cation
SC67-05 Cooling fan abnormality DF mode unavailable DIPSW18-4
DF
1050e/1050eP
SC67-06 Original reverse abnormality (DF connection not recognized)
SC67-07 Original reverse/exit abnormality
SC67-08 Tray up/down abnormality
SC76-01 Tandem (1st) LS stacker tray up down The use of the tandem (1st) LS is DIPSW33-06
LS
abnormality unavailable.
SC76-02 Tandem (1st) LS shift unit drive abnormality
SC76-03 Tandem (1st) LS alignment plate drive
abnormality
SC76-04 Tandem (1st) LS grip drive abnormality
SC76-05 Tandem (1st) LS stacker tray upper
limit abnormality
SC76-06 Tandem (1st) LS stacker tray lower limit
abnormality
SC76-07 Tandem (1st) LS paper cooling fan /Fr
drive abnormality
SC76-08 Tandem (1st) LS cooling fan drive
abnormality
SC76-09 Tandem (1st) LS paper cooling fan /Mi
drive abnormality
SC76-10 Tandem (1st) LS motor cooling fan
drive abnormality
SC76-11 Tandem (1st) LS paper cooling fan /Rr
drive abnormality
SC76-31 Tandem (2nd) LS stacker tray up down The use of the tandem (2nd) LS DIPSW33-07
abnormality is unavailable
SC76-32 Tandem (2nd) LS shift unit drive abnormality
SC76-33 Tandem (2nd) LS alignment plate drive
abnormality
SC76-34 Tandem (2nd) LS grip drive abnormality
SC76-35 Tandem (2nd) LS stacker tray upper
limit abnormality
SC76-36 Tandem (2nd) LS stacker tray lower
limit abnormality
SC76-37 Tandem (2nd) LS paper cooling fan /Fr
drive abnormality
SC76-38 Tandem (2nd) LS cooling fan drive
abnormality
SC76-39 Tandem (2nd) LS paper cooling fan /Mi
drive abnormality
SC76-40 Tandem (2nd) LS motor cooling fan
drive abnormality
SC76-41 Tandem (2nd) LS paper cooling fan /Rr
drive abnormality
645

cation
SC77-02 Tray up down drive abnormality The use of sorting and stapling DIPSW35-1
FS
/1050e/1050eP
SC77-03 Alignment drive abnormality functions is unavailable

SC77-04 Paper exit roller drive abnormality
SC77-05 Paper exit opening drive abnormality
SC77-06 Staple abnormality The use of staple is unavailable DIPSW35-0
SC77-07 Staple rotation drive abnormality (skew
rotation)
SC77-08 Staple rotation abnormality (vertical
rotation)
SC77-11 Staple unit /Fr abnormality
SC77-12 Staple unit /Rr abnormality
SC77-15 Paper exit arm drive abnormality The use of sorting and stapling DIPSW35-1
SC77-21 Rear stopper drive abnormality functions is unavailable
SC77-22 Stack assist drive abnormality
SC77-25 Intermediate roller open/close drive
abnormality
SC77-30 1st folding cam drive abnormality The use of the folding function DIPSW33-0
FD
SC77-31 2nd folding cam drive abnormality and the punch section is unavail-
able
SC77-32 3rd folding cam drive abnormality
SC77-33 2 holes punch drive abnormality
SC77-34 3 holes/4 holes punch drive abnormality
SC77-35 Punch alignment plate drive abnormality
SC77-36 Punch paper rear registration drive
abnormality
SC77-37 Main tray upper limit abnormality Main tray paper exit is unavail- DIPSW33-2
able
SC77-38 Main tray lower limit abnormality
SC77-39 PI lift plate /Up up/down abnormality The use of the PI section DIPSW33-3
SC77-40 PI lift plate /Lw up/down abnormality unavailable
SC77-41 Entrance conveyance drive abnormality The use of the entire FD unavail- DIPSW33-4
SC77-42 Intermediate conveyance drive abnormality able
SC77-43 PI conveyance drive abnormality
SC77-44 Paper exit conveyance drive abnormality
SC77-60 Bundle exit drive abnormality The use of the saddle stitching, multi DIPSW34-0,
SD
center folding and trimmer unavail- 1, 3

able
SC77-61 Folding main scan alignment drive The use of the saddle stitching, DIPSW34-0,
abnormality multi center folding, multi letter 1, 2, 3
SC77-62 Folding sub scan alignment paper exit folding and trimmer unavailable
drive abnormality
646 1

cation
SC77-63 Saddle stitching alignment/Rt drive The use of the saddle stitching, DIPSW34-0,
SD
1050e/1050eP
abnormality multi center folding and trimmer 1, 3
SC77-64 Bundle arm drive abnormality unavailable
SC77-65 Bundle clip drive abnormality
SC77-66 Bundle registration drive abnormality
SC77-67 Overlap drive abnormality The use of the saddle stitching, DIPSW34-0,
SC77-68 Folding main scan alignment /Rr drive multi center folding, multi letter 1, 2, 3
abnormality folding and trimmer unavailable
SC77-69 Stapler movement drive abnormality The use of the saddle stitching, DIPSW34-0,
SC77-70 Saddle stitching alignment /Lt drive multi center folding and trimmer 1, 3
abnormality unavailable
SC77-71 Bundle press movement drive abnor-
mality
SC77-72 1st folding blade drive abnormality The use of the saddle stitching, DIPSW34-0,
multi center folding, multi letter 1, 2, 3
folding and trimmer unavailable
SC77-73 2nd folding blade abnormality The use of the multi center fold- DIPSW34-2
ing unavailable
SC77-74 Clincher up down drive abnormality The use of the saddle stitching, DIPSW34-0,
SC77-75 Saddle stitching press drive abnormality multi center folding and trimmer 1, 3
SC77-76 Bundle arm rotation drive abnormality unavailable
SC77-77 Bundle press drive abnormality

SC77-78 Bundle press stage up down drive
abnormality
SC77-79 Guide shaft drive abnormality
SC77-80 Stapler /Rt drive abnormality The use of the saddle stitching DIPSW34-0,
SC77-81 Stapler /Lt drive abnormality and trimmer unavailable 3
SC77-82 Trimmer blade drive abnormality The use of the trimmer unavailable DIPSW34-3
SC77-83 Trimmer press drive abnormality
SC77-84 Bundle arm assist drive abnormality The use of the saddle stitching, multi DIPSW34-0,
center folding and trimmer unavailable 1, 3
SC77-86 Horizontal conveyance drive abnormal- The use of the coupling exit and DIPSW34-4
ity subtray paper exit unavailable
SC77-87 Folding entrance drive abnormality The use of the saddle stitching, DIPSW34-0,
SC77-88 Folding conveyance drive abnormality multi center folding, multi letter 1, 2, 3
SC77-89 Bundle exit drive abnormality The use of the saddle stitching, multi DIPSW34-0,
center folding and trimmer unavailable 1, 3
SC77-90 Folding sub scan alignment paper exit The use of the saddle stitching, DIPSW34-0,
drive abnormality multi center folding, multi letter 1, 2, 3
SC77-91 Scraps removal fan drive abnormality The use of the trimmer unavail- DIPSW34-3
able
1 647

cation
SC78-01 Entrance conveyance drive abnormal- The use of the PB is unavailable DIPSW35-5
PB
/1050e/1050eP
ity
SC78-02 Intermediate conveyance drive abnor- Ejecting onto the sub tray is pos- DIPSW35-4
mality sible.
SC78-04 SC entrance conveyance drive abnor-
mality
SC78-05 SC switchback conveyance drive
abnormality
SC78-06 SC switchback roller release drive
abnormality
SC78-07 SC alignment drive abnomality
SC78-08 SC paper detection conveyance drive
abnormality
SC78-09 SC roller release drive abnormality
SC78-10 SC clamp entrance movement drive
abnomality
SC78-11 SC clamp entrance roller release drive
abnormality
SC78-12 Clamp alignment drive abnormality
SC78-13 Clamp open/close drive abnormality
SC78-14 Clamp rotation drive abnormality
SC78-15 Glue tank movement drive abnormality
SC78-16 Glue apply roller rotation drive abnor-
mality
SC78-18 Pellet supply arm drive abnormality
SC78-19 Up/down cover paper alignment drive
abnormality
SC78-20 Up/down cover paper book paper exit
drive abnormality
SC78-21 Driven arm /Rt drive abnormality
SC78-22 Driven arm /Lt drive abnormality
SC78-23 Up/down cover paper conveyance
drive abnormality
SC78-24 Up/down cover paper/Fr up/down
drive abnormality
SC78-25 Up/down cover paper/Rr up/down
drive abnormality
SC78-26 Cover paper folding board /Rt drive
abnormality
SC78-27 Cover paper folding board /Lt drive
abnormality
SC78-28 Cover paper trimming cutter drive
abnormality
SC78-30 Carriage belt drive abnormality
648 2

cation
SC78-31 Carriage size movement drive abnor- Ejecting onto the sub tray is pos- DIPSW35-4
PB
1050e/1050eP
mality sible.
SC78-32 Carriage up/down drive abnormality
SC78-33 Book movement drive abnormality
SC78-34 Book stopper drive abnormality
SC78-35 Cover paper tray fan /1 drive abnomal- Paper feed from the PB is DIPSW35-3
ity unavailable.
SC78-36 Cover paper tray fan /2 drive abnomal-
ity
SC78-37 Cover paper tray up/down drive
abnomality
SC78-38 Cover page conveyance drive abnor-
mality
SC78-39 Exhaust fan drive abnormality Ejecting onto the sub tray is pos- DIPSW35-4
sible.
SC78-40 Warming-up abnormality The use of the PB is unavailable DIPSW35-5
Glue tank middle temperature abnor-
mality
SC78-41 Warming-up abnormality
Glue tank low temperature abnormality
SC78-42 Warming-up abnormality
Glue apply roller temperature abnor-
mality
SC78-43 Glue supply abnormality
Glue tank high temperature abnormal-
lity
SC78-44 Heater continuous energization abnor-
mality
mality
mality
mality
mality
SC78-47 High temperature abnormality
mality
lity
2 649

cation
SC78-49 High temperature abnormality The use of the PB is unavailable DIPSW35-5
PB
/1050e/1050eP

mality
mality
lity
mality
mality
SC78-56 Low temperature abnormality
lity
mality
mality
lity
mality
650 2
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 15. ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
APPENDIX

1050e/1050eP
15. ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
15.1 Main body
A. Switch/sensor
(1) Main body rear side
[3] [2] [1]

1050fs5001c
[1] Pump encoder sensor /1 (PS28) [3] Dehumidification heater switch (SW3)
[2] Pump encoder sensor /2 (PS29)
651
15. ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
(2) Main body upper surface

/1050e/1050eP
[6]
[5]
[7] [8] [9] [1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
1050fs5002c
[1] Air motor encoder sensor (PS30) [6] Door open/close sensor /1 (PS1)
[2] Main power switch (SW1) [7] Scanner home sensor (PS51)
[3] Interlock switch /2 (MS2) [8] APS sensor /1 (PS52)
[4] Door open/close sensor /2 (PS2) [9] APS sensor /2 (PS53)
[5] Interlock switch /1 (MS1)
652

(3) Cleaning section
[2]
1050e/1050eP
[1] 1050fs5003c
[1] Blade sensor /1 (PS24) [2] Blade sensor /2 (PS25)
(4) Charger unit
[2] [1] 1050fs5004c
[1] Charger cleaning home sensor (PS26) [2] Charger cleaning limit sensor (PS27)
653
(5) Toner supply section

/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
1050fs5005c
[1] Toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31) [4] Toner remaining sensor /3 (PS33)
[2] Door switch /2 (SW5) [5] Toner remaining sensor /4 (PS34)
[3] Toner remaining sensor /2 (PS32)
(6) Photosensitive material section
[2] [1]
1050fs5006c
[1] Drum temperature sensor (TH5) [2] Drum potential sensor (DPS)
654

(7) Paper feed section
[8]
1050e/1050eP
[6] [7]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2] 1050fs5062c
[1] Handle release sensor /1 (PS9), /2 (PS15) [5] Remaining paper VR /1 (VR1), /2 (VR3)
[2] Paper size VR /1 (VR2), /2 (VR4) [6] Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6), /2 (PS12)
[3] Paper size sensor /Rr1 (PS5), /2 (PS11) [7] Paper feed sensor /1 (PS7), /2 (PS13)
[4] Paper size sensor /Fr1 (PS4), /Fr2 (PS10) [8] Paper empty sensor /1 (PS8), /2 (PS14)
655
(8) Vertical conveyance section

/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
1050fs5063c
[1] Loop sensor (PS16) [5] Vertical conveyance sensor /2 (PS20)

[2] Door switch /1 (SW4) [6] Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS17)
[3] Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS18) [7] Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS19)
[4] Vertical conveyance sensor /3 (PS21)
656

(9) Registration section
[2] [3] [4]
1050e/1050eP
[1]
1050fs5007c
[1] ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) [3] Paper leading edge sensor (PS41)
[2] Centering sensor (PS54) [4] Registration sensor (PS40)
(10) ADU section 1
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 1050fs5008c
[1] ADU exit sensor (PS43) [6] Paper exit sensor (PS3)
[2] ADU conveyance sensor /2 (PS36) [7] Reverse sensor /1 (PS48)
[3] ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS35) [8] Reverse sensor /2 (PS47)
[4] ADU accelerate sensor (PS49) [9] ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46)
[5] ADU reverse paper exit sensor (PS50) [10] ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45)
657
(11) ADU section 2

/1050e/1050eP
[3] [1]
[2]
1050fs5009c
[1] Transfer/separation cleaning limit sensor (PS39) [3] ADU handle release sensor (PS44)
[2] Transfer/separation cleaning home sensor (PS38)
(12) Transfer/separation charger unit
[1]
1050fs5010c
[1] Transfer assist home sensor (PS37)
658

(13) Fusing section
1050e/1050eP
[8]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[4] [2] [1]

[5]
1050fs5011c
[1] Fusing jam sensor (PS23) [5] Thermistor /4 (TH4)

[2] Fusing exit sensor (PS22) [6] Thermostat /1 (TS1)
[3] Thermistor /3 (TH3) [7] Thermistor /1 (TH1)
[4] Thermostat /2 (TS2) [8] Thermistor /2 (TH2)
(14) Operation panel section
[1]
1050fs5012c
[1] Power switch (SW2)
659
B. Load
/1050e/1050eP
[14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21]
[13] [1]
[2]
[3]
[12]
[11] [4]
[10]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[8] [7]
1050fs5013d
[1] Pump cooling fan (FM11) [12] Vertical conveyance motor (M8)
[2] Cooling fan /1 (FM1) [13] IC cooling fan (FM24)
[3] Paper exit motor /1 (M9) [14] Developing motor (M3)
[4] ADU reverse paper exit motor (M31) [15] Drum motor (M2)
[5] Conveyance motor (M5) [16] Cooling fan /3 (FM3)
[6] Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) [17] Scanner motor (M27)
[7] Power supply cooling fan /3 (FM27) [18] Cooling fan /2 (FM2)
[8] Power supply cooling fan /2 (FM26) [19] Fusing motor (M1)
[9] Power supply cooling fan /1 (FM25) [20] Air pump motor (M29)
[10] Paper feed motor (M4) [21] Toner pump motor (M28)
[11] Developing suction fan (FM5)
660 2

[1]
1050e/1050eP
[3] [2]
[4]
1050fs5014c
[1] Air separation motor (M10) [3] Scanner cooling fan (FM19)
[2] IPB cooling fan (FM12) [4] Suction fan /4 (FM29) (1050e/1050eP only)
(3) Main body right side
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
1050fs5015c
[1] Polygon cooling fan (FM18) [3] Suction fan /2 (FM7)

[2] Suction fan /1 (FM6) [4] Suction fan /3 (FM8)
2 661
(4) Main body left side

/1050e/1050eP
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs5016c
[1] Paper exit cooling fan /2 (FM10) [3] Paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM9)
[2] Paper exit cooling fan /3 (FM28)
(5) Cleaning section
[1]
1050fs5017c
[1] Blade motor (M22)
662

(6) Charger unit
1050e/1050eP
[1]
1050fs5018c
[1] Charger cleaning motor (M23)
(7) Toner supply section
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
1050fs5019c
[1] Tray lock solenoid /1 (SD1) [4] Toner hopper motor (M7)
[2] Tray lock solenoid /2 (SD2) [5] Toner bottle motor (M6)
[3] Intermediate hopper motor (M11)
663
(8) Drum claw unit

/1050e/1050eP
[1]
1050fs5020c
[1] Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
(9) Paper feed section
[5] [6]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
1050fs5064c
[1] Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6) [4] Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD3), /2 (SD4)
[2] Separation clutch /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7) [5] Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM20), /Fr2 (FM22)
[3] Paper lift motor /1 (M25), /2 (M26) [6] Paper feed assist fan /Rr1 (FM21), /Rr2 (FM23)
664

[1]
1050e/1050eP
[2]
1050fs5066c
[1] Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1) [2] Dehumidification heater /2 (HTR2)
(10) Vertical conveyance section
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs5065c
[1] Pre-registration clutch /2 (CL3) [3] Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1)

[2] Vertical conveyance clutch (CL2)
665
(11) ADU
/1050e/1050eP
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[17] [16] [5] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11]
[8]
[10]
[9]
1050fs5021c
[1] Reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) [10] Registration cooling fan (FM17)

[2] ADU cooling fan /3 (FM13) [11] Loop motor (M18)
[3] Thick paper assist solenoid (SD8) [12] ADU cooling fan /1 (FM14)
[4] Transfer assist motor (M19) [13] Registration motor (M17)
[5] Reverse paper exit motor (M13) [14] ADU lock solenoid (SD6)
[6] ADU conveyance motor /2 (M16) [15] Transfer/separation cleaning motor (M20)
[7] ADU accelerate motor (M14) [16] ADU reverse motor (M12)
[8] ADU cooling fan /2 (FM15) [17] Sensor cooling fan (FM16)
[9] ADU conveyance motor /1 (M15)
666

(12) Writing section
1050e/1050eP
[1]
1050fs5022c
[1] Polygon motor (M21)
(13) Fusing section
[1]
1050fs5023c
[1] Web motor (M24)
667
C. Boards and others

/1050e/1050eP
[24]
[25]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]

1050fs5024c
[1] Recycle cut drive board (RCDB) [13] Coil (L)

[2] High voltage unit /1 (HV1) [14] Transformer /2 (T2)
[3] PCI relay board (PCIRB) [15] DC power supply /2 (DCPS2)
[4] Printer control board (PRCB) [16] Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
[5] AC drive board (ACDB) [17] DC power supply /1 (DCPS1)
[6] Transformer /1 (T1) [18] Parameter board (PB)
[7] Noise filter /2 (NF2) [19] Image processing board (IPB)
[8] Noise filter /1 (NF1) [20] Hard disk /1 (HDD1)
[9] Outlet [21] Overall control board (OACB)
[10] Circuit breaker (CBR) [22] IC board (ICB)
[11] Sub relay (RL2) [23] Scanner drive board (SDB)
[12] Main relay (RL1) [24] Triac /2 (TRC2)
[25] Triac /1 (TRC1)
668

1050e/1050eP
[4]
[3] [2] [1]
1050fs5025c
[1] CCD board (CCDB) [3] Exposure lamp (L1)

[2] L1 inverter (L1 INVB) [4] Total counter (CNT1)
(3) Charger unit
[1] 1050fs5031c
[1] Erase lamp (EL)
669
(4) Photosensitive material section
[2] [1]
/1050e/1050eP
1050fs5026c
[1] Drum potential sensor board (DPSB) [2] Toner control sensor board (TCSB)
(5) Registration section
[2] [1]
1050fs5027c
[1] Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [2] Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1)
670

(6) ADU section
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[4] [3]
[2]
1050fs5028c
[1] Transfer exposure lamp (TSL) [3] ADU drive board /2 (ADUDB2)
[2] High voltage unit /2 (HV2) [4] ADU drive board /1 (ADUDB1)
671
(7) Writing section
[2] [3]
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
1050fs5029c
[1] Polygon motor drive board (PMDB) [3] Laser drive board (LDB)
[2] Index board (INDEXB)
(8) Fusing section
[2] [3]
[1]
1050fs5030c
[1] Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3) [3] Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
[2] Fusing heater lamp /3 (L4)
672

(9) Operation panel section
1050e/1050eP
[1] [2] [3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7]
1050fs5032c
[1] LCD board (LCDB) [5] Operation board /3 (OB3)

[2] Backlight /1 [6] Operation board /1 (OB1)
[3] Backlight /2 [7] Panel key board (PKB)
[4] Operation board /2 (OB2) [8] OB inverter (OB INVB)
673
15.2 DF-603
A. Front side
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[5]
[4] [3] [2] df603fs5001c
[1] Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [4] Gate solenoid (SD303)
[2] Exit gate solenoid (SD304) [5] RADF open/close sensor (PS301)
[3] Pressure roller release solenoid (SD302)
674

B. Rear side
[12] [13] [14] [15] [1]
1050e/1050eP
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [6]

df603fs5002c
[1] Original conveyance motor (M301) [9] Original paper exit motor /1 (M304)
[2] Original skew sensor /Rr (PS311) [10] Original paper exit motor /2 (M305)
[3] Original conveyance sensor (PS308) [11] RADF control board (RADFCB)
[4] Original skew sensor /Fr (PS312) [12] Cooling fan /Rt (FM302)
[5] Cooling fan /Lt (FM301) [13] Tray up/down motor (M303)
[6] APS timing sensor (PS317) [14] Cover open/close switch (MS301)
[7] Original feed motor (M302) [15] Tray lower limit sensor (PS316)
[8] SDF switching solenoid (SD301)
675
C. Upper surface
/1050e/1050eP
[15] [16] [17] [1] [2] [3]

[5]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[8]
[10] [14] [13] [12] [4]
[9]
df603fs5003c
[1] Original count sensor (PS310) [10] Multi feed sensor /2 (MFS2)
[2] Original size sensor /Lt (PS303) [11] Original registration sensor /Lt (PS306)
[3] Original size sensor /Rt (PS302) [12] Original reverse sensor (PS309)
[4] Reverse jam sensor (PS304) [13] Centering LED sensor /Fr (PS319)
[5] Original empty sensor (PS305) [14] Centering sensor /Fr (PS320)
[6] Tray upper limit sensor (PS315) [15] Centering sensor /Rr (PS321)
[7] Original registration sensor /Rt (PS318) [16] Centering LED sensor /Rr (PS322)
[8] Multi feed sensor /1 (MFS1) [17] Original exit sensor /Lt (PS307)
[9] Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1)
676

D. Upper tray rear side
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
df603fs5004c
[1] Tray board (TB) [2] Original size VR (VR301)
E. Reverse tray rear side
[1]
[2] df603fs5005c
[1] Original exit sensor /Rt (PS314) [2] Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)
677
15.3 PF-701
A. Configuration front side
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
pf701fs5001c
[1] Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1) [4] Tray lock solenoid /3 (SD12)

B. Configuration left side/exit conveyance section
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
pf701fs5002c
[1] Door open/close sensor (PS70) [4] PF exit sensor (PS99)

[2] Door switch (SW10) [5] Horizontal conveyance door switch (SW13)
[3] Paper feed motor (M40) [6] PF exit conveyance motor (M41)
678

C. Configuration rear side
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
pf701fs5003c
[1] Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1) [5] Intermediate clutch /Lw (CL5)

[2] Intermediate clutch /Up (CL2) [6] Pre-registration clutch /3 (CL4)
[3] Cooling fan (FM20) [7] PF drive board (PFUDB)
[4] Pre-registration clutch /2 (CL3)
679
D. Vertical conveyance section
[1]
/1050e/1050eP
[2]
[12]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[8]
[10] [9]
pf701fs5004c
[1] Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS89) [7] Intermediate sensor /Lw (PS97)

[2] Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS90) [8] Vertical conveyance sensor /3 (PS96)
[3] Intermediate sensor /Up (PS91) [9] Pre-registration sensor /3 (PS95)
[4] Loop sensor /1 (PS92) [10] Loop sensor /2 (PS94)
[5] Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS93) [11] Vertical conveyance door switch /Lw (SW12)
[6] Loop sensor /3 (PS98) [12] Vertical conveyance door switch /Up (SW11)
680

E. Tray section 1
[1]
1050e/1050eP
[2]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[8]
[7] [6] pf701fs5005c
[1] Paper feed assist fan /Fr1, /Fr2, /Fr3 [6] Remaining paper VR /1, /2, /3 (VR10/VR12/
(FM41/FM43/FM45) VR14)
[2] Pick-up solenoid /1, /2, /3 (SD14/SD15/SD16) [7] Forced separation clutch (CL11) (tray 4 only)
[3] Paper feed sensor /1, /2, /3 (PS72/PS78/PS84) [8] Separation clutch /1, /2, /3 (CL7/CL10/CL13)
[4] Upper limit sensor /1, /2, /3 (PS71/PS77/PS83) [9] Pick-up clutch /1, /2, /3 (CL6/CL9/CL12)
[5] Paper lift motor /1, /2, /3 (M42/M43/M44) [10] Paper feed assist fan /Rr1, /Rr2, /Rr3
(FM42/FM44/FM46)
681
F. Tray section 2
[4] [1]
/1050e/1050eP
[3] [2] pf701fs5006c
[1] Paper size VR /1, /2, /3 (VR11/VR13/VR15) [3] Paper size sensor /Fr1, /Fr2, /Fr3 (PS75/
[2] Paper size sensor /Rr1, /Rr2, /Rr3 (PS76/ PS81/PS87)
PS82/PS88) [4] Paper empty sensor /1, /2, /3 (PS73/PS79/
PS85)
G. PP-701 (OPTIONAL)
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
a08rf5c001ca
[1] Rear paper feed assist fan /1 (FM50) [3] Rear paper feed assist fan /3 (FM52)
[2] Rear paper feed assist fan /2 (FM51) [4] Front side direction
682 2

15.4 FD-501
A. Conveyance section front side/right side
1050e/1050eP
[9] [10] [11] [12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7] [5]
[6]
fd501fs5001c
[1] Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) [7] Door switch (MS1)
[2] FD entrance sensor (PS1) [8] Jam indicator board (JAMIB)
[3] Roller solenoid /1 (SD5) [9] Temperature sensor board (TSB)
[4] Roller solenoid /2 (SD6) [10] Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2)
[5] Roller solenoid /3 (SD7) [11] PI exit sensor (PS4)
[6] Roller solenoid /4 (SD8) [12] FD operation board (FDOB)
683
B. Major boards in the power source section

/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[10] [9] [8] fd501fs5002c
[1] PI drive board (PIDB) [7] Noise filter (NF1)

[2] FD control board (FDCB) [8] Inlet
[3] Punch drive board (PDB) [9] Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1)
[4] DC power supply (DCPS) [10] Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)
[5] Folding drive board (FDB) [11] Relay (RL1)
[6] Outlet
684

C. Conveyance section rear side/left side
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[7] [6] [5]
[13]
[8]
[12]
[11] [10] [9] fd501fs5003c
[1] Sub tray paper full sensor (PS46) [11] Tray up down motor (M11)
[2] Paper exit solenoid (SD12) [12] L size gate solenoid (SD4)
[3] Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS16) [13] S size gate solenoid (SD3)
[4] Sub tray paper full sensor (PS17) [14] Alignment motor (M12)
[5] Main tray paper exit sensor (PS18) [15] Punch conveyance motor (M2)
[6] Main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) [16] Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)
[7] Sub tray gate solenoid (SD9) [17] Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)
[8] Main tray empty sensor (PS23) [18] Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
[9] Main tray folding paper full sensor (PS7) [19] Main tray paper exit motor (M17)
[10] Main tray lower limit sensor (PS22)
685
D. PI rear side
[6] [7] [8] [1] [2] [3]

/1050e/1050eP
[4]
[5] fd501fs5004c
[1] Paper lift motor /Up (M8) [5] PI registration clutch /Lw (CL2)
[2] PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34) [6] PI conveyance sensor /Up (PS31)
[3] Paper lift motor /Lw (M9) [7] PI conveyance motor (M7)
[4] PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40) [8] PI registration clutch /Up (CL1)
E. PI upper surface
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[6]
[13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7] fd501fs5005c
[1] PI paper set sensor /Up (PS44) [7] PI paper empty sensor /Up (PS33)
[2] S size sensor /Up (PS36) [8] PI paper empty sensor /Lw (PS39)
[3] PI max paper size sensor /Up (PS47) [9] PI conveyance sensor /Lw (PS37)
[4] L size sensor /Up (PS35) [10] PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
[5] Paper size VR /Up (VR31) [11] PI upper limit sensor /Up (PS32)
[6] PI cover open/close sensor (PS43) [12] PI pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD14)
[13] PI pick-up solenoid /Up (SD13)
686

F. PI lower tray
1050e/1050eP
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] fd501fs5006c
[1] PI paper set sensor /Lw (PS45) [4] L size sensor /Lw (PS41)
[2] Paper size VR /Lw (VR32) [5] PI max paper size sensor /Lw (PS48)
[3] S size sensor /Lw (PS42)
687
G. Punch section
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7] [6] [5] [4] fd501fs5007c
[1] Punch registration home sensor (PS11) [7] Punch conveyance sensor (PS5)
[2] Punch motor (M10) [8] Punch scraps box set sensor (PS12)
[3] 3 holes/4 holes home sensor (PS9) [9] Alignment plate home sensor (PS10)
[4] 2 holes punch home sensor (PS8) [10] Punch scraps full sensor (PS26)
[5] Punch registration motor (M13) [11] Folding exit sensor (PS2)
[6] Punch registration sensor (PS6) [12] Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
688

H. Folding unit front side/right side
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[10] [2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[7] [4]
[6] [5] fd501fs5008c
[1] S size conveyance sensor (PS58) [6] 1st folding release motor (M14)
[2] 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) [7] 2nd folding release motor (M15)
[3] Folding entrance sensor (PS52) [8] 2nd folding cam home sensor (PS56)
[4] 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51) [9] 3rd folding release motor (M16)
[5] 1st folding cam home sensor (PS55) [10] 3rd folding cam home sensor (PS57)
689
I. Folding unit rear side/left side
[1] [2]
/1050e/1050eP
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] fd501fs5009c
[1] 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) [4] 2nd folding motor (M5)
[2] 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) [5] Folding gate solenoid (SD15)
[3] 1st folding motor (M4) [6] 3rd folding motor (M6)
690

15.5 LS-501/502
A. Front side
1050e/1050eP
[14] [15] [16] [17]
[18] [19] [20] [21] [22]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[10] [9] [8]
[13] [12] [11]

ls502fs5013c
[1] Entrance conveyance lock solenoid (SD5) [13] Grip conveyance home sensor (PS5)
[2] Entrance sensor (PS4) [14] Relay board /1 (RLB/1)
[3] Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) [15] Shift unit home sensor (PS11)
[4] Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) [16] Stacker tray set LED (LED1)
[5] Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) [17] Alignment plate home sensor (PS12)
[6] Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) [18] Coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11)
[7] Front door lock solenoid (SD4) (LS-501 only)
[8] Front door switch (MS1) [19] Paper press solenoid /2 (SD7)
[9] Hand cart set switch (RS1) [20] Alignment motor (M7)
[10] Stacker tray set sensor (PS1) [21] 2nd gate solenoid (SD10) (LS-501 only)
[11] Stacker tray upper limit sensor (PS3) [22] Coupling conveyance motor (M6) (LS-502 only)
[12] Paper detection sensor (PS19)
2 691
B. Upper surface
[9] [10] [11] [12] [1] [2]

/1050e/1050eP
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] ls502fs5002c
[1] Conveyance sensor /3 (PS17) (LS-501 only) [7] Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
[2] Jam indication board (JAMIB) [8] Stacker tray operation board (TOB)
[3] Coupling exit sensor (PS18) (LS-501 only) [9] Conveyance sensor /1 (PS7)
[4] JAM door switch (RS2) (LS-501 only) [10] Sub tray full sensor (PS9)
[5] Sub tray door sensor (PS8) [11] Sub tray exit sensor (PS10)
[6] Paper cooling fan motor /2 (FM6) [12] Conveyance sensor /2 (PS16) (LS-501 only)
692

C. Rear side
[20]
1050e/1050eP
[19]
[1]
[18] [2]
[17] [3]
[4]
[16]
[15] [5]
[6]
[14]
[13] [7]
[12] [11] [10] [9] [8] ls502fs5003c
[1] Shift unit motor (M5) [11] 2,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS13)
[2] Stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2) [12] Inlet (LS-501 only)
[3] Grip conveyance motor (M4) [13] Stacker tray up down motor (M1)
[4] Coupling conveyance motor (M6) (LS-501 only) [14] Stacker tray encoder sensor (PS2)
[5] LS control board (LSCB) [15] Job partition solenoid (SD2)
[6] DC power supply (DCPS) (LS-501 only) [16] 1st gate solenoid (SD1)
[7] Stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3) [17] Conveyance motor (M2)
[8] Outlet (LS-501 only) [18] Sub tray exit motor (M3)
[9] Stacker tray arm release sensor (PS15) [19] Motor cooling fan motor (FM4)
[10] 5,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS14) [20] Rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
2 693
D. Shift unit
[3] [4]
/1050e/1050eP
[2] [1] ls502fs5004c
[1] Front stopper solenoid (SD9) [3] Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)
[2] Relay board /2 (RLB/2) [4] Paper empty sensor (PS6)
694

15.6 FS-503
A. Rear side 1
1050e/1050eP
[4] [5]
[1]
[2]
[3] fs503fs5001c
[1] Counter reset sensor (PS15) [4] FNS drive board (FNSDB)
[2] Tray lower limit sensor (PS3) [5] FNS control board (FNSCB)
[3] Tray up down motor (M3)
695
B. Rear side 2
[6] [7] [8] [1]

/1050e/1050eP
[2]
[3]
[5] [4] fs503fs5002c
[1] Main tray exit motor (M7) [5] Gate solenoid (SD2)
[2] Paper exit opening solenoid (SD9) [6] Conveyance motor (M1)
[3] Paper exit opening sensor (PS12) [7] Paper exit opening motor (M8)
[4] Bypass solenoid (SD5) [8] Sub tray exit motor (M6)
C. Front side
[8] [9] [10]
[1]
[2]
[7] [6] [5] [3]
[4]
fs503fs5003c
[1] FNS entrance sensor (PS4) [6] Staple exit upper limit sensor (PS7)
[2] Staple scraps box set sensor (PS34) [7] Tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
[3] Door switch (MS1) [8] Main tray exit sensor (PS10)
[4] Jam indication board (JAMIB) [9] Sub tray paper full sensor (PS30)
[5] Stacker entrance sensor (PS5) [10] Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
696

D. Stacker inside 1
[9] [10] [1]
1050e/1050eP
[8]
[2]
[7] [3]
[5] [4]
[6]
fs503fs5004c
[1] Intermediate roller open close motor (M25) [6] Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)
[2] Stacker entrance motor (M13) [7] Stacker empty sensor (PS20)
[3] Paper exit arm motor (M23) [8] Alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31)
[4] Paddle motor (M2) [9] Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
[5] Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) [10] Alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8)
697
E. Stacker inside 2
/1050e/1050eP
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7] [6] fs503fs5005c
[1] Alignment motor /Rr (M5) [6] Rear stopper motor (M26)
[2] Alignment motor /Fr (M22) [7] Stapler movement motor (M11)
[3] Stack assist guide motor (M24) [8] Stapler movement home sensor (PS11)
[4] Stack assist home sensor (PS32) [9] Stapler rotation motor (M4)
[5] Rear stopper home sensor (PS35) [10] Stapler rotation home sensor (PS14)
698

F. Stapler
[6]
1050e/1050eP
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fs503fs5006c
[1] Stapler ready sensor /Rr (PS46) [4] Stapler board (STB)
Stapler ready sensor /Fr (PS47) [5] Staple empty sensor /Rr (PS44)
[2] Stapler home sensor /Rr (PS40) Staple empty sensor /Fr (PS45)
Stapler home sensor /Fr (PS41) [6] Stapler motor /Rr (M30)
[3] Cartridge set sensor /Rr (PS42) Stapler motor /Fr (M31)
Cartridge set sensor /Fr (PS43)
699
15.7 SD-501
A. Horizontal conveyance section
/1050e/1050eP
(1) Entrance conveyance
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3] 15anf5c001na
[1] Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) [3] Entrance sensor (PS1)

[2] Entrance conveyance motor (M1) [4] Right side direction
(2) Horizontal conveyance
[5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
[1]
[4] [3] [2] 15anf5c002na
[1] Horizontal conveyance sensor /2 (PS3) [6] Roller release solenoid /4 (SD4)
[2] Horizontal conveyance exit sensor (PS4) [7] Subtray exit sensor (PS11)
[3] Horizontal conveyance motor (M2) [8] Front side direction
[4] Horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3) [9] Subtray paper full sensor (PS12)
[5] Horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2)
700 1

B. Right angle conveyance section
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[7] [8] [9]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
15anf5c003na
[1] Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [6] Front side direction
[2] Right angle conveyance sensor /1 (PS5) [7] Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6)
[3] Right angle conveyance motor (M6) [8] Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)
[4] Overlap motor (M13) [9] Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5)
[5] Overlap home sensor (PS17)
1 701
C. Folding section
(1) Top side /1
/1050e/1050eP
[10]
[1]
[9] [2]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
15anf5c004na
[1] 2nd folding blade motor (M19) [6] Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7)
[2] Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr2 (PS49) [7] Folding sensor /2 (PS44)
[3] Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) [8] 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23)
[4] Folding entrance sensor (PS60) [9] 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22)
[5] Front side direction [10] Folding passage sensor (PS8)
(2) Top side /2
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15anf5c005na
[1] Folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) [3] Folding sensor /1 (PS7)
[2] Folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) [4] Front side direction
702 1

(3) Bottom side view
1050e/1050eP
[12]
[8] [9] [10] [11] [1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6] [5] [4]

15anf5c006na
[1] 1st folding blade motor (M18) [7] Front side direction
[2] Folding conveyance motor (M4) [8] Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7)
[3] Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) [9] Folding entrance motor (M3)
[4] 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) [10] Folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8)
[5] 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) [11] Guide shaft home sensor (PS46)
[6] Guide shaft motor (M25) [12] Folding exit home sensor (PS24)
1 703
(4) Tri-folding exit

/1050e/1050eP
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
15anf5c007na
[1] Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9) [3] Front side direction

[2] Tri-folding paper full sensor (PS10) [4] Tri-folding exit clutch (CL1)
704 1

(5) Others
[1]
1050e/1050eP
[2]
15anf5c008na
[1] Folding unit lock solenoid (SD8) [2] Front side direction
D. Saddle stitching section

(1) Bundle clip
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] 15anf5c009na
[1] Bundle sensor /1 (PS14) [3] Bundle clip motor (M11)

[2] Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) [4] Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)
1 705
(2) Front side

/1050e/1050eP
[7] [1]
[6] [2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
15anf5c010na
[1] Clincher solenoid /Rt (SD9) [5] Saddle stitching paper sensor (PS13)
[2] Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) [6] Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16)
[3] Bundle arm motor (M10) [7] Clincher solenoid /Lt (SD10)
[4] Bundle arm home sensor (PS32)
(3) Rear side /1
[10] [1]
[2]
[9] [3]
[4]
[5]
[8] [6]
[7] 15anf5c011na
[1] Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [6] Stapler movement home sensor (PS25)
[2] Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29) [7] Back side direction
[3] Bundle arm assist motor (M26) [8] Clincher up down motor (M20)
[4] Stapler movement motor (M15) [9] Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28)
[5] Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) [10] Clincher up down home sensor (PS26)
706 1

(4) Rear side /2
[3]
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
15anf5c012na
[1] Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) [3] Front side direction
[2] Saddle stitching press motor (M21)
(5) Stapler
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
15anf5c013na
[1] Stapler empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt [3] Stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt
(SW2) (HS3)
[2] Stapler motors /Rt (M29) and /Lt (M30) [4] Clincher start sensor /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4)
1 707
E. Bundle processing section

(1) Bundle press stage/bundle press bottom side
/1050e/1050eP
[10]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4] 15anf5c014na
[1] Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) [6] Bundle press home sensor (PS37)
[2] Bundle sensor /4 (PS54) [7] Bundle press motor (M23)
[3] Bundle registration home sensor (PS34) [8] Bundle sensor /2 (PS15)
[4] Bottom side view [9] Front side direction
[5] Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) [10] Trimmer registration sensor (PS55)
708 1

(2) Bundle exit
[7]
1050e/1050eP
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15anf5c015na
[1] Bundle tray set sensor (PS58) [5] Scraps box set sensor (PS40)
[2] Trimmer scraps full sensor (PS41) [6] Scraps press home sensor (PS48)
[3] Bundle tray paper full sensor (PS61) [7] Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)
[4] Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)
F. Trimmer section
[7] [8] [9]
[6] [10]
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] 15anf5c022na
[1] Trimmer press motor (M32) [6] Trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2] Trimmer paddle motor (M33) [7] Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
[3] Trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59) [8] Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
[4] Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) [9] Trimmer board solenoid (SD11)
[5] Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) [10] Front side direction
2 709
G. Left side
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[8] [3]
[7] [4]
[6]
[5] 15anf5c017na
[1] Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) [6] Bundle exit motor (M5)
[2] Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) [7] Bundle press movement motor (M17)
[3] Bundle arm rotation motor (M22) [8] Bundle registration motor (M12)
[4] Bundle press stage up down home sensor [9] Scraps removal fan motor (FM1)
(PS35) [10] Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)
[5] Left side view
710 1

H. Front side
1050e/1050eP
[1]
[6] [2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
15anf5c018na
[1] Front door sensor /Rt (PS42) [4] Jam indication board /2 (JAMIB/2)
[2] Front door switch /Rt (MS1) [5] Front door sensor /Lt (PS43)
[3] Jam indication board /1 (JAMIB/1) [6] Front door switch /Lt (MS2)
1 711
I. Rear side
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[8] [6]
[7]
15anf5c019na
[1] DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) [6] Noise filter (NF1)

[2] DC power supply /2 (DCPS2) [7] Power relay (RL1)
[3] DC power supply /3 (DCPS3) [8] SD control board (SDCB)
[4] Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) [9] SD drive board (SDDB)
[5] Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)
712 1

15.8 PB-501
A. SC section
1050e/1050eP
(1) Front side/Top side
[8] [9] [10]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6] [5] [4] a075f5c001ca
[1] SC alignment HP sensor (PS14) [7] SC switchback conveyance motor (M12)

[2] SC paper detection sensor (PS16) [8] SC switchback spring pressure detection
[3] SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) sensor (PS13)
[4] SC roller release motor (M18) [9] SC switchback release motor (M13)
[5] SC roller release sensor (PS17) [10] SC switchback arm pressure detection
[6] SC stopper solenoid (SD12) sensor (PS12)
2 713
(2) Rear side/Bottom side
[8] [9] [1]

/1050e/1050eP
[2]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a075f5c002ca
[1] Clamp entrance movement motor (M19) [6] Clamp entrance roller release motor (M20)
[2] Clamp entrance movement HP sensor (PS18) [7] SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
[3] SC alignment motor (M15) [8] SC entrance conveyance motor (M11)
[4] FD alignment solenoid (SD11) [9] Straight gate solenoid (SD91)
[5] Clamp entrance roller release sensor (PS19)
714 2

B. Clamp section
(1) Top side
1050e/1050eP
[8] [9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[6] [5] [4] a075f5c003ca
[1] Clamp rotation motor (M23) [6] Clamp paper LED (LED21)
[2] Clamp rotation HP sensor (PS24) [7] Cover paper table upper limit sensor /Rr (PS26)
[3] Clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) [8] Clamp motor (M22)
[4] Cover paper table upper limit sensor /Fr (PS27) [9] Clamp alignment HP sensor (PS21)
[5] Clamp paper sensor (PS28)
(2) Left side
[4]
[3] [1]
[2]
a075f5c004ca
[1] Book thickness sensor (PS29) [3] Clamp HP sensor (PS22)

[2] Clamp pressure sensor (PS23) [4] Clamp alignment motor (M21)
2 715
C. Pellet supply section
[9] [10]
/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[8] [7]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075f5c005ca
[1] Pellet supply arm motor (M34) [6] Pellet count sensor (PS37)
[2] Exhaust fan /1 (M80) [7] Pellet supply motor (M33)
[3] Pellet count LED (LED32) [8] Pellet supply door switch (MS1)
[4] Pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38) [9] Pellet remain sensor (PS36)
[5] Pellet supply arm lower limit sensor (PS39) [10] Pellet supply door sensor (PS40)
716 2

D. Glue tank section
(1) Glue tank
1050e/1050eP
[11] [12]
[10]
[1]
[9] [2]
[8]
[7] [4] [3]
[6] [5]
a075f5c006ca
[1] Glue tank heater (H1) [7] Glue tank up solenoid /2 (SD33)
[2] Glue apply roller heater (H2) [8] Glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31)
[3] Glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH) [9] Cover paper glue up solenoid (SD32)
[4] Glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) [10] Glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1)
[5] Glue apply position detection sensor (PS32) [11] Glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2)
[6] Glue apply position LED (LED31) [12] Glue apply roller motor (M32)
2 717
(2) Glue tank unit movement

/1050e/1050eP
[1]
[2]
a075f5c007ca
[1] Glue tank movement limit sensor (PS31) [2] Glue tank HP sensor (PS33)
718 2

E. Cover paper supply section
(1) Inside
1050e/1050eP
[1] [2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a075f5c019ca
[1] Cover paper tray upper limit sensor (PS74) [7] Cover paper tray fan /1 (M71)
[2] Cover paper conveyance sensor /1 (PS75) [8] Cover paper empty sensor (PS71)
[3] Cover paper pick up solenoid (SD71) [9] Cover paper tray fan /2 (M72)
[4] Cover paper tray knob sensor (PS82)
(2) Rear side
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3]

a075f5c020ca
[1] Cover paper pick up clutch (MC71) [4] Cover paper conveyance sensor /2 (PS76)
[2] Cover paper separation clutch (MC72) [5] Cover paper conveyance sensor /3 (PS77)
[3] Cover paper tray lift motor (M73)
2 719
F. Cover paper lift section

(1) cover paper table unit
/1050e/1050eP
[16] [17] [18] [19] [20]

[15]
[1]
[14]
[2]
[13] [3]
[12]
[11]
[10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4]

a075f5c008ca
[1] Cover paper switchback sensor (PS44) [11] Cover paper folding plate position sensor (PS51)
[2] Cover paper sensor /Rt (PS45) [12] Cover paper sensor /Lt (PS46)
[3] Cover paper lift solenoid (SD41) [13] Book exit motor (M42)
[4] Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Rt (M43) [14] Cover paper alignment HP sensor (PS41)
[5] Cover paper folding pressure sensor (PS52) [15] Cover paper conveyance arm HP sensor /Lt (PS43)
[6] Cover paper folding motor /Rt (M48) [16] Cover paper folding motor/Lt (M49)
[7] Cover paper folding plate encorder sensor (PS50) [17] Cover paper conveyance motor (M45)
[8] Cover paper alignment motor (M41) [18] Cover paper folding plate HP sensor /Rt (M48)
[9] Cover paper folding plate HP sensor /Lt (PS49) [19] Cover Paper conveyance arm HP sensor /Rt (PS42)
[10] Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Lt (M44) [20] Cutter motor (M50)
720 2

(2) Roller cutter assy
[2] [3]
1050e/1050eP
[1]
a075f5c009ca
[1] Cutter HP switch (SW41) [3] Cutter motor (M50)

[2] Cutter end switch (SW42)
2 721
G. Book stock section

(1) Rear side
/1050e/1050eP
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[11]
[6]
[10]
[7]
[9] [8]
a075f5c010ca
[1] Book conveyance belt up down motor (M63) [7] Book sensor /2 (PS67)
[2] Book conveyance belt movement motor (M62) [8] Book movement motor (M64)
[3] Book conveyance belt movement HP sensor (PS62) [9] Book stopper motor (M65)
[4] Book conveyance belt motor (M61) [10] Book stopper HP sensor (PS68)
[5] Book load limit sensor (PS65) [11] Book sensor /1 (PS66)
[6] Cart set sensor (PS69)
722 2

(2) Inside
1050e/1050eP
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2] [1]
a075f5c011ca
[1] Book conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64) [5] Book upper limit LED (LED61)
[2] Book end sensor (PS61) [6] Book door solenoid (SD61)
[3] Stacker door sensor (PS57) [7] Book conveyance belt HP sensor (PS63)
[4] Stacker door switch (MS4)
2 723
H. Conveyance section and framework section

(1) Conveyance unit
/1050e/1050eP
[10]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a075f5c012ca
[1] Sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) [6] Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDTB72)
[2] Sub tray full sensor (PS5) [7] Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)
[3] Entrance sensor (PS1) [8] Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
[4] Cover paper entrance sensor (PS3) [9] Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3)
[5] Waste box full sensor (PS80) [10] Sub tray exit sensor (PS4)
724 2

(2) Right side
1050e/1050eP
[8] [1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a075f5c013ca
[1] Upper door switch (SW1) [5] Front door lock solenoid (SD80)
[2] Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDTB71) [6] Front door switch (MS2)
[3] Cover paper conveyance sensor /5 (PS79) [7] SC entrance sensor (PS2)
[4] Cover paper conveyance sensor /4 (PS78) [8] Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)
2 725
(3) Rear side
[12] [13] [14] [15]

/1050e/1050eP
[11]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6] [5] [4] [3] a075f5c014ca
[1] PB drive board (PBDB) [9] DC power supply unit /2 (DCPU/2)

[2] Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDTB71) [10] Glue tank movement motor (M31)
[3] Cover paper table up down motor /Rr (M47) [11] DC power supply unit /3 (DCPU/3)
[4] Circuit breaker (CBR) [12] AC drive board (ACDB)
[5] Noise filter (NF) [13] Intermediate conveyance motor (M2)
[6] Cover paper table up down motor /Fr (M46) [14] Pellet supply cooling fan motor (M4)
[7] Cover paper feed motor (M74) [15] Exhaust fan /2 (M81)
[8] DC power supply unit /1 (DCPU/1)
726 2

(4) Inside
1050e/1050eP
[3]
[2]
[1]
a075f5c015ca
[1] Cover paper table HP sensor /Fr (PS47) [3] Waste box set sensor (PS81)
[2] Cover paper table HP sensor /Rr (PS53)
2 727
16. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
16. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

16.1 Main body
/1050e/1050eP
A. Connector in the board

(1) Printer control board
222(W : 18 pin) 216(W : 15 pin) 214(W : 11 pin) 223(W : 16 pin)

227(W : 10 pin) 225(W : 16 pin) 228(W : 26 pin) 401(W : 2 pin)
301(W : 2 pin)
224(W : 6 pin) 293(W : 10 pin) 211(W : 15 pin)

325(W : 6 pin) 422(W : 6 pin)
211(W : 15 pin)
212(W : 4 pin)
324(W : 7 pin) 215(W : 20 pin)
424(W : 4 pin)
210(W : 19 pin)
328(W : 6 pin)
323(W : 8 pin)
229(W : 17 pin)
326(W : 4 pin) 300(W : 2pin)
320(W : 16pin)
322(W : 5 pin) 213(W : 34 pin)
321(W : 4 pin) 220(GY : 34 pin) 200(W : 7 pin)

327(W : 10 pin) 217(W : 15 pin) 218(W : 9 pin)
1050fs5033c
(2) Image processing board
195 (GY : 40 pin)

110 (W : 40 pin) 103 (W : 4 pin)
124 (BK : 100 pin)
125 (W : 2 pin)
123 (BK : 100 pin)

134 (BK : 36 pin)
132 (W : 5 pin) 129 (W : 40 pin)
130 (W : 24 pin) 128 (W : 10 pin) 1050fs5034c
728
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 16. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

(3) Overall control board
136 (W : 40 pin)
1050e/1050eP
104 (W : 4 pin) 112 (BK : 100 pin) 113 (BK : 100 pin)
111 (W : 4 pin)
139 (BK : 9 pin) 109 (BK : 120 pin)
137 (W : 15 pin)
138 (W : 15 pin) 100 (W : 6 pin)

135 (W : 19 pin) 101 (W : 12 pin) 1050fs5035c
(4) AC drive board
420 (W : 18 pin)
35 (W : 5 pin)
36 (W : 10 pin)
411 (W : 11 pin)
410 (W : 34 pin)
100 (W : 8 pin) 442 (W : 9 pin)

440 (W : 4 pin) 1050fs5036c
729
(5) Scanner drive board

/1050e/1050eP
620 (W : 3 pin)
623 (W : 7 pin) 621 (W : 3 pin)
622 (W : 4 pin)
610 (W : 15 pin) 600 (W : 6 pin)

1050fs5037c
(6) ADU drive board /1
528 (W : 6 : pin)
520 (W : 6 pin)
620 (W : 3 pin)
510 (GY : 2 pin) 521 (GY : 28 pin)
510 (GY : 15 pin)

534 (W : 3 pin) 513 (W : 2 pin)
529 (W : 6 pin)
523 (GY : 19 pin)
531 (W : 10 pin) 527 (GY : 30 pin) 512 (W : 6 pin) 524 (W : 6 pin)

500 (W : 9 pin) 526 (GY : 30 pin) 511 (W : 5 pin)
1050fs5038c
730

(7) ADU drive board /2
1050e/1050eP
594 (W : 6 pin)
590 (GY : 19 pin)
596 (W : 3 pin)
591 (GY : 2 pin) 592 (W : 6 pin)

593 (W : 6 pin) 595 (W : 5 pin)
1050fs5039c
(8) DC power supply /1
2 (W : 3 pin)
76 (W : 4 pin) 75 (W : 2 pin)
77 (W : 10 pin) 71 (W : 7 pin)
74 (W : 14 pin) 73 (W : 6 pin) 1050fs5040c
731
(9) DC power supply /2

/1050e/1050eP
11 (W : 14 pin) 13 (W : 18 pin) 21 (W : 4 pin)

3 (W : 3 pin) 15 (W : 14 pin) 12 (W : 22 pin) 14 (W : 4 pin)
4 (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 3 pin)
1 (W : 5 pin)
1050fs5041c
(10) High voltage unit /1
251 (W : 11 pin) 250 (W : 3 pin) 1050fs5056c
732

(11) High voltage unit /2
1050e/1050eP
650 (W : 4 pin)
651 (W : 11 pin) 1050fs5042c
(12) Operation board /1
711 (W : 6 pin) 707 (W : 4 pin)

704 (W : 28 pin) 710 (W : 5 pin) 706 (W : 5 pin)
709 (W : 2 pin) 705 (W : 7 pin)
1050fs5043c
733
708 (W : 4 pin) 700 (W : 40 pin)

/1050e/1050eP
703 (W : 28 pin) 701 (W : 4 pin) 702 (W : 41 pin) 1050fs5044c
712 (W : 7 pin) 1050fs5045c
(15) OB inverter
713 (W : 7 pin) 714 (W : 3 pin) 715 (W : 3 pin) 1050fs5046c
(16) CCD board
170 (W : 50 pin)
1050fs5047c
(17) Polygon motor drive board
131 (W : 6 pin) 133 (W : 11 pin)

1050fs5048c
734

(18) Laser drive board
1050e/1050eP
56 (GY : 24 pin)
1050fs5049c
(19) Index board
51 (GY : 5 pin)
1050fs5050c
(20) L1 inverter
632 (W : 4 pin) 2 (W : 2 pin)

1050fs5051c
(21) Toner control sensor board
454 (W : 10 pin) 1050fs5057c
(22) Drum potential sensor board
457 (W : 5 pin) 458 (W : 4 pin) 1050fs5058c
735
(23) Multi feed detection board /1

/1050e/1050eP
490 (W : 3 pin)
1050fs5052c
(24) Multi feed detection board /2
491 (W : 6 pin)
1050fs5053c
(25) Parameter board
141 (W : 40 pin)
142 (W : 20 pin)
1050fs5059c
736

(26) IC board
1050e/1050eP
882 (BK : 160 pin)
881 (BK : 160 pin)
889 (BK : 9 pin) 893 (BK : 40 pin)
886 (BK : 4 pin)
885 (W : 4 pin)
897 (BK : 80 pin) 884 (B : 80 pin) 1050fs5054c
737
16.2 DF-603
16.2.1 Connector in the board
/1050e/1050eP
A. RADF control board
J1 (N.C.) J3 (N.C.) 5 (W : 3 pin) 7 (W : 12 pin)
3 (W : 7 pin)
4 (W : 4 pin) 6 (W : 4pin) 8 (GY : 34 pin)
2 (W : 8 pin) J2 (N.C.)
9 (W : 5 pin)
1 (W : 4 pin)
10 (W : 6 pin)
17 (W : 4 pin)
14 (W : 6 pin)
11 (W : 6 pin)
16 (W : 3 pin) 15 (W : 9 pin) 13 (W : 6 pin) 12 (W : 7 pin) df603fs5007c
B. Tray board
24 (W : 9 pin)
23 (W : 6 pin)
25 (W : 3 pin)
df603fs5008c
C. Multi feed detection board /1
26 (W : 3 pin)
27 (W : 2 pin) df603fs5009c
738

D. Multi feed detection board /2
1050e/1050eP
22 (W : 2 pin)
21 (W : 3 pin) df603fs5010c
739
16.3 PF-701
/1050e/1050eP
A. PFU control board
720 (W : 10 pin)
714 (W : 3 pin) 724 (W : 6 pin) 701 (W : 2 pin)
716 (GY : 4 pin)

710 (W : 14 pin)
723 (W : 6 pin)
722 (W : 10 pin)
N.C.
711 (GY : 28 pin)

N.C.
721 (GY : 22 pin)
SW1
717 (GY : 10 pin)
712 (GY : 14 pin) 715 (W : 6 pin) 700 (W : 7 pin)

713 (GY : 15 pin) 705 (GY : 15 pin)
SW1
ON
1
2
pf701fs5007c
NOTE
• Since the setting of DIP switch (SW1) is peculiar to the type, be sure not to change its setting.
740

16.4 FD-501
1050e/1050eP
A. FD control board
18 (W : 2 pin) 13 (GY : 9 pin) 9 (N.C.)

17 (W : 8 pin) 11 (GY : 6 pin) 7 (N.C.)
16 (W : 7 pin)
12 (N.C.) 8 (N.C.)
20 (W : 4 pin) 22 (N.C.)
15 (GY : 7 pin)
SW3
21 (N.C.) 5 (B : 40 pin)
2 (GY : 40 pin)
14 (GY : 18 pin) 1 (GY : 32 pin) 6 (B : 16 pin)

3 (GY : 16 pin) 4 (B : 32 pin)
ON ON
SW3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
C6500 1050
fd501fs5010c
2 741
B. Punch drive board
224 (GY : 20 pin) 210 (GY : 28 pin) 203 (GY : 18 pin)

/1050e/1050eP
220 (GY : 24 pin) 201 (GY : 40 pin)
219 (GY : 26 pin)

208 (GY : 9 pin)
222 (GY : 12 pin) 202 (GY : 32 pin)
206 (W : 4 pin)
221 (GY : 22 pin) 204 (GY : 40 pin)
223 (GY : 11 pin) 209 (GY : 34 pin)
215 (W : 8 pin)
211 (W : 4 pin)
217 (W : 9 pin) 207 (W : 6 pin)
216 (W : 12 pin) 205 (W : 5 pin) fd501fs5011c
C. Folding drive board
500 (W : 4 pin) 508 (GY : 36 pin) 507 (GY : 15 pin)
501 (GY : 34 pin)
503 (GY : 16 pin)
506 (W : 6 pin)
505 (W : 12 pin) fd501fs5012c
742

D. PI drive board
309 (W : 4 pin) 311 (GY : 26 pin) 314 (GY : 15 pin)
1050e/1050eP
313 (GY : 8 pin)
306 (GY : 18 pin)
305 (GY : 16 pin)
318 (GY : 7 pin)

315 (GY : 6 pin) 307 (GY : 20 pin)
308 (W : 3 pin)
317 (GY : 4 pin) 303 (GY : 6 pin) 300 (W : 2 pin)
304 (GY : 28 pin) 301 (GY : 16 pin) 302 (GY : 32 pin) fd501fs5013c
E. FD operation board
361 (GY : 26 pin)
fd501fs5014c
F. Jam indicator board
370 (GY : 6 pin)
fd501fs5015c
743
G. DC power supply board
51 (W : 8 pin)
/1050e/1050eP
1 (W : 3 pin) fd501fs5016c
H. Multi feed detection board /1, /2
490 (W : 3 pin)
fd501fs5025c
I. Temperature sensor board
374 (GY : 4 pin)
fd501fs5026c
744

16.5 LS-501/502
1050e/1050eP
A. LS control board
22 (W : 2 pin) 5 (W : 9 pin)
21 (W : 4 pin) 11 (W : 6 pin)
24 (W : 12 pin) 2 (W : 15 pin)
6 (W : 3 pin) 1 (W : 13 pin)
23 (W : 11 pin) 3 (W : 5 pin) 4 (W : 12 pin)

30 (BL : 10 pin) 29 (W : 7 pin)
28 (W : 2 pin) (N.C.) (N.C.) 9 (W : 11 pin)
26 (W : 5 pin)
8 (W : 8 pin)
27 (W : 4 pin)
12 (W : 6 pin) 25 (W : 6 pin) 13 (W : 7 pin)
14 (W : 2 pin)
10 (W : 10 pin)
20 (W : 4 pin)
18 (W : 7 pin)
19 (W : 3 pin) 7 (W : 14 pin)
15 (W : 12 pin) 17 (W : 6 pin) 16 (W : 13 pin) ls502fs5005c
B. Relay board /1
4 (W : 17 pin)
1 (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
3 (W : 4 pin) ls502fs5006c
C. Relay board /2
4 (W : 17 pin)
1 (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
3 (W : 4 pin) ls502fs5007c
745
D. DC power supply
/1050e/1050eP
51 (W : 6 pin)
1 (W : 5 pin)
52 (W : 2 pin)
ls502fs5008c
746

16.6 FS-503
1050e/1050eP
A. FNS control board
19 (W : 4 pin) 9 (GY : 40 pin)
16 (W : 7 pin)
10 (GY : 3 pin) 12 (N.C.)
20 (W : 4 pin) 22 (GY : 20 pin)
23 (N.C.)
SW3
21 (W : 3 pin)
2 (GY : 40 pin)
14 (GY : 18 pin) 1 (GY : 32 pin)

3 (GY : 16 pin)
ON ON
1 : ON 1 : ON
2 : ON 2 : OFF
SW3 3 : ON SW3 3 : ON
4 : ON 4 : ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
C6500 1050
fs503fs5007c
2 747
B. FNS drive board
53 (W : 8 pin) 66 (W : 2 pin) 62 (GY : 16 pin)

/1050e/1050eP
52 (W : 18 pin) 71 (GY : 6 pin)

70 (W : 8 pin)
55 (GY : 15 pin)
61 (GY : 40 pin)
51 (W : 26 pin)
65 (GY : 3 pin)
56 (W : 22 pin)
64 (GY : 18 pin)
60 (W : 4 pin)
57 (GY : 40 pin)
58 (GY : 30 pin) 63 (GY : 32 pin)

54 (W : 15 pin) 59 (GY : 14 pin) fs503fs5008c
C. Stapler board
2 (O : 3 pin) 4 (R : 3 pin)
3 (W : 3 pin) 5 (O : 3 pin)
1 (W : 7 pin)
fs503fs5009c
748

16.7 SD-501
1050e/1050eP
A. SD control board
19 (W : 4 pin)
18 (W : 2 pin)
17 (W : 8 pin) 10 (W : 3 pin) 12 (W : 8 pin) 9 (N.C.) 7 (W : 24 pin)
16 (W : 7 pin)
20 (W : 4 pin)
22 (N.C.)
SW3
24 (W : 2 pin)
23 (N.C.)
21 (N.C.)
5 (GY : 40 pin)
2 (W : 40 pin)
3 (W : 16 pin) 4 (GY : 32 pin) 6 (GY : 16 pin)

14 (W : 18 pin) 1 (W : 32 pin)
ON 1 : OFF ON 1 : OFF
2 : ON 2 : OFF
3 : ON 3 : ON
1 2 3 4 4 : ON 1 2 3 4 4 : ON
C6500 1050
15anf5c020nb
2 749
B. SD drive board
/1050e/1050eP
101 (W : 6 pin) 153 (W : 36 pin)

144 (W : 30 pin) 164 (W : 8 pin)
148 (W : 6 pin)
141 (W : 15 pin) 154 (W : 12 pin)
143 (W : 6 pin) 165 (W : 14 pin)
147 (W : 8 pin) 162 (W : 6 pin)
142 (W : 11 pin) 155 (W : 8 pin)
146 (W : 22 pin) 157 (W : 12 pin) 156 (GY : 14 pin)
152 (GY : 12 pin)

145 (W : 36 pin) 140 (W : 40 pin) 158 (W : 6 pin)
150 (W : 4 pin)
120 (W : 32 pin) 170 (Y : 12 pin)
169 (W : 4 pin)
167 (W : 2 pin)
122 (W : 34 pin)
166 (W : 4 pin)
110 (W : 18 pin) 168 (W : 15 pin)
121 (W : 40 pin) 163 (W : 6 pin)
126 (W : 40 pin) 100 (W : 4 pin) 151 (W : 40 pin)

127 (W : 30 pin) 125 (W : 32 pin) 149 (W : 30 pin)
15anf5c021na
750 1

16.8 PB-501
1050e/1050eP
A. PB control board (PBCB)
VR4 33(GY:20 pin) 30(GY:30 pin) 31(GY:24 pin)
39(W:3 pin) 5(GY:11 pin) 32(GY:28 pin) 18(GY:36 pin)
22(W:2 pin)
15(GY:40 pin)
SW1
38(W:5 pin)
7(N.C.)
VR2
16(GY:38 pin)
13(N.C.)
21(GY:6 pin)
14(N.C.)
29(W:4 pin)
8(N.C.)
3(N.C.) 19(GY:34 pin)
12(N.C.) 53(N.C)
24(N.C.)
6(N.C.) SW2 20(GY:24 pin)
2(W:7 pin) 36(GY:40 pin)
1(W:3 pin) 11(N.C.)

17(GY:36 pin)
44(W:4 pin) 9(N.C.)
34(W:9 pin) 23(N.C.) 37(GY:18 pin)

4(GY:12 pin) 10(N.C.) 35(GY:38 pin) 62(GY:4 pin)
ON ON
89 1 : ON 1 : OFF
67 2 : OFF 2 : OFF
A
3 4 5
DipSW DipSW
B C DE
3 : OFF 3 : OFF
4 : OFF 4 : OFF
2
1 F
0
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SW1 C6500 1050
a075f5c016ca
NOTE
• Do not change the SW1 setting during maintenance and repair.
2 751
B. PB drive board (PBDB)

/1050e/1050eP
80(GY:26 pin)
57(GY:36 pin) 88(N.C.) 52(W:6 pin) 81(GY:22 pin)
71(W:12 pin)
54(GY:40 pin) 50(W:4 pin)
70(W:12 pin)
89(N.C.) 72(W:13 pin)
82(W:8 pin)
55(GY:38 pin)
90(N.C.) 83(GY:17 pin)
60(GY:6 pin)
79(N.C.)
58(GY:34 pin) 86(W:15 pin)
85(GY:16 pin)
87(GY:24 pin)
59(GY:24 pin) 74(W:6 pin)
73(W:6 pin) 78(W:7 pin)
76(W:13 pin) 61(W:4 pin)
56(GY:36 pin)
69(W:5 pin)
75(W:12 pin) 84(W:12 pin) 68(W:6 pin)

77(W:13 pin) 51(W:4 pin)
a075f5c017ca
C. AC drive board (ACDB)
41(W:7 pin)
45(W:6 pin)
40(W:3 pin)
43(W:3 pin) 46(W:2 pin)

42(W:5 pin) a075f5c018ca
752 2
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 17. TIMING CHART

17. TIMING CHART
17.1 Main body
1050e/1050eP
A. A4, life size, 2 single sided originals, single sided copy (1 copy), reversed paper exit, paper feed
tray /1, line speed 490 mm/sec
Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Item
Paper feed sensor /1 (PS7)
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS17)
Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS19)
Loop sensor (PS16)
Paper leading edge sensor (PS41)
Fusing exit sensor (PS22)
ADU accelerate sensor (PS49)
Reverse sensor /1 (PS48)
ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46)
ADU exit sensor (PS43)
Paper exit sensor (PS3)
Transfer assist motor (M19)

Fusing motor (M1)
Separation clutch /1 (CL5)
Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4)
Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD3)
Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1)
Vertical conveyance motor H
(M8) L
Loop motor (M18) H
L
Reverse/exit motor (M13)
Paper exit motor /1 (M9) H
L
ADU conveyance motor /1 H
(M15) L
(M16) L
ADU reverse H
F
paper exit motor L
(M31) H
R
L
Reverse motor H
F
(M12) L
H
R
L
ADU acceleration motor H
L
Reverse/exit solenoid (SD7)
Drum motor (M2)

Charging
Developing bias
Erase lamp (EL)
Separation
Transfer
Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
Guide plate
Start button ON
1050fs5060c
753
17. TIMING CHART Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
B. A4, life size, 2 double sided originals, double sided copy (1 copy), straight paper exit, paper feed
tray /1, line speed 490 mm/sec
/1050e/1050eP
Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Item
Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS19)
Loop sensor (PS16)
Paper leading edge sensor (PS41)
Fusing exit sensor (PS22)
ADU accelerate sensor (PS49)
ADU exit sensor (PS43)
Paper exit sensor (PS3)
Transfer assist motor (M19)

Fusing motor (M1)
Vertical conveyance motor H
(M8) L
Loop motor (M18) H
L
Reverse/exit motor (M13)
Paper exit motor /1 (M9) H
L
(M15) L
(M16) L
ADU reverse H
F
paper exit motor L
(M31) H
R
L
Reverse motor H
F
(M12) L
H
R
L
ADU acceleration motor H
L
Reverse/exit solenoid (SD7)
Drum motor (M2)

Charging
Developing bias
Erase lamp (EL)
Separation
Transfer
Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
Guide plate
Start button ON
1050fs5061c
754
Item Time (sec) 0 1 2 3
Tray up/down motor (M303) Up

Down
17.2 DF-603

Original feed motor (M302) F 800 mm/s

465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
Original conveyance motor 620 mm/s

F
(M301) 465 mm/s
A. A4, life size, single sided original, 3 originals
465 mm/s
R
620 mm/s
Original paper exit motor /1 620 mm/s
(M304) F 465 mm/s
250 mm/s
250 mm/s
465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
620 mm/s
Reverse jam sensor /Lt (PS304)

(M305) F 465 mm/s
370 mm/s
370 mm/s
465 mm/s
R
620 mm/s
Original exit sensor /Rt (PS314)
V-VALID signal
Start button ON 1st sheet of paper 2nd sheet of paper 3rd sheet of paper scanned Exit of the 3rd
sheet of paper
df603fs5011c
scanned scanned
completed
17. TIMING CHART
755
1050e/1050eP
/1050e/1050eP
756
Item Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

17. TIMING CHART
Tray up/down motor (M303) Up

Down
Original feed motor (M302) 800 mm/s

F
465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s

Original conveyance motor 620 mm/s
(M301) F
465 mm/s
465 mm/s
R
620 mm/s
B. A4, life size, double sided original, 3 originals

(M304) F 465 mm/s
250 mm/s
250 mm/s
465 mm/s
R
550 mm/s
620 mm/s
Reverse jam sensor /Lt (PS304)

(M305) F 465 mm/s
370 mm/s
250 mm/s
R 465 mm/s
620 mm/s
Original exit sensor /Rt (PS314)
V-VALID signal
Back of the Back of the

Start button Front of the 1st sheet 1st sheet of
Front of the 2nd 2nd sheet Front of the 3rd sheet Back of the 3rd sheet
of paper scanned paper sheet of paper of paper of paper scanned of paper scanned
df603fs5012c
ON scanned
scanned scanned
17.3 PF-701
Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5
A. Tray 4, A4, 2 originals
Item
Loop sensor /2 (PS94)
Exit sensor (PS99)
Forced separation clutch (CL11)
PF exit conveyance motor (M41)
Main body: Paper exit sensor (PS3)
Start button ON
pf701fs5008c
17. TIMING CHART
757
1050e/1050eP
17.4 FD-501
A. Letter fold-in, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
/1050e/1050eP
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
Punch registration motor (M13)
Alignment plate motor (M12) F

R
Punch drive motor (M10)
2nd folding release motor (M15)
3rd folding motor (M6)
3rd folding release motor (M16)
Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)
Main tray paper exit motor (M17)
Folding gate solenoid (SD15)
Paper exit solenoid (SD12)
Punch conveyance sensor (PS5)
2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)
S size conveyance sensor (PS58)
Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON

fd501fs5017c
758

B. Letter fold-out, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1050e/1050eP

R

fd501fs5018c
759
C. Double parallel, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/1050e/1050eP

R

fd501fs5019c
760

D. Folding, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1050e/1050eP

R

fd501fs5020c
761
E. Gate fold, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
/1050e/1050eP

R

fd501fs5021c
762

F. Z-fold, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Item
1050e/1050eP

R

fd501fs5022c
763
G. PI cover insertion, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Item
/1050e/1050eP

R

Start button ON fd501fs5023c
764

H. Punch, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3
Item
1050e/1050eP

R

fd501fs5024c
765
/1050e/1050eP
766
17. TIMING CHART
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Item
17.5 LS-501/502
(M2) 490 mm/s

Sub tray exit motor 1000 mm/s
(M3) 490 mm/s
Coupling conveyance motor (M6)
Grip conveyance 1300 mm/s
motor (M4) 1000 mm/s
490 mm/s
Grip conveyance home sensor (PS5)
Alignment plate home sensor (PS12)
A. A4, straight mode, 3 originals, 1 copy set

Shift unit home sensor (PS11)
1st gate solenoid (SD1)

2nd gate solenoid (SD10)
Front stopper Latch ON
solenoid (SD9) Latch OFF
Rear stopper Latch ON
Job partition Latch ON
Conveyance sensor /1 (PS7)

Coupling exit sensor (PS18)
ls502fs5009c
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Item
(M2) 490 mm/s

(M3) 490 mm/s
490 mm/s
B. A3, shift mode, 2 originals, 2 copies set



ls502fs5010c
17. TIMING CHART
767
1050e/1050eP
/1050e/1050eP
768
17. TIMING CHART
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Item
(M2) 490 mm/s
(M3) 350 mm/s
490 mm/s
C. A4, Sub tray mode, 3 originals, 1 copy set


ls502fs5011c
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Item
(M2) 490 mm/s

(M3) 490 mm/s
490 mm/s
D. A4, tandem mode, 3 originals, 1 copy set



ls502fs5012c
17. TIMING CHART
769
1050e/1050eP
/1050e/1050eP
770
Time (sec)
17. TIMING CHART
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Signal while in FS operation

17.6 FS-503
Tray up down motor (M3)
Stack assist guide motor (M24)
Paper exit opening motor (M8)
Rear stopper motor (M26)

A. Sort, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, Single side
Stacker entrance motor (M13)
Main tray exit motor (M7)
Main body side paper exit sensor (PS3)
Main tray exit sensor (PS10)
Counter reset sensor (PS15)
Start button ON
fs503fs5010c
Time (sec)
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6


B. Sub tray, A4, 2 original, 2 copies, single side
Sub tray exit motor (M6)

H
fs503fs5011c
17. TIMING CHART
771
1050e/1050eP
/1050e/1050eP
772
Time (sec)
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6
17. TIMING CHART

C. Staple, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, single side
Sub tray exit motor (M6)
fs503fs5012c
17.7 SD-501
Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Item

A. Coupling conveyance, A4, 3 sheets of paper, 2 set
Horizontal conveyance exit sensor (PS4)
Main body start signal
1
15anf5c800na
17. TIMING CHART
773
1050e/1050eP
/1050e/1050eP
774
1
17. TIMING CHART
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

B. Subtray exit, A4, 3 sheets of paper, 2 set
Horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3)
Subtray exit sensor (PS11)
15anf5c801na

C. Overlap tri-folding, A4S, 3 sheets of paper, 3 set
1050e/1050eP
Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Item

Right angle F
conveyance motor
(M6) R
F
Overlap motor (M13)
R



H
Folding conveyance
motor (M4) L
R
Folding main scan F
alignment motor /Fr
(M7) R
Folding sub scan F
alignment exit motor
(M8) R
Folding main scan F
alignment motor /Rr
A
(M14) R
F
1st folding blade motor 1st folding
(M18) R
2nd folding blade F 2nd

motor (M19) R folding

Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9) Exit


Folding exit home sensor

(PS24)
15anf5c802na
1 775
/1050e/1050eP
Time (sec)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Item
F Right angle
conveyance motor
R (M6)
F
Overlap motor (M13)
R



H
Folding conveyance
L motor (M4)
R
F Folding main scan

alignment motor /Fr
R (M7)
F Folding sub scan
alignment exit motor
R (M8)
F Folding main scan
A alignment motor /Rr
R (M14)
F
1st folding blade motor
1st folding 1st folding (M18)
R
F 2nd folding blade
2nd 2nd motor (M19)
folding folding R

Exit Exit Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9)



Folding exit home sensor

(PS24)
15anf5c803na
776 1

D. Saddle stitching (trimmer), A3, 5 sheets of paper, 2 set
1050e/1050eP
Time (sec)
Item
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Right angle F
conveyance motor (M6) R
F
Overlap motor (M13)
R
Folding conveyance F
motor (M4) R
Folding main scan align- F
ment motor /Fr (M7) R
H
Folding sub scan
alignment exit motor L
(M8) R
Folding main scan align- F
ment motor /Rr (M14) R
1st folding blade F
motor (M18) Folding Folding Folding Folding
R
Saddle stitching align- F
ment motor /Rt (M9) R
Bundle arm motor F
(M10) R
F
Bundle clip motor (M11)
R
Saddle stitching align- F
ment motor /Lt (M16) R
A
Clincher up down motor F
(M20) R
Bundle arm rotation F
motor (M22) R
Bundle arm assist F
motor (M26) R
Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30) Staple
Bundle sensor /1 (PS14)
F
Bundle exit motor (M5)
R
Bundle registration F
motor (M12) R
Bundle press F
movement motor (M17) R
Bundle press F
motor (M23) R
Bundle press stage up F
down motor (M24) R
Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)
Trimmer blade motor F
(M31) R
Trimmer press motor F
(M32) R
15anf5c804na
1 777
Time (sec)
/1050e/1050eP
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Item
F Right angle convey-
R ance motor (M6)
F
Overlap motor (M13)
R
F Folding conveyance
R motor (M4)
F Folding main scan align-

R ment motor /Fr (M7)
H
Folding sub scan
L alignment exit motor
R (M8)
F Folding main scan align-

R ment motor /Rr (M14)
Folding F 1st folding blade

R motor (M18)
F Saddle stitching align-
R ment motor /Rt (M9)
F Bundle arm motor

R (M10)
F Bundle clip motor (M11)

R
F Saddle stitching align-
R ment motor /Lt (M16)
A
F Clincher up down motor
R (M20)
F Bundle arm rotation
R motor (M22)
F Bundle arm assist
R motor (M26)
Staple Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30)

F
Bundle exit motor (M5)
R
F Bundle registration
R motor (M12)
F Bundle press
R movement motor (M17)
F Bundle press
R motor (M23)
F Bundle press stage up
R down motor (M24)

Exit Exit Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)
F Trimmer blade motor
Trim Trim R (M31)
F Trimmer press motor
R (M32)
15anf5c805na
778 1
17.8 PB-501
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A. Sub tray paper exit, A4, originals, single side
Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)
Print start signal ON
2
15anf5c806c
17. TIMING CHART
779
1050e/1050eP
/1050e/1050eP
780
2
17. TIMING CHART
First book Next book

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
(1) (40) (1) (10) (20) (30)


SC switchback convey- F
ance motor (M12) R
SSC switchback release F
motor (M13) R
SC alignment motor(M15) Open
Close
SC roller release motor(M18)
Clamp entranse roller release
motor (M20)
SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13 )

Open
Close Book Release
Clamp motor (M22) Open Clamp
Close
Upright
Clamp rotation motor (M23) Left
Right
Rotation
A
Glue tank movement motor Forward
(M31) Backward
Forward Backward
Glue apply position detection
sensor (PS32)
Glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31)
Positioning (alignment)
Cover paper alignment Open
to be trimmed
motor (M41) Close
Cover paper conveyance Down
arm motor /Rt (M43) Up
arm motor /Lt (M44) Up
Cover paper table up Up
down motor /Fr (M46) Down
Up
Cover paper folding motor Open Open Cover paper folding operation Down
/Rt (M48) Close
Cover paper folding Open 5 seconds waiting
motor /Lt (M49) Close
Backward
Cutter motor (M50)
Forward
Cover paper sensor /Rt (PS45)
Cover paper sensor /Lt (PS46)

Positioning
Book conveyance belt motor (M61) (alignment)
B. Perfect Binding, A4, 40 originals, 2 copies, single side, PB cover paper supply
Book conveyance belt Open

movement motor (M62) Close Down of book
Book conveyance Down
belt up down motor (M63) Up
15anf5c807c
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
(40)
Book Release
Clamp
Upright
Rotation
A
Forward Backward
to be trimmed
Returning to HP
Positioning
(alignment)
Open Up
Down Down
Cover paper folding operation
5 seconds waiting
Positioning
(alignment)
Down of book
2
15anf5c808c
17. TIMING CHART
781
1050e/1050eP
/1050e/1050eP
782
2
17. TIMING CHART
First book Next book
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

Change
Bypass gate solenoid (SD2) Cover paper path
(1) (40) (1) (10)
SC switchback conveyance F
motor (M12) R
SC alignment motor (M15) Open
Close
Clamp entranse move- Up
ment motor (M19) Down
Clamp entranse roller release motor
(M20)

Clamp alignment motor (M21) Open
Close Book Release
Clamp motor (M22) Open Clamp
Close Rotation
Upright
Clamp rotation motor (M23) Left
Right
Forward Backward
Glue tank movement motor (M31) Backward Forward
Glue apply position detection sensor (PS32) A

Glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31)
Cover paper alignment motor (M41) Close Returning to HP

Open Positioning Positioning
Cover paper conveyance Down (alignment) (alignment)
arm motor /Rt (M43) Up
arm motor /Lt (M44) Up
Cover paper table up down Up Down
motor /Fr(M46) Down Open
Cover paper folding operation Down
Cover paper folding motor /Rt(M48) Open
Close
5 seconds waiting
Cover paper folding motor /Lt(M49) Open
Close
Backward
Cutter motor (M50)
Forward
Cover paper sensor /Rt (PS45)
Cover paper sensor /Lt (PS46)
Book conveyance belt motor (M61)

Book conveyance belt move- Close
ment motor (M62) Open
Book conveyance belt up down Down
motor (M63) Up
C. Perfect Binding, A4, 40 originals, 2 copies, single side, main body cover paper supply
15anf5c809c
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
Two pages Change

Cover paper path
(40)
A
Returning
to HP
to be trimmed
Down
2
15anf5c810c
17. TIMING CHART
783
1050e/1050eP
/1050e/1050eP
Blank page
784
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
59
60
58
128
41
126
51
601-6
601-5
601-4
601-3
601-2
601-1
601-7
1
1
18.1 Main body 1/4
610-1 SCAN_CLK
300
610-2 SCAN_FR Power plug
301
610-3 SCAN_W23
302
600-1 5V
600-6 P.G
600-5 P.G
600-2 S.G
600-4 24V
600-3 24V
610-4 SCAN_V0
303
610-5 SCAN_V1
304
610-6 SCAN_V2
305
620-1 U
610-7 LUMP_CONT
306
610-8 FAN_CONT
307
610-9 FAN_EM 620-2 V Scanner motor
308
M27
610-10 HP_PS
309
610-11 LOVRUN_PS
310
620-3 W G/Y
610-12 TOP_PS
311
631-1 632-1
FT11
FT10
610-13 ROVRUN_PS
312
623-1 24V
610-14 SCAN24V_FEM
313
631-2 632-2
610-15 S.GND 623-2 CONT
314
631-3 632-3
L1
Exposure lamp
CBR
623-3 P.GND
631-4 632-4
L1 INVB
Circuit breaker
A
631-5
F/G
FT13
FT12
F/G
640-3-1
FT14
621-1 CONT
FT15
2
2
640-2-2
621-2 EM Scanner cooling fan
FM19
640-1-3
NF1
621-3 P.GND
Noise filter /1
650-1
FT17
FT16
622-1 5V
650-2 Scanner home
SDB
622-2 SIG
FT41
650-3
FT42
sensor
PS51
622-3 S.GND
NF2
622-4 SIG
Noise filter /2
CN19-2
CN19-1
SCANNER
CN10-5
Transformer /2
3
753-5 CN20-1
CN18-2
19
2
Dehumidification
T2
10
11
506
550
507
Dehumidification heater/2 753-6 CN20-4 heater switch
20
284-1
Main relay
RL1
305-5
HTR2
40
45
84
SW3
161
3
3
284-2 283-1 CN12-1

FT100
1
5
FT18
46
44
81
87
35
32
305-1
509
510
92
85
34
31
162
131
6
T1
CN18-1
33
30
Dehumidification heater/1 305-6
CN12-4
10
285-1 283-2
FT19
HTR1
T1
T1
285-2 305-2 Transformer /1

FT101
4
508
502
503
G
G
T2
12
T2
Triac /1
TRC2
TRC1
CN14-1
100-3 5v0
100-2 5v0
100-1 5v0
100-6 S.G
100-5 S.G
100-4 S.G
101-9 S.G
101-8 S.G
101-7 S.G
101-4 S.G
101-2 S.G
101-11 S.G
504
505
Triac /2
101-12 12V(OP)
101-3 12v(CCD)
101-1 12v(HDD)
163-7-1 665-3
101-6 5v1(IMAGE)
101-5 5v1(IMAGE)
CN137-1 APS/5V
101-10 5v1(HDD/OP)
163-6-2 665-2 APS
CN137-2 SIG
501
503
163-5-3 665-1
SW1
CN137-3 S.GND
sensor /1
163-4-4 666-3
CN137-4 APS/5V
163-3-5 666-2 APS
Main power switch
CN137-5 SIG
163-2-6 666-1 sensor /2
PS52 PS53
CN14-2
CN137-6 S.GND
163-1-7
A
SCANNER
CN137-7 LAMP_H/L
For Option
4
4
OUT
200V
Outlet
160-1-6
CN138-12 PAT1
160-2-5
CN138-13 PAT2
160-3-4
CN10-3
-3 Vpp
CN138-14 PAT3
160-4-3
711-1 5V1
710-1 5V1
-6 SGND
-5 SGND
CN138-15 PAT4
CN10-4
160-5-2
LAMP
G/Y
10
160-6-1
STATUS
-2 ROM_RXDin
-3 MONI_RXDin
INDICATOR
-5 ROM_RESET
-4 ROM_TXDout
3
11
-2 MONI_CLKout
-4 MONI_TXDout
12
709-1 FOOT_SW
703-A14 12V3 704-A1
-2 SGND
-A13 12V3 -A2
CN2-3
CN2-1
-A12 12V3 -A3

AC_NEU
AC_HOT
707-1 SUB_SW
-A11 SHUT_SIG -A4
SW2
30
-2 SGND CN72-1 5V0

-A10 SW_LED -A5
31
-3 N.C. CN72-2 5V0

-A9 WT_LED -A6
Power switch
32
-A8 SHUT_LED -A7 CN72-3 5V0

33
-A7 5V0 -A8 CN72-4 S.GND

OACB
34
CN72-5 S.GND
cooling fan /1
Power supply
-A6 SW_SIG -A9

35
-A5 SGND -A10 706-1 BRT 712-6 CN72-6 S.GND
5
5
-A4 Y2 -A11 -2 5V1 -5

SW
VR
LED
FM25
-A3 X1 -A12 -3 DATA_LED -4

36
HDD2 CN73-1 12V0

OB1
-A2 Y1 -A13 -4 GND -3 CN73-2 12V0

-A1 X2 -A14 -5 MAIN_LED -2
38
PRCB CN73-3 12V3

LED
OB2
DATA
703-B14 5V1_1 704-B1 -6 SUB_LED -1

39
PFU CN73-4 12V3

-B13 5V1_1 -B2
40
OACB CN73-5 12V3

-B12 CTS_IN -B3 CN73-6 12V3
-B11 SGND -B4
42
HDD2 CN73-7 S.GND

-B10 DSR_IN -B5 705-1 12V2 713-1 CN73-8 S.GND
-B9 SGND -B6
44
-2 12V2 -2 CN73-9 S.GND

-B8 RXD_IN -B7
45
-3 SGND -3 CN73-10 S.GND

-B7 SGND -B8
46
-4 SGND -4
OACB
CN73-11 S.GND
FM26 cooling fan /2
Power supply
-B6 RTS_OUT -B9 -5 RMT -5 CN73-12 S.GND

-B5 SGND -B10 -6 ALM -6
-2 NC
-2 NC
-3 VL2
-3 VL1
-B4 DTR_OUT -B11 -7 BRT -7

OB INVB
715-1 VH2
714-1 VH1
48
-B3 SGND -B12 FNS CN74-1 24v2

758-1
49
-B2 TXD_OUT -B13 ADF CN74-2 24v2

50
-B1 SGND -B14 ADUDB1 CN74-3 24v2

51
SDB CN74-8 24v2

52
M21/RCDB CN74-9 24v2

CN74-10 24v2
53
PRCB
54
FNS CN74-4 P.GND

6
6
55
ADF CN74-5 P.GND

136-A1 SGND 700-A20 SGND 702-1 SGND 716-1
56
ADUDB1 CN74-6 P.GND

136-A2 LCD_UD -A19 LCD_U/D -2 CLK -2
57
PRCB CN74-7 P.GND

136-A3 LCD_RL -A18 LCD_R/L -3 SGND -3
58
CN74-11 P.GND
136-A4 SGND -A17 SGND -4 Hsync -4
59
CN74-12 P.GND
SCB
136-A5 SGND -A16 SGND -5 Vsync -5

60
CN74-13 P.GND
136-A6 TXCLKOUT+ -A15 RXCLKIN+ -6 SGND -6
61
PRCB CN74-14 P.GND

136-A7 TXCLKOUT- -A14 RXCLKIN- -7 SGND -7
136-A8 SGND -A13 SGND -8 SGND -8
62
136-A9 TXOUT2+ -A12 RXIN2+ -9 R_0 -9 CN75-1 36v

DCPS/1
63
136-A10 TXOUT2- -A11 RXIN2- -10 R_1 -10 CN75-2 P.GND

PMDB
136-A11 SGND -A10 SGND -11 R_2 -11

136-A12 TXOUT1+ -A9 RXIN1+ -12 SGND -12
64
CN76-1 24v3
136-A13 TXOUT1- -A8 RXIN1- -13 R_3 -13
65
CN76-1 24v3
M4
136-A14 SGND -A7 SGND -14 R_4 -14

66
CN76-3 P.GND
136-A15 TXOUT0+ -A6 RXIN0+ -15 R_5 -15
67
OACB 1/2
CN76-4 P.GND
136-A16 TXOUT0- -A5 RXIN0- -16 SGND -16
136-A17 SGND -A4 SGND -17 SGND -17
68
136-A18 SGND -A3 SGND -18 SGND -18 CN77-1 P.GND

69
PRCB
136-A19 LCD5V -A2 5V1 -19 G_0 -19 CN77-2 P.GND

70
136-A20 LCD5V -A1 5V1 -20 G_1 -20 HV1 CN77-3 P.GND
OB3
Backlight /1
Backlight /2
71
136-B1 RTS_OUT 700-B20 CTS_IN -21 G_2 -21 CN77-4 P.GND

7
7
72
136-B2 SGND -B19 SGND -22 SGND -22 CN77-5 P.GND

73
136-B3 DTR_OUT -B18 DSR_IN -23 G_3 -23 CN77-6 P.GND

74
136-B4 SGND -B17 SGND -24 G_4 -24 CN77-7 P.GND

75
CN77-8 P.GND
LCDB
136-B5 TXD_OUT -B16 RXD_IN -25 G_5 -25

76
136-B6 SGND -B15 SGND -26 SGND -26 CN77-9 P.GND

PKB
77
136-B7 CTS_IN -B14 RTS_OUT -27 SGND -27 CN77-10 P.GND

M1/M2/M3 FNS
136-B8 SGND -B13 SGND -28 SGND -28

136-B9 DSR_IN -B12 DTR_OUT -29 B_0 -29
78
MS2 FT-1 24v3

136-B10 SGND -B11 SGND -30 B_1 -30
136-B11 RXD_IN -B10 TXD_OUT -31 B_2 -31
136-B12 SGND -B9 SGND -32 SGND -32
136-B13 WT_LED -B8 WT_LED -33 B_3 -33 CN71-1 5V_IN
142
DCPS/2
136-B14 SHUT_LED -B7 SHUT_LED -34 B_4 -34 CN71-2 S.GND
136-B15 SW_SIG -B6 SW_SIG -35 B_5 -35 CN71-3 /REM1
136-B16 SGND -B5 SGND -36 SGND -36 CN71-4 /REM2
136-B17 SHUT -B4 SHUT_SIG -37 LCD_EN -37 CN71-5 /REM3
136-B18 SW_LED -B3 SW_LED -38 R/L("H") -38 CN71-6 CUR_EM
136-B19 5V0 -B2 5V0 -39 3.3V -39 CN71-7 AC_OFF
136-B20 5V0 -B1 5V0 -40 3.3V -40 CN71-8 FAN_H/L
-41 U/D("L") -41
8
8
104-1 5V1 708-1 5V1 701-1 X2

-2 SGND -2 SGND -2 Y1
316
-3 12V4 -3 12V4 -3 X1
315
-4 SGND -4 SGND -4 Y2
90-1
7
138-1 5v0
90-2
8
138-2 POWER_RL
138-7 REM/5
138-6 REM/4
138-5 REM/3
138-10 POWER_EM
138-9 5v0_ACOFF
138-8 HT_RL
9
9
138-3 REM/1
138-4 REM/2
138-11 5v1_ACOFF
320
319
318
317
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

1050e/1050eP
18. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006
Main body location list

/1050e/1050eP
Symbol Part name Location

— Power plug 1-A
M27 Scanner motor 1-F
SDB Scanner drive board 1-G
CBR Circuit breaker 2-A
NF1 Noise filter /1 2-A
NF2 Noise filter /2 2-A
L1 Exposure lamp 2-E
L1 INVB L1 inverter 2-F
FM19 Scanner cooling fan 2-F
PS51 Scanner home sensor 2-F
RL1 Main relay 3-A
TRC1 Triac /1 3-B
TRC2 Triac /2 3-C
SW3 Dehumidification heater switch 3-D
T1 Transformer /1 3-E
T2 Transformer /2 3-E
HTR1 Dehumidification heater /1 3-G
HTR2 Dehumidification heater /2 3-G
OACB Overall control board 3-H
SW1 Main power switch 4-A
— Outlet 4-C
OB1 Operation board /1 4-E
PS52 APS sensor /1 4-G
PS53 APS sensor /2 4-G
— Status indicator lamp 4-G
FM25 Power supply cooling fan /1 5-A
DCPS/1 DC power supply /1 5-A
SW2 Power switch 5-D
OB2 Operation board /2 5-D
OB INVB OB inverter 5-D
OB3 Operation board /3 5-G
LCDB LCD board 6-D
PKB Panel key board 7-D
— Backlight /1 7-D
— Backlight /2 7-D
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
24V
36V
P.GND
320
PLL_LK 170
CONT 172
316
52
62
63
CLK 171
319
315
37
318
172-9-1
172-4-6
172-7-3
172-8-2
172-6-4
172-5-5
317
173-5-1
173-5-1
173-2-4
173-1-5
173-3-3
173-4-2
1
1
18.2 Main body 2/4
131-4
131-6
131-5
131-3
131-2
131-1
POLYGON MOTOR
DRIVE BOARD
36pin
Amphenol
USB
M21
CN125-2 -D
CN134-9 D7
CN134-8 D6
CN134-7 D5
CN134-6 D4
CN134-5 D3
CN134-4 D2
CN134-3 D1
CN134-2 D0
CN125-3 +D
CN134-31 INIT
CN134-12 ACK
CN125-1 VBUS
CN125-4 S.GND
Sub relay
RL2
CN134-13 xFLAG
CN134-14 PBUSY
CN134-14 HBUSY
CN134-1 STROBE
CN134-33~35 N.C.
CN134-28~30 N.C.
CN134-15~18 N.C.
FT102
CN134-10 PTRCLK
CN134-36 1284ACT
CN134-32 NDVALID
7
FT22
Polygon motor
CN134-19~27 S.GND
8
192-5-9 194-9
CN132-1 INDPR
192-4-10 194-10
CN132-2 S.GND
FT23
CN10-1
192-3-11 194-11
CN10-2
WRITE UNIT
2
2
FT103
CN132-3 IND
192-2-12 194-12
CN132-4 S.GND
192-1-13 194-13
CN3-1
INDEXB
CN132-5 5V
L
Coil
191-14-1
CN130-A1 ENB
191-13-2
CN130-A2 ALM1
CN3-2
191-12-3
CN130-A3 S/HB1
191-11-4
CN130-A4 S/H1
191-10-5
CN130-A5 S.GND
191-9-6
CN130-A6 LD+5V
191-8-7
CN130-A7 LD+5V
191-7-8
CN130-A8 LPR5V
191-6-9
CN130-A9 S.GND
CN1-6
CN1-5
CN1-3
CN1-2
191-5-10
AC_NEU
AC_NEU
AC_HOT
AC_HOT
CN130-A10 -VIDEO2
191-4-11
CN130-A11 +VIDEO2
191-3-12
79
CN130-A12 S.GND PRCB CN11-1 5v1

190-12-1
80
CN130-B1 LOAD ADUDB1 CN11-2 5v1

190-11-2
81
CN130-B2 DACLK OACB CN11-3 5v1

LDB
190-10-3
141
CN130-B3 DI PFU
190-9-4
142
CN130-B4 S.GND DCPS/1,/2

190-8-5
161
CN130-B5 ALM2 OACB
3
3
190-7-6
82
CN130-B6 S/HB2 ADF CN11-4 5v1

190-6-7
CN11-5 5v1
162
CN130-B7 S/H2 OACB

190-5-8
CN130-B8 ALMRST
190-4-9
84
CN130-B9 S.GND CN11-6 12v1-1

190-3-10
85
CN11-7 12v1-2
OACB
CN130-B10 -VIDEO1
190-2-11
86
CN130-B11 +VIDEO1 PRCB CN11-8 S.GND

190-1-12
87
CN130-B12 S.GND OACB CN11-9 S.GND

88
ADUDB1 CN11-10 S.GND

89
PFU CN11-11 S.GND

90
ADF CN11-12 S.GND

91
FNS CN11-13 S.GND

92
CN195- 1 RST OACB CN11-14 S.GND

CN195- 2 S.GND
CN195- 3 D7
CN195- 4 D8 51-1
93
CN195- 5 D6 MS2 CN21-1 24v2

CN195- 6 D9
94
CN195- 7 D5 PFU CN21-2 24v2

CN195- 8 D10
95
OACB 2/2
CN195- 9 D4 ADUDB1 CN21-3 P.GND
CN195-10 D11
96
CN195-11 D3 PFU CN21-4 P.GND

CN195-12 D12
CN195-13 D2
CN195-14 D13
97
CN195-15 D1 ACDB CN12-1 24v1

CN195-16 D14
98
CN195-17 D0 PFU CN12-2 24v1

CN195-18 D15
99
CN195-19 S.GND ADUDB1 CN12-3 24v1

CN195-20 N.C.(KEY pin)
100
CN195-21 DMARQ CN12-4 12v2
4
4
CN195-22 S.GND
ACDB
CN12-5 12v2
101
CN195-23 DIOW ADUDB1

CN195-24 S.GND
CN195-25 DIOR CN12-6 5v2
CN195-26 S.GND
CN12-7 5v2
103
CN195-27 IDRDY PRCB

CN195-28 CSEL
CN12-8 5v2
104
CN195-29 DMACK M3
CN195-30 S.GND
IPB
CN12-9 5v2
105
CN195-31 INT0 ADUDB1

CN195-32 Reserved
CN12-10 5v2
106
CN195-33 DA1 ACDB

CN195-34 PDAIG
HDD1
CN12-11 -5v
107
CN195-35 DA0 ADUDB1

CN195-36 DA2
CN195-37 CS0
CN195-38 CS1
CN12-12 S.GND
108
CN195-39 DASP ACDB

CN195-40 S.GND
CN12-13 S.GND
109
PFU
CN12-14 S.GND
CN12-15 S.GND
111
PRCB
CN12-16 S.GND
112
CN103-1 +5V1 ADUDB1

CN 123
CN 112
CN12-17 S.GND
113
CN103-2 S.GND
ACDB CN12-18 P.GND
114
CN103-3 S.GND
CN12-19 P.GND
115
CN103-4 +12V(HDD) PFU

135-1 DF_CVR
321
CN12-20 P.GND
116
135-2 ERR_T
322
ADUDB1 CN12-21 P.GND
117
135-3 PVV
DCPS/2
323
CN12-22 24v1
118
135-4 TNVV PRCB
324
CN110-1 S.GND S.GND CN170-50
135-5 B_VV
325
CN110-2 TG TG -49 CN13-1 24v1
119
135-6 S_VV
326
M6
CN110-3 TG_OUT TGOUT -48
5
5
CN13-2 24v1
120
135-7 5V_MON
327
CN110-4 CLAMP CLAMP -47
135-8 EE_VV
328
CN110-5 A_CLAMP ACLAMP -46
180
135-9 PRI_RST
329
CN110-6 PRDKEEP PRDKEEP -45
181
135-10 RST_CONT
330
CN110-7 S.GND S.GND -44 CN13-3 24v1
121
135-11 RXD
331
CN110-8 +LCLK LCLK+ -43 CN13-4 24v1
122
M31 M7
135-12 S.GND
FM27
332
CN110-9 -LCLK LCLK- -42
135-13 RTS 343-1
333
CN110-10 S.GND S.GND -41 CN13-5 24v1
123
DPSB
135-14 S.GND
334 CN110-11 -RCK RCK- -40 CN13-6 5v2
124
M6
335 135-15 ERR_R CN110-12 +RCK RCK+ -39 CN13-7 5v2
125
135-16 TXD
M4
336 CN110-13 S.GND S.GND -38 CN13-8 5v2
126
135-17 S.GND
SDB
337 CN110-14 S.GND S.GND -37 CN13-9 5v2
127
HV1
cooling fan /3
Power supply
338 135-18 CTS CN110-15 +TCK TCK+ -36 CN13-10 S.GND

128
339 135-19 S.GND

SDB
CN110-16 -TCK TCK- -35 CN13-11 S.GND
129
ADUDB1
CN110-17 S.GND S.GND -34 CN13-12 S.GND
CN110-18 S.GND S.GND -33 CN13-13 S.GND
131
OACB
CN110-19 SCLK SCLK -32 CN13-14 P.GND
132
CN139-1 DCD CN110-20 SEN SEN -31 CN13-15 P.GND

133
CN139-2 RXD CN110-21 SDI SDI -30

182
CN139-3 TXD CN110-22 SDO SDO -29

183
CN139-4 DTR CN110-23 S.GND S.GND -28 CN13-16 P.GND

134
CN139-5 GND
M6 M31 M7
CN110-24 -AD_D0 AD_D0- -27 CN13-17 P.GND

135
CN139-6 DSR 343-2

6
6
CN110-25 +AD_D0 AD_D0+ -26 CN13-18 P.GND

136
CN 113
CN 124
CN139-7 RTS DPSB

CN110-26 S.GND S.GND -25
CN139-8 CTS CN110-27 -AD_D1 AD_D1- -24
130
CN139-9 RI CN110-28 +AD_D1 AD_D1+ -23

CCDB
CSRC I/F
CN14-1 12v2
137
(RS232C)
CN110-29 S.GND S.GND -22 CN14-2 5v2

138
CN110-30 -AD_D2 AD_D2- -21 CN14-3 S.GND

139
CN111-1 TD+
FNS
CN110-31 +AD_D2 AD_D2+ -20 CN14-4 S.GND

140
CN111-2 TD-
PB
CN111-3 RD+
CN111-4 CT CN110-33 -LVDSCLK LVDSCLK- -18 CN15-4 HT_RL
CN110-34 +LVDSCLK LVDSCLK+ -17 CN15-5 FAN_CONT
200
CN111-5 CT
CN110-35 S.GND S.GND -16 CN15-6 FAN_EM
201
CN111-6 RD-
RJ45
CN111-7 N.C. CN110-36 ADRST ADRST -15 CN15-10 REM/1

CN111-8 CHS CN110-37 APR APR -14 CN15-11 REM/2
CN110-38 LVDSPDN PDWN -13 CN15-14 AC_OFF
CN110-40 +5V1 +5V1 -11
CN110-41 +5V1 +5V1 -10
+5V1 -9 10-6
CN110-42 +5V1
550
CN110-43 +5V1 +5V1 -8

2
+5V1 -7
RL3
CN110-44 +5V1
CN110-45 +5V1 +5V1 -6
Heater relay

7
7
CN110-47 +12V(CCD) +12V -4

CN110-48 +12V(CCD) +12V -3
78
93
CN110-49 +12V(CCD) +12V -2

CN110-50 S.GND S.GND -1 83-1
CN 898 83-2
CN80-1
CN80-2
CN137-14 COVER
CN137-13 DDF_VV
CN137-12 CTS(I)
CN137-11 DTR(O)
CN137-10 TXD
CN137-9 RTS(O)
CN137-8 DSR(I)
CN137-7 RXD
PRCB
83-3
HV1
83-4
173-1-8
173-2-7
173-3-6
173-4-5
173-5-4
173-6-3
173-7-2
173-8-1
M3
83-5
M2
MS2
Interlock
switch /2
81-6
36
150 151 152 153 154 155
CN887-1 GND M1
42
CN887-2 12V
82-1
CN887-3 12Vout ADUDB1
CN887-4 GND 82-2
156 157
CN887-5 GND ADUDB2

MS1
Interlock
switch /1
CN887-6 5Vout
CN 899
78-1A 78-1B 79-1B 79-1A
78-2A 78-2B 79-2B 79-2A
PCI RB
CN80-3
CN80-4
8
8
CN889-1 N.C CN1-1

CN1-2
CN889-2 RXD CN1-3
758-1
CN1-4
CN889-3 TXD CN1-5
48
24V CN1-6
758-2 CN889-4 N.C CN1-7
DIMM
55
P.GND CN1-8
758-3 CN889-5 GND CN1-9
5V
82
758-4
CN1-10
CN889-6 N.C CN1-11
90
S.GND
DF
CN1-12
RS232C
CN889-7 RTS CN1-13

CN1-14
CN1-15
IC cooling fan FM24
CN889-8 CTS
CN1-16
Compact Flash
CN889-9 N.C CN1-17

CN1-18
DF-603
CN1-19
CN1-20
CN1-21
CN1-22
CN1-23
CN1-24
CN1-25
ICB
CN886-1 VBUS CN1-26

CN1-27
CN886-2 -D CN1-28
HDD2
CN1-29
CN886-3 +D CN1-30
USB
CN1-31
CN886-4 S.GND CN1-32
CN1-33
CN1-34
CN1-35
CN1-36
CN1-37
CN1-38
CN1-39
CN1-40
9
9
CN888-36 1284ACT
CN888-33~35 N.C.
CN888-32 NDVALID
CN888-31 INIT
CN888-28~30 N.C.
CN888-19~27 S.GND
CN888-15~18 N.C.
CN888-14 HBUSY
CN888-13 xFLAG
CN888-12 ACK
CN888-14 PBUSY
CN888-10 PTRCLK
CN888-9 D7
CN888-8 D6
CN888-7 D5
CN888-6 D4
CN888-5 D3
CN888-4 D2
CN888-3 D1
CN888-2 D0
CN888-1 STROBE
CN885-8 CHS
CN885-7 N.C.
CN885-6 RD-
CN885-5 CT
CN885-4 CT
CN885-3 RD+
CN885-2 TD-
CN885-1 TD+
RJ45 Amphenol 36pin

I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

1050e/1050eP

/1050e/1050eP

RL2 Sub relay 2-A
L Coil 2-A
M21 Polygon motor 2-D
INDEXB Index board 2-C
LDB Laser drive board 2-C
IPB Image processing board 2-E
DCPS/2 DC power supply /2 3-A
HDD1 Hard disk /1 3-C
CCDB CCD board 5-C
PB Parameter board 6-F
RL3 Heater relay 7-A
MS2 Interlock switch /2 7-A
PCI RB PCI relay board 7-D
MS1 Interlock switch /1 8-A
HDD2 Hard disk /2 8-C
ICB IC board 8-D
FM24 IC cooling fan 8-F
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
69
401-2 P.GND
370-1-2
326-1 P1_M24 401-1 24V3
150
Toner pump motor 370-2-1
326-2 P1_M
M28
68
301-2 P.GND
371-1-2 301-1 24V3
151
326-3 P2_M24
Air pump motor 371-2-1
326-4 P2_M
61
300-4 P.GND
57
300-3 P.GND
211-3 5V
53
300-2 24V2
Pump encoder sensor /1 211-2 SIG
300-1 24V2
118
211-1 GND
1
1
18.3 Main body 3/4
200-8 S.GND
111
86
200-7 S.GND
200-6 F_CONT
200
Pump encoder sensor /2 211-5 SIG
200-5 F_EM
PS29
201
211-4 GND
200-4 5V2
103
377-3-1
79
200-3 5V1
222-B9 5V
377-2-2
38
200-2 12V3
Air motor encoder sensor 222-B8 SIG
369-3 393-1-3 377-1-3 200-1 NC
222-B10 GND
380-3
324-1 24V 216-15 SCAN_CLK_O
TONER SUPPLY
300
324-2 24V 216-14 SCAN_FR

301
324-3 A 216-13 SCAN_MGN

302
Air separation motor 216-12 SCAN_CUR1
303
M10
380-7
324-5 B 216-11 SCAN_CUR2
304
380-11
324-6 /B 216-10 SCAN_CUR3
305
306
384-1-9 216-8 SCANFAN_CONT
307
328-1 24V
384-2-8 216-7 SCANFAN_EM
308
328-2 24V
216-6 SCANHP_PS
309
328-3 A
Intermediate hopper motor 216-5 NC
310
328-4 /A
M11
216-4 NC
311
216-3 NC
312
328-6 /B
2
2
216-2 SCAN24V_FEM
313
381-1 383-3-1 385-1-3

216-1 S.GND
381-2 383-2-2 385-2-2
Toner remaining sensor /1 229-2 TONER_SIG
381-3 383-1-3 385-3-1
220-A1 T1_SET_P
PS31
229-3 S.GND 270-1
220-A2 5V2
270-2 Paper size
220-A3 T1SIZE_PS1
270-3
PS4
220-A4 S.GND sensor /Fr1

229-4 T_SEN_CNT2
250-6 271-2 Paper size
Toner remaining sensor /2 229-5 TOR_SIG2(60K) 220-A5 T1SIZE_PS2
271-3
PS5
sensor /Rr1
PS32
229-6 S.GND
277-1
250-3 277-2 Upper limit
TRAY1
3
390-4-9 396-4-11 220-A7 T1UP_PS
Toner remaining sensor /3 229-7 TP1_PS(30K) 277-3
250-23
220-A12 T1FEED_PS
124
S.G.
CONT 229-8 TONM_CONT
CLK 229-9 TONM_CLK 250-2
Toner bottle 220-A12 T1_0PS
-6
6 229-10 TONM_EM
motor -7
-8
8 265-1
P.G. -9
9 250-4 265-2
-100 220-A6 T1GRIP_PS Handle release sensor /1
3
3
24V 265-3
24V -11
220-A10 A5V
273-2
220-A8 T1 REMAIN_VR Remaining paper VR /1
273-3
VR1
389-1
229-11 5V2 268-1
389-2 396 9 6
Toner remaining sensor /4 229-12 TP2_PS(CUP) 250-8 268-2
389-3 Paper size VR /1
220-A11 T1SIZE_VR
268-3
VR2
5V 3392-1
92 1 349 8 1
349-8-1
-2 250-20 272-1-2
2
S.G. 320-A7 T1UPSD_CONT
-3
3 349-7-2
349 72 390-10-3
01 396-10-5
61 272-2-1
22
229-13 HOPM1_CONT Pick-up solenoid /1
SD3
-4
4 349 6 3
349-6-3 229-14 HOPM1_CLK
-5
Toner hopper 250-19
-6
6 349 5 4
349-5-4 229-15 HOPM1_EM 320-A6 T1 FEED CL_CONT
motor Paper feed clutch /1
320-A5 24V
F/G
F/G
320-B7 T1 SEP CL_CONT

Separation clutch /1
24V
229-16 TB_DOOR
Door switch /2 Paper feed
229-17 S.GND 220-A13 FAN/Fr EM
assist fan /Fr1
320-B3 T1FAN_CONT
327-1 FS_FAN_DRIVE Paper feed
220-A14 FAN/Rr EM
4
4
Transfer/separation suction fan 320-B5 P.GND

assist fan /Rr1
92-2
228-B8 FSFAN_EM
FM4
92-3 2
327-2 P.GND 320-A2 UPT1M_CONT
2 Paper lift motor /1
89-1 320-A1 UPT1M24V
5
327-3 GFAN_DRIVE
Developing suction fan 89-2

228-B9 GFANEM
FM5
89-3 220-B1 T2_SET_P

327-4 P.GND 270-1
220-B2 5V2
88-9-3 270-2 Paper size
327-5 EXUPFAN_DRIVE 220-B3 T2SIZE_PS1
88-8-4
8 8 270-3 sensor /Fr2
327-10 P.GND 220-B4 S.GND
Paper exit cooling fan /1 228-B10 EXUPFEM
FM9
97-4-1 88-11-1 251-6 271-2 Paper size

327-6 P.GND 220-B5 T2SIZE_PS2
271-3 sensor /Rr2
PS10 PS11
76-1-3
329-1 OP/FAN_CONT 277-1
251-3 277-2 Upper limit
TRAY2
Pump cooling fan 76-2-2 220-B7 T2UP_PS

329-2 OP/FAN_EM
FM11
329-3 P.GND 276-3

251-23 276-2
220-B14 T2FEED_PS
276-1
Paper exit cooling fan /3 59-2
275-1
8
FM28
59-3
251-2
99-1-3 88-3-9
220-B9 T2_0PS
5
5
264-1-3 275-3
327-7 EXDWFAN_DRIVE
265-1
Paper exit cooling fan /2
228-B11 EXDWFEM 251-4 265-2
0
FM10
88-5-7 220-B6 T2GRIP_PS Handle release sensor /2

327-8 P.GND 265-3
4
220-B10 A5V
228-A13 MF1H/L 273-2
Cooling fan /1 220-B8 T2 REMAIN_VR Remaining paper VR /2
CN18-3
228-B1 MF1EM 273-3

VR3
FM1
268-1
508
251-8 268-2
220-B11 T2SIZE_VR Paper size VR /2
228-B2 MF2H/L
VR4
Cooling fan /2
CN450-8
228-B3 MF2EM
FM2
251-20 272-1-2
2
320-B1 T2UPSD_CONT
Pick-up solenoid /2
TS1
228-B4 MF3H/L 251-19

Cooling fan /3 228-B5 MF3EM 320-A8 T2 FEED CL_CONT
FM3
320-B2 24V
Paper feed clutch /2 250-24
F/G
77-1-3 171-8-6
F/G
320-B8 T2 SEP CL_CONT

FUSING UNIT
Separation clutch /2
IPB cooling fan 171-9-5
228-B6 GFAN_EM
TS2 Thermostat /2
2
FM12
171-10-4
251-10 Paper feed assist

220-B12 FAN/Fr EM
6
6
222-B3 HINF1_H/L
fan /Fr2
Suction fan /1 222-B4 HINF1_EM 251-17
FM6
171-4-10
320-B4 T2FAN_CONT
L3
L4
Paper feed assist

L2
220-B13 FAN/Rr EM
171-5-9 fan /Rr2
FM222 FM233
320-B6 P.GND
222-B5 HINF2_H/L 2
Suction fan /2 595-2-2 171-6-8 320-A4 UPT1M_CONT
222-B6 HINF2_EM
Fusing heater lamp /2
FM7
2 Paper lift motor /2

595-3-1 171-7-7 320-A3 UPT1M24V
Fusing heater lamp /3
78-1-3 172-7-3
462-1
321-1 24V
Suction fan /3 78-2-2 172-8-2
321-2 T1LKSD_CONT
Tray lock solenoid /1
SD1
228-B12 FAN_EM
FM8
172-9-1
222-B13 N.C. 321-3 24V

450-2
450-1
450-3
321-4 T2LKSD_CONT
Suction fan /4 98-2-2
FAN
254-9-5
FM29
98-3-1 222-A1 5V
222-A5 LOOP_PS Loop sensor
510
5
78-1-3 171-11-3
507
505
222-A4 S.GND
501
502
504
Polygon cooling fan 78-2-2 171-12-2 254-8-6 253-8-6 Pre-registration

222-B7 PFAN_EM 222-A2 T1VFIN_PS
8
FM18
78-3-1 171-13-1 sensor /1

7
7
254-7-7 253-7-7 Pre-registration

420-A2 P.GND 222-A3 T2VFIN_PS
442-6 L3_DRV sensor /2
440-1 T1_DRV 420-B8 N.C 228-B12 EM
420-A3 P.GND 327-9 CONT
442-1 T2_DRV 420-B7 POLYGON F_CONT 254-1-13 253-1-13 Door switch /1
222-A9 VF_DOOR_PS
420-A4 P.GND
440-2 T2_TRIG 420-B6 SUCTION F2_CONT
420-A5 P.GND 253-4-10
222-A6 VF_UPPS
440-6 ACN 420-B5 SUCTION F1_CONT sensor /1
442-8 ACN 420-A6 P.GND
442-4 ACH 420-B4 IMAGE F_CONT
222-A8 VF_PS
440-4 T3_DRVG 420-A7 P.GND sensor /2
420-B3 MAIN F3_CONT
420-A8 P.GND 254-3-11 253-3-11 Vertical conveyance
97
400-1 24V1 420-B2 MAIN F2_CONT 222-A7 VF_DWPS

400-2 12V sensor /3
100
420-A9 P.GND
400-3 5V
106
420-B1 MAIN F1_CONT

400-4 S.GND 322-2 VFUP_MC
108
213-A17 MRL_CONT 322-1 24V

Pre-registration clutch /1
400-5 S.GND 410-A1 MRL_CONT
113
400-6 P.GND 410-A2 MRL_SIG 213-A16 MRL_SIG 254-10-4 253-10-4

114
410-A3 TC_CONT 213-A15 TC_CONT 322-4 VF_MC Vertical conveyance

410-A4 TC_24FEM 213-A14 TC_24FEM clutch
VERTICAL
8
8
410-A5 ACV_EM1 213-A13 ACV_EM 254-11-3 253-11-3

10
435-1 24V 322-3 VFDW_MC

410-A6 ZERO_CROSS 213-A12 ZERO_CROSS Pre-registration clutch /2
11
435-2 PGND
CL1 CL2 CL3
322-5 N.C.
CONVEYANCE
410-A8 T1_CONT 213-A10 T1_CONT 208-3 GND

75-1 88-2-10 410-A9 T2_CONT 213-A9 T2_CONT 208-6 GND
420-A1 24V
75-2 88-1-11 410-A10 T3_CONT 208-2 FUSING ROLLER_SIG
CNT1
420-B9 CONT 213-A7 L3_CONT

410-A11 L3_CONT 221-1 FIX_SET_P
410-A12 AC5V_FEM 213-A6 AC5V_FEM 464-1
Total counter
221-2 5V
410-A13 AC12V_FEM 213-A5 AC12V_FEM 451-15 464-2 Fusing exit
221-4 FEXIT_PS
90-3 410-A14 DH_CONT 213-A4 DH_CONT 464-3
5
400-7 MRL_24V sensor

PS22
410-A15 DH_OPEN
90-4 465-1
6
400-8 MRL_CONT 410-A16 AC_ENB 213-A2 AC_ENB 221-3 5V

465-2 Fusing jam
410-A17 N.C 213-A1 N.C. 221-5 FJAM_PS
465-3 sensor
ACDB 1/2
221-7 S.GND
410-B2 HFAN2_CONT 213-B16 HFAN2_CONT 221-6 FIX_SET_N
410-B3 HFAN_FEM 213-B15 HFAN_FEM
223-1 TH1+ Thermistor /1
410-B4 HFAN3_CONT 223-2 TH1-
410-B5 HFAN3_FEM 213-B13 HFAN3_FEM
410-B6 SFAN_CONT 213-B12 SFAN_CONT
223-3 TH2+
77A-4 410-B7 SFAN_FEM 213-B11 SFAN_FEM
223-4 TH2-
FUSING UNIT
35-1 24V 410-B8 WRITE F1_CONT 213-B10 MCOOL F1_CONT

77B-1 77A-2
35-2 KEY_SIG 223-5 TH3+
77B-2 410-B9 WRITE F2_CONT
9
9
35-3 S.GND 213-B8 MCOOL F1/F2_FEM 223-6 TH3-

Key counter 77A-1 410-B10 WRITE F_FEM
35-4 C_DRIVE 213-B7 POLYGON F_CONT 223-7 TH4+
CN77B
CNT2
410-B11 POLYGON F_CONT Thermistor /4

35-5 P.GND 410-B12 N.C 223-8 TH4-
410-B13 POLYGON F_FEM 213-B5 POLYGON F_FEM 424-3 WEBM_D3
410-B14 S.GND 213-B4 S.GND 424-4 WEBM_D4 Web
410-B15 KEY_CONT 424-1 WEBM_D1 motor
M24
410-B16 KEY_24FEM 213-B2 KEY_24FEM 424-2 WEBM_D2

410-B17 TC_DRV 213-B1 TCOP
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

1050e/1050eP

/1050e/1050eP
Symbol Part name Location Symbol Part name Location Symbol Part name Location
PRCB Printer control board 1-C FM21 Paper feed assist fan /Rr1 4-B TS2 Thermostat /2 6-H
M10 Air separation motor 1-F M25 Paper lift motor /1 4-B L2 Fusing heater lamp /1 6-H
M28 Toner pump motor 1-F SW5 Door switch /2 4-F L3 Fusing heater lamp /2 6-H
M29 Air pump motor 1-F FM4 Transfer/separation suction fan 4-F L4 Fusing heater lamp /3 6-H
PS28 Pump encoder sensor /1 1-F FM5 Developing suction fan 4-F SD2 Tray lock solenoid /2 7-B
PS29 Pump encoder sensor /2 1-F PS12 Upper limit sensor /2 5-B PS16 Loop sensor 7-B
PS30 Air motor encoder sensor 1-F PS13 Paper feed sensor /2 5-B PS17 Pre-registration sensor /1 7-B
PS4 Paper size sensor /Fr1 2-B PS14 Paper empty sensor /2 5-B PS18 Pre-registration sensor /2 7-B
PS5 Paper size sensor /Rr1 2-B PS15 Handle release sensor /2 5-B PS19 Vertical conveyance sensor /1 7-B
PS6 Upper limit sensor /1 2-B VR3 Remaining paper VR /2 5-B PS20 Vertical conveyance sensor /2 7-B
M11 Intermediate hopper motor 2-F VR4 Paper size VR /2 5-B SW4 Door switch /1 7-B
PS31 Toner remaining sensor /1 2-F FM11 Pump cooling fan 5-F ACDB AC drive board 7-F
PS32 Toner remaining sensor /2 2-F FM28 Paper exit cooling fan /3 5-F FM18 Polygon cooling fan 7-F
PS33 Toner remaining sensor /3 2-F FM10 Paper exit cooling fan /2 5-F FM29 Suction fan /4 7-F
PS7 Paper feed sensor /1 3-B FM1 Cooling fan /1 5-F PS21 Vertical conveyance sensor /3 8-B
PS8 Paper empty sensor /1 3-B FM2 Cooling fan /2 5-F PS22 Fusing exit sensor 8-B
PS9 Handle release sensor /1 3-B M26 Paper lift motor /2 6-B CL1 Pre-registration clutch /1 8-B
SD3 Pick-up solenoid /1 3-B SD1 Tray lock solenoid /1 6-B CL2 Vertical conveyance clutch 8-B
VR1 Remaining paper VR /1 3-B SD4 Pick-up solenoid /2 6-B CL3 Pre-registration clutch /2 8-B
VR2 Paper size VR /1 3-B CL6 Paper feed clutch /2 6-B CNT1 Total counter 8-H
PS34 Toner remaining sensor /4 3-F CL7 Separation clutch /2 6-B CNT2 Key counter 9-I
M6 Toner bottle motor 3-G FM22 Paper feed assist fan /Fr2 6-B M24 Web motor 9-B
M7 Toner hopper motor 3-G FM23 Paper feed assist fan /Rr2 6-B PS23 Fusing jam sensor 9-B
FM9 Paper exit cooling fan /1 4-F FM3 Cooling fan /3 6-F TH1 Thermistor /1 9-B
PS10 Paper size sensor /Fr2 4-B FM8 Suction fan /3 6-F TH2 Thermistor /2 9-B
PS11 Paper size sensor /Rr2 4-B FM12 IPB cooling fan 6-F TH3 Thermistor /3 9-B
CL4 Paper feed clutch /1 4-B FM6 Suction fan /1 6-F TH4 Thermistor /4 9-B
CL5 Separation clutch /1 4-B FM7 Suction fan /2 6-F
FM20 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 4-B TS1 Thermostat /1 6-H
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
411-1 KEY_SIG 214-11 KEY_SIG
411-2 S.GND 214-10 S.GND
411-3 CVM1_SIG 214-9 CVM1_SIG
411-4 CVFEED_SIG 214-8 CVFEED_SIG
323-8 N.C
411-5 CV_SIZE0 214-7 CV_SIZE0 341-14 353-2-10 356-1-2
323-5 CONT
214-6 CV_SIZE1 353-1-11 356-2-1 Erase lamp
411-6 CV_SIZE1
EL
411-7 CV_SIZE2 214-5 CV_SIZE2
341-13 354-2
F/G
1
1
18.4 Main body 4/4
411-8 CV_SIZE3 214-4 CV_SIZE3 323-4 CONT Drum claw

341-12 354-1
411-9 CVDUP_SIG 214-3 CVDUP_SIG 323-3 24V
SD5
solenoid
411-10 OPF0 214-2 CPF0
356-9
411-11 OPF1 214-1 CPF1
F/G
F/G
353-11-1
36-1 M1_SIG 341-18 359-2

323-7 TM_D2 353-10-2 359-3 Charger
36-2 PAPER FEED_SIG 341-24
353-9-3 359-1
355-1-9
37-7 S.GND 341-17 M23 cleaning motor

36-3 SIZE 0 323-6 TM_D1
36-4 SIZE 1 37-8 5V
341-16 355-2-8 356-2
36-5 SIZE 2 37-1 OP_TXD 323-2 BLA_2
341-15 355-1-9 356-1 Blade motor
F/G
37-2 OP_DTR 323-1 BLA_1

M22
36-6 SIZE 3
ACDB 2/2
DRUM UNIT
36-7 DUPLEX_SIG 37-3 OP_CTS 341-19 355-3-7 356-3 360-1

37-4 OP_RXD 225-A1 5V
36-8 CPF0 341-20 355-4-6 356-4 360-2
Coin vendor
37-5 OP_DSR 225-A2 SIG Blade sensor /1
36-9 CPF1 341-21 355-5-5 356-5 360-3
37-6 OP_RTS 225-A3 S.GND
36-10 P.GND 355-6-4 356-6 360-1
341-22 355-7-3 356-7 360-2
539-1-5
225-A4 SIG Blade sensor /2
209- 1 SEP PWM(DC) 355-8-2 356-8 360-3
PS24 PS25
539-2-4
209- 2 SEP AC_FB 353-3-9 360-1
539-3-3
209- 3 TRANS/SEP DC_FB 341-11 353-4-8 360-2
539-4-2 225-A5 SIG Charger cleaning home sensor
209- 4 SEP PWM(AC) 353-5-7 360-3
539-5-1
209- 5 TRNANS PWM 353-6-6 360-1
540-1-15
510-15 1mSEC TIMER 215- 1 1MSEC_TIMER 341-23 353-7-5 360-2
540-2-14 Charger cleaning limit sensor
2
2
225-A6 SIG
F/G
510-14 REQ1 215- 2 REQ1 353-8-4 360-3
540-3-13
510-13 REQ2 215- 3 REQ2
540-4-12 340-5 350-4-2 458-1 457-1
123
510-12 GND 215-4 S.GND 457-2

540-5-11 340-2 350-3-3 458-2
510-11 FUSER EXIT PS 215- 5 FUSER EXIT PS 224-5 SIG 457-3
540-6-10 340-3 350-2-4 458-3 457-4
F/G
510-10 ACK2 215- 6 ACK2 224-6 A.GND Drum potential sensor
DPS
340-4 350-1-5 457-5

PS26 PS27 DPSB
540-7-9 458-4
136
510-9 EDGE PS 215- 7 EDGE PS

540-8-8 340-8
510-8 ERR 215- 8 ERR 224-2 5V Drum potential
540-9-7 340-1
510-7 ACK 215- 9 ACK 224-1 D_SET sensor board
540-10-6 351-4-1
510-6 TXD 215-10 RXD
540-11-5 351-3-2
510-5 REQ 215-11 REQ
540-12-4 340-7 351-1-4
510-4 CLK_T 215-12 CLK_R 224-4 THD- TH5
TRANFER
540-13-3 Drum temperature sensor
CHARGER
215-13 LATCH 340-6 351-2-3
510-3 LATCH
TRANSFER/
540-14-2
224-3 THD+
SEPARATION
SEPARATION
GUIDE PLATE
510-2 CLK_R 215-14 CLK_T
540-15-1 341-1 454-1
510-1 RXD 215-15 TXD 225-A7 5V 5V
341-2 454-2
225-A8 DCONT DCONT
560-2 325-1 24V 341-3 454-3
529-1 24V2 225-B1 Vref Vref
CN650-1 24V 531-1 24V 560-5 325-2 24V 341-4 454-4
529-2 24V2 Vertical 225-B2 Gamma CONT Gamma CONT
CN650-2 5V 531-2 5V 560-1 ADU 325-3 A 341-5 454-5
529-3 A conveyance 225-B3 JAMCONT JCONT Toner control sensor board
M8
CN651-1 TRANS G_CONT 531-3 TRANS G_CONT 560-3 accelerate 325-4 /A 341-6 454-6
529-4 /A 225-B4 DSIG DSIG
M14
CN651-2 TRANS_CONT 531-4 TRANS_CONT 560-4
motor 325-5 B 341-7 454-7
529-5 B
motor 225-B5 DmonSIG Dmon
CN651-3 TRPWM 560-6 325-6 /B 341-8 454-8
529-6 /B 225-B6 Gamma SIG Gamma SIG
CN651-4 SEP_CONT 531-5 SEP_CONT 341-9 454-9
561-2 225-B7 JAMSIG JAM
3
3
CN651-5 SPAC_PWM 524-1 24V2 422-1 24V 341-10 454-10

TCSB
561-5 225-B8 A.GND A.GND

CN651-6 SPDC_PWM 524-2 24V2 422-2 24V
561-1
CN651-7 SHIFT SIG 531-6 SHIFT SIG 524-3 A ADU reverse Paper exit 422-3 A
561-3
M9
524-4 /A motor motor /1 422-4 /A
M12
CN651-8 TSDC_FB 561-4
F/G
524-5 B 422-5 B
HV2
CN651-9 SPAC_FB
110
152
102
561-6
CN651-10 TRANS EM 531-7 TRANS EM 524-6 /B 422-6 /B
534-6-1 562-2 181-1 159-1 255-1
104
CN651-11 SEP EM 531-8 SEP EM 528-1 24V2 5V

534-5-2 562-5 181-2 255-2
127
CN650-3 S.GND 531-9 S.GND 528-2 24V2 S.G.

534-4-3 562-1 181-3 159-2 256-1
CN650-4 P.GND 531-10 P.GND 528-3 A Reverse/exit CONT 228-A1 CONT 227-11 S.GND
534-3-4 562-3 181-4 159-3 256-2
BIAS
528-4 A/ motor CLK 228-A2 CLK 227-10CHARGE1 CONT
M13
534-2-5 562-4 181-5 256-3
227-9 CHARGE2 CONT
F/G
528-5 B F/R
534-1-6 562-6 181-6 159-4 256-4
528-6 B/ EM 228-A3 EM 227-8 CHARGE PWM
181-7 159-5 256-5
DEVELOPING
M3
563-3 H/L 228-A12 GAIN 227-7 GRID PWM

520-1 24V2 181-8 159-6 256-6
563-9 227-6 DEV BIAS CONT
74
P.G.
520-2 24V2 ADU 181-9 159-7 256-7
563-1 227-5 DEV BIAS PWM
75
P.G.
Developing motor
DRUM UNIT
520-3 A 181-10 159-8 83-4 256-8

HV1
574-1 557-3-1 563-5 conveyance 24V 227-4 CHARGE EM

153
526-A3 5V 520-4 A/ 181-11 159-9 256-9
M15
557-2-2 563-7
CHARGER
ADU conveyance 574-2 motor /1 24V 227-3 DEV BIAS FB

526-A2 SIG 520-5 B 256-10
sensor /1 574-3 557-1-3 563-11 227-2 DEV BIAS(AC) CONT
526-A1 S.GND 520-6 B/ 256-11
227-1 DEV BIAS(AC) PWM
575-1 543-3-1 255-3
GRID BIAS
526-A6 5V 182-1
543-2-2 5V 228-A11 5V
UNIT
ADU conveyance 575-2 182-2

526-A5 SIG
sensor /2 575-3 543-1-3 S.G.
47
70
43
182-3
PS35 PS36
526-A4 S.GND 228-A8 CONT
CONT
4
4
CHARGER
583-1 538-3-1 549-3-7 182-4 81-1-9 70-1-3 480-1

Transfer 526-A9 5V CLK 228-A9 CLK 211-15 5V2
583-2 538-2-2 549-2-8 182-5 81-2-8 70-2-2 480-2
assist home 526-A8 SIG F/R 228-B7 GND 211-14 MEXIT_PS Paper exit sensor
583-3 538-1-3 549-1-9 182-6 81-3-7 70-3-1 480-3
PS3
PS37
sensor 526-A7 S.GND EM 228-A10 LD 211-13 S.GND
182-7
M1
577-1 549-6-4 H/L

Transfer/ 526-A12 5V 182-8 81-4-6 130-1-6 86-1
71
577-2 549-5-5 P.G. 211-12 5V2

Fusing motor
separation cleaning 526-A11 SIG 182-9 81-5-5 130-2-5 86-2

72
577-3 549-4-6 P.G. 211-11 DOOR_PS1 Door open/close sensor /1

home sensor 526-A10 S.GND 182-10 83-6 81-6-4 130-3-4 86-3
PS1
155
24V 211-10 S.GND

578-1 549-9-1 182-11
Transfer/ 526-A15 5V 24V
578-2 549-8-2 81-7-3 130-4-3 87-1
separation cleaning 526-A14 SIG 211-9 5V2
578-3 549-7-3 81-8-2 130-5-2 87-2
PS38 PS39
limit sensor 526-A13 S.GND 211-8 DOOR_PS2 Door open/close sensor /2
335-1 81-9-1 130-6-1 87-3
PS2
5V 207-5 5V 211-7 S.GND

579-1 544-3-1 547-3-4 335-2
526-B3 5V S.G.
Registration 579-2 544-2-2 547-2-5 335-3
526-B2 SIG CONT 207-1 CONT
sensor 579-3 544-1-3 547-1-6 335-4
526-B1 S.GND CLK 207-2 CLK
335-5
207-4 GND 210-19 DF_OPEN
321
581-3 547-4-3 F/R

526-B4 5V 335-6
207-3 LD 210-18 ERR_R
322
Paper leading 581-2 547-5-2 EM

526-B5 SIG 335-7
M5
210-17 PVV
323
edge sensor 581-1 547-6-1 S.G.

335-8 336-1-4
PS40 PS41
526-B6 S.GND
PRCB 2/2
210-16 TONER_VV
47
324
P.G.
335-9 336-2-3
545-3-1 210-15 APC
43
325
580-1 P.G.
526-B9 5V 335-10 336-3-2
Conveyance motor
360-1
ADU deceleration 545-2-2 24V 210-14 S_VV
326
37
580-2
110
526-B8 SIG Transfer/ 335-11 336-4-1 360-2

sensor 545-1-3 24V 210-13 5V_SIG
327
580-3
41
102
571-2-9 564-2-1
PS42
526-B7 S.GND 521-A10 D1 separation 210-12 E_VV
328
571-1-10 564-1-2
5
5
582-1 548-3-1 521-A11 D2 cleaning 222-A10 POL_LOCK

M20
170
210-11 RES_OUT
329
526-B12 5V
582-2 548-2-2 motor 222-B1 POL_CLK 361-3
171
210-10 RES_CONT
330
ADU exit sensor 526-B11 SIG

582-3 548-1-3 565-2-1 222-B2 POL_CONT 361-4
172
210-9 SYS_TXD
331
526-B10 S.GND 521-B1 24V ADU lock

565-1-2 53-1 361-5
183-1 210-8 S.GND
332
521-B2 CONT
SD6
576-1
solenoid 5V 220-A17 N.C.
125
526-B15 5V 361-6
183-2 210-7 SYS_CTS
333
RCDB
ADU handle 576-2

526-B14 SIG S.G. 361-10
183-3 210-6 S.GND
334
566-2-1
release sensor 576-3 527-B11 24V Reverse/exit CONT 220-A15 FEEDM_CONT
526-B13 S.GND 183-4 210-5 ERR_T
335
566-1-2
527-B10 CONT CLK 220-B15 FEEDM_CLK
SD7
solenoid 183-5 210-4 SYS_RXD

336
584-3 550-1-3 220-B16 FEEDM_F/R

527-A7 5V F/R
183-6 210-3 S.GND
337
ADU reverse 584-2 550-2-2 220-A16 FEEDM_EM

527-A8 SIG Thick paper EM
183-7 210-2 SYS_RTS
338
sensor /2 550-3-1 525-1 24V

M4
584-1 H/L
527-A9 S.GND assist 220-B17 N.C. 210-1 S.GND
183-8
339
525-2 CONT
SD8
solenoid P.G.
585-3 551-1-3 183-9
527-A10 5V P.G.
551-2-2 183-10
371-1-2
ADU reverse
Paper feed motor
585-2 527-A11 SIG 534-1 CONT

ADU cooling 24V
sensor /1 585-1 551-3-1 534-2 EM 183-11
PS43 PS44 PS45 PS46
67 66 65 64
527-A12 S.GND fan /1 24V 212-1 R_POM_EM

FM14
534-3 P.GND
552-1-3 212-2 R_POM_VR
586-3 527-A13 5V 180-1 158-1
468-1-4569-3-1 24V 212-3 R_POM_VS
154
586-2 552-2-2 527-A1 CONT

527-A14 SIG 180-2 158-2
Reverse sensor /2 468-2-3569-2-2 ADU cooling PWM 228-A4 PWM 212-4 R_POM_GND
586-1 552-3-1 527-A2 EM
527-A15 S.GND 180-3 158-3
569-1-3 fan /2 F/R 228-A5 F/R 212-5 R_POM_CONT
FM15
527-A3 P.GND 180-4 158-4

M2
587-3 553-1-3 CONT 228-A6 CONT 212-6 NC

527-B1 5V 180-5 158-5
553-2-2 568-3-1 567-3-1 EM 228-A7 EN
587-2 527-A4 CONT
Drum motor
Reverse sensor /1 527-B2 SIG Sensor 180-6 158-6

568-2-2 567-2-2 P.G.
73
553-3-1
6
587-1
6
527-B3 S.GND 527-A5 EM

568-1-3 567-1-3 cooling fan
FM16
527-A6 P.GND 208-1 5V2

588-3 554-1-3 208-2 SIG
527-B4 5V
ADU accelerate 554-2-2 546-3-1
(OPTION)
588-2
M30 Recycle cut motor
527-B5 SIG 527-B13 CONT 334-1 208-3 S.GND

sensor 554-3-1 546-2-2 ADU cooling 5V 219-1 5V
588-1 527-B6 S.GND 527-B14 EM 334-2
546-1-3 fan /3 S.G.
FM13
527-B15 P.GND 334-3 208-4 5V2

589-1 555-3-1 CONT 219-2 CONT
527-B9 5V
RECYCLE CUT
570-3-1 334-4 208-5 SIG

ADU reverse 589-2 555-2-2 521-A1 CONT CLK 219-3 CLK
527-B8 SIG 570-2-2 Registration 334-5 208-6 S.GND
paper exit sensor 589-3 555-1-3 521-A2 EM F/R 219-4 F/R
PS47 PS48 PS49 PS50
527-B7 S.GND 570-1-3 cooling fan 334-6

FM17
521-A3 P.GND EM 219-5 LD

***-1-6 334-7
S.G.
M31
599-1 S.GND 756-6-1

***-2-5 Transfer 334-8 333-1-4 218-1 FIN_TXD
571-10-1 572-2-1
183
599- 2 SIZE_SIG1 P.G. 756-5-2

521-B3 24V 334-9 333-2-3
***-3-4 571-9-2 572-1-2 exposure 218-2 S.GND
182
599- 3 SIZE_SIG2 P.G. 756-4-3

521-B4 CONT
TSL
***-4-3 334-10 333-3-2 218-3 FIN_CTS

lamp
TRANSFER
24V
181
599- 4 SIZE_SIG3
***-5-2 334-11 333-4-1 218-4 S.GND
24V
180
599- 5 SIZE_SIG4 756-3-4

ADU reverse paper exit motor
556-10-1 573-1
***-6-1 521-B5 VIDEO 218-5 FIN_RXD
ASSIST ADAPTER
599-6 S.GND 556-9-2 573-2 756-2-5

521-B6 SGND 218-6 S.GND
556-8-3 573-3 756-1-6
521-B7 5V 218-7 FIN_RTS
556-7-4 573-4
521-B8 -5V 218-8 S.GND
556-6-5 573-5 757-5-1
521-B9 S.GND 218-9 EXIT_PS
556-5-6 573-6 Centering
521-B10 SI
PS54
556-4-7 573-7 sensor

521-B11 S.GND 755-1
48
556-3-8 573-8 24V

FS-503
755-2
FD-501
521-B12 CLK 5V
138
556-2-9
7
7
573-9 755-3
521-B13 LED
91
556-1-10 573-10
S.GND
521-B14 24V 755-4
54
P.GND
755-5
76
P.GND
(OPTION)
571-8-3 559-6-1 755-6

77
521-A4 24V2 P.GND

571-7-4 559-5-2 757-1-5
5V
130
LS-501/502
521-A5 24V2 Transfer 757-2-4

571-3-8 559-1-6(A)
5V
137
521-A6 A assist 757-3-3

571-5-6 559-3-4(/A)
S.GND
139
521-A7 /A
M19
571-4-7 559-2-5(B) motor 757-4-2

S.GND
140
521-A8 B
217-6 IO_DTXD
217-7 5V
217-8 IO_DCLK
217-9 S.GND
217-10 PFU_LATCH
217-11 IO_UCLK
217-12 ERR_OUT1
217-13 IO_URXD
217-14 ACK1
217-15 REQ13
217-1 NC
217-2 NC
217-3 ERR_OUT3
217-4 ACK3
217-5 REQ3
571-6-5 559-4-3(/B)
ADUDB1
521-A9 /B
F/G
521-A13 RESERVE SIG

751-9-2
751-8-3
751-7-4
751-6-5
751-5-6
751-4-7
751-3-8
751-2-9
752-5-1
752-4-2
752-3-3
752-2-4
752-1-5
751-10-1
751-1-10
F/G
258-12 542-12
258-11 542-11
513-2 GND
116
258-10 542-10
99
513-1 24V
258-9 542-9
500-9 A.GND
112
258-8 542-8
500-8 5VA
105
258-7 542-7
56
500-3 P.GND
258-6 542-6 523-1 LOOP ENG 590-19 LOOP ENG
500-6 S.GND
8
8
129
258-5 542-5 523-2 REG_CLK 590-18 REG_CLK

88
500-5 S.GND 523-3 REG_REF1 590-17 REG_REF1

258-4 542-4
500-7 -5V 523-4 REG_REF2 590-16 REG_REF2
107
258-3 542-3 523-5 REG_REF3 590-15 REG_REF3

80
500-4 5V
258-2 542-2 523-6 LOOP_CLK 590-14 LOOP_CLK
500-2 12V 523-7 LOOP_REF1 590-13 LOOP_REF1
101
258-1 542-1
523-8 LOOP_REF2 590-12 LOOP_REF2
50
500-1 24V1
259-2 541-2 523-9 LOOP_REF3 590-11 LOOP_REF3
95
501-2 P.GND 523-10 CONV/2_ENG 590-10 CONV/2_ENG

259-1 541-1
501-1 24V2 502-1 541-3 259-3
156
523-11 CONV/2_CLK 590-9 CONV/2_CLK

591-1 24V2
157
523-12 CONV/2_REF1 590-8 CONV/2_REF1 502-2 541-4 259-4

591-2 P.GND
117
523-13 CONV/2_REF2 590-7 CONV/2_REF2

523-14 CONV/2_REF3 590-6 CONV/2_REF3
Crimp
523-15 S.GND 590-5 S.GND 599-6

PF-701
523-16 RESEET 590-4 RESET 594-6 /B

599-4
Symbol
523-17 CONV/2_FUSE 590-3 CONV/2_FUSE 594-5 B

599-3
(OPTION)
523-18 LOOP_FUSE 590-2 LOOP FUSE 594-4 /A

523-19 RESIST_FUSE 590-1 RESIST FUSE 599-1 Loop motor
594-3 A
M18
521-A12 5V 597-1 5V 599-5

594-2 24V2
512-1 SHIELD 521-A14 S.GND 597-2 S.GND 599-2
594-1 24V2
512-2 SIG 511-1 CLK 595-1 CLK 598-6
592-6 /B
S.GND
12V
P.GND
24V
HT
HT
P.GND
S.GND
5V
24V
512-3 GND 511-2 -12V 595-2 -12V 598-4

512-4 -12V 511-3 GND 595-3 GND 592-5 B
598-3
Connector
512-5 12V 511-4 12V 595-4 12V 592-4 /A Registration

598-1
511-5 SHIELD 595-5 SHIELD 592-3 A
M17
512-6 TH_SIG motor

754-4
754-3
754-2
754-1
753-6
753-5
753-4
753-3
753-2
753-1
598-5
592-2 24V2
598-2
9
9
592-1 24V2
94
98
597-11
96
491-6 TH_SIG 593-6 /B

141
597-7
39
89
491-5 +12V 593-5 B

597-5 ADU
491-4 -12V 593-4 /A
109
115
490-1 CLK+ 596-1 CLK+ 597-1 conveyance

491-3 GND
19
490-2 CLK- 593-3 A

M16
596-2 CLK- 597-9 motor /2

491-2 SIG
20
593-2 24V2
Relay connector
490-3 GND 596-3 GND 597-3

Faston
491-1 SHELD 593-1 24V2

MFDB2
MFDB1
ADUDB2
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

1050e/1050eP

/1050e/1050eP
Symbol Part name Location Symbol Part name Location Symbol Part name Location
EL Erase lamp 1-B — Grid bias 4-A FM14 ADU cooling fan /1 6-F
SD5 Drum claw solenoid 1-B PS1 Door open/close sensor /1 4-B FM15 ADU cooling fan /2 6-F
M22 Blade motor 1-B PS2 Door open/close sensor /2 4-B FM16 Sensor cooling fan 6-F
M23 Charger cleaning motor 1-B PS3 Paper exit sensor 4-B FM17 Registration cooling fan 6-F
— Coin vendor 1-E M1 Fusing motor 4-E TSL Transfer exposure lamp 6-F
PS24 Blade sensor /1 2-B M15 ADU conveyance motor /1 4-F PS46 ADU reverse sensor /1 6-I
PS25 Blade sensor /2 2-B PS35 ADU conveyance sensor /1 4-I PS47 Reverse sensor /2 6-I
PS26 Charger cleaning home sensor 2-B PS36 ADU conveyance sensor /2 4-I PS48 Reverse sensor /1 6-I
PS27 Charger cleaning limit sensor 2-B PS37 Transfer assist home sensor 4-I PS49 ADU accelerate sensor 6-I
DPS Drum potential sensor 2-B PS38 Transfer/separation cleaning home sensor 4-I PS50 ADU reverse paper exit sensor 6-I
DPSB Drum potential sensor board 2-B PS39 Transfer/separation cleaning limit sensor 4-I — Transfer assist adapter 6-I
TH5 Drum temperature sensor 2-B RCDB Recycle cut drive board 5-A PS54 Centering sensor 7-F
ADUDB1 ADU drive board /1 2-G M4 Paper feed motor 5-E M19 Transfer assist motor 7-F
— Transfer bias 2-I M5 Conveyance motor 5-E ADUDB2 ADU drive board /2 8-F
— Guide plate bias 2-I M20 Transfer/separation cleaning motor 5-F M16 ADU conveyance motor /2 9-E
— Separation bias 2-I SD6 ADU lock solenoid 5-F M17 Registration motor 9-E
— Transfer/separation charger 2-I SD7 Reverse/exit solenoid 5-F M18 Loop motor 9-E
— Developing bias 3-A SD8 Thick paper assist solenoid 5-F MFDB1 Multi feed detection board /1 9-G
TCSB Toner control sensor board 3-B PS40 Registration sensor 5-I MFDB2 Multi feed detection board /2 9-H
HV1 High voltage unit /1 3-B PS41 Paper leading edge sensor 5-I
M3 Developing motor 3-E PS42 ADU deceleration sensor 5-I
M8 Vertical conveyance motor 3-E PS43 ADU exit sensor 5-I
M9 Paper exit motor /1 3-E PS44 ADU handle release sensor 5-I
M12 ADU reverse motor 3-F PS45 ADU reverse sensor /2 5-I
M13 Reverse/exit motor 3-F M30 Recycle cut motor 6-A
M14 ADU accelerate motor 3-F M2 Drum motor 6-E
HV2 High voltage unit /2 3-I M31 ADU reverse paper exit motor 6-E
— Charger 4-A FM13 ADU cooling fan /3 6-F
Field Service Ver3.0 Nov.2006 18. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

18.5 DF-603
1050e/1050eP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A MFS1
A
To MAIN BODY Multi feed sensor/1
MFDB1
MS301 Cover open/close switch
B Original exit sensor/Rt PS314

B
SD301 SDF switching solenoid
Original reverse/exit sensor PS313
SD302 Pressure roller release solenoid
MFDB2
MFS2
SD303 Gate solenoid
C Multi feed sensor/2 C
Tray lower limit sensor PS316
Original size sensor/Rt PS302 FM302 Cooling fan/Rt
TB
Original size sensor/Lt PS303
D M305 Original paper exit motor/2

D
Original count sensor PS310
Original registration sensor/Rt PS318 Original size

VR VR301 M304 Original paper exit motor/1
Original registration sensor/Lt PS306
E Original empty sensor PS305

E
M303 Tray up/down motor
Reverse jam
Tray upper limit sensor PS315 sensor PS304
Original reverse sensor PS309 M302 Original feed motor
F Original exit sensor/Lt

F
PS307
M301 Original conveyance motor
RADF open/close sensor PS301
Original conveyance sensor PS308 SD304 Paper exit gate solenoid
G Original skew sensor/Rr PS311 G

FM301 Cooling fan/Lt
Original skew sensor/Fr PS312
Centering sensor/Fr PS320
Centering sensor/Rr PS321
H RADFCB Symbol H
Centering LED sensor/Fr PS319
Centering LED sensor/Rr PS322 Connector Faston

Crimp Relay connector
I I
APS timing Sensor PS317
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DF-603 location list

/1050e/1050eP

FM301 Cooling fan /Lt 8-G
SD301 SDF switching solenoid 8-B
M301 Original conveyance motor 6-F
M302 Original feed motor 7-F
M304 Original paper exit motor /1 7-D
M305 Original paper exit motor /2 6-D
M303 Tray up/down motor 6-E
FM302 Cooling fan /Rt 7-C
SD303 Gate solenoid 8-C
SD302 Pressure roller release solenoid 8-B
SD304 Paper exit gate solenoid 7-G
MS301 Cover open/close switch 7-B
MFS1 Multi feed sensor /1 9-A
MFS2 Multi feed sensor /2 2-C
MFDB1 Multi feed detection board /1 7-A
MFDB2 Multi feed detection board /2 3-C
TB Tray board 4-C
PS301 RADF open/close sensor 2-F
PS302 Original size sensor /Rt 3-C
PS303 Original size sensor /Lt 3-D
PS304 Reverse jam sensor 3-E
PS305 Original empty sensor 2-E
PS306 Original registration sensor /Lt 2-E
PS307 Original exit sensor /Lt 2-F
PS308 Original conveyance sensor 2-G
PS309 Original reverse sensor 3-F
PS310 Original count sensor 3-D
PS311 Original skew sensor /Rr 2-G
PS312 Original skew sensor /Fr 2-G
PS313 Original reverse/exit sensor 4-B
PS314 Original exit sensor /Rt 4-B
PS315 Tray upper limit sensor 2-E
PS316 Tray lower limit sensor 4-C
PS317 APS timing sensor 2-I
PS318 Original registration sensor /Rt 2-D
PS319 Centering LED sensor /Fr 1-H
PS320 Centering sensor /Fr 2-H
PS321 Centering sensor /Rr 2-H
PS322 Centering LED sensor /Rr 2-I
VR301 Original size VR 3-D
RADFCB RADF control board 5-A
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
18.6 PF-701
1
1
753-1
CN700-1 24V1
753-2
CN700-5 5V1
753-3
CN700-6 S.GND
753-4 751-1-10
CN700-2 P.GND 705-10 RXD_DN 217-6 IO_DTXD
751-2-9 217-7 5V
705-9 5V
N.C CN700-3 P.GND 751-3-8
Dehumidification heater/1 705-8 CLK_DN 217-8 IO_DCLK
751-4-7 217-9 S.GND
795-1 795-2 705-7 S.GND
751-5-6 217-10 PFU_LATCH
HTR 1 705-6 /LATCH_DN
751-6-5 217-11 IO_UCLK
705-5 CLK_UP
751-7-4 217-12 ERR_OUT1
705-4 /ERR_GA
Dehumidification heater/2 705-3 TXD_UP
751-8-3 217-13 IO_URXD
753-5 796-1 796-2 751-9-2
705-2 /ACK_GA 217-14 ACK1
HTR 2 751-10-1
705-1 /REQ_GA 217-15 REQ13
Dehumidification heater/3 752-1-5 217-1 PFU_EXPS

705-15 /EXIT PS OUT
752-2-4
PRCB
797-1 797-2 705-14 NC 217-2 PFU_LPPS

752-3-3
Dehumidification heater
HTR 3 705-13 /IO ERR 217-3 ERR_OUT3
752-4-2 217-4 ACK3
753-6 705-12 /IO ACK
752-5-1 217-5 REQ3
3
705-11 /IO REQ
MAIN BODY
2
2
Door switch
770-1 775-1
SW10
754-1 FT1 FT2
770-2 775-2
CN701-1 24V2(I/L)
1
24V
2
760-12
710-2 T1_SET_P
760-14
710-1 5V1
MAIN BODY DCPS

3
760-22
710-8 S.GND
Paper Paper
4
feed M feed M
P.GND
754-2
CN701-2 P.GND
263-1-6 277-1
760-3 263-2-5 277-2 Upper limit
710-5 /T1UP_PS
754-3 263-3-4 277-3
PS71
CN700-4 12V3 sensor /1

263-6-1 276-3
TRAY1
754-4
CN700-7 S.GND 760-23 263-5-2 276-2 Paper feed
710-3 /T1FEED_PS
PS72
263-4-3 276-1 sensor /1

264-3-1 275-1
760-2 264-2-2 275-2 Paper empty
730-1 745-3-10 710-4 T1_0PS
PS73
CN712-3 5V1 264-1-3 275-3 sensor /1

Pre-registration 730-2 745-2-11
CN712-2 /T1PRE_REG_PS 265-1
730-3 745-1-12
PS89
sensor /1 CN712-1 S.GND 760-4 265-2 Handle release
710-6 /T1GRIP_PS
3
3
265-3
PS74
731-1 745-6-7
sensor /1
CN712-6 5V1 270-1
Vertical conveyance 731-2 745-5-8
CN712-5 /T1_CONV_PS 760-11 270-2 Paper size
731-3 745-4-9
PS90
sensor /1 CN712-4 S.GND 710-14 T1SIZE_PS1
270-3
PS75
sensor /Fr1
732-1 745-9-4 271-1
CN712-9 5V1 760-6 271-2 Paper size
Intermediate 732-2 745-8-5 710-13 T1SIZE_PS2
CN712-8 /T1_CONV_MID_PS 271-3
PS76
732-3 745-7-6 sensor /Rr1
PS91
sensor /Up CN712-7 S.GND
760-7 273-1
733-1 745-12-1 710-9 A5V
CN712-12 5V1 760-5 273-2 Remaining
733-2 745-11-2 710-7 T1REMAIN_VR
273-3
VR10
Loop sensor /1 CN712-11 /T1_LOOP_PS paper VR /1

733-3 745-10-3
PS92
CN712-10 S.GND 268-1
760-8 268-2 760-24
710-10 T1SIZE_VR
F/G
734-1 746-6-1 268-3

Paper size VR /1
VR11
CN713-15 5V1
F/G
Pre-registration 734-2 746-5-2

CN713-14 /T2PRE_REG_PS
734-3 746-4-3
PS93
sensor /2 CN713-13 S.GND 760-20 272-1-2
720-3 /T1UPSD_CONT Pick-up
272-2-1
735-1 746-3-4 solenoid /1
CN713-12 5V1
735-2 746-2-5 760-19 260-1-2
Loop sensor /2 CN713-11 /T2_LOOP_PS 720-2 /T1FEEDCL_CONT Paper feed
735-3 746-1-6 760-15 260-2-1
PS94
SD14 CL6
CN713-10 S.GND 720-1 24V1 clutch /1

760-18 266-1-2
736-1 747-5-1 720-9 /T1HNDLNGCL_CONT Separation
CN717-10 5V1 266-2-1
CL7
Pre-registration 736-2 747-4-2 clutch /1

CN717-9 /T3PRE_REG_PS
736-3 747-3-3
PS95
Vertical conveyance
sensor /3 CN717-8 S.GND
737-1 744-3-7
CN713-3 5V1
Vertical conveyance 737-2 744-2-8 262-3-1 267-3-1(CONT)
4
4
CN713-2 /T3_CONV_PS
737-3 744-1-9 760-10 262-2-2 267-2-2(EM) Paper feed
PS96
sensor /1 CN713-1 S.GND 710-11 /FAN_F_EM
262-1-3 267-1-3(GND) assist fan /Fr1
738-1 744-6-4 760-17 261-3-1 266-3-1(CONT)
CN713-6 5V1 720-4 T1FAN_CONT
Intermediate 738-2 744-5-5 760-9 261-2-2 266-2-2(EM) Paper feed
CN713-5 /T3_CONV_MID_PS 710-12 /FAN_R_EM
738-3 744-4-6 261-1-3 266-1-3(GND)
PS97
760-21
FM41 FM42
sensor /Lw CN713-4 S.GND 720-6 P.GND assist fan /Rr1

760-13 278-1(CONT)
739-1 744-9-1 720-8 UPM_CONT
CN713-9 5V1 760-1 278-2(24V) Paper lift motor /1
739-2 744-8-2
M42
720-7 UPM24V
Loop sensor /3 CN713-8 /T3_LOOP_PS
739-3 744-7-3
PS98
CN713-7 S.GND
790-2-1 795-3-1(CONT)
720-5 T1FAN_CONT
795-2-2(EM)
790-1-2 795-1-3(GND)
FM50
assist fan /1
765-1-2
Pre-registration CN722-1 24V1
Rear paper feed
765-2-1 761-12
CL1
clutch /1 CN722-2 /T1PRE_REGCL_CONT 711-A2 T2_SET_P

761-14
711-A1 5V1
766-1-2 761-22
Intermediate CN722-3 24V1 711-A8 S.GND
766-2-1
CL2
clutch /Up CN722-4 /T1_CONVCL_CONT

263-1-6 277-1
761-3 263-2-5 277-2 Upper limit
767-1-2 711-A5 /T2UP_PS
263-3-4 277-3
PS77
Pre-registration CN722-5 24V1 sensor /2

767-2-1
CL3
CN722-6 /T2PRE_REGCL_CONT
TRAY2
clutch /2 263-6-1 276-3

761-23 263-5-2 276-2 Paper feed
711-A3 /T2FEED_PS
5
5
263-4-3 276-1
PS78
768-1-2 sensor /2
Intermediate CN722-7 24V1 264-3-1 275-1
768-2-1
CL5
clutch /Lw CN722-8 /T3_CONVCL_CONT 761-2 264-2-2 275-2 Paper empty

711-A4 T2_0PS
PFDB
264-1-3 275-3
PS79
sensor /2
769-1-2 265-1
Pre-registration CN722-9 24V1 761-4 265-2 Handle release
769-2-1
CL4
CN722-10 /T3PRE_REGCL_CONT 711-A6 T2GRIP_PS

265-3
PS80
clutch /3 sensor /2
270-1
761-11 270-2 Paper size
711-A14 T2SIZE_PS1
270-3
PS81
sensor /Fr2
271-1
782-1 5V 780-1-6 711-A13 T2SIZE_PS2
CN715-1 5V1 271-3
PS82
782-2 S.GND(N.C) sensor /Rr2

782-3 CONT 780-2-5 761-7 273-1
CN715-2 /CONT 711-A9 A5V
782-4 CLK 780-3-4 761-5 273-2 Remaining
CN715-3 CLK 711-A7 T2REMAIN_VR
782-5 F/R 780-4-3 273-3
VR12
CN715-4 F/R paper VR /2

782-6 LD 780-6-1
Paper feed motor CN715-6 /LD 268-1
M40
782-7 H/L 780-5-2

CN715-5 H/L 761-8 268-2
782-8 PGND 781-4 711-A10 T2SIZE_VR Paper size VR /2 761-24
F/G
268-3
VR13
F/G
782-9 PGND 781-3

4
782-1024V 781-2
1
761-20 272-1-2
782-1124V 781-1 721-A3 /T2UPSD_CONT Pick-up
2
272-2-1
solenoid /2
761-19 260-1-2
721-A2 /T2FEEDCL_CONT Paper feed
761-15 260-2-1
721-A1 24V1 clutch /2
6
6
740-1 743-2-1 761-18 266-1-2

Vertical conveyance CN712-14 /VER_DOOR_UPSW_SIG 721-A10 /T2HDNLNGCL_CONT Separation
740-2 743-1-2 266-2-1
CN712-13 S.GND
SW11
door switch /Up clutch /2

761-16 267-1-2
721-A11 /T2REVCL_CONT Forced separation
267-2-1
SD15 CL9 CL10 CL11
742-1 747-2-4 clutch

Vertical conveyance CN717-7 /VER_DOOR_LOSW_SIG
742-2 747-1-5 262-3-1 267-3-1(CONT)
door switch /Lw CN717-6 S.GND
SW12
761-10 262-2-2 267-2-2(EM) Paper feed

711-A11 /FAN_F_EM
262-1-3 267-1-3(GND)
FM43
assist fan /Fr2

761-17 261-3-1 266-3-1(CONT)
721-A5 T2FAN_CONT
761-9 261-2-2 266-2-2(EM) Paper feed
711-A12 /FAN_R_EM
761-21 261-1-3 266-1-3(GND)
FM44
721-A6 P.GND assist fan /Rr2

761-13 278-1(CONT)
721-A9 UPM_CONT
761-1 278-2(24V) Paper lift motor /2
M43
721-A8 UPM24V
791-2-1 796-3-1(CONT)
721-A4 T2FAN_CONT
796-2-2(EM)
791-1-2 796-1-3(GND)
FM51
721-A7 P.GND
assist fan /2
Rear paper feed
762-12
711-B2 T3_SET_P
762-14
711-B1 5V1
723-1 A 748-3
CN723-3 A
723-2 24V 748-1 762-22
PF exit CN723-1 24V2(I/L) 711-B8 S.GND
723-3 /A 748-4
7
7
CN723-4 /A
conveyance 723-4 B 748-5
M41
CN723-5 B 263-1-6 277-1

723-5 24V 748-2
motor CN723-2 24V2(I/L) 762-3 263-2-5 277-2 Upper limit
723-6 /B 748-6 711-B5 /T3UP_PS
CN723-6 /B 263-3-4 277-3
PS83
sensor /3
263-6-1 276-3
TRAY3
762-23 263-5-2 276-2 Paper feed

711-B3 /T3FEED_PS
263-4-3 276-1
PS84
sensor /3
741-1 749-5-1 264-3-1 275-1
Horizontal conveyance CN717-5 /HOR_DOOR_SW_SIG
741-2 749-4-2 762-2 264-2-2 275-2 Paper empty
CN717-4 S.GND 711-B4 T3_0PS
SW13
door switch 264-1-3 275-3

PS85
sensor /3
265-1
724-1 749-3-3 762-4 265-2 Handle release
CN717-3 5V1 711-B6 /T3GRIP_PS
PF exit conveyance 724-2 749-2-4 265-3
PS86
Crimp
CN717-2 /EXIT_PS sensor /3

PS99
sensor 724-3 749-1-5

CN717-1 S.GND 270-1
762-11 270-2 Paper size
Symbol
711-B14 T3SIZE_PS1
Exit conveyance
270-3
PS87
sensor /Fr3
271-1
729-1-4 711-B13 T3SIZE_PS2
271-3
PS88
CN716-1 PFUFAN_CONT sensor /Rr3

729-3-2
CN716-2 EM
Cooling fan 729-2-3 762-7 273-1
CN716-3 H/L 711-B9 A5V
FM20
729-4-1 762-5 273-2 Remaining paper

CN716-4 PGND 711-B7 T3REMAIN_VR
Connector
273-3
VR14
VR /3
268-1
762-8 268-2 762-24
711-B10 T3SIZE_VR Paper size VR /3
F/G
268-3
VR15
F/G
8
8
762-20 272-1-2
721-B3 /T3UPSD_CONT Pick-up
272-2-1
solenoid /3
762-19 260-1-2
721-B2 /T3FEEDCL_CONT Paper feed
762-15 260-2-1
779-1 744-1-3 721-B1 24V1 clutch /3
CN714-1 5V1
Door open/close 779-2 744-2-2
CN714-2 /FRONTDOOR_PS 762-18 266-1-2
Relay connector
Faston
779-3 744-3-1 721-B10 T3HNDLNGCL_CONT Separation

PS70
sensor CN714-3 S.GND 266-2-1

SD16 CL12 CL13
clutch /3
782-1 773-1-6
CN724-1 24V1
Tray lock solenoid /1 782-2 773-2-5
CN724-2 /T1_LOCKSD_CONT
SD10
262-3-1 267-3-1(CONT)
762-10 262-2-2 267-2-2(EM) Paper feed
783-1 773-3-4 711-B11 /FAN_F_EM
262-1-3 267-1-3(GND)
FM45
CN724-3 24V1 assist fan /Fr3

Tray lock solenoid /2 783-2 773-4-3
CN724-4 /T2_LOCKSD_CONT 261-3-1 266-3-1(CONT)
SD11
762-17
721-B5 T3FAN_CONT
762-9 261-2-2 266-2-2(EM) Paper feed
711-B12 /FAN_R_EM
762-21 261-1-3 266-1-3(GND)
FM46
784-1 773-5-2 721-B6 P.GND assist fan /Rr3

CN724-5 24V1
Tray lock solenoid /3 784-2 773-6-1 762-13 278-1(CONT)
CN724-6 /T3_LOCKSD_CONT
SD12
721-B9 UPM_CONT
762-1 278-2(24V) Paper lift motor /3
M44
721-B8 UPM24V
792-2-1 797-3-1(CONT)
721-B4 T3FAN_CONT
797-2-2(EM)
792-1-2 797-1-3(GND)
FM52
721-B7 P.GND
assist fan /3
9
9
Rear paper feed
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

1050e/1050eP
PF-701 location list

/1050e/1050eP
Symbol Part name Location Symbol Part name Location

FM20 Cooling fan 8-G PS77 Upper limit sensor /2 5-C
FM41 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 4-C PS78 Paper feed sensor /2 5-C
FM42 Paper feed assist fan /Rr1 4-C PS79 Paper empty sensor /2 5-C
FM43 Paper feed assist fan /Fr2 6-C PS80 Handle release sensor /2 5-C
FM44 Paper feed assist fan /Rr2 6-C PS81 Paper size sensor /Fr2 5-C
FM45 Paper feed assist fan /Fr3 8-C PS82 Paper size sensor /Rr2 5-C
FM46 Paper feed assist fan /Rr3 8-C PS83 Upper limit sensor /3 7-C
FM50 Rear paper feed assist fan /1 4-A PS84 Paper feed sensor /3 7-C
FM51 Rear paper feed assist fan /2 7-A PS85 Paper empty sensor /3 7-C
FM52 Rear paper feed assist fan /3 9-A PS86 Handle release sensor /3 7-C
HTR1 Dehumidification heater /1 2-G PS87 Paper size sensor /Fr3 7-C
HTR2 Dehumidification heater /2 2-G PS88 Paper size sensor /Rr3 7-C
HTR3 Dehumidification heater /3 2-G PS89 Pre-registration sensor /1 3-G
M40 Paper feed motor 6-G PS90 Vertical conveyance sensor /1 3-G
M41 PF exit conveyance motor 7-G PS91 Intermediate sensor /Up 3-G
M42 Paper lift motor /1 4-C PS92 Loop sensor /1 4-G
M43 Paper lift motor /2 7-C PS93 Pre-registration sensor /2 4-G
M44 Paper lift motor /3 9-C PS94 Loop sensor /2 4-G
CL1 Pre-registration clutch /1 5-G PS95 Pre-registration sensor /3 4-G
CL2 Intermediate clutch /Up 5-G PS96 Vertical conveyance sensor /3 4-G
CL3 Pre-registration clutch /2 5-G PS97 Intermediate sensor /Lw 4-G
CL4 Pre-registration clutch /3 5-G PS98 Loop sensor /3 4-G
CL5 Intermediate clutch /Lw 5-G PS99 PF exit conveyance sensor 7-G
CL6 Paper feed clutch /1 4-C SD10 Tray lock solenoid /1 8-G
CL7 Separation clutch /1 4-C SD11 Tray lock solenoid /2 8-G
MC8 — 4-C SD12 Tray lock solenoid /3 9-G
CL9 Paper feed clutch /2 6-C SD14 Pick-up solenoid /1 4-C
CL10 Separation clutch /2 6-C SD15 Pick-up solenoid /2 6-C
CL11 Forced separation clutch 6-C SD16 Pick-up solenoid /3 8-C
CL12 Paper feed clutch /3 8-C SW10 Door switch 2-G
CL13 Separation clutch /3 8-C SW11 Vertical conveyance door switch /Up 6-G
MC14 — 8-C SW12 Vertical conveyance door switch /Lw 6-G
PFUDB PF drive board 1-C SW13 Horizontal conveyance door switch 7-G
PS70 Door open/close sensor 8-G VR10 Remaining paper VR /1 3-C
PS71 Upper limit sensor /1 3-C VR11 Paper size VR /1 4-C
PS72 Paper feed sensor /1 3-C VR12 Remaining paper VR /2 6-C
PS73 Paper empty sensor /1 3-C VR13 Paper size VR /2 6-C
PS74 Handle release sensor /1 3-C VR14 Remaining paper VR /3 8-C
PS75 Paper size sensor /Fr1 3-C VR15 Paper size VR /3 8-C
PS76 Paper size sensor /Rr1 3-C
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
CN505- 5 M4_B CN530- 1 YEL
CN505- 1 M4_24V CN530- 2 BLK
CN505- 6 M4_ B/ CN530- 3 RED
CN505- 3 M4_A CN530- 4 ORG 1st folding motor
M4
CN505- 2 M4_24V CN530- 5 WIT
CN505- 4 M4_A/ CN530- 6 BLU
CN505- 11 M5_B CN531- 1 YEL

CN531- 2 BLK
18.7 FD-501
CN505- 7 M5_24V CN531- 3 RED

CN505- 12 M5_B/ CN531- 4 ORG
CN505- 9 M5_A 2nd folding motor
M5
CN505- 8 M5_24V CN531- 5 WIT
CN505- 10 M5_A/ CN531- 6 BLU
510-16A-1A
CN3- 1 KCOUT_41 CN503-16 KCOUT_41
510-15A-2A
CN3- 2 KCOUT_42 CN503-15 KCOUT_42 CN506- 5 M6_B CN532- 1 YEL
Power plug
510-14A-3A CN532- 2 BLK
CN3- 3 KCOUT_43 CN503-14 KCOUT_43 CN506- 1 M6_24V
510-13A-4A CN532- 3 RED
CN3- 4 KCOUT_44 CN503-13 KCOUT_44 CN506- 6 M6_B/ CN532- 4 ORG
510-12A-5A CN506- 3 M6_A 3rd folding motor
M6
510-11A-6A CN506- 2 M6_24V CN532- 5 WIT
CN3- 6 KCOUT_46 CN503-11 KCOUT_46 CN532- 6 BLU
510-10A-7A CN506- 4 M6_A/
CN3- 8 KCOUT_48 510-9A-8A
CN503- 9 KCOUT_48
1
1
510-8A-9A
CN3- 9 KCOUT_49 CN503- 8 KCOUT_49 CN533-6- 1 RED
510-7A-10A
CN3-10 KCOUT_50 CN503- 7 KCOUT_50 CN508-A 1 M14_24V CN533-5- 2 RED
510-6A-11A CN508-A 2 M14_24V
CN3-11 KCOUT_51 CN503- 6 KCOUT_51 CN533-4- 3 BLK
510-5A-12A CN508-A 3 M14_A
Inlet
CN3-12 KCOUT_52 CN503- 5 KCOUT_52 CN508-A 4 M14_A/ CN533-3- 4 BLN 1st folding release motor
510-4A-13A CN533-2- 5 ORG
M14
CN3-13 KCOUT_53 CN503- 4 KCOUT_53 CN508-A 5 M14_B
510-3A-14A CN533-1- 6 YEL
CN3-14 KCOUT_54 CN503- 3 KCOUT_54 CN508-A 6 M14_B/
510-2A-15A
FT2
FT1
CN3-15 KCOUT_55 CN503- 2 KCOUT_55
CN3-16 KCOUT_56 510-1A-16A CN503- 1 KCOUT_56
CN508-A 7 M15_24V CN534-6- 1 RED
CN534-5- 2 RED
CN508-A 8 M15_24V CN534-4- 3 BLK

CN508-A 9 M15_A CN534-3- 4 BLN
CN508-A10 M15_A/ 2nd folding release motor
CN534-2- 5 ORG
M15
CN508-A11 M15_B CN534-1- 6 YEL

CN508-A12 M15_B/
Y/G
WIT
BLK
CN13-1 /CPUIN_1(IRQ4) CN222-9 /CPUIN_1(IRQ4) 511-15A-1A CN535-6- 1 RED
CN13-2 /CPUIN_2(IRQ3) CN222-8 /CPUIN_2(IRQ3) CN209-A 1 KCIN_24 CN501-A17 PS51_SIG CN508-A13 M16_24V
511-14A-2A CN535-5- 2
RT1
RED
CN13-3 CPUIN_3(IRQ1) CN222-7 CPUIN_3(IRQ1) CN209-A 2 KCIN_25 CN501-A16 PS52_SIG CN508-A14 M16_24V CN535-4- 3 BLK
511-13A-3A
CN13-4 CPUIN_4(TIM Input) CN209-A 3 KCIN_26 CN501-A15 PS53_SIG CN508-A15 M16_A CN535-3- 4 BLN 3rd folding release motor
CN222-6 CPUIN_4(TIM Input) 511-12A-4A M16_A/
CN209-A 4 KCIN_27 CN501-A14 PS54_SIG CN508-A16 CN535-2- 5 ORG
M16
CN13-5 NC CN222-5 NC 511-11A-5A CN508-A17 M16_B CN535-1- 6 YEL

CN13-6 CPUIN_7(TIM Input) CN209-A 5 KCIN_28 CN501-A13 PS55_SIG CN508-A18 M16_B/
CN222-4 CPUIN_7(TIM Input) 511-10A-6A
CN13-7 SGND CN222-3 GND CN209-A 6 KCIN_29 CN501-A12 PS56_SIG
511-9A-7A
CN13-8 CPUIN_8(TIM Input) CN209-A 7 KCIN_30 CN501-A11 PS57_SIG
CN222-2 CPUIN_8(TIM Input) 511-8A-8A
CN13-9 5V CN222-1 NC CN209-A 8 ORI_SET 511-7A-9A
CN501-A10 ORI_SET
CN209-A 9 KCOUT_73 CN501-A 9 M4_CONT1 CN508-B 1 SGND
FT4
FT3
511-6A-10A CN508-B 2
CN209-A10 KCOUT_74 511-5A-11A
CN501-A 8 M4_CONT2
CN209-A11 KCOUT_75 CN501-A 7 M4_F/R CN508-B 3 5V CN517- 3
511-4A-12A CN508-B 4 SGND
CN209-A12 KCOUT_76 CN501-A 6 M4_RESET CN508-B CN517- 2
CN2-A 1 KCOUT_1 CN201-A20 KCOUT_1 511-3A-13A 5 PS57 SIG CN517- 1 PS57 3rd folding cam home sensor
CN2-A 2 KCOUT_2 CN201-A19 KCOUT_2 CN209-A13 SGND 511-2A-14A
CN501-A 5 SGND CN508-B 6 5V
CBR2
CN209-A14 SGND CN501-A 4 SGND
CBR1
CN2-A 3 KCOUT_3 CN201-A18 KCOUT_3 511-1A-15A
CN2-A 4 KCOUT_4 CN201-A17 KCOUT_4 CN209-A15 SGND 511-1A-15A
CN501-A 3 SGND
CN209-A16 SGND CN501-A 2 SGND CN516- 3
FT6
FT5
CN2-A 5 KCOUT_5 CN201-A16 KCOUT_5 511-1A-15A CN508-B 7 SGND
CN2-A 6 KCOUT_6 CN201-A15 KCOUT_6 CN209-A17 5V CN501-A 1 5V CN516- 2
CN209-B 1 KCOUT_77 511-15B-1B CN501-B17 M4_ENBLECN508-B 8 PS56 SIG CN516- 1 PS56 2nd folding cam home sensor
CN2-A 7 KCOUT_7 CN201-A14 KCOUT_7 511-14B-2B CN508-B 9 5V
Circuit breaker/2
Circuit breaker/1
CN2-A 8 KCOUT_8 CN201-A13 KCOUT_8 CN209-B 2 KCOUT_78 CN501-B16 M5_CONT1
511-13B-3B
CN2-A 9 KCOUT_9 CN201-A12 KCOUT_9 CN209-B 3 KCOUT_79 CN501-B15 M5_CONT2
511-12B-4B
WIT
BLK
CN2-A10 KCOUT_10 CN201-A11 KCOUT_10 CN209-B 4 KCOUT_80 511-11B-5B
CN501-B14 M5_F/R
CN10-1 IRQ4 CN515- 3
CN2-A11 KCOUT_11 CN201-A10 KCOUT_11 CN209-B 5 KCOUT_81 511-10B-6B
CN501-B13 M5_RESET CN508-B10 SGND CN515- 2
CN10-2 /IRQ3 CN209-B 6 KCOUT_82 CN501-B12 M5_ENBLECN508-B11 PS55 SIG PS55 1st folding cam home sensor
CN2-A12 KCOUT_12 CN201-A 9 KCOUT_12 511-9B-7B CN515- 1
CN10-3 IRQ CN209-B 7 KCOUT_83 CN501-B11 M6_CONT1 CN508-B12 5V
CN2-A13 KCOUT_13 CN201-A 8 KCOUT_13 511-8B-8B
CN209-B 8 KCOUT_84 CN501-B10 M6_CONT2
Interrupt
CN2-A14 KCOUT_14 CN201-A 7 KCOUT_14 511-7B-9B
CN2-A15 KCOUT_15 CN201-A 6 KCOUT_15 CN209-B 9 KCOUT_85 511-6B-10B
CN501-B 9 M6_F/R
CN501-B 8 M6_RESET CN508-B13 SGND CN514- 3
CN2-A16 KCOUT_16 CN201-A 5 KCOUT_16 CN209-B10 KCOUT_86 511-5B-11B CN514- 2
FT8
FT7
CN2-A17 KCOUT_17 CN201-A 4 KCOUT_17 CN209-B11 KCOUT_87 511-4B-12B
CN501-B 7 M6_ENBLE CN508-B14 PS54 SIG PS54 3rd folding conveyance sensor
CN514- 1
CN2-A18 KCOUT_18 CN201-A 3 KCOUT_18 CN209-B12 5V CN501-B 6 5V CN508-B15 5V
511-3B-13B
4
3
2
2
CN2-A19 KCOUT_19 CN201-A 2 KCOUT_19 CN209-B13 5V 511-2B-14B

CN501-B 5 5V
CN23-1 TCK CN2-A20 KCOUT_20 CN201-A 1 KCOUT_20 CN209-B14 5V 511-1B-15B
CN501-B 4 5V
NF1
CN209-B15 TIME0 CN501-B 3 M4_CLK
2
1
CN23-2 TDO3 CN2-B 1 KCOUT_21 CN201-B20 KCOUT_21 511-1B-15B CN511- 3
CN23-3 TDI CN209-B16 TIME2 CN501-B 2 M5_CLK CN508-B16 SGND CN511- 2
CN2-B 2 KCOUT_22 CN201-B19 KCOUT_22 511-1B-15B 1st folding conveyance sensor
CN23-4 TMS CN209-B17 TIME3 CN501-B 1 M6_CLK CN508-B17 PS51 SIG CN511- 1 PS51
FT9
CN2-B 3 KCOUT_23 CN201-B18 KCOUT_23 CN508-B18 5V
JTAG
FT10
CN23-5 TRST CN2-B 4 KCOUT_24 CN201-B17 KCOUT_24
CN2-B 5 KCOUT_25 CN201-B16 KCOUT_25
CN2-B 7 KCOUT_27 CN201-B14 KCOUT_27 512-1-1
WIT
BLK
CN500- 1 24VDC CN513- 3
Outlet
CN2-B 8 KCOUT_28 CN201-B13 KCOUT_28 512-2-2 CN507- 1 SGND
512-3-3 CN500- 2 24VDC CN513- 2
CN2-B 9 KCOUT_29 CN201-B12 KCOUT_29 CN507- 2 PS53 SIG 2nd folding conveyance sensor
8 10
512-4-4 CN500- 3 PGND CN513- 1 PS53
CN2-B10 KCOUT_30 CN201-B11 KCOUT_30 CN507- 3 5V
9 11
CN500- 2 PGND
CN24-1 5V CN2-B11 KCOUT_31 CN201-B10 KCOUT_31
CN24-2 RL_CONT CN2-B12 KCOUT_32 CN201-B 9 KCOUT_32
Relay
CN2-B13 KCOUT_33 CN201-B 8 KCOUT_33 CN512- 3
CN2-B14 KCOUT_34 CN201-B 7 KCOUT_34 CN507- 4 SGND CN512- 2
Y/G
CN52- 2
WIT
BLK
BLK CN201-B 6 KCOUT_35 CN216-12 M12_24V CN507- 5 PS52 SIG PS52 Folding entrance sensor
CN182- 1
PGC1 BLK CN2-B15 KCOUT_35 CN52- 5 CN507- 6 5V CN512- 1
CN216-11 M12_24V
CN181- 1
PGC2 CN216-10 M12_A Punch conveyance
WIT CN2-B17 KCOUT_37 CN201-B 4 KCOUT_37 CN216- 9 M 2_A/ CN52- 3
M2
CN2-B18 KCOUT_38 CN201-B 3 KCOUT_38 CN216- 8 M 2_ B CN52- 4 motor

WIT CN52- 6
CN2-B19 KCOUT_39 CN201-B 2 KCOUT_39 CN216- 7 M 2_B/
To 5V (CCP)
CN201-B 1 KCOUT_40 CN536- 1
CN2-B20 KCOUT_40 CN507- 7 SD18_DRV CN536- 2
CN62- 2
RT5
CN216- 6 M12_24V CN507- 8 SD_24V SD18 2nd folding roller solenoid
CN182- 2
CN62- 5
CN181- 2
CN216- 5 M12_24V
WIT
CN216- 4 M12_A CN62- 1
CN216- 3 M12_A/ CN62- 3 Alignment motor
CN1-A 1 KCIN_1 CN62- 4
M12
CN202-A16 KCIN_1 CN216- 2 M12_ B

CN1-A 2 KCIN_2 CN202-A15 KCIN_2 CN62- 6 CN536- 1
BLK FT11
CN216- 1 M12_B/ CN507- 9 SD15_DRV CN536- 2
CN151- 1
RED CN1-A 3 KCIN_3 CN202-A14 KCIN_3 CN507-10 SD_24V SD15 Folding gate solenoid
A
CN1-A 4 KCIN_4 CN202-A13 KCIN_4
CN1-A 5 KCIN_5 CN202-A12 KCIN_5 CN217- 1 M11 DRV1 CN61- 1 RED Tray up down
CN1-A 6 KCIN_6 CN202-A11 KCIN_6 CN217- 2 M11 DRV2 CN61- 2 BLU
FDB
BLK
M11
CN1-A 7 KCIN_7 motor
RL1
CN202-A10 KCIN_7
B
CN1-A 8 KCIN_8 CN202-A 9 KCIN_8
CN217- 3 5V
B
CN1-A 9 KCIN_9 CN202-A 8 KCIN_9

CN217- 4 RL_CONT
A
CN1-A10 KCIN_10 CN202-A 7 KCIN_10

CN517- 3
CN151- 2
CN1-A11 KCIN_11 CN202-A 6 KCIN_11 CN507-13 SGND CN517- 2 S size conveyance
CN183- 1
WIT
CN33- 3 CN507-14 PS57 SIG
CN1-A12 KCIN_12 CN202-A 5 KCIN_12 CN224- 5 5V CN33- 2 Main tray lower CN517- 1 PS58
FT12 BLK
CN1-A13 KCIN_13 CN202-A 4 KCIN_13 CN217- 6 PS13_SIG PS22 CN507-15 5V sensor
CN33- 1
CN1-A14 KCIN_14 CN202-A 3 KCIN_14 CN217- 7 SGND limit sensor
CN1-A15 KCIN_15 CN202-A 2 KCIN_15
WIT
CN1-A16 KCIN_16
BLK
CN202-A 1 KCIN_16
CN1-B 1 KCIN_17 CN202-B16 KCIN_17
CN183- 2
3
3

CN183-A2
CN183-A1
CN1-B 6 KCIN_22 CN202-B11 KCIN_22 CN219-A13 5V CN51- 1
CN1-B 7 KCIN_23 CN202-B10 KCIN_23 CN219-A12 SGND CN51- 2
CN219-A11 M1_CONT CN51- 3
MS1
CN1-B 8 KCIN_24 CN202-B 9 KCIN_24 CN51- 4
CN1-B 9 KCIN_25 CN202-B 8 KCIN_25 CN219-A10 M1_CLK CN51- 5
CN219-A 9 M1_F/R
Crimp
Symbol
CN1-B10 KCIN_26 CN202-B 7 KCIN_26 CN219-A 8 M1_LD CN51- 6

CN51- 7 Entrance conveyance motor
CN183-B2
CN183-B1
M1
CN1-B11 KCIN_27 CN202-B 6 KCIN_27 CN219-A 7 M1_H/L

CN1-B12 KCIN_28 CN202-B 5 KCIN_28 CN219-A 6 PGND CN51- 8
WIT
CN183- 1
WIT
CN51- 9
BLK
CN1-B13 KCIN_29 CN202-B 4 KCIN_29 CN219-A 5 PGND CN51-10
CN1-B14 KCIN_30 CN202-B 3 KCIN_30 CN219-A 4 24V CN51-11
CN219-A 3 24V
CN1-B15 KCIN_31 CN202-B 2 KCIN_31
CN1-B16 KCIN_32 CN202-B 1 KCIN_32
CN219-A 2 SD12_24V CN82- 1 RED
CN219-A 1 SD12_DRV CN82- 2 BLU SD12 Paper exit solenoid
CN183- 2
CN5-A 1 KCOUT_57 CN204-A20 KCOUT_57
CN5-A 2 KCOUT_58 CN204-A19 KCOUT_58
CN5-A 3 KCOUT_59 CN204-A18 KCOUT_59 CN67- 1
CN5-A 4 KCOUT_60 CN204-A17 KCOUT_60 CN219-B13 5V CN37- 2
CN219-B12 SGND CN67- 3
CN5-A 5 KCOUT_61 CN204-A16 KCOUT_61 CN219-B11 M17_CONT CN67- 4
CN5-A 6 KCOUT_62 CN204-A15 KCOUT_62 CN219-B10 M17_CLK CN67- 5
Connector
CN5-A 7 KCOUT_63 CN204-A14 KCOUT_63 CN219-B 9 M17_F/R
RT2
CN67- 6
CN5-A 8 KCOUT_64 CN204-A13 KCOUT_64 CN219-B 8 M17_LD CN67- 7 Main tray paper exit motor
M17
CN5-A 9 KCOUT_65 CN204-A12 KCOUT_65 CN219-B 7 M17_H/L CN67- 8

CN219-B 6 PGND CN67- 9
CN5-A10 KCOUT_66 CN204-A11 KCOUT_66 CN219-B 5 PGND CN67-10
CN5-A11 KCOUT_67 CN204-A10 KCOUT_67 CN219-B 4 24V
Y/G
CN67-11
WIT
BLK
CN5-A12 KCOUT_68 CN204-A 9 KCOUT_68 CN219-B 3 24V
CN5-A13 KCOUT_69 CN204-A 8 KCOUT_69
CN5-A14 KCOUT_70 CN204-A 7 KCOUT_70 CN219-B 2 SD24V_2
CN5-A15 KCOUT_71 CN204-A 6 KCOUT_71 CN219-B 1 SD7_DRV
:line(L)
CN184-3
CN184-1
CN184-5
CN5-A18 KCOUT_74 CN204-A 3 KCOUT_74 CN37- 3
:neutral(N)
CN204-A 2 KCOUT_75 CN220-A 1 SGND CN37- 2
CN5-A19 KCOUT_75
:frame GND
CN220-A 2 PS17_SIG CN37- 1 PS17 Sub tray paper full sensor
CN5-A20 KCOUT_76 CN204-A 1 KCOUT_76 CN220-A 3 5V
CN5-B 3 KCOUT_79 CN204-B18 KCOUT_79 CN36- 3
CN204-B17 KCOUT_80 CN220-A 4 SGND CN36- 2
CN5-B 4 KCOUT_80 CN220-A 5 PS16_SIG
Relay connector
CN5-B 5 KCOUT_81 CN204-B16 KCOUT_81 CN36- 1 PS16 Sub tray paper exit sensor
DCPS
CN220-A 6 5V
Faston

4
4
CN5-B 8 KCOUT_84 CN204-B13 KCOUT_84 CN24- 3

CN204-B12 KCOUT_85 CN220-A 7 SGND CN24- 2
CN5-B 9 KCOUT_85 CN220-A 8 PS4_SIG PI exit sensor
CN5-B10 KCOUT_86 CN204-B11 KCOUT_86 CN24- 1 PS4
:-V/PGND
CN191-1
:-V/PGND
CN191-2
:-V/PGND
CN191-3
:-V/PGND
CN191-4
:+V/24V
CN191-5
:+V/24V
CN191-6
:+V/24V
CN191-7
:+V/24V
CN191-8
CN220-A 9 5V
CN5-B11 KCOUT_87 CN204-B10 KCOUT_87
CN5-B12 KCOUT_88 CN204-B 9 KCOUT_88
CN204-B 7 KCOUT_90 CN220-A10 SGND CN21- 2
CN5-B14 KCOUT_90 CN220-A11 PS1_SIG FD entrance sensor
CN5-B15 KCOUT_91 CN204-B 6 KCOUT_91 CN220-A12 5V CN21- 1 PS1
CN5-B19 KCOUT_95 CN204-B 2 KCOUT_95 CN220-B12 5V CN53- 1
CN5-B20 KCOUT_96 CN204-B 1 KCOUT_96 CN220-B11 SGND CN53- 2
CN220-B10 M3_CONT CN53- 3
CN220-B 9 M3_CLK CN53- 4
CN220-B 8 M3_F/R CN53- 5 CN311-A13 OP_LED12 CN361-A 1 OP_LED12
CN220-B 7 M3_LD CN53- 6 Intermediate CN311-A12 OP_LED13
CN53- 7 CN361-A 2 OP_LED13
M3
CN14- 1 TIME_0 CN203-18 TIME_0 CN220-B 6 M3_H/L CN311-A11 OP_LED14

CN53- 8 conveyance motor CN361-A 3 OP_LED14
CN14- 2 TIME_1 CN203-17 TIME_1 CN220-B 5 PGND CN311-A10 OP_LED15
CN220-B 4 PGND CN53- 9 CN361-A 4 NC
CN14- 3 TIME_2 CN203-16 TIME_2 CN53-10 CN311-A 9 OP_LED16
CN220-B 3 24V CN361-A 5 NC
CN14- 4 TIME_3 CN203-15 TIME_3 CN53-11 CN311-A 8 OPE_SW1
CN220-B 2 24V CN361-A 6 OPE_SW1
CN14- 5 TIME_4 CN203-14 TIME_4 CN220-B 1 NC CN311-A 7 OPE_SW2 CN361-A 7 OPE_SW2
CN14- 6 TIME_5 CN203-13 TIME_5 CN311-A 6 OPE_SW3 CN361-A 8 OPE_SW3
CN14- 7 TIME_6 CN203-12 TIME_6 CN311-A 5 OPE_SW4 CN361-A 9 OPE_SW4
CN14- 8 TIME_7 CN203-11 TIME_7 CN311-A 4 OPE_SW5 CN361-A10 OPE_SW5
CN14- 9 TIME_8 CN203-10 TIME_8 CN311-A 3 OPE_S1 CN361-A11 NC
CN14-10 TIME_9 CN203- 9 TIME_9 CN311-A 2 OPE_S2 CN361-A12 NC
CN14-11 TIME_10 CN203- 8 TIME_10
PDB
CN46- 3 CN311-A 1 OPE_S3 CN361-A13 NC

CN14-12 TIME_11 CN203- 7 TIME_11 CN222- 1 SGND CN311-B13 5V
CN46- 2 CN361-B 1 5V
CN14-13 TIME_12 CN203- 6 TIME_12 CN222- 2 PS26_SIG CN46- 1 PS26 Punch scraps full sensor
CN222- 3 5V CN311-B12 SGND CN361-B 2 SGND
CN14-14 TIME_13 CN203- 5 TIME_13
4
CN311-B11 OP_LED 1
FDCB
CN361-B 3 OP_LED 1
CN14-15 TIME_14 CN203- 4 TIME_14 CN311-B10 OP_LED 2 CN361-B 4 OP_LED 2
CN14-16 TIME_15 CN203- 3 TIME_15
5
3
2
1
CN32- 3 CN311-B 9 OP_LED 3 CN361-B 5 OP_LED 3
CN14-17 TIME_16 CN203- 2 TIME_16 CN222- 4 SGND
PDB
CN32- 2 Punch scraps box set CN311-B 8 OP_LED 4 CN361-B 6 OP_LED 4

CN14-18 TIME_17 CN203- 1 TIME_17 CN222- 5 PS12_SIG CN32- 1 PS12
CN222- 6 5V CN311-B 7 OP_LED 5 CN361-B 7 OP_LED 5
CN20-1 5V sensor CN311-B 6 OP_LED 6 CN361-B 8 OP_LED 6
CN20-2 5V CN311-B 5 OP_LED 7 CN361-B 9 OP_LED 7
18 22
CN20-3 S.GND CN311-B 4 OP_LED 8 CN361-B10 OP_LED 8

CN30- 3
27 30
CN20-4 S.GND CN222- 7 SGND CN30- 2 Alignment plate home CN311-B 3 OP_LED 9 CN361-B11 OP_LED 9
CN222- 8 PS10_SIG CN30- 1 PS10 CN311-B 2 OP_LED10 CN361-B12 OP_LED10
AC L
CN222- 9 5V
AC N
sensor CN311-B 1 OP_LED11
F.GND
CN361-B13 OP_LED11
Punch motor CN215- 8 M10 DRV1
CN215- 7 M10 DRV2
AC OUTLET
M10
CN25- 3
CN222-10 SGND CN25- 2
CN222-11 PS5_SIG PS5 Punch conveyance sensor
5
5
CN215- 6 M13 24V CN25- 1

CN222-12 5V
MAIN BODY I/F CN215- 5 M13 24V
6 CN600-1 CN215- 4 M13 A
CN**-1 TXD 5 CN600-2
CN16-1 SYS_SIN Punch registration motor CN215- 3 M13 A/
M13
CN**-2 S.GND 4 CN600-3

CN16-2 S.GND CN215- 2 M13 B
CN**-3 CTS 3 CN600-4
CN16-3 /SYS_RTS CN215- 1 M13 B/
CN**-4 RXD 2 CN600-5
CN16-4 SYS_SOUT
CN**-5 S.GND 1 CN600-6
CN16-5 S.GND
FDOB
CN**-6 RTS CN16-6 /SYS_CTS

CN16-7 /PAPEROUT_1 CN78- 1 RED
CN223- 1 SD8_DRV CN78- 2 BLU
Roller
CN223- 2 SD24V_2 SD8
solenoid/4
CN221-A 1 SGND
5 CN601-1 Punch registration home sensor CN221-A 2 PS11_SIG CN374- 4
CN**-5 EXIT PS PS11 CN317- 1 TH_SIG CN374- 3
4 CN601-2 CN221-A 3 5V CN77- 1 RED Roller CN317- 2 GND
CN**-4 S.GND CN223- 3 SD7_DRV CN77- 2 BLU CN374- 2 TSB Temperature sensor board
3 CN601-3 CN223- 4 SD24V_2 SD7 CN317- 3 N.C CN374- 1
CN**-3 S.GND 2 CN601-4 solenoid/3 CN317- 4 5V
15 13
CN**-2 5V 1 CN601-5 CN221-A 4 SGND

14 12
CN**-1 5V 3 holes/4 holes punch home sensor PS9 CN221-A 5 PS9_SIG

CN221-A 6 5V CN74- 1 RED L size gate CN490- 2
CN223- 5 SD4_DRV CN74- 2 BLU
CN308- 1 + Multi feed detection
CN223- 6 SD24V_2 SD4 CN490- 1
CN308- 2 - CN490- 2 MFDB2
solenoid CN300- 3 AGND board/2
CN221-A 7 SGND
2 holes punch home sensor PS8 CN221-A 8 PS8_SIG
CN19-1 SYS_SIN CN221-A 9 5V
CN73- 1 RED S size gate
RU-503/504 2 CN621-2
CN19-2 /SYS_RTS
CN19-3 FNS2_SIN
CN223- 7 SD3_DRV
CN223- 8 SD24V_2 CN73- 2 BLU SD3
solenoid CN309- 1 SGND CN490- 3
CN**-5 SOUT 1 CN621-1 Multi feed detection
CN309- 2 + CN490- 1
CN**-4 CTS CN19-4 /FNS2_RTS CN490- 2 MFDB1
CN309- 3 - board/1
CN71- 2 CN33- 3 CN309- 4 NC
CN71- 1
CN221-A10 SD1_DRV CN223- 9 SGND CN33- 2 Punch registration
Entrance gate solenoid SD1 CN221-A11 SD24V_1 CN223-10 PS6_SIG CN33- 1 PS6
CN223-11 5V sensor
CN**-6 F.GND
CN**-5 P.GND
CN**-4 P.GND
CN**-3 S.GND
CN**-2 5V
CN**-1 24V
CN325- 3
CN306- 1 SGND CN325- 2
CN306- 2 PS35_SIG CN325- 1 PS35 L size sensor/Up
CN370- 6 5V CN79- 1 RED Sub tray gate CN306- 3 5V
CN221-B 1 5V CN224- 1 SD9_DRV
CN370- 5 LED1_SIG CN224- 2 SD24V_3 CN79- 2 BLU SD9
CN221-B 2 LED1_SIG
CN602-6
CN602-5
CN602-4
CN602-3
CN602-2
CN602-1
CN370- 4 LED2_SIG CN221-B 3 LED2_SIG solenoid

CN326- 3
CN370- 3 LED3_SIG CN221-B 4 LED3_SIG CN306- 4 SGND CN326- 2
CN370- 2 LED4_SIG CN221-B 5 LED4_SIG CN306- 5 PS36_SIG CN326- 1 PS36 S size sensor/Lw
JAMIB
CN38- 3 CN306- 6 5V
CN370- 1 NC CN221-B 6 LED5_SIG CN224- 3 SGND CN38- 2 Main tray paper exit
6
6
CN224- 4 PS18_SIG CN38- 1 PS18

CN224- 5 5V sensor
CN341- 1
CN306- 7 SGND CN341- 2
CN306- 8 UPTRY_SIZ CN341- 3 VR31 Paper size VR/Up
CN33- 3 CN306- 9 3.3V
CN224- 6 SGND CN33- 2
CN224- 7 PS13_SIG Folding exit sensor
24
CN224- 8 5V CN33- 1 PS2

CN71- 1
CN221-B 7 SD6_DRV
RT10
SD6 CN71- 2 CN334- 3

Roller solenoid/2 CN221-B 8 SD24V_1 CN306-10 SGND
25
CN334- 2
CN43- 3 CN306-11 PS44_SIG CN334- 1 PS44 PI paper set sensor/Up
CN224- 9 SGND CN43- 2 Main tray empty CN306-12 5V
CN224-10 PS23_SIG CN43- 1 PS23
CN71- 1 CN224-11 5V
26
CN221-B 9 SD5_DRV
sensor
Roller solenoid/1 SD5 CN71- 2 CN325- 3
CN221-B10 SD24V_1
RT11
CN306-13 SGND CN325- 2

CN40- 3 CN306-14 PS47_SIG PI max paper size sensor/Up
29
CN224-12 SGND CN325- 1 PS47

CN224-13 PS20_SIG CN40- 2 Main tray upper CN306-15 5V
CN224-14 5V CN40- 1 PS20
limit sensor
CN211- 1 24V CN321- 3
CN26- 3
CN306-16 SGND CN321- 2
CN211- 2 5V CN224-15 SGND CN26- 2 Main tray folding CN306-17 PS31_SIG CN321- 1 PS31 PI conveyance sensor/Up
CN603-6
CN603-5
CN603-4
CN603-3
CN603-2
CN603-1
CN211- 3 SGND CN224-16 PS7_SIG CN26- 1 PS7 CN306-18 5V

CN224-17 5V paper full sensor
CN211- 4 PGND
5V
24V
CN33- 3 CN328- 3
CN313- 1 SGND
F.GND
P.GND
P.GND
S.GND
CN224-18 SGND CN33- 2 Intermediate CN328- 2

PIDB
CN224-19 PS13_SIG PS13 CN313- 2 PS38_SIG CN328- 1 PS38 PI upper limit sensor/Lw
CN33- 1
19
CN206- 1 5VDC CN224-20 5V CN313- 3 5V

1 CN610-2
conveyance sensor
CN19-4 /FNS2_RTS CN18-2 FNS2_SIN CN206- 2 5VDC
2 CN610-1
CN19-3 FNS2_SIN CN206- 3 SGND
23
CN18-1 /FNS2_RTS CN329- 3

CN19-2 /SYS_RTS CN206- 4 SGND CN313- 4 SGND
28 31
CN329- 2
CN19-1 SYS_SIN CN313- 5 PS39_SIG CN329- 1 PS39 PI paper empty sensor/Lw
CN313- 6 5V
CN210-A 1 TCLKE_2 CN304-A14 M7_CLK7
1 CN605-6
CN21-1 SYS_SIN CN17-1 FNS1_SOUT CN210-A 2 TCLKF_2 CN304-A13 JYU_CLK7
2 CN605-5
CN21-2 S.GND CN17- 2 S.GND CN210-A 3 SGND CN304-A12 SGND
3 CN605-4 CN343-1/1
6
CN21-3 /SYS_RTS CN17-3 /FNS1_CTS CN207- 1 24VDC CN210-A 4 SGND CN304-A11 SGND CN313- 7 SD13_DRV CN343-2/2
4 CN605-3 CN313- 8 SD_24V SD13 PI pick-up solenoid/Up
CN21-4 SYS_SOUT CN17-4 FNS1_SIN CN210-A 5 SGND CN304-A10 SGND
7
5 CN605-2
CN207- 2 PGND
CN21-5 S.GND CN17-5 /FNSSET CN210-A 6 5V CN304-A 9 5VD
8
6 CN605-1 CN207- 3 24VDC

CN21-6 /SYS_CTS CN17-6 /FNS1_RTS CN210-A 7 5V CN304-A 8 5VD
CN21-7 /PAPEROUT_1 CN207- 4 24VDC CN304-A 7 5VD
CN17-7 /PAPEROUT_2 CN210-A 8 5V
CN331- 3
10
CN207- 5 PGND CN210-A 9 NC CN304-A 6 NC CN307- 1 SGND

1 CN604-5 CN17- 8 NC CN331- 2
CN307- 2 PS41_SIG
9 11
CN207- 6 PGND CN210-A10 NC CN304-A 5 NC CN331- 1 PS41 L size sensor/Lw

2 CN604-4 CN307- 3 5V
S.GND CN210-A11 SUBIN1 CN304-A 4 PANCH_S3 (Reserve)
3 CN604-3
S.GND CN210-A12 NC CN304-A 3 NC
7
7
4 CN604-2
5V
16 20
5 CN210-A13 KCOUT71 CN304-A 2 OP_LED15

5V CN604-1 CN332- 3
17 21
CN210-A14 KCOUT72 CN304-A 1 OP_LED16 CN307- 4 SGND

CN304-B14 OP_LED 1 CN332- 2
CN210-B 1 KCOUT57 CN307- 5 PS42_SIG CN332- 1 PS42 S size sensor/Lw
1
CN205- 1 24VDC CN210-B 2 KCOUT58 CN304-B13 OP_LED 2 CN307- 6 5V

3
CN205- 2 PGND CN210-B 3 KCOUT59 CN304-B12 OP_LED 3

To Next Option
CN210-B 4 KCOUT60 CN304-B11 OP_LED 4

2
AC N
F.GND
AC L
AC INLET
CN205- 3 24VDC
CN210-B 5 KCOUT61 CN304-B10 OP_LED 5 CN342- 1
4
CN205- 4 PGND CN307- 7 SGND

CN210-B 6 KCOUT62 CN304-B 9 OP_LED 6 CN342- 2
CN307- 8 LOWTRY_SZ
5
CN205- 5 PGND CN304-B 8 OP_LED 7 CN342- 3 VR32 Paper size VR/Lw

CN210-B 7 KCOUT63 CN307- 9 3.3V
CN210-B 8 KCOUT64 CN304-B 7 OP_LED 8
CN606- 3 CN210-B 9 KCOUT65 CN304-B 6 OP_LED 9
CN304-B 5 OP_LED10
12
CN210-B10 KCOUT66
CN606- 1 CN304-B 4 OP_LED11 CN335- 3
CN210-B11 KCOUT67 CN307-10 SGND CN335- 2
CN606- 4 CN307-11 PS45_SIG PI paper set sensor/Lw
CN210-B12 KCOUT68 CN304-B 3 OP_LED12 CN335- 1 PS45
CN304-B 2 OP_LED13 CN307-12 5V
CN15- 1 TIME_18 CN210-B13 KCOUT69
SSJC HYB6
CN606- 5 CN15- 2 TIME_19 CN210-B14 KCOUT70 CN304-B 1 OP_LED14

CN15- 3 TIME_20
13
CN326- 3
MAIN BODY
CN606- 2 CN15- 4 TIME_21 CN307-13 SGND CN326- 2

CN606- 6 CN15- 5 TIME_22 CN307-14 PS48_SIG CN326- 1 PS48 PI mac paper size sensor/Lw
16 17 18 19
CN307-15 5V
CN15- 6 TIME_23
FNS FDCB PDB
CN15- 7 NC
CN324- 3
CN307-16 SGND CN324- 2
CN307-17 PS46_SIG CN324- 1 PS46 Sub tray folding paper full sensor
CN307-18 5V
CN11-1 3.3V CN303- 6 3.3V CN307-19 MC2_DRV CN346- 1

CN11-2 3.3V CN303- 5 3.3V CN307-20 24V CN346- 2 CL2 PI registration clutch/Lw
CN7-A 1 KCIN_65 CN11-3 AD_0 CN303- 4 AD_1
CN606- 3 CN7-A 2 KCIN_66 CN11-4 AD_1 CN303- 3 AD_2
CN11-5 AD_2 CN303- 2 AD_3
14
CN7-A 3 KCIN_67
CN606- 1 CN11-6 AD_3 CN303- 1 AD_4
CN606- 4
CN7-A 4 KCIN_68 CN315- 1 SGND CN327- 3
CN7-A 5 KCIN_69 CN327- 2
CN315- 2 PS37_SIG CN327- 1 PS37 PI conveyance sensor/Lw
CN7-A 6 KCIN_70 CN315- 3 5V
CN7-A 7 KCIN_71
SGND
CN606- 5
CN7-A 8 KCIN_72
15
MAIN BODY
CN606- 2 CN7-A 9 KCIN_73

CN606- 6 CN7-A10 KCIN_74 CN 6- 1 KCOUT_97 CN301-16 KCOUT_97 CN330- 3
20 21 22 23
CN 6- 2 KCOUT_98 CN301-15 KCOUT_98 CN315- 4 SGND CN330- 2

CN7-A11 KCIN_75 CN315- 5 PS40_SIG
FNS FDCB PDB
CN7-A12 KCIN_76 CN 6- 3 KCOUT_99 CN301-14 KCOUT_99 CN315- 6 5V CN330- 1 PS40 PI lift plate home sensor/Lw
CN7-B 1 KCIN_77 CN 6- 4 KCOUT_100 CN301-13 KCOUT_100
8
8

CN7-B 4 KCIN_80 CN 6- 7 KCOUT_103 CN301-10 KCOUT_103 CN322- 3
CN 6- 8 KCOUT_104 CN301- 9 KCOUT_104 CN314- 1 SGND CN322- 2
CN7-B 5 KCIN_81 CN314- 2 PS32_SIG PS32 PI upper limit sensor/Up
CN 6- 9 KCOUT_105 CN301- 8 KCOUT_105 CN322- 1
CN7-B 6 KCIN_82 CN314- 3 5V
CN610- 2 CN7-B 7 KCIN_83 CN 6-10 KCOUT_106 CN301- 7 KCOUT_106
CN7-B 8 KCIN_84 CN 6-11 KCOUT_107 CN301- 6 KCOUT_107
5v
CN610- 1 CN7-B 9 KCIN_85 CN 6-12 KCOUT_108 CN301- 5 KCOUT_108 CN323- 3

CN610- 3 CN 6-13 KCOUT_109 CN301- 4 KCOUT_109 CN314- 4 SGND CN323- 2
CN7-B10 KCIN_86 CN314- 5 PS33_SIG PS33 PI paper empty sensor/Up
CN 6-14 KCOUT_110 CN301- 3 KCOUT_110 CN323- 1
CN7-B11 KCIN_87 CN314- 6 5V
CN7-B12 KCIN_88 CN 6-15 KCOUT_111 CN301- 2 KCOUT_111
CN610- 4
CN 6-16 KCOUT_112 CN301- 1 KCOUT_112
CN610- 6 CN344-1/1
CN314- 7 SD14_DRV CN344-2/2
CN314- 8 24V SD14 PI pick-up solenoid/Lw
FNS
CN610- 7 CN8-A 1 KCOUT_113

CN8-A 2 KCOUT_114 CN4-A 1 KCIN_33 CN302-A16 KCIN_33
24 MAIN BODY 25
CN610- 5 CN8-A 3 KCOUT_115 CN4-A 2 KCIN_34 CN302-A15 KCIN_34

CN610- 8 CN8-A 4 KCOUT_116 CN4-A 3 KCIN_35 CN302-A14 KCIN_35 CN345- 1
SGND
CN314- 9 MC1_DRV
26 27 28 29 30 31
CN8-A 5 KCOUT_117 CN4-A 4 KCIN_36 CN302-A13 KCIN_36 CN314-10 24V CN345- 2 CL1 PI registration clutch/Up
FNS FDCB PDB FDCB PDB

CN9-A 9 KCOUT_121 CN4-A 8 KCIN_40 CN302-A 9 KCIN_40
CN8-A10 KCOUT_122 CN4-A 9 KCIN_41 CN338- 2/1 RED
CN302-A 8 KCIN_41 CN314-11 M8_DRV1
CN4-A10 KCIN_42 CN314-12 M8_DRV2 CN338- 1/2 BLU Paper lift motor/Up
CN8-A11 KCOUT_123 CN302-A 7 KCIN_42
M8
CN8-A12 KCOUT_124 CN4-A11 KCIN_43 CN302-A 6 KCIN_43

CN8-A13 KCOUT_125 CN4-A12 KCIN_44 CN302-A 5 KCIN_44
CN8-A14 KCOUT_126 CN4-A13 KCIN_45 CN302-A 4 KCIN_45 CN333- 3
CN8-A15 KCOUT_127 CN4-A14 KCIN_46 CN302-A 3 KCIN_46 CN314-13 SGND CN333- 2
CN8-A16 KCOUT_128 CN4-A15 KCIN_47 CN302-A 2 KCIN_47 CN314-14 PS43_SIG CN333- 1 PS43 PI cover open/close sensor
CN8-A17 NC CN4-A16 KCIN_48 CN314-15 5V
CN302-A 1 KCIN_48
CN8-B 1 KCOUT_129 CN4-B 1 KCIN_49 CN302-B16 KCIN_49
CN8-B 2 KCOUT_130 CN4-B 2 KCIN_50 CN302-B15 KCIN_50
CN8-B 3 KCOUT_131 CN4-B 3 KCIN_51 CN302-B14 KCIN_51 CN337-11
CN305- 1 24V CN337-10
CN8-B 4 KCOUT_132 CN4-B 4 KCIN_52 CN302-B13 KCIN_52 CN305- 2 24V CN337- 9
CN8-B 5 KCOUT_133 CN4-B 5 KCIN_53 CN302-B12 KCIN_53 CN305- 3 M7 PGND CN337- 8
CN8-B 6 KCOUT_134 CN4-B 6 KCIN_54 CN302-B11 KCIN_54 CN305- 4 M7 PGND CN337- 7
CN8-B 7 KCOUT_135 CN4-B 7 KCIN_55 CN302-B10 KCIN_55 CN305- 5 M7 H/L CN337- 6
CN8-B 8 KCOUT_136 CN4-B 8 KCIN_56 CN305- 6 M7 LD CN337- 5 PI conveyance motor
M7
CN302-B 9 KCIN_56 CN305- 7 M7 F/R

CN8-B 9 KCOUT_137 CN4-B 9 KCIN_57 CN302-B 8 KCIN_57 CN337- 4
CN305- 8 M7 CLK CN337- 3
CN8-B10 KCOUT_138 CN4-B10 KCIN_58 CN302-B 7 KCIN_58 CN305- 9 M7 S/P CN337- 2
CN8-B11 KCOUT_139 CN4-B11 KCIN_59 CN302-B 6 KCIN_59 CN305-10 SGND CN337- 1
CN8-B12 KCOUT_140 CN4-B12 KCIN_60 CN302-B 5 KCIN_60 CN305-11 5V
9
9
CN8-B13 KCOUT_141 CN4-B13 KCIN_61 CN302-B 4 KCIN_61

CN8-B14 KCOUT_142 CN4-B14 KCIN_62 CN302-B 3 KCIN_62
CN324- 3
CN8-B15 KCOUT_143 CN4-B15 KCIN_63 CN302-B 2 KCIN_63 CN305-12 SGND CN324- 2
CN8-B16 KCOUT_144 CN4-B16 KCIN_64 CN302-B 1 KCIN_64 CN305-13 PS34_SIG CN324- 1 PS34 PI lift plate home sensor/Up
CN8-B17 NC CN305-14 5V
6
CN300- 1 24VDC
7
CN300- 2 PGND CN339- 2/1 RED

CN305-15 M9_DRV1 CN339- 1/2 BLU Paper lift motor/Lw
CN305-16 M9_DRV2
M9
CN15-1 NC CN318-1 NC
CN15-7 JYU_CLK1 CN318-7 JYU_CLK1
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

1050e/1050eP
FD-501 location list

/1050e/1050eP

— Outlet 2-I PS18 Main tray paper exit sensor 6-D
— Inlet 1-H PS20 Main tray upper limit sensor 6-D
— Power plug 1-H PS22 Main tray lower limit sensor 3-D
CBR1 Circuit breaker /1 2-H PS23 Main tray empty sensor 6-D
CBR2 Circuit breaker /2 2-H PS26 Punch scraps full sensor 5-D
CL1 PI registration clutch /Up 8-A PS31 PI conveyance sensor /Up 6-A
CL2 PI registration clutch /Lw 8-A PS32 PI upper limit sensor /Up 8-A
DCPS DC power supply 4-H PS33 PI paper empty sensor /Up 8-A
FDB Folding drive board 1-B PS34 PI lift plate home sensor /Up 9-A
FDCB FD control board 1-G PS35 L size sensor /Up 6-A
FDOB FD operation board 4-A PS36 S size sensor /Up 6-A
JAMIB Jam indicator board 6-F PS37 PI conveyance sensor /Lw 8-A
M1 Entrance conveyance motor 3-D PS38 PI upper limit sensor /Lw 7-A
M2 Punch conveyance motor 2-D PS39 PI paper empty sensor /Lw 7-A
M3 Intermediate conveyance motor 4-D PS40 PI lift plate home sensor /Lw 8-A
M4 1st folding motor 1-B PS41 L size sensor /Lw 7-A
M5 2nd folding motor 1-B PS42 S size sensor /Lw 7-A
M6 3rd folding motor 1-B PS43 PI cover open/close sensor 9-A
M7 PI conveyance motor 9-A PS44 PI paper set sensor /Up 6-A
M8 Paper lift motor /Up 9-A PS45 PI paper set sensor /Lw 7-A
M9 Paper lift motor /Lw 9-A PS46 Sub tray folding paper full sensor 8-A
M10 Punch motor 5-F PS47 PI max paper size sensor /Up 6-A
M11 Tray up down motor 3-D PS48 PI max paper size sensor /Lw 6-A
M12 Alignment motor 3-D PS51 1st folding conveyance sensor 2-B
M13 Punch registration motor 5-F PS52 Folding entrance sensor 2-B
M14 1st folding release motor 1-B PS53 2nd folding conveyance sensor 2-B
M15 2nd folding release motor 1-B PS54 3rd folding conveyance sensor 2-B
M16 3rd folding release motor 1-B PS55 1st folding cam home sensor 2-B
M17 Main tray paper exit motor 4-D PS56 2nd folding cam home sensor 2-B
MFDB1 Multi feed detection board /1 6-A PS57 3rd folding cam home sensor 2-B
MFDB2 Multi feed detection board /2 5-A PS58 S size conveyance sensor 3-B
MS1 Door switch 3-I RL1 Relay 3-H
NF1 Noise filter 2-H SD1 Entrance gate solenoid 6-F
PDB Punch drive board 1-D SD3 S size gate solenoid 6-C
PIDB PI drive board 4-B SD4 L size gate solenoid 5-C
PS1 FD entrance sensor 4-D SD5 Roller solenoid /1 6-F
PS2 Folding exit sensor 6-D SD6 Roller solenoid /2 6-F
PS4 PI exit sensor 4-D SD7 Roller solenoid /3 5-C
PS5 Punch conveyance sensor 5-D SD8 Roller solenoid /4 5-C
PS6 Punch registration sensor 6-D SD9 Sub tray gate solenoid 6-C
PS7 Main tray folding paper full sensor 6-D SD12 Paper exit solenoid 3-C
PS8 2 holes punch home sensor 5-E SD13 PI pick-up solenoid /Up 7-A
PS9 3 holes/4 holes home sensor 5-E SD14 PI pick-up solenoid /Lw 8-A
PS10 Alignment plate home sensor 5-D SD15 Folding gate solenoid 3-B
PS11 Punch registration home sensor 5-E SD18 2nd folding roller solenoid 2-B
PS12 Punch scraps box set sensor 5-D VR31 Paper size VR /Up 6-A
PS13 Intermediate conveyance sensor 7-D VR32 Paper size VR /Lw 7-A
PS16 Sub tray paper exit sensor 4-D TSB Temperature sensor board 5-A
PS17 Sub tray paper full sensor 4-D
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
18.8 LS-501/502
1
1
Stacker tray
upper limit sensor
PS3
Paper press
solenoid/3 SD8
RLB/2
RLB/1
Front stopper
solenoid SD9
Entrance
2
2
sensor
PS4
Grip conveyance
home sensor
PS5
Paper empty
TOB
sensor
PS6
Paper detection
PS19
sensor
Conveyance
JAMIB
sensor/1
PS7
Sub tray door
sensor
PS8
3
3
Sub tray full SD1 1st gate solenoid

sensor
PS9
Job partition
SD2 solenoid
Sub tray exit
sensor
PS10
Rear stopper
SD3
LS-501 only
Conveyance solenoid
sensor/2
PS16
Front door lock
SD4 solenoid
JAM door
switch
RS2
Paper cooling fan
FM1 motor/Fr
Sub tray door Entrance

sensor SD5 conveyance
PS8
lock solenoid
Sub tray full Paper press
SD6 solenoid/1
sensor
PS9
LS-501 only
2nd gate
4
4
SD10 solenoid
LS-502 only
Sub tray exit

sensor
PS10
Paper press
SD7 solenoid/2
Hand cart reset Coupling
switch SD11 conveyance
RS1
lock solenoid
LS-501 only
Stacker tray set Stacker tray

encoder
PS2
LED
LED1
sensor
Toggle switch
SW1
Stacker tray set

sensor
PS1
LS-501 only
Conveyance Paper cooling fan
LS-501 only
FM3
PS17
sensor/3 motor/Mi
Shift unit home

Paper cooling fan
PS11
5
5
sensor FM5 motor/Rr

Alignment home
Stacker tray
PS12
sensor
M1
up down motor
LS-502 only
2,000 sheets
LSCB
stacked sensor Conveyance

PS13
M2
motor
5,000 sheets
stacked sensor
PS14
Sub tray exit

M3
Stacker tray arm motor

release sensor
PS15
LS-501 only
Coupling exit Grip conveyance

PS18
sensor
M4
motor
6
6
Shift unit motor

M5
Paper cooling fan

motor/1
FM2
Coupling
M6
conveyance motor
Paper cooling fan
FM6
motor/2
Motor cooling fan Coupling

M6
conveyance motor
FM4
motor
LS-501 only LS-502 only
MAIN BODY Alignment motor

M7
I/F
7
7
Front Door switch

MS1
MAIN BODY
I/F
Stacker tray
MS2
upper limit switch
CONVE- Stacker tray

MS3
YANCE lower limit switch

I/F
CONVE- Main
LS-501 only
YANCE Body/LS
I/F
CONVE-
YANCE
I/F LS/FS
LS-501 only
8
8
LS-501 only
MAIN BODY
I/F
Inlet
Crimp
AC
Symbol
DCPS
CONVEYANCE
LS-501 only
AC
Connector
Outlet
9
9
Relay connector
Faston
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

1050e/1050eP
LS-501/502 location list

/1050e/1050eP

M1 Stacker tray up down motor 5-A PS5 Grip conveyance sensor 2-H
M2 Conveyance motor 5-A PS6 Paper empty sensor 3-H
M3 Sub tray exit motor 6-A PS7 Conveyance sensor /1 3-H
M4 Grip conveyance motor 6-A PS8 Sub tray door sensor 3-H (LS-501)
M5 Shift unit motor 6-A 4-H (LS-502)
M6 Coupling conveyance motor 6-A (LS-501) PS9 Sub tray full sensor 3-H (LS-501)
7-A (LS-502) 4-H (LS-502)
M7 Alignment motor 7-A PS10 Sub tray paper exit sensor 3-H (LS-501)
FM1 Paper cooling fan motor /Fr 4-A 4-H (LS-502)
FM2 Paper cooling fan motor /1 6-H PS11 Shift unit home sensor 5-H
FM3 Paper cooling fan motor /Mi 5-A PS12 Alignment plate home sensor 5-H
FM4 Motor cooling fan motor 7-H PS13 2,000 sheets stacked sensor 5-H
FM5 Paper cooling fan motor /Rr 5-A PS14 5,000 sheets stacked sensor 5-H
FM6 Paper cooling fan motor /2 6-H PS15 Stacker tray arm release sensor 6-H
SD1 1st gate solenoid 3-A PS16 Conveyance sensor /2 3-H (LS-501 only)
SD2 Job partition solenoid 3-A PS17 Conveyance sensor /3 5-H (LS-501 only)
SD3 Rear stopper solenoid 3-A PS18 Coupling exit sensor 6-H (LS-501 only)
SD4 Front door lock solenoid 4-A PS19 Paper detection sensor 2-I
SD5 Entrance conveyance lock solenoid 4-A RS1 Hand cart set switch 4-H (LS-501 only)
SD6 Paper press solenoid /1 4-A RS2 JAM door switch 7-A
SD7 Paper press solenoid /2 4-A MS1 Front door switch 7-A
SD8 Paper press solenoid /3 2-H MS2 Stacker tray upper limit switch 7-A
SD9 Front stopper solenoid 2-H MS3 Stacker tray lower limit switch 2-A
SD10 2nd gate solenoid 4-A (LS-501 only) TOB Stacker tray operation board 3-A
SD11 Coupling conveyance lock solenoid 4-A (LS-501 only) JAMIB Jam indication board 2-F
SW1 Toggle switch 5-B RLB/1 Relay board /1 2-G
LED1 Stacker tray set LED 4-H RLB/2 Relay board /2 2-D
PS1 Stacker tray set sensor 5-H LSCB LS control board 8-G (LS-501 only)
PS2 Stacker tray encoder sensor 5-A DCPS DC power supply 8-H (LS-501 only)
PS3 Stacker tray upper limit sensor 2-H
PS4 Entrance sensor 2-H
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
18.9 FS-503
1
1
CN121-1 CN205-1 CN205-1 CN60-1 R_DRV1 CN51-A 1 M1_24V CN100-11

CN121-2 CN205-2 CN205-2 CN60-2 R_DRV2 CN51-A 2 M1_24V CN100-10
CN51-A 3 M1_P.GND CN100-9
CN122-1 CN204-1 CN204-14 CN59- 1 R_5V CN51-A 5 M1_H/L CN100-7
Stapler unit/Rr CN122-2 CN204-2 CN204-13 CN59- 2 R_HP_SIG CN51-A 6 M1_LD_SIG CN100-6
CN204-3 CN204-12 M1 Conveyance motor
CN122-3 CN59- 3 R_S.GND CN51-A 7 M1_F/R CN100-5
CN122-4 CN204-4 CN204-11 CN59- 4 R_LS_SIG CN51-A 8 M1_CLK CN100-4
CN122-5 CN204-5 CN204-10 CN59- 5 R_CD_SIG CN51-A 9 M1_CONT CN100-3
CN122-6 CN204-6 CN204-9 CN59- 6 R_READY_SIG CN51-A10 M1_S.GND CN100-2
CN122-7 CN204-7 CN204-8 CN59- 7 R_S.GND CN51-A11 M1_5V CN100-1
CN51-A12 SD2_24V -2 CN104-1

CN51-A13 SD2_DRV -1 CN104-2 SD2 Gate solenoid
CN123-1 CN205-3 CN205-3 CN60-3 F_DRV1
CN123-2 CN205-4 CN205-4 CN60-4 F_DRV2
CN51-B 1 SD5_24V -2 CN105-1
CN51-B 2 SD5_DRV -1 CN105-2 SD5 Bypass solenoid
CN124-1 CN204-8 CN204-7 CN59- 8 F_5V
2
2
CN124-2 CN204-9 CN204-6 CN59- 9 F_HP_SIG

Stapler unit/Fr CN204-10 CN204-5
CN124-3 CN59-10 F_S.GND CN51-B 3 M3_24V CN145-11
CN124-4 CN204-11 CN204-4 CN59-11 F_LS_SIG CN51-B 4 M3_24V CN145-10
CN124-5 CN204-12 CN204-3 CN59-12 F_CD_SIG CN51-B 5 M3_P.GND CN145-9
CN124-6 CN204-13 CN204-2 CN59-13 F_READY_SIG CN51-B 6 M3_P.GND CN145-8
CN124-7 CN204-14 CN204-1 CN59-14 F_S.GND CN51-B 7 M3_H/L CN145-7
CN51-B 8 M3_LD_SIG CN145-6 M3 Tray up down motor
CN51-B 9 M3_F/R CN145-5
CN51-B10 M3_CLK CN145-4
CN127-3 CN209-1 CN209-6 CN58-A 1 PS11_S.GND CN51-B11 M3_CONT2 CN145-4
Stapler movement CN127-2 CN209-2 CN209-5 CN58-A 2 PS11_SIG CN51-B12 M3_S.GND CN145-2
home sensor PS11 CN127-1 CN209-3 CN209-4 CN58-A 3 PS11_5V CN51-B13 M3_5V CN145-1
CN128-3 CN211-1 CN211-3 CN209-4 CN209-3 CN58-A 4 PS14_S.GND

Stapler rotation CN128-2 CN211-2 CN211-2 CN209-5 CN209-2 CN58-A 5 PS14_SIG
home sensor PS14 CN128-1 CN211-3 CN211-1 CN209-6 CN209-1 CN58-A 6 PS14_5V CN52-A 1 M7_24V CN102-11
CN52-A 2 M7_24V CN102-10
CN131-3 CN200-A1 CN200-A12 CN52-A 4 M7_P.GND CN102-8
CN58-A 7 PS32_S.GND
Stack asist CN131-2 CN200-A2 CN200-A11 CN52-A 5 M7_H/L CN102-7
PS32 CN58-A 8 PS32_SIG
home sensor CN131-1 CN200-A3 CN200-A10 CN52-A 6 M7_LD_SIG CN102-6
CN58-A 9 PS32_5V M7 Main tray exit motor
CN52-A 7 M7_F/R CN102-5
CN52-A 8 M7_CLK CN102-4
CN132-3 CN200-A4 CN200-A9 CN58-A10 PS33_S.GND CN52-A 9 M7_CONT CN102-3
Intermediate roller CN132-2 CN200-A5 CN200-A8 CN58-A11 PS33_SIG CN52-B 1 M7_S.GND CN102-2
home sensor PS33 CN132-1 CN200-A6 CN200-A7 CN58-A12 PS33_5V CN52-B 2 M7_5V CN102-1
3
3
CN133-3 CN200-A7 CN200-A6 CN58-A13 PS35_S.GND CN52-B 3 M8_24V -6 CN103-1

Rear stopper CN133-2 CN200-A8 CN200-A5 CN58-A14 PS35_SIG CN52-B 4 M8_24V -5 CN103-2
home sensor PS35 CN133-1 CN200-A9 CN200-A4 CN58-A15 PS35_5V CN52-B 5 M8_DRV_A -4 CN103-3
CN52-B 6 M8_DRV_A/ -3 CN103-4 M8 Paper exit opening motor
CN52-B 7 M8_DRV_B -2 CN103-5
CN117-3 CN58-B 1 PS34_S.GND CN52-B 8 M8_DRV_B/ -1 CN103-6
Staple scraps box PS34 CN117-2 CN58-B 1 PS34_SIG CN52-B 9 NC
set sensor CN117-1 CN58-B 1 PS34_5V
CN53-1 M6_24V -6 CN106-1
CN53-2 M6_24V -5 CN106-2
CN130-3 CN206-1 CN206-6 CN200-B1 CN200-B12 CN58-B 4 PS 8_S.GND CN53-3 M6_DRV_A -4 CN106-3
Alignment home CN130-2 CN206-2 CN206-5 CN200-B2 CN200-B11 CN58-B 5 PS 8_SIG CN53-4 M6_DRV_A/ -3 CN106-4 M6 Sub tray exit motor
sensor/Rr PS8 CN130-1 CN206-3 CN206-4 CN200-B3 CN200-B10 CN58-B 6 PS 5_5V CN53-5 M6_DRV_B -2 CN106-5
CN53-6 M6_DRV_B/ -1 CN106-6
CN129-3 CN206-4 CN206-3 CN200-B4 CN200-B9 CN58-B 7 PS20_S.GND

Stacker empty CN129-2 CN206-5 CN206-2 CN200-B5 CN200-B8 CN58-B 8 PS20_SIG CN53-7 SD9_24V -2 CN107-1
sensor PS20 CN129-1 CN206-6 CN206-1 CN200-B6 CN200-B7 CN58-B 9 PS20_5V CN53-8 SD9_DRV -1 CN107-2 SD9 Paper exit opening solenoid
CN126-3 CN216-1 CN216-6 CN200-B7 CN200-B6 CN58-B10 PS 9_S.GND

Paper exit arm PS9 CN126-2 CN216-2 CN216-5 CN200-B8 CN200-B5 CN58-B11 PS 9_SIG
home sensor CN126-1 CN216-3 CN216-4 CN200-B9 CN200-B4 CN58-B12 PS 9_5V CN54- 1 PS 2_S.GND CN212-6 CN212-1 CN109-3
CN54- 2 PS 2_SIG CN212-5 CN212-2 CN109-2
Tray upper limit
CN54- 3 PS 2_5V CN212-4 CN212-3 CN109-1
PS2 sensor
CN125-3 CN216-4 CN216-3 CN200-B10 CN200-B3 CN58-B13 PS31_S.GND
Alignment home CN125-2 CN216-5 CN216-2 CN200-B11 CN200-B2 CN58-B14 PS31_SIG
4
4
sensor/Fr PS31 CN125-1 CN216-6 CN216-1 CN200-B12 CN200-B1 CN58-B15 PS31_5V CN54- 4 PS 7_S.GND CN212-3 CN212-4 CN144-3
CN54- 5 PS 7_SIG CN212-2 CN212-5 CN144-2
Staple exit upper
CN54- 6 PS 7_5V CN212-1 CN212-6 CN144-1
PS7 limit sensor
CN136-3 CN203-A1 CN203-A18 CN57-A 1 M22_24V CN54- 7 PS 3_S.GND CN110-3

CN203-A2 CN203-A17 CN54- 8 PS 3_SIG CN110-2
Tray lower limit
CN136-9 CN57-A 2 M22_24V PS3 sensor
CN136-1 CN203-A3 CN203-A16 CN57-A 3 M22_DRV_A CN54- 9 PS 3_5V CN110-1
Alignment motor/Fr M22 CN203-A4 CN203-A15
FNSDB
CN136-5 CN57-A 4 M22_DRV_A/

CN136-7 CN203-A5 CN203-A14 CN57-A 5 M22_DRV_B
CN136-11 CN203-A6 CN203-A13 CN57-A 6 M22_DRV_B/ CN54-10 PS10_S.GND CN115-3
CN54-11 PS10_SIG CN115-2 PS15 Counter reset sensor
CN54-12 PS10_5V CN115-1
CN134-3 CN203-A7 CN203-A12 CN57-A 7 M 5_24V
CN134-9 CN203-A8 CN203-A12 CN57-A 8 M 5_24V
CN203-A9 CN203-A10 CN54-13 PS12_S.GND CN213-3 CN213-1 CN111-3
CN134-1 CN57-A 9 M 5_DRV_A CN213-2 CN213-2
Alignment motor/Rr M5 CN134-5 CN203-A10 CN203-A9 CN57-A10 M 5_DRV_A/ CN54-14 PS12_SIG CN111-2 PS4 FNS entrance sensor
CN203-A11 CN203-A8 CN54-15 PS12_5V CN213-1 CN213-3 CN111-1
CN134-7 CN57-A11 M 5_DRV_B
CN134-11 CN203-A12 CN203-A7 CN57-A12 M 5_DRV_B/
CN137-1 -6 CN203-A13 CN203-A6 CN57-A13 M24_24V

CN137-2 -5 CN203-A14 CN203-A5 CN55- 1 PS10_S.GND CN113-3 tray paper exit
CN57-A14 M24_24V CN55- 2 PS10_SIG CN113-2 PS10 Main
Stack asist guide CN137-3 -4 CN203-A15 CN203-A4 CN57-A15 M24_DRV_A sensor
CN137-4 -3 CN203-A16 CN203-A3 CN55- 3 PS10_5V CN113-1
motor M24 CN57-A16 M24_DRV_A/
CN137-5 -2 CN203-A17 CN203-A2 CN57-A17 M24_DRV_B
CN137-6 -1 CN203-A18 CN203-A1 CN57-A18 M24_DRV_B/ CN55- 4 PS 1_S.GND CN108-3
Sub tray paper exit
5
5
CN55- 5 PS 1_SIG CN108-2 PS1

-2 CN55- 6 PS 1_5V CN108-1 sensor
CN138-1 CN203-B5 CN203-B14 CN57-A19 M25_DRV
Intermediate roller
open close motor M25 CN138-2 -1 CN203-B6 CN203-B13 CN214-3 CN214-1
CN57-A20 M25_24V CN55- 7 PS30_S.GND CN116-3
CN55- 8 PS30_SIG CN214-2 CN214-2 CN116-2
tray paper full
CN55- 9 PS30_5V CN214-1 CN214-3 CN116-1
PS30 Sub
sensor
CN139-1 -6 CN203-B7 CN203-B12 CN57-B 1 M26_24V
CN139-2 -5 CN203-B8 CN203-B11 CN57-B 2 M26_24V
CN139-3 -4 CN203-B9 CN203-B10 CN57-B 3 M26_DRV_A CN217-3 CN217-1
Rear stopper motor CN139-4 -3 CN203-B10 CN203-B9 CN55-10 PS 5_S.GND CN112-3
M26 CN57-B 4 M26_DRV_A/ CN55-11 PS 5_SIG CN217-2 CN217-2 CN112-2
Stacker entrance
CN139-5 -2 CN203-B11 CN203-B8 CN57-B 5 M26_DRV_B CN217-1 CN217-3 PS5 sensor
CN139-6 -1 CN203-B12 CN203-B7 CN55-12 PS 5_5V CN112-1
CN57-B 6 M26_DRV_B/
CN55-13 PS12_S.GND CN213-3 CN114-3

CN146-1 -6 CN203-B13 CN203-B6 CN57-B 7 M 2_24V CN213-2 exit opening
CN146-2 -5 CN203-B14 CN203-B5 CN55-14 PS12_SIG CN114-2 PS12 Paper
CN57-B 8 M 2_24V CN55-15 PS12_5V CN213-1 CN114-1 sensor
CN146-3 -4 CN203-B15 CN203-B4 CN57-B 9 M 2_DRV_B/
Paddle motor M2 CN146-4 -3 CN203-B16 CN203-B3 CN57-B10 M 2_DRV_A/
CN146-5 -2 CN203-B17 CN203-B2 CN57-B11 M 2_DRV_B
CN146-6 -1 CN203-B18 CN203-B1 CN57-B12 M 2_DRV_A
CN71-1 5V CN370-6 5V
CN135-1 -6 CN208-1 CN208-8 CN71-2 LED5 CN370-5 LED5
CN57-B13 M11_24V CN71-3 LED6 CN370-4 LED6
CN135-2 -5 CN208-2 CN208-7 Jam indication board
CN57-B14 M11_24V CN71-4 LED7 CN370-3 LED7 JAMIB
CN135-3 -4 CN208-3 CN208-6
Stapler movement CN57-B15 M11_DRV_A CN71-5 LED8 CN370-2 LED8
M11 CN135-4 -3 CN208-4 CN208-5
motor CN57-B16 M11_DRV_A/ CN71-6 NC CN370-1 NC
CN135-5 -2 CN208-5 CN208-4
CN57-B17 M11_DRV_B
CN135-6 -1 CN208-6 CN208-3
CN57-B18 M11_DRV_B/
6
6
CN141-1 -2 CN210-1 CN210-2 CN208-7 CN208-2 CN57-B19 M 4_24V

Stapler rotation
M4 CN210-1 CN750-A
1
motor CN141-2 -1 CN210-2 CN208-8 CN208-1 CN57-B20 M 4_DRV CN20-1 5V

CN751-A
2
CN20-2 5V
CN750-B
3
CN140-1 -2 CN201-1 CN201-8 CN56-A 1 SD7_24V CN20-3 S.GND

Intermediate roller
SD7 CN751-B
4
release solenoid CN140-2 -1 CN201-2 CN201-7 CN56-A 2 SD7_DRV CN65-1 STP_HP_SIG CN10- 3 CN20-4 S.GND
CN65-2 PS8_SIG CN10- 2
CN65-3 PS31_SIG CN10- 1
CN142-3 CN201-3 CN201-6 CN56-A 3 M13_24V CN19-1 NC
CN142-9 CN201-4 CN201-5 CN56-A 4 M13_24V CN66-1 M13_VREF CN19-2 NC
CN142-1 CN201-5 CN201-4 CN56-A 5 M13_DRV_A CN66-2 NC CN19-3 FNS2_SIN CN757-2 SIN
Stacker entrance motor M13 CN142-5 CN201-6 CN201-3 CN56-A 6 M13_DRV_A/ CN19-4 FNS2_RTS CN757-1 RTS
CN142-7 CN201-7 CN201-2 CN56-A 7 M13_DRV_B CN62- 1 M8_A CN3-16
CN142-11 CN201-8 CN201-1 CN56-A 8 M13_DRV_B/ CN62- 2 M8_A/ CN3-15
CN56-A 9 NC CN62- 3 M8_B CN3-14
CN56-A10 NC CN62- 4 M8_B/ CN3-13 CN16-1 SYS_SIN CN756-1 MTXD
CN56-A11 NC CN62- 5 M24_A CN3-12 CN16-2 S.GND CN756-2 S.GND
CN143-11 CN56-B 1 M23_24V CN62- 6 M24_A/ CN3-11 CN16-3 SYS_RTS CN756-3 MCTS
CN143-10 CN56-B 2 M23_24V CN62- 7 M24_B CN3-10 CN16-4 SYS_SOUT CN756-4 MRXD
CN143-9 CN56-B 3 M23_P.GND CN62- 8 M24_B/ CN3- 9 CN16-5 S.GND CN756-5 S.GND
CN143-8 CN56-B 4 M23_P.GND CN62- 9 M26_A CN3- 8 CN16-6 SYS_CTS CN756-6 MRTS
CN143-7 CN56-B 5 M23_H/L CN62-10 M26_A/ CN3- 7
Paper exit arm motor M23 CN143-6 CN56-B 6 M23_LD_SIG CN62-11 M26_B CN3- 6 CN16-7 PAPEROUT_1 CN752-1
7
7
CN143-5 CN56-B 7 M23_F/R CN62-12 M26_B/ CN3- 5

CN143-4 CN56-B 8 M23_CLK CN62-13 M11_A CN3- 4 CN750-B
3
CN752-2 S.GND
CN143-3 CN56-B 9 M23_CONT CN62-14 M11_A/ CN3- 3
CN143-2 CN56-B10 M23_S.GND CN62-15 M11_B CN3- 2 CN750-B
3
CN752-3 S.GND
CN143-1 CN56-B11 M23_5V CN62-16 M11_B/ CN3- 1
CN750-A
1
CN752-4 5V
CN64- 1 NC CN14-18
CN64- 2 NC CN14-17 CN750-A
1
CN752-5 5V
CN755-1 CN64- 3 NC CN14-16
CN64- 4 NC CN14-15
CN29-2 CN29-2 CN64- 5 NC CN14-14
Door switch MS1 CN29-1 CN29-1 CN70-1 24V CN64- 6 NC CN14-13
CN64- 7 M1_CLK CN14-12
CN751-A CN750-A
2
1
CN755-2 CN70-2 5V CN64- 8 M7_CLK CN14-11

CN751-B CN751-A
4
2
CN755-3 CN70-3 5V CN64- 9 NC CN14-10

CN70-4 F.GND CN64-10 NC CN14- 9
CN755-4 CN70-5 P.GND CN64-11 M3_CLK CN14- 8
CN755-5 CN70-6 P.GND CN64-12 M23_CLK CN14- 7
CN750-B
3
CN70-7 S.GND CN64-13 M22_CLK CN14- 6

CN751-B
4
CN755-6 CN70-8 S.GND CN64-14 M5_CLK CN14- 5

CN64-15 NC CN14- 4
CN64-16 NC CN14- 3
CN64-17 NC CN14- 2
CN64-18 M13_CLK CN14- 1
8
8
CN63-B16 M23_LD_SIG
CN63-B15 M3_LD_SIG
CN63-B14 M7_LD_SIG
CN63-B13 M1_LD_SIG
CN63-B12 F_READY_SIG
CN63-B11 F_CD_SIG
CN63-B10 F_LS_SIG
CN63-B 9 F_HP_SIG
CN63-B 8 R_READY_SIG
CN63-B 7 R_CD_SIG
CN63-B 6 R_LS_SIG
CN63-B 5 R_HP_SIG
CN63-B 4 NC
CN63-B 3 PS20_SIG
CN63-B 2 PS9_SIG
CN63-B 1 24VDEC
CN63-A16 PS35_SIG
CN63-A15 PS33_SIG
CN63-A14 PS32_SIG
CN63-A13 PS14_SIG
CN63-A12 PS11_SIG
CN63-A11 PS34_SIG
CN63-A10 PS30_SIG
CN63-A 9 PS1_SIG
CN63-A 8 PS5_SIG
CN63-A 7 PS4_SIG
CN63-A 6 PS15_SIG
CN63-A 5 PS12_SIG
CN63-A 4 PS10_SIG
CN63-A 3 PS3_SIG
CN63-A 2 PS7_SIG
CN63-A 1 PS2_SIG
CN61-B20 M5_VREF
CN61-B19 M5_EN
CN61-B18 M5_F/R
CN61-B17 M22_VREF
CN61-B16 M22_EN
CN61-B15 M22_F/R
CN61-B14 LED6
CN61-B13 M13_EN
CN61-B12 LED7
CN61-B11 M2_B/
CN61-B10 M2_B
CN61-B 9 M2_A/
CN61-B 8 M2_A
CN61-B 7 LED8
CN61-B 6 M23_CONT
CN61-B 5 M23_F/R
CN61-B 4 M23_H/L
CN61-B 3 M25_CONT
CN61-B 2 SD7_CONT
CN61-B 1 M4_CONT
CN61-A20 STA_F_F/R
CN61-A19 STA_F_CONT
CN61-A18 STA_R_F/R
CN61-A17 STA_R_CONT
CN61-A16 SD9_CONT
CN61-A15 M6_B/
CN61-A14 SD5_CONT
CN61-A13 SD2_CONT
CN61-A12 M6_B
CN61-A11 M6_A/
CN61-A10 M6_A
CN61-A 9 M3_CONT
CN61-A 8 M3_F/R
CN61-A 7 LED5
CN61-A 6 M7_CONT
CN61-A 5 M7_F/R
CN61-A 4 M7_H/L
CN61-A 3 M1_CONT
CN61-A 2 M1_F/R
CN61-A 1 M1_H/L
FNSCB
Crimp
Symbol
CN 1-B 1
CN 1-B 2
CN 1-B 3
CN 1-B 4
CN 1-B 5
CN 1-B 6
CN 1-B 7
CN 1-B 8
CN 1-B 9
CN 1-A 1
CN 1-A 2
CN 1-A 3
CN 1-A 4
CN 1-A 5
CN 1-A 6
CN 1-A 7
CN 1-A 8
CN 1-A 9
CN 2-B 1
CN 2-B 2
CN 2-B 3
CN 2-B 4
CN 2-B 5
CN 2-B 6
CN 2-B 7
CN 2-B 8
CN 2-B 9
CN 2-A 1
CN 2-A 2
CN 2-A 3
CN 2-A 4
CN 2-A 5
CN 2-A 6
CN 2-A 7
CN 2-A 8
CN 2-A 9
CN 1-B10
CN 1-B11
CN 1-B12
CN 1-B13
CN 1-B14
CN 1-B15
CN 1-B16
CN 1-A10
CN 1-A11
CN 1-A12
CN 1-A13
CN 1-A14
CN 1-A15
CN 1-A16
CN 2-B10
CN 2-B11
CN 2-B12
CN 2-B13
CN 2-B14
CN 2-B15
CN 2-B16
CN 2-B17
CN 2-B18
CN 2-B19
CN 2-B20
CN 2-A10
CN 2-A11
CN 2-A12
CN 2-A13
CN 2-A14
CN 2-A15
CN 2-A16
CN 2-A17
CN 2-A18
CN 2-A19
CN 2-A20
Connector
9
9
Relay connector
Faston
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

1050e/1050eP
FS-503 location list

/1050e/1050eP

FNSCB FNS control board 6-B PS8 Alignment home sensor /Rr 3-H
FNSDB FNS drive board 1-C PS9 Paper exit arm home sensor 4-H
JAMIB Jam indication board 6-A PS10 Main tray paper exit sensor 5-A
M1 Conveyance motor 1-A PS11 Stapler movement home sensor 2-H
M2 Paddle motor 6-H PS12 Paper exit opening sensor 5-A
M3 Tray up down motor 2-A PS14 Stapler rotation home sensor 3-H
M4 Stapler rotation motor 6-H PS15 Counter reset sensor 4-A
M5 Alignment motor /Rr 4-H PS20 Stacker empty sensor 4-H
M6 Sub tray exit motor 3-B PS30 Sub tray paper full sensor 5-A
M7 Main tray exit motor 3-A PS31 Alignment home sensor /Fr 4-H
M8 Paper exit opening motor 3-B PS32 Stack assist home sensor 3-H
M11 Stapler movement motor 6-H PS33 Intermediate roller home sensor 3-H
M13 Stacker entrance motor 6-H PS34 Staple scraps box set sensor 3-H
M30 Stapler motor /Rr Inside the stapler unit /Rr PS35 Rear stopper home sensor 3-H
M31 Stapler motor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr PS40 Stapler home sensor /Rr Inside the stapler unit /Rr
M22 Alignment motor /Fr 4-H PS41 Stapler home sensor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr
M23 Paper exit arm motor 7-H PS42 Cartridge set sensor /Rr Inside the stapler unit /Rr
M24 Stack assist guide motor 5-H PS43 Cartridge set sensor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr
M25 Intermediate roller open close motor 5-H PS44 Staple empty sensor /Rr Inside the stapler unit /Rr
M26 Rear stopper motor 5-H PS45 Staple empty sensor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr
MS1 Door switch 7-H PS46 Stapler ready sensor /Rr Inside the stapler unit /Rr
PS1 Sub tray paper exit sensor 5-A PS47 Stapler ready sensor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr
PS2 Tray upper limit sensor 4-A SD2 Gate solenoid 2-B
PS3 Tray lower limit sensor 4-A SD5 Bypass solenoid 2-B
PS4 FNS entrance sensor 5-A SD7 Intermediate roller release solenoid 6-H
PS5 Stacker entrance sensor 5-A SD9 Paper exit opening solenoid 4-B
PS7 Staple exit upper limit sensor 4-A STB Stapler board
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C

Bizhub PRO 1050-P-e-eP - SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub PRO 1050-P-e-eP - SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P/1050e/1050eP

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

:Precaution when using the copier.

:Prohibition when using the copier.

:Direction when using the copier.

1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT

• Using parts not specified by KMBT

2. POWER PLUG SELECTION

Power Cord Set or Power Plug

• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:

3. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Connection to Power Supply

• Check that mains voltage is as specified.

• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

Power Plug and Cord

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Prohibited Installation Place

When not using product for a long time

Inspection before Servicing

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

Work Performed with the product Powered

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

Handling of Service Materials

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

For metric area:

This product employs a Class

This area generates high votage. Be

For inch area:

This product employs a Class

This area generates high votage. Be

This product employs a Class

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF

This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:

<Theory of Operation section>

<Field service section>

3. Electrical parts and signals

Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description

4. Paper feed direction

Paper size Feed direction Notation

Revision due to the addition of a new optional unit (PB)

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P

9.3.3 Erase lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P

22.2 Operation flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

23. IMAGE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P

[1] Main body [9] Expanded memory: 256 MB (EM-701) for

[4] Flat stapling finisher (FS-503) [11] Hand cart (LC-501)

*1 In the case of the 1050P, no scanner/DF function is provided.

B. Option coupling formation

10 Main body LS-501 LS-502 External (LS-501)